Cambium Wireless Manager User Guide

System Release 4.0

Issue 4 August 2012 2012 Cambium Networks. All Rights Reserved.

Accuracy

Whilereasonableeffortshavebeenmadetoassuretheaccuracyofthisdocument,CambiumNetworksassumes noliabilityresultingfromanyinaccuraciesoromissionsinthisdocument,orfromuseoftheinformationobtained herein.Cambiumreservestherighttomakechangestoanyproductsdescribedhereintoimprovereliability, function,ordesign,andreservestherighttorevisethisdocumentandtomakechangesfromtimetotimein contenthereofwithnoobligationtonotifyanypersonofrevisionsorchanges.Cambiumdoesnotassumeany liabilityarisingoutoftheapplicationoruseofanyproduct,software,orcircuitdescribedherein;neitherdoesit conveylicenseunderitspatentrightsortherightsofothers.Itispossiblethatthispublicationmaycontain referencesto,orinformationaboutCambiumproducts(machinesandprograms),programming,orservicesthat arenotannouncedinyourcountry.SuchreferencesorinformationmustnotbeconstruedtomeanthatCambium intendstoannouncesuchCambiumproducts,programming,orservicesinyourcountry.
Copyrights

Thisdocument,Cambiumproducts,and3rdPartySoftwareproductsdescribedinthisdocumentmayincludeor describecopyrightedCambiumandother3rdPartysuppliedcomputerprogramsstoredinsemiconductor memoriesorothermedia.LawsintheUnitedStatesandothercountriespreserveforCambium,itslicensors,and other3rdPartysuppliedsoftwarecertainexclusiverightsforcopyrightedmaterial,includingtheexclusiverightto copy,reproduceinanyform,distributeandmakederivativeworksofthecopyrightedmaterial.Accordingly,any copyrightedmaterialofCambium,itslicensors,orthe3rdPartysoftwaresuppliedmaterialcontainedinthe Cambiumproductsdescribedinthisdocumentmaynotbecopied,reproduced,reverseengineered,distributed, mergedormodifiedinanymannerwithouttheexpresswrittenpermissionofCambium.Furthermore,the purchaseofCambiumproductsshallnotbedeemedtogranteitherdirectlyorbyimplication,estoppel,or otherwise,anylicenseunderthecopyrights,patentsorpatentapplicationsofCambiumorother3rdPartysupplied software,exceptforthenormalnonexclusive,royaltyfreelicensetousethatarisesbyoperationoflawinthesale ofaproduct.
Restrictions

Softwareanddocumentationarecopyrightedmaterials.Makingunauthorizedcopiesisprohibitedbylaw.Nopart ofthesoftwareordocumentationmaybereproduced,transmitted,transcribed,storedinaretrievalsystem,or translatedintoanylanguageorcomputerlanguage,inanyformorbyanymeans,withoutpriorwrittenpermission ofCambium.

License Agreements

ThesoftwaredescribedinthisdocumentisthepropertyofCambiumanditslicensors.Itisfurnishedbyexpress licenseagreementonlyandmaybeusedonlyinaccordancewiththetermsofsuchanagreement.SeeLegal NoticesandLicenseAgreementsonPage717. 2012CambiumNetworks,Inc.AllRightsReserved.

Table of Contents
Accuracy...................................................................................................................................... 2 Copyrights ................................................................................................................................... 2 Restrictions ................................................................................................................................. 2 LicenseAgreements.................................................................................................................... 2

About This User Guide ..................................................................................45

1.1 1.2 1.3 1.4 1.5 1.6 1.7 NewinThisIssue........................................................................................................... 45 ContinuingFeatures...................................................................................................... 46 FeaturesNewinRelease4.0......................................................................................... 46 Clarifications ................................................................................................................. 48 ReferencestoOtherWMDocuments .......................................................................... 48 LinkstoOtherImportantDocuments........................................................................... 49 FeedbackonThisGuide ................................................................................................ 50

Supported Device Types ................................................................................51

2.1 2.2 2.3 CambiumNetworksDeviceTypes ................................................................................ 51 GenericElements(NonCambiumDevices).................................................................. 53 SubordinateWMServers.............................................................................................. 55

Launching the Client ......................................................................................63

3.1 3.2 3.3 3.4
3.4.1 3.4.2 3.4.3

Dependencies ............................................................................................................... 63 CorporateNetworks ..................................................................................................... 63 LaunchProcedures........................................................................................................ 64 ConfiguringtheProxyontheWMClient...................................................................... 67

SettingProxyInformationintheJavaControlPanel ............................................................ 68 SettingProxyInformationintheWebBrowser .................................................................... 70 Troubleshootingan"Unabletolaunchtheapplication"Error ............................................. 71

3.5 3.6

ConfiguringYourPassword........................................................................................... 74 TroubleshootinganUnsuccessfulLogin ....................................................................... 75

Using the Client Window................................................................................77

4.1 4.2 4.3 4.4 4.5 UsingtheToolbar.......................................................................................................... 77 UsingtheAlarmSummaryViews.................................................................................. 79 UsingtheStatusBar...................................................................................................... 80 UsingtheDisplayPanel................................................................................................. 80 UsingtheMenuBar ...................................................................................................... 81

4.6
4.6.1 4.6.2 4.6.3

UsingtheHelpMenu .................................................................................................... 82
AboutWirelessManager....................................................................................................... 82 HelpContents........................................................................................................................ 87 Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................ 88

4.7
4.7.1 4.7.2 4.7.3 4.7.4

ManagingClientWindows............................................................................................ 88
NavigatingthroughActiveWindows..................................................................................... 88 DetachingaWindowfromtheClient.................................................................................... 88 SavingLocationandSizeofWindows ................................................................................... 89 ClosingAllOpenWindows .................................................................................................... 89

4.8
4.8.1 4.8.2 4.8.3

UsingtheApplicationsTree .......................................................................................... 89
CustomViews ........................................................................................................................ 92 FrameOperations.................................................................................................................. 94 AdministrationTools ............................................................................................................. 94

4.9 4.10

UsingtheSearchUtility................................................................................................. 94 PerformingTableViewOperations ............................................................................ 104

NavigatingThroughaTable ............................................................................................ 105 SettingthePageLengthforaTable................................................................................ 106 RefreshingthePageView ............................................................................................... 106 ViewingaRangeofTableDetails.................................................................................... 106 SortingTableDetails ....................................................................................................... 106 RearrangingandResizingColumnsinaTable ................................................................ 107 ViewingRowDetails ....................................................................................................... 107

4.10.1 4.10.2 4.10.3 4.10.4 4.10.5 4.10.6 4.10.7

4.11 4.12

ImportingDataFilesIntoWM .................................................................................... 107 ExportingDataFilesFromWM................................................................................... 110

ExportingDeviceDiscoveryInformation ........................................................................ 111 ExportingUserAccountInformation .............................................................................. 113 ExportingNetworkHierarchyInformation ..................................................................... 115

4.12.1 4.12.2 4.12.3

4.13

RecoveringfromaLostConnectiontotheServer...................................................... 116

Monitoring the System Dashboard.................................................................117

5.1 5.2 5.3
5.3.1 5.3.2

DashboardRefreshes.................................................................................................. 117 DashboardDisplayOptions ........................................................................................ 118 StrategicUseoftheDashboard .................................................................................. 120

ClickthroughsFromtheDashboard ................................................................................... 121 SortableTableDisplays ....................................................................................................... 122

Using an Inventory View ...............................................................................123

6.1 InventoryViewEditMenuOptions ............................................................................ 125

6.1.1 6.1.2 6.1.3 6.1.4

DeleteObjectandTraces .................................................................................................... 125 ClearAlarms ........................................................................................................................ 125 DeleteAlarms ...................................................................................................................... 125 Search.................................................................................................................................. 125

6.2 6.3 6.4 6.5

6.5.1 6.5.2 6.5.3 6.5.4

InventoryCustomViews............................................................................................. 128 TopologyDataExports................................................................................................ 138 OperationsonaDevice............................................................................................... 139 OperationsonaNetwork ........................................................................................... 144

Start/StopDiscovery ........................................................................................................... 144 StatusUpdatefortheNetwork ........................................................................................... 145 DeleteObjectandTracesoftheNetwork........................................................................... 145 CredentialManagerfortheNetwork.................................................................................. 145

Using the Physical Map ................................................................................147

7.1 7.2 7.3
7.3.1 7.3.2

ImportingtheGeolocations....................................................................................... 147 ImportingAddresses................................................................................................... 150 DisplayingthePhysicalMap ....................................................................................... 152

AvailableFormatsforOnlineMaps..................................................................................... 153 FormatofOfflineMaps ....................................................................................................... 153

7.4 7.5 7.6 7.7 7.8 7.9

7.9.1 7.9.2 7.9.3 7.9.4 7.9.5

GeneratingaPhysicalMapViewofanElementSelectedintheInventoryView ...... 156 ViewingCollocatedandProximalElements ............................................................... 157 Panning ....................................................................................................................... 161 JumpingtoaDifferentPositioninaPhysicalMap ..................................................... 162 RefreshingaPhysicalMap .......................................................................................... 162 SettingPhysicalMapOptions ..................................................................................... 163
SelectingLinks,Coverage,andStandardsTypestoDisplayonaMapType ....................... 163 UsingtheRSSIAutoThresholdFeature .............................................................................. 171 FilteringtheIconstoDisplaybyCurrentAlarmLevel ......................................................... 171 SettingWhetherElementsAppearBasedonZoom............................................................ 172 UsingorHidingOtherPhysicalMapOverlays..................................................................... 173

7.10

ViewingDetailsinthePhysicalMap ........................................................................... 176

AccessingDataforaDeviceinthePhysicalMap............................................................ 176 AccessingtheGeolocationofaSelectedPointorDeviceinthePhysicalMap .............. 181 AccessingtheStreetViewofaSelectedPointorDeviceinthePhysicalMap ............... 182 AccessingaPhysicalMapDeviceinOtherManagementViews..................................... 183

7.10.1 7.10.2 7.10.3 7.10.4

7.11 7.12

ImportingaBroadbandPlannerPrediction................................................................. 184 ChangingtheGeolocationforaDevice ...................................................................... 184

7.13 7.14 7.15 7.16 7.17 7.18

CheckingtheLogofaPhysicalMap............................................................................ 186 ExportingaMap.......................................................................................................... 186 ExportingDevicestoBroadbandPlanner .................................................................... 192 ExportingtheNetworkintoXML ................................................................................ 193 ExportingLocationsforUseinaChildWM ................................................................ 194 NoticesRegardingPhysicalMaps ............................................................................... 194

Viewing Information About a Specific Device ..................................................197

8.1
8.1.1 8.1.2

UpdatingtheStatusofaDeviceoraNetwork ........................................................... 197

UpdatingStatusonDemand ............................................................................................... 197 AdjustingtheStatusPollingIntervals.................................................................................. 197

8.2 8.3 8.4 8.5 8.6 8.7

8.7.1 8.7.2 8.7.3

ViewingBasicProperties............................................................................................. 200 ViewingComponentProperties.................................................................................. 202 ViewingEventsforaDevice........................................................................................ 203 ViewingAlarmsforaDevice ....................................................................................... 204 ViewingPerformanceDataforaDevice..................................................................... 205 ViewingtheDashboardforaDevice .......................................................................... 206
ExamplesofNetworkElementDashboards ........................................................................ 206 FeaturesofNetworkElementDashboards ......................................................................... 221 InteractiveComponentsofNetworkElementDashboards ................................................ 223

8.8
8.8.1 8.8.2 8.8.3 8.8.4

ViewingaDeviceSummaryReport............................................................................. 225
RunningaDeviceSummaryReportonDemand ................................................................. 225 RunningaDeviceSummaryReportonaSchedule ............................................................. 228 SavingaDeviceSummaryReport........................................................................................ 228 DeletingaDeviceSummaryReport .................................................................................... 229

8.9

FindingtheCustomerAssignedtotheDevice............................................................ 229

Performing Other Operations on Devices .......................................................231

9.1 9.2 9.3 9.4 9.5 9.6 9.7
9.7.1 9.7.2

KeepingDeviceIdentifiersUnique ............................................................................. 231 ManagingorUnmanagingaDevice............................................................................ 231 PingingaDevice .......................................................................................................... 232 DroppingaSubscriberSession.................................................................................... 234 CheckingRelationshipsPresumedBasedOnGeolocations ...................................... 234 RemovingaRelationship ............................................................................................ 235 AddingRelationshipsAmongDevices......................................................................... 236
DefiningaLargerExtendedFamily...................................................................................... 236 AddingaSingleRelationship ............................................................................................... 237

9.8
9.8.1 9.8.2

ImportingaCustomerContactDatabase ................................................................... 240

PreparingtheCustomerContactDataforImport .............................................................. 240 ImportingCustomerContactData ...................................................................................... 242

9.9 9.10 9.11 9.12 9.13 9.14 9.15 9.16

AssigningaCustomertoaDevice............................................................................... 244 EditingorRemovingaCustomerRecord.................................................................... 248 SendinganEmailNotificationtoaCustomer............................................................. 249 RefreshingDeviceData............................................................................................... 250 SettingWMCredentialsforaGroupofSelectedDevices .......................................... 250 ConfiguringaDevice ................................................................................................... 252 SyncingtheSNMPStringinWMwiththeSNMPStringinaDevice........................... 252 UsingtheLinkCapacityTestUtility ............................................................................ 252
LaunchingaLinkCapacityTest ....................................................................................... 252 InterpretingLinkCapacityTestResults........................................................................... 255 ErrorsintheLinkCapacityTestFeature ......................................................................... 256 LaunchingSpectrumAnalyzer......................................................................................... 256 InterpretingSpectrumAnalyzerResults ......................................................................... 258 ErrorsintheSpectrumAnalyzerFeature........................................................................ 259

9.16.1 9.16.2 9.16.3

9.17

UsingtheSpectrumAnalyzerUtility........................................................................... 256

9.17.1 9.17.2 9.17.3

9.18 9.19 9.20

AccessingtheWebInterfaceofaDevice ................................................................... 259 DeletinganObjectandTraces.................................................................................... 263 UsingtheBandwidthandAuthenticationManager(BAM)Subsystem ..................... 264

ManagingAuthentication ............................................................................................... 266 ManagingBandwidth...................................................................................................... 268 ManagingVLANs ............................................................................................................. 276

9.20.1 9.20.2 9.20.3

9.21 9.22 9.23

RunningaUserdefinedScript .................................................................................... 284 UploadingRADIUSAAACertificates ........................................................................... 286 UpgradingDevicesOnDemand.................................................................................. 289

LaunchingtheSoftwareUpgradeInterface.................................................................... 289 ConfiguringthePMP/PTPSoftwareUpgrade ................................................................. 290 LaunchingtheOnDemandSoftwareUpgrade............................................................... 299 ReviewingtheRelevantPostUpgradeInformationAbouttheDevice(s) ...................... 299 ResettingLocationAttributesforPTP300andPTP500Devices ................................... 299

9.23.1 9.23.2 9.23.3 9.23.4 9.23.5

10
10.1 10.2 10.3

Creating and Using Device Groups.............................................................301

CreatingaDynamicDeviceGroup .............................................................................. 307 ModifyingaDynamicDeviceGroup ........................................................................... 310 CreatingaStaticDeviceGroup ................................................................................... 311

10.4 10.5 10.6 10.7 10.8

AddingDevicestoaStaticDeviceGroup.................................................................... 316 RemovingDevicesfromaStaticDeviceGroup .......................................................... 317 AddingorRemovingColumnsinaDeviceGroupWindow ........................................ 319 UsingaDeviceGroup.................................................................................................. 320 RemovingaDeviceGroup........................................................................................... 321

11
11.1

Obtaining Device Configuration Information ................................................323

AdjustingConfigurationPollingIntervals ................................................................... 323
DisablingConfigurationPolling....................................................................................... 323 SettingIntervalsforaSmallNetwork ............................................................................. 323 ImportingConfigurationReportTemplates.................................................................... 326 AccessingaPredefinedReportonConfiguredValues.................................................... 327 CreatingaConfigurationReport..................................................................................... 328 RunningaConfigurationReport ..................................................................................... 333 FindingaConfigurationReportTemplate ...................................................................... 336 EditingaConfigurationReportTemplate ....................................................................... 337 ExportingaConfigurationReportTemplate................................................................... 339 ExportingAllConfigurationReportTemplates ............................................................... 339 DeletingaConfigurationReport ..................................................................................... 339 UsingaConfigurationSummaryReportasPreconfigured ............................................. 344 CustomizingaConfigurationSummaryReport .............................................................. 345 11.1.1 11.1.2

11.2

CreatingandUsingDeviceConfigurationReports ..................................................... 325

11.2.1 11.2.2 11.2.3 11.2.4 11.2.5 11.2.6 11.2.7 11.2.8 11.2.9

11.3

UsingConfigurationSummaryReports ...................................................................... 341

11.3.1 11.3.2

12
12.1

Monitoring Faults .....................................................................................347

WorkingwithEvents................................................................................................... 347
ViewingAllEventsforaSpecificDevice ......................................................................... 348 ViewingAllEventsintheSystem .................................................................................... 349 InterpretingEventMessages .......................................................................................... 350 ViewingEventDetails ..................................................................................................... 352 FindinganEvent.............................................................................................................. 355 ViewingRelatedAlarms .................................................................................................. 356 ViewingAllEventsRelatedtoDiscovery......................................................................... 356 DefininganEventsCustomView .................................................................................... 358 ExportingEventstoaCSVFile ........................................................................................ 364 PrintingEvents ................................................................................................................ 365 ViewingAllAlarmsforaSpecificDevice ......................................................................... 366 ViewingAllAlarmsintheSystem ................................................................................... 367 12.1.1 12.1.2 12.1.3 12.1.4 12.1.5 12.1.6 12.1.7 12.1.8 12.1.9 12.1.10

12.2

HandlingAlarms.......................................................................................................... 366

12.2.1 12.2.2

12.2.3 12.2.4 12.2.5 12.2.6 12.2.7 12.2.8 12.2.9 12.2.10 12.2.11 12.2.12 12.2.13 12.2.14 12.2.15

ViewingAlarmDetails ..................................................................................................... 368 SearchingAlarms ............................................................................................................ 370 ViewingRelatedEvents................................................................................................... 370 PickingUp/UnpickinganAlarm..................................................................................... 370 AddingCommentstoanAlarm....................................................................................... 372 ViewingAlarmHistory .................................................................................................... 373 ViewingBothAnnotationandHistoryofanAlarm ........................................................ 373 DefininganAlarmsCustomView.................................................................................... 374 SavingAlarms.................................................................................................................. 378 ExportingAlarms............................................................................................................. 379 PrintingAlarms................................................................................................................ 379 ClearinganAlarm............................................................................................................ 379 DeletinganAlarm ........................................................................................................... 379

13
13.1 13.2 13.3

Monitoring Performance ...........................................................................381

AdjustingthePerformancePollingIntervals .............................................................. 381 ListofAvailablePerformanceStatistics(ConfiguredCollection) ............................... 384 PerformanceDataViewingAlternatives .................................................................... 386
ViewingaCurrentPerformanceStatistic........................................................................ 387 ViewingaCollectedPerformanceStatistic ..................................................................... 388 ImportingSystemReports .............................................................................................. 398 UsingaSystemReportAsPreconfigured ....................................................................... 398 CustomizingaSystemReport ......................................................................................... 399

13.3.1 13.3.2

13.4

UsingSystemReports ................................................................................................. 390

13.4.1 13.4.2 13.4.3

13.5

LaunchinganOperatordefinedReport...................................................................... 399

14
14.1 14.2

Administering Discovery ...........................................................................401

ImportingDeviceDiscoveryInformation.................................................................... 401 UsingtheDiscoveryConfigurator............................................................................... 402
OpeningtheDiscoveryConfigurator .............................................................................. 403 DiscoveringMixedNetworks .......................................................................................... 404 ConfiguringGeneralAutomaticDiscovery...................................................................... 404 ConfiguringCriteriabasedAutomaticDiscovery............................................................ 430 ClosingtheDiscoveryConfigurator ................................................................................ 434

14.2.1 14.2.2 14.2.3 14.2.4 14.2.5

14.3 14.4 14.5

ConfiguringManualDiscovery.................................................................................... 434 StagesofDiscovery ..................................................................................................... 434 ViewingtheDiscoveryLog .......................................................................................... 435

15
15.1 15.2

Administering Wireless Manager Security ....................................................437

ImportingUserAccountInformation ......................................................................... 439 ManagingUsers .......................................................................................................... 440
LimitingaUsertoReadOnly .......................................................................................... 440 AddingaUser.................................................................................................................. 441 ChangingaUserProfile................................................................................................... 447 AssigningGroupstoaUser ............................................................................................. 449 ChangingaUserPassword.............................................................................................. 450 DeletingaUser................................................................................................................ 451 UsingAuditTrails ............................................................................................................ 452 AddingGroups ................................................................................................................ 458 AssigningUserstoGroups .............................................................................................. 460 DeletingUsersfromGroups ........................................................................................... 461 UsingCustomViewScopes ............................................................................................. 461 DeletingaGroup............................................................................................................. 468 DefaultOperations.......................................................................................................... 470 Configuration .................................................................................................................. 471 Events.............................................................................................................................. 472 Policy............................................................................................................................... 472 PollFilters........................................................................................................................ 473 PollingObject.................................................................................................................. 473 PollingUnits .................................................................................................................... 474 Provisioning..................................................................................................................... 474 AdministrativeOperation ............................................................................................... 475 Reports............................................................................................................................ 479 ThresholdObject............................................................................................................. 479 Topology ......................................................................................................................... 480 TrapParsersandFilters .................................................................................................. 481 Alerts............................................................................................................................... 481 TaskSchedulerOperation............................................................................................... 483 DeviceTools .................................................................................................................... 483 UltralightClientSupport ................................................................................................. 483 AssigningPermittedOperationsforaGroup.................................................................. 484 AssigningPermittedOperationsforaUser .................................................................... 486

15.2.1 15.2.2 15.2.3 15.2.4 15.2.5 15.2.6 15.2.7

15.3

ManagingGroups........................................................................................................ 457

15.3.1 15.3.2 15.3.3 15.3.4 15.3.5

15.4

ManagingOperations ................................................................................................. 469

15.4.1 15.4.2 15.4.3 15.4.4 15.4.5 15.4.6 15.4.7 15.4.8 15.4.9 15.4.10 15.4.11 15.4.12 15.4.13 15.4.14 15.4.15 15.4.16 15.4.17

15.5

AssigningOperations .................................................................................................. 484

15.5.1 15.5.2

15.6

AddingOperations ...................................................................................................... 486

15.7

DeletingOperations.................................................................................................... 488

16
16.1

Administering Fault Management ...............................................................491

AdministeringTrapParsers......................................................................................... 491
OpeningtheTrapParserConfigurationTool.................................................................. 492 AddingaTrapParser....................................................................................................... 493 ReorderingtheConfiguredTrapParserList ................................................................... 499 ViewingTrapParserDetails ............................................................................................ 499 ModifyingTrapParsers ................................................................................................... 500 DeletingaTrapParser..................................................................................................... 501 OpeningtheEventParserConfigurationTool ................................................................ 502 AddinganEventParser................................................................................................... 502 ReorderingtheConfiguredEventParserList.................................................................. 507 LoadinganEventParserfromaParserFile .................................................................... 508 ModifyinganEventParser.............................................................................................. 508 SavinganEventParser.................................................................................................... 510 DeletinganEventParser................................................................................................. 510 OpeningtheEventFilterConfigurationTool .................................................................. 512 AddinganEventFilter..................................................................................................... 512 ReorderingtheEventFilterConfigurationList ............................................................... 524 LoadinganEventFilter ................................................................................................... 524 ModifyinganEventFilter................................................................................................ 525 DeletinganEventFilter................................................................................................... 526 OpeningtheAlarmFilterConfigurationTool ................................................................. 527 AddinganAlarmFilter .................................................................................................... 528 ReorderingtheAlarmFilterConfigurationList............................................................... 533 LoadinganAlarmFilter................................................................................................... 534 ModifyinganAlarmFilter ............................................................................................... 534 DeletinganAlarmFilter .................................................................................................. 535 DeletinganAlarm ........................................................................................................... 536 GroupingTriggeredAlarms............................................................................................. 537 16.1.1 16.1.2 16.1.3 16.1.4 16.1.5 16.1.6

16.2

UsingEventParsers .................................................................................................... 501

16.2.1 16.2.2 16.2.3 16.2.4 16.2.5 16.2.6 16.2.7

16.3

UsingEventFilters ...................................................................................................... 511

16.3.1 16.3.2 16.3.3 16.3.4 16.3.5 16.3.6

16.4

UsingAlarmFilters...................................................................................................... 526

16.4.1 16.4.2 16.4.3 16.4.4 16.4.5 16.4.6

16.5

PerformingAlarmOperations..................................................................................... 536

16.5.1 16.5.2

16.6

AssigningFaultManagementPrivileges ..................................................................... 537

17
17.1

Administering Performance Management.....................................................545

DataCollection............................................................................................................ 545

17.1.1 17.1.2 17.1.3 17.1.4 17.1.5

ElementsInvolvedinDataCollection ............................................................................. 546 DataCollectionProcess .................................................................................................. 547 CreatingaPollingObject................................................................................................. 548 ModifyingaPollingObject.............................................................................................. 557 DeletingaPollingObject................................................................................................. 560 AddingaStatistic ............................................................................................................ 561 FindingaStatistic ............................................................................................................ 567 ModifyingaStatistic ....................................................................................................... 568 DeletingaStatistic .......................................................................................................... 569 ModifyingExtendedPolledData ..................................................................................... 570 FactorsforWhetheraStatisticisPolled......................................................................... 571 AddingaThreshold ......................................................................................................... 573 PreparingtoMapaThreshold ........................................................................................ 579 MappingaThresholdforanIndividualDevice ............................................................... 580 AssociatingaThresholdwithaStatisticforanIndividualDevice................................... 582 MappingaThresholdforaSpecificTypeDevice ............................................................ 584 MappingaThresholdforaDeviceType ......................................................................... 585 AssociatingOneorMoreThresholdswithaPollingObjectforaDeviceType............... 586 ModifyingaThreshold .................................................................................................... 591 DeletingaThreshold....................................................................................................... 592 ExampleStrategyforChoosingandApplyingThresholds .............................................. 593 InterpretingMessagesonMultipleThresholdsforaSingleStatistic ............................. 594

17.2

AdministeringIndividualStatistics.............................................................................. 561

17.2.1 17.2.2 17.2.3 17.2.4

17.3

AdministeringExtendedPolledData........................................................................... 570

17.3.1 17.3.2

17.4

AssociatingThresholdsWithStatisticsandNetworkElements ................................. 571

17.4.1 17.4.2 17.4.3 17.4.4 17.4.5 17.4.6 17.4.7 17.4.8 17.4.9 17.4.10 17.4.11

17.5 17.6

DefiningaPerformanceCustomView........................................................................ 594 OptimizingPerformanceDataStorage ....................................................................... 602

18
18.1 18.2 18.3 18.4 18.5 18.6 18.7

Administering a Policy ..............................................................................605

AddingaPolicy............................................................................................................ 608 SchedulingaPolicy...................................................................................................... 609 UpdatingaPolicy ........................................................................................................ 610 RefreshingthePolicies................................................................................................ 610 ExecutingaPolicy ....................................................................................................... 610 StoppingaPolicy......................................................................................................... 611 DeletingaPolicy.......................................................................................................... 612

19
19.1 19.2

Configuring Network Elements...................................................................613

UsingtheConfigureDeviceCommand....................................................................... 613 UsingConfigurationTemplates .................................................................................. 620
ImportingaConfigurationTemplate .............................................................................. 620 PushingValuesfromaPrestructuredConfigurationTemplate...................................... 621 CreatingaConfigurationTemplate................................................................................. 623 ApplyingaConfigurationTemplate ................................................................................ 628 FindingaConfigurationTemplate .................................................................................. 630 EditingaConfigurationTemplate ................................................................................... 631 PushingConfigurationValuesUponDiscovery............................................................... 633 ExportingaConfigurationTemplate............................................................................... 635 ExportingAllConfigurationTemplates ........................................................................... 636 DeletingaConfigurationTemplate................................................................................. 636

19.2.1 19.2.2 19.2.3 19.2.4 19.2.5 19.2.6 19.2.7 19.2.8 19.2.9 19.2.10

19.3 19.4 19.5

CloningaDeviceConfiguration................................................................................... 637 LaunchingBAM ........................................................................................................... 642 UsingCertainDeviceTypespecificConfigurationDialogs ......................................... 643

ConfiguringanEtherWANSwitch ................................................................................... 643

19.5.1

20
20.1 20.2 20.3 20.4 20.5 20.6 20.7 20.8 20.9

Scheduling a One-Time or Periodic Task.....................................................649

SchedulableTasks ....................................................................................................... 649 LaunchingtheTaskScheduler .................................................................................... 654 DefiningtheTasktoPerform...................................................................................... 655 ViewingConfiguredTasks ........................................................................................... 675 EditingtheDefinitionofaConfiguredTask................................................................ 679 AuditingConfigurationTasks...................................................................................... 679 ReschedulingorTriggeringaScheduledTask............................................................. 680 PausingorResumingaScheduledTask ...................................................................... 680 RetainingorRemovingaScheduledTask................................................................... 681 StoppingaRunningTask ......................................................................................... 682

20.10

21 22
22.1 22.2

Broadcasting a Message ............................................................................683 Administering Wireless Manager ................................................................685

TerminatingaClientSession....................................................................................... 685 UsingtheWMAdministratorTool.............................................................................. 685
UsingtheWMServerPanel ............................................................................................ 686 ConfiguringtheBAMPanel............................................................................................. 687 ConfiguringtheDatabasePanel ..................................................................................... 688

22.2.1 22.2.2 22.2.3

22.2.4 22.2.5 22.2.6 22.2.7

UsingtheLicensingPanel ............................................................................................... 689 ConfiguringtheNBIPanel............................................................................................... 692 UsingtheOfflinePhysicalMapPanel ............................................................................. 693 ConfiguringtheEmailConfigurationPanel..................................................................... 695 OpeningtheLogFileConfigurationTool ........................................................................ 696 AddingLogFiles .............................................................................................................. 698 ViewingDetailsofLogFiles............................................................................................. 698 ModifyingLogFileSettings ............................................................................................. 699 UsingDebugMode ......................................................................................................... 703 LoggingJVMMonitoringDetails ..................................................................................... 704

22.3

ConfiguringLogSettings ............................................................................................. 696

22.3.1 22.3.2 22.3.3 22.3.4 22.3.5 22.3.6

23
23.1 23.2 23.3 23.4 23.5 23.6 23.7 23.8 23.9

Monitoring WM and Its Networks Through Wireless Manager Ultralight..........705

AccessingWirelessManagerUltralight ...................................................................... 705 UsingtheWhat'sUpWebPage .................................................................................. 706 UsingtheSummaryView............................................................................................ 710 UsingtheInventoryViewinWirelessManagerUltralight ......................................... 713 UsingtheAlarmsViewinWirelessManagerUltralight ............................................. 714 UsingtheEventsViewinWirelessManagerUltralight .............................................. 715 UsingtheCustomerInfoViewinWirelessManagerUltralight.................................. 716 UsingtheLogsViewinWirelessManagerUltralight.................................................. 716 TerminatingtheWirelessManagerUltralightSession............................................... 716

Legal Notices and License Agreements .................................................................717

CAMBIUMNETWORKS,LTDENDUSERLICENSEAGREEMENT............................................... 717 CAMBIUMPUBLICLYAVAILABLESOFTWARELEGALNOTICESANDENDUSERLICENSE AGREEMENTSFORPUBLICLYAVAILABLESOFTWARE ............................................................ 722 SoftwareIncludedbyCambium.............................................................................................. 723 PackagesThatUseApacheLicenseVersion2.0 ..................................................................... 727 THIRDPARTYPUBLICLYAVAILABLESOFTWARELEGALNOTICESANDENDUSERLICENSE AGREEMENTSFORPUBLICLYAVAILABLESOFTWARE ............................................................ 731 SoftwareIncludedbyCommercialThirdPartySoftware ....................................................... 732 PackagesThatUseGNULesserGeneralPublicLicenseVersion2.1 ...................................... 738 PackagesThatUseApacheSoftwareLicenseVersion1.1...................................................... 746

Glossary ...........................................................................................................749 Technical Support..............................................................................................751

RunningtheCustomerSupportTool ...................................................................................... 751

OptionsforRunningtheSupportTool ............................................................................................. 751 PopulatingtheFieldsoftheCustomerSupportToolWindow ........................................................ 753

ViewingandSavingFilesThatareUsefulforSupport............................................................ 759 ContactingSupportRepresentatives...................................................................................... 760

Index................................................................................................................763

List of Figures
Figure1:ServerdiskfreespacemonitoringwindowforachildWMelement .......................................... 56 Figure2:DiskusagemonitoringwindowforachildWMelement ............................................................ 56 Figure3:DiskI/OmonitoringwindowforachildWMelement................................................................. 57 Figure4:DatabasediskusagemonitoringwindowforachildWMelement............................................. 57 Figure5:MemoryutilizationmonitoringwindowforachildWMelement............................................... 58 Figure6:DatabasediskfreespacemonitoringwindowforachildWMelement ..................................... 58 Figure7:CPUutilizationmonitoringwindowforachildWMelement...................................................... 59 Figure8:ElementPropertiesforasubordinateWMserver,Generaltab.................................................. 60 Figure9:ElementPropertiesforasubordinateWMserver,SNMPtab..................................................... 60 Figure10:ElementPropertiesforasubordinateWMserver,Monitoringtab .......................................... 61 Figure11:ElementPropertiesforasubordinateWMserver,Relationshiptab ........................................ 61 Figure12:WebpageforWMWebStartclientinvoke(LoginPage.do) ...................................................... 64 Figure13:WMAuthenticationdialog......................................................................................................... 65 Figure14:WMAuthenticationadvancedoptions...................................................................................... 66 Figure15:WMapplicationinitialview ....................................................................................................... 67 Figure16:Possiblerelationshipsbetweenclientandserver ..................................................................... 67 Figure17:JavaControlPanel,Generaltab................................................................................................. 68 Figure18:NetworkSettingswindowinJavaControlPanel ....................................................................... 69 Figure19:AdvancedNetworkSettingswindowinJavaControlPanel ...................................................... 69 Figure20:NetworktabinFirefoxOptionswindow.................................................................................... 70 Figure21:ConnectionSettingswindowinFirefox ..................................................................................... 71 Figure22:GeneraltabofJavaControlPanel.............................................................................................. 72 Figure23:TemporaryFilesSettingswindowinJavaControlPanel ........................................................... 73 Figure24:DeleteTemporaryFileswindowinJavaControlPanel............................................................. 73 Figure25:PasswordConfirmationwindow................................................................................................ 74 Figure26:PasswordConfiguratordialog..................................................................................................... 75 Figure27:Clientwindow,example............................................................................................................. 77 Figure28:ToolbarwhenDashboardisdisplayed ....................................................................................... 78 Figure29:ToolbarwhenNetworkEventsaredisplayed ............................................................................ 78 Figure30:ToolbarwhenAlarmsaredisplayed .......................................................................................... 78 Figure31:ToolbarwhenConfiguredCollectionisdisplayed...................................................................... 78

Figure32:ToolbarwhenTemplatesviewisdisplayed ............................................................................... 78 Figure33:ToolbarwhenInventoryviewisdisplayed ................................................................................ 78 Figure34:ToolbarwhenReportsaredisplayed ......................................................................................... 78 Figure35:ToolbarwhenScheduledTasksaredisplayed ........................................................................... 78 Figure36:ToolbarwhenPoliciesviewisdisplayed .................................................................................... 78 Figure37:Alarmsummaryviews................................................................................................................ 79 Figure38:ViewofdevicesunderWarning ................................................................................................. 80 Figure39:Severealarmcounts .................................................................................................................. 80 Figure40:Aboutwindow,Licensetab........................................................................................................ 82 Figure41:LicenseManagerwebinterface................................................................................................. 83 Figure42:ChangePasswordpanel,LicenseManagerAdministratorTool ................................................ 84 Figure43:Aboutwindow,DeviceDetailstab............................................................................................. 85 Figure44:Aboutwindow,ClientDetailstab .............................................................................................. 86 Figure45:Aboutwindow,SupportedDeviceTemplatestab ..................................................................... 87 Figure46:ExpandedviewoftheApplicationstree .................................................................................... 91 Figure47:Exampleparentcustomviewwithchildview............................................................................ 93 Figure48:CustomviewnodesinApplicationstree.................................................................................... 93 Figure49:SearchresultsforinputStatisticNamecontents ...................................................................... 96 Figure50:SearchresultsforinputMessagecontents ............................................................................... 97 Figure51:SearchresultsforinputSourcecontents................................................................................... 98 Figure52:SearchresultsforinputnetworkName(ID) .............................................................................. 98 Figure53:SearchresultsforinputIPAddresscontents............................................................................. 99 Figure54:SearchresultsforinputAlarmMessagecontents ................................................................... 100 Figure55:SearchresultsforinputDeviceNamecontents ...................................................................... 100 Figure56:SearchresultsforinputLocationcontents .............................................................................. 101 Figure57:SearchresultsforinputName(ID)contents ........................................................................... 101 Figure58:SearchresultsforinputDeviceGroupNamecontents ........................................................... 102 Figure59:SearchresultsforinputAddress1contents............................................................................. 102 Figure60:Alarmstableview..................................................................................................................... 105 Figure61:Selectoperationwindow ......................................................................................................... 109 Figure62:Importinformationwindows................................................................................................... 109 Figure63:Selectfilewindow .................................................................................................................... 110 Figure64:DashboardAlarmsbySeveritydisplay..................................................................................... 118

Figure65:DashboardAlarmsbyDeviceTypedisplay .............................................................................. 118 Figure66:DashboardRecentAlarmsdisplay ........................................................................................... 118 Figure67:DashboardAlarmsbyMessagedisplay.................................................................................... 119 Figure68:DashboardDeviceCountsdisplay............................................................................................ 119 Figure69:DashboardHelpdisplay,UsefulLinksandLicensetabs........................................................... 119 Figure70:DashboardHelpdisplay,DeviceDetailsandSettingstabs ...................................................... 120 Figure71:ClearAlarmsIncluded .............................................................................................................. 120 Figure72:ClearAlarmsHidden ................................................................................................................ 120 Figure73:Inventoryview ......................................................................................................................... 123 Figure74:DevicetypeslistinApplicationstree,example ....................................................................... 124 Figure75:AlarmsSearchdialog,sortoptions .......................................................................................... 126 Figure76:AlarmsSearchdialog,inputoptions ........................................................................................ 126 Figure77:AlarmsSearchdialog,Moreoptions........................................................................................ 127 Figure78:AlarmsSearchoperation,alarmsreturned,example.............................................................. 127 Figure79:Propertiestabforaninventorycustomview,firstform ......................................................... 129 Figure80:Propertiestabforaninventorycustomview,secondform .................................................... 130 Figure81:Propertiestabforaninventorycustomview,thirdform........................................................ 131 Figure82:Propertiestabforaninventorycustomview,fourthform ..................................................... 132 Figure83:Propertiestabforaninventorycustomview,fifthform......................................................... 133 Figure84:Additionalcustomviewcriteriadialog,Propertiestab ........................................................... 134 Figure85:Criteriadialogwiththreeproperties ....................................................................................... 135 Figure86:SelectTableColumnsdialogforinventorycustomview ......................................................... 136 Figure87:Userdefinedtablecolumnswindowforinventorycustomview............................................ 136 Figure88:TreeNodePropertiestabforinventorycustomview ............................................................. 137 Figure89:ExportDatadialog.................................................................................................................... 138 Figure90:Rightclickoptionscommonforallelements .......................................................................... 139 Figure91:ConfigurationControldialogforPMP320AP ......................................................................... 142 Figure92:ConfigureModedialogforPMP320AP,defaultvalues.......................................................... 142 Figure93:ConfigureModedialogforPMP320AP,ModeBWselections ............................................... 143 Figure94:ConfigureModedialogforPMP320AP,ModeRatioselections ............................................ 143 Figure95:ConfigureModedialogforPMP320AP,ModeMapselections ............................................. 143 Figure96:Networkspanelview ............................................................................................................... 144 Figure97:GeolocationImportwindow................................................................................................... 149

Figure98:ImportCSVFileofGeoLocationswindow............................................................................... 149 Figure99:LocationImportfromAddressCSV.......................................................................................... 151 Figure100:Offlinemap,midwesternUSA ............................................................................................... 154 Figure101:Offlinemap,northeasternIllinois.......................................................................................... 154 Figure102:Offlinemap,networkatapluszoomfactor .......................................................................... 155 Figure103:Offlinemap,networkataminuszoomfactor....................................................................... 155 Figure104:Physicalmap:collapsedinstanceofdevicecollocation ........................................................ 157 Figure105:Physicalmap:expandedinstanceofdevicecollocation........................................................ 158 Figure106:Refreshandcenteringoptionsforaphysicalmap ................................................................ 163 Figure107:Allreliabilitylinksselectedforphysicalmap ......................................................................... 166 Figure108:Goodreliabilitylinksfilteredout ........................................................................................... 167 Figure109:Goodreliabilitylinkspersistentlyfilteredoutfrompreviousphysicalmapsetting.............. 168 Figure110:Physicalmap:furtherzoomingrequiredforviewingmoredevices ...................................... 168 Figure111:Physicalmap:AllLinks,NoCoverage,AllAirStandards,Map............................................... 169 Figure112:Physicalmap:AllLinks,NoCoverage,AllAirStandards,Hybrid ........................................... 169 Figure113:Physicalmap:LogicalLinks,NoCoverage,AllAirStandards,Terrain.................................... 170 Figure114:Devicedatapopup,Maintab ............................................................................................... 177 Figure115:Devicedatapopup,Radiostab ............................................................................................. 177 Figure116:Devicedatapopup,Linkstab,scrollingrequired ................................................................. 178 Figure117:PathProfile............................................................................................................................. 179 Figure118:Devicedatapopup,Managetab,scrollingrequired ............................................................ 180 Figure119:Devicedatapopup,ManagetabforaPTPdevice................................................................ 181 Figure120:Questionmarkrepresentingdeviceofunknowntype .......................................................... 181 Figure121:ImportBroadbandPlannerPredictiondialog......................................................................... 184 Figure122:PhysicalmapLogwindow,opened........................................................................................ 186 Figure123:ExportedphysicalmapinGoogleEarthapplication,zoomedin ........................................... 188 Figure124:ExportedphysicalmapinGoogleEarthapplication,zoomedout......................................... 189 Figure125:PlacesboxwithNetworkElementsnodeexpanded ............................................................. 190 Figure126:Radio(s)linktoinformationabouttheelement .................................................................... 190 Figure127:InformationabouttheelementinGoogleEarth ................................................................... 191 Figure128:Placesboxwithlinksnodeexpanded .................................................................................... 191 Figure129:LinkinformationinGoogleEarthview .................................................................................. 192 Figure130:PollingConfigurationdialog,StatusPollingtab..................................................................... 198

Figure131:ConfigureSpecificTypePollingdialogforstatuspolling ....................................................... 199 Figure132:ElementProperties,Generaltab ........................................................................................... 200 Figure133:ElementProperties,SNMPtab .............................................................................................. 201 Figure134:ElementProperties,Monitoringtab ...................................................................................... 201 Figure135:ElementProperties,Relationshiptab .................................................................................... 202 Figure136:ShowComponentspanel ....................................................................................................... 202 Figure137:ComponentPropertieswindow............................................................................................. 203 Figure138:NetworkEventsviewforasingledevice ............................................................................... 204 Figure139:Alarmsviewforasingledevice.............................................................................................. 204 Figure140:PerformancedataConfiguredCollectionviewforasingledevice ........................................ 205 Figure141:DashboardformatforPMPAP .............................................................................................. 207 Figure142:DashboardformatforPMPSM.............................................................................................. 208 Figure143:DashboardformatforPMP320AP ....................................................................................... 209 Figure144:DashboardformatforPMP320CPE...................................................................................... 210 Figure145:DashboardformatforPMPOFDMAP ................................................................................... 211 Figure146:DashboardformatforPMPOFDMSM .................................................................................. 212 Figure147:DashboardformatforPMPBHM........................................................................................... 213 Figure148:DashboardformatforPMPBHS ............................................................................................ 214 Figure149:DashboardformatforPTP500Master.................................................................................. 215 Figure150:DashboardformatforPTP800Slave..................................................................................... 216 Figure151:DashboardformatforCMM3 ................................................................................................ 217 Figure152:DashboardformatforCMM4 ................................................................................................ 217 Figure153:Dashboardformatfor14PortSwitch ................................................................................... 218 Figure154:DashboardformatforGenericElement ................................................................................ 218 Figure155:DashboardformatforExtremeSwitch .................................................................................. 219 Figure156:DashboardformatforRADSwitch......................................................................................... 219 Figure157:DashboardforachildWMelement....................................................................................... 220 Figure158:Dashboardpanelswithoutdata............................................................................................. 223 Figure159:CollectedstatisticswindowforGPSSatellitesTracked ......................................................... 224 Figure160:DevicesummaryreportforaPMP430SM ........................................................................... 226 Figure161:DevicesummaryreportforachildWMelement .................................................................. 227 Figure162:ReportResultswindow .......................................................................................................... 228 Figure163:CustomerContactManagementwindow.............................................................................. 229

Figure164:PingingComponentswindow,success .................................................................................. 233 Figure165:PingingComponentswindow,skippedforunmanagedcomponent .................................... 233 Figure166:DropSubscriberSessionwindowforaPMPAP..................................................................... 234 Figure167:DropSubscriberSessionforName(ID).................................................................................. 234 Figure168:RemoveRelationshipoptioninExtendedFamilywindow .................................................... 235 Figure169:Removerelationshippopupwarning ................................................................................... 236 Figure170:AddRelationshipBetweenElementsdialog,bothdevicesidentified ................................... 237 Figure171:AddRelationshipBetweenElementsdialog,onedeviceidentified ...................................... 238 Figure172:Logicallinkdisplayed ............................................................................................................. 239 Figure173:Circularreferenceerror ......................................................................................................... 239 Figure174:Selectoperationwindow ....................................................................................................... 242 Figure175:ImportCustomerContactInformationwindow .................................................................... 243 Figure176:CustomerContactManagementwindow.............................................................................. 244 Figure177:CustomerInformationdialog................................................................................................. 245 Figure178:CredentialManagerdialog..................................................................................................... 251 Figure179:LinkCapacityTestresultswindow ......................................................................................... 255 Figure180:SpectrumAnalyzerwindowforaPMP320AP ...................................................................... 257 Figure181:SpectrumAnalyzerwindowforaPMPSM ............................................................................ 258 Figure182:DevicewebpageURL............................................................................................................. 259 Figure183:EnhancedSecurityConfigurationwarning............................................................................. 260 Figure184:Trustedsiteswindow ............................................................................................................. 260 Figure185:InitialwebpageofSubscriberModule .................................................................................. 261 Figure186:ManagementhomewebpageofaPMPSubscriberModule................................................ 262 Figure187:FullmanagementinterfacewebpageofPMPSubscriberModule ....................................... 263 Figure188:ConfirmationmessageforDeleteObjectandTracesoperation ........................................... 264 Figure189:Applytemplatedialog,importedAPtemplates .................................................................... 267 Figure190:DefineConfigurationstab...................................................................................................... 270 Figure191:ConfigurationParameterSelectiondialogforaserviceplan ................................................ 271 Figure192:Configurableparametersinaserviceplan ............................................................................ 271 Figure193:ConfirmUpdatewindowforbandwidthserviceplan............................................................ 272 Figure194:UpdatingConfigurationwindowforanewserviceplan ....................................................... 273 Figure195:TaskAttributeswindowforaserviceplan............................................................................. 274 Figure196:ConfigureElement(s)windowforapplyingaserviceplan .................................................... 275

Figure197:ConfigurationParameterSelectiondialogforaVLANprofile ............................................... 278 Figure198:ConfigurableparametersinaVLANprofile ........................................................................... 279 Figure199:EditVLANMembershipdialog ............................................................................................... 280 Figure200:AddEntrywindow.................................................................................................................. 280 Figure201:ConfirmUpdatewindowforVLANprofile............................................................................. 281 Figure202:UpdatingConfigurationwindowforVLANprofile................................................................. 281 Figure203:TaskAttributeswindowforapplyingaVLANprofile ............................................................. 282 Figure204:ConfigureElement(s)dialogforapplyingaVLANprofile ...................................................... 283 Figure205:DetailsforaUserScripttask.................................................................................................. 285 Figure206:SchedulableScriptResultswindow,example........................................................................ 286 Figure207:UploadAAACertificatedialog,initialview ............................................................................ 287 Figure208:UploadAAACertificatedialog,DeleteExistingCertificateselected...................................... 288 Figure209:SoftwareUpgradedialog ....................................................................................................... 290 Figure210:Selectedforupgradetab ....................................................................................................... 291 Figure211:SMAutoupdateConfigurationtab......................................................................................... 292 Figure212:HPAPChannelBandwidthtab................................................................................................ 294 Figure213:PackageManagerdialog,nopackages .................................................................................. 298 Figure214:PackageManagerdialog,packagesadded ............................................................................ 298 Figure215:AddDevicewindowforStaticSelectionofadevicegroup ................................................... 301 Figure216:CreateDeviceGroupconditionsforbasicDynamicSelectionofadevicegroup.................. 302 Figure217:NameselectionsforAddAdvancedCriteriaofadynamicdevicegroup............................... 303 Figure218:DeviceGroupDetailstaboftheCreateDeviceGroupdialog................................................ 307 Figure219:DevicestaboftheCreateDeviceGroupdialog ..................................................................... 308 Figure220:DevicesPreviewwindow ....................................................................................................... 309 Figure221:DeviceGroupswindow .......................................................................................................... 309 Figure222:DeviceGroupDetailstabofEditDeviceGroupdialog .......................................................... 310 Figure223:DevicestabofEditDeviceGroupdialog................................................................................ 311 Figure224:AddtoDeviceGroupswindow .............................................................................................. 312 Figure225:DevicestabofCreateDeviceGroupdialog ........................................................................... 313 Figure226:AddDevicewindow ............................................................................................................... 314 Figure227:Devicesselectedtoadd ......................................................................................................... 314 Figure228:DevicesaddedtoDevicesSelectedblock .............................................................................. 315 Figure229:AddtoDeviceGroupswindow .............................................................................................. 316

Figure230:ScheduledTaskswindow ....................................................................................................... 321 Figure231:DeleteGroupoptionforadevicegroup................................................................................ 321 Figure232:PollingConfigurationdialog,ConfigurationPollingtab......................................................... 323 Figure233:ConfigureSpecificTypePollingdialogforconfigurationpolling ........................................... 324 Figure234:ExecuteConfigurationReportTemplatepanel ..................................................................... 327 Figure235:CreateConfigurationReportTemplatedialoglaunchedfromInventory.............................. 329 Figure236:CreateConfigurationReportTemplatedialoglaunchedfromApplicationstree.................. 330 Figure237:Successforacreatereport .................................................................................................... 331 Figure238:SelectConfigurationReportDatawindow ............................................................................ 331 Figure239:ConfigurationReportViewwindow....................................................................................... 331 Figure240:ExecuteReportwindow......................................................................................................... 332 Figure241:ExecuteConfigurationReportwindow.................................................................................. 334 Figure242:Searchwindowforconfigurationreporttemplatecriteria ................................................... 337 Figure243:EditConfigurationReportTemplatewindow ........................................................................ 337 Figure244:DeleteReportwindow ........................................................................................................... 340 Figure245:DeleteReportwindow,reportscontents .............................................................................. 340 Figure246:SystemReportsview.............................................................................................................. 344 Figure247:SMQOSSummary.................................................................................................................. 345 Figure248:NetworkEventsview,onedevice(Source) ........................................................................... 348 Figure249:NetworkEventsview,allSources .......................................................................................... 349 Figure250:EventDetailswindow ............................................................................................................ 353 Figure251:Searchwindowforeventcriteria........................................................................................... 355 Figure252:DiscoveryEventsview............................................................................................................ 357 Figure253:Eventfiltercustomviewcriteriadialog,Propertiestab ........................................................ 358 Figure254:Additionalcustomviewcriteriadialog,Propertiestab ......................................................... 361 Figure255:Criteriadialogwiththreeproperties ..................................................................................... 362 Figure256:SelectTableColumnsdialogforeventfilterview ................................................................. 362 Figure257:Userdefinedtablecolumnswindow ..................................................................................... 363 Figure258:TreeNodePropertiestabforeventfiltercustomview......................................................... 363 Figure259:ExportDatadialog.................................................................................................................. 365 Figure260:Alarmsview,onedevice(IPAddress) ..................................................................................... 367 Figure261:Alarmsview,alldevices(allIPAddresses).............................................................................. 368 Figure262:Alarmsdetailswindow........................................................................................................... 369

Figure263:OwnerandAnnotationinAlarmdetail.................................................................................. 371 Figure264:Alarmfiltercustomviewcriteria,Propertiestab .................................................................. 374 Figure265:SelectTableColumnsdialogforalarmfilterview ................................................................. 377 Figure266:TreeNodePropertiestabforalarmfiltercustomview......................................................... 378 Figure267:PollingConfigurationdialog,PerformancePollingtab.......................................................... 381 Figure268:ConfigureSpecificTypePollingdialogforperformancepolling............................................ 383 Figure269:ConfiguredCollectionpanel................................................................................................... 384 Figure270:Currentstatisticswindow ...................................................................................................... 387 Figure271:Collectedstatisticswindow,linegraph ................................................................................. 389 Figure272:Collectedstatisticswindow,bargraph .................................................................................. 390 Figure273:InventorySummaryreport .................................................................................................... 395 Figure274:DeviceUptimereport ............................................................................................................ 396 Figure275:DiscoveryConfigurator,Generaltab ..................................................................................... 403 Figure276:ConfirmationfordeselectionofAutoDiscovery .................................................................... 404 Figure277:InitialParameterscontentsfromtheDiscoveryConfigurator............................................... 407 Figure278:RediscoverySchedulerdialog ................................................................................................ 409 Figure279:RediscoveryScheduler,SpecificDates................................................................................... 410 Figure280:RediscoveryScheduler,DaysofWeek ................................................................................... 411 Figure281:DiscoveryConfigurator,Protocoltab .................................................................................... 413 Figure282:SNMPPropertiesselectedfromtheProtocoltab ................................................................. 413 Figure283:DiscoveryConfigurator,NetworkDiscoverytab ................................................................... 417 Figure284:SnmpPropertieswindowfornetworkdiscovery .................................................................. 419 Figure285:SNMPV3Propertiestab ........................................................................................................ 421 Figure286:SnmpV3Propertieswindow,Generaltab............................................................................. 421 Figure287:SnmpV3Propertieswindow,Securitytab ............................................................................ 422 Figure288:DiscoveryConfigurator,NodeDiscoverytab......................................................................... 424 Figure289:Disablingdiscoveryforalisteddevice ................................................................................... 428 Figure290:Criteriatab,disallowdiscoveryfortypeSUNandnameA .................................................... 429 Figure291:DiscoveryConfigurator,Criteriatab ...................................................................................... 431 Figure292:Criteriatab,allowdiscoveryforspecificnameandOID........................................................ 432 Figure293:Criteriatab,allowdiscoveryforonlySNMPnodes ............................................................... 433 Figure294:DiscoveryLog ......................................................................................................................... 435 Figure295:FailureeventsintheDiscoveryLog ....................................................................................... 435

Figure296:InitialSecurityAdministrationToolScreen............................................................................ 438 Figure297:UserAdministrationwizard,UserDescriptionpanel............................................................. 442 Figure298:UserAdministrationwizard,accountandpasswordexpiry .................................................. 443 Figure299:UserAdministrationwizard,permissions .............................................................................. 444 Figure300:AssignPermissionsdialog ...................................................................................................... 446 Figure301:Securityadministrationtabs .................................................................................................. 448 Figure302:UserProfiletab ...................................................................................................................... 448 Figure303:UserProfiledialog.................................................................................................................. 449 Figure304:SelectGroupswindow ........................................................................................................... 450 Figure305:ChangePassworddialog ........................................................................................................ 451 Figure306:Warningforuserdeletion...................................................................................................... 452 Figure307:AuthAuditscreen .................................................................................................................. 454 Figure308:Searchdialogforaudittrails .................................................................................................. 456 Figure309:AlertAuditwindow,withpropertiesofanaudittrail ............................................................ 457 Figure310:GroupsWizard,GroupDescriptionpanel .............................................................................. 459 Figure311:GroupsWizard,OperationsTree ........................................................................................... 459 Figure312:SelectUserswindow .............................................................................................................. 460 Figure313:ScopeSettingsdialog ............................................................................................................. 463 Figure314:SelectAuthorizedScopeswindow.......................................................................................... 466 Figure315:AuthorizedScopesforCVpanel ............................................................................................. 467 Figure316:Warningforauthorizedscopedeletion ................................................................................. 468 Figure317:Warningforgroupdeletion ................................................................................................... 468 Figure318:OperationTreenodesshowingdefaultuserpermissions ..................................................... 470 Figure319:OperationsForGrouppanel .................................................................................................. 484 Figure320:AssignPermissionsdialog ...................................................................................................... 485 Figure321:Operationsdialog................................................................................................................... 487 Figure322:Warningforoperationdeletion............................................................................................. 489 Figure323:TrapParserConfigurationtool .............................................................................................. 492 Figure324:TrapParserConfigurationwindow,AddTrapParseroperation ........................................... 493 Figure325:TrapParserConfigurationdialog,EventUserProperties ...................................................... 499 Figure326:EventUserPropertiesdialog ................................................................................................. 500 Figure327:EventParserConfigurationtool............................................................................................. 502 Figure328:SpecifyUserpropertiesandTrapbasedCriteriasdialog....................................................... 507

Figure329:LoadEventParsersFromFiledialog ...................................................................................... 508 Figure330:SaveEventParserToFiledialog ............................................................................................ 510 Figure331:EventFiltersdialog................................................................................................................. 512 Figure332:MatchcriteriaPropertiesdialog ............................................................................................ 513 Figure333:SuppressActiondialog........................................................................................................... 516 Figure334:RunCommandActiondialog ................................................................................................. 517 Figure335:SendTrapActiondialog ......................................................................................................... 519 Figure336:VariableBindingListdialog.................................................................................................... 520 Figure337:SendEmailActiondialog........................................................................................................ 521 Figure338:AuthenticationInformationdialog ........................................................................................ 523 Figure339:FilterDetailsdialog ................................................................................................................ 524 Figure340:AlertFiltersdialog .................................................................................................................. 527 Figure341:AlertFiltersdialog,exampleadded ....................................................................................... 530 Figure342:MatchcriteriaPropertiesdialog ............................................................................................ 531 Figure343:MorePropertiesdialog .......................................................................................................... 532 Figure344:FilterDetailsdialog ................................................................................................................ 534 Figure345:PollDetailsdialog,GeneralPropertiesframe........................................................................ 549 Figure346:PollDetails,ManagedObjectmatchcriteria ......................................................................... 550 Figure347:PollDetails,DataConfigurationparameters ......................................................................... 552 Figure348:PolledDetailsdialog,GeneralPropertiesframe,activefields............................................... 558 Figure349:PollDetailsdialog,DataConfigurationpanel ........................................................................ 559 Figure350:PollDetailsdialogforDeletePollingObjectoperation ......................................................... 560 Figure351:ConfirmDeletionpopup ....................................................................................................... 561 Figure352:DataCollectionDetailedPropertiesdialog,firstform............................................................ 562 Figure353:DataCollectionDetailedPropertiesdialog,secondform....................................................... 565 Figure354:Searchwindowforstatisticcriteria ....................................................................................... 568 Figure355:DataCollectionDetailedPropertiesdialogforModifyStatisticoperation ............................ 569 Figure356:ThresholdsandAssociationsdialog ....................................................................................... 574 Figure357:ThresholdsPropertiesdialog,longtab .................................................................................. 575 Figure358:ThresholdPropertiesdialog,stringtab.................................................................................. 576 Figure359:ThresholdPropertiesdialog,percentagetab ........................................................................ 577 Figure360:NewassociationrowaddedtoThresholdsandAssociationsinterface ................................ 580 Figure361:SearchDevicesdialog............................................................................................................. 580

Figure362:DataCollectionDetailedPropertiesdialog,firstsetofproperties......................................... 582 Figure363:DataCollectionDetailedProperties,secondsetofproperties .............................................. 583 Figure364:DataCollectionDetailedProperties,thirdsetofvalues........................................................ 584 Figure365:Searchspecifictypedialog,specifictypeselected ................................................................. 585 Figure366:Searchspecifictypedialog,devicetypeselected.................................................................. 586 Figure367:PollDetailsdialog................................................................................................................... 587 Figure368:PollDetailsdialog,DataConfigurationpanelwithreadonlyfields ...................................... 588 Figure369:PollDetailsdialog,DataConfigurationpanelwithreadwritefields..................................... 590 Figure370:PollDetailsdialog,GeneralPropertiespanel ........................................................................ 591 Figure371:ThresholdPropertiesdialogforModifyoperation ................................................................ 592 Figure372:ThresholdPropertiesdialogforDeleteoperation................................................................. 593 Figure373:Performancecustomviewcriteria,Propertiestab,firstform............................................... 595 Figure374:Performancecustomviewcriteria,Propertiestab,secondform.......................................... 597 Figure375:Performancecustomviewcriteria,Propertiestab,thirdform ............................................. 599 Figure376:SelectTableColumnsdialogforperformancefilterview...................................................... 601 Figure377:TreeNodePropertiestabforperformancefiltercustomview ............................................. 602 Figure378:AlarmClearingPolicy ............................................................................................................... 605 Figure379:EscalationPolicy...................................................................................................................... 606 Figure380:Policiespanel ......................................................................................................................... 608 Figure381:AddPolicyDetailswindow...................................................................................................... 608 Figure382:PolicySchedulerwindow ....................................................................................................... 609 Figure383:ObjectDetailswindowforpolicyupdate............................................................................... 610 Figure384:Executepolicyconfirmationpopup...................................................................................... 611 Figure385:Listbackgroundforpoliciesunderexecution........................................................................ 611 Figure386:StopPolicyconfirmationpopup ........................................................................................... 611 Figure387:ConfigurationGroup,PMPSMdevice ................................................................................... 614 Figure388:ConfigurationGroup,PMPBHMdevice ................................................................................ 615 Figure389:ConfigurationGroup,PMP320CPE....................................................................................... 616 Figure390:ConfigurationGroup,PTP800Slave ...................................................................................... 617 Figure391:ConfigurationgroupsforachildWM .................................................................................... 618 Figure392:ConfigurationGroupattributesIP ...................................................................................... 619 Figure393:ApplyTemplatedialog,5.4GHzOFDMBHMdevice ............................................................. 621 Figure394:SelectImportFilesbrowserforconfigurationtemplates...................................................... 623

Figure395:CreateConfigurationTemplateexample,PMPOFDMSMwithRFtooltip ........................... 624 Figure396:CreateConfigurationTemplatedialog,parameterselectedviaJumpTo,butIncludenot checked.................................................................................................................................. 626 Figure397:CreateConfigurationTemplatedialog,parameterselectedandIncludechecked ............... 627 Figure398:ApplyTemplatewindow ........................................................................................................ 628 Figure399:ModifyValuesdialog.............................................................................................................. 629 Figure400:Devicestab............................................................................................................................. 630 Figure401:Searchwindowforconfigurationtemplatecriteria .............................................................. 631 Figure402:EditTemplatedialogforediting ............................................................................................ 632 Figure403:DefaultConfigurationTemplateMappingdialog .................................................................. 633 Figure404:DeleteTemplatewindow....................................................................................................... 636 Figure405:WarningpopupforDeletetemplateoperation ................................................................... 636 Figure406:CloneDevicedialog................................................................................................................ 637 Figure407:CloneDevicedialog,tableofattributesandvalues .............................................................. 639 Figure408:SelectTaskTypedialog .......................................................................................................... 654 Figure409:CreateScheduleTaskdialogforalltasksexceptConfigurationandReports........................ 655 Figure410:CreateScheduleTaskdialogforaConfigurationorReportstask,Scheduletab................... 656 Figure411:CreateScheduleTaskdialogforaConfigurationorReportstask,Devicestab..................... 657 Figure412:AddDevicewindow ............................................................................................................... 658 Figure413:DeviceGroupswindow .......................................................................................................... 659 Figure414:Individualdevicesselectedforremoval ................................................................................ 660 Figure415:SpecificTypedropdownlistforBasicDynamicSelection .................................................... 661 Figure416:ConfigurationAttributedropdownlistforBasicDynamicSelection.................................... 662 Figure417:PerformanceAttributedropdownlistforBasicDynamicSelection..................................... 663 Figure418:AddAdvancedCriteriawindow,readyforDevicePropertiesselections .............................. 664 Figure419:AddAdvancedCriteriawindow,selectableDeviceProperties.............................................. 665 Figure420:AddAdvancedCriteriawindow,ConfigurationAttributesforasubsetofSpecificTypes .... 666 Figure421:CreateScheduleTaskwindow,Detailstablistingconfigurationtemplates.......................... 667 Figure422:CreateScheduleTaskwindow,Detailstabopentoaconfigurationtemplate ..................... 668 Figure423:CreateScheduleTaskdialog,Scheduletabfornonrecurringtask ....................................... 670 Figure424:CreateScheduleTaskdialog,Scheduletabforaminutebasedtask .................................... 671 Figure425:CreateScheduleTaskdialog,Scheduletabforanhourlytask .............................................. 672 Figure426:CreateScheduleTaskdialog,Scheduletabforadailytask ................................................... 673

Figure427:CreateScheduleTaskdialog,Scheduletabforaweeklytask ............................................... 674 Figure428:CreateScheduleTaskdialog,Scheduletabforamonthlytask ............................................. 675 Figure429:ScheduledTasksviewforSYSTEMownedtasks.................................................................... 676 Figure430:ScheduledTasksviewforuserownedtasks.......................................................................... 677 Figure431:EditScheduledTaskdialog..................................................................................................... 677 Figure432:Resultstabforascheduledtask ............................................................................................ 678 Figure433:ReportResultwindowforreporttaskexecution .................................................................. 678 Figure434:OptionsforanActivetask...................................................................................................... 679 Figure435:PausedtaskinScheduledTasktableview ............................................................................. 680 Figure436:MarkforCleanUpoptioninScheduletabfortasks.............................................................. 681 Figure437:OptionsforanInactivetask ................................................................................................... 681 Figure438:BroadcastMessagedialog ..................................................................................................... 683 Figure439:Clients'Detailswindow.......................................................................................................... 685 Figure440:WMServerpanelofWMAdministratorTool........................................................................ 686 Figure441:BAMpanelofWMAdministratorTool .................................................................................. 687 Figure442:DatabasepanelofWMAdministratorTool........................................................................... 688 Figure443:LicensingpanelofWMAdministratorTool ........................................................................... 689 Figure444:UploadLicenseFiledialog...................................................................................................... 690 Figure445:LicenseManagerStatusdisplaywindow ............................................................................... 691 Figure446:NBIpanelofWMAdministratorTool,activeSNMPV3settings ........................................... 692 Figure447:NBIpanelofWMAdministratorTool,activeSNMPV1/V2settings ..................................... 693 Figure448:OfflinePhysicalMappanelofWMAdministratorTool ......................................................... 694 Figure449:EmailConfigurationpanelofWMAdministratorTool .......................................................... 695 Figure450:LoggingConfigurationpanel .................................................................................................. 697 Figure451:ViewingtheLogDetailsdialog ............................................................................................... 699 Figure452:Loggingconfigurationwindow,LogSettings,firstframe ...................................................... 700 Figure453:Loggingconfigurationwindow,LogSettings,secondframe ................................................. 702 Figure454:CollectedstatisticswindowwithJVMmonitoringhistoryplotted........................................ 704 Figure455:LoginwebpageofWirelessManagerUltralight.................................................................... 705 Figure456:What'sUpwebpage .............................................................................................................. 706 Figure457:SMDevicespecificwebpage,top ......................................................................................... 708 Figure458:Devicespecificwebpage,middle.......................................................................................... 709 Figure459:SummaryViewinWirelessManagerUltralight..................................................................... 710

Figure460:Alarms(Major)webpageinWirelessManagerUltralight .................................................... 711 Figure461:Events(Critical)webpageinWirelessManagerUltralight ................................................... 711 Figure462:IndividualdeviceblockinWirelessManagerUltralight ........................................................ 711 Figure463:InventoryviewinWirelessManagerUltralight ..................................................................... 713 Figure464:Alarms(All)viewinWirelessManagerUltralight .................................................................. 714 Figure465:Events(All)viewinWirelessManagerUltralight................................................................... 715 Figure466:LogsavailablefromWirelessManagerUltralight.................................................................. 716 Figure467:SupportToolOptionswindow ............................................................................................... 752 Figure468:CustomerSupportTooldialog,GeneralInformationtab ...................................................... 753 Figure469:ChooseaFilewindowforadditionalfilestosendtoCustomerSupport .............................. 756 Figure470:CustomerSupportTooldialog,DevicestabwithAddselected............................................. 758 Figure471:SavedSupportFileswindow .................................................................................................. 760

List of Tables
Table1:Structuredinformationresourcespergeneraldevicetype.......................................................... 51 Table2:Troubleshootingclientloginissues ............................................................................................... 75 Table3:Commontoolbaroptions .............................................................................................................. 79 Table4:Applicationstreenodes ................................................................................................................ 89 Table5:Inputstringvs.resulttypesforSearchutility ............................................................................... 95 Table6:Tablenavigationbuttons ............................................................................................................ 105 Table7:Treenodepropertiesforeventfilterview.................................................................................. 137 Table8:Referencesforcommoncommandoptions................................................................................ 140 Table9:Referencesforspecialcommandoptions................................................................................... 141 Table10:Commandoptionsfromanetworkelementdashboard .......................................................... 221 Table11:WhenBAMchangesforsubscribersareeffective .................................................................... 266 Table12:BandwidthandVLANelementattributes ................................................................................. 268 Table13:HowVLANsettingsareappliedtoanSM.................................................................................. 277 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreports ............................................................................................... 341 Table15:Preconfiguredeventmessagesandtheirseverities ................................................................. 350 Table16:Generaldiscoveryevents .......................................................................................................... 350 Table17:Multiagentdiscoveryevents.................................................................................................... 352 Table18:Singleagentdiscoveryevent .................................................................................................... 352 Table19:Fileimportevent ....................................................................................................................... 352 Table20:Eventdetails .............................................................................................................................. 353 Table21:Eventfiltercustomviewcriteriafields...................................................................................... 359 Table22:Wildcardcharactersforcriteriafields...................................................................................... 360 Table23:Treenodepropertiesforeventfilterview................................................................................ 364 Table24:Alarmdetailsproperties............................................................................................................ 369 Table25:Alarmfiltercustomviewcriteriafields ..................................................................................... 375 Table26:ConfiguredCollectionproperties .............................................................................................. 385 Table27:DifferentiatingCurrentandHistoricalData .............................................................................. 386 Table28:Alternativesforviewingthevaluesofastatistic ...................................................................... 386 Table29:Possiblemessagesinacurrentperformancedatagraph ......................................................... 388 Table30:PossiblemessagesforaCollectedstatisticswindow................................................................ 389 Table31:APperformancereports............................................................................................................ 391

Table32:PMP320APperformancereports ............................................................................................ 391 Table33:SMperformancereports........................................................................................................... 392 Table34:PMP320CPEperformancereports .......................................................................................... 393 Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereports ......................................................................................... 394 Table36:PTPperformancereports .......................................................................................................... 394 Table37:Formatfordevicediscoveryinformationimport...................................................................... 401 Table38:Initialdiscoveryparameters...................................................................................................... 408 Table39:Discoveryintervalparameters .................................................................................................. 412 Table40:SNMPconfigurationparameters............................................................................................... 414 Table41:Usericons .................................................................................................................................. 438 Table42:Formatforuseraccountinformationimport............................................................................ 439 Table43:Auditentriesforuseractivityevents ........................................................................................ 455 Table44:AuthorizedCustomViewScopesvalueoperators .................................................................... 464 Table45:Configurationoptions ............................................................................................................... 471 Table46:Eventsoptions........................................................................................................................... 472 Table47:Policyoptions ............................................................................................................................ 472 Table48:PollFiltersoptions..................................................................................................................... 473 Table49:PollingObjectoptions ............................................................................................................... 473 Table50:PollingUnitsoptions ................................................................................................................. 474 Table51:Provisioningoptions.................................................................................................................. 474 Table52:AdministrativeOperation,Servicesoptions ............................................................................. 475 Table53:AdministrativeOperation,Securityoptions.............................................................................. 477 Table54:OtherAdministrativeOperationsoptions................................................................................. 478 Table55:ConfigurationReportsoptions .................................................................................................. 479 Table56:ThresholdObjectoptions.......................................................................................................... 479 Table57:Topologyoptions....................................................................................................................... 480 Table58:TrapParsersandFiltersoptions................................................................................................ 481 Table59:Alertsoptions ............................................................................................................................ 482 Table60:TaskSchedulerOperationoptions ............................................................................................ 483 Table61:DeviceToolsoptions ................................................................................................................. 483 Table62:TrapParserConfigurationfields ............................................................................................... 494 Table63:TrapProtocolDataUnitfields................................................................................................... 496 Table64:EventParserfields..................................................................................................................... 503

Table65:Eventproperties........................................................................................................................ 505 Table66:MatchCriteriafields.................................................................................................................. 513 Table67:MatchCriteriafields,Advanceddialogfields............................................................................ 513 Table68:SuppressActionDetailsdialogfields ........................................................................................ 516 Table69:RunCommandNotificationdialogfields .................................................................................. 517 Table70:SendTrapActiondialogfields................................................................................................... 519 Table71:SendEmailActionDetailsdialogfields ..................................................................................... 521 Table72:Emailalertmessageproperties................................................................................................. 528 Table73:AlarmMatchCriteriafields ....................................................................................................... 531 Table74:MatchcriteriaPropertiesfields................................................................................................. 531 Table75:Commonparameters ................................................................................................................ 553 Table76:CommonDataIdentifierproperties.......................................................................................... 554 Table77:DataCollectionDetailedPropertiesfields,firstform ................................................................ 562 Table78:DataCollectionDetailedPropertiesfields,secondform ........................................................... 565 Table79:Howmanyandwhattypeofthresholdtoadd ......................................................................... 572 Table80:Waystoassociatestatisticswiththresholds............................................................................. 572 Table81:DatacollectionThresholdindicators ........................................................................................ 573 Table82:ThresholdPropertiesfields ....................................................................................................... 577 Table83:Performancecustomviewcriteriafields,firstform ................................................................. 595 Table84:Performancecustomviewcriteriafields,secondform ............................................................ 597 Table85:Performancecustomviewcriteriafields,thirdform................................................................ 599 Table86:Configurabletaskprerequisites,requirements,andoptions ................................................... 650 Table87:Optionsforschedulingoftasks................................................................................................. 669 Table88:LogSettingspanelfields,firstframe......................................................................................... 701 Table89:LogSettingspanelfields,secondframe.................................................................................... 702 Table90:SupportDetaillevels ................................................................................................................. 755

List of Procedures
Procedure1:TolaunchWM ....................................................................................................................... 64 Procedure2:Toconfigureyourpasswordpriortoclientconnection........................................................ 74 Procedure3:Toreconfigureyourpassword .............................................................................................. 75 Procedure4:Toviewarangeofdetails ................................................................................................... 106 Procedure5:Toexportdevicediscoveryinformation ............................................................................. 111 Procedure6:Toexportuseraccountinformation ................................................................................... 113 Procedure7:Toexportnetworkhierarchyinformation .......................................................................... 115 Procedure8:Toexporttopologydata...................................................................................................... 138 Procedure9:ToviewanInventoryelementinthecontextofaphysicalmap ........................................ 156 Procedure10:Toviewanelementinacluster ........................................................................................ 158 Procedure11:Toviewlinkedelementswithinthesamephysicalmap................................................... 159 Procedure12:Toexportaphysicalmap .................................................................................................. 187 Procedure13:Tosetstatuspollingforaspecificdevicetype.................................................................. 198 Procedure14:Toviewdevicedetails ....................................................................................................... 200 Procedure15:Toviewcomponentdetails ............................................................................................... 202 Procedure16:Tovieweventsgeneratedforadevice ............................................................................. 203 Procedure17:Toviewalarmsgeneratedforadevice ............................................................................. 204 Procedure18:Toviewperformancedataofadevice.............................................................................. 205 Procedure19:Toimportacustomercontactdatabase ........................................................................... 242 Procedure20:Tocomposeacustomerdevice(s)record......................................................................... 244 Procedure21:Toeditacustomerdevice(s)record ................................................................................. 248 Procedure22:Tosetcredentialsforaselectedgroupofdevices............................................................ 251 Procedure23:ToperformalinkcapacitytestinanSM........................................................................... 252 Procedure24:TousetheSpectrumAnalyzerfeature.............................................................................. 256 Procedure25:Toopenadevicewebinterface ........................................................................................ 259 Procedure26:Todeleteadeviceandallinformationaboutit ................................................................ 264 Procedure27:ToconfigureAPsforauthenticationmanagement........................................................... 266 Procedure28:Todefineaserviceplan..................................................................................................... 270 Procedure29:Toapplyaserviceplan ...................................................................................................... 273 Procedure30:Toupdateaserviceplan ................................................................................................... 275 Procedure31:Toremoveabandwidthserviceplanassociation ............................................................. 276

Procedure32:Toremoveaserviceplan .................................................................................................. 276 Procedure33:TodefineaVLANprofile ................................................................................................... 278 Procedure34:ToapplyaVLANprofile ..................................................................................................... 281 Procedure35:ToupdateaVLANprofile .................................................................................................. 283 Procedure36:ToremoveaVLANprofileassociation .............................................................................. 284 Procedure37:ToremoveaVLANprofile ................................................................................................. 284 Procedure38:TouploadaAAAcertificate............................................................................................... 287 Procedure39:Tocreateadynamicdevicegroup .................................................................................... 307 Procedure40:Tomodifyadynamicdevicegroup ................................................................................... 310 Procedure41:Tocreateastaticdevicegroup ......................................................................................... 311 Procedure42:Toaddoneormoredevicestoanexistingdevicegroup ................................................. 316 Procedure43:Toremoveadevicefromadevicegroup.......................................................................... 317 Procedure44:Toremoveadevicegroup................................................................................................. 321 Procedure45:Tosetconfigurationpollingforaspecificdevicetype...................................................... 324 Procedure46:Toimportconfigurationreporttemplates........................................................................ 326 Procedure47:Toaccessaconfigurationreporttemplate ....................................................................... 327 Procedure48:Tocreateaconfigurationreport....................................................................................... 328 Procedure49:Torunaconfigurationreport............................................................................................ 334 Procedure50:Tofindaconfigurationreporttemplate ........................................................................... 336 Procedure51:Toeditaconfigurationreport........................................................................................... 337 Procedure52:Toexportasingleconfigurationreporttemplate............................................................. 339 Procedure53:Toexportallconfigurationreporttemplates.................................................................... 339 Procedure54:Todeleteaconfigurationreport....................................................................................... 339 Procedure55:Tovieweventdetails......................................................................................................... 352 Procedure56:Tofindanevent ................................................................................................................ 355 Procedure57:ToviewothereventsthathavethesameFailureObject ................................................. 356 Procedure58:Toexportevents................................................................................................................ 365 Procedure59:Toprinteventstotheserverprinter................................................................................. 365 Procedure60:Toviewalarmdetails ........................................................................................................ 368 Procedure61:Toviewrelatedevents ...................................................................................................... 370 Procedure62:TopickupanalarmfromtheAlarmsview ....................................................................... 370 Procedure63:TopickupanalarmfromtheAlarmsdetailsdialog ......................................................... 371 Procedure64:TounpickanalarmfromtheAlarmsview ........................................................................ 371

Procedure65:TounpickanalarmfromtheAlarmdetailsdialog ............................................................ 371 Procedure66:Toaddcommentstoanalarm .......................................................................................... 372 Procedure67:Toviewthehistoryofanalarm......................................................................................... 373 Procedure68:Toviewbothannotationandhistoryofanalarm............................................................. 373 Procedure69:Toclearatriggeredalarm ................................................................................................. 379 Procedure70:Tosetperformancepollingofaspecificdevicetypeforitsextraneousvalues ............... 382 Procedure71:Toviewperformancedatacollectiondetails .................................................................... 384 Procedure72:Toimportsystemreports.................................................................................................. 398 Procedure73:ToinvoketheDiscoveryConfigurator............................................................................... 403 Procedure74:Todisableautodiscovery ................................................................................................. 404 Procedure75:Torediscoverpreviouslydiscoverednodes ...................................................................... 405 Procedure76:Topreventlocalnetworkdiscovery .................................................................................. 405 Procedure77:Tosetthediscoveryinterval ............................................................................................. 406 Procedure78:Tosetinitialdiscoveryparameters ................................................................................... 407 Procedure79:TosettherediscoveryatRegularInterval ........................................................................ 409 Procedure80:Tosetrediscoveryonspecificdates ................................................................................. 410 Procedure81:Tosetrediscoveryonspecificdays ................................................................................... 411 Procedure82:ToconfigureSNMPProperties .......................................................................................... 413 Procedure83:ToconfigurediscoveryforanetworkofdevicessettoallowSNMPv1andv3access..... 415 Procedure84:ToconfigurediscoveryforanetworkofdevicessettoallowonlySNMPv3access......... 415 Procedure85:Toenablediscoveryofremotenetworks ......................................................................... 417 Procedure86:Todiscoveronlyarangeofaddressesinanetwork ......................................................... 418 Procedure87:ToenableDHCPsupport ................................................................................................... 418 Procedure88:TodiscoverSNMPv1orv2cdevicesinanetwork............................................................. 419 Procedure89:TodiscoverSNMPv3devicesinanetwork........................................................................ 420 Procedure90:TosetanetworkspecificSNMPv3configurationfordiscovery ....................................... 422 Procedure91:ToconfigurediscoveryofaspecificIPaddress................................................................. 424 Procedure92:TodiscovernodeswhereLocalNetisdisabled ................................................................. 425 Procedure93:TodiscoverSNMPdeviceswithspecificcommunityandport ......................................... 425 Procedure94:TodiscoverspecificSNMPv3devices................................................................................ 426 Procedure95:TosetadevicespecificSNMPv3configurationfordiscovery .......................................... 426 Procedure96:Topreventthediscoveryofaspecificnetwork ................................................................ 427 Procedure97:Topreventthediscoveryofanunlisteddevice ................................................................ 428

Procedure98:Topreventthediscoveryofalisteddevice ...................................................................... 428 Procedure99:TodisallowdiscoverywheretypeisSUNandnameisA(example) ................................. 429 Procedure100:Todiscoverdeviceswithspecificproperties................................................................... 431 Procedure101:TodiscoveronlySNMPnodes ......................................................................................... 432 Procedure102:TodiscoveronlytheobjectcorrespondingtoaspecificIP............................................. 433 Procedure103:TolaunchtheSecurityAdministrationtool .................................................................... 437 Procedure104:Toaddanewuser ........................................................................................................... 441 Procedure105:Tochangeauserprofile.................................................................................................. 447 Procedure106:Toassigngroupstoauser............................................................................................... 449 Procedure107:Tochangeauserpassword ............................................................................................. 450 Procedure108:Todeleteauser............................................................................................................... 452 Procedure109:Toviewaudittrailsofallusers........................................................................................ 453 Procedure110:Toviewaudittrailsofasingleuser................................................................................. 455 Procedure111:Toaddagroup ................................................................................................................ 458 Procedure112:Toassignausertoagroup.............................................................................................. 460 Procedure113:Todeleteauserfromagroup......................................................................................... 461 Procedure114:Toaddacustomviewscope ........................................................................................... 462 Procedure115:Toassignanauthorizedcustomviewscope ................................................................... 465 Procedure116:Toremoveanauthorizedcustomviewscope ................................................................ 466 Procedure117:Tochangethepropertiesofanauthorizedscope .......................................................... 467 Procedure118:Todeleteanauthorizedcustomviewscope................................................................... 467 Procedure119:Todeleteagroup ............................................................................................................ 468 Procedure120:Toassignoperationsforagroup..................................................................................... 484 Procedure121:Toassignpermittedoperationsforauser...................................................................... 486 Procedure122:Toaddanoperation ........................................................................................................ 487 Procedure123:Todeleteanoperation.................................................................................................... 488 Procedure124:ToopentheTrapParserConfigurationtool ................................................................... 492 Procedure125:ToaddaTrapParser ....................................................................................................... 493 Procedure126:ToreordertheConfiguredTrapParserList..................................................................... 499 Procedure127:ToviewdetailsofaTrapParser ...................................................................................... 499 Procedure128:TomodifyaTrapParser .................................................................................................. 500 Procedure129:TodeleteaTrapParser ................................................................................................... 501 Procedure130:ToopentheEventParserConfigurationtool.................................................................. 502

Procedure131:ToaddanEventParser.................................................................................................... 502 Procedure132:ToreordertheConfiguredEventParserList................................................................... 507 Procedure133:ToloadanEventParserfile............................................................................................. 508 Procedure134:TomodifyanEventParser .............................................................................................. 509 Procedure135:TosaveanEventParserfile ............................................................................................ 510 Procedure136:TodeleteanEventParser ............................................................................................... 510 Procedure137:ToopentheEventFiltersdialog...................................................................................... 512 Procedure138:ToaddanEventFilterCriteriaPhase ........................................................................... 512 Procedure139:ToaddanEventFilterAdditionalCriteriaPhase.......................................................... 514 Procedure140:ToaddanEventFilterNotificationPhase .................................................................... 515 Procedure141:Toaddavarbind.............................................................................................................. 520 Procedure142:Tomodifyavarbind ........................................................................................................ 520 Procedure143:ToreordertheEventFilterlist ........................................................................................ 524 Procedure144:ToloadanEventFilterfile............................................................................................... 524 Procedure145:TomodifythematchcriteriaofanEventFilter .............................................................. 525 Procedure146:TomodifythenotificationsinanEventFilter ................................................................. 525 Procedure147:Todeleteaneventfilter.................................................................................................. 526 Procedure148:Todeleteafilternotification........................................................................................... 526 Procedure149:ToopentheAlarmFilterConfigurationTool .................................................................. 527 Procedure150:ToaddanAlarmFilter,examplesteps............................................................................ 528 Procedure151:ToaddanAlarmFilter,criteriaphase ............................................................................. 530 Procedure152:ToaddanAlarmFilter,additionalcriteriaphase............................................................ 532 Procedure153:ToaddanAlarmFilter,notificationsphase .................................................................... 533 Procedure154:ToreordertheAlertFilters ............................................................................................. 533 Procedure155:ToloadanAlertFilterfile................................................................................................ 534 Procedure156:TomodifythematchcriteriaforanAlarmFilter ............................................................ 534 Procedure157:TomodifythenotificationsforanAlarmFilter............................................................... 535 Procedure158:Todeleteanalarmfilter.................................................................................................. 535 Procedure159:Todeleteafilternotification........................................................................................... 535 Procedure160:Todeleteatriggeredalarm............................................................................................. 536 Procedure161:Toassignfaultmanagementprivileges(examplecase).................................................. 537 Procedure162:TocreateaPollingObject ............................................................................................... 548 Procedure163:TospecifyamatchcriteriaviaManagedObjectproperties ........................................... 551

Procedure164:TomodifyaPollingObject .............................................................................................. 557 Procedure165:TodeleteaPollingObject ............................................................................................... 560 Procedure166:Toaddstatisticsatruntime............................................................................................. 561 Procedure167:Tofindastatistic ............................................................................................................. 568 Procedure168:TomodifyanexistingStatistic......................................................................................... 568 Procedure169:TodeleteaStatistic ......................................................................................................... 570 Procedure170:TomodifythepropertiesofExtendedPolledData ......................................................... 570 Procedure171:Toaddathreshold .......................................................................................................... 573 Procedure172:Topreparetomapathreshold ....................................................................................... 579 Procedure173:Tomapathresholdforanindividualdevice................................................................... 580 Procedure174:Toaddthresholdstoastatistic ....................................................................................... 582 Procedure175:Tomapathresholdforaspecifictypedevice ................................................................ 584 Procedure176:Tomapathresholdforadevicetype ............................................................................. 585 Procedure177:ToassociatethresholdswithaPollingObjectforadevicetype..................................... 586 Procedure178:Tomodifyathreshold ..................................................................................................... 591 Procedure179:Todeleteathreshold ...................................................................................................... 592 Procedure180:Tocreateathresholdforadevice .................................................................................. 593 Procedure181:Toscheduleapolicy ........................................................................................................ 609 Procedure182:Toupdateapolicy ........................................................................................................... 610 Procedure183:Toconfigureadevice ...................................................................................................... 613 Procedure184:Toimportaconfigurationtemplate................................................................................ 621 Procedure185:Toimportconfigurationtemplates ................................................................................. 622 Procedure186:Tocreateaconfigurationtemplate ................................................................................ 623 Procedure187:Toapplyanexistingconfigurationtemplate .................................................................. 628 Procedure188:Tofindaconfigurationtemplate .................................................................................... 630 Procedure189:Toeditaconfigurationtemplate .................................................................................... 631 Procedure190:Tosetupautomaticconfigurationupondiscovery ........................................................ 633 Procedure191:Toexportaconfigurationtemplate ................................................................................ 635 Procedure192:Toexportallconfigurationtemplates............................................................................. 636 Procedure193:Todeleteaconfigurationtemplate ................................................................................ 636 Procedure194:Tocloneadeviceconfiguration ...................................................................................... 637 Procedure195:LaunchingaBAMsession ................................................................................................ 642 Procedure196:TolaunchTaskScheduler................................................................................................ 654

Procedure197:TodefineaConfigurationtask ........................................................................................ 655 Procedure198:Toviewconfiguredtasks................................................................................................. 676 Procedure199:Toviewresultsoflastexecutionofatask ...................................................................... 677 Procedure200:Toeditataskdefinition................................................................................................... 679 Procedure201:Torescheduleataskexecution....................................................................................... 680 Procedure202:Topauseatask................................................................................................................ 680 Procedure203:Toresumeatask ............................................................................................................. 680 Procedure204:Tocancelautomaticdeletionofatask ........................................................................... 681 Procedure205:Todeleteatask ............................................................................................................... 681 Procedure206:Tostopatask .................................................................................................................. 682 Procedure207:ToBroadcastamessage.................................................................................................. 683 Procedure208:ToreconfigureofflinephysicalmapimagesinWM........................................................ 694 Procedure209:Toconfigureserverandadminemailsettings ................................................................ 696 Procedure210:ToopentheLogFileConfigurationtool.......................................................................... 696 Procedure211:Toviewlogfiledetails ..................................................................................................... 698 Procedure212:Tomodifylogfiledetails ................................................................................................. 699 Procedure213:TologintotheWirelessManagerUltralight .................................................................. 705

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

About This User Guide

ThisCambiumWirelessManagerRelease4.0UserGuidedescribesandprovidesproceduresfor operationsintheWirelessManager(WM)clientinterfaceforRelease4.0.Ifyouareaclient administratororuser,usetheuserguide.OnlyauthorizeduserscanlogintoaWMclientandaccess specificfeatures,basedonassigneduserprivileges.Contactyoursystemadministratorforhelpwith yourauthorizeduserprivileges. Devicespecificinformationisprovidedinthedocumentsthatsupportthedevices.Thisincludes definitionsforconfigurableattributes.However,thisWMuserguidedescribeshowto 1. 2. composeaconfigurationtemplate,assumingthatyouknowwhatattributesandvaluesyou wanttoconfigure useWMtopushthosevaluestotheelements.

Allinformationpertainingtooperationsontheclient(thoseoperationsthatareauthorizedor disallowedbytheOperationTree)isprovidedinthisuserguide,regardlessofthepermission requiredtoperformthem. Thisconstructionforthisuserguideallowsclientadministratorstousethewholebookandallofits crossreferences,whethertheselinktocomplexandrestrictedoperationsortosimpleoperations thatareuniversallypermittedacrosstheoperatingstaff.Atthesametime,userswithrelativelylow permissionscanviewproceduresthatonlyclientadministratorscanexecute.Therichsecurity featuresofWMmakethisapracticaldesignfortheuserguide. Asyouacquaintyourselfwiththetableofcontentsoftheuserguide,youwillseesectiontitles transitionfromhavingwordslikeusingandmonitoringtohavingwordslikeadministeringand managing.Giventhecomplexityofuserandgroupaccountprovisioning(intheOperationTree)and thevariedtacksthatoperatorsmaytakeintheirWMsecuritydesigns,noattemptismadetoclearly partitiontheuserguidewhereeverythingsituatedafterapartitionappliestoonlyclient administrators.

1.1

New in This Issue

ThefollowingchangesaremadeforIssue4ofthisguide: LinkstoOtherImportantDocumentsonPage49isupdatedtocommunicatethenewURLs severalCambiumNetworkswebpages. AnadmonishmenthasbeenaddedtoSettingtheGeneralConfigurationonPage291tostate thatSMautoupdateissupportedforSMswhoseNetworkAccessibilityparameter(intheIP taboftheSM'sConfigurationmanagementwebpage)issettoLocal,notPublic. AuditingConfigurationTasksonPage679isaddedtodescribetheviewthatWMprovidesof configurationtasks.NewinthisfeatureistheadditionofUserNametocorrelateeachtask totheuserwhodefinedthetask.

45

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

1.2

Continuing Features
Release4.0continuesfullconfigurationandongoingmanagementcapabilitiesfortherangeof productsthatarelistedunderCambiumNetworksDeviceTypesonPage51andfornonCambium devicesforwhichoperatorscreatetheirownvaliddevicedefinitiontemplates.Italsocollectsand displayseventsandalarmsfortheCambiumPointtoPoint(PTP)andPointtoMultipoint(PMP) products,thusprovidingaconsolidatedviewofthestatusoftheCambiumnetworksinasingle screen. WMRelease4.0continuesthecapabilitytooverlaynetworkelementsontoanembeddedGoogle map.Mapslikethisallowyoutovisualizeandanalyzeawiderangeofcrucialinformation,including connectivitybetweennodes,linkquality,range,anddeviceandnetworkavailability.Thesegraphical representationshelpyouquicklyseenetworkstatus,identifyanyproblems,andassesstheseverityof impacttheywillhaveonthenetworkanditsusers. Thisreleasehasalsokeptstridewithchangesindevicetemplatesforelementsthatithassupported andwithnewtemplatesforelementsthatareintroducedsincethelastrelease. ThisdocumentisintendedtosupportonlyRelease4.0ofWM.Allinformationpertainingto operationsontheclient(thoseoperationsthatareauthorizedordisallowedbytheOperationTree), aredescribedhereintheuserguide,regardlessofthepermissionrequiredtoperformthem.
important ........... The installation tool for the WM server deposits an issue of the Cambium Wireless Manager Release 4.0 Server Administration Guide and the Cambium Wireless Manager Release 4.0 User Guide into the ...server/help directory on the WM server. These documents are placeholders. Immediately after your server installation is completed, visit http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/planning/index.php?cat=1&type=0. If a later iteration of either or both of these documents is present there, download it and delete the superseded book. Throughout the life of Release 4.0, this web site will always contain the latest supporting documents. Whenever the issue number available at this site is greater than what you currently have, you need to download the replacement.

1.3

Features New in Release 4.0

Release4.0introducesthefollowingfeatures: auserinterfaceforcloningdeviceconfigurationswithvalues,fromeitheraselecteddevice orthedatabase,eitherpushedtodestinationdevicesofthesamedevicetypeorsavedtoa templateyouwilllaterpushtothem,withouttouchingattributesthatshouldbeexcluded fromcloning;forexample,without thosethatarenotreadablefromthesource,suchaskeysandpasswords. othersthatcouldfailtheoperation,suchasDeviceRegionCodeandDeviceDefault Reset. optionally,thosethatshouldinmostcasesremainunique,suchasIP,DHCP,NAT,and bridgemodeattributes.

SeeCloningaDeviceConfigurationonPage637. asystemconfiguredviewofeventsthatarerelatedtodiscovery.SeeViewingAllEvents RelatedtoDiscoveryonPage356.

46

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

devicetypegraphicalsummaryreports.See Table32:PMP320APperformancereportsonPage391 Table34:PMP320CPEperformancereportsonPage393 Table31:APperformancereportsonPage391 Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereportsonPage394 Table33:SMperformancereportsonPage392 Table33:SMperformancereportsonPage392 Table36:PTPperformancereportsonPage394

supportformultipledefaultconfigurationtemplatesperdevicetypetobeappliedduring discovery.SeePushingConfigurationValuesUponDiscoveryonPage633. addedsupportfor PTP250MasterandSlaveasreadonlyelements PTP300,PTP500,andPTP800MasterandSlaveasVersion0500.Seethecaveatin ClarificationsonPage48. PTP400MasterandSlaveasVersion0901. moreattributesoftheExtremeSwitch. PMP320Releasee2.3.FortheAP,thisincludes NetworkConfigurationattributesforSNMPversion(v1/2corv3),webaccess security(HTTPSorHTTP),andserialinterface(CLIoruGPS). readonlyattributesforGPSlocation,theactiveserviceflowcount,andthe frequencyrangeandrestrictionmodeoftheAP. performancetablesforULandDLMCScountersofregisteredCPE'sMCSandHARQ stats. aframeutilizationtableusedbythenativeFrameUtilizationtoolinWMbuthidden fromuserconfigurationtemplates. updatestotheUploadAAACertificateutility,tablesforusermanagementandtrap destinations,andtheSlotsMeasurement,MACVersion,backoffvalues(forDL,UL, andECINER),SyncSource,SelectedDL/ULRatio,andSyncStatusattributes. commandsthatSaveConfigurationCommand,RebootDevice,Clear[serviceflow] Counters,andClear[MCS]Statistics. introductionofperformancestatisticsforthefollowingdata: received/transmitdatarate receivedIPpacketswithandwithoutVLANtag receivednonIPpacketswithandwithoutVLANtag receivedpacketsclassifiedandunclassified DLandULMCSstateofeachregisteredCPE antennamethodofeachregisteredCPE.

eliminationoftheneedforoperatorstohavetheirownphysicalmaplicenses.Thisis reflectedinAboutLicenseTabonPage82. ameanstoterminatearogueorrunawayclientsessionwhileotherconcurrentsessions continue.SeeTerminatingaClientSessiononPage685.

47

Issue 4 August 2012 changesintheintegratedsoftwareupgradeutility.See UpgradingDevicesOnDemandonPage289. SettingtheGeneralConfigurationonPage291. SettingtheSMAutoupdateConfigurationonPage292.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

synchronizationfunctions(buttons)addedtotheWMServerpaneloftheWMAdministrator Tooltolaunchremovalofallevents,alarms,andtrapsinprocess,whileleavingallelements' statisticsuntouched.SeeUsingtheWMServerPanelonPage686. removaloftrapportconfigurabilityandtrapparserinterfaces. removaloftheSystemAdministrationwebinterface.

1.4

Clarifications
NewOIDsareimplementedinv0500forPTP300andPTP500locationattributes.SeeResetting LocationAttributesforPTP300andPTP500DevicesonPage299. Theorderinwhichuserpermissionsaresetdeterminewhichpermissionsareallowedandwhichare disallowed.Also,thesystemdoesnotwarntheadministratorwhoconfiguresmultiplegroup membershipsforauserwhenthosegroupshavedifferingsetsofpermissions.Animportant admonishmenthasbeenaddedtoAdministeringWirelessManagerSecurityonPage437,describing thesescenarios.

1.5

References to Other WM Documents

Ifyouareaclientadministratororuser,usethisuserguide. AllinformationpertainingtotheWMserverfilesystemispresentedfortheserveradministratorin CambiumWirelessManager4.0QuickStartGuide,whichdocuments thesystemrequirements theprocedureforafreshinstallation clientdevicesetup SNMPbroadcasttoggling startingandstoppingtheWMservice launchingtheclient settingup,monitoring,andtroubleshootinginitialdiscovery licensingWMsoftwareandthephysicalmap portusage databaseadministration serversideadjustmentsfor discovery faultmanagement performancemanagement

CambiumWirelessManagerRelease4.0ServerAdministrationGuide,whichdocuments

48

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 securitymanagement physicalmapfeatures

serverlogs licensingandupgradingWMsoftware backingupthesystem usingtheMIBbrowser

ForhighleveldescriptionsofnewfeaturesincludedintheinitialdistributionofRelease4.0,orforall disclosuresaboutfeaturesthatthisdistributionsupports,seetheCambiumWirelessManager Release4.0ReleaseNotes. Ifyouareaserveradministrator,usetheCambiumWirelessManagerRelease4.0Server AdministrationGuide. ForBAMfeatureintegration,seethefollowingdocumentation: CambiumWirelessManager4.0QuickStartGuide CambiumWirelessManagerRelease4.0ServerAdministrationGuide UsingtheBandwidthandAuthenticationManager(BAM)SubsystemonPage264

1.6

Links to Other Important Documents

Forlinkstoimportantdocumentsaboutsupportednetworkelements,visitthefollowingwebpages: PTPdeviceandPTPLINKPlanneruserguidesandreleasenotesat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ptp/software/index.php?tag=linkplanner PMPdeviceuserguides,releasenotes,andMIBsat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/pmp/software/index.php awiderangeofPMP320devicedocumentsat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/pmp/software/index.php CMMuserguidesandreleasenotesat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/pmp/software/index.php

Forlinkstoimportantdocumentsaboutmanagementtools,visitthefollowingwebpages: WirelessManagerguides,releasenotes,andservicepacknotesat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/planning/index.php?cat=1&type=0 CambiumNetworkUpdaterTool(CNUT)onlinehelpfileandreleasenotesat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/planning/index.php?cat=3&type=0 Prizmguides,releasenotes,anditsSDKat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/planning/index.php?cat=2&type=0

Forlinkstonetworkelementfeaturesandspecifications,visitthefollowingwebpages. CambiumPTPandCambiumNetworksLINKPlannerat http://cambiumnetworks.com/support/ptp/software/index.php CambiumPMPathttp://cambiumnetworks.com/support/pmp/software/index.php

49

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Fordeclarationsofconformityforindividualnetworkelementsintheirvariousfrequencyband ranges,seehttp://www.cambiumnetworks.com/doc.php.

1.7

Feedback on This Guide

Weencouragefeedbackonourdocumentation,including Anopiniononthestructureorcontentofthedocuments. anotificationtousaboutadeficiencyinaccuracyorcompleteness. anyothercommentyouhave.

Pleasesendyourfeedbacktosupport@cambiumnetworks.com.

50

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

2
2.1

Supported Device Types

Cambium Networks Device Types
TheCambiumWirelessManagerReleaseNotesforRelease4.0providesthecompletelistofthe devicetypesthatthisreleasesupports,correlatedtotheirfirmwareversion(s)supportedandtheir devicetemplatefilenames.WMsupportseachofthesedevicetypeswithanetworkelements dashboard(seeViewingtheDashboardforaDeviceonPage206)andmostwithstructured informationresourcesasindicatedinTable1.

Table 1: Structured information resources per general device type

Predefined Structured Information Resource APBridgeTableSummary1 APEthernetStatistics1 APGeneralStatus1 APQoSSummary1 APRadioStatistics1 APSessionTableSummary1 APTop25Report1 APVLANConfiguration Summary1 Configuredvaluesreport template Defaultconfigurationvalues pushtemplate Devicedefinitiontemplate PMP320APEthernet Statistics1 General Device Type PMP PTP Generic Table31:APperformancereportson Page391 Table31:APperformancereportson Page391 Table31:APperformancereportson Page391 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table31:APperformancereportson Page391 Table31:APperformancereportson Page391 Table31:APperformancereportson Page391 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 AccessingaPredefinedReportonConfigured ValuesonPage327 PushingValuesfromaPrestructured ConfigurationTemplateonPage621 Serveradministrationguide Table32:PMP320APperformancereports onPage391 Documented In

51

Issue 4 August 2012 Predefined Structured Information Resource PMP320APGeneralStatus1 PMP320APGraphical SummaryReport1 PMP320APQoSSummary1 PMP320APRadio Statistics1 PMP320APServiceFlow Summary1 PMP320APTop25Report1 PMP320CPEEthernet Statistics1 PMP320CPEGeneral Status1 PMP320CPEGraphical SummaryReport1 PMP320CPERadio Statistics1 PMP320CPEServiceFlow Summary1 PMP320CPETop25 Report1 PMPAPGraphicalSummary Report1 PMPBackhaulBridgeTable Summary1 PMPBackhaulEthernet Statistics1 PMPBackhaulGeneral Status1 PMPBackhaulGraphical SummaryReport1 PMPBackhaulRadio Statistics1 General Device Type PMP PTP Generic

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Documented In Table32:PMP320APperformancereports onPage391 Table32:PMP320APperformancereports onPage391 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table32:PMP320APperformancereports onPage391 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table32:PMP320APperformancereports onPage391 Table34:PMP320CPEperformancereports onPage393 Table34:PMP320CPEperformancereports onPage393 Table34:PMP320CPEperformancereports onPage393 Table34:PMP320CPEperformancereports onPage393 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table34:PMP320CPEperformancereports onPage393 Table31:APperformancereportsonPage 391 Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereports onPage394 Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereports onPage394 Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereports onPage394 Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereports onPage394 Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereports onPage394

52

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 General Device Type PMP PTP Generic Table35:PMPBackhaulperformancereports onPage394 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table33:SMperformancereportsonPage 392 Table33:SMperformancereportsonPage 392 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table36:PTPperformancereportson Page394 Table36:PTPperformancereportson Page394 Table36:PTPperformancereportsonPage 394 Table36:PTPperformancereportson Page394 Table36:PTPperformancereportson Page394 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table33:SMperformancereportson Page392 Table33:SMperformancereportson Page392 Table33:SMperformancereportson Page392 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341 Table33:SMperformancereportson Page392

Predefined Structured Information Resource PMPBackhaulTop25 Report1 PMPBackhaulVLAN ConfigurationSummary1 PMPFSKSMGraphical SummaryReport1 PMPOFDMSMGraphical SummaryReport1 PTP800Bridge ConfigurationSummary1 PTPEthernetStatistics1 PTPGeneralStatus1 PTPGraphicalSummary Report1 PTPRadioStatistics1 PTPTop25Report1 PTPVLANConfiguration Summary1 SMBridgeTableSummary1 SMEthernetStatistics1 SMGeneralStatus1 SMQoSSummary1 SMRadioStatistics1

Documented In

53

Issue 4 August 2012 Predefined Structured Information Resource SMTop25Report1 SMVLANConfiguration Summary1 NOTES:
1.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

General Device Type PMP PTP Generic

Documented In Table33:SMperformancereportson Page392 Table14:ConfigurationSummaryreportson Page341

Optionallyloadedintotheclientapplicationbythenetworkoperator.

2.2

Generic Elements (Non-Cambium Devices)

WMdiscoversasagenericelementanySNMPenabled 1nonCambiumdeviceforwhichnovalid devicedefinitiontemplateexists.ThisisdistinguishedfromaCambiumdevices,forwhichadevice definitiontemplateispartoftheWMsoftwaredistribution,andfromanythirdpartydevices 2for whichtheoperatorhascreatedavaliddevicedefinitiontemplate. However,genericelementdiscoverydependsalsoonthefollowingworkaround.Checktosee whetherWMhasdiscoveredallofthegenericdevicesinthenetwork.ForanythatWMdidnot discover,theserveradministrationguideprovidesaworkaroundprocedure.TheresultisthatWM succeedsindiscoveringallgenericelementsinyournetwork.However,WMwillusetheMACaddress astheName(ID)ofanythatsupportandproperlyimplementDHCP. AgenericdevicethatWMdiscoverscountsagainstthenodelimitintheWMEMSPacklicense.Fora genericdevice,WMperformsthefollowingelementmanagementfunctions: discoveryregardlessofSNMPversion(v1,v2c,orv3) configurationofname,location,contactinformation,anddevicedescriptionandthe followinggeolocationattributes: latitude longitude heightabovetheground

collectionanddisplayofoperationalstateperformancestatistics(numberofports,inand outoctets,andinandouterrors) collectionandprocessingofcoldstart,linkup,linkdown,andauthenticationfailuretraps representationwiththegenericdeviceicon()in thephysicalmap theInventory theApplicationstree viewersforalarmsandevents

1 2

SupportingRFC1213MIB. CiscoRouterandCiscoSwitcharethirdpartydevicesforwhichtheWMdistributionprovidesvaliddevicedefinition templates.

54

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

WMalsoallowsthemtobemembersofuserdefineddevicegroups.WMkeepstheirIPaddresses andforeach,providesadashboard(asitdoesforCambiumdevicetypes)todisplaycurrentalarms andeventswithsomeconfiguredattributesandstatistics. ForWMtomanageadevice,itmustbeabletofindtheMACaddressofthatdeviceso,during rediscovery,WM 1. 2. probestheipAddrMIBtablefortheindextocheckintheifTable. queriestheifTableindextogettheMACaddress.

However,ifthisprocessfails,then WMfailstodiscoverthedevice. ifthedevicealreadyexistsindatabase,WMmovesittotheUnmanagedstateandthrowsan eventtoreportit.

SomegenericSNMPdevicesdonotfullysupporttheifaddrandipaddrMIBtables.AllowingWM tomanagesuchadevicerequiresthecreationofadevicetemplatethatexplicitlysupportsit.Before youattempttocreateatemplateforit,requestassistancefromCambiumNetworkssupportby callingtheappropriatephonenumberlistedat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/technical.phporsubmittingyourquestionintheform providedatthatwebsite. Meanwhile,youmayleavethedeviceinthisstateforhistoricalpurposes(topreservestatistics,for example)ordeleteitfromtheInventoryviatheDeleteObjectandTracescommandoption(see DeletinganObjectandTracesonPage263).

2.3

Subordinate WM Servers
TheWMservercanactasaManagerofManagers(MoM)whenoneormoreotherWMserversare withinitsnetwork.Inthisrole,itaggregatestheinformationthatitreceivesfromsubordinate(child) WMserversandfacilitatesthemanagementofaverylargenetwork.Specifically,theMoMserver discoversthesubordinateserver. pushesconfigurationstoit.SeeFigure391:ConfigurationgroupsforachildWMon Page618. providesaconfigurationreportaboutit.SeeCreatingandUsingDeviceConfiguration ReportsonPage325. encapsulatesitsstatusinanetworkelementdashboard.SeeFigure157:Dashboardfora childWMelementonPage220. receivesandprocessesitstrapsandalarms. providesadevicesummaryreportforit.SeeFigure161:Devicesummaryreportforachild WMelementonPage227.

55

Issue 4 August 2012 representsitintheInventoryandApplicationstree.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

representsitbypositioninthephysicalmap.

Aclientsessioninthesubordinateserverprovidesitsownstatisticsfromthesetthatitsendstothe MoMviatheproperlyconfigurednorthboundinterface(NBI).ToseethesestatisticsfromtheMoM, youcan 1. 2. 3. rightclickonthesubordinateserverintheInventoryandselectLaunchClient(orpress Ctrl+W). authenticateintotheclient. fromthemainmenu,selectHelpDiagnosticsServerHealthDiagnostics.

TheWMMonitoringwindowopensandprovidestimebasedplotsforeachofthefollowingstatistics: serverdiskfreespace diskusage diskI/O databasediskusage memoryutilization databasediskfreespace CPUutilization.

56

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 1: Server disk free space monitoring window for a child WM element

Figure 2: Disk usage monitoring window for a child WM element

57

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 3: Disk I/O monitoring window for a child WM element

Figure 4: Database disk usage monitoring window for a child WM element

58

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 5: Memory utilization monitoring window for a child WM element

Figure 6: Database disk free space monitoring window for a child WM element

59

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 7: CPU utilization monitoring window for a child WM element

Ifyouwish,youcankeepopenaninstanceoftheCollectedstatisticswindowforeachstatisticyou wanttomonitorforaslongastheclientsessionremainsopen. IntheMoMclient,subordinateserverElementPropertiesareavailablefromarightclickonthat server.SeeFigure8,Figure9,Figure10,andFigure11below.

60

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 8: Element Properties for a subordinate WM server, General tab

Figure 9: Element Properties for a subordinate WM server, SNMP tab

61

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 10: Element Properties for a subordinate WM server, Monitoring tab

Figure 11: Element Properties for a subordinate WM server, Relationship tab

62

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Launching the Client

TheWMclientaccessesinformationfromtheWMserveranddisplaysitgraphically.Youcanbrowse throughthediscovereddevicesinyournetwork,viewnetworkanddeviceinformation,monitortheir performance,andidentifyfaultsinthenetwork.

3.1

Dependencies
TheWMclientapplicationsupportsthe32bitplatformofeitherofthefollowingoperatingsystems: Windows7Professional,32bit. WindowsServer2008R2Enterprise RedHatEnterpriseLinuxVersion5.5ES,32bit.

TheclientislaunchedusingtheJavaWebStartApplicationManager.TheclientrequiresJava1.6, whichissatisfiedasfollows: WhereJava1.4.2orlaterispresentintheclientdevice,WMautomaticallyinstallsJava1.6. Where1.4.2orlaterisnotpresent,youmustinstallJava6andthenlaunchtheclient,which willthenuseJavaWebStarttoinstallitself.

Theclientrelatedjarfilesaredownloadedwhentheclientconnectstotheserverforthefirsttime. Everysubsequenttimetheclientconnectstothesameserver,WMverifiesthesedownloadedfiles forupdates. Thisclientdevicealsorequires 15MBstoragespace. ahighspeedlinkofatleast1Mbps.(Slowerconnectionspeedcausesslowstartupandthe possibilityofotherproblemsafterstartup.) screenresolutionsettingof1024x768. either MozillaFirefox3,iftheclientisonaLinuxoraWindowsdevice MSInternetExplorer7,iftheclientisonaWindowsdevice

Communicationsbetweentheserverandclientrequirethattwoportassignments(for NMSSocketPortandNMS_FE_SECONDARY_PORT)aremadeintheserverfilesystemafterWM installationorupgrade.Theseassignmentsaredocumentedinthequickstartguideandtheserver administrationguide.

3.2

Corporate Networks
Connectionsbetweentheclientandserveraresupportedacross acorporatefirewall,presumingthattherequiredportsareconfiguredtobeopenonthe WMserverdevice. avirtualprivatenetwork(VPN),butwithasignificant,noticeablereductioninsystem performancepossible. anetworkaddresstranslation(NAT)server.

63

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

3.3

Launch Procedures
TolaunchtheWMclient,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 1: To launch WM
1. 2. Launchthesupportedbrowser. Connecttohttp://WM_Server_IP_Address:9090.

Figure 12: Web page for WM Web Start client invoke (LoginPage.do)

3.

ClickLaunchWMClient. IfJNLPisalreadyproperlyassociatedwithJavaWebStartLauncher(javaws),thenapopup windowsuggeststhefiletoopen,asshownbelow.Inthiscase,clickOKtoletthelaunch proceed.

64

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Ifitisnot,thenthepopupwindowincludesaBrowsebutton,asshownbelow.

4. 5.

IftheassociationhasnotbeenmadewithjavawsfromJavaversion1.2.2orlater,createthat associationwhereveritisinstalledontheclientdevice. IfaWarningSecuritywindowpopsup,indicatingthatthedigitalsignatureofthe applicationcannotbeverified,selecttheAlwaystrustcontentfromthispublishercheck box. ClicktheRunbutton. OntheWMAuthenticationpanel,typeintheUserID(possiblyroot)andPassword (possiblypublic).

6. 7.

note ............. The root/public combination is the default administrator account in WM. This account may have been reconfigured during the WM software installation. To find out what account to use for your initial launch of the client, check with the administrator on the WM server device or the technician who installed the software. At the same time, verify that the WM server is using the default port (9090).

Figure 13: WM Authentication dialog

8.

Ifyouneedtochangedefaultsettingssuchasport,language,orcountry,clicktheAdvanced button.

65

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 14: WM Authentication advanced options

Thedefaultportis9090. 9. IftheporttowhichtheWMServerislisteninghasbeenconfiguredasanyotherport,specify theconfiguredportnumberinthePortfield.

10. SelectthelanguageandcountryofyourpreferencefromLanguageandCountrydropdown boxesrespectively.Ifyourclientdoesnotsupportthechosenlanguage,thenEnglishisthe defaultlanguage. TheShowConsoleoptionisselectedbydefaultandcannotbedeselected. 11. ClickConnect. TheWMapplicationshouldnowlaunchsuccessfully.

66

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 15: WM application initial view

3.4

Configuring the Proxy on the WM Client

note ............. If the WM client does not currently require a proxy server for access to the Internet, ignore this section.

WhereaproxyserverisusedforaccesstotheInternet,someissuesmustbeaddressedsothatthe PhysicalMapfeatureandtheclient/serverconnectionwillfunctionproperly.Thefollowing illustrationdifferentiatesthetwocasesfortherelationshipbetweentheWMserverandclient.

Figure 16: Possible relationships between client and server

67

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Theillustrationontheright,wherethesamedevicerunsboththeclientandserver,isthecasewhere youwanttolaunchtheclientimmediatelyafterinstallingtheWMsoftware.Thiscaserequiresthatall oftheseinstructionsarefollowed.Youmustentertheinformationdescribedinthissectionintoboth theJavaControlPanelandyourwebbrowser.

3.4.1

Setting Proxy Information in the Java Control Panel

TosettherequiredinformationintheJavaControlpanel,performthefollowingstepsoneachdevice whereaWMclientwillbeused: 1. LaunchtheJavaControlPanelasfollows: InWindows,selectStartSettingsControlPanelJava. InLinux,enter/usr/local/cambium/wm/jre/bin/jcontrol.

Figure 17: Java Control Panel, General tab

2.

IntheGeneraltab,clicktheNetworkSettingsbutton. TheNetworkSettingsdialogopens.

68

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 18: Network Settings window in Java Control Panel

3. 4. 5. 6.

SelectUseproxyserver. Inthetextboxes,typeintheaddressandportofyourproxyserver. SelectBypassproxyserverforlocaladdresses. ClicktheAdvancedbutton. TheAdvancedNetworkSettingswindowopens.

Figure 19: Advanced Network Settings window in Java Control Panel

7.

EntertheIPaddressorsubnetmaskthatmatchestheaddress(es)ofyourserver.

note ............. For help with this step, contact your network administrator.

69

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

3.4.2

Setting Proxy Information in the Web Browser

UsethefollowingFirefoxVersion3exampleprocedureasageneralprimertoconfigureyourbrowser forproxyinformation. 1. 2. 3. Launchthebrowser. SelectToolsOptions. Fromtheiconarrayatthetop,clickAdvanced.

Figure 20: Network tab in Firefox Options window

4.

IntheNetworktab,clicktheSettingsbuttonoftheConnectionsection. TheConnectionSettingswindowopens.

70

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 21: Connection Settings window in Firefox

note ............. Typically, the next step is not required, because the proxy is already configured. If it were not, then Firefox would not have been previously able to access the Internet.

5. 6.

SelectManualproxyconfigurationandsettheHTTPProxyandPortconsistentwiththe settingsintheJavaControlPanel. IntheNoproxyforfield,entertheIPaddressorsubnetmaskthatmatchesthatoftheWM server.

note.............. This should match what is configured in the Java Control Panel, but may differ in format (for CIDR, for example). In the example shown above, the computer will not look to the proxy for any IP address that matches 10.x.x.x.

3.4.3

Troubleshooting an "Unable to launch the application" Error

Youmayseethefollowingerror:

71

Issue 4 August 2012 Ifyouseethiserror 1. 2.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ensurethattheinstructionsinthetwoprecedingsections(forconfiguringtheJavaControl Panelandyourbrowser)havebeenproperlyfollowed. flushtheJavafilecacheasfollows: a. LaunchtheJavaControlPanelasfollows: b. InWindows,selectStartSettingsControlPanelJava. InLinux,enter/usr/local/cambium/wm/jre/bin/jcontrol.

IntheGeneraltab,clicktheSettingsbuttonoftheTemporaryInternetFilessection.

Figure 22: General tab of Java Control Panel

3.

TheTemporaryFilesSettingswindowopens.

72

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 23: Temporary Files Settings window in Java Control Panel

4.

ClicktheDeleteFilesbutton.

Figure 24: Delete Temporary Files window in Java Control Panel

5. 6. 7.

Inthewarningwindow,selectbothApplicationsandAppletsandTraceandLogFiles. ClicktheOKbutton. RetryalaunchoftheWMclient.

73

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

3.5

Configuring Your Password

IfaPasswordConfirmationdialogisdisplayedasshowninFigure25whenyoulogontotheclientfor thefirsttime,useProcedure2toauthenticate.

Figure 25: Password Confirmation window

Procedure 2: To configure your password prior to client connection

1. 2. 3. 4. InthePasswordConfirmationdialogbox,clickConfigure. IntheTypenewpasswordfield,typeinthepasswordthatyouwereassignedtouse. IntheConfirmnewpasswordfield,retypethesamepassword. InthePasswordexpirydurationfield,typethenumberofdaysyouwantyourpasswordto bevalid. Ifnovalueorzeroisenteredinthisfield,thenthepasswordneverexpires. ClickConnect. Thenewpasswordisnowassignedtoyou,andyouwillbeconnectedtotheclient.Usethis newpasswordforfuturelogins.

5.

74

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

TochangeyourcurrentWMclientpasswordand/orthedurationoftheperiodafterwhichyour passwordwillexpire,usethePasswordConfiguratorasfollows.

Procedure 3: To reconfigure your password

1. Afterhavingloggedontotheclient,selectToolsAdministrationChangePasswordfrom themainmenu.ThePasswordConfiguratordialogboxisdisplayed.

Figure 26: PasswordConfigurator dialog

2. 3. 4. 5.

EnterthenewpasswordintheNewPasswordfield. ReenterthesamepasswordintheConfirmPasswordfield. EnterthenumberofdaysyouwantyourpasswordtobevalidinPasswordexpiryduration. Ifnovalueorzeroisenteredinthisfield,thenthepasswordneverexpires. ClickOK. Thenewpasswordwillbeassignedtoyou.Youneedtoenterthisnewpasswordforfuture logins.

3.6

Troubleshooting an Unsuccessful Login

Thefollowingtableliststhemessagesthataredisplayedincertainsituationsduringtheloginprocess.

Table 2: Troubleshooting client login issues

Message
You are logged in for the first time, would you like to reuse the existing password or configure a new password?

Reason

Remedy

Thispopupmessageisdisplayed whenyoulogontotheclientfor UseProcedure2onPage74. thefirsttime(onlyifthishas beenenabledbyyour administrator).

75

Issue 4 August 2012 Message Reason

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Remedy Eithersetanewpasswordorretainthe oldpassword.Tokeepthesame passwordforthesameexpirationperiod, clickReuse.Toenteranewpassword andresettheexpirationperiod,click ConfigureanduseProcedure2on Page74. Ifyoudonothavethepermissiontoset yourpassword,contactyoursystem administrator. Contactyoursystemadministratorto renewyouruseraccount.

Your password has expired. Would you like to reuse the old password Yourpasswordhasexpired. or configure a New password?

This User account has Expired. Please contact the Administrator for further details

Youruseraccounthasexpired. Theuseraccountiscreatedby yoursystemadministrator. Youruseraccounthasbeen disabledbyyoursystem administrator.

This User account is Disabled. Please contact the Administrator for further details

Contactyoursystemadministratorto Also,ifyourconsecutivelogin attemptsfailforacertainnumber enableyouruseraccount. ofretries(numberisconfigured bytheadministrator),theuser accountisautomaticallydisabled.

76

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Using the Client Window

Theclientwindowprovidesthefollowingcontextsensitivecomponents: amainmenuatthetopofthemainwindow atoolbarcomposedoficonsbeneaththemainmenu anApplicationstreethatlistsinhierarchythevariousWMmodulesintheupperleftsideof themainwindow anAlarmSummaryViewinthelowerleftsideofthemainwindow aviewframethatcancontainamaporaviewontherightsideofthemainwindow.

Figure 27: Client window, example

4.1

Using the Toolbar

TheToolbardisplaysacollectionofactions,commands,andcontrolfunctions.Itislocatedbeneath themenubarandsupportsvarioustoolsfordifferentmodulesofWM.TheToolbarisusefulfor displayingfrequentlyusedcomponents.Atooltipidentifyingsupportedoperationsisprovidedfor eachtool. Thefollowingfiguresillustratehowthesetoftoolbarselectionsvariesfromonemoduletoanother. Forexample,theFaultManagementmodulehasadditionaltoolbaroptions,suchas AddCustomViewandModifyCustomView.

77

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 28: Toolbar when Dashboard is displayed

Figure 29: Toolbar when Network Events are displayed

Figure 30: Toolbar when Alarms are displayed

Figure 31: Toolbar when Configured Collection is displayed

Figure 32: Toolbar when Templates view is displayed

Figure 33: Toolbar when Inventory view is displayed

Figure 34: Toolbar when Reports are displayed

Figure 35: Toolbar when Scheduled Tasks are displayed

Figure 36: Toolbar when Policies view is displayed

Sometoolbaroptionsarecommonforallviewsintheclient.Othersdependonmodulefunctions. Thefollowingoptionsareavailableforalltheviewsintheclient.

78

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 3: Common toolbar options

GoBacktoPrevious GoForwardtoNext DetachCurrentWindow Help

Tohideorshowthetoolbar,scrollovertheverticalline ontheleftsideofthetoolbartoactivatethe HideToolbartooltipandclicktoexecutethecommandortoggletheShowToolbarcommandfrom thewindowmenu.

4.2

Using the Alarm Summary Views

Inaddition,thedefaultconstructionoftheclientwindowincludesDeviceStatusandSevereAlarms views,displayedinthelowerleftcorneroftheWMclientwindow,beneaththeApplicationstree. TheseprovideasummaryofallthealarmstrackedbyWM.TheDeviceStatuspanelshowsthealarm countofeachcategoryfromCriticaltoClear.Thispanelisautomaticallyrefreshedwheneventsare generated.Usethebuttonsatthetopofthepaneltodisplay Severityagainstnumberofdevicesview Severityaloneinapiechartview

Figure 37: Alarm summary views

Thispanelisupdatedautomaticallyandthecountscanbeseenatalltimes,notdependingonwhatis intheviewframe.Youcanviewallthedevicesunderaspecificseverityofalarm.Intheseverity againstnumberofdevicesviewoftheDeviceStatuspanel,clickeithertheseverityorthebar associatedwiththeseverity(orclicktheseverityboxintheSevereAlarmspanel.Forexample,ifyou wanttoviewalltheMajoralarms,clicktheMajorboxunderSevereAlarms.Regardlessofwhatviews oropenorwhatviewisontop,WMlaunchesanInventoryviewwithonlythosedevicesthatare underanalarmoftheselectedseverity. 79

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 38: View of devices under Warning

note ............. To return to a full Inventory view after the slim view of only those devices under a particular alarm severity, click the Show All button.

TheSevereAlarmspaneldisplaysthecountsinonlytheCritical,Major,andMinorseverity.Whenno alarmsarepresentinaseverity,WMdisplaysitscountagainstagreybackground.Whenalarmsare present,thecountdisplaysagainstthecodedcoloroftheseverity:redforCritical,orangeforMajor, andYellowforMinor.Thispanelneverdisplaysalarmsoflesserseverity.

Figure 39: Severe alarm counts

Discoveringalarmsoccurduringthediscoveryprocess,wherenodesareaddedtotheWMinventory ofmanagedobjects. Theclientprovidesmoredetailedalarmsanddeviceinformationinitssystemdashboard,whichis describedunderMonitoringtheSystemDashboardonPage117.

4.3

Using the Status Bar

TheStatusBaratthebottomofthescreenindicatesthestatusoftheongoingprocess.Forexampleit displaysDoneifallthedataisloadedorloading...iftheprocessisstillnotcomplete.

4.4

Using the Display Panel

Thedisplaypanelisontherightsideofclientandappearsasawindowwithinthemainwindow.This panelisshownwhenatreenodeisselected.Forexample,ifyouclickFaultManagementEventson thetree,thentheEventsdisplayopensintherightsidepanel.

80

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4.5

Using the Menu Bar

ThemenubarislocatedatthetopoftheDisplayarea.Selectamenuandchooseacommandto performadesiredfunction. Certainmenubardropdownmenus(File,Tools,Window,andHelp)arecommonforallviewsinthe client.Thesetofactivemenubarmenusdiffersasfollowsforvariousviews.Viewsofthefollowing typeshave noEditmenu: Dashboard PhysicalMap SystemReports ReportsResults ScheduledTasks ScheduledTasks Dashboard SystemReports ReportsResults Inventory NetworkEvents Alarms ConfigurationTemplates ConfigurationReportTemplates ConfiguredCollection Policies

noViewmenu: noActionsmenu:

allmenubarmenus:

81

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

4.6
4.6.1

Using the Help Menu

About Wireless Manager
ThemainmenuselectionHelpAboutWirelessManagerdisplaystheAboutpanel,whichincludes tabsthatdisplaydetailsaboutlicenses,SNMPagents,theWMclientapplication,anddefineddevice templates.

Figure 40: About window, License tab

About License Tab

Thistabprovidescurrenttotalsofused( ),available( ),and used+available( )licensesforeachlicensetype.SinceLicenseManagerisconfiguredaspart ofWMinstallationandupgradeprocedures,andsincethepurchasedlicensesaredeployedintothe filesystemintheWMserver,theWirelessManagerRelease4.0ServerAdministrationGuideprovides thefulldetailsonhowthelicensingschemeworksinthisrelease. However,theWMclientapplicationcautionsusersintheclientapplicationwhenalicensedeficiency seemstobeapproaching.AWMserverchecksoutonecountofthelicensespecifiedinthe WMEMSPacklicensewheneveradevice(otherthanaPMPSeriesSMorPTPSeriesSlave)is discoveredandmanagedbyWM.Whenthenumberofcheckedoutlicensecountsatthelicense serverreaches90%ofthetotallicensecounts,WMopensamodaldialogwindowtousersincurrent

82

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

sessionsandtouserswhouserswhoarelaunchingtheclientapplication,warningthatmore WMEMSPacklicensecapacitywillberequired.Whenthenumberexceedsthetotaloflicenses,no licensewillbemadeavailableforcheckoutuntilalicenseddeviceisdeletedfromanetworkand therebyforfeitsthelicensethathadbeenallocatedbyLicenseManagertoit. WhenyouclickontheManageLicensesbutton,WMpromptsyoutoentertheLoginNameand PasswordthatWMusesforitsownaccesstotheLicenseManagerserver(bywayofthelicensing webserver).Ifyouenterthesecorrectly(consistentwithhowtheyweresavedintheAdministrator Toolontheserver),thenawebbrowserisspawned,opentothewebinterfaceofLicenseManager.

Figure 41: License Manager web interface

Changing Your Account Parameters for Tool Access

TheLicenseManagerAdministratorToolallowsyoutochangehowyouauthenticatetogetaccess throughthewebservertothetool.Youmaywanttoperiodicallydothisforsecurity.Todoso,access thetool,thenclickthePasswordbuttonintheLicenseManagerpanel.Anexampleoftheresulting ChangePasswordpanelisshowninFigure42.

83

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 42: Change Password panel, License Manager Administrator Tool

note ............. The License Manager area of the Administrator Tool is not capable of prompting for, storing, or implementing account changes for the License Manager Administrator Tool users.

Yournewusernameandpasswordshouldbeonesthatareeasyforyoutorecall.Assistancefor forgottenusernamesandpasswordsisnotavailable.Asyoutypeinyourold,new,andconfirmed newpasswords,asterisksrepresentthecharacters.Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththenewaccount information,checktheSynchronizepasswordandconfigurationtoredundantserverscheckboxand clicktheSaveChangesbutton. AfteryouhaveresetthepasswordbutbeforeyouusetheLicenseManagerAdministratorToolweb site,youmustclickthelinkforLicensingConfiguration,thenchangethepasswordforthelocalserver andclicktheSaveChangesbutton. Similarly,beforeyouusetheserverAdministratorToolforlicenseadministration,yourserver administratormustresetthePasswordfieldintheLicenseFileDatapaneloftheWMServer AdministratorTool,andthenclicktheSaveConfigurationbutton.

84

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

About Device Details

Thecountthatthedevicedetailstabprovidesrepresentsthetotalnumberofagentsacrossall networkelementsthatarecurrentlyunderWMmanagement.

Figure 43: About window, Device Details tab

Eachagentofamultiagentgenericdeviceiscountedasoneinstanceintheagentcount.

85

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

About Client Details

TheinformationthattheClientDetailstabdisplaysinformationthatisdesignedfortechnicalsupport purposesandnotintendedforoperatoruse,exceptwhenitisrequestedbyaCambiumNetworks customersupportrepresentative.

Figure 44: About window, Client Details tab

About Supported Device Templates

TheSupportedDeviceTemplatestabprovidesthenamesofalldevicetypesthatWMsupportsandof thetemplatesthatmakesomeoftheoperationsinsupportofthempossible.Thesetemplatesshould notbeconfusedwitheither configurationtemplates,whichpushvaluesofconfigurableattributestomanagedelements configurationreporttemplates,whichretrieve,format,anddisplayattributevaluesfrom eitherthedatabaseorthedevice(s).

86

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 45: About window, Supported Device Templates tab

Bycontrast,thedevicetemplatesdefinethedevicesinsuchawaythatWMisabletodistinguish, amongotherfactors theelementtypefromotherelementtypesduringdiscovery thefirmwareversionloadedintheelement theiconbywhichtorepresenttheelementintheWMuserinterface thenamebywhichtoidentifyitinvariousviews theperformancedatastatisticstoqueryfromit theconfigurationdatathatisappropriatetopushtoit theairstandardthatappliestoit,forradiosinthephysicalmap.

4.6.2

Help Contents
ThemainmenuselectionHelpHelpContentsprovideslinkstotheindexofonlinehelptopicsand thisuserguide,theserveradministrationguide,andthetechnicalsupportwebpage.

87

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

4.6.3

Diagnostics
ThemainmenuselectionHelpDiagnosticsprovideslinksto thecustomersupporttool(seeRunningtheCustomerSupportToolonPage751) JVMmonitoringdetails(seeLoggingJVMMonitoringDetailsonPage704).

4.7
4.7.1

Managing Client Windows

Navigating through Active Windows
Whenmanywindowsareopeninthedisplaypanel,youcanmoveforwardtothenextactivescreen ormovebacktothepreviousone. Tomovebacktothepreviouswindow,fromtheFilemenu,chooseBackorclick (GoBacktoPrevious)onthetoolbar,orpressCtrl+Shift+B. Tomovetothenextwindow,fromFilemenu,chooseForwardorclick Next)onthetoolbar,orpressCtrl+Shift+F. (GoForwardto

4.7.2

Detaching a Window from the Client

Thefollowingviewscanbedetachedfromthedisplaypaneloftheclientforviewingasaseparate window: systemdashboard physicalmap Inventoryview,includingcustomviewsandtheinventoriesofadevicegroups Alarmsview NetworkEventsview ConfiguredCollection ScheduledTasks Policies

Todetachawindow,performanyofthefollowingsteps: RightclickonthenodeintheApplicationstreeandselectDetachDetachfromthedrop downlistofoptions. Click (DetachCurrentWindow)onthetoolbar.

PressCtrl+Shift+T. closewindowbuttonintheupper

Toreattachawindowintotheviewpanel,clickthe rightcornerofthedetachedwindow.

88

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

tip ................ Position the detached window far enough from its docked position that you can easily distinguish that it is undocked. Otherwise, you might inadvertently close a view that you intended to only reattach.

4.7.3

Saving Location and Size of Windows

Whenyourearrangeandresizewindows,youneedtosavethemtoretainthesamelocationandsize. Tosavelocationandsizeafterrearrangingandresizingwindows,selectWindowSaveLocationand Size. Youwillbeabletoseetheretainedlocationandsizewhenyoureopentheclient.

4.7.4

Closing All Open Windows

Toclosealltheopenwindows,performanyofthefollowingprocedures. SelectFileCloseAll. PressCtrl+Shift+O.

4.8

Using the Applications Tree

TheApplicationstreepanelocatedontheleftsideoftheclientdisplaysasetofhierarchicaldata representingthecurrentnetworkconfiguration.Atthetopofthetreeisthephysicalmap. SomenodesoftheApplicationstreeareavailablepermanently(bydefault)intheclient,andothers aredynamicallyadded.Eachnodeisselectable,eachparentnodeisexpandableandcollapsible,and eachultimatechildnodedeterminestheviewthatisdisplayedintheright(oppositepanel)ofthe mainclientview.ThefollowingnodescomposetheApplicationstree.

Table 4: Applications tree nodes

Parent Node Default Child Nodes Described Under MonitoringtheSystemDashboardon Page117 UsingthePhysicalMaponPage147

Dashboard PhysicalMap

none none oneforeachdevicetypepresentinthenetwork, representedbyitsiconanditstextualstring

UsinganInventoryViewonPage123

Inventory

adevicetypeselectionforNetworks adevicetypeselectionforDeviceGroups CreatingandUsingDeviceGroupson Page301

89

Issue 4 August 2012 Parent Node Default Child Nodes oneforNetworkEvents FaultManagement oneforAlarms oneforConfigurationTemplates

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Described Under WorkingwithEventsonPage347 HandlingAlarmonPage366 UsingConfigurationTemplateson Page620 ImportingConfigurationReport TemplatesonPage326 ExportingAllConfigurationReport TemplatesonPage339 Table45:Configurationoptionson Page471 UsingSystemReportsonPage390

Configuration

oneforConfigurationReportTemplates

oneforAudit

ViewingaDeviceSummaryReporton none(useparentnodeforviewingandrunningthe Page225 availablereports) LaunchinganOperatordefinedReport onPage399 System Reports SavingaDeviceSummaryReporton Page228 DeletingaDeviceSummaryReporton Page229 UsingaConfigurationSummaryReport asPreconfiguredonPage344 UsingaSystemReportAsPreconfigured onPage398 Performance oneforConfiguredCollection oneforeachdefinedScheduledTask Administration oneforPolicies MonitoringPerformanceonPage381 SchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTask onPage649 AdministeringaPolicyonPage605

oneforReportResults

90

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 46: Expanded view of the Applications tree

91

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Thefundamentalelementinthetreeisanodethatrepresentsadataiteminthegivenhierarchical set.Therootnodeisthetopnodeofthehierarchicaldata.Nodesinsidetherootnodesarecalled childnodes.Nodesthatcontainnochildnodesarecalledleafnodes.Whenyouselectaparticular node,thecorrespondingpanelisdisplayedontherightsideofthedisplaypanel. AseriesofdropdownmenusisavailablebyselectingnodesintheApplicationstree.Selectadevice, thenrightclicktodisplaythedropdownmenu.Thefollowingsectionsexplaintheavailablemenu commands.

note ............. The deepest branches of the Inventory tree list links as NameID Links under the higher branch of their device type. The longest NameID supported for this list is 100 characters. Any device whose NameID is longer is not listed among the Links list.

Tableviewreferstothedisplaypanelontherightsideoftheclient.Forinstance,clickingonAlarms nodeundertheFaultManagementnodedisplaysapanelontherightsidethatshowsatable containingdetailsofthegeneratedalarms. CommonrightclickmenuoptionsareavailableforseveraloftheApplicationsTreenodes.

4.8.1

Custom Views
Acustomviewisatailoredviewthatcanbecreatedforviewingasubsetofdatathatsatisfiesspecific criteria.Asearchoperationcanbeperformedtolocateaspecificelement,butacustomviewwould beusefultolocateasetofelementsthatsatisfyacertainsetofcriteria. CustomviewscanbecreatedinanEvents,Alarms,ConfiguredCollection,orInventoryview.Network mapscanalsobecreatedandmodifiedusingtheCustomViewsmenu.Theoptiontocreateacustom viewisavailablebasedonuserprivileges.Contactyoursystemadministratortodetermineyouruser privileges. Youcanconfigureanunlimitednumberofcustomviewsofevents,alarms,andorperformance statistics.Theseviewsarefilters.Theyarenotstatic,butratherareupdatedasnewevents,alarms, orstatisticvalues(respectively)becomesavailabletothesystem,evenasyouareexaminingthe view.

Adding a Custom View

Whenanynonmapviewisthefrontwindowintheviewframe,youhavetheoptiontoaddanew customviewofyourowndefinition.Fromthemainmenu,select ViewCustomViewsAddCustomView.ThetypeofcriteriadialogthatWMopensforyouto configuredependsonthetypeofviewthatisinfrontintheviewframe: Toaddacustomeventsviewfilter,seeDefininganEventsCustomViewonPage358. Toaddacustomalarmsviewfilter,seeDefininganAlarmsCustomViewonPage374. Toaddacustomperformanceviewfilter,seeDefiningaPerformanceCustomViewon Page594. Toaddacustominventoryviewfilter,seeInventoryCustomViewsonPage128.

Whenyouaddacustomview,thenameoftheview(alinktoit)isplacedintotheApplicationstree. Eachotherviewthatyoucreateinthesamemodule(NetworkEvents,Alarms,orConfigured Collection)canbeeitheradirectchildofthemodulelinkorachild(filter)ofanothercustomview thatwasusercreated,asAlarms12isinthefollowingexample.

92

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 47: Example parent custom view with child view

Modifying a Custom View

Youcanmodifyanyofyourdefinedcustomviewsasfollows.Todoso,clickonthelinktothecustom viewintheApplicationstreeasshownbelow.

Figure 48: Custom view nodes in Applications tree

WMopensthefiltercriteriawindowthatyoupopulatedwhenyouoriginallyaddedtheview(orthat youlastmodified).Makewhateverchangesyouwishtothevaluesofthevariousproperties. Whenyouareentirelyfinishedreconfiguringtheviewfilterand/oritsappearanceintheApplications tree,clicktheApplyFilterbuttontomodifythestoredviewfilter.

Renaming a Custom View

Atanytime,youcanrenameacustomview.Todoso,rightclickonthelinktothecustomviewinthe Applicationstree,thenselectViewCustomViewsRenameCustomViewfromthemainmenu.In theApplicationstree,thenameofyourcustomviewisenclosedinaneditbox.Changethenameas youwish,thenpressyourEnter()keytoendtheeditsession.

Resizing Columns in a Custom View

Customviewsupportresizingoftheircolumns(forexample,sothatyoucanviewallofthedata withoutscrolling).Toresizeacolumn,positionthemousecursorovertherightborderofthecolumn head,leftclickandholddownthebutton,anddragtheborder. Youcansavetheresizedstructuresothatwhenyoureopentheview,thecolumnswillbeoftheir currentwidth.Todoso,doalloftheresizingthatyouintendtodo,thenrightclickontheviewname intheApplicationstreeandselectSaveCustomViewStatefromthedropdownlistofoptions.Ifyou donotexecutethisoption,theviewwillreopenwiththedefaultcolumnwidthsnexttime.

93

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Customviewsalsosupportreorderingtheircolumns.Todoso,positionthemousecursoranywhere inthecolumnhead,leftclickandholddownthebutton,anddragtheentirecolumn.The rearrangementwilllastaslongastheviewremainsopen,evenwhenithasnolongerbeenthefront intheviewframe.However,therearrangementwillnotbesaved,evenifyouexecutetheSave CustomViewStateoption.Theviewwillreverttothecolumnarrangementthatwasconfigured whentheviewwascreated.

Removing a Custom View

Toremoveacustomview,clickonthelinktothecustomviewintheApplicationstree,thenselect ViewCustomViewsRemoveCustomViewfromthemainmenu.ThisdoesnotcauseWMtodrop elementsthatwerecontainedintheview,butitdoesremovetheviewfromboththeApplications treeandWMmemory.So,ifyoueverwanttoreestablishthisview,youmustspecifyallofitscriteria overagainthroughtheAddCustomViewoption.
important ........... Removing a custom view automatically removes all child custom views, if the one you are removing is a parent view. For example, removing Alarms 1 will automatically remove Alarms 12 in the example branch shown in Figure 47 on Page 93.

4.8.2

Frame Operations
CommonFrameOperationsforBack,Forward,DetachandCloseFramesupportnavigationthrough theviewpanels.

4.8.3

Administration Tools
TheAdministrationToolsbranchoftheApplicationstreeprovidesaccesstotheareainwhichauser whohasasufficientlevelofprivilegecanadministerpolicies.Theseoperationsaredescribedunder AdministeringaPolicyonPage605 SchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTaskonPage649.

4.9

Using the Search Utility

AbovetheApplicationstreeintheleftpanelofthemainclientwindow,aSearchutilityreturns matchingresultsfromvariousdatafieldsinWM.

94

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

WMlooksformatchesbetweentheinputstringandthecontentsofvariousdatafieldsinthe database.Table5liststhesefieldsagainstthetypesofresultsthatWMwillreturnforthem.

Table 5: Input string vs. result types for Search utility

Input String Typical Returned Results Example

View Configured Collection Network Events

Events

Data Field StatisticName DataIdentifier Message Source IPAddress Name(ID) IPAddress Source IPAddress AlarmMessage DeviceName Location

Device Groups

Networks

Statistics

Devices

Alarms

Customer Contact

Figure Figure49 Figure50 Figure51 Figure52 Figure53 Figure54 Figure55 Figure56 Figure57 Figure58

Page 96 97 98 98 99 100 100 101 101 102

Networks

Alarms

Inventory Name(ID) IPAddress DeviceGroups DeviceGroupName CustomerName CustomerType Address1 Address2 City State Zip Country Email HomePhone WorkPhone MobilePhone Pager Devices

Customer Contact Management

Figure59

102

95

Issue 4 August 2012 ThefollowingexamplefiguresarereferencedinTable5above.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 49: Search results for input Statistic Name contents

96

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 50: Search results for input Message contents

97

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 51: Search results for input Source contents

Figure 52: Search results for input network Name (ID)

98

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 53: Search results for input IP Address contents

99

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 54: Search results for input Alarm Message contents

Figure 55: Search results for input Device Name contents

100

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 56: Search results for input Location contents

note ............. In the above example, BOST Lab is part of the configured Location contents and is also coincidentally part of the name of a defined device group.

Figure 57: Search results for input Name (ID) contents

101

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 58: Search results for input Device Group Name contents

Figure 59: Search results for input Address1 contents

Eachlistediteminaresultsgroupprovidesamousehovertooltipthatincludespreselecteddetail abouttheitem.

Thegrouptitlesofreturnedresultscontainlinkstofurtherinformation: Clickingonthe plusleavesthegroupexpandedandcollapsestheothergroups.

102

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Clickingonthe minussignexpandsalloftheresultsgroups. Clickingonthenumberinparenthesesopensaviewoftheresultsgroupintheviewpanel.

Clickingonthe magnifyingglassassociatedwitharesultsgroupopensaSearchwindow thatacceptsmultiplecriteriaandoperatesasdescribedunderSearchonPage125: IftheresultsgroupisDevices,thenthecriteriaforanarrowersearchare

IftheresultsgroupisAlarms,thenthecriteriaforanarrowersearchare

103

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IftheresultsgroupisEvents,thenthecriteriaforanarrowersearchare

IftheresultsgroupisStatistics,thenthecriteriaforanarrowersearchare

note ............. The Device Groups and Customer results groups do not contain an icon with which to launch a narrower search (do not support advanced search).

4.10

Performing Table View Operations

TableViewreferstothedisplaypanelthatyoucanviewontherightsideoftheclient.Forinstance, clickingonAlarmsnodeunderFaultManagementnodedisplaysapanelontherightsidethatshows atablecontainingdetailsofthegeneratedalarms.

104

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 60: Alarms table view

ThetableviewsareavailableinonlyFaultManagement,NetworkEvents,andConfiguredCollection modules,andtheydifferfrommoduletomodule.

4.10.1

Navigating Through a Table

Thefournavigatorbuttons,FirstPage,PreviousPage,NextPage,andLastPagearelocatedatthe topofeachtable.Thepurposeofthesebuttonsisdetailedinthefollowingtable.

Table 6: Table navigation buttons

Button Purpose Toviewthefirstsegment,basedoncurrentsortingscheme,ofthelistofentriesthatarestored inthedatabase.Forexample,ifthetableissortedintheorderofmostrecentitemsfirst,then FirstPageshowsthesegmentofnewestitems.

FirstPage

PreviousPage Toviewthepreviouslyviewedsegmentofthedataretrievedfromthedatabase.

105

Issue 4 August 2012 Button NextPage Purpose

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Toviewthenextsegment,basedoncurrentsortingscheme,ofthedataretrievedfromthe database. Toviewthelastsegment,basedoncurrentsortingscheme,ofthelistofentriesthatarestoredin thedatabase.Forexample,ifthetableissortedintheorderofmostrecentitemsfirst,thenLast Pageshowsthesegmentofoldestitems.

LastPage

4.10.2

Setting the Page Length for a Table

Thegreaterthesetpagelength,themoredataisretrievedfromtheWMserver,andthustheslower itsresponsewillbe.Todisplayonlyacertainnumberofrowsperpage,selectthevaluefromthe PageLengthdropdownlist.Settableincrementsare50,100,250,500,1000,2500,5000,10000, 25000,and50000.

4.10.3

Refreshing the Page View

Torefreshthepageview,performanyofthefollowingprocedures. RightclickarowandclickRefresh. SelectViewRefresh. PressF5.

4.10.4

Viewing a Range of Table Details

Procedure 4: To view a range of details
1. 2. 3. IntheDisplayingfield,enterthestartingrangenumber. Inthetofield,entertheendingrangenumber. PressEnter.

4.10.5

Sorting Table Details

Youcansortthedatainatablebasedonthecolumntypeandthedetailscanbeviewedeitherin ascendingordescendingorder.Thetypeofsorting(ascendingordescending)isindicatedbyarrows. Asimpleclickonthecolumnheaderdoesthesorting,i.e.,thecompletedatawillbesorted. Subsequentclickonthesameheadersortsthedatainascendingorder(ifitweresortedin descendingbefore). Therearetwotypesofsorting: Serversidesorting:ServersidesortingsortsalldataintheWMServerandisnotrestricted tothedataavailableintheclient.Forexample,ifthereare100eventsintheWMServerand only50aredisplayedinthePageViewofthetable,aserversidesortingsortsthecomplete

106

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

setof100eventsandnotjustthe50events.Forserversidesorting,clickthecolumnheader. Subsequentclickonthesamecolumnheadersortsthedatainascendingorder(ifitwere sortedindescendingbefore).Thesortindicatorsforserversidesortingforascendingand descendingare and ,respectively. Clientsidesorting:Clientsidesortingsortsdatadisplayedonlyintheclient.Forexample,if thereare50alarmsintheWMServerandonly25aredisplayedinthePageViewofthe table(25perpage),aclientsidesortingsortsonly25alarmsandnotthe50alarmsinthe WMServer.Forclientsidesorting,presstheCtrlbuttonandclickthecolumnheader. Subsequentclickonthesameheadersortsthedatainascendingorder(ifitweresortedin descendingbefore).Thesortindicatorforclientsidesortingforascendinganddescending are and ,respectively.

4.10.6

Rearranging and Resizing Columns in a Table

Foreasyviewofthedata,rearrangethecolumnsbyjustdraggingthecolumnheaderandmovingitto thedesiredplaceinthetable.Youmayfindithelpfultoviewasomeofthedataatcloserposition. Toresizethecolumnheader,dragtherightsideedgeofacolumn.
tip ................ When performing the rearrangement and resizing, the table remains the same only until the client is closed. When it is reopened, the settings would be lost. To retain the same size of columns, you should save the style by selecting the main menu item ViewCustom ViewsSave Custom View State or right-clicking on the node in tree and selecting Custom ViewsSave Custom View State or pressing Ctrl+S. important .......... When saving a custom view, ONLY the resizing is saved, and any rearrangement is not saved, and the custom view is displayed in the default order.

4.10.7

Viewing Row Details

Toviewdetailsorobjectpropertiesofeachrowinatable,performanyofthefollowingprocedures: Doubleclickarowinanyview,includingaConfiguredCollection. PressAlt+DinanEvents,Alarms,orInventoryview. RightclickarowinanEventsoranAlarmsviewandclickDetails.

Adialogboxisdisplayedwithspecificdetailsabouttheselectedrow.

4.11

Importing Data Files Into WM

WMprovidesautilitytoimportCSVfiles(or,inaloneinstance,atextfile)thatWMwillusefor devicediscoveryinformation

ThisoperationrequirespermissionsinTopologyAddNodeandAddNetwork. SeeFigure300:AssignPermissionsdialogonPage446.

107

Issue 4 August 2012 useraccountinformation

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ThisoperationrequirespermissionsinUserAdministrationAddUsersandAssignUserTo Group.SeeFigure300:AssignPermissionsdialogonPage446. customercontactinformation

Thisoperationrequiresoperationpermissionsin AdministrativeOperationEmailConfiguration. TheonlysupporteddelimiterintheCSVfilesiscomma.However,foranyinstanceofaliteralcomma inadatafield,thecommamustbeenclosedintwoofaconsistentlyusedescapecharactertype.The clientreferstosuchacharacterasaTextQualifier.Thetypesallowedaredoublequoteandsingle quote(apostrophe).TwoexamplesofthesupporteduseofatextqualifierforanyoftheseCSVfiles areasfollows: 12345,Chris Brown","Sean Brown,home,123 Main,Mount,WY,USA,csb@wyi.com,4061234567,,,,0a 00 3e 30 2d e4 12345,Chris Brown','Sean Brown,home,123 Main,Mount,WY,USA,csb@wyi.com,4061234567,,,,0a 00 3e 30 2d e4 Withinacolumn,thesupporteddelimiterbetweenmultipleentriesissemicolon. Forspecificinformationonpreparingeachtypeoffiledataforimport,seethefollowingother sectionsofthisuserguide: ImportingDeviceDiscoveryInformationonPage401 ImportingUserAccountInformationonPage439 ImportingaCustomerContactDatabaseonPage240

AlloftheseoptionsareavailablefromthemainmenubyselectingToolsImportandExport. TheclientrespondstothisselectionbyopeningtheSelectoperationwindow.

108

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 61: Select operation window

Selectthedesiredimportoptionradiobutton,thenclicktheNextbutton.TheImportwindowopens.

Figure 62: Import information windows

ForTextQualifier,selecttheescapecharacterthattheCSVfileyouareabouttoimportuses consistently,ifany.Thenclickthe button.TheSelectCSVfilewindowopens.

109

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 63: Select file window

Browsetoandselectthefiletoimport. Backinthepreviouswindow,clicktheNextbutton.Iftheimportsucceeds,thenthesystemresponds withaResultswindowmessagesimilartothefollowing:

4.12

Exporting Data Files From WM

note ............. The following operations require permission in TopologyModify Object ExportTopology Data. See Figure 300: Assign Permissions dialog on Page 446.

110

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

WMprovidesautilitytoexportCSV(commaseparatedvalues)filesthatanothersystemoranother instanceofWMwillusefor devicediscoveryinformation(seeExportingDeviceDiscoveryInformation,next)

useraccountinformation(seeExportingUserAccountInformationonPage113)

networkhierarchyinformation(seeExportingNetworkHierarchyInformationonPage115)

4.12.1

Exporting Device Discovery Information

ToexportaCSVfileofdevicediscoveryinformation,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 5: To export device discovery information

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectToolsImportandExport. TheSelectoperationwindowopens.

2. 3.

SelecttheExportdevicediscoveryinformationradiobutton. ClicktheNextbutton. TheExportdevicediscoveryinformationwindowopens.

111

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

4. 5.

Checkthecheckbox(es)ofallofthetypesofdiscoveryinformationyouwantincludedinthe fileforexport. ClicktheNextbutton. TheExportdevicediscoveryinformationwindowchangestoincludethefollowingfields.

6. 7. 8. 9.

LeavetheTextQualifierselectionofdoublequote. Clickthe button. TheSelectdirectorytostoreexportedfilewindowopens. Browsetoandselectthedirectory. Thepathtotheselecteddirectorypopulatesthepathtextfield. ClicktheNextbutton. TheExportdevicediscoveryinformationResultswindowopenswithaconfirmationofthe export:

112

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

10. ClicktheFinishbutton. TheexportedfileisformattedaccordingtotherulesdescribedinTable37onPage401and iswrittentothefilenameDeviceDiscoveryInformation_UniqueIdentifier.csv inyourselecteddirectory.

4.12.2

Exporting User Account Information

ThisoperationrequiresoperationpermissionsinUserAdministrationGetListofUsers. SeeFigure300:AssignPermissionsdialogonPage446.ToexportaCSVfileofuseraccount information,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 6: To export user account information

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectToolsImportandExport. TheSelectoperationwindowopens.

113

Issue 4 August 2012 2. 3. SelecttheExportuseraccountinformationradiobutton. ClicktheNextbutton. TheExportuseraccountinformationwindowopens.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

4. 5. 6. 7.

LeavetheTextQualifierselectionofdoublequote. Clickthe button. TheSelectdirectorytostoreexportedfilewindowopens. Browsetoandselectthedirectory. Thepathtotheselecteddirectorypopulatesthepathtextfield. ClicktheNextbutton. TheExportuseraccountinformationResultswindowopenswithaconfirmationofthe export:

114

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4.12.3

Exporting Network Hierarchy Information

ToexportaCSVfileofnetworkhierarchyinformation,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 7: To export network hierarchy information

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectToolsImportandExport. TheSelectoperationwindowopens.

2. 3.

SelecttheExportnetworkhierarchyinformationradiobutton. ClicktheNextbutton. TheExportnetworkhierarchywindowopens.

4. 5.

LeavetheTextQualifierselectionofdoublequote. Clickthe button. TheSelectdirectorytostoreexportedfilewindowopens.

115

Issue 4 August 2012 6. 7. Browsetoandselectthedirectory. Thepathtotheselecteddirectorypopulatesthepathtextfield.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ClicktheNextbutton. TheExportuseraccountinformationResultswindowopenswithaconfirmationofthe export:

Thisexportedfileconsistsofonlytwocolumnsofdata: Name,whosevalueineachrowistheName(ID)ofthechildelementinaparentchild relationship Parent,whosevalueineachrowistheName(ID)oftheparentelementofthatchild.

4.13

Recovering from a Lost Connection to the Server

Whileyouusetheclientapplication,iftheWMservergoesdownoryouotherwiseloseconnectionto theserver,apopupconfirmationaskswhetheryouwanttoexittheclient.IfyouclicktheYes button,thentheclientsessioncloses. IfyouclicktheNobutton,thesessionremainsup.However,someoperationsinitmayindefinitely freeze,includingtheDiscoveryConfigurator.Anyproblemsofthiskindareresolvedwhenyouexit andthenrelaunchtheclient.

116

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Monitoring the System Dashboard

AtthetopofthelistoflinksintheApplicationstreeisDashboard,whichputssixcontiguoussystem configureddisplaysontopintheviewpanel: AlarmsbySeverity,viewableasapiechartorbarchart AlarmsbyDeviceType,viewableasabarchartortable RecentAlarms,viewableasapiechart,barchart,ortable AlarmsbyMessage,viewableasabarchartortable DeviceCounts,viewableasabarchartortable Help,withthefollowingtabs: UsefulLinks.Bydefault,theseopenthebrowsertothereleasespecificuserguideor serveradministrationguide.(TheHelpIndexlinkopensapagethatprovideslinksto theseguides.) License.ThistabprovidesthesamesummaryinformationthattheLicensetabofthe Aboutwindowprovides.SeeAboutLicenseTabonPage82. DeviceDetails.ThistabprovidesthesamesummaryinformationthattheDeviceDetails taboftheAboutwindowprovides.SeeAboutDeviceDetailsonPage85. Settings.Thistabprovidestheoptiontoremovefromthedashboardviewallalarmsof theseverityClear.Thus,forpracticalpurposes,checkingtheHideclearalarmscheck boxintheSettingstabtransformstheentiredashboardintoatroubleshootingpanel. Uncheckingitreturnsthedashboardtoadisplayofnetworkhealth.

Thedashboardopensbydefaultthefirsttimetheclientislaunched.Eachpiechart(click )provides acompleterepresentation.Eachbarchart(click )whosecontentistoolargetofitinasinglepage continuesacrosspagesthatarelinkedby and buttons.Eachtable(click )whose contentistoolargecontinuesinitsverticaldimensionbyascrollbar.

5.1

Dashboard Refreshes
Noactionisrequiredtoupdatethedataorthegraphicalrepresentations.Thedashboard automaticallyrefresheswhentheclientislaunched,whenevertheclientreceivesanotificationfrom theserver(exceptthateachalarmisrepresentedonlyonceregardlessofrepeatedinstances),and oncedailyinadditiontothoseoccasions.Theonlyexceptionisthat,whentheclientreceivesa notificationwithinthreesecondsofthelast,itdelaysthedashboardupdateuntilthreesecondshave elapsedsinceitslastupdate. However,youcanrefreshtheentiredashboardatanytimebyclickingtheSettingstaboftheHelp displayandclickingtheRefreshDashboardbutton. Theprimarysortorderforeachofthepie,bar,andtabledisplaysisseverity.Thesecondaryiscount.

117

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

5.2

Dashboard Display Options

Figure 64: Dashboard Alarms by Severity display

Figure 65: Dashboard Alarms by Device Type display

Figure 66: Dashboard Recent Alarms display

118

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 67: Dashboard Alarms by Message display

Figure 68: Dashboard Device Counts display

Figure 69: Dashboard Help display, Useful Links and License tabs

119

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 70: Dashboard Help display, Device Details and Settings tabs

Figure 71: Clear Alarms Included

Figure 72: Clear Alarms Hidden

Oneoftheconvenientaspectsofthenetworkhealthpreference(clearalarmsincluded)istheability tomonitortheprocessofsuccessfuldiscoverybytrackingtheDiscoveringalarmsintheAlarmsby Severitydisplay.Ifyouhideclearalarms,thentheseDiscoveringalarmsareamongthosethatarenot shown.YoumayprefertodisplaytheClearalarmsuntildiscoveryhasconcludedandthenhidethem.

5.3

Strategic Use of the Dashboard

AswithmostofthemoreimportantviewpanelsinWM,youcandetachthedashboardfromtheview panelbyclicking inthecontextualmenuoficonsanddragittosomewhereelseonthedesktop. Thisallowsyoutocontinuallymonitoritsdisplayswhileyouworkinotherviewpanels.Whilethe windowisdetached,ifyouclickelsewhereintheclientinterface,thedetacheddashboarddisappears andremainsgone(evenifyouminimizetheotherview),butreappearsinitsdetachedpositionifyou clicktheDashboardlinkintheApplicationstree.Whenyouwanttoreturnthedashboardtotheview panel,clickthe closewindowiconintheupperrightcornerofthedashboardwindow. AhigherlevelalternativetothedashboardisthecombinationoftheDeviceStatusandSevereAlarms displaybeneaththeApplicationstree.SeeUsingtheAlarmSummaryViewsonPage79.Thisdisplay persiststhroughanysuccessionofviewsintheviewpaneltoitsright.Changesthatyouseeinitmay encourageyoutoviewthegreaterdetailthatthedashboardpresents.

120

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

5.3.1

Click-throughs From the Dashboard

Thedatarepresentationsinthedashboardareinteractiveforclickthroughstootherviewsthatthen openintheviewpanel.Theviewthatopensdependsasfollowsonthedisplaycomponentthatyou click:

In this display

if you click this piesection,bar,orlabel ofaseverity barorlengthofbar,label ofaseverity,orcellina severitycolumn labelofadevicetype

this view opens Alarms

and consists of alarmsofthatseverityinthenetwork alarmsofthatseverityindevicesof thatdevicetype alarmsofallseveritiesinthatdevice type alarmsofthatseverityinthenetwork withinthelasthour alarmsthatoccurredinthenetworkat thatsecond alarmswhosemessagesmatchwithin thelasthourinthenetwork alarmswhosemessagesmatchinthe networkand/orthetrap/error messagethrown alarmsofthatseverityinthenetwork alarmswhosemessageandseverity matchthemessage/severitythatthis celltallies alarmswhosemessagesmatchinthe network devicesthatareofthedevicetypeand areunderanalarmofthatseverity devicesthatareofthedevicetype devicesthataretalliedinthatcell

AlarmsbySeverity

Alarms

AlarmsbyDeviceType

Alarms

piesection,bar,labelofa Alarms severity,orcellinthe Severitycolumn RecentAlarms cellintheDatecolumn cellintheMessage column barlabelorbar cellintheSeverity column AlarmsbyMessage cellintheAlarmscolumn cellintheMessage column barorlengthofbar,or cellinaseveritycolumn DeviceCounts labelofadevicetype cellintheCountcolumn Alarms Alarms Alarms

Alarms

Alarms

Alarms Inventory Inventory Inventory

Thebasisofthesedisplaysiswithoneexceptionthedatathattheclientreceivedinitslastrefresh. TheexceptionisthattheRecentAlarmsdisplayretainseachalarmforonehour. Mouseoversonbarsofabarchartbrieflyopenatooltipthatprovidestheexactnumberinthe category.

121

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

5.3.2

Sortable Table Displays

ThetabledisplaysarenotsortableforAlarmsbyDeviceTypeandDeviceCounts,butaresortablefor RecentAlarmsandAlarmsbyMessage.Oneclickofthecolumnheadersortsallofthetabledataby theentriesinthatcolumn.Anotherclickofitsortsbythatcolumn,butinreverseorder.Forexample, thedefaultorderforRecentAlarmsismosttoleastrecent,basedontheentryintheDatacolumn (whichincludesbothdateandtime).Ifyouwanttoseeallinstancesofaparticularmessagein contiguousrows,youwouldsorttheMessagecolumnandscrolltothesetofthosemessages.

122

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Using an Inventory View

WMopenstotheInventoryview.Whenanyotherviewisinfrontintheviewframe,youcanbring thisviewtothefrontbyclickingontheInventorynodeintheApplicationstree.Thetableinthe InventorypanelprovidesalistofdataandstatusforalldevicesthatWMhassuccessfullydiscovered.

Figure 73: Inventory view

Foreachelement,theStatuscolumnentryindicatesoneofthefollowing: thehighestseveritycurrentalarmagainsteachdevice,thediscoverystatus

123

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

thediscoverystatus(whichtakesprecedenceoverthealarmseverityifadeviceisbeing discovered) themanagementstatusifadeviceisunmanaged.

PossiblevaluesareCritical,Major,Minor,Warning,Discovering,Degraded,andClear. DevicesmayshowthestatusDiscoveringlongaftertheEventviewerincludestheevent Discovery finishedforthedevice.ThisisbecausetheStatusvalueinanInventoryviewis intendedtoremainDiscoveringuntildeepdiscoveryhasconcludedforthedevice.SeeStagesof DiscoveryonPage434. FortheInventorybranch,theApplicationstreeincludes,afterNetworks,alistofselectabledevice typesbywhichyoucanaccessanInventoryviewthatconsistsofonlydeviceswhosetype(s)is selected(highlighted).

Figure 74: Device types list in Applications tree, example

124

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Thefundamentalelementinthetreeisanodethatrepresentsadataiteminthegivenhierarchy. BeforethefirsteverdiscoveryisperformedinWM,nodevicetypesarelisted.Thisisbecausethelist intendstoreflectonlydiscovereddevicetypesand,therefore,getsthedevicetypenamesfromthe Discoverymodule.Afteradevicetypeisaddedtothelist,WMneverremovesitfromthelist,evenin theunlikelyeventthatyouarenolongermanaginganydevicesofagiventypeinWM.

6.1
6.1.1

Inventory View Edit Menu Options

TheInventoryviewsupportsoptionsfortheEditmenuonthedynamicmenubar.

Delete Object and Traces

Thisselection,alsoavailableviaCtrl+D,removestheselected(highlighted)devicefromthedatabase aswellasfromallviewsintheclient.
important ........... This command is not undoable and can have unwanted consequences. See Deleting an Object and Traces on Page 263.

6.1.2

Clear Alarms
Someofthealarmsthataregeneratedinthenetworkareautomaticallyclearedduringruntime.You canalsoclearanalarmmanuallywhenithasbeenresolvedorifitisinconsequential.Dependingon thealarmsettings,theagentsendsanalarmnotificationonlywhenthereisacrisisanddoesnotsend notificationswhenthatcrisisisresolved.Insuchascenario,youcanmanuallyclearthealarm.

6.1.3

Delete Alarms
Usethisoptiontomanuallydeleteanalarmwhenyoufeelthealarmisnotsignificantorthealarm hasbeencleared.Bydefault,clearedalarmsareautomaticallydeletedafter24hours.

6.1.4

Search
UsetheSearchdialogboxtolookforalarmsassociatedwiththesearchcriteriayoudefine.

125

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 75: Alarms Search dialog, sort options

YoucanalsoaccessthisutilitybypressingCtrl+F.

Figure 76: Alarms Search dialog, input options

TheMorebuttonallowsyoutosearchbytwocriteria,bothofwhichmustbemetoreitherofwhich mustbemetinthealarmsthatthesearchreturns.

126

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 77: Alarms Search dialog, More options

Figure 78: Alarms Search operation, alarms returned, example

ToincludethechildrenofmatchingelementsintheInventory,checktheIncludeChildAgents checkbox. Toaddcriteriathatmaynarrowthelistofmatches,clicktheMorebuttonandinthenextsetof fields,definetheadditionalcriteria.Repeatthisuntilallofyourcriteriaareestablished.Thenclickthe Searchbutton.

127

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

6.2

Inventory Custom Views

Youcanconfigureanunlimitednumberofinventorycustomviews.Theseviewsarefilters.Aswith thebaseviewthatwasopenwhentheAddCustomViewoperationwaslaunched,thesearenot static,butratherareupdatedasnewinformationbecomesavailable,evenwhileyouareexamining theview.Forexample,whenthestatusofadevicechanges,thenewstatusisshownintheStatus columnforthatdevice. Wheneverthefrontviewintheframeisaninventoryview,WMopensaShowObjectswiththese PropertiesdialoginresponsetoselectionofViewCustomViewsAddCustomViewfromthe mainmenu.Thepropertiesareinitiallypopulatedwiththevaluesofthebaseview.Inthecaseofan inventorycustomview,thePropertiestabconsistsoftwoforms,connectedbyNextandPrevious buttons.

128

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 79: Properties tab for an inventory custom view, first form

Sincethisformisafilter,ifyoudonotsupplyorselectavalueforafield,thesystemdoesnotnarrow thelistofdevicesthatitshowswhenyouopenthecustomview. ClicktheNextbuttontoadvancetothesecondformofthePropertiestab.

129

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 80: Properties tab for an inventory custom view, second form

ClicktheNextbuttontoadvancetothethirdformofthePropertiestab.

130

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 81: Properties tab for an inventory custom view, third form

ClicktheNextbuttontoadvancetothefourthformofthePropertiestab.

131

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 82: Properties tab for an inventory custom view, fourth form

ClicktheNextbuttontoadvancetothefifthformofthePropertiestab.

132

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 83: Properties tab for an inventory custom view, fifth form

ThefinalformincludesanAdditionalCriteriabutton.

133

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifyouclickthisbutton,WMopensanadditionalcriteriadialog.

Figure 84: Additional custom view criteria dialog, Properties tab

TheMorebuttoninthiswindowaddsasinglePropertyName/MatchCriteriacorrelatedpairoffields eachtimeyouclickit.Toaddthreepairs,forexample,clicktheMorebuttonthreetimes.

134

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 85: Criteria dialog with three properties

TheFewerbuttonremovesapair. Tospecifywhatcolumnsyournewcustomviewshouldinclude,clicktheSelectPropsToView button.

tip ................ To add vertical scrolling that you can view and check any available property that is not in the view when this dialog opens, resize the dialog window.

135

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 86: Select Table Columns dialog for inventory custom view

note ............. These fields are read-write as well as selectable. However, you cannot reorder the columns by overwriting the default contents of their text boxes. Moreover, the system will determine the initial column arrangement regardless of the order that you see here. In the actual view, you will be able to rearrange columns for only the current view session.

Tospecifymorecolumns,clicktheAdditionaltablecolumnsbutton.

Figure 87: User defined table columns window for inventory custom view

136

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

TheMore,Fewer,andRemovebuttonsinthiswindowworkthesameasintheCriteriaDialog windowabove.TheDisplayNameandPropertyNameentriesaddthepropertytothelistof selectablecolumnsinthepreviousdialog.Acheckintheassociatedcheckboxaddsthepropertyasa columntothecustomInventoryview.Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeconstructionofyourtable, clickOKinthesetablecolumnswindows.BackintheShowobjectwiththesePropertieswindow,click theTreeNodePropertiestab.

Figure 88: Tree Node Properties tab for inventory custom view

Themeaningsofthesefieldsareasfollows.

Table 7: Tree node properties for event filter view

Field Description

FrameTitle Specifythenametobedisplayedonthetitlebarofthecustomview. MenuFile Name IconFile Specifythepanelspecificmenufilename.Ifthisfieldisleftblank,thedefaultmenuis displayed. Specifytheiconname(intheWM_ Home/imagesdirectory)touseforthecustomview. Thisiconisvisibleinthetreeaswellasinthetitlebarofthecustomview.

137

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TreePopup Specifythefilenameofthemenuusedtodisplayacontextualmenuforthenewcustom Menu viewnodeintheNavigationtree. NodeIndex Specifythepositionofthecustomviewinrelationtopreviouslyaddedviews.Ifthisfieldis leftblank,theviewwillbeappendedtotheendofthecurrentlistofcustomviews.

Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeviewfilterthatyouhaveconstructed,clicktheApplyFilterbutton. Seealsothefollowingothersectionsofthisguide: ModifyingaCustomViewonPage93 RenamingaCustomViewonPage93 ResizingColumnsinaCustomViewonPage93 RemovingaCustomViewonPage94

6.3

Topology Data Exports

WMallowsyoutoexporteither allofthedatafromtheInventory onlythedataofthecurrentscrollableInventorypage.

Procedure 8: To export topology data

1. 2. HavethedesiredInventoryviewontopintheviewpanel. Either fromthemainmenu,selectActionsExportTopologyData. pressCtrl+Shift+E.

TheExportDatadialogboxisdisplayed.

Figure 89: Export Data dialog

3.

Selectthedesiredoptionfromtheradiobuttons:ExportEntireCustomViewDataor ExportDisplayedData(onlythedatathatthecurrentPageLengthsettingoftheviewframe isallowingintothecurrentdisplay). EnterthefilenameinFilenamefield. ClickExport. Astatusmessageisdisplayed.

4. 5.

TheexportedcustomviewdatafileissavedintheWM_ Home/imagesdirectory.

138

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

6.4

Operations on a Device
TheInventoryviewpanelsupportsrightclickmenuoptions.Rightclickonanentryinthetableto displaythedropdownlistofoptionsthatareavailableatthattimeorforthecurrentlyselected (highlighted)networkelements. Thetoplevelselectionsintheserightclickmenusareanidenticallistofoptionsforallofthevarious devices.Beneaththetoplevel,somebrachesaredevicespecificasfollows: ForonlyPMPAPandSMdevices(includingOFDMbutnotPMP320),theLaunchbranch includesalinkthatopensaclientsessioninBAM,theserverthatprocessesauthentication attemptsfromSMsandmanagestheirbandwidthserviceplansandVLANprofiles. ForonlyhighspeedPTPbackhaulmasterandslavedevicesthatsupportit,theLaunch branchincludesalinkthatlaunchesthePTPLinkPlannertool. ForonlychildWMs,theLaunchbranchincludes alinktoClient,whichopensaWMclientsessionintothechildWM. nolinkto[thedevice]WebPagelikeeveryotherelementhas.

Forgenericelements(seeGenericElements(NonCambiumDevices)onPage53forthe definitionofthisdevicetype),theLaunchbranchisabsent.

Theoptionsthatareavailableforallelementsthroughtheirrightclickmenuareasshown inFigure90.

Figure 90: Right-click options common for all elements

139

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 8: References for common command options

Command Option AddRelationship AddtoDeviceGroup Alarms ApplyTemplate Children CloneDevice Components ConfigureDevice CredentialManager CreateReport CreateTemplate CustomerContactDetail Dashboard DeleteObjectandTraces DeleteReport DeleteTemplate DeviceGroupMembership DeviceSummaryReport EditReport EditTemplate ElementProperties Events ExtendedFamily InstallSoftwareUpgrades, PMP,PTP,CMM ManageDevice PhysicalMap PingDevice See Section Titled AddingRelationshipsAmongDevices CreatingaStaticDeviceGroupor AddingDevicestoaStaticDeviceGroup ViewingAlarmsforaDevice ApplyingaConfigurationTemplate AddingRelationshipsAmongDevices CloningaDeviceConfiguration ViewingComponentProperties UsingtheConfigureDeviceCommand SettingWMCredentialsforaGroupofSelectedDevices CreatingaConfigurationReport CreatingaConfigurationTemplate FindingtheCustomerAssignedtotheDevice ViewingtheDashboardforaDevice DeletinganObjectandTraces DeletingaConfigurationReport DeletingaConfigurationTemplate CreatingandUsingDeviceGroups ViewingaDeviceSummaryReport EditingaConfigurationReportTemplate EditingaConfigurationTemplate ViewingBasicProperties ViewingEventsforaDevice AddingRelationshipsAmongDevices ForPMP,PTP,orCMMdevices:UpgradingDevicesOnDemand, SchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTask ManagingorUnmanagingaDevice UsingthePhysicalMap PingingaDevice Page 236 311 316 204 628 236 637 202 613 250 328 623 229 206 263 339 636 301 225 337 631 200 203 236 289 649 231 147 232

140

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 See Section Titled UsingtheConfigureDeviceCommand RefreshingDeviceData RunningaConfigurationReport Page 613 250 333 184 205 231 197 259

Command Option RebootDevice RefreshStoredData RunReport

SetLocationinPhysicalMap ChangingtheGeolocationforaDevice Statistics UnmanageDevice UpdateStatus WebPage ViewingPerformanceDataforaDevice ManagingorUnmanagingaDevice UpdatingtheStatusofaDeviceoraNetwork AccessingtheWebInterfaceofaDevice

Table 9: References for special command options

Command Option BAM LaunchingBAM See Page 642 142 142

ConfigurationControl PMP320devicedocumentationsetandFigure91 ConfigureMode PTPLinkPlanner PMP320devicedocumentationsetandFigure92 HighspeedPTPbackhauldevicedocumentationset

141

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

WhentherightclickedelementisaPMP320AP,thedropdownmenuincludesthefollowing additionaloptions: ToolsSpectrumAnalyzer.ThisoptionisdescribedunderUsingtheSpectrumAnalyzer UtilityonPage256. ToolsConfigurationControl.Thisoptionlaunchesthefollowingdialog.

Figure 91: Configuration Control dialog for PMP 320 AP

ToolsConfigureMode.ThisoptionlaunchestheConfigureModedialog,withthefollowing modeoptions.

Figure 92: Configure Mode dialog for PMP 320 AP, default values

142

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 93: Configure Mode dialog for PMP 320 AP, Mode BW selections

Figure 94: Configure Mode dialog for PMP 320 AP, Mode Ratio selections

Figure 95: Configure Mode dialog for PMP 320 AP, Mode Map selections

WhentherightclickedelementisaPMP320CPE,thedropdownmenuincludestheoption ToolsUploadAAACertificatetoCPE.ThisoptionisdescribedunderUploadingRADIUSAAA CertificatesonPage286. WhentherightclickedelementisaPMPAP,thedropdownmenuincludesthefollowingadditional options: ToolsDropSubscriberSession.ThisoptionisdescribedunderDroppingaSubscriber SessiononPage234. ToolsSpectrumAnalyzer.Thisoption,althoughavailableinthedropdownlistof commands,isnotsupportedforthePMPAP.Selectionofthisoptionspawnstheerror This operation is not supported for the selected device. ToolsUploadAAACertificatetoSM.ThisoptionisdescribedunderUploadingRADIUS AAACertificatesonPage286.

WhentherightclickedelementisaPMPSM,thedropdownmenuincludesthefollowingadditional options: ToolsDropSubscriberSession.ThisoptionisdescribedunderDroppingaSubscriber SessiononPage234. ToolsLinkCapacityTest.ThisoptionisdescribedunderUsingtheLinkCapacityTestUtility onPage252. ToolsSpectrumAnalyzer.ThisoptionisdescribedunderUsingtheSpectrumAnalyzer UtilityonPage256. ToolsUploadAAACertificatetoSM.ThisoptionisdescribedunderUploadingRADIUS AAACertificatesonPage286.

143

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

6.5

Operations on a Network
Toseealistofallcurrentlymanagednetworks,clickonNetworksbeneathInventoryinthe Applicationstree.

Figure 96: Networks panel view

Whenyourightclickonanetworkinthelist,WMopensadropdownlistofcommandoptionsthat youcanexecuteupontheselectednetwork.Theseoptionsareasfollows:

6.5.1

Start/Stop Discovery
IntheNetworkspaneloftheInventoryview,therightclickmenuprovidesoptionstoStartDiscovery andStopDiscovery. WhenyouselectStopDiscovery,thediscoveryprocesswillbehalted,butsometimemaybe requiredforalldiscoveryrelatedactivitiesontheselectednetworktoend.ThisisbecauseWMwill continuetotrytodiscoverelementsthatrespondedtopreviousmessages,eventhoughitceases sendingnewdiscoveryrelatedmessages.Forexample,preventingdiscoveryofelementsthatalready respondedtoabroadcastdiscoverymessageisnotpossible.

144

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

StopDiscoveryalsopreventsfuturerediscoveryfortheselectednetwork,eventhoughrediscovery maybescheduledviatheDiscoveryConfigurator(asitisbydefaultevery48hours). IfStopDiscoveryisselected,rediscoveryisalsopreventedwhenWMisstoppedandthenstarted, thoughbydefaultarediscoverycycleisinitiatedonWMstartup. SelectStartDiscoverytoinitiatediscoveryfortheselectednetwork,accordingtotheparametersthat arecurrentlysetforitintheDiscoveryConfigurator.TheresultswillbedisplayedinStatuscolumnof theInventoryviewtable. WhenyouselectStartDiscovery,thechosennetworkisalsoeligibleforanyscheduledrediscovery cyclesinthefuture.AcommonmethodforprovokingWMintoexecutingadiscoverycyclefora networkthatisnotundergoingdiscoveryistostopandthenstartdiscoveryforthatnetwork.

6.5.2

Status Update for the Network

IfyouselecttherightclickUpdateStatusoptionoveranetworkname,WMperformsastatuspollon thedevicesand,ifthestatuspollfails,throwsaMajorseverityalarmindicatingthatthedeviceis unreachable.

6.5.3

Delete Object and Traces of the Network

Thisselectionremovestheselected(highlighted)networkfromtheclientaswellasfromthe database.
important ........... This command is not undoable and can have unwanted consequences. See Deleting an Object and Traces on Page 263.

6.5.4

Credential Manager for the Network

IfyouselecttherightclickUpdateStatusoptionoveranetworkname,WMopenstheCredential Managerinterface,whichallowsyoutosetSNMPand/orTelnet/FTPauthenticationcredentialsfor theWMtouseforitsaccesstoeachelementinthatnetwork.SeeSettingWMCredentialsfora GroupofSelectedDevicesonPage250.

145

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Using the Physical Map

WMautomaticallydiscoversdevicesandtheirlogicalrelationsinthenetworkandgraphically representstheminthephysicalmap,whichisarepresentationoftheirphysicalsetting.Aclickon anelementinthephysicalmapopensasmallsummarywindowofdetailssuchasdevicestatus, radioinformation,andlinkperformance. Bydesign,thephysicalmaprepresentsdeviceswhose devicetypetemplatefilesweredistributedbytheinstallationtool. Additionally,youcanrepresentanyotherdevicewithasingleuserconfigurableicon.Inthis case,thepopupwindowdescribedunderViewingDetailsonPage176containsonlydevice name,itsIPaddress,basicManagedObjectorSnmpNodedata,andlinkstotheInventory viewandFaultManagementviews.Itcontainsnotransmittedpowerlevelvalue,operating channel,orotherdevicespecificinformation.Themapincludesparentchildrelationship pointersforthesedevicesbasedonwhattypeoflinktheyarecapableofsupporting,but doesnotincludetheircoveragecontours. devicetypetemplateisstoredontheWMserver. Intheunlikelycasethatyourserveradministratordeletedadevicetypetemplatefileafter installationbecauseyournetworkdidnotcontainanyelementsofthatdevicetype,andyou lateraddthemtoyournetwork,yourserveradministratorcanreplacethemissingtemplate, andthenthephysicalmapwilldisplaythosenewdevices. whoselocationcoordinatesareknowntoWM.Seethefollowingsection,ImportingtheGeo locationsonPage147.

Toviewthephysicalmap,youcan rightclickonadeviceintheInventoryviewandselectPhysicalMapfromthedropdown list. rightclickinanumberofcontextstoselectPhysicalMapfromthedropdownlist.See DisplayingthePhysicalMaponPage152.

7.1

Importing the Geo-locations

Thegeolocationimportfeatureallowsfortheimportofacommaseparatedvalue(.csv)geolocation file.Thisfeatureisalwaysavailable,regardlessoftheclientuserinterfacecontext,andalwayshasthe sameeffect.Itdoesnotdependonorapplytocurrentlydisplayedview. ThemostcommonuseoftheCSVlocationimportistoinitializenetworkelementgeolocationsafter fulldiscoveryofthenetwork.Thelocationimportdoesnotcreatenetworkelemententriesin WirelessManager;itonlyupdatesthegeolocationofalreadydiscoverednetworkelements.Often thelocationimportistheonlypracticalwaytoupdatethenetworkelementgeolocations,sincemost devicesdonothaveGPSdataandthereareusuallytoomanyelementstomanuallyupdatethegeo locationofeachelement.Onceeachdevicehasageolocation,WMwillplotitinthephysicalmap.

147

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Toaccessthelocationimportfeature,fromthemainmenu,select ToolsPhysicalMapGeolocationImport(CSV).Thisopensafileselectiondialogforbrowsingto selectacommaseparatedvalueplaintextfile.Thefilemustbeintheformatspecifiedbelow, includingaheaderandonelinepernode,whereeachdevicelinespecifiesinfourcolumns 1. 2. 3. 4. theDeviceNameexactlyasdisplayedintheleftcolumnoftheInventoryview itslatitudeindecimaldegrees,wherenegativenumbersindicatewestlatitude itslongitudeindecimaldegrees,wherenegativenumbersindicatewestsouthlongitude itsheightinmeterswithrespecttotheground,asopposedtoaltitudewithrespecttosea level

Theformatofthefileisasfollows:
Version: <version> Create Date: <MM/DD/YYYY HH:MM TimeZone> name, Latitude, Longitude, Height_Above_Ground name, Latitude, Longitude, Height_Above_Ground

BlankspacesintheCSVfileareignored,exceptinthenamefield.Thenamemustbeintheexact formatandsyntaxthatWMuses.Noconversionornormalizationisperformed,exceptthatacolon segmentedMACaddressisconverted,ifnecessary,tomatchaMACaddresssyntaxthatisknownto WM.Forexample,whereWMusestheMACaddressasthename,iftheMACaddressintheWM namefieldappearsas00 05 12 0C 09 1B,buttheMACaddressintheCSVfileappearsas 00:05:12:0C:09:1B(withcolons),thenthelocationimportfeatureconvertstheimportedMAC addresstomatchtheknownMACaddress. CSVfilescanbesavedtoCSVdirectlyfromMicrosoftExcelandotherspreadsheetprogramsby selectingSaveAsandchoosingtheCSVformat,acceptinganyresultingwarningsaboutlossoffull spreadsheetfunctionality. ThefollowingisatypicalfileforasystemthatusestheMACaddressasthenetworkelementname:
Version: 1 Create Date: 04 05 13 0C 09 04 05 13 0F 00 04 05 13 0F 01 04 19 59 B4 94 04 00 9E 03 7B 04 00 9E 03 7B 1/24/2008 1B, 25.743199, ED, 25.745674, 3E, 25.748955, 24, 25.750265, 50, 25.746677, B5, 25.749446,

-84.365451, 20 -84.36471, 20 -84.363566, 20 -84.360474, 20 -84.35942, 20 -84.366381, 20

important ........... The import operation discards the top two lines of the file, even if they contain geolocation record formats. Ensure that your geo-location records begin in the third row of data.

WhenyouselectToolsPhysicalMapGeolocationImport(CSV),WMopenstheGeolocation Importwindow.
note ............. The file for import must be accessible to the file system of the client device.

148

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 97: Geo-location Import window

Clickthe ellipsisbuttonandbrowsetotheproperpath.SelectthefileandclicktheOpenbutton. Then,backintheGeolocationimportwindow ifyouwanttheimportoperationtooccuronceandnow,clicktheRunNowbutton.TheGUI includesaprogressindicatorandbuttonsthatallowyoutostart,stop,andpausetheimport operation.

Figure 98: Import CSV File of Geo-Locations window

ifyoupreferinsteadtodelaytheimportoperationorsetituptorepeat,clickthe RunLaterbutton.TheCreateScheduleTaskdialogopenstoitsScheduletab.

149

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ForinformationonhowtosetthefieldsoftheScheduletab,seeTable87:Optionsforschedulingof tasksonPage669.Aftersettingtheschedulefortheimporttask,clicktheDetailstabonlyifyouwant tobrowsetochangethefiletobeimported.Ifyouwantthetasktoimportthefilethatyouselected fromtheGeolocationImportwindow,clickSaveintheCreateScheduleTaskwindow. Ifparsingerrorsarefound(forexample,afieldwithimpropercharacters),anoteisplacedatthetop oftheResultssection.Invalidvaluesorrowswithmissingfieldsarenotedonaperrowbasis.Ifa namedoesnotmatchthatofanydiscoverednodeinWM,thenthegeolocationinformationis ignored,andanoticeforthatnodeappearsintheResultsreport.

7.2

Importing Addresses
Youcanimportaproperlyformattedfilethatcorrelatesdevicestotheirheightvaluesandstreet addresses.Toaccessthelocationimportfeature,fromthemainmenu,select ToolsPhysicalMapAddressImport(CSV).Thisopensafileselectiondialogforbrowsingtoselect acommaseparatedvalueplaintextfile.Thefilemustbeintheformatspecifiedbelow,includinga headerandonelinepernode,whereeachdevicelinespecifiesinthreecolumns: 1. 2. 3. theDeviceNameexactlyasdisplayedintheleftcolumnoftheInventoryview itsheightinmeterswithrespecttotheground,asopposedtoaltitudewithrespectto sealevel itsaddress

150

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Theformatofthefileisasfollows:
Version:version Create Date: date Device Name, Height, Address Device Name, Height, Address Device Name, Height, Address

BlankspacesintheCSVfileareignored,exceptinthenamefield.TheDeviceNamemustbeinthe exactformatandsyntaxthatWMuses.Noconversionornormalizationisperformed,exceptthata colonsegmentedMACaddressisconverted,ifnecessary,tomatchaMACaddresssyntaxthatis knowntoWM.Forexample,whereWMusestheMACaddressastheDeviceName,iftheMAC addressintheWMnamefieldappearsas00 05 12 0C 09 1B,buttheMACaddressintheCSVfile appearsas00:05:12:0C:09:1B(withcolons),thentheaddressimportfeatureconvertsthe importedMACaddresstomatchtheknownMACaddress. TotherightofthecommathatseparatestheHeightcolumnfromtheAddresscolumn,additional commas(whicharetypicalinaddresses)areignored.AnyaddressformatthatGooglesupportsisalso supportedbytheaddressimporttoolandthephysicalmap. CSVfilescanbesavedtoCSVdirectlyfromMicrosoftExcelandotherspreadsheetprogramsby selectingSaveAsandchoosingtheCSVformat,acceptinganyresultingwarningsaboutlossoffull spreadsheetfunctionality. ThefollowingisatypicalfileforasystemthatusestheMACaddressasthenetworkelementname:
Version:1 Create Date: 2/4/2008 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0F, 6.0961913,Marysol Trail, Cedar Park, TX 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0E,6.1564272,123 Main Street, Linden, TX 0A 0A 0A 0A 0A 0B,6.0859231,46 W. Hwy US 183, Tanner, TX important ........... The import operation discards the top two lines of the file, even if they contain address record formats. Ensure that your address records begin in the third row of data.

WhenyouselectToolsPhysicalMapAddressImport(CSV),WMopenstheLocationImportfrom AddressCSVwindow.
note ............. The file for import must be accessible to the file system of the client device.

Figure 99: Location Import from Address CSV

Clickthe button.

ellipsisbuttonandbrowsetotheproperpath.SelectthefileandclicktheImport

151

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

7.3

Displaying the Physical Map

Commandoptionstobringthephysicalmaptothefrontoftheviewframeareavailablethroughout theWMuserinterface: Inthefollowingareas,ifyourightclickonanelement,GoToPhysicalMapisanoptionin theresultingdropdownlistofoptionsandopenswiththetargetelementinitscenter: aNetworkEventsview,wheretheelementisidentifiedbytheSourcebydefault anAlarmsview,wheretheelementisidentifiedbytheFailureObjectbydefault anInventoryview,wheretheelementisidentifiedbybothitsMACAddress,Device Name,andIPAddressbydefault,excepttheNetworksviewandReportsviews

IntheApplicationstree,ifyourightclickonthePhysicalMapbranchandselect ActionsLoadOnline/OfflineMap,thentheselectedmaptypeopens.

Inthemainmenu,ifyouselectToolsPhysicalMapLoadOnline/OfflineMap,then theselectedmaptypeopens.

note ............. If you ever encounter an AJAX request timed out error displayed on the physical map, this could be the result of network traffic too high, WM server too busy, or inability of the physical map to respond quickly enough to update requests from your client.

ThephysicalmapdisplaysinformationthatitharvestsfromcoremanagementsystemswithinWM, suchasperformancedataorconfigurationproperties.Asaresult,thephysicalmapmaysometimes noticeablylagbehindthesecoresystems.Forexample,youmayviewaperformancedatastatisticin theperformancedataConfiguredCollectionview(anexampleisshowninFigure269onPage384), andthenobservethatthevalueinthephysicalmapissometimelaterupdatedtomatchwhatyou sawintheConfiguredCollection. Thisbehaviorisdesigned,sothatupdatesinthephysicalmapdonotinterferewithWMcoredata gatheringandprocessing.Intypicalnetworks,thedelaymaybeimperceptiblebut,especiallywhile WMisinitiallydiscoveringthousandsofdevicesinaverylargenetwork,thephysicalmapmaydisplay theupdatedinformationonlyafterminutesorevenhourshaveelapsed. Thephysicalmapcanbe onlyonline:aGooglemap,licensedanddownloadeduponclientdemand onlyoffline:tilesloadedintoaGeoServerMapTileServerthatiseitherlocalorremote totheWMserver eitheronlineoroffline,wherebothareavailable.

152

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.3.1

Available Formats for Online Maps

AGooglephysicalmapisarepresentationofphysicalsettingexpressedasasatelliteview,a geographicmapwithroadwaysandotherprominentfeatures,orahybridofboth,oratopographic mapoftheterrain.InanyGooglemap,amenuofmaptypesiseitherpresentoravailablefordisplay, dependingonthesettingoftheWindowMapTypeControloptioninthemainmenuofthe physicalmap.SeeMapTypeControlonPage174. FordifferentiationbetweentheGooglemapandtheGeoServermap,thisguideandtheWMclient refertotheGooglemapastheonlinemap.Theonlinemapislaunchedinanyofthewayslistedin DisplayingthePhysicalMaponPage152.However,inthecaseswherethecommandoptionis generic(PhysicalMap),WMopenstheofflinemapinstead,ifthatwasthelastmapthatwas previouslyopen. Certainfeaturesareuniquetotheonlinemap.Thesearelistedasunavailableinthenextsection, FormatofOfflineMaps.

7.3.2

Format of Offline Maps

AGeoServerphysicalmapisastaticsetoftilesdownloadedtoandavailablefromtheGeoserver, whoseaccessfromtheclientisconfiguredintheadministrationtool.(SeeUsingtheOfflinePhysical MapPanelonPage693.)FordifferentiationbetweentheGooglemapandtheGeoServermap,this guideandtheWMclientrefertotheGeoservermapastheofflinemap. Theuserexperienceinthismapisidenticaltothatintheonlinemap,exceptthatthefollowing featuresareneveravailableintheofflinemap: Linkprofile.SeeFigure117:PathProfileonPage179. Googlesearch.SeeGoogleSearchBaronPage173. Showaddress.SeeCurrentLocationonPage175. Streetview.SeeAccessingtheStreetViewofaSelectedPointorDeviceinthePhysicalMap onPage182. Devicerepositioningthroughdrag/drop.SeeChangingtheGeolocationforaDeviceon Page184.

Thepredominanceoffiguresinthissectionthatshowexamplesofthephysicalmaparetakenfrom theonlinemap.Thefollowingareexamplesoftheofflinemap,whosefeaturesincludegraphical representationsofprominentwaterwaysanddenselypopulatedareas.Beawarethatyouroffline mapsmayvaryinappearancefromtheseexamples,sinceyourWMserveradministratorhasthe flexibilitytocollectandloadintotheGeoservertheofflineimagelayersfromanyoftendifferentdata sourcetypes.

153

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 100: Offline map, midwestern USA

Figure 101: Offline map, northeastern Illinois

154

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 102: Offline map, network at a plus zoom factor

Figure 103: Offline map, network at a minus zoom factor

155

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TheofflinemapislaunchedinanyofthewayslistedinDisplayingthePhysicalMaponPage152. However,inthecaseswherethecommandoptionisgeneric(PhysicalMap),WMopenstheonline mapinstead,ifthatwasthelastmapthatwaspreviouslyopen.

7.4

Generating a Physical Map View of an Element Selected in the Inventory View

ThissectiondescribeshowtoproceedfromviewinganelementintheInventoryviewtoviewingin thephysicalmapinthecontextofaclusterofelements(wherethezoomlevelcausesproximal elementstobeobscuredbyanelementicon)orinthecontextoflinksinwhichtheelementis involved.

Procedure 9: To view an Inventory element in the context of a physical map

1. IntheInventoryview,rightclicktheelementthatyouwanttoviewinaphysicalmap.

2.

Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectGoToPhysicalMap.

156

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. The MapCenter selection from the main physical map menu may zoom out to the most negative level of zoom.

7.5

Viewing Collocated and Proximal Elements

Insomecases,eitherthelevelofzoomhideselementsbeneathotherelementsinthedownloaded physicalmaporelementrepresentationsarepartiallyoverlaidbytherepresentationsofothers. Thiscanparticularlyoccurinthefollowingsituations: whereaclusterofPMPAPsarecollocatedwithaCMMandaPTPslavedevice whereonlyonetowerorotherwisehighelevationvenueisavailableintheareaforeffective RFcommunications

Figure 104: Physical map: collapsed instance of device collocation

157

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Intheexamplecaseabove,thePTPmasteriscollocatedwithaPMPAPthathasgoodlinkstothree PMPSMs.SincetheAPisnotviewableatanyzoomlevel,theiconpileisrepresentedbyaplussign ().Aclickonthetopiconintheiconpileexpandstheviewtoincludetheclusterthathadbeen representedbytheiconwiththeplussign.

Figure 105: Physical map: expanded instance of device collocation

Procedure 10: To view an element in a cluster

1. Iftheelementispartofclusterthatcannotbedisplayed(nondisplayedmembersofthe clusterarerepresentedby+)becauseoftheimmediatezoomlevel,then tobrieflyseeallothermembers,either clickonthe+

rightclickontheelementandselectExpandClusterfromthedropdownlist ofoptions.

Allmembersofthecluster,butnotnecessarilyalloftheelementstowhichthey currentlylink,arebrieflydisplayedatthecurrentzoomlevel. Theexpansionoftheclusterisfleeting.Forexample,theclusteriscollapseduponthe nextmousemovement.

158

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 tocontinuouslyviewtheothermembers,fromthemainPhysicalMapsmenu,select OptionsDisableautocloseonclusteredelements

andthenrepeatthestepsfromthefirstbullet. Ifthisischecked,theusermustclickinanunusedportionofthemaptocloseexpanded clusters.Ifthisisunchecked,expandedclustersclosewhenthemousecursormoves outsidetheboundsofthecluster. Toviewalloftheelementsthatareinlinkwiththeselectedelement,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 11: To view linked elements within the same physical map
1. Usethevertical+/bartozoomout.

2.

Ifalllinkedelementsarenotdisplayedyet,zoomoutagainasmanytimesasnecessaryto getthemintothemap.

159

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

note ............. The MapCenter selection from the main physical map menu may zoom out to the most negative level of zoom.

160

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. It may be helpful to detach and enlarge the Physical Map, re-center the map, and/or collapse the selections panel to the right of the map. Also, enlarge the confines of the physical map to the extent possible.

7.6

Panning
Theclientkeepsdatareadyforanadditionalareathatsurroundsthedevicesthatarecurrentlyvisible inthephysicalmap.Thisadditionalareamakesothercurrentlynonvisibleelementsavailabletothe mapasyoupan(clickanddragtomovethefocalpoint). Thephysicalmapthendisplayslinklinesandcoveragecontoursthatareassociatedwiththeoriginal devices,evenwhentheylinktodevicesthatmaybenotcurrentlyvisibleinthemap.Ifyoupan beyondtheedgeoftheoriginalphysicalmap,thenthedevicesthatlinktothemmaybecomevisible, evenwhentheoriginaldevicesarenolongervisible. Ifanetworkelementisfarenoughwayfromtheboundsoftheoriginalphysicalmap,thenits coveragecontoursarenotvisible,eveniftheywouldactuallyextendintothecurrentlyvisiblearea.It isalsopossiblethatthephysicalmaplosessightof,orisunabletopanwidelyenoughtofind,someof theelementsthatareinvolvedinlinkswithvisibleelements.Thisisalimitationofmappanning,not oftheWMphysicalmap.

161

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

7.7

Jumping to a Different Position in a Physical Map

Fromanydisplayofthephysicalmap,youcanjumptocoordinatesthatyouspecify.Todoso,right clickinthemapandselectMapShowAddressfromthedropdownlistofoptions.

Whenthemaprepaints,clickontheEnter a new lat/longlinkandmodifythecoordinatesinthe resultingInputdialog.

ClickOK.Themapjumpstoandrenderstheaddressofthecoordinatesthatyouspecified.

7.8

Refreshing a Physical Map

ThephysicalmapincludestheMapRefreshoptionfromthemainmenuofthemap.Ifthequality ofalinkchangedsincethemapwaslastlaunched,thenthecolorofthelinethatrepresentsthelink willchangewhenyouselectthisoption.Followinganidleperiodthatissetintheconfigurationfile, themapwillautomaticallyberefreshed. TheMapmenualsoincludestheCenteroption,whichbothzoomsoutandpositionsthecenterofthe mapatthegeographiccenterofthenetworkthatisbeingviewed.

162

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 106: Refresh and centering options for a physical map

7.9
7.9.1

Setting Physical Map Options

Selecting Links, Coverage, and Standards Types to Display on a Map Type
Asauser,youmayselect oneofthefollowingfromthelinkdropdownlistasatypeforLinkMetric:

ForCustomSelection,anEditCustomlinkappears: Ifyouclickonthislink,thecustomsetofoptionsopenasalistthatoverlaysthemap:

163

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

oneofthefollowingfromtheAirStandarddropdownlistasatypeofairinterface representation: oneofthecombinedtypes:

anyfromalistthatWMbasesuponthecurrentlymanagedelements;forexample:

or

164

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

oneofthefollowingoptionsforCoveragerepresentation:

TheRSSIContoursoptionforCoveragedisplaysthecontoursaccordingtothefollowingcolor scheme,whichispresentforreferenceintheLegendpanelatthebottomoftheselection frametotherightofthephysicalmap:

oneofthefollowingMapoptionsasatypeformapbackground

Ifyouchoosenofiltering(AllLinks,NoCoverage,AllAirStandards),thenthephysicalmapusesits owngenericcolorschemeanditsowngenericlegend.Otherwise,thephysicalmapmayuseother colorsandthelegendisspecifictoyourselections.Linksarerepresentedaslineswithawhitearrow (chevron)pointingawayfromtheparentelementandtowardthechild. TheLegendFilterfeatureallowsyoutoselectthedesiredqualitylevels(forPoor,for Okay,forGood)oflinkstodisplayall,some,ornone.

Youcansetyourmaptodisplayonlyasingletypeoflinkrepresentationatatime,ifyouwish:RSSI, DataRate,PathMetric,RSSIAutoThreshold,Jitter,orLogicalLinks.ForeachexceptLogicalLinks, thequalityassessmentthatthedisplayrepresentsisarelativestatementabouttheparticular measureoflinkquality. Forexample,ifyouselectLinkDataRate,thenthelinecolorsummarizestheeffectivenessofthelink withrespecttoonlytherateatwhichdatatravelsinthelink.IfyouselectRSSIAutoThreshold,then thelinecolorindicatesreceivedsignalexpectationsderivedfromastandarderroralgorithm,as describedunderUsingtheRSSIAutoThresholdFeatureonPage171.

165

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifthelastpollofeitherofthedevicesinalinkwasunsuccessful,thenthecolorofthelinkbetween themisred(untilthealertforthatpollhasbeencleared).Otherwise,theselinkcolorsarebasedon performancedatathatiscurrentlyinthedatabaseandarenotintendedtoreflectthestatusofeither orbothdevices.(TheiconassociatedwithadeviceintheInventoryviewreflectsitsstatus.)Iflogical linksaretheonlyknownlinkdataforapairofnodes,orifonlylogicallinksarebeingdisplayed,they arebydefaultblack,andtheircolors,likethatofanyothermapelement,areuserconfigurable.

Figure 107: All reliability links selected for physical map

166

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 108: Good reliability links filtered out

Ifacolorisfilteredoutoftheview,alinkmaydisappearandreappearasitexperiencesbetteror worselinkquality.Thereisnoprovisiontoapplythisfeaturetosomelinksandnotapplyittoothers. Ifyoudisablethedisplayforoneormorelinkqualitylevel(s)inaphysicalmap,thenyoumust remembertoreintroducethelevel(s)checkitslinktypecheckboxinanysubsequentmapwhere youwantlinesforlinksofthosequalitylevelstobepainted.Thepersistenceofthefilterisshownin thefollowingcapture,whichwastakenofanewmaplaunchedbeforeanynewchangewasmadein thelegendfilter.

167

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 109: Good reliability links persistently filtered out from previous physical map setting

Whenadditionalelementsthatexistwithinthecurrentlymappedareacanbeseenonlybyzooming in,themapincludesamagnifyingglasssymbol:

Figure 110: Physical map: further zooming required for viewing more devices

168

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 111: Physical map: All Links, No Coverage, All Air Standards, Map

Figure 112: Physical map: All Links, No Coverage, All Air Standards, Hybrid

169

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 113: Physical map: Logical Links, No Coverage, All Air Standards, Terrain

ThemainmenuofthephysicalmapframeincludestheOptionsAdjustcontourtransparency selection.Whenyouselectthisoption,WMopensanInputwindowforconfiguringapercentage.

Ahigherpercentagemakesfeaturesunderneaththecontoursmorevisibleorlegible.

170

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.9.2

Using the RSSI Auto-Threshold Feature

AsthefirstdashlistonPage163implies,youcansetyourmaptodisplayonlyasingletypeoflink representationatatime,ifyouwish:RSSI,DataRate,PathMetric,RSSIAutoThreshold,Jitter, StatusPollState,orLogicalLinks.RSSI(RadioSignalStrengthIndicator)isarelativemeasureofthe strengthofareceivedsignal.IfyouselectRSSIAutoThresholdfromamongthespecificlinktype representations,thenWMappliesastandarderroralgorithmwithcurrentandhistoricalRSSIdata (derivesrecurrencerelations)tocharacterizelinkreliabilityintocolorcodingasfollows: Poor()representsgreaterthan95%likelihoodthatthecurrentRSSIofthelink significantlydiffersfromhistoricalRSSIvalues. Okay()represents90to95%likelihoodthatthecurrentRSSIofthelinksignificantly differsfromhistoricalRSSIvalues. Good()representslessthan90%likelihoodthatthecurrentRSSIofthelink significantlydiffersfromhistoricalRSSIvalues.

Dependingonhowlongthephysicalmaphasbeendisplayed,itmaybeadvisabletorefreshtheRSSI datathatthemapuses.SelecttheoptionToolsPhysicalMapResetHistoricalRSSIDatafromthe mainWMmenu.

7.9.3

Filtering the Icons to Display by Current Alarm Level

Boththephysicalmapmenuandtheelementstatusbaroverlayallowyoutoexcludefromdisplay theiconsofelementswhosecurrentalarmlevel(s)youdeselect.Youcanexcludeorreintroduce themasfollows: Tohideallelementicons,inthemainmenuofthephysicalmapframe,select(check) StatusFilterHideAllStatusLevels.

Toselectivelyexcludeelementsofoneormorestatuslevels,either clicktouncheckthestatuslevelfromtheStatusFiltermenu(shownabove).For example,tohidetheiconsofelementswhosealarmstatusisClear,uncheckStatus FilterClear. clickHideforthestatuslevel(s)intheStatusmenuoftheLegendpanelinthelower rightcornerofthemap.

171

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

BoththeStatusFiltermenuandtheStatusmenureflectchangesmadeintheother.Toreintroduce theiconsofelementswhosealarmstatusiscurrentlydeselected,useeithermenu.

7.9.4

Setting Whether Elements Appear Based on Zoom

ThemainmenuofthephysicalmapincludestheOptionsIconsalwaysrespectzoomlevel selection.

Ifthisischecked,equipmentisfilteredbythezoomlevelasdefinedintheconfigurationfile.For example,zoomingouttothefurthestsettingmayresultinonlyPTPelementsshowing. Ifthisinunchecked,themapshowsasmuchequipmentaspossible,exceptforequipmentthatwould resultintheconfiguredlimitbeingexceeded.Forexample,iftheconfiguredlimitis100,and1PTP, 99PMPdevices,and2CMM4devicesarepresent,thentheCMM4devicesarenotdisplayedunless theWMserveradministratoreditstheOakleafConfig.xmlfiletoincludeazoomlevelofgreater than100(inthemaxNumDevicestag).

172

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.9.5

Using or Hiding Other Physical Map Overlays

TheWindowsubmenuofthemainphysicalmapmenucontainstogglesthatkeeporhideseveral otheroverlays.

note ............. Although no device search utility is present in the physical map, you can often use the Search feature in the client to get a physical map link to a particular device. See Using the Search Utility on Page 94.

Google Search Bar

TheGoogleSearchBarallowsyoutoenterapartialorentirestringfromanaddress,zipcode,phone number,orcommaspaceseparatedlatitude/longitudeknowntoGoogleMapsandclickthe associatedSearchbutton.

Thesystemprintsthelistofmatchesabovethesearchboxandthemaprecentersontothelocation ofthetopmatchinthelist.

173

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Youcanthenclickonanyothermatchtohavethemaprecenteronceagain,thistimeonthe locationofthetargetofyourclick.Foranymatch,thesystemprovidesacloudthatcontainsthe name,address,phonenumber,latitude,andlongitude(totheextentthattheseareknown)of matchingentity.

Map Type Control

TheWindowMapTypeControloptionallowsyoutohideorreinstatetheMapdropdownmenu thatoverlaysthephysicalmapinthefarupperrightcorner.

Thismenucontrolswhetherthephysicalmapbackdropforthenetworkportionbeingviewedisa Googlemap,aphototakenfromasatellite,atopographicrepresentationofaltitudedifferences withintheareaofthemap,orthetopographicrepresentationwithstreetsandhighwaysoverlaying thearea(Hybrid).Toseeexamplesofthesebackdrops,seethefiguresincludedinSelectingLinks, Coverage,andStandardsTypestoDisplayonaMapTypeonPage163.

174

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Ifyouhide(uncheck)thesefiltermenusfromoverlayinthephysicalmap,youcanreinstatethemat anytimebycheckingtheWindowMapTypeControloption.

Zoom Control
TheWindowZoomControloptionallowsyoutohideorreinstateboththezoomcontrol(the vertical,incrementedbar)andtherecentercontrolintheupperleftcornerofthephysicalmap. Thesetwocontrolsareinseparable. Recentercontrol.Clickingonthearrows,clockwisefromtop, recentersthemaptothenorth,east,southorwest.Clickingon thehandsymbolrecentersthemaponitspreviouscenter. Thisscalezoomsthemapin(+)orout()byasingle incrementwhenyouclicktheplusorminussignorbysingle ormultipleincrementswhenyouclickahashinthescale.

Ifyouhide(uncheck)thesecontrolsfromoverlayinthephysicalmap,youcanreinstatethematany timebycheckingtheWindowZoomControloption. Alternativemeansarealsoprovidedforrecenteringthemapandforzooming: Torecenterthemapatapointwithinthecurrentphysicalmapdisplay,rightclickonthat pointandselectCenterfromtheresultingdropdownlistofoptions. Tozoomintothefullestextentonanypointwithinthecurrentphysicalmapdisplay,right clickonthatpointandselectZoomfromtheresultingdropdownlistofoptions.Thisboth recentersandzoomsthemapinasinglerepaintoperation.

Current Location
TheWindowCurrentLocationoptionallowsyoutoprevent(unchecked)theCurrentLocationbar

frompoppingup(forexample,wheneveryouclickinthephysicalmaporwhenyourightclickonan elementinthemapandselectMapShowAddress)orpermitittopopup(checked).Ifyouprevent itfrompoppingup,youcanreinstateitatanytimebycheckingtheWindowCurrentLocation option.

175

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Map Scale
TheWindowMapScaleoptionallowsyoutohideorreinstatethescaleindicatorinthefarbottom rightcornerofthephysicalmap.

Ifyouhidethisindicator,youcanreinstateitatanytimebycheckingtheWindowMapScale option.

Lat/Long Display
IftheWindowLat/LongDisplayoptionischecked,themapdisplayincludesanoverlaywiththe runningcoordinatesabovewhichthemousecursortravelsandhovers.

Ifthisisunchecked,thecoordinatesarenotshown.

7.10

Viewing Details in the Physical Map

note ............. Many of the options described in this section provide performance statistics for an element. Depending on how long the physical map has been displayed, it may be advisable to refresh the data that the map uses. You can do so by selecting the option ToolsPhysical MapsRefresh Physical Map Data from the main WM menu. When you do, the system may require as much as five minutes to reflect the latest changes. During this wait, selecting MapRefresh from the menu bar of the physical map may shorten the time required to reflect them.

7.10.1

Accessing Data for a Device in the Physical Map

Inadditiontorepresentinganodebyasymbolandgraphicallyrepresentingitslinksandcontours, thephysicalmaplaunchesapopupwhenyouclickonanynode.Thispopupprovidesbasic informationaboutthenodeandinformationaboutitsradiosandlinks. YoucanalsolaunchthispopupthrougharightclickonthedeviceiconfollowedbyselectionofOpen fromtheresultingdropdownlistofoptions.

176

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 114: Device data pop-up, Main tab

Figure 115: Device data pop-up, Radios tab

177

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 116: Device data pop-up, Links tab, scrolling required

178

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Forsomedata,aPlotlinkisprovidedtoopentheCollectedstatisticswindowandgraphthecollected statistics.(SeeViewingaCollectedPerformanceStatisticonPage388.)Thestatisticsforwhichthis convenienceisprovideddependsondevicetypeasfollows: ForanAPorSM,theLinkstabprovideslinkstoplotdBmandJitter.

note ............. Color coding (for example, ) summarizes Jitter by the following arbitrary standards: 4 is Good (green), >48 is Okay (yellow), >8 is Bad (red).

ForanSM,theRadiostabprovidesalinktoplotRxPower. ForanAP,theRadiostabprovidesnolinktoplotTxPower. ForaPTPdevice theRadiostabprovideslinksforplotting Frequency DataRate TxPower RxPower Mbps dBm

theLinkstabprovideslinksforplotting

TheLinkstabincludesStatusPollState,whoseassociatedboxcolorrepresentswhetherthelastpoll ofthedevicessucceeded()orfailed().ThisitemincludesanassociatedShowlink,whichwhen clickedopenstheAlarmsviewofthedevicetodisplaythetimestampofanunsuccessfulpollamong othereventsthatgeneratedalarmsandthatthusmaysuggestreasonswhythepolldidnotsucceed. WheretopographicinformationfromtheUnitedStatesGeologicalSurvey(USGS)isavailable,the pathProfilelinkopensarepresentationofthelinearheightsplotforthecenteroftheRFbeam againstthevaryingheightsoftheterrainthatliesbetweentwolinkeddevices.

Figure 117: Path Profile

179

Issue 4 August 2012 Wherethetopographicinformationisnotavailable,anerrorindicatesso.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Whereapplicable,thetabbedpopupalsoprovidesclickthroughlinkstolaunch themanagementwebinterface(devicesettings)ofthedevice.SeeFigure182onPage259. anAlarmsviewthatliststhealarms,includingthoseofClearstatus,generatedforonlythat device.SeeFigure139onPage204. thenetworkelementdashboardforthedevice.SeeViewingtheDashboardforaDeviceon Page206. aNetworkEventsviewthatliststheeventsgeneratedforonlythatdevice.SeeFigure138on Page204. anInventoryviewthatlistsdefaultInventoryinformationaboutthatdevice. theConfiguredCollectionofperformancestatisticsforthatdevice.SeeFigure140on Page205.

Figure 118: Device data pop-up, Manage tab, scrolling required

180

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 119: Device data pop-up, Manage tab for a PTP device

TheManagetabforaPTPdeviceincludesalink(shownabove)thatlaunchesthePTPLINKPlanner tool. ForanydevicewhoseairinterfacestandardisunknowntoWM,thephysicalmaprepresentsthe devicewithaquestionmark.

Figure 120: Question mark representing device of unknown type

7.10.2

Accessing the Geolocation of a Selected Point or Device in the Physical Map

Tofindthegeolocationforanypointinaphysicalmap,rightclickonthatpointandthenselect ShowAddressfromthedropdownlistofoptions.

181

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Tofindthegeolocationforanydeviceinaphysicalmap,rightclickonthedeviceandthenselect MapShowAddressfromthedropdownlistofoptions.

7.10.3

Accessing the Street View of a Selected Point or Device in the Physical Map
Toopenastreetlevelviewofanypointinthephysicalmap,rightclickonthatpointandthenselect StreetViewfromthedropdownlistofoptions.

Whereastreetviewisavailable,AdobeFlashPlayerwilllaunchtheview.

Toopenastreetlevelviewofanydeviceinthephysicalmap,rightclickonthedeviceandthenselect MapStreetViewfromthedropdownlistofoptions.

182

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Whereastreetviewisavailable,AdobeFlashPlayerwilllaunchtheview.

7.10.4

Accessing a Physical Map Device in Other Management Views

Youcanquicklyjumpfromviewingadeviceinaphysicalmaptoviewingitsrecordsinanyofthe followingothermanagementviews.Accessisthrougharightclickonthedeviceandthenselectionof theintermediatemenuitemManageintheresultingdropdownlistofoptions.

SelectAlarmstoseeallofitscurrentalarmsintheAlarmsviewer.SeeFigure139on Page204. SelectEventstoseeallofitscurrenteventsintheNetworkEventsviewer.SeeFigure138on Page204. SelectInventorytoseetheelementisolatedinatableofInventorycolumns.

183

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

7.11

Importing a BroadbandPlanner Prediction

TheToolsPhysicalMapMapImport/ExportImportBroadbandPlannerPredictionoptionfrom themainmenuallowsyoutobringintothephysicalmaptheCSVformattedoutputfromthe BroadbandPlannertool.Whenyouexecutethisoption,WMopensafilebrowserwindow.

Figure 121: Import BroadbandPlanner Prediction dialog

Clickthe browsebutton.BrowsetoandselecttheCSVfilefromthetool'sexport,thenclickthe Importbutton.

7.12

Changing the Geolocation for a Device

TochangethegeolocationrecordsinWMforanydeviceinaphysicalmap,either click,drag,anddropthedeviceicon. rightclickonthedeviceinthephysicalmapandthenselectChangeLocationfromthedrop downlistofoptions. Amaptackcentersontheoriginallocationanda popupclouddescribesoptionsforchangingtherecords.

SelectChangeLocation.

YoucanalsoraisetheChangeLocationcloudoptionsfromtheInventory.Rightclickonthedevice.In thedropdownlistofcommandoptions,selectSetLocationinPhysicalMap.

184

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Clickatthenewlocationtofixthemaptackand thenclicktheSavebutton.

RightclicktheelementiconandselectSetLocation.

Waitfortherecordstobeupdatedand theicontobemoved. Confirmthatthemapreflectsthenewlocationandnote whetherthelocationconfiguredintheelementisupdated tomatchthenewlocationconfiguredintheWMdatabase.

185

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

7.13

Checking the Log of a Physical Map

ThemainmenuofthephysicallogincludestheOptionsToggleLogWindowselection.

ThisalternatelyopensandclosestheLogWindow,whichcontainsmessagesaboutmapactivitythat canbeusefulfortroubleshooting.

Figure 122: Physical map Log window, opened

7.14

Exporting a Map
Thetoolsmenuallowsyouto exportthephysicalmapasakmlfile. storeitforviewinginGoogleEarth. exportthedevicesfromthemaptotheBroadbandPlannertool. exportthenetworkfromthemapintotheXMLformat. exportalocationfileforuseinachildWM.

186

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 12: To export a physical map

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Tooptionallyrefreshthemapbeforesavingit,selectMapRefreshfromthephysicalmap menu. FromthemainWMmenu,select ToolsPhysicalMapMapImport/ExportGenerateKMLExport. SelecttheSaveFileradiobuttonandclickOK. Modifythefilenamefromitsdefault(WM_export.kml). ClicktheSavebutton. Tooptionallyviewtheexportedfile,select ToolsPhysicalMapMapImport/ExportViewKMLExport. SelecttheOpenwithradiobutton,andclickOK.

note ............. The response to this option is identical to the response to Generate KML Export.

7.

note ............. The web browser handles this request in the manner in which it is configured to handle kml files. It may prompt about whether to open or save the file, open a file browser that prompts for a destination path and file name, or open a view of the map in the Google Earth web site.

8.

Ifnecessary,specifyGoogleEarthasthehelperapplication.

187

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 123: Exported physical map in Google Earth application, zoomed in

188

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 124: Exported physical map in Google Earth application, zoomed out

9.

InthePlacesboxintheleftpaneloftheirsite,scrolldowntoTemporaryPlaces.

10. UnderTemporaryPlacesinthehierarchy,rightclickonthefileWMS_export.kmlthatis associatedwiththelatestdateandtime. 11. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectSavetoMyPlaces. 12. Torenamethefile a. b. c. a. rightclickthefilenameandselectRenamefromthedropdownlist. overwriteWMS_exportwithauniquenameforthefile. clickinablankareatosavethenewfilenameandexitthenameeditingtextbox. expandthekmlfilenodeinthePlacesboxandexpandtheNetworkElementsnode beneathit.

13. Toviewinformationaboutthemappedelements

189

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 125: Places box with Network Elements node expanded

b.

toseefurtherinformationaboutaparticularelement,clicktheelementnode.

Figure 126: Radio(s) link to information about the element

190

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 127: Information about the element in Google Earth

c. a.

scrolltoviewinformationaboutrestoftheelements. expandLatestLinksanditschildnodes.

14. Toviewinformationaboutthelinks

Figure 128: Places box with links node expanded

b.

clickonthenodeassociatedwiththeOTAlink.

191

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 129: Link information in Google Earth view

15. Tosavethemapofnetworkelementstoacompressed(kmz)file a. b. c. rightclicktheNetworkElementsnodeandselectSaveAsfromthedropdownlist. browsetoandselectthefolderinwhichyouwanttosavethemap. backintheSavefilewindow,clicktheSavebutton.

16. Toattachakmzfileofthenetworkelementsmaptonewemail,rightclicktheNetwork ElementsnodeandselectEmailfromthedropdownlist. 17. Tosavethemapoflinks a. b. c. rightclickthelinksnodeandselectSaveAsfromthedropdownlist. browsetoandselectthefolderinwhichyouwanttosavethemap. backintheSavefilewindow,clicktheSavebutton.

18. Toattachakmzfileofthelinkstonewemail,rightclickthelinksnodeandselectEmailfrom thedropdownlist.

7.15

Exporting Devices to BroadbandPlanner

ToexportdevicesfromthephysicalmapintoatextfilethatBroadbandPlannercanimportanduse, selectToolsPhysicalMapMapImport/ExportExportEquipmenttoBroadbandPlannerfrom themainmenuoftheWMclientapplication.TheChoosefilenameandlocationforexportdialog opens.(Locationinthecontextofthiswindowtitlemeansfilesystempath.)

192

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Browsetoandselecttherepositoryfromwhichyouwillwanttosend/transferthetextfiletothe tool.

7.16

Exporting the Network into XML

ToexportthenetworkfromthephysicalmapintoanXMLfileforuseinanothersystemsuchasa childWM,selectToolsPhysicalMapMapImport/ExportExportNetworktoXMLfromthe mainmenuoftheWMclientapplication.TheChooseXMLfilenameandlocationforexportdialog opens.(Locationinthecontextofthiswindowtitlemeansfilesystempath.)

Browsetoandselecttherepositoryfromwhichyouwillwanttosend/transfertheXMLfiletothe othersystem.

193

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

7.17

Exporting Locations for Use in a Child WM

ToexportthedevicelocationsfromthephysicalmapintoaCSVfileforuseinachildWM,select ToolsPhysicalMapMapImport/ExportExportWMLocationImportFilefromthemainmenu oftheWMclientapplication.TheChooseCSVfilenameandlocationforexportdialogopens. (Locationinthecontextofthiswindowtitlemeansfilesystempath.)

Browsetoandselecttherepositoryfromwhichyouwillwanttosend/transfertheCSVfiletothe othersystem.

7.18

Notices Regarding Physical Maps

Onrareoccasions,WMwillreturnsawarningtothetopofthemap,andthe flagtothe farrightinthemainphysicalmapmenubar,whenyoutrytodisplayarepresentationthatcannotbe displayedinaphysicalmap;forexample

Thefollowingareotherexamples: ifWMhasnoconfiguredlocationforthedevicethatwasselectedwhenyoulaunchedthe physicalmap ifyouselectasetofdevicesthataresofarapartthat,attherequiredzoomlevel,the deviceswouldbeinvisible

194

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

ifthezoomlevelthatwouldberequiredforthemaptoincludeallalarms(thenormal approachforWMinorderingthetilefromthemapserverfordownload)isnotpossible

Thephysicalmapmayoccasionallydisplaytheerror:AJAX requested time out... ThisindicatesthateithernetworktrafficishighortheWMserverisespeciallybusyandnot respondingquicklyenoughtorequeststhattheclientismakingforupdatesinthephysicalmap.

195

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8
8.1

Viewing Information About a Specific Device

Updating the Status of a Device or a Network
Thestatusofadeviceorthenetworkitselfisautomaticallyupdatedonaregularintervalviathe processofstatuspolling.Bydefault,WMautomaticallychecksandmonitorstheconnectionand networkstatusforadeviceevery15minutesanddisplaysthecurrentstatusintheclient.The mechanismofstatuspollingcanbeglobalorbesettospecificforeachdevicetypebut,ingeneral,it isarequestforthedevicetorespond.Ifthedeviceresponds,itisconsideredreachableanditsstatus isunchanged.Ifitdoesnotrespond,anunreachablealarmisthrown,andthestatusofthedevice becomesMajor.Youcanworkfromdefaultstatuspollinginformation,forcestatuspolling(see UpdatingStatusonDemandbelow),orreconfigurehowWMperformsstatuspolling(seeAdjusting theStatusPollingIntervalsonPage197).

8.1.1

Updating Status on Demand

ByselectingtheUpdateStatusoptionfromthedevicespecificmenu,youmanuallyupdatethe status.Forexample,ifWMpollsthestatusofarouterevery900seconds,andyouwanttoknowthe lateststatusofthatrouterwithoutwaitinguntilthenextpollingcycleoccurs,usethisoption.This makesthelateststatusinformationforthedeviceavailabletoboththeclientandthedatabase.

8.1.2

Adjusting the Status Polling Intervals

Eachstatistic(forexample,thenumberofbytesthathavebeenreceivedonawirelessinterface) representsonecharacteristicorattributeofthedeviceataparticulartime.Fromthemainmenu,the ToolsPollingConfigurationopensthePollingConfigurationdialogtoitsPerformancePollingtab. Whenthisdialogopens,clicktheStatusPollingtab.

197

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 130: Polling Configuration dialog, Status Polling tab

WMinheritsthesingleglobalperformancepollingconfigurationforeverydevicetypefrom thevalueoftheGlobalStatusPollingIntervaltaginthefile .../wm/server/conf/WibbWMSConfiguration.xmlintheWMserverfilesystem. Theinitial(installed)valueofthistagis15minutes.Ifyouwish,youcanleavethis configurationinforcebynotusingthistab. Thistabintheclientinterfaceallowsyoutooverridethoseconfigurationsbysettingthestatuspolling viaSNMPqueriesto occur(EnablePollingStatuschecked). notoccur(EnablePollingStatusunchecked). notoccurfordevicetypesthatyouspecify,andoccurforallotherdevicetypes. (SeeProcedure13below.) occurattheGlobalPollingIntervalforalldevicestypes. occuratintervalsthatyouset(PollingIntervalinMinutes)foreachdevicetypethatyou deliberatelyAddforstatuspollingintervalconfiguration,andoccurattheGlobalPolling IntervalfordevicetypesthatyoudonotAdd.(SeeProcedure13below.)

Tosetsomeoralldevicetypesthatyouspecifytobepolledforstatusataratedifferentfromthe GlobalPollingInterval,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 13: To set status polling for a specific device type

1. ClicktheAddbuttonassociatedwiththeSpecificTypeBasedPollingConfigurationblockof thePollingConfigurationdialog. TheConfigureSpecificTypePollingdialogopens.

198

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 131: Configure Specific Type Polling dialog for status polling

2. 3. 4.

IntheSpecificTypefield,usethedropdownlisttoselectthedevicetype. Ifyouwanttodisablepollingforthedevicetypethatyouselected,uncheckthe EnablePollingcheckbox. Ifyouwantpollingofyourselecteddevicetypetooccuratanintervalthatdiffersfromthe GlobalPollingIntervalinthepreviousdialog,typethenumberofMinutesintothe PollingIntervaltextboxorusethedropdownlisttochangefromMinutestoHourstypethe numberofhoursintothetextbox.

The following rules apply to resetting polling intervals:

The smallest accepted polling interval is 1 minute. The largest accepted polling interval is 24 hours (1440 minutes).

5.

Whenyouarefinishedeitherdisablingpollingorspeciallysettingthepollingintervalforthe selecteddevicetype,clicktheOKbutton. Thedevicetypewithitsnewlysetpollingstatus(disabledorspecialinterval)isdisplayedin theSpecificDeviceTypePollingConfigurationblockofthePollingConfigurationdialog.

note ............. If you attempted to apply an illegal interval, the client throws a pop-up error.

foravaluetoosmall:

foravaluetoolarge:

note ............. If you attempted to apply an interval identical to the global polling settings, the client asks for confirmation.

199

Issue 4 August 2012 6. BackinthePollingConfirmationdialog,youcanuse

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

theRemovebuttontoreturnahighlighteddevicetypetoglobalpollingtreatment theModifybuttontochangethesettings(inadialoglikethatshowninFigure268 above,butwiththedevicetypepreselectedandnotchangeable)thatyoupreviously madebytheprocedure. theResettoDefaultsbuttontorestoreallpollingintervalsforalldevicetypesto thevalueoftheGlobalStatusPollingIntervaltaginthefile .../WM/server/conf/WibbWMSConfiguration.xmlintheWMserverfilesystem.

8.2

Viewing Basic Properties

Procedure 14: To view device details
1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthetargetdevice. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectElementProperties. TheElementPropertiesdialogopenswiththenetwork/deviceproperties.

Figure 132: Element Properties, General tab

3.

ToviewtheSNMPpropertiesofthedevice,clickSNMPintheleftpanel.

200

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 133: Element Properties, SNMP tab

4.

ToviewdetailsofWMmonitoringthedevice,clickMonitoringintheleftpanel.

Figure 134: Element Properties, Monitoring tab

201

Issue 4 August 2012 5.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Toviewrelationshipsthathavebeendetectedforthedevice,clickRelationshipintheleft panel.

Figure 135: Element Properties, Relationship tab

8.3

Viewing Component Properties

UsetheComponentsoptioninthedevicespecificmenutodisplaythecomponentsfortheselected device.Formultiagentdevices,informationaboutboththeagentrepresentingtheradioandthe agentrepresentingthehostwillbedisplayed.

Procedure 15: To view component details

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthetargetdevice. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectComponents.

Figure 136: Show Components panel

202

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

3.

ToviewthepropertiesthatWMiscurrentlystoringforthedevice selectacomponentfromthetableintheShowComponentswindow. clickthePropertiesbutton.

Toviewcurrentproperties,clicktheUpdateStatusbutton.
note ............. This is the way to view the status from multiple SNMP agents. By contrast, using the rightclick option and selecting Update Status from the drop-down list of options results in a status update of only the agent for the radio.

Figure 137: Component Properties window

4. 5.

Changeanyofthereadwritepropertiesthatyouwanttoupdate. Tosavethepropertiesthatyouareviewing,clicktheSavetodatabasebutton.

8.4

Viewing Events for a Device

Procedure 16: To view events generated for a device
1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthetargetdevice. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectGoToEvents.

TheNetworkEventsViewerisdisplayed,whichshowsalltheeventsforonlythatdevice.

203

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 138: Network Events view for a single device

FormoreinformationonNetworkEventsViewer,refertoViewingAllEventsonPage349.

8.5

Viewing Alarms for a Device

Procedure 17: To view alarms generated for a device
1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthetargetdevice. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectGoToAlarms.

TheAlarmsviewisdisplayed,showingallthealarmsthataregeneratedforonlythatdevice. AnexampleoftheAlarmsviewforasingleelementinasfollows.

Figure 139: Alarms view for a single device

204

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8.6

Viewing Performance Data for a Device

Procedure 18: To view performance data of a device
1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthedevice. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectGoToStatistics.

TheperformancedataConfiguredCollectionviewisdisplayed.Theperformancedataisnotintended toreflectthestatusofthedevice.TheiconassociatedwithadeviceintheInventoryviewreflectits status.

Figure 140: Performance data Configured Collection view for a single device

ForinformationontheConfiguredCollectionview,refertoListofAvailablePerformanceStatistics (ConfiguredCollection)onPage384.

205

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

8.7

Viewing the Dashboard for a Device

Foreachdeviceofasupporteddevicetype,theWMclientdisplaysupondemandamoduleoftext andgraphicsthatsummarizesthestatusbasedonretrievedperformancedata,configuration properties,events,alarms,status,andbasicmanagedobjectproperties.Accesstothisdashboardis byanyofthefollowingmeans: adoubleclickonthedeviceintheInventory arightclickonthedeviceintheInventoryandthenselectionofDashboardfromthe resultingdropdownlistofoptions aclickonthedeviceinthephysicalmapandthenaclickontheDashboardlinkinthe Managetabofthedatapopupwindow

Thedashboardsvaryinformatsomewhat,fromonedevicetypetoanother,butonlytotheextent thatthesetsofdatathattheymakeavailabletoWMdiffer.Theclientdoesnotlimitthenumberof networkelementdashboardwindowsthatyoucansimultaneouslyhaveopen(exceptonlyoneper device)andallowsyoutoindependentlymoveorreduceeachofthem.Immediatelybeneaththe menubar,eachnetworkelementdashboardcontainsastatusbarwhosecolor,aswellastext, indicatesthecurrentstatusoftheelementwithitsDeviceNameandName(ID).

8.7.1

Examples of Network Element Dashboards

Examplesofnetworkelementdashboardsareshownin Figure141:DashboardformatforPMPAPonPage207 Figure142:DashboardformatforPMPSMonPage208 Figure143:DashboardformatforPMP320APonPage209 Figure144:DashboardformatforPMP320CPEonPage210 Figure145:DashboardformatforPMPOFDMAPonPage211 Figure146:DashboardformatforPMPOFDMSMonPage212 Figure147:DashboardformatforPMPBHMonPage213 Figure148:DashboardformatforPMPBHSonPage214 Figure149:DashboardformatforPTP500MasteronPage215 Figure150:DashboardformatforPTP800SlaveonPage216 Figure151:DashboardformatforCMM3onPage217 Figure152:DashboardformatforCMM4onPage217 Figure153:Dashboardformatfor14PortSwitchonPage218 Figure154:DashboardformatforGenericElementonPage218 Figure155:DashboardformatforExtremeSwitchonPage219 Figure156:DashboardformatforRADSwitchonPage219 Figure157:DashboardforachildWMelementonPage220

206

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 141: Dashboard format for PMP AP

207

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 142: Dashboard format for PMP SM

208

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 143: Dashboard format for PMP 320 AP

209

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 144: Dashboard format for PMP 320 CPE

210

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 145: Dashboard format for PMP OFDM AP

211

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 146: Dashboard format for PMP OFDM SM

212

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 147: Dashboard format for PMP BHM

213

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 148: Dashboard format for PMP BHS

214

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 149: Dashboard format for PTP 500 Master

215

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 150: Dashboard format for PTP 800 Slave

216

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 151: Dashboard format for CMM3

Figure 152: Dashboard format for CMM4

217

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 153: Dashboard format for 14-Port Switch

Figure 154: Dashboard format for Generic Element

218

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 155: Dashboard format for Extreme Switch

Figure 156: Dashboard format for RAD Switch

219

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 157: Dashboard for a child WM element

220

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8.7.2

Features of Network Element Dashboards

Eachnetworkelementdashboardwindowincludesaseriesoficonsintheupperrightcorneranda varietyofoptionsavailablefromthemenubarintheupperleftcorner.Clickingontheseiconsor makingaselectionfromthedashboardmenuhasthefollowingresults.

Table 10: Command options from a network element dashboard

Icon Menu Item ViewPhysicalMap ViewInventory Result opensthephysicalmapandzoomstothedevice.SeeAccessingData foraDeviceinthePhysicalMaponPage176. opensanInventoryviewerthatcontainsonlythisdevice. opensanExtendedfamilyforDeviceNamegraphicalviewthat includesallmembersofparentchildrelationships,thesetofwhich includesthedevicewhosedashboardyouareviewing.Theseare logicalrelationshipsthateithertheoperatorconfigured(seeAdding RelationshipsAmongDevicesonPage236)orWMinferred,basedon theirgeolocationsanddevicetypes(seeCheckingRelationships PresumedBasedOnGeolocationsonPage234). opensanInventoryviewthatincludesalldevicestowhichthedevice whosedashboardyouareviewingisconfiguredastheparent.These arelogicalrelationshipsthateithertheoperatorconfigured(see AddingRelationshipsAmongDevicesonPage236)orWMinferred, basedontheirgeolocationsanddevicetypes(seeChecking RelationshipsPresumedBasedOnGeolocationsonPage234). opensaConfiguredCollectionviewerthatcontainsstatisticsforonly thisdevice.SeeFigure140onPage205. opensanAlarmsviewerthatdisplaysonlyalarmsthatareassociated withthedevicewhosedashboardyouareviewing.SeeFigure139on Page204. opensaNetworkEventsviewerthatdisplaysonlyeventsthatare associatedwiththisdevice.SeeFigure248onPage348. pollstheindividualdeviceforitslatestdataandupdatesthe dashboardwhenitreceivesthatdata.Ifyoudonotusethisoption, thenthedatainadashboardrefreshesintheamountoftimerequired fortheservertodetectachangeandtheclienttoreflectthechanged informationthatitreceivesfromtheserver. opensaShowComponentswindowthatincludestheMACandIP addresses,SNMPversion,anduptimeforeachagentinthisdevice. SeeFigure136onPage202. opensaWebPageURLwindowwithanOKbuttonthatprovidesHTTP accesstothemanagementwebpageofthisdevice.SeeFigure182on Page259.

ViewLogical HierarchyExtendedFamily

ViewLogical HierarchyChildren

ViewStatistics

ViewAlarms

ViewEvents

ViewComponents

LaunchWebPage

221

Issue 4 August 2012 Icon Menu Item ConfigurationConfigureDevice Result

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

openstheEditDeviceNamedialogtotheConfigurationGroupsfor whichWMcanpushvaluestothedevice.SeeUsingtheConfigure DeviceCommandonPage613. opensanApplyTemplatedialogtothenamesandassociated descriptionsandversionsofallconfigurationtemplatesthathave beenimportedorcreatedandareproperforthedevicetypeofthe device.SeePushingValuesfromaPrestructuredConfiguration TemplateonPage621andApplyingaConfigurationTemplateon Page628. opensaCreateTemplatedialogthatdisplaysalloftheconfigurable attributesforwhichWMcanpushvaluestothedevice,andforeach anoptiontoincludeorexcludeitfromthetemplatebeingcreated. SeeCreatingaConfigurationTemplateonPage623. opensanEditTemplatedialogthatdisplaysalloftheconfigurable attributesforwhichWMcanpushvaluestothedevice,andforeach anoptiontoincludeorexcludeitfromthetemplatebeingcreated. SeeEditingaConfigurationTemplateonPage631, opensaDeleteTemplatedialogtothenamesandassociated descriptionsanddevicetypesofallconfigurationtemplatesthathave beenimportedorcreatedandareproperforthedevicetypeofthe device.SeeDeletingaConfigurationTemplateonPage636.

ConfigurationConfiguration TemplatesApplyTemplate

ConfigurationConfiguration TemplatesCreateTemplate

ConfigurationConfiguration TemplatesEditTemplate

ConfigurationConfiguration TemplatesDeleteTemplate

opensapreconfiguredreport,formattedinblocksforCurrentAlarms, ReportsDeviceSummaryReport Last10Events,ConfigurationData,andPerformanceDataofthe device.SeeViewingaDeviceSummaryReportonPage225. ReportsConfiguration ReportsRunReport opensanExecuteConfigurationReportdialogtothenamesand associateddescriptionsanddevicetypesofallconfigurationreports thathavebeenimportedorcreatedandareproperforthedevicetype ofthedevice.SeeRunningaConfigurationReportonPage333. opensaCreateReportdialogthatdisplaysalloftheconfigurable attributesforwhichWMcanpushvaluestothedevice,andforeach anoptiontoincludeorexcludeitfromthereportbeingcreated.See CreatingaConfigurationReportonPage328. opensanExecuteConfigurationReportdialogtothenamesand associateddescriptionsanddevicetypesofallconfigurationreports thathavebeenimportedorcreatedandareproperforthedevicetype ofthedevice.SeeEditingaConfigurationReportTemplateonPage 337. opensanDeleteReportdialogtothenamesandassociated descriptionsanddevicetypesofallconfigurationreportsthathave beenimportedorcreatedandareproperforthedevicetypeofthe device.SeeDeletingaConfigurationReportonPage339.

ReportsConfiguration ReportsCreateReport

ReportsConfiguration ReportsEditReport

ReportsConfiguration ReportsDeleteReport

222

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Result opensanetworkelementdashboardviewthatincludesthedevicesto whichtheonewhosedashboardyouareviewingisconfiguredasthe child.Thisisalogicalrelationshipthateithertheoperatorconfigured (seeAddingRelationshipsAmongDevicesonPage236)orWM inferred,basedontheirgeolocationsanddevicetypes(seeChecking RelationshipsPresumedBasedOnGeolocationsonPage234).Ifa dashboardviewoftheparentdeviceisalreadyopen,thenitcloses andreopenswithcurrentdatafromthedatabase. opensanetworkelementdashboardviewthatincludesalldevicesto whichthedevicewhosedashboardyouareviewingisconfiguredas theparent.Thesearelogicalrelationshipsthateithertheoperator configured(seeAddingRelationshipsAmongDevicesonPage236)or WMinferred,basedontheirgeolocationsanddevicetypes (seeCheckingRelationshipsPresumedBasedOnGeolocationson Page234).Ifadashboardviewofthechilddeviceisalreadyopen, thenitclosesandreopenswithcurrentdatafromthedatabase.

Icon

Menu Item

KinParent

KinChildrenChild

Ifthedatabasecontainsnovalueforoneormoreofthestatisticsthatthedashboardispresetto displayforthedevicetype,thenthepaneldisplaysthemessageNo value to plot.Ifthespecific devicetypedoesnotsupportrespondingtoSNMPgetqueriesforthestatisticthatthepanelwould otherwisedisplayforthedevicetype,thenthepaneldisplaysthemessage Unable to read from device.ExamplesofthesecasesareshowninFigure158.

Figure 158: Dashboard panels without data

8.7.3

Interactive Components of Network Element Dashboards

Thetabulardata,graphicalrepresentations,andunderscoredtextwithinadashboardarelinksas well.Forexample,ifyou doubleclickinarowoftheAlarmstable,thenanAlarmsviewopenstoonlythatalarm. doubleclickinarowoftheEventstable,thenaNetworkEventsviewopenstoonlythat event. doubleclickinarowoftheSessionTableofaPMPAPorPTPmasterdashboard,thenthe dashboardoftheinsessionSMthatyouclickedonopens. clickonalinegraph(suchasRegisteredSMCountforaPMPAPorPTPmaster,RadioPower LevelforaPMPSM,orPortNstatisticforaCMM4Switch)orotherstatisticalrepresentation (suchasthethermometerinaTemperaturepanel,thenaCollectedstatisticsforDevice Namewindowopens.Althoughitopenstoalinegraphofthesamestatistic,theTimeof Collectioninthiswindowisinitially24hoursandadjustabletotoday,thelastoneweek,or

223

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

anycustomtimeframethatyouconfigureinthiswindow.Youcanalsochangethegraph typetoanyoptionlistedinTable28onPage386.Thisviewsupportszooming,autoranging, printing,andsavingasaPNGfile.Theseoptionsareavailablethrougharightclickanywhere inthegrapharea.(seeViewingaCollectedPerformanceStatisticonPage388). clickonGPSSatellitesTrackedorGPSSatellitesVisibleforaCMM,thenaCollected statisticsforDeviceNamewindowopens.Inthiscase,itcontainsalinegraphthatis convertibletoadifferenttimeframeordifferentgraphtypeortable,asdescribed immediatelyaboveandshownbelow.

Figure 159: Collected statistics window for GPS Satellites Tracked

clickonWiredLinkStatus,thenaCollectedstatisticsforDeviceNamewindowopens.Inthis case,itcontainsonlyatableviewthatplotstheTimeofCollectionagainsttheEthernet status(UporDown)thatthedevicedetectedatthattime. clickonNumberofPortsforagenericelementoranyofthefollowinglinksforachildWM element,thentheCollectedstatisticswindowisfullyconvertible,asdescribedforRegistered SMCountabove: NumberofManagedObjects NumberofNetworks NumberofNodes EventCount AlertCount FreeMemory

224

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8.8

Viewing a Device Summary Report

WMprovidesapreconfiguredreportforanydevicethatyouselectfromtheInventoryview.Eachis formattedinblocksfor CurrentAlarms Last10Events ConfigurationData PerformanceData

Bydefault,devicesummaryreportsareaccessibletoeveryuser.Thisaccesscontinuesunlessthe administratorremovesthepermissionforaspecificuser.Despitepermissionssettings,useraccessto devicesummaryreportsmayalsobelimitedbycustomviewscopestowhichtheuserisassigned. WMdoesnotfilteroutanyoftheconfigurationorperformancedataorprocessanyintosummary data,butinsteadsimplydeliversthevaluesfromtheresponsethatthedevicesendstothequery. Thesereportsareavailableondemandaspreconfigured(asdescribedinthenextsection).Theyare alsoavailablethroughscheduledtasks.SeeSchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTaskonPage649.

8.8.1

Running a Device Summary Report on Demand

FromanyInventoryview,youcanlaunchareportofthistypebyrightclickingintherowofthetarget deviceandselectingReportsDeviceSummaryReport.AnHTMLwindowopenstotheentire report.

225

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 160: Device summary report for a PMP 430 SM

226

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 161: Device summary report for a child WM element

227

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ThereportdeliverstheSNMPdatainrawvalues.Forexample,thetableexpressesenabled/disabled flagsasintegers.

8.8.2

Running a Device Summary Report on a Schedule

RunningadevicesummaryreportisaschedulabletaskintheWMclient.SeeSchedulingaOneTime orPeriodicTaskonPage649.

8.8.3

Saving a Device Summary Report

Assoonasyoulaunchadevicesummaryreport,WMautomaticallysavesitintoarepositorythat containsinlistfromallpreviouslylaunchedreportsthathavenotbeendeletedfromthelist.Youcan accessthisrepositorybyselectingSystemReportsReportResultsfromtheApplicationsTree.This listissortablebyanyofitscolumns: ResultFileName(intheformatReportName_SequentiallyAssignedReportNumber,sothat withineachalphasortofreportname,theorderischronological) User(wholaunchedthereport) Time(dateandtime) ReportName ReportType

Figure 162: Report Results window

Sincethereportsinthelistarenotsearchable,andsincethelistofstoredreportstendstogrowover time,sortingisuseful.Secondarysortingisachievablebysortingthesecondarysortcolumnfirst, thentheprimarysortcolumn. ToviewanindividualreportintheReportResultsview,rightclickonthetargetreportandselect ViewReport.Thisopensthereportintheexactformatandwindowsizethatthereportopenedin whenyouoriginallylaunchedit.

note ............. When the system assigns the name to a device summary report, the name does not inherit the Name (ID) or Device Name of the subject device, and the Search function in the client does not search the contents of the Report Results repository. So, as you are reviewing a report that you may want to later easily retrieve, you should copy or print the contents as follows.

228

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

AswiththesystemreportsthatWMformatsintoverticalblocks,thereportdialogdoesnotinclude anexportoption.However,todumpaportion(suchasthecontentsofablock)oftheHTMLdatathat thereportreturnstoafiletypethatananotherapplicationcanreadorascriptcanuse,youcanmark theportionofinterestandcopyitout.Thiscouldbeespeciallyusefulforportionsthatarenotthe subjectofanyreportsthatyoucanlaunchviaSystemReports.(SeeUsingConfigurationSummary ReportsonPage341.) YoucanreshapetheHTMLwindow,butnotmanuallyresizeitscolumnsorsortbytheircontent. However,youcanexporttheentirereportasCSVforuseinanotherapplicationorPrinttheentire reportonanynetworkedprinter.

8.8.4

Deleting a Device Summary Report

Topermanentlyremoveadevicesummaryreport,openthelistofavailablereportresultsby selectingSystemReportsReportResultsfromtheApplicationsTree.Rightclickonthereportthat youwanttoremove,andselectDeleteReport.

8.9

Finding the Customer Assigned to the Device

TheInventoryviewprovidesacommandoptiontoimmediatelyretrievethefullsetofcontactdata foracustomerwhoisassignedto(associatedwith)aparticulardevice.Theaccesstothisinformation isthrougharightclickonthetargetdeviceandselectionofCustomerContactDetailfromthedrop downlistofoptions.Inthecasewherenocustomerhasbeenassignedtothedeviceyet,thesystem respondwiththefollowingmessage:

IfyouclickYes,thenaCustomerContactManagementopensanddisplaysalistofallcustomer deviceassignmentsthatexistinthedatabase.

Figure 163: Customer Contact Management window

Ifnorecordexistsyet,thentheAssignToandViewDetailbuttonsareinactive,andtheonly operationthatthiswindowpermitsistoCloseit. Ifanyrecordalreadyexists,thentheAssignToandViewDetailbuttonsinthiswindowareactive. Ifyouwanttoaddthedevicetoalistedcustomerrecord,clicktohighlighttherowofthecustomer, thenclicktheAssignTobutton.Thetargetdeviceisassignedtotheselectedcustomer.

229

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

9
9.1

Performing Other Operations on Devices

Keeping Device Identifiers Unique
Toavoidconfusionintheclientapplicationandproblemsindevicediscovery,itisimperativetoavoid assigningthesamevaluetocertaindeviceattributesofmorethanonemanageddevice;forexample DeviceNameshouldbeunique,sothatrecordsthatyouviewapplytoonlythedevice whoserecordsyouwanttoview IPAddressmustbeunique,sothatWMinternaloperationskeyedtodeviceIPaddress,as wellasuseroperations,arenotsubjecttocorruptormottleddata.Tokeepthemunique, ensure thatauthorizedusersavoidredundantIPaddressassignment DHCP,wheredeployed,isconfiguredtoavoiditaswell.

Thisisalsoahazardwhenyoureplaceonedevicewithanother,unlessthedevicebeingreplacedis removedfromthenetworkfirst.IfyoufindmorethanonemanageddevicethateachhasthesameIP address,setallbutoneofthemtoUnmanaged(asdescribedinthefollowingsection)untiltheycan beassigneduniqueaddressesoftheirown.

9.2

Managing or Unmanaging a Device

WMmanagesallnetworkelementsthatitdiscoversforwhichlicensesareavailable,includingthird partydevicesforwhichoperatorscreatedevicedefinitiontemplatesandevengenericdevices.To freeupanodelicenseforacurrentlyunmanagedelement,itmaybedesirabletoUnmanageanother. ThenewlyunmanagedelementcontinuestobepresentintheInventoryandphysicalmap,butits colorindicatorisgrayuntilitismovedbacktotheManagestate,atwhichpointitscolorindicator returnstothatofitshighestcurrentalert. Otherdifferencesbetweenmanagedandunmanageddevicesareasfollows: formanageddevices,WMdoesstatusandperformancedatapolling,detectsfaults,and performsautorediscoveryandthereforedetectsconfigurationchangesthatmayhavebeen madefromasourceotherthanWM.Italsocanpushconfigurableattributevaluesto manageddevicesanddisplaysthecurrentperformanceoftheirlinks. forunmanageddevices,WMdoesnostatusorperformancedatapollingandperformsno faultdetectionorautorediscovery,duringwhichchangesthatmayhavebeenmadefroma sourceotherthanWMcouldhavebeendetected.Itignorestheunmanageddevicesfrom anyscheduledtasksanddoesnotpushconfigurableattributevaluestounmanageddevices ordisplaytheperformanceoftheirlinks.WMignorestrapssentfromtheagent(s)of unmanageddevices.However,WMretainsperformancedatathatitcollectedforthedevice duringthetimethatiswasinthemanagedstateinanticipationofitsreturntothatstate.

231

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

InanInventoryviewofdevices,selecttheManageorUnmanagecommandoptionfromtheright clickdropdownmenutochangethemanagementstatusofaselecteddevice.TheclientGUI respondsasfollowstoeachattempttochangethenetworkelementstateofadevice: WhenyoumoveadevicefromManagetoUnmanage Aconfirmationpopupmessageasksyoutoconfirmtheswitch.Toproceed,clicktheYes button.Toleavethedeviceinthemanagedstate,clicktheNobutton.

WMaddsaneventofInfoseveritytotheEventViewer.

Theauditlogrecordsthestatechangeagainsttheuseraccount.

Thecolorindicatorforthedevicechangestogray.

ThelicensethatLicenseManagerhadallocatedtothedevicewillbecomeavailablefora devicethatyoumoveintothemanagedstate.

WhenyoumoveadevicefromUnmanagetoManage Aconfirmationpopupmessageasksyoutoconfirmtheswitch.Toproceed,clicktheYes button.Toleavethedeviceintheunmanagedstate,clicktheNobutton. IfLicenseManagercannotallocatealicensetothedevice,thenWMaddstotheappropriate logserrorstoindicatethattheswitchfailed. WMaddsaneventofInfoseveritytotheEventViewer,indicatingeitherthesuccessorthe failureoftheswitch. Thecolorindicatorforthedevicereturnstothatofthehighestcurrentassociatedalert. Thedeviceisamongtheaffecteddevicesforeachtaskthatwaspreviouslyscheduledforit.

9.3

Pinging a Device
ThePingDevicecommandisavailablefromallrightclickdevicemenus.Thiscommandoptioncauses WMtopingtheselected(highlighted)device(s)andtoopenaPingingComponentswindowthat displaystheresultsoftheping.Inthiswindow,areturnedmessageofRequestTimedoutor DestinationHostUnreachableindicatesthecurrentIPaddressofthedevicewasnotfound.Ifanyof theselecteddevicesiscurrentlyconfiguredasunmanaged,thenWMdisplaysanUnmanaged Componentmessage.AnexampleofthesemessagesisshowninFigure164.

232

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 164: Pinging Components window, success

Figure 165: Pinging Components window, skipped for unmanaged component

Forapingfailure,thePingingComponentswindowindicatesinredfontRequest timed outand 100% loss. Ifyouwanttorepeatthepingtocheckforconsistentresults,clickClearbeforeyouclickPingAgain. Thisclearsthecontentsofthewindow,whicharenotautomaticallyclearedbeforethenextpingis triggeredfromthesamewindow.WithoutclickingClearagainfirst,youcannotbeconfidentthatyou areseeingtheresultsofthesecondpingratherthantheresultsofthefirst.

233

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

9.4

Dropping a Subscriber Session

WMallowsyoutodropthesessionof(unregister)aPMPSMfromtheInventoryview.Thetarget devicemaybeeitherthecurrentlyhighlightedSMortheonethatyouselectafterinvokingthis featurefromitsPMPAP.ArightclickoneithersuchdeviceprovidestheToolsDropSubscriber Sessioncommandoptionforthispurpose. WhentherightclickedelementisaPMPAP,theDropSubscriberSessionforName(ID)window opensandpresentsadropdownlistofthePMPSMsthatarecurrentlyregisteredinthatAP.

Figure 166: Drop Subscriber Session window for a PMP AP

WhentherightclickedelementisaPMPSM,theDropSubscriberSessionforName(ID)window openswiththeName(ID)ofthetargetdeviceingrayandunalterable.IftheName(ID)isotherthan thatofthedevicewhosesessionyouwanttodrop,cancelthiswindowandrightclickthetarget devicetoinvokethefeatureagain.

Figure 167: Drop Subscriber Session for Name (ID)

Ineithercase,ifyouclicktheOKbuttoninthiswindow,WMsendstheappropriatemessageto terminatethesessionofthePMPSMwhoseName(ID)isdisplayedatthattime.

9.5

Checking Relationships Presumed Based On Geo-locations

Basedoncomparisonsofcertainsettingsindevicetemplatesontheserverandthegeolocations definedfordevicesinyournetwork,thediscoveryengineinWMpresumeslogicalrelationships amongdevicesanddisplaysthese.Thepresumptionsaremadewheneverboth thegeolocationsliewithintemplatedefinedpositions(tolerances)thatestablishfour cornersofarectangle thedevicesareofdevicetypesthattogetherhaveapresumablehierarchicalrelationship (wouldconstituteanextendedfamily).

234

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Perdevicetype,thetolerancescanbeeitherthedefaultsthatthedevicetemplatehasdefinedor newonesthattheserveradministratorhaseditedintothedevicetemplate.Usersrequesting toleranceeditsandadministratorswhoeditdevicetemplatesshouldkeepinmindthattheedits applytoalldevicesofthedevicetypeuntilfurthereditsaremade. AnexampleofsuchafamilyisprovidedunderDefiningaLargerExtendedFamilyonPage236.Since theseautomaticallyestablishedrelationshipsarepresumedbasedonnumbers,notondetected communicationsamongthem,somemaynotreflectcommunicationsflowamongthedevices. Doaperiodicinspectionoflogicalrelationshipsbyrightclickingondevicesandselecting GoToLogicalHierarchyExtendedFamilyfromthedropdownlistofoptions.Then toexpandanextendedfamily,seeAddingaSingleRelationshiponPage237andDefininga LargerExtendedFamilyonPage236. toeditdevicesoutofanextendedfamily,seeRemovingaRelationship(thenextsection).

9.6

Removing a Relationship
SomerelationshipsthatWMautomaticallyestablishesmaybeincorrectinthecontextofdataflowin yournetworkorofhowyouwishtoseethehierarchyofyournetworkexpressed.Basedondevice typeandgeolocation,WMautomaticallyestablishesarelationshipwithaPTPdeviceastheparentof aproximalCMMdevice.TheexampleprovidedunderDefiningaLargerExtendedFamilyonPage236 includesawiredlinkthatdefiesthisdefaulttreatment. Youcanremovearelationshipbyremovinganelementfromit.InanInventoryview,rightclickon theelementyouwanttoremovefromtherelationshipandselectthedropdownoption GoToLogicalHierarchyExtendedFamily.ThenintheExtendedFamilyforDeviceNamelogical graphicwindow,rightclickthelinklineandselectRemoveRelationship.

Figure 168: Remove Relationship option in Extended Family window

ThesystemusesaWarningpopupmessagetoaskforconfirmation.

235

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 169: Remove relationship pop-up warning

WhenyouclickOKtoaccepttheproposedactionanddismissthiswindow,WM removestherelationship. returnsasuccessmessage.

9.7
9.7.1

Adding Relationships Among Devices

Defining a Larger Extended Family
WMallowsyoutoaddrelationshipssuchthatalogicalconnectionextendsasfarasfivehopsabove andfivehopsbeneathanelement.Alloftherelatedelementsconstituteanextendedfamily,forthe purposeoftheuserinterfaceanditsmenuoperations. Anexampleofanextendedfamilythatisusefultodefine(inparenttochildorder)is 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. aCMMthatprovidestimingtoaPTPmasteratthePOPatthetopofadoublebackhaulhop configuration(master>slave>slave>masteratcluster) aPTPmasteratthePOPinadoublebackhaulhopconfiguration aPTPslaveconnectedbyEthernettoanotherslaveinadoublebackhaulhopconfiguration aPTPslave(eitherasaboveoratthePOPinamoretypicalconfiguration) itsPTPmaster theCMMthatprovidestimingtothePTPmasterandtheAPsatthecluster anAPconnectedtotheCMM theSMsinthesectoroftheAP. aRemoteAPconnectedbyEthernettooneofthoseSMs

10. theSMsinthesectoroftheRemoteAP Hops From 1 To 2 ForthisEthernetconnection,WMmaycreateajuxtaposedparentchild relationship(intheautomaticlinkthatitdetectsbetweenthesedevices),which youmaywishtocorrect. ForthisRFconnection,WMdoesnotcreateaparentchildrelationship (automaticlink). Notes

236

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Hops From 3 4 5 8 9 To 4 5 8 9 10

Notes ForthisEthernetconnection,WMdoesnotcreateaparentchildrelationship (automaticlink). ForthisRFconnection,WMdoesnotcreateaparentchildrelationship. Fortheseconnections,WMcorrectlycreatestheparentchildrelationshipsin theselinks,whichitautomaticallydetects. ForthisEthernetconnection,WMdoesnotcreateaparentchildrelationship. Fortheseconnections,WMcorrectlycreatestheparentchildrelationship.

9.7.2

Adding a Single Relationship

AllrightclickdevicemenusincludeanAddRelationshipoption.Thiscommandcreatesalogical relationship(logicallink)betweentwoelements,butisnotselectablewhennoelementsareselected. Ifyouselectthisoption whentherearemorethantwoelementsselected,thesystemdisplaysthefollowing message.

whentwoelementsareselected,thesystemopensanAddRelationshipBetweenElements windowthatisalreadypopulatedwiththetwodevicesandincludesaParentof/Childof toggle.

Figure 170: Add Relationship Between Elements dialog, both devices identified

Forconvenience,youcanuseaFindbuttoninthiswindowtoidentifyadifferentdevicein eitherorbothpositions.

237

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

whenoneelementisselected,thesystemopensanAddRelationshipBetweenElements windowthatnamestheselecteddeviceasDevice1andincludestheFindoptiondescribed above.

Figure 171: Add Relationship Between Elements dialog, one device identified

TheFindoptionopensaSearchDevicedialogcommonthroughouttheclient.Thesearch resultsareabsentofreturnsthatareoutsideofanycustomviewscopedefinedfortheuser. Inthecontextofthedialogprompt,Name(ID)meansMACaddress.

Whenyouselecttheothertargetdevicefortherelationship,itbecomesDevice2,asshown in Figure170. Whenadevicerelationshiphasbeencreated thesystemreturnsaconfirmation:

theInventorybranchoftheApplicationstreereflectstherelationship(Links).TheLinksview willopenintherightpanelifyoudoubleclicktheLinksbranchintheApplicationstree,and

238

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

asinanyInventoryviewwhiletherelationshipremains,therelationshipisgraphically representedinapopupwindowifyourightclickthedeviceandselecttheoption GoToLogicalHierarchyExtendedFamily:

Figure 172: Logical link displayed

Similarly,therelationshipisgraphicallyrepresentedinapopupwindowifyourightclicked theparentdeviceandselectedtheoptionGoToLogicalHierarchyChildren. Ifthesystemreturnsthefollowingerror,thisindicatesthatyouattemptedtoaddarelationshipthat wouldreversetheparentchildrolesofanalreadydefinedrelationship.

Figure 173: Circular reference error

Ifyouattempttoaddarelationshipthatalreadyexists,thesystemthrowsthefollowingerror:

239

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

9.8

Importing a Customer Contact Database

WMallowstheoperatortoassociatecustomerinformationwiththemanagedenduserelements. Thisfacilitatessendingemailtocustomersabouttheservicetheyreceive.Thesecanbegroupsor individualswhomyouselectintheCustomerContactDetailwindoworwhoseassignedelementsyou selectinanInventoryview.Thebehavioroftheemailcommandsistosendtoonlyselected customersinCustomerContactDetaildatabase(window)andsendtoallcustomerswhoareassigned totheselectedelement(s)intheInventoryview. Youcanaddcustomerrecordsineitherorbothoftwoways: Importthemfromanexternaldatabase.SeePreparingtheCustomerContactDatafor Import(next)andImportingCustomerContactDataonPage242.Beawarethatthese operationscombinedoverwritetheentirepreexistingcustomerdatabase,includingallofits elementMACaddresses. ComposetherecordinWM.SeeAssigningaCustomertoaDeviceonPage244.This operationallowstheusertoessentiallyedittheindividualrecordandevenleavefieldsnull.

ThecustomerdatabaseinWMalsofacilitatescorrelationofdatainWMwithdatainexternal management,billing,andotheroperationssystems.Ifyouchoosetoperiodicallyimportcustomer contactinformationfromanauthoritativeexternalsource,userestrictivepermissionsforthe EmailConfigurationnodeoftheAdministrativeOperationbranchinthePermissionstreehierarchy. SeeAssigningOperationsonPage484.

9.8.1

Preparing the Customer Contact Data for Import

TheWMimportoperationforcustomercontactdatasupportsacommaseparatedvalues(.csv)file inwhichallofthefollowingheadingsandsomeorallofthesefieldsarepopulatedforeachcustomer youwantincludedinthecontactdatabase: 1.UniqueID 128characters 2.CustomerName 128characters 3.CustomerType 128characters 4.Address1 128characters 5.Address2 128characters 6. City 128characters 7.State 50characters 8.Zip 12characters 9.Country 50characters 10.Email 128characters 11. HomePhone 20characters 12.WorkPhone 20characters 13.MobilePhone 20characters 14.Pager 20characters 15.MACAddress 128characters

Theuserhasthediscretionofhowtopopulatethesefields.Forexample,theCustomerTypefield maybepopulatedbyResidentialorCommercial,orbyanyothersetofvalues.Eachlinestores thedataforonedevicecustomerassociation.

240

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Thepopulationrulesareasfollows: Theheadingsintheabovesyntaxmustoccupythefirstrowofthe.csvfile. Acommamustnotbeusedwithinavaluesfield(becausethecommaisthefielddelimiter), exceptwhereeveryliteralintendedcommaintheentireCSVfileissurroundedbythesame escapecharacterpair(textqualifier):eitherapairof"doublequotesorapairof'single quotes(apostrophe,ASCIIchar39Decor27Hex).Chooseonlyoneasthetextqualifierand donotusetheotherforthesamepurpose. Allofthefieldsarestrings. ExceptforMACAddress(the15thfield),norequirementsareplacedontheformatofthe textinafield. TheMACAddressentrycanbeinanyofthefollowingstandardformats:
0A:00:3E:30:01:B8 0A-00-3E-30-01-B8 0A003E3001B8

AUniqueIDvaluecannotbeusedformorethanonecustomer.Foracustomerwhohas morethanoneradio,repeattheUniqueIDvalueinonerowperadditionalradio(MAC address).YoudonotneedtorepeattheotherdataassociatedwiththecustomerCustomer NamethroughPager.(Blankfieldsinthesuccessiverowsofthesameimportoperationdo notcauseWMtoignoreorerasethepopulatedvaluesofthosefieldsfrompreviousrows thathavethesameuniqueidvalue.However,animportofacustomerrecordoverwritesthe MACaddressassociations.) Whenyoutriggeranemailmessage,WMavoidssendingmorethanonecopyofthemessage toanycustomer,regardlessofthenumberofassetsthatareassociatedwiththeUniqueID ofthecustomer. EXAMPLE: CustomerABChastwoSMswithMACAddresses0A:00:3E:00:00:0Aand 0A:00:3E:00:00:0B.CustomerDEFhasonlyoneSMwithMACAddress 0A:00:3E:00:00:0C.Theirrowsintheimportfileshouldlooklikethis.
Unique Id,Customer Name,...,MAC Address 1,ABC,...,0A:00:3E:00:00:0A 1,,...,0A:00:3E:00:00:0B 2,DEF,...,0A:00:3E:00:00:0C

Thus,theUniqueIdvaluemustbeuniquepercustomer,notperrow. Foraradiothatissharedbymorethanonecustomer,entereachcustomeronanindividual rowwithauniqueIDintheUniqueIDfield,butwiththesameMACaddressintheirMAC Addressfields.WMthenallowsyoutotriggeranemailmessagetoallcustomerswhoare associatedwiththatMACaddress. WMsupportsandacceptsdatafromoptionalfieldsthatyouenterasadditionalcolumnsin yourexternaldatabase.WMaddsthesefieldsandtheirvaluestoonlytheCustomerContact Managementwindow.

241

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

9.8.2

Importing Customer Contact Data

Theclientprovidesacommandoptiontoimportacustomercontactdatabasethatisformattedas describedunderPreparingtheCustomerContactDataforImportonPage240.Toimportthe database,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 19: To import a customer contact database

1. Regardlessofthetypeofviewthatisactiveintheviewpanel,select ToolsImportandExportfromthemainmenu. TheSelectoperationwindowopens

Figure 174: Select operation window

2. 3.

ClicktoselecttheImportCustomerContactInformationradiobutton. ClickNext. TheImportCustomerContactInformationwindowopens.

242

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 175: Import Customer Contact Information window

4. 5.

Clickthedownarrow

associatedwithTextQualifier.

SelecttheescapecharacterthatyourCSVfileusestosurroundcommasthatarepartofthe data(thatarenotintendedasdelimiters).

note ............. Keep in mind that WM will not print any instances of the selected escape character into any customer record as a literal character.

6.

BrowsetoandselecttheCSVfilethatcontainstheproperlyformatteddata.

Inanysubsequentimportofa.csvfileintoWM,overwritingarecordoraddinganewrecordoccurs onawholerecordbywholerecordbasisasfollows: WMoverwritesthecontactdataforanycustomerwhoseuniqueididenticallymatchesthe uniqueidinapreviouslystoredrecord. WMacceptsthecontactdataforanycustomerwhoseuniqueidwasnotpreviouslystored. WMkeepsthecontactdataforanycustomerwhoseuniqueidwaspreviouslystoredandis notincludedinthecurrentimport.

EachMACaddressrepresentsaradiodevice.Whenyouimportcustomercontactdata,WMattempts toassociatethecustomerwiththedevicesbyMACAddress,butonlywhereWMalreadymanages thedevice.ForanydevicethatWMdoesnotalreadymanage,youmustassociatethedevicetoits MACaddressintheWMGUI.SeeAssigningaCustomertoaDevice(below). Animportfilemustexistwithinfilebrowserrangeoftheclientwhentheimportoperationisinvoked. Toperformtheimportoperation,seeImportingDataFilesIntoWMonPage107.Assoonasthe operationisexecutedintheclient,useraccountmanagementundertheimporteduserconfiguration begins.

243

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

9.9

Assigning a Customer to a Device

Youcanaddarecordforanindividualcustomerineitherorbothoftwoways: importitaloneoramongotherrecordsthatyouareadding.Seethesectionsthat immediatelyprecedethisone,beginningonPage240.Thisoperationoverwritestheentire preexistingcustomerrecord,includingallofitsassociatedelementMACaddresses. composetherecordintheWMGUI.Foranewcustomer,thisoperationaddsthecustomer withalloftheassociatedelementstothedatabase.Tocomposeanewrecord,performthe followingsteps.

Procedure 20: To compose a customer-device(s) record

1. Regardlessoftheviewthatisactiveintheviewpanel,select ToolsCustomerContactManagementfromthemainmenu. TheCustomerContactManagementwindowopens.

Figure 176: Customer Contact Management window

2.

ClicktheAddbutton. TheCustomerInformationdialogopens.

244

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 177: Customer Information dialog

3.

Intheleftpanelofthisdialog,populatetheCustomerInformationtextfields.

note ............. What you type into the Email text box becomes the addressee of email that WM will set up for you to send to the customer from the sender address specified in your SMTP configuration, whenever you click the Email button with one or more rows selected in the Customer Contact Management window.

245

Issue 4 August 2012 4. Intherightpanelofthisdialog,clicktheAddbutton. Awindowopensforspecifyingoneormoredevices.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

5.

IntheDevicestabofthewindowthatopens,thedeviceselectionprocessisidenticaltothat processfordefiningascheduledtask.Forreference,seeProcedure197:Todefinea ConfigurationtaskonPage655. Specifyalldevicesthatyouwanttoassigntothiscustomer.

6.

246

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.

ClickOK. TheNetworkElementspanelliststheselecteddevice(s).

8.

Whenyouarefinishedspecifyingthecustomerelementassociation(s),clickOK. TherecordisaddedtotheCustomerContactManagementtableview.

9.

Iftheactuallocationofthedevice(s)isthesameastheaddressyoutypedinforthe customer,optionallychecktheUpdateDeviceLocationcheckbox.

ThisfeaturewritesthecontentsofthecustomeraddressintotheSiteLocationfield(s)stored inthedevice. 10. ClickOK. TherecordisaddedtotheCustomerContactManagementwindow.

247

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

11. Toaddanothercustomer,clicktheAddbuttonandrepeatthesesteps. 12. Ifyouseethatacorrectionneedstobemadeinarecord,eitherdoubleclicktherowor clicktheEditbuttonforaccesstothetextfields. 13. ClicktheClosebutton.

9.10

Editing or Removing a Customer Record

Foracustomerwhoisalreadyinthedatabase,thisoperationallowsyoutoedittherecordandeven leavefieldsnull.Toeditanexistingrecord,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 21: To edit a customer-device(s) record

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthetargetdevice. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectCustomerContactDetail. Ifnoexistingrecordisassociatedwiththisdevice,thenthesystemreturnsamessageasking whetheryouwanttoaddone.

Ifthisoccurs,usethesectionAssigningaCustomertoaDevice(above)toaddtheproper record. Ifanexistingrecordmatchesthisdevice,thenaCustomerInformationwindowopens, populatedwiththedatathatWMstoresaboutitscustomer.

248

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

3.

Usethetextfieldsintheleftpanelortheoptionsviatherightpaneltoadjustorremovethe record.

9.11

Sending an Email Notification to a Customer

WMsetsupemailcompositionfornotificationstooneormorecustomersforanypurpose,suchas marketinghighertiersofservice,announcingpricechangesoranticipatedoutages,orconfirming updatestoaccountinformation.Inthemainmenu,selectToolsCustomerContactManagement. IntheCustomerContactManagementwindow,clicktohighlightallintendedrecipientsofanemail message,thenclicktheEmailbutton.

TheComposeEmailcompositionwindowopens,populatedwith therecipientsintheToline thesendingaddress(fromyouSMTPconfiguration)intheFromline.

249

Issue 4 August 2012 ComposetheSubjectandbodyoftheemail,thenclicktheSendbutton.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

9.12

Refreshing Device Data

IntheInventoryview,therightclickcommandoptionRefreshStoredDataforcesWMtoperforma rediscoveryofthecurrentlyselecteddevice(s).Asinautorediscovery WMretainstheperformancedata,alarms,andeventsthatrelatetotheelementanderases onlythepreviousconfigurationdataforit,whichWMreplaceswiththeresponseaboutthe currentconfiguration. theRefreshStoredDatacommandalsorebuildstheautomaticallydeterminedlogicallinks fortheselecteddevice.

9.13

Setting WM Credentials for a Group of Selected Devices

WMprovidesasingle,efficientoperationtosetany,some,orallofthefollowingdevicecredentials thatitusesforauthenticatingitselfineachdeviceamongacurrentlyselectedset: ReadCommunity WriteCommunity Telnet/FTPLoginID Telnet/FTPPassword

Keepinmindthatthisoperationdoesnotalsowritenewvaluesforthesecredentialsintothetarget devices,butratheronlyconfiguresWMtousetheirnewvalues.Theuserofthisfeaturemustbe authorizedinthePermissionstreeatDeviceToolsCredentialManager.Asanauthorizeduser, youcanaccessthisfeatureinanyofthreeways: fromthenetworkupdaterinterface(viaInstallSoftwareUpgrades) fromthetoolsmenu(viaToolsCredentialManagerfromthemainmenu),wheredevices currentlyselectedintheInventoryarenotinheritedasinitialtargetdevices. fromtheCustomerSupportTooldialog(viatheCredentialManagerbuttonintheDevices tab),wheredevicesselectedbytheAddortheLoadFromGroupoperationbeforeclicking thebuttonareinheritedasinitialtargetdevices.

HowyouraiseCredentialManagerdetermineswhethertheAdd/RemoveDevicesoptions(Add, Remove,andLoadFromGroup)areincludedintheCredentialManagerdialog.Thesearenot includedifyouraiseCredentialManagerfromaSoftwareUpgradeorCustomerSupportTooldialog.

250

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

TouseCredentialManager,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 22: To set credentials for a selected group of devices

1. Launchthefeatureinanyofthethreewaysnotedabove. TheCredentialManagerdialogopens.

Figure 178: Credential Manager dialog

2.

IntheDevicesSelectedframe,optionallycheckthecheckboxforShowPasswordtodisplay inplaintexttheTelnet/FTPPasswordsthatWMcurrentlyusestoauthenticateitselfinthe listeddevices. UseCtrl+clicktohighlightalldeviceswhoseCredentialsyouwanttoidenticallyreset. IntheCredentialsframe,checkthecheckboxforeachcredentialthatyouwanttoidentically reset. Intheassociatedtextbox(es),typeinthenewvalue(s)ofthecredentials(s). Clickthebuttonbetweentheframesofthisdialog. ThecolumnentriesoftheDevicesSelectedframedisplaythenewvalue(s). ToconfirmthatallthevaluesthatthecolumnsoftheDevicesSelectedframedisplaywill succeedinauthenticatingWMtothosedevices,clicktheVerifyCredentialsbutton. RESULT:WMreturnsasuccess(rowpaintedgreen)orfailure(rowpaintedred)indication foreachelementthatwasselectedfortheverifyoperation.Foranyelementwhose ReadCommunityverifyfailed,theoperationskippedtheWriteCommunityverifyand indicatesfailure. Toenforcethenewvalue(s),clicktheApplybutton.

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

8.

251

Issue 4 August 2012 9.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifyouhaveadditionalnewvaluestoconfigureforanyofthedevicesinthelist a. b. uncheckthecheckboxofanycredentialthatyoudonotwanttoconfigureinthisnext operation. repeatSteps4through8.

9.14

Configuring a Device
ThiscommandoptionisavailableforadeviceintheInventoryview.Thisfeatureisdescribedunder UsingtheConfigureDeviceCommandonPage613.

9.15

Syncing the SNMP String in WM with the SNMP String in a Device

EnsurethatthevalueconfiguredforWriteCommunityintheManagedObjectPropertiesthatWM stores(Figure133onPage201)identicallymatchestheSNMPCommunityWritestringinthedevice, regardlessofwhetherthecurrentvaluederivesfromfactoryconfigurationofthedevice,fromanedit inthemanagementHTTPinterfacetothedevice,orfromaconfigurationpushmadebyatemplate fromWM.

9.16

Using the Link Capacity Test Utility

ALinkCapacityTestallowsyoutomeasurethethroughputandefficiencyoftheRFlinkbetweentwo devices.Manyfactors,includingpacketlength,affectthroughput.WMprovidesthecapabilityto performaLinkCapacityTestonPMPAPsandSMs,whenyouspecifytheSM,eitherastherightclick deviceintheInventoryviewfromwhichthetestislaunchedorasselectedbyeitheritsLUIDorits Name(ID),ifthetestinterfaceislaunchedfromarightclickonanAPintheInventoryview. ThisfeatureincludesboththelaunchofthefunctionalityinthesedevicesandGUIfeaturesthatare similartohowthewebbasedmanagementinterfacesofthesedevicesprovidetheiroptionsand displaytheirresults.TheLinkCapacityTestdialogcontainsasettablePacketLengthwiththerange 64to1522bytes.Thisallowsyoutocomparethroughputlevelsthatresultfromvariouspacketsizes.

9.16.1

Launching a Link Capacity Test

Tolaunchatest,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 23: To perform a link capacity test in an SM

1. 2. InanInventoryview,rightclickeitherthetargetSMortheAPtowhichitisregistered. Intheresultingdropdownlistofoptions,selectToolsLinkCapacityTest. WMopensaLinkCapacityTestdialogwhoseoperationdependsonwhetherthefeaturewas launchedfromaselectedSMorAP.

252

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

IftheselecteddevicewasanSM,thenthedialogresemblesthefollowing:

TheCurrentSubscriberModulevalueisgrayandfixedtoName(ID)andLUIDoftheSMthat youpreselected.

253

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IfinsteadyoupreselectedanAP,thenthedialogresemblesthefollowing:

Inthiscase,thedialogallowsyoutoselectanyoftheAP'sregisteredSMsfromthedrop downlistforCurrentSubscriberModule. 3. 4. 5. 6. IfyoupreselectedanAP,selecttheSMwhoselinktotheAPyouwanttotest. ForDuration,eitherleave2oroverwriteitwiththenumberofseconds(upto10)forthe testtolast. ForPacketLength,eitherleave1522oroverwriteitwiththenumberofbytes(downto64) forthepacketsizetosendinthetest. ClicktheStartTestbutton. Afterperformingthetestandassemblingthedatathatthetestgenerated(thiscouldbe severalsecondslongerthanthetestitself),WMrepaintstheLinkCapacityTestwindowto deliverthedataandpresenttheopportunitytotestthelinkagain,thistimewithadifferent packetsize,forexample,ifyouwish.

254

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 179: Link Capacity Test results window

9.16.2

Interpreting Link Capacity Test Results

Thekeyfieldsinthetestresultsare
Downlink RateandUplink Rate,expressedinbitspersecond Downlink EfficiencyandUplink Efficiency,expressedasapercentage.

note ............. In the results, interpret Downlink and Uplink as directions from the perspective of the AP, even if the link capacity test was launched with the SM selected.

Alinkisacceptableonlyiftheefficienciesofthelinktestaregreaterthan90%inboththeuplinkand downlinkdirection,exceptduring2Xor3Xoperation(seethePMPuserguideforfurtherguidance). Wheneveryouinstallanewlink,executealinktesttoensurethattheefficienciesarewithin recommendedguidelines. TheAPdownlinkdatapercentage,slotsettings,othertrafficinthesector,andthequalityoftheRF environmentallaffectthroughput.However,aMaximumInformationRate(MIR)throttleorcapon theSMdoesnotaffectthroughput.

255

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

9.16.3

Errors in the Link Capacity Test Feature

IfyoulaunchthefeaturebytherightclickofanSMthatiscurrentlynotregisteredtoanyAP,then WMreturnstheerrorThis SM is not registered to an AP. Unable to test. IfyoulaunchthefeaturebytherightclickofanAPthatcurrentlyhasnoregisteredSMs,thenWM returnstheerrorNo SMs registered to AP. Unable to test.

9.17

Using the Spectrum Analyzer Utility

Whethermaintainingorgrowingyournetwork,youmayencounternewRFtrafficthatcaninterfere withyourcurrentorplannedequipment.RegularlymeasuringRFtransmissionsoveraperiodoftime andretrievingrecordsoftheRFenvironmenthelpyoutorecognizeandreacttochanges.WM providesthecapabilityto launchtheSpectrumAnalyzerfeatureinanyOFDMorFSKPMPSMoranyPMP320AP. viewthegraphicdisplayofthefrequencyandpowerlevelofalldetectablesignalswithin, justabove,orjustbelowthefrequencybandrangeofthetargetdeviceassoonasthe Durationthatyouspecifyforthesamplinghaselapsed.

important ........... When you launch the Spectrum Analyzer from a PMP SM, the target SM enters a scan mode and drops any RF connection it had.

Goodpracticeistovarythedaysandtimeswhenyouanalyzethespectruminanarea,sincetheRF environmentcanchangethroughoutthedayorthroughouttheweek.
note ............. In both an FSK and an OFDM SM, the built-in spectrum analyzer feature measures the detected peak power level. This is consistent with the received Power Level that various tabs in the web-based management interface of an FSK radio reports. However, it is inconsistent with received Power Level indications in the management interface of an OFDM radio, which use the Power Level parameter to report the detected average.

Althoughthespectrumanalyzerfunctionalitycanbeveryusefulasatoolfortroubleshootingand RFplanning,butisnotintendedtoreplicatetheaccuracyandprogrammabilityofahighend spectrumanalyzer,whichyoumaysometimeneedforotherpurposes.

9.17.1

Launching Spectrum Analyzer

Tolaunchthisfeature,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 24: To use the Spectrum Analyzer feature

1. 2. InanInventoryview,rightclickonthetargetdevice. Fromthedropdownlistofcommandoptions,selectToolsSpectrumAnalyzer. TheSpectrumAnalyzerwindowopens.

256

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. If this feature was launched from a target PMP SM, the Current Subscriber Module field is grey, and its drop-down selector is not available. If it was launched from a PMP 320 AP, then the drop-down list is similarly inactive and displays in gray the Name (ID) of the target PMP 320 AP.

3. 4. 5.

FortheDurationfield,eitherleave10secondsasthedurationorhighlight10andtypeinthe numberofseconds(1000orfewer)forwhichyouwanttheanalysisperformed. ClicktheStartRemoteSpectrumAnalysisbutton. WaitbeyondthelengthoftimethatyouspecifiedforDuration.

Figure 180: Spectrum Analyzer window for a PMP 320 AP

257

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 181: Spectrum Analyzer window for a PMP SM

note ............. the first painting of results may display bars for fewer than all frequencies, especially in bands with a large number of center channels, like the 5.4-GHz band.

6.

Optionally,clicktheStartRemoteSpectrumAnalysisbuttonagain. Itisreasonabletoexpectthattheresultinggraphwillrepresenttheentirespectrumthis time.

9.17.2

Interpreting Spectrum Analyzer Results

Colorsinthedisplayhavethefollowingmeanings: Greenbarsshowthemostrecentmeasurements. Yellowticksshowthemaximummeasurementsfromthecurrentspectrumanalysissession. Redticksshowmeasurementsof40dBmorstronger.

258

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

9.17.3

Errors in the Spectrum Analyzer Feature

AlthoughtherightclickmenuforOFDMandFSKPMPAPsincludetheToolsSpectrumAnalyzer commandoption,WMdoesnotsupportit,andreturnsthefollowingerrorwhenthisoptionis selected:This operation is not supported for the selected device.

9.18

Accessing the Web Interface of a Device

Thissectiondescribeshowtoaccessthemanagementinterfaceofadevice.Theexampleprocedure fortheLaunchWebPagecommandinthefollowingsubsectionusesaPMPSMasthetargetdevice. ItisgenerallyadvisabletouseWMtopushconfigurablevaluestoadeviceandusethewebinterface ofthedevicetoonlyoccasionally,orwhendoubtiscastbyamessageinthelog,visitthedeviceto checkonthesuccessofconfigurationattemptsfromWM. Similarly,itisgenerallyadvisabletouseWMtopushvaluestoPTPdevicesandvisittheirinterfaces fortroubleshooting.Documentationonloggingintothosedevicesisprovidedinthedevice documentationset. TheInventoryviewsupportstherightclickLaunchWebPagecommandutilityforaccesstothe managementwebpageofahighlighteddevice.Youcanusethisutilityto performdeviceconfigurationtasksthatarenotavailableinWMbecauseoflimitationsthat theSNMPinterfaceofthedevicehas. verifydeviceconfigurationagainstwhatWMreportsaboutthedevice.

Procedure 25: To open a device web interface

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthedevicewhosewebinterfaceyouwanttoopen. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectLaunchWebPage. Thehomepageofthedevicewebinterfaceopens.

Figure 182: Device web page URL

note ............. This dialog is populated with a default selection (Device Home Page) and includes a drop-down selection for a blank dialog box into which you can type any other URL. The blank box is provided because a selected device (depending on device type) may have more than one URL and because, in some cases, the computer on which you are running the WM client may not have direct access to the IP address that WM uses to communicate with the device. For this latter case, you may need to type a different IP address (known to you outside of WM) into the blank dialog box. For devices that support access via either http or https, these protocols are separately selectable in the drop-down list.

259

Issue 4 August 2012 3.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

EitherleaveDeviceHomePageselectedortypeanIPaddressintotheblankdialogbox. Ifthesitewasalreadylistedastrusted,thenthemanagementhomewebpageopens.Ifnot, thenanEnhancedSecurityConfigurationwarningwindowopens.

Figure 183: Enhanced Security Configuration warning

4.

Toaddthewebinterfaceoftheselecteddevicetothelistoftrustedsites,clickAdd. Atrustedsiteswindowopens.

Figure 184: Trusted sites window

5.

ClickAdd. Atthispointitmayappearthattheconnectionishanging,whenitisnot.Proceedtothe nextstep. ClickClose. IftheIPaddressbeingusediscorrect,abrowserwindowopenstoablankscreenwiththe textPress Here to Continue.

6.

260

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.

ClickthewordHere. Theappearanceofthefollowingwindowdependsonthedevicetype.Theremainderofthis exampleusesanSMdeviceURL.

Figure 185: Initial web page of Subscriber Module

8.

Iftheinitialpageincludes To Proceed, press,clickthewordherebeneaththosewords. Themanagementhomepageopens.

261

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 186: Management home web page of a PMP Subscriber Module

Browsercontrolsareineffectanddeterminefeaturessuchasfontsizeinthewebpage.Be awarethat,ifyouchangeanycontrols,thosecontrolswillremainineffectinthebrowseras youaccessothersitesfromyourcomputer. Themanagementinterfacedemandsaloginusingavalidconfiguredusernameand passwordtoseeanyinformationabovethebasicsdisplayedintheGeneraltaborto configureanyparameters. 9. Toauthenticateinthedeviceinterface,entertheUsernameandPasswordofanaccount thatisalreadyauthorizedforthemanagementinterfacetothedevice,thenclickLogin.

note ............. If you click the bottom edge of the Username dialog box, the interface present a dropdown list of configured usernames to select from.

Iftheloginsucceeds,themanagementinterfaceopenstothefullarrayofleftpanellinks andtoptabsforaccesstoparametersandstatistics.

262

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 187: Full management interface web page of PMP Subscriber Module

Themanagementhomepageopens.Refertothedevicedocumentationset(typically,the devicetypespecificuserguide)forinformationabouttheconfigurableparametersand readonlystatisticstowhichyounowhaveaccess. 10. Whenyouarefinishedwithyoursessionintheinterface,clickLogoff. Thispreventsrogueaccesstotheinterface.

9.19

Deleting an Object and Traces

Networkelementsthatdonotneedtobemanagedcanbedeletedfromtheclientaswellasfromthe database.Basedonyouruserprivileges,youmayhavetheoptionofdeletingonlyafewnetwork elementsoracompletenetwork.Theprimaryreasontodeleteadeviceistofreeupaslotinthe nodecountofyourWMlicensesothatanotherdevicecanbediscoveredandmanaged.
important ........... The Delete Object and Traces option deletes the symbol and the object associated with that symbol from the database. If you do this, you will permanently lose all historical performance data and other information about the device. If you later want to resume managing the device, you will need to discover it again.

263

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Procedure 26: To delete a device and all information about it

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthetargetdevice. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectDeleteObjectandTraces. Sinceyouareaskingfordatatoberemoved,apopupasksforconfirmation.

Figure 188: Confirmation message for Delete Object and Traces operation

3.

Ifyouwanttoproceedwiththedataremoval,clickYes.

Thedevicewillbedeletedfromtheclientaswellasfromthedatabase.

9.20

Using the Bandwidth and Authentication Manager (BAM) Subsystem

TheBAMoperationsincludeandarelimitedtomanagingauthenticationanddefiningandapplying bandwidthserviceplansandVLANprofilesforprovisionedelements.Unlikeconfigurationtemplates thatyoucancreateinWMtopushbandwidthandVLANvaluestoelements,serviceplansandVLAN profilesinBAMarelongtermassociationswiththeelements.WhenaserviceplanorVLANprofileis modified,thechangeisautomaticallyappliedtoallelementsthathavetheassociation.Afurther distinctionisthatSNMPappliedvaluesforbandwidthandVLANrequirearebootoftheelementin ordertotakeeffect;BAMappliedplansandprofilesimmediatelytakeeffect. WhetherthevaluesthataresentbyBAMinitsproprietaryprotocolorbyWMinSNMPareadopted fortheelementsdependsonasettingintheAP.TheAPcontainsaConfigurationSourceparameter, thevalueofwhichyoucouldsetonanAPbyAPbasisintheGeneraltaboftheConfigurationweb pageinthedirectmanagementinterfacetoAP.However,settingthisonanAPbyAPbasisallowsfor possibleerrorinconsistency.IfyouuseBAMforauthentication,bandwidth,andVLANsettings,then thisparametermustbesetidenticallytothevalueBAMinalloftheAPsthatareunderWM management.BestpracticeistouseaconfigurationtemplatetopushthevalueBAMtoallAPs.
important ........... If you are not using BAM, then this setting in all of the APs under WM management should be SM.

WhereBAMisused SMswillderivevaluesforthefollowingparameters 3fromBAM,presumingthatyou configurethemintheuserinterfaceofBAM: allMIRsettings: SustainedUplinkDataRate UplinkBurstAllocation

ThislistofparametersappliestoSMsinwhichhardwareschedulingisenabled.OlderSMsinwhichsoftwareschedulingis enableddonotacceptvaluesfortheHiPriorityChannelparameteroranyoftheCIRparameters.

264

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 SustainedDownlinkDataRate DownlinkBurstAllocation DynamicLearning AllowOnlyTaggedFrames VLANAgingTimeout UntaggedIngressVID ManagementVID VLANMembership

allSMVLANsettings:

theHiPriorityChannelsetting allCIRsettings LowPriorityUplinkCIR LowPriorityDownlinkCIR HiPriorityUplinkCIR HiPriorityDownlinkCIR

APswillignore,andthereforeSMswillnotsee,anyvaluesthatWMdirectlysendsvia anelementconfigurationtemplatefortheseparameters,aslongasyouhave ConfigurationSourceintheAPsettoBAM.

WheretheConfigurationSourceparameterintheAPissettoBAM,theSMstoresavalueforthe DynamicLearningVLANparameterthatdiffersfromitsfactorydefault.WhenBAMdoesnotsend VLANvalues(becauseVLANEnableissettoNoinBAM),theSM usesthestoredDisablevalueforDynamicLearning. showsthefollowingintheVLANConfigurationwebpage: eitherEnableorDisableasthevalueoftheDynamicLearningparameter. AllowLearning:NounderActiveConfiguration.

IfyouuseBAM,itisimperativethatyouuseWM 4tosetthefollowingvaluesinyourmanagedPMP elements: ConfigurationSourceinallAPstoBAM AuthenticationModeinallAPs(inwhosesectorsyouwanttoimposeauthentication upontheSMsthatattempttoregister)toAuthenticationRequired SMManagementVIDPassthroughinallAPstoDisable SMManagementVIDPassthroughinallSMstoDisable

Initsauthenticationfunctionality,BAMisunabletodistinguishanelementasamasteroraslaveuntil theslaveelementattemptstoregisterinthemaster.Ifyouwanttopreprovisionslaveelementsby enteringtheirMACaddressesbeforetheyaredeployed,takespecialcaretonotentertheMAC addressofanyAP.Doingsowouldresultintheirbeingmisrepresentedinnetworkviews(althoughit wouldnotadverselyaffecthowWMhandlesregistrationattempts). WhenBAMislicensedandinplaceasasubsystemofWM,accesstoBAMisbyrightclickingonany APinaWMviewandselectingLaunchBAMfromtheresultingdropdownlistofoptions.

4

Asstatedearlierinthissection,thesearesettableinthedirectmanagementinterfaceofeachelement,buttoavoiderror, pushthesefourvaluesoutusingelementconfigurationtemplatesinWM.

265

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

9.20.1

Managing Authentication
YoucanconfigureAPsinthenetworktorequiretheSMsintheirsectorstoauthenticatebeforethey registerintheAPs.

AP Authentication Setup
SettingupanAPelementforauthenticationincludesidentifyingonetofiveauthenticationserversby theirIPaddresses.TheAPignoresanydropsessionrequest,orserviceplanorVLANprofilechange, sentfromanIPaddressthatisnotinitslistofauthenticationservers.Forthisreason donotinsertonlysomeauthenticationserverIPaddress(es)intosomeAPsandonlyothers intootherAPs,whichyoumayhavebeeninclinedtodoforloadbalancing. ensurethattheserverinwhichyouexecutetheoperationisinthelistofauthentication serversinallAPs.

WhethertheserverinwhichyoumakeanSMmanagementchangeisinthelistintheAPdetermines whenthatchangebecomeseffective,asdescribedinTable11.

Table 11: When BAM changes for subscribers are effective

Effect of the Change Operation Performed in the Server If Server Is Listed in the AP CausesthecurrentSMsession todrop. If Server Is Not Listed in the AP SessionremainsupuntilSMrebootsor reregisters.

DeleteaBAMmanagedSMthatis currentlyonthenetwork Changevalueofanyattributeina serviceplanoraVLANprofile ApplyadifferentserviceplanorVLAN profile

Newattributevaluesare effectiveimmediately.

Oldattributevaluesremaineffective untilSMrebootsorreregisters.

Inasinglewindow,youcanconfigureanyorallAPsinanetworktorequireorceasetorequire authentication.Todoso,performthefollowingsteps.
note ............. This procedure presumes that the authentication settings template has been imported into the client application. If it has not, see Procedure 185: To import configuration templates on Page 622.

Procedure 27: To configure APs for authentication management

1. 2. InanInventoryview,clicktohighlightoneormoreAPs. RightclickoneofthehighlightedAPsandselectConfigurationTemplatesApplytemplate fromthedropdownlistofcommandoptions. TheApplytemplatedialogopens.AnexampleisshowninFigure189.

266

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 189: Apply template dialog, imported AP templates

3. 4.

ToconfigureauthenticationinaPMP100AP,clicktohighlightthe CanopyAP;AP/ULAPAuthenticationSettingstemplate. Ifthevaluesinthistemplateareknowntobeasdesired,clicktheApplyNowbutton. Toview,verify,orchangethevaluesthatthistemplatewillpushtotheAP(s),ortoschedule atimeanddateforthepush a. clicktheModifyValuesbutton.

note.............. If any preselected devices are incompatible with the selected template, WM pops up a warning message as follows:

..................... If all are compatible, the it opens the Modify Values dialog directly.

267

Issue 4 August 2012 b. CheckthecheckboxofRebootrequired.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

note ............. This feature supports the inherent interdependencies among configurable attributes. For example, if you set Network NTP Enable to Enabled, then Get NTP Server From DHCP is automatically set to Disabled; if you set Network IP Access Filter to Disabled, then Network Allowed IP Access 1 to 3 become not configurable.

c. d. e.

ForAuthenticationMode(Attributecolumn),selectAuthenticationEnabled(Value column). ForDeviceConfigurationSource,selectBAM. ForAuthenticationServer1,2,and3,enterthedottedIPaddressofeachoftheBAM servers.

important ........... Ensure that these addresses are in the accessible range for the AP(s). For a PMP 100 AP that is running Release 9.5 or later, if one or two more Authentication Servers are to be configured (for a total of four or five), a new template is required. See Creating a Configuration Template on Page 623.

f. g. h.

IntheOnFailureblock,checkthecheckboxofContinuewithNextDevice. Forthetemplatetoretainthesevaluesuntil/unlessitismodifiedagain,clicktheSave button. TopushthissetofvaluesnowtotheselectedAP(s),clicktheApplyNowbutton. Toscheduleataskofpushingthesevalues,clicktheApplyLaterbutton.

note ............. A case where you should later disable authentication is whenever all authentication servers whose IP addresses are listed in this window will be removed from service (for example, for a software update).

IfyoucheckedRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate,thenyourconfigurationchanges immediatelytakeeffect.Ifyoudidnot,thenyourchangesaredelayeduntilthenextreboot oftheAP(s).

9.20.2

Managing Bandwidth
BAMmanagesauthentication,bandwidthprovisioning,andtheVLANprofilesofSMs.ForeachBAM parameter,thecorrespondingattributeandfunctioninWMareidentifiedTable12.

Table 12: Bandwidth and VLAN element attributes

BAM Parameter WM Attribute Function in WM Thehexadecimalstringstoredinboththedatabaseandthe subscriberradio.Thisstringis32orfewercharacters,prepended withzerosifneededwhenthesystemreadsit.Theradiointerface containsatoggletoUseThisKeyorUseDefaultKey. Theratethatthesubscriberradio(s)arereplenishedwithcreditsfor transmission.Thisimposesnorestrictionontheuplink.

AuthenticationKey AuthenticationKey

SustainedUplink DataRate Sustained DownlinkData Rate

BandwidthUplink SustainedRate

TherateatwhichtheAPshouldbereplenishedwithcredits(tokens) BandwidthDownlink fortransmissiontothesubscriberradio(s).Thisimposesno SustainedRate restrictionontheuplink.

268

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Function in WM Themaximumamountofdatatoallowthesubscriberradioto transmitbeforebeingrechargedattheSustainedUplinkDataRate withcreditstotransmitmore.

BAM Parameter UplinkBurst Allocation DownlinkBurst Allocation AllowHigher Bandwidth

WM Attribute BandwidthUplink BurstAllocation

ThemaximumamountofdatatoallowtheAPtotransmittothe BandwidthDownlink subscriberradio(s)beforetheAPisreplenishedattheSustained BurstAllocation DownlinkDataRatewithtransmissioncredits. BandwidthAllow LicenseUse ToggleswhetherBAMshouldaskLicenseManagerforCap2licenses fortheselectedsubscriberradio(s),totheextentthatthelicenses areavailable. Thecommittedinformationratefortransmissionsfromtheselected subscriberradio(s)onthelowprioritychannel. ThecommittedinformationrateforAPtransmissionstotheselected subscriberradio(s)onthelowprioritychannel. Toggleswhetherthehighprioritychannelisenabledforall subscriberradiosthatareconfiguredtotheparticularserviceplan. Thecommittedinformationratefortransmissionsfromtheselected subscriberradio(s)onthehighprioritychannel. ThecommittedinformationrateforAPtransmissionstotheselected subscriberradio(s)onthehighprioritychannel. Toggleswhetherthesubscriberradio(s)towhichtheprofileis appliedshould(Enabled)orshouldnot(Disabled)addtotheVID tabletheVLANIDsofupstreamframes,whichenterthesubscriber radio(s)throughthewiredEthernetinterface. Thetypeofarrivingframesthatthesubscriberradio(s)towhichthe profileisappliedshouldtag,usingtheVLANIDthatisstoredinthe UntaggedIngressVIDparameter. Howlongthesubscriberradio(s)towhichtheprofileisapplied shouldkeepdynamicallylearnedVLANIDs. TheVLANIDthatthesubscriberradio(s)towhichtheprofileis appliedshouldusetotagframesthatarriveatthesubscriberradio(s) untagged. TheVLANIDthatthesubscriberradio(s)towhichtheprofileis appliedshouldsharewiththeAP. ToggleswhetherBAMsendstotheselectedsubscriberradio(s)the VLANfeaturevaluesfromtheparticularprofile.

LowPriorityUplink BandwidthLow CIR PriorityUplinkCIR LowPriority DownlinkCIR IsHighPriority ChannelEnabled HighPriority UplinkCIR HighPriority DownlinkCIR IsCIRFeature Enabled IsDynamic LearningAllowed BandwidthLow PriorityDownlink CIR BandwidthHigh PriorityChannel Enable BandwidthHigh PriorityUplinkCIR BandwidthHigh PriorityDownlink CIR NONE1

VLANDynamic Learning

AreTaggedOnly FramesAllowed VLANAgeing Timeout UntaggedIngress VID ManagementVID IsVLANFeature Enabled

VLANAllowOnly TaggedFrames VLANAgingTimeout VLANUntagged IngressVID VLANManagement VID VLANEnable

269

Issue 4 August 2012 BAM Parameter VLANIds NOTES: WM Attribute VLANMembership Function in WM

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

AllIDsoftheVLANsinwhichtheselectedsubscriberradio(s)should beconsideredamember.

TohavetheBAMeffectoftheIsCIRFeatureEnabledparametersettoNo,youcansettheBandwidthLow PriorityUplinkCIRandBandwidthLowPriorityDownlinkCIRattributesto0andsettheHighPriorityChannel EnabletoDisabled.

Managing Bandwidth by Service Plans

OneimportantdistinctioninhowBAMandWMsendvaluesisthecapabilityinWMtoavoid sending/overwritingavalueforanattributewhilesendingvaluesfortheothers.InBAMbycontrast, youneededtosendallornoneofthevaluesinaset.WMallowsyoutobeentirelyselective.Toavoid sendinganattributevalue,leavethecontentsofthevalueinWMnull(backspaceoverthedefault value,ifnecessary).Tooverwritetheattributevaluetonull,typeinaforwardspaceasyoucompose orupdatetheserviceplan. ToconfigureanyoftheMIRandCIRattributes,youcan configurethemasyouwouldanyothersetofconfigurableattributes,bydefiningand applyingaconfigurationtemplate.Thisapproachisgoodforanadjustmenttoanindividual subscriberradio,forexample. setupaserviceplantobeappliedtoagroupofsubscriberradiosthatyoudesignate.This approachisgoodforestablishingtieredlevelsofserviceand adjustingthosetiersovertimetohavebandwidthautomaticallyaddedtoeach. protectingyoursetvaluesfrombeingoverwrittenbyvaluesinaconfigurationtemplate.

ThefollowingtableindicatestheconditionsunderwhichBAMappliestoanSMvaluesfromeithera bandwidthserviceplanoracustomconfigurationtemplate. Todefineaserviceplan,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 28: To define a service plan

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectNetworkDefineConfigurations. BAMopenstheDefineConfigurationstab,showninFigure190.

Figure 190: Define Configurations tab

270

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

2.

SelectEditAddaConfigurationBandwidthServicePlan. BAMopenstheConfigurationParameterSelectionwindow,showninFigure191.

note ............. The menu path that this window displays indicates where you will find this service plan when you want to apply it to selected subscriber radio(s).

Figure 191: Configuration Parameter Selection dialog for a service plan

3. 4.

ForName,typeinadesignationthatyouwillassociatewiththelevelofservicethatyouwill laterdefine. ForCategory,optionallytypeinacategoryinwhichBAMshouldshowthisserviceplanas beingsorted.

note ............. The category can be multilevel, in order of higher to lower, with semicolons delimiting between the levels. This is similar to inputting the submenu hierarchy for saved view criteria.

5.

Whenyouaresatisfiedwithyourentries,clickOK. TheconfigurablebandwidthparametersappearwiththeirdefaultvaluesintheDefine Configurationstab,showninFigure192.

Figure 192: Configurable parameters in a service plan

271

Issue 4 August 2012 6. 7. 8.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ForBandwidthAllowLicenseUse,ifyouwantBAMtoaskLicenseManagerforCap2 licensesforSMsthatareconfiguredtothisserviceplan,selectEnabled. ForBandwidthUplinkSustainedRate,typeintherateatwhichtoreplenishtheselected subscriberradio(s)withcreditsfortransmission. ForBandwidthUplinkBurstAllocation,typeinthemaximumamountofdatatoallowthe selectedsubscriberradio(s)totransmitbeforebeingrechargedwithcreditstotransmit moreattheBandwidthUplinkSustainedRate. ForBandwidthDownlinkSustainedRate,typeintherateatwhichtheAPshouldbe replenishedwithcredits(tokens)fortransmissiontotheselectedsubscriberradio(s).

9.

10. ForBandwidthDownlinkBurstAllocation,typeinthemaximumamountofdatatoallow theAPtotransmittotheselectedsubscriberradio(s)beforetheAPisreplenishedwith transmissioncreditsattheBandwidthDownlinkSustainedRate. 11. ForBandwidthLowPriorityUplinkCIR,typeinthedesiredcommittedinformationratefor transmissionsonthelowprioritychannelbytheselectedsubscriberradio(s). 12. ForBandwidthLowPriorityDownlinkCIR,typeinthedesiredcommittedinformationrate forAPtransmissionsonthelowprioritychanneltotheselectedsubscriberradio(s). 13. ForBandwidthHighPriorityChannelEnable,ifyouwantthehighprioritychannelenabled forallsubscriberradiosthatareconfiguredtotheparticularserviceplan,selectEnabled. 14. ForBandwidthHighPriorityUplinkCIR,typeinthecommittedinformationratefor subscriberradiotransmissionsonthehighprioritychannel. 15. ForBandwidthHighPriorityDownlinkCIR,typeinthecommittedinformationrateforAP transmissionstothesubscriberradio(s)onthehighprioritychannel. 16. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeprofile,clicktheSaveChangesbutton. BAMopenstheConfirmUpdatewindow,showninFigure193.

Figure 193: Confirm Update window for bandwidth service plan

17. Ifyouwantthesubscriberradio(s)toimmediatelyrebootafterthevaluesinthiswindoware writtentothem,checkRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate.

important ........... A reboot or re-registration is not required for pushing the bandwidth values for these attributes to an element, only if the server in which you are making these changes is listed as an authentication server in the AP. This is because BAM uses a special protocol, not SNMP, to push these values from either a service plan or a custom configuration template. However, you will not see SNMP attribute values change for the element. Once you have associated a service plan with an element, no parameter for which the service plan imposes a value can have its value overwritten by a custom configuration template.

Ifyouwanttorebootatalatertimetoapplythechanges,leavethisboxunchecked. 18. ClickOK. BAMopenstheUpdatingConfigurationwindow,whereitdocumentstheassociatedevents. AnexampleofthiswindowisshowninFigure194.

272

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 194: Updating Configuration window for a new service plan

Theserviceplanisnowavailabletoapplytoselectedelements.Youcanclosethiswindowwithout consequence. Toapplyadefinedserviceplan,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 29: To apply a service plan

1. Inanetworkview,selectthesubscriberradio(s)inoneofthethreefollowingways: 2. Highlightasingleelement. Checktheboxesofmultipleelements. Highlightanelementunderwhichyouwanttheserviceplanappliedtoallsubscriber radio(s).

Fromthemainmenu,selectEditConfigureBandwidthServicePlanServicePlanName. BAMopensaTaskAttributeswindow,showninFigure195.

273

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 195: Task Attributes window for a service plan

3. 4.

ClicktheElementstab. Ifyouselectedtheelement(s)forwhichyouwanttoconfigurebandwidthsettings,check SelectedNetworkElements. Ifyouselectedanelementunderwhichyouwanttoconfigurethebandwidthsettingsofall subscriberradio(s),checkSelectedNetworkBranches.

5. 6.

ClicktheGeneraltab. Ifyouwanttheelement(s)toimmediatelyrebootafterthevaluesinthiswindowarewritten tothem,checkRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate.

important ........... Reboot or re-registration is not required for pushing the bandwidth values for the attributes to an element, only if the server in which you are making these changes is listed as an authentication server in the AP. This is because BAM uses a special protocol, not SNMP, to push these values from either a service plan or a custom configuration template. However, you will not see SNMP attribute values change for the element. Once you have associated a service plan with an element, no parameter for which the service plan imposes a value can have its value overwritten by a custom configuration template.

Ifyouwanttorebootatalatertimetoapplythechanges,leavethisboxunchecked. 7. ClicktheRunNowbutton.

274

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

IfyouselectedRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate,theelementsarerebooted,andthe changesareactivated.Ifyoudidnotselectthatoption,thechangesarenotactivateduntil theelementsarelaterrebooted.Ineithercase,BAMopensaConfigureElement(s)window, whereitdocumentstheassociatedevents.AnexampleofthiswindowisshowninFigure 196.

Figure 196: Configure Element(s) window for applying a service plan

Youcanclosethiswindowwithoutconsequence. 8. Ifintendedlicensedupgradesarefailingtooccurasaresultoftheserviceplanbeingapplied, repeatthisprocedurebut,asyoudo,settheattributeBandwidthAllowLicenseUseinthe GeneraltabtoEnabled.

Tomodifythedefinitionofanexistingserviceplan,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 30: To update a service plan

1. 2. 3. 4. Fromthemainmenu,selectNetworkDefineConfigurations. BAMopenstheDefineConfigurationstab,showninFigure190onPage270. Intheleftpane,select(highlight)theserviceplanthatyouwanttoupdate. BAMopenstheserviceplanintherightpane. Changethevaluesofanyattribute(s)asdesired. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththechanges,clickSaveChanges. BAMopenstheConfirmUpdatewindow.AnexampleofthiswindowisshowninFigure193 onPage272. Ifyouwanttheelement(s)toimmediatelyrebootafterthevaluesinthiswindowarewritten tothem,checkRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate.

note ............. For the meanings of the various attributes, see Procedure 28 on Page 270.

5.

important ........... Reboot or re-registration is not required for pushing the bandwidth values for the attributes shown in Figure 174 to an element, only if the server in which you are making these changes is listed as an authentication server in the AP. This is because BAM uses a special protocol, not SNMP, to push these values from either a service plan or a custom configuration template. However, you will not see SNMP attribute values change for the element. Once you have associated a service plan with an element, no parameter for which the service plan imposes a value can have its value overwritten by a custom configuration template.

Ifyouwanttorebootatalatertimetoapplythechanges,leavethisboxunchecked.

275

Issue 4 August 2012 6.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ClickOK. BAMopensanUpdatingConfigurationwindow,whereitdocumentstheassociatedevents. Youcanclosethiswindowwithoutconsequence.

Atanytime,youcandissociateanelementorgroupofelementsfromaserviceplan.Todoso, performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 31: To remove a bandwidth service plan association

1. 2. InaNetworkBrowserview,selecttheelementsforwhichyouwanttocanceltheservice planassociation. Fromthemainmenu,select
EditConfigureBandwidthServicePlanRemoveBandwidthServicePlanAssociation.

IntheDefineNetworkstab,thisoptionisavailableat EditNetworkElementOperationsConfigureBandwidthServicePlan. Theelementretainsthelastbandwidthvaluesthatwereappliedbytheserviceplan,but nofuturechangesintheserviceplanwillchangethebandwidthvaluesintheelement. IfyoueverwanttocompletelyremoveaserviceplanfromBAM,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 32: To remove a service plan

1. 2. 3. Fromthemainmenu,selectNetworkDefineConfigurations. BAMopenstheDefineConfigurationstab,showninFigure190onPage270. Intheleftpane,select(highlight)theserviceplanthatyouwanttodelete. BAMopenstheserviceplanintherightpane. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditDeletetheConfiguration.

9.20.3

Managing VLANs
OneimportantdistinctioninhowBAMandWMsendvaluesisthecapabilityinWMtoavoid sending/overwritingavalueforanattributewhilesendingvaluesfortheothers.InBAMbycontrast, yousendallornoneofthevaluesinaset.WMallowsyoutobeentirelyselective.Toavoidsending anattributevalue,leavethecontentsofthevalueinWMnull(backspaceoverthedefaultvalue,if necessary).Tooverwritetheattributevaluetonull,typeinaforwardspaceasyoucomposeor updatetheVLANprofile. ToconfigureanyoftheVLANattributes,youcan configurethemasyouwouldanyothersetofconfigurableattributes,bydefiningand applyingaconfigurationtemplate.Thisapproachisgoodforanadjustmenttoanindividual SM,forexample. useBAMtosetupaVLANprofiletobeappliedtoagroupofSMsthatyoudesignate. ThisapproachisgoodforestablishingVLANsandprotectingyoursetvaluesfrombeing overwrittenbyvaluesinaconfigurationtemplate.

276

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Atanytime,youcandissociateanelementorgroupofelementsfromaVLANprofile.Theelement retainsthelastVLANvaluesthatwereappliedbytheprofile,butnofuturechangesintheprofilewill changetheVLANvaluesintheelement.Similarly,ifyouremoveaVLANprofile,theelementsto whichtheprofilewascurrentlyappliedretainthevaluesuntilorunlessthosearechangedbya customconfigurationtemplateoranotherVLANprofilethatisappliedtothem. ThefollowingcaveatsapplytomanagingVLANsfromWM: VLANmustbeenabledintheAP.Otherwise,applyingaVLANprofileorsettingVLANvalues fromacustomconfigurationtemplatehasnoeffect. InaVLANprofile,theVLANEnableattributeisignoredunlesstheSMauthenticatedthrough theBAMsubsystem. IfVLANEnableissettoEnabledinaVLANprofileorinacustomconfigurationtemplate,and youswitchthisattributetoDisabled,thisactiondoesnotturnofftheVLANfeatureinthe subscriberradio.Todoso,youmustreboottheelementandallowittoreauthenticate,at whichtimeBAMceasestosendtheVLANvaluesthatarestoredintheprofileor configuration. WhenyouapplyVLANvalues,whatsetofvaluesbecomeeffectivedependsonhowthe subscriberradioenteredthenetwork,asdescribedinTable13.

Table 13: How VLAN settings are applied to an SM

Entry into the Network
EnteredviaBAM Laterreenteredthrough APthatdoesnotrequire authentication EnteredwithoutBAM authentication ReenteredviaBAM

Updated VLAN Settings From

BAMVLANprofile Configuration SourcesetinnewAP WMVLANattributes BAMVLANprofilethat initiallymatchesthe originalsettings

Immediate
Yes Yes

Through Protocol
Proprietary SNMP

Requires Reboot
No
1 No

Corrective Action
ReapplytheVLANprofile (thistimeviaSNMP).Thiswill 2 requireareboot.

No

SNMP

Yes

Yes

Proprietary

No

Rememberthattheoriginal valuesremaininthe subscriberradio,evenifBAM latermanagesitwithnew values.

NOTES: 1.Inthiscase,thePMPSMreenteredthenetworkbyregisteringinanewAP. 2.Ifthisactionisunacceptableforyournetwork,either

initiallyapplyallVLANprofilestoonlyelementsthatarebehindnonauthenticatingAPs.Thismayrequirethat youtemporarilydisableauthenticationinsomeAPs,rebootthem,applytheprofile,reenableauthenticationin them,andrebootthemagain.ThenthesubscriberradioswillstorethevaluesthattheyreceivedfromWM throughSNMP. deployasufficientnumberofBAMpackslicensessothatallofyourAPsholdthem.

277

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

WhenyouapplyaVLANprofile,BAMcomputesbandwidthbasedonboththevaluesstoredinthe relationaldatabaseandthenumberofSMbandwidthlicenses,andsendsthebandwidthserviceplan alongwiththeVLANprofiletothesubscriberradio(s).Operatorswhouseonlyarelationaldatabase (notRADIUSalso)findthatthebandwidthvaluesappliedareasexpected. However,operatorswhousebotharelationaldatabaseandRADIUScansometimesfind unexpectedandfarfromdesiredvaluesapplied.Thiscanoccurinthefollowingsequence: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Therelationaldatabaseisstoringthevaluesfromthelastpreviousauthentication. TheoperatorchangesthevaluesinRADIUS,butdoesnotreboottheinvolvedSM. TheoperatorappliesaVLANprofiletotheelement. BAMcomputesbandwidthfortheelement,basedontheoriginalvalues(fromStep1),not thenewvalues(fromStep2). BAMsendsthedesiredVLANprofileandbandwidthserviceplan,whichisbasedonoutdated RADIUSinput,totheelement.

WMcannotpolltheRADIUSservertodetectwhetheranychangehasbeenmadesincethelast authentication.Byeitherofthefollowingmeans,youcanensurethatoutdatedinputisneverusedin thebandwidthcalculation: DiscontinueusingRADIUS. Reboottheinvolvedelement(s)soonaftereverychangeinRADIUS.

ForeachBAMparameter,thecorrespondingattributeandfunctioninWMareidentifiedinTable12 onPage268.TodefineaVLANprofile,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 33: To define a VLAN profile

1. 2. Fromthemainmenu,selectNetworkDefineConfigurations. BAMopenstheDefineConfigurationstab,showninFigure190onPage270. SelectEditAddaConfigurationVLANProfile. BAMopenstheConfigurationParameterSelectionwindow,showninFigure197.

note ............. The menu path that this window displays indicates where you will find this profile when you want to apply the profile to selected elements.

Figure 197: Configuration Parameter Selection dialog for a VLAN profile

3. 4.

ForName,typeinadesignationthatyouwillassociatewiththeVLANprofilethatyouwill laterdefine. ForCategory,optionallytypeinacategoryinwhichWMshouldshowthisVLANprofileas beingsorted.

278

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. The category can be multilevel, in order of higher to lower, with semicolons delimiting between the levels. This is similar to inputting the submenu hierarchy for saved view criteria.

5.

Whenyouaresatisfiedwithyourentries,clickOK. TheconfigurablebandwidthparametersappearwiththeirdefaultvaluesintheDefine Configurationstab,showninFigure198.

Figure 198: Configurable parameters in a VLAN profile

6. 7.

ForVLANEnable,specifywhetherBAMshould(Enabled)orshouldnot(Disabled)sendto theselectedsubscriberradio(s)theVLANfeaturevaluesfromtheparticularprofile. ForVLANDynamicLearning,specifywhethertheelement(s)towhichtheprofileisapplied should(Enabled)orshouldnot(Disabled)addtotheVIDtabletheVLANIDsofupstream frames,whichenterthesubscriberradiothroughthewiredEthernetinterface. ForVLANAllowOnlyTaggedFrames,selectthetypeofarrivingframesthatthesubscriber radio(s)towhichtheprofileisappliedshouldtag,usingtheVLANIDthatisstoredinthe UntaggedIngressVIDparameter. ForVLANAgingTimeout,specifyhowlonginminutesthesubscriberradio(s)towhichthe profileisappliedshouldkeepdynamicallylearnedVLANIDs.

8.

9.

10. ForVLANManagementVID,typeintheVLANIDthatthesubscriberradio(s)towhichthe profileisappliedshouldsharewiththeAP. 11. ForVLANUntaggedIngressVID,typeintheVLANIDthatthesubscriberradio(s)towhich theprofileisappliedshouldusetotagframesthatarriveattheelement(s)untagged. 12. ForVLANMembership,clickthe ellipsisbutton. BAMopenstheEditVLANMembershipwindow.Anexampleofthiswindowisshownin Figure199.

279

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 199: Edit VLAN Membership dialog

13. ClicktheAddItembutton. BAMopenstheAddEntrywindow,showninFigure200.

Figure 200: Add Entry window

14. ForeachVLANinwhichyouwantthesubscriberradio(s)thathavethisVLANprofiletobe member(s),typeintheVLANIDandclickOK. TheAddEntrywindowisremovedandtheEditVLANMembershipdialogdisplaysallcurrent entries.

note ............. Some limitations govern how many VLANs in which BAM can assign membership for the element. The number of digits that WM handles, or the number of characters that the database stores, for this attribute may be limited. However, handling and storage capabilities are sufficient for even the most complex of networks. Entries of 255 or fewer characters are supported. Larger entries can result in the BAM subsystem applying incorrect VLAN IDs.

15. IfanyIDwasmistakenlyentered,highlighttheentryandclicktheRemoveItembutton. 16. WhenyouarefinishedaddingVLANmembershipIDs,clickOKintheEditVLANMembership window. ThemembershipIDsforthisprofilearelistedintheprofilepaneasdisplayonlydata oppositeVLANMembership. 17. IfyouneedtomakefurthereditstoVLANmembership,clickthe repeattheabovesteps. ellipsisbuttonand

18. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeprofile,clicktheSaveChangesbutton. BAMopenstheConfirmUpdatewindow,showninFigure201.

280

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 201: Confirm Update window for VLAN profile

19. Ifyouwanttheelement(s)toimmediatelyrebootafterthevaluesinthiswindowarewritten tothem,checkRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate.

important ........... Reboot or re-registration is not required for pushing the VLAN values for the attributes to an element, only if the server in which you are making these changes is listed as an authentication server in the subscriber radio. This is because BAM uses a special protocol, not SNMP, to push these values from either a VLAN profile or a custom configuration template. However, you will not see SNMP attribute values change for the element. Once you have associated a VLAN profile with an element, no parameter for which the profile imposes a value can have its value overwritten by a custom configuration template.

Ifyouwanttorebootatalatertimetoapplythechanges,leavethisboxunchecked. 20. ClickOK. BAMopenstheUpdatingConfigurationwindow,whereitdocumentstheassociatedevents. AnexampleofthiswindowisshowninFigure202.

Figure 202: Updating Configuration window for VLAN profile

Theprofileisnowavailabletoapplytoselectedelements.Youcanclosethiswindowwithout consequence. ToapplyadefinedVLANprofile,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 34: To apply a VLAN profile

1. Inanetworkview,selectthesubscriberradio(s)inoneofthethreefollowingways: 2. Highlightasingleelement. Checktheboxesofmultipleelements. HighlightanelementunderwhichyouwanttheVLANprofileappliedtoallsubscriber radios.

Fromthemainmenu,selectEditConfigureVLANProfileVLANProfileName. BAMopensaTaskAttributeswindow,showninFigure203.

281

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 203: Task Attributes window for applying a VLAN profile

3. 4.

ClicktheElementstab. Ifyouselectedtheelement(s)towhichyouwanttoapplytheVLANprofile,check SelectedNetworkElements. IfyouselectedanelementunderwhichyouwanttheVLANprofiletoapplytoallsubscriber radios,checkSelectedNetworkBranches.

5. 6.

ClicktheGeneraltab. Ifyouwanttheelement(s)toimmediatelyrebootaftertheVLANprofileisassociatedwith them,checkRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate.

important ........... Reboot or re-registration is not required for pushing the VLAN values for the attributes to an element, only if the server in which you are making these changes is listed as an authentication server in the subscriber radio. This is because BAM uses a special protocol, not SNMP, to push these values from either a VLAN profile or a custom configuration template. However, you will not see SNMP attribute values change for the element. Once you have associated a VLAN profile with an element, no parameter for which the profile imposes a value can have its value overwritten by a custom configuration template.

Ifyouwanttorebootatalatertimetoapplythechanges,leavethisboxunchecked. 7. ClicktheRunNowbutton. BAMopensaConfigureElement(s)window,showninFigure204.

282

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 204: Configure Element(s) dialog for applying a VLAN profile

Youcanclosethiswindowwithoutconsequence. TomodifythedefinitionofanexistingVLANprofile,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 35: To update a VLAN profile

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectNetworkDefineConfigurations. BAMopenstheDefineConfigurationstab.AnexampleofthistabisshowninFigure190on Page270. Intheleftpane,select(highlight)theVLANprofilethatyouwanttoupdate. BAMopenstheConfigurationParameterSelectionwindow,showninFigure197on Page278. Changethevaluesofanyattribute(s)asdesired. Forthemeaningsofthevariousattributes,seeProcedure33:TodefineaVLANprofileon Page278.

2.

3.

important ........... For the VLAN Membership attribute, if you remove all IDs, BAM does not send this change to the subscriber radio in run time. If you want the radio to immediately be a member of no VLANs, remove all IDs and then directly reboot the element. (Checking Reboot Network Elements after update will not work because BAM does not consider a change in VLAN membership as requiring a reboot.)

4. 5.

Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththechanges,clickSaveChanges. BAMopenstheConfirmUpdatewindow,showninFigure201onPage281. Ifyouwanttheelement(s)toimmediatelyrebootafterthevaluesinthiswindowarewritten tothem,checkRebootNetworkElementsafterupdate.

important ........... Reboot or re-registration is not required for pushing the VLAN values for the attributes to an element, only if the server in which you are making these changes is listed as an authentication server in the subscriber radio. This is because BAM uses a special protocol, not SNMP, to push these values from either a VLAN profile or a custom configuration template. However, you will not see SNMP attribute values change for the element. Once you have associated a VLAN profile with an element, no parameter for which the profile imposes a value can have its value overwritten by a custom configuration template.

Ifyouwanttorebootatalatertimetoapplythechanges,leavethisboxunchecked. 6. ClickOK. BAMopenstheUpdatingConfigurationwindow,whereitdocumentstheassociatedevents.

Youcanclosethiswindowwithoutconsequence.

283

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Atanytime,youcandissociateanelementorgroupofelementsfromaVLANprofile.Todoso, performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 36: To remove a VLAN profile association

1. 2. InaNetworkBrowserview,selecttheelementsforwhichyouwanttocanceltheVLAN profileassociation. Fromthemainmenu,select EditConfigureVLANProfileRemoveVLANProfileAssociation. IntheDefineNetworkstab,thisoptionisavailableat EditNetworkElementOperationsConfigureVLANProfile.

TheelementretainsthelastVLANvaluesthatwereappliedbytheVLANprofile,butnofuture changesintheVLANprofilewillchangetheVLANvaluesintheelement. IfyoueverwanttocompletelyremoveaVLANprofilefromBAM,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 37: To remove a VLAN profile

1. 2. 3. Fromthemainmenu,selectNetworkDefineConfigurations. BAMopenstheDefineConfigurationstab,showninFigure190onPage270. Intheleftpane,select(highlight)theVLANprofilethatyouwanttodelete. BAMopenstheVLANprofileintherightpane. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditDeletetheConfiguration.

TheelementretainsthelastVLANvaluesthatwereappliedbytheprofile.

9.21

Running a User-defined Script

WMallowsusersforwhomTaskSchedulerOperationCreateUserScriptTaskisprovisionedinthe Permissionstreetopointtoalocallydefinedscriptandlaunchit,eitherondemandorasascheduled task.Ineithercase,thisrequiresconfiguringthetask.SeeSchedulableTasksonPage649. Thisfeaturealsorequiresthatthescriptexistsontheserverandhasitsmodesettoexecutable.To authorizethisfeatureforauser,seeTaskSchedulerOperationonPage483. TheDetailspaneoftheCreateScheduleTaskdialogforthistasktypeallowstheuserto selectthescriptfromalistofthefilesthataremountedintheUserScriptsdirectory. optionallytypeargumentsintotheEnterarguments(optional)textbox. launchthescriptondemandbyclickingtheRunnowbuttonorsetthescripttorunonthe specifiedschedulebyclickingtheSavebuttonandconfiguringtheScheduletab.

WhenUserScriptistheselectionfromtheSelectTaskTypewindow,WMopensaCreateSchedule TaskinterfacewhoseDetailstabisasfollows.

284

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 205: Details for a User Script task

WhenscriptsarepresentunderScriptName,youcanclicktohighlightthetargetscript,optionally typeinassociatedargumentsfortheexecution,andtheneither clicktheRunnowbuttontolaunchtheexecution. clicktheSavebuttontosetthescripttolaunchasconfiguredintheScheduletabofthis window.

Ifnoscriptsarepresentinthedirectory,thenWMreturnsthefollowingerrorasapopupmessage:

Toviewtheresultsofanexecutedscript,useProcedure199:Toviewresultsoflastexecutionofa taskonPage677.

285

Issue 4 August 2012 Atypicalresultsdisplayforasuccessfuluserscriptexecutionisasfollows.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 206: Schedulable Script Results window, example

9.22

Uploading RADIUS AAA Certificates

note ............. This operation requires the specific permission Upload AAA Certificate. This is a selectable permission under Configuration in the Permissions tree hierarchy.

PMPSMsandPMP320CPEdevicessupportRADIUSauthenticationperRFC1422byassociatinga .pemfilewiththedevice.ThisfileistheSSLpublickeyofacertificaterecognizedbyaconfiguredAAA (authentication,authorization,andaccounting)server.WMprovidescertificatemanagementwithits capabilityto browsetothetargetcertificatefile. removetheexistingcertificate(s)sothatnoconflictresultsfromapplyingthenew certificate. pacetherateofcertificateupdatestocontroltheirvolumeoftraffic.

Thecommandoptiontolaunchthisfeatureisspecifictothetargetdevicetype.Ifbothoneormore PMPCPEdevice(s)andoneormorePMPSM(s)areselected,thentheToolssubmenuisnotpresent uponrightclick.ThecommandoptionsareavailableinanInventoryviewasfollows: ForthePMPCPEdevicetype,highlightthetargetdevice(s),rightclick,andthenselect ToolsUploadAAACertificatetoCPEfromthedropdownlistofoptions. ForthePMPSMdevicetype,highlightthetargetdevice(s),rightclick,andthenselect ToolsUploadAAACertificatetoSMfromthedropdownlistofoptions.

Theresultofeitheroptionisthesame:WMopenstheUploadAAACertificatedialog.

286

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 207: Upload AAA Certificate dialog, initial view

Toconfigurethisdialog,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 38: To upload a AAA certificate

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. Refertotheuserguidethatdocumentsthedevicetype. Copythetargetcertificatefiletowithinfilebrowsingreachoftheclientdevice. Determinewhetherallofthecurrentlyhighlighteddevicessharethesameloginand passwordformanagementaccesstothedevice. Determinewhetherandhowmanycertificatesarecurrentlyappliedtothehighlighted devices. Considerthecurrenttrafficloadinthenetworkandinthehighlighteddevices. ForMaxConcurrentUpdates,establishthemaximumasanumberthatisfewerthan21. ClicktheBrowsebutton. Browsetoandselectthetargetcertificatefile.

287

Issue 4 August 2012 9.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifanycertificatesarealreadyappliedtoanyofthehighlighteddevices,performthe followingsteps: a. ChecktocheckthecheckboxassociatedwithDeleteExistingCertificate. ThespecificDeleteoptionsbecomeactive.

Figure 208: Upload AAA Certificate dialog, Delete Existing Certificate selected

b.

ClicktoselecttheappropriateradiobuttonforDeleteCertificate1,DeleteCertificate2, orDeleteBoth.

note ............. If certificates are at capacity in the target device, then the device response to the upload attempt depends on the device type. If the target device was a PMP 320 CPE, then the uploaded certificate replaces one of the existing certificates. If it was a PMP SM, then the rejects the upload attempt.

10. ForSelectedDevicesLoginID,typeintothetextboxthemanagementloginthatiscommon amongallofthehighlighteddevices. 11. ForSelectedDevicesPassword,typeintothetextboxthemanagementpasswordthatis commonamongallofthehighlighteddevices. 12. ClicktheUploadbutton. 13. Whenthesystemreturnsthesuccessmessage,clicktheClosebuttontoexitthisdialog.
important ........... If the target device was a PMP 320 CPE, then the uploaded certificate is immediately effective. If it was a PMP SM, then the certificate will not be effective until the next reboot of the SM.

288

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

9.23

Upgrading Devices On Demand

note ............. Interpret all references to upgrades in this section to apply to downgrades as well. Since all upgrade packages ultimately outlive their immediate usefulness, when they do they should be stored as potential downgrade packages for instances in which you want to retreat to a previous release.

WMsupportsbothondemandandscheduledsoftwareupgrades,whichpushsoftware(images),and firmware(logic),andbootfilepackagestosupportedCambiumNetworksdevices.Thesedevices include PMPdevicesinFSKandOFDMseries backhauldevicesinPMPandPTPseries CMMmicro CMM4,butnotitsintegratedswitch

Thesuccessofeachupgraderequiresthat alloftheappropriateupgradepackageshavealreadybeendownloadedtotheclientdevice from http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/pmp/software/index.phpforPMPand/or CMMdevices http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/ptp/software/index.phpforPTPdevices.

andthenuploadedfromtheclientintoitsapplication. youhaveSystemAdministrationlevelprivileges. yourclientdevicehasconnectivitywiththeWMserverdevice. theWMserverdevicecouldsuccessfullypingtheIPaddressesofthedevicesthatyouintend toupgrade. youperformeachofthestepsthatfollowwithinthissection.

Youcanandtypicallywillupgradethedevicesinyournetworkasascheduledtaskinsteadofanon demandlaunch.Schedulingallowsyoutorunthisoperationwithoutimmediatestaffinvolvement duringperiodswhennetworktrafficisleastintensive.Althoughthissectionpresumesanondemand launch,itsinstructionsanddescriptionsareessentialtoorderlyandefficientupgradesviaschedules tasksandarenotreiteratedwherethosetasksaredescribed(SchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTask onPage649).So,youwillneedtorefertothissectionaswell.

9.23.1

Launching the Software Upgrade Interface

WhenyourightclickonadeviceandselectToolsInstallSoftwareUpgrades,theSoftwareUpgrade dialogopens.
important ........... Multiple instances of the Software Upgrade dialog open if you select the Install Software Upgrades option more than once. Be sure to not launch an additional dialog if an instance of it is already open. To configure the upgrade of more than one device, even from disparate specific types, highlight them all in the Inventory view before you select the Install Software Upgrades option.

289

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 209: Software Upgrade dialog

Eachofthesedialogtabsincludesseveralfiletransferoptionsandrequiresauthenticationthatgives WMpermissiontooverwritethesoftwareimage,andfirmwarelogic,and/orbootfilethatcurrently residesinthetargetdevice(s).

9.23.2

Configuring the PMP/PTP Software Upgrade

Theupgradeconfigurationconsistsoffiveuseroperations: ReviewingtheRelevantPreUpgradeInformationAbouttheDevice(s),describedon Page291. SettingtheGeneralConfiguration,describedonPage291. SettingtheSMAutoupdateConfiguration,describedonPage292. AuthenticatingWMintotheDevice(s),describedonPage297. SelectingtheSoftwareandFirmwarePackagestoApply,describedonPage297.

290

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Reviewing the Relevant Pre-Upgrade Information About the Device(s)

Thebottompanelincludesatab(Selectedforupgrade)thatinitiallydisplayssomerelevant informationaboutthepreselecteddevice(s):DeviceName,Agent,Hops,andStatus.Todisplaythe remainderoftherelevantinformationaswell,clicktheProbebutton.Theinformationiscompleted forallofthelisteddevices.

Figure 210: Selected for upgrade tab

AswithothertablesintheWMclientviews,youcanclickanddragacolumnbordertomakethe columnwiderornarrower.Toremoveadevicefromthelist,highlightitandthenclicktheRemove button. Thisbottompanelalsoincludesatab(Upgradecomplete)thatultimatelydisplaysalloftheknown relevantinformationaboutthedeviceaftertheupgradehasoccurred.Ifanyofthedevicesthatthe Selectedforupgradetabislistingarealreadyattheirlatestversions,thenyoucanmovethemby highlightingandclicktheMovetocompletebutton.ThiscanbemorepracticalthantheRemove operation,sincetheformerultimatelyresultsinthembeingdisplayedamongthedevicesthat operateonthelatestavailableversions,whereasRemoveleavesthemunaccountedforwithrespect tousingtheUpgradecompletetabfortrackingthecurrentupgradeeffort.

Setting the General Configuration

TheUsePassiveFTPforTransferringFilestoNetworkElementsoptionactivatespassiveFTPforall devices.ForAPsotherthanthePMP320AP,theSMAutoupdatefeaturecausesanAPto examinethesoftwareandFPGAversionsoneachofitsSMs commandthoseSMsthatrequireanupgradetoperformone.

Inthiscommand,theAPdirectstheSMtoasourceforthelatestsoftwareandfirmware:eitherthe APoraTFTPserverontheWMserverdeviceandwithinnetworkreachoftheWMserver.Insectors whereSMAutoupdateisnotenabled,eachSMmusthaveavalidassignedIPaddressinorderforWM toeffecttheupgrade.Whereitisenabled,theAPactsasavirtualproxyfortheupgrade.Moreover, SMAutoupdatespeedstheprocessofupgradinganetwork,whilenotpreventinganadministrator fromupgradingindividualdevicesthroughdirectIPaccesstothem. WMinitiatesandterminatestheSMAutoupdatemodewithinAPsbyusingaUDPcommand.This moderemainsactiveonlyuntileither auserwithSystemAdministrationprivilegesdisablesit,manuallyorinanother UDPcommand) theAPreboots.

Forsecurity,anAPcanacceptthiscommandfromonlyoneIPaddress,whichisspecifiedinthe configurationoftheAP.Forconvenience,WMautomaticallyforcesthissettingintheAPstothe IPaddressoftheWMserver.

291

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IftheUsehttpsoptionischecked,thenthePMPSM(s)willusealocalHTTPservertoaccessthe software,boot,andFPGAimagefiles.ThisworkswiththeUseCNUTHTTPServerasFileServer optiondescribedunderSettingtheSMAutoupdateConfigurationonPage292. IftheEnableSMAutoupdateWhenanAccessPointisUpdatedoptionischecked,thenWM automaticallyenablesSMAutoupdateonallselectedAPsafterthedirectelementupdatesare completed.UsingthisoptionsavestheuserfromhavingtoseparatelyturnonSMAutoupdate. BywaitingtoenableSMAutoupdateuntilafterallselectednetworkelements(includingSMs)have beendirectlyupdated,WMavoidsproblemsthatcanoccurwhentheSMAutoupdatefeatureis simultaneouslyenabledatmultiplelevelsofthenetworkhierarchy.

important ........... SM autoupdate is supported for SMs whose Network Accessibility parameter (in the IP tab of the SM's Configuration management web page) is set to Local, not Public.

CambiumNetworksdeliverssoftwareimagesintwoplatformformats(bigEndianandlittleEndian formats)tosupporttwodifferentCPUsrunningontheradios.Atanygiventime,anAPcanpushthe softwareimagesforonlyoneoftheseplatforms.WhereanAPmustupgradeSMsofbothCPU formats,WMautomaticallymonitorstheprogressofSMAutoupdatewithinthesectorandswitches theimagesandinstructionsafterhavingpushedtheimageformatofthemajorityofSMsinthe sector.

Setting the SM Autoupdate Configuration

TheSMAutoupdateConfigurationblockallowsyoutospecifywhethertheSMsshouldgettheir upgradefilesfromtheirAPsoranotherserver.IftheSMsareconfiguredforPublicAccessibility, UseTFTPFileServerontheWMServerorUseCNUTHTTPServerasFileServercanabetteroption thanUseAccessPointasFileServerfortworeasons: EitheroftheseoptionsoffloadsprocessingfromtheAPs. Thisincreasesthenumberofsimultaneousupgrades.

Figure 211: SM Autoupdate Configuration tab

292

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

WhenanAPisusedasafileserver,only4SMsassociatedwithaparticularAPcanperform concurrentupgrades.Whenanotherserverisused,20SMsperAPcanperformconcurrentupgrades. Variousfirmwarepackagesmayberequired,dependingonwhethertheplatformrevisionis P7/P8/P9,P10,orP11,andanAPcanholdonlyonesetoffirmwarepackagesatatime.Becauseof this,WMswitchesthepackageontheAPfromonetoanothertoensurethatallSMsonthesector getupgraded. TheupgradepackageattemptstodeterminewhichimageisbesttoloadontotheAPfirstduringthe SMAutoupdatesequence,butifitcannot,thenitwillusethetoptobottomorderofSMtypesthat arelistedintheboxbeneaththeUseAccessPointasFileServeroption.Tooptimizetheupgrade performanceonasector,thislistincludestheoptiontoMoveUporMoveDownanSMTypeand therebyreordertheupdatesbySMtype.However,ifyouareupgradinganetworkofonlyoneSM firmwaretype,andyouseeadelayinAutoupdatecommencingonyournetwork,youcanswitchthis optionsettingtotrytoexpediteit. Thefileserverselectionscompareasfollows: tohavetheAPsservetheupgradefiles(UseAccessPointasFileServer).Thistypicallyisthe leastfavorableoption,sincetheotheroptionsoffloadprocessingfromtheAPsandsupport agreaternumberofsimultaneousSMupdatesinthenetwork.WhenanAPisusedasa fileserver,only4SMsassociatedwithaparticularAPcanperformconcurrentupgrades. TheupdateprocessusestheorderspecifiedunderAutoUpdateSMTypeforalldevicesthat areflaggedforupdating.UpdateprogressismonitoredbyFTPmessaging. tousethelocalTFTPserver.Devicesthatarerunningareleaseearlierthan12.0supportthis optionandWMusesthisoptiontopushtheirimagefiles. UnlikeinthestandaloneNetworkUpdatertool,theUseTFTPFileServerontheWMserver optiondoesnotrequiretheoperatortoconfigureanIPaddressfortheTFTPserverandthe rootdirectorywhereitwillstorethefilesfortheSMstopull.WMautomaticallyconfigures thesewhenthisoptionisselected.ProgressofthesoftwareupgradesismonitoredbyFTP messaging.WhentheTFTPserverisused,asmanyas20SMsperAPcanperformconcurrent upgrades. toallowWMtoactasanHTTP/HTTPSserver.TheUseCNUTHTTPServerasFileServer optionconfiguresthesoftwareupgradeutilitytoallowdevicestopulltheirimagefilesfrom theHTTP/HTTPSserverandtomonitorupgradestatusviaSNMPmessages.Italsousesthe configuredAutoUpdateSMTypeorder.Release12.0andlaterdevicessupportthisoption.

FortheUseAccessPointasFileServerandUseCNUTHTTPServerasFileServeroptions,acheckbox isavailableforOrderBySMNumber.Ifyoucheckthischeckbox,WMcountsthenumberof registeredSMsofeachAutoupdateSMType(howmanyP7/P8/P9,howmanyP10,andhowmany P11),andfirstupdatestheallofthetypewiththemost,thenallofthetypewiththesecondmost, andthenallofthetypewiththeleast,ignoringtheverticalorderspecifiedintheAutoupdateSM Typeblock.Ifyouleavethisboxunchecked,itusestheorderintheblock.

293

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Using the HPAP Channel Bandwidth Feature

note ............. Channel Bandwidth applies to only PMP 430 Series High-performance AP (HPAP) in Release 10.2 or later and the registered SMs in its sector.

Thisfeaturemakessettable aspecificchannelbandwidthtoinstructtheHPAPtoswitchitsoperationto,basedonits currentchannelbandwidth. whethertoproceedwithorabandonthechannelbandwidthswitchingoperationinthecase wheretheHPAPhasatleastonecurrentlyregisteredSM.

Figure 212: HPAP Channel Bandwidth tab

ImproperuseofthistabcanresultinSMsdroppingtheirconnectionstotheHPAPandnotbeingable toreconnect: ThePMP430SeriesSMthatoperatesonRelease10.0or10.1.1cannotcommunicatewith anAPthatoperatesonRelease10.2orlater.So,undernocircumstancesshouldyou upgradeanyPMP430SeriesAPtoRelease10.2orlateruntilallofitsSMshavefirstbeen upgradedtothatrelease. Similarly,aRelease10.2orlaterHPAPthatissettoachannelbandwidththatdiffersfrom thatofitsSMscannotcommunicatewithitsSMs.So,thedesiredchannelbandwidthshould neverbesetintheHPAPuntilitissetinalloftheSMsinthesector. InthecasewhereyouwanttodowngradeasectorfromRelease10.2orlatertoRelease 10.1or10.0,youmustfirstchangethesectortothe10MHzchannelbandwidth(SMsfirst) andthendowngradealloftheSMsbeforeyoudowngradetheHPAP.

294

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

However,inherentinasectorofanyconsiderablesizeisthefactthat,atanygiventime(whenyou wouldliketocutovertothenewreleaseorlatertothenewchannelbandwidth),someoftheSMs arelikelytobeoutofservice(powereddownbytheenduserorencounteringtransientRFproblems, forexample).Toavoidorminimizetrouble,youcan 1. 2. 3. useWMtoidentifytheoutofserviceSMsbytheirrediconcolor. useWMtodisplaythecorrelatedcustomercontactinformation. asktheendcustomertoattempttoreestablishthelinkbeforeyouproceedwiththe operationthathasthehazardofstrandingSMs.

Properuseofthistabisassequencedinthefollowingexample.Thegoalinthisexamplecaseisto haveanentirePMP430HPAPtowerlinkedat20MHzchannelbandwidth,andnoSMsthatare unabletoreconnecttotheHPAPincasetheygooutofserviceforsomereasonaftersuccessful connectionatthatsizeofchannel: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Planyourupgradesessiontooccuratadateandtimewhenhistoricaldatasuggeststhatthe fewestSMsarenotinservice. Whenthedateandtimearrive,sendablasttoallcustomers,urgingthemtokeeptheir sessionsup. UsealternativemeanstoaskcustomerswhoseSMsareoutofsessiontoattemptto reconnecttheRFlink. InanInventoryview,highlightallAPsofthetower. RightclickamongthehighlightedAPsandselectToolsInstallSoftwareUpgrades. UsingSelectingtheSoftwareandFirmwarePackagestoApplyonPage297forthe SelectPackagesoperation,checkonlytheupgradepackageforRelease10.2orlater(inAES orDES)anduncheckanyothersthatarecheckedinthePackageList. IntheSMAutoupdateConfigurationtab,clicktheEnablebuttonforEnable/DisableAPsfor SMAutoupdate. AlloftheregisteredSMsinthesectorareupgradedtoRelease10.2andthendroptheir registrationstotheAP. WhenallinsessionSMshavebeenupgraded,makeanotherattempttogetanythatarestill runningtheoldreleaseupgraded.

7.

8.

important ........... Any that you still cannot upgrade will require a truck roll before they will be able to reconnect to the HPAP.

9.

IntheSMAutoupdateConfigurationtab,clicktheDisablebuttonforEnable/DisableAPsfor SMAutoupdate.

10. IntheSelectedforUpgradetab,clicktheStartbutton. TheAPsareupgradedtoRelease10.2asHPAPs,andthenalloftheupgradedSMsreregister intotheirHPAPs. 11. WaituntilalloftheupgradedSMshavereregistered. 12. ClicktheHPAPChannelBandwidthtab. 13. UsethistabtosettheTargetBandwidthto20MHzfortheCurrentBandwidth. ClickintheTargetBandwidthcolumnattheproperrowtoexposethedropdownselection list. 14. IntheChannelBandwidthSwitchModeblockofthistab,selectSwitchChannelBandwidth EvenifSMsarePresent. 15. ClicktheSMAutoupdateConfigurationtab.

295

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16. ClicktheAutoupdateSMChannelBandwidthbutton. ThechannelbandwidthofallconnectedSMsischangedto20MHz,andtheydroptheir connectionstotheirHPAPs. 17. IntheSMAutoupdateConfigurationtab,clicktheDisablebuttonforEnable/DisableAPsfor SMAutoupdate. 18. IntheSelectedforUpgradetab,clicktheStartbutton. ThechannelbandwidthoftheHPAPsischangedto20MHz,andallsectorsofthetowerare operationalwhenalloftheSMshavereregisteredfollowingthereboot,exceptforthose SMsthatwerenotinsessionduringboththeupgradeandthechannelbandwidthchange, andconsequentlywillrequireatruckroll. Inasecondexamplethatfollowshere,thegoalistodowngradeanentirePMP430HPAPtowerfrom Release10.2orlatertoRelease10.1.1,andhavenoSMsthatareunabletoreconnecttotheHPAP: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Planyourdowngradesessiontooccuratadateandtimewhenhistoricaldatasuggeststhat thefewestSMsarenotinservice. Whenthedateandtimearrive,sendablasttoallcustomers,urgingthemtokeeptheir sessionsup. UsealternativemeanstoaskcustomerswhoseSMsareoutofsessiontoattemptto reconnecttheRFlink. InanInventoryview,highlightallHPAPsofthetower. UsingSelectingtheSoftwareandFirmwarePackagestoApplyonPage297forthe SelectPackagesoperation,checkonlythepackageonwhichallHPAPsofthetowerandall oftheSMsintheirsectorscurrentlyoperateanduncheckanyothersthatarecheckedinthe PackageList. IntheHPAPChannelBandwidthtab,clickintheTargetBandwidthcolumnatthe5.0(MHz) CurrentBandwidthrowtoexposethedropdownselectionlist,andselect10.0(MHz)for TargetBandwidth. ClickintheTargetBandwidthcolumnatthe10.0(MHz)CurrentBandwidthrowtoexpose thedropdownselectionlist,andselect10.0(MHz)forTargetBandwidth. ClickintheTargetBandwidthcolumnatthe20.0(MHz)CurrentBandwidthrowtoexpose thedropdownselectionlistandselect10.0(MHz)forTargetBandwidth. ClicktheSMAutoupdateConfigurationtab.

6.

7. 8. 9.

10. ClicktheAutoupdateSMChannelBandwidthbutton. Thechannelbandwidthischangedto10.0MHzintheSMs.

note ............. When this occurs, connection between the HPAPs and these SMs is dropped, except where the HPAPs were already operating in 10-MHz channel bandwidth.

11. WhenallinsessionSMshavebeenreconfiguredto10MHzoperation,makeanother attempttogetanythatarestilloperatingineitherthe5orthe20MHzchannelbandwidth reconfiguredto10MHz.

important ........... Any that you still cannot reconfigure to 10 MHz will require a truck roll before they will be able to reconnect to the HPAP.

12. ClicktheDisablebutton. 13. ClicktheStartbutton. Thechannelbandwidthischangedto10.0MHzintheAPs. 14. AllowsufficienttimefortheSMswhoseconnectionsweredroppedtoreregisterintheirAPs afterthereboot.

296

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

15. UsingSelectingtheSoftwareandFirmwarePackagestoApplyonPage297forthe SelectPackagesoperation,checkonlythe CANOPY101_1_Downgrade_OFDM_AESorDES.pkg3packageanduncheckanyothersthat arecheckedinthePackageList. 16. IntheSMAutoupdateConfigurationtab,clicktheEnablebuttonforEnable/DisableAPsfor SMAutoupdate. OnlytheregisteredSMs(nottheHPAPsalso)aredowngradedtoRelease10.1.1.Theywill droptheirconnectionstotheHPAPsandbeunabletoreregister. 17. IntheSMAutoupdateConfigurationtab,clicktheDisablebuttonforEnable/DisableAPsfor SMAutoupdate. 18. IntheSelectedforUpgradetab,clicktheStartbutton. Thistime,theHPAPsaredowngradedtoRelease10.1.1.TheSMconnectionswilldropand thenbereestablishedafterthereboot,atwhichpointallsectorsofthetowerwillbe operatingonRelease10.1.1,exceptforthoseSMsthatwerenotinsessionduringboththe channelbandwidthchangeandthedowngrade,andconsequentlywillrequireatruckroll.

Authenticating WM into the Device(s)

IfnoTelnet/FTPLoginIDisconfiguredintheCredentialManager(seeSettingWMCredentialsfora GroupofSelectedDevicesonPage250),thenWMusesroottoauthenticateintoelementsforan upgradeviaTFTPserver.WhennoTelnet/FTPPasswordisconfigured,WMusesanullpassword. ThesearealsothedefaultusernameandpasswordforPMPandPTPelements,withtheexceptionof PMP320devices.Ifeitherorbothoftheseareconfiguredinthesetofelementsselectedforthe upgrade,thentheirreconfiguredvaluesmustbeconfiguredintothesefieldsofCredentialManager fortheelementstoallowWMtoforcetheupgradeinthemviaTFTP. EnsurethatdeviceselectioniscompleteintheSelectedforupgradetab.ThenclicktheApplysettings button.IfthePMP/PTPtabcontentisconsistentandcomplete,thenWMacceptstheauthentication strings.

Selecting the Software and Firmware Packages to Apply

note ............. Use of the upgrades feature requires ConfigurationInstall Software Upgrades allowed in the Permissions tree hierarchy.

ClicktheSelectPackagesbutton.WM beginsscanningandpreparingtoloadthepackagefilesthatareintheappropriatedirectory ontheserver. opensfortheinterimthepopupmessageManually added packages are being added into the database. Please try again later.Thispopupremainsopen untilyoudismissit. Afterthescanningandloadingprocessiscomplete,thePackageManagerdialogwillnotopen. RepeattheSelectPackagescommandoption(andthepopupdismissal,asneeded)untiltheWM opensthePackageManagerdialogwithpackagespopulated,presumingthatthereisatleastonein thatserverdirectory.Ifnoneexistthere,thenthedialogopenswithnofilesinitiallylistedunder PackageName.

297

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 213: Package Manager dialog, no packages

Regardlessofwhetherpackagesfromtheserverloaded,youcanoptionallyclicktheAddbuttonand thenbrowsetoandselectanypackagefilefromanywhereintheclientfilesystem.Repeatthisas manytimesasrequiredtouploadallthepackagesfromtheclienttotheWMserver.Eachuploaded packageisthenavailableforanyclienttouseforupgrades,untilandunlessitisremovedbyaclient, asdescribedbelow.WhenevertheSelectPackagescommandoptionisinvoked,anyfile(intheTftp directoryoftheserver)thatwasnotpreviouslyloadedintoPackageManagerisloadedintoit.

Figure 214: Package Manager dialog, packages added

298

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

ThePackageInfopanelinthelowerportionofthiswindowprovidesasummaryofinformationabout thecurrentlyhighlightedsinglepackage.Atanytime,youcancheckthecheckboxofapackageand clicktheRemovebutton.ThisbothremovesthepackagefromthePackageListanddeletesthe packagefromtheserver. Beforeperformingtheupgradeoperation,WMexamineseachcheckedpackageandusesonlythe topmostacceptablepackage.TosavesomeofthetimethatWMwouldspendexaminingpackages, youcanaltertheorderofthepackagesinPackageManagerbyusingtheMoveUpandMoveDown buttons,whichmovethecurrentlyhighlightedpackage.

9.23.3

Launching the On-Demand Software Upgrade

EnsurethattheinformationiscompleteandappropriateinthePMP/PTPtab.ThenclicktheStart button.IfnopackagehasbeencheckedinthePackageList,thenWMthrowsaspecificerrortothat effect.Otherwise,WMbeginstheconfiguredupgrade(s).Duringtheprocess,ifyouseeaneedto stopit,clicktheAbortbutton.

9.23.4

Reviewing the Relevant Post-Upgrade Information About the Device(s)

Afterperforminganupgrade,WM movesthesuccessfullyupgradeddevicetotheUpgradecompletetabinthelowerpaneland updatesitsStatusandversion(s)columns. leavesthedevicewhoseupgradefailed,sothatitisthereforfurtherupgradeattempts.

9.23.5

Resetting Location Attributes for PTP 300 and PTP 500 Devices
Whendevicesofthesetypesareupgradedtotheirv0500release,anyvaluespreviouslyconfigured byCSVimportoftheirLatitude,Longitude,andHeightaboveGroundattributesforthesedevicesare lost,becausetheOIDsassociatedwiththeseattributeshavechanged.Theworkaroundisfor operatorstoconfiguretheseasfullysupportedattributesaftertheupgradestov0500.

299

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

10 Creating and Using Device Groups

TheDeviceGroupfeatureenablesyoutodefineastaticordynamiclogicalgroupoftwoormore devicesandassignagroupname.SeveralWMoperationsmaybeperformedondevicegroups,such asApplytemplateandRunreport.TheApplicationstreelistseachconfiguredgroupunderthe categoryDeviceGroups.Thereisnolimittothenumberofdevicegroupstowhichadevicecan belong. Astaticgroupmembershipwillalwaysconsistofthesamedevices,exceptthosethatyouspecifically addtothegrouporspecificallyremovefromit.Specifically,inthiscontext,meansthatyoumarkthe Name(ID)ofthetargetdevice(s)byhighlightandthenclickthebuttons(AddorRemove,andthen Update)toexecutetheadditionorremoval.

Figure 215: Add Device window for Static Selection of a device group

Adynamicgroupmembershipcanautomaticallychangeasitsdevicesceasetomatchitscriteriaor otherpolleddevicesnowdo,butitssetofcriteriaformembershipwillnotchange,exceptifyou deliberatelyalterthesetofcriteriabyselectingotherconditions.

301

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Afteragrouphasbeendefined,itcannotbetransformedintotheothergrouptype.Forexample,if youthinkyouwillneedtomanuallyaddormanuallyexcludeoneormoredevicesfromagroupinthe future,youshoulddefineitusingtheStaticSelectionoption.Ifyouwantthemembershipofthenew grouptoflexwithpollingresults,thenyoushoulddefineitusingtheDynamicSelectionoption. Inadynamicgroupdefinition,youselectwhetherthedefinitionwillbe Basic,whichcanapplytoonlythefollowingcriteria: onerequiredSpecificTypedevicespecifictype;forexample,PMP.SM(v11.0) zerooroneConfigurationAttributewithanassociatedoperatorandvaluetofilter devicesofthedevicespecifictype zerooronePerformanceAttributewithanassociatedoperatorandvaluetofilter devicesofthedevicespecifictype.

Figure 216: Create Device Group conditions for basic Dynamic Selection of a device group

Advanced,whichcanapplytothefollowingcriteria: oneormorevaluesforanyorallofthefollowingDeviceProperties: DeviceTypeforexample,PMP.SM IPAddress Managed Name(ID) SNMPReadCommunity SNMPV3ContextName

302

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 SNMPV3UserName SNMPVersion WriteCommunity SpecificTypedevicespecifictype;forexample,PMP.SM(v11.0) Status SysOID

zeroormoreConfigurationAttributes,eachwithanassociatedoperatorandvalue tofilterdevicesoftheDeviceTypeorSpecificType,onlyifoneormoreDeviceTypeor SpecificTypehasbeenspecifiedunderDeviceProperties zeroormorePerformanceAttributes,eachwithanassociatedoperatorandvalue tofilterdevicesoftheDeviceType,onlyifaDeviceTypehasbeenspecifiedunder DeviceProperties.

Figure 217: Name selections for Add Advanced Criteria of a dynamic device group

303

Issue 4 August 2012 InDevicePropertiesforanAdvancedDynamicSelection

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

theSpecificTypeislimitedtoallorfewerofthespecifictypesthatfallwithintheselection(s) madeforDeviceType.Forexample,ifyouselectPMP.APandPMP.SMforDeviceType

andthenselectSpecificTypefromthedropdownlistofremainingDeviceProperties,the selectablevaluesincludeonlythespecifictypeswithinPMP.APandPMP.SM:

DeviceTypeisunavailableamongtheDevicePropertiesifyouspecifySpecificTypebefore youattempttoselectDeviceType.

304

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

ForConfigurationAttributesorPerformanceAttributes,theAddAdvancedCriteriainterfaceallows youtoselectfromeither alistofallattributesthatthefullsetofselectedSpecificTypesorDeviceTypessharein common:

alistofallattributesthatarevalidincommonforonlysomeoftheDeviceTypesor SpecificTypesthatthedevicegroupcomprises:

305

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Thisflexibilityeffectivelyallowsyoutodefineagroupthatwillalwaysbecomposedofallofcertain typesofdevicesandasubsetofdevicesofothertypes. Ifyoutogglebackandforth,tryingtodecidewhethertodefineagroupbyBasicorAdvanced dynamiccriteria,yourchangesinthedialogareretaineduntilyouclicktheUpdatebutton.Ifthis occurswhiletheBasiccriteriaaredisplayed,thentheconditionsdefinedbyAdvancedcriteriaare discardedandwillnotapplytothedynamicgroupmembership.Similarly,ifyoutogglebackandforth betweenStaticSelectionandDynamicSelection,yourchangesareretaineduntiltheUpdate. YoucaninvoketheDeviceGroupfeatureinanyofthefollowingways: byselectingToolsManageDeviceGroupsfromthemainmenu.Thisallowsyoutocreatea newdevicegrouporeditordeleteanexistingone. byrightclickingonthenameofanexistingdevicegroupunderInventoryDeviceGroupsin theApplicationstree.Thisallowsyouto monitoranInventoryviewofthesemembersineithertheviewpaneloraseparate window(Detach). ApplytemplateorRunreport,asstatedabove. launchaphysicalmapthatcomprisesthemembersofthedevicegroup. editordeletethespecificdevicegroup. AddToDeviceGroup.Thisallowsyoutoaddthedevicetoanexistingdevicegroupor createanewone. DeviceGroupMembership.Ifthedevicealreadybelongstooneormoredevicegroups, thisallowsyouto viewthenamesofthedevicegroup(s)towhichitbelongs. removeitfrommembershipinone,some,orallofthem.

byrightclickingonadeviceinanInventoryviewandselecting

note ............. If multiple devices are highlighted before the right-click, then the membership list that results is a list of only those device groups in which all of the highlighted devices are members.

306

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

10.1

Creating a Dynamic Device Group

Tocreateadynamicdevicegroup,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 39: To create a dynamic device group

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,rightclickInventoryDeviceGroups. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectCreateDeviceGroups.

Figure 218: Device Group Details tab of the Create Device Group dialog

3. 4. 5. 6.

IntheDeviceGroupDetailstaboftheCreateDeviceGroupdialog,typeaNameforthenew group. TypeanoptionalDescriptionthatwillhelpyouandothersrememberhowthisgroupis constituted. Ifyouwantotheruserstobeabletoseeandusethisdevicegroup,checkthePubliccheck box. ClicktheDevicestab.

307

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 219: Devices tab of the Create Device Group dialog

7. 8. 9.

UsingtheguidanceunderCreatingandUsingDeviceGroupsonPage301,decidewhether youwantthisgrouptohaveaBasicoranAdvanceddefinition. Usingtheavailableoptions,specifytheBasicorAdvancedcriteriafordynamicgroup membership. OptionallyclickthePreviewbuttontoseethelistofdevicesthatwouldbecomecurrent membersofthenewgroup.

308

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 220: Devices Preview window

10. InspectthelistofdevicesintheDevicesPreviewwindowtoensurethatthemembership wouldbeasintended.

note ............. Although you can click to highlight one or more devices in this window, no options are available to exercise on these previewed devices.

11. ClickOKtodismisstheDevicesPreviewwindow. 12. Ifyouaresatisfiedwiththecriteria,clicktheCreatebutton. RESULT:TheDeviceGroupswindowdisplaysallcurrentlydefinedgroups,indicatingtheuser whocreatethegroup,thedateonwhichthatoccurred,andwhetherthegroupisStaticor Dynamic.

Figure 221: Device Groups window

ForanyDynamicgrouptype,whenanewdeviceispolledandmatchesthedynamiccriteria,thenew devicebecomesamemberofthedevicegroup.Whenanexistingdeviceispolledandnolonger matchesthecriteria,theexistingdeviceisdroppedfrommembershipinthedevicegroup.Whena nonmemberdeviceispolledandmatchesthecriteria,itisaddedtothedevicegroup. IntheApplicationstreeandelsewhereintheWMclientapplication,theiconisassociatedwith eachDynamicgroup.

309

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

10.2

Modifying a Dynamic Device Group

TochangethecriteriaforanexistingDynamicgroup,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 40: To modify a dynamic device group

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,selectInventoryDeviceGroups. Rightclickthedevicegroupname. SelectDeviceGroupOperationsModifyGroup.

Figure 222: Device Group Details tab of Edit Device Group dialog

4. 5. 6. 7. IntheDeviceGroupDetailstab,changetheName,Description,orPublicaccessasdesired. ClicktheDevicestab. UsingtheguidanceunderCreatingandUsingDeviceGroupsonPage301,decidewhether youwantthischangetobeaBasicoranAdvanceddefinition. Usingtheavailableoptions,modifytheBasicorAdvancedcriteriafordynamicgroup membership.

310

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 223: Devices tab of Edit Device Group dialog

8. 9.

OptionallyclickthePreviewbuttontoseethelistofdevicesthatwouldbecomecurrent membersofthechangedgroupdefinition.(SeeFigure220onPage309.) InspectthelistofdevicesintheDevicesPreviewwindowtoensurethatthemembership wouldbeasintended.

10. ClickOKtodismisstheDevicesPreviewwindow. 11. Ifthemembershipreflectsyourintent,clicktheUpdatebutton.

10.3

Creating a Static Device Group

Tocreateastaticdevicegroup,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 41: To create a static device group

1. Ifalldevicesofaparticulardevicetypeareintendedmembersofthenewdevicegroup, performthefollowingsteps: a. b. c. d. ClicktheDeviceTypecolumnintheInventoryview. IntheInventoryview,clicktohighlightthetargetdevices. Rightclickoneofthehighlighteddevices. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectAddtoDeviceGroup. TheAddtoDeviceGroupswindowopens.

311

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 224: Add to Device Groups window

e. 2.

ClicktheCreateGroupbutton. TheCreateDeviceGroupdialogopens.

IfyoudidnotbeginthisprocedurewithStep1,rightclicktheDeviceGroupstreenode underInventoryandselectCreateDeviceGroupsfromthedropdownlistofoptions. TheCreateDeviceGroupdialogopens.

312

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 225: Devices tab of Create Device Group dialog

3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

IntheDeviceGroupDetailstab,composeaNameforthegroupandaDescriptionthatwill helpyouandothersrememberwhatthisgrouprepresents. Toallowotheruserstoaccessthedevicegroup,selectthePubliccheckbox. ClicktheDevicestab. ClicktheStaticSelectionradiobutton. IfyoubeganthisprocedurewithStep1,movetheCreateDeviceGroupwindowsothatyou canseetheName(ID)entryofmostorallofthedevicesthatyouhadselectedinthe Inventoryview. ClicktheAddbutton. TheAddDevicewindowopens.

8.

313

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 226: Add Device window

9.

Ctrl+clicktohighlighttheName(ID)ofeachdeviceyouwantinthedevicegroup.

Figure 227: Devices selected to add

10. ClicktheAddbutton. AllofthosedevicesareaddedtotheDevicesSelectedblockoftheCreateDeviceGroup window.

314

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 228: Devices added to Devices Selected block

11. ClicktheCreatebutton. ThedevicegroupisaddedtotheApplicationstree,andthedevicesthatwereselected belongtothedevicegroup.(Youdonotneedtoaddtheminaseparateoperation.)

IntheApplicationstreeandelsewhereintheWMclientapplication,theiconisassociatedwith eachstaticgroup.

315

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

10.4

Adding Devices to a Static Device Group

Procedure 42: To add one or more devices to an existing device group
1. 2. IntheInventoryview,clicktohighlightthedevice(s)thatyouwanttoadd. RightclickoneoftheselecteddevicesandselectAddToDeviceGroup. TheDeviceGroupswindowopens,listingalloftheexistingdevicegroups.

Figure 229: Add to Device Groups window

3. 4.

Clicktohighlightthedevicegroup. ClicktheAddToGroupbutton.

316

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

10.5

Removing Devices from a Static Device Group

Procedure 43: To remove a device from a device group
Eitherperformthissetofsteps: 1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthespecificdevicegroup. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectDeviceGroupOperationsModifyGroup.

TheEditDeviceGroupdialogopenstoitsDeviceGroupDetailstab. 3. 4. ClicktheDevicestab. IntheDevicesSelectedblock,clicktohighlightthedevicethatyouwanttoremovefromthe devicegroup.

317

Issue 4 August 2012 5. ClicktheRemovebutton. Analertasksforconfirmation.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

6.

ConfirmtheremovalbyclickingtheYesbutton. TheDevicesSelectedblockoftheEditDeviceGroupdialogdisplaysthelistofdevicesthat remaininthedevicegroup.

orperformthissetofsteps: 1. 2. 3. IntheInventoryview,rightclickthedeviceyouwanttoremovefromthedevicegroup. Fromthedropdownlistofcommandoptions,selectDeviceGroupMembership. IntheresultingDeviceGroupMembershipForSelectedDevice(s)window,clicktohighlight thecorrectdevicegroupinthelist.

important ........... This window does not expand the device group to display its members. Ensure that the target device is in fact the one that is highlighted in the Inventory view that the Device Group Membership For Selected Device(s) window overlays (shown below).

4.

ClicktheRemoveFromGroupbutton. Analertasksforconfirmation.

5.

ConfirmtheremovalbyclickingtheYesbutton. TheDevicesSelectedblockoftheEditDeviceGroupdialogdisplaysthelistofdevicesthat remaininthedevicegroup.

318

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

10.6

Adding or Removing Columns in a Device Group Window

319

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

10.7

Using a Device Group

WhenyourightclickthenameofthedevicegroupintheApplicationstree,anInventoryview populatedwithonlythemembersofthatdevicegroupopens,andsodoesadropdownlistthat providesthefollowingoptions:

PhysicalMap.Thisoptiondisplaysanewinstanceofthephysicalmapcomprisedbythe membersofthisdevicegroup. ModifyGroup.Thisoptionallowsyoutochangethenameordescriptionofthedevice group,itsaccess(Publicornot),andallowsyoutoaddnewdevicesorremoveanymember devices. DeleteGroup.Thisoptionallowsyoutodeletetheentiredevicegroupandallofits membershipsinasingleoperation. ColumnsToView.ThisoptionopenstheSelectTableColumnswindow.SeeFigure86:Select TableColumnsdialogforinventorycustomviewonPage136. ConfigurationTemplatesApplytemplateorDeletetemplate.SeeUsingConfiguration TemplatesonPage620. ReportsConfigurationReportsRunreportorDeleteReport.Thisoptionallowsyouto executeanypreviouslycreatedreport.SeeRunningaConfigurationReportonPage333or DeletingaConfigurationReportonPage339. DetachDetach.ThisoptionallowsyoutohandlethedevicegroupInventoryasaseparate window,independentoftheviewpanelintheclient.

320

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

10.8

Removing a Device Group

Todeleteadevicegroup,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 44: To remove a device group

1. IntheApplicationstree,selectAdministrationScheduledTasks.

Figure 230: Scheduled Tasks window

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

IntheUserfieldatthetopoftheScheduledTaskswindow,usethedropdownlisttoselect yourusername. Waituntilthetablecontentsarerefreshed. Ifanylistedtaskisscheduledagainstthedevicegroupthatyouintendtodelete,editor deletethetask. IntheUserfieldatthetopoftheScheduledTaskswindow,usethedropdownlisttoselect All. Useaverticalscrolltoscanthelistforothertasksthatarescheduledagainstthedevice groupthatyouintendtodelete. Foranythatyoufind,alerttheowneraboutyourintention. IntheApplicationstree,selectInventoryDeviceGroups. IntheDeviceGroupswindow,rightclicktherowofthedevicegroupthatwanttodelete.

Figure 231: Delete Group option for a device group

10. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectDeleteGroup. RESULT:Thesystemsasksforconfirmation.

321

Issue 4 August 2012 11. Ifyouwanttoproceedwiththedeletion,clicktheYesbutton.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifyouhaveanydoubtandwanttoseethedefinitionofthegroupfirst a. b. c. d. e. clicktheNobutton. intheDeviceGroupswindow,rightclicktherowofthedevicegroup. fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectModifyGroup. examinethedefinitionofthegroup. ifyouwanttoproceedwiththedeletion 1) clicktheCancelbutton. 2) repeatSteps9through11.

322

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

11 Obtaining Device Configuration Information

Bydefault,WMcollectspolledconfigurationvaluesfrommanagedelementsonaregularbasis.This basisisoperatorconfigurable(seeAdjustingConfigurationPollingIntervalsbelow).WMalsocollects thistypeofinformationondemand(seeCreatingandUsingDeviceConfigurationReportson Page325).

11.1
11.1.1

Adjusting Configuration Polling Intervals

Disabling Configuration Polling
Configurationpollingconsumessignificantserverresourcesandburdensthenetworkwitharguably unneededoverheadtraffic.Rediscoverycapturestheattributevalues.So,separatelypollingforthem isaredundantexercise.Whereserverresourcesandnetworktrafficareoflittleconcern,suchasina smallnetwork,theinformationunderSettingIntervalsforaSmallNetworkprovidesguidancefor adjustingtheinterval(s)atwhichWMwillpollitsdevicesfortheirattributevalues. However,thegeneralrecommendationformostnetworksandstrongrecommendationforlarge networksistodisableconfigurationpollingaltogether.Todisableit,fromthemainmenu,select ToolsPollingConfigurationandunchecktheEnableConfigurationPollingcheckbox.Aserver restartisnotneededtoenforcethischange.

11.1.2

Setting Intervals for a Small Network

Fromthemainmenu,theToolsPollingConfigurationopensthePollingConfigurationdialogtoits PerformancePollingtab.Whenthisdialogopens,clicktheConfigurationPollingtab.

323

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 232: Polling Configuration dialog, Configuration Polling tab

WMinheritsthesingleglobalconfigurationpollingsetupforeverydevicetypefromthevalueofthe
GlobalConfigPollingIntervaltaginthefile.../WM/server/conf/WibbWMSConfiguration.xmlin theWMserverfilesystem.Theinitial(installed)valueofthistagis12hours.Ifyouwish,youcan

leavethisconfigurationinforcebynotusingthistab. Thistabintheclientinterfaceallowsyoutooverridethoseconfigurationsbysettingthe configurationpollingviaSNMPqueriesto occur(EnablePollingStatuschecked). notoccur(EnablePollingStatusunchecked). notoccurfordevicetypesthatyouspecify,andoccurforallotherdevicetypes. (SeeProcedure45below.) occurattheGlobalPollingIntervalforalldevicestypes. occuratintervalsthatyouset(PollingIntervalinHours)foreachdevicetypethatyou deliberatelyAddforconfigurationpollingintervalsetup,andoccurattheGlobalPolling IntervalfordevicetypesthatyoudonotAdd.(SeeProcedure45below.)

Tosetsomeoralldevicetypesthatyouspecifytobepolledforconfigurationvaluesatarate differentfromtheGlobalPollingInterval,performthefollowingsteps.

324

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 45: To set configuration polling for a specific device type

1. ClicktheAddbuttonassociatedwiththeSpecificTypeBasedPollingConfigurationblockof thePollingConfigurationdialog. TheConfigureSpecificTypePollingdialogopens.

Figure 233: Configure Specific Type Polling dialog for configuration polling

2. 3. 4.

IntheSpecificTypefield,usethedropdownlisttoselectthedevicetype. Ifyouwanttodisablepollingforthedevicetypethatyouselected,uncheckthe EnablePollingcheckbox. Ifyouwantpollingofyourselecteddevicetypetooccuratanintervalthatdiffersfromthe GlobalPollingIntervalinthepreviousdialog,typethenumberofHoursintothe PollingIntervaltextbox.

The following rules apply to resetting polling intervals:

The smallest accepted polling interval is 1 hour. The largest accepted polling interval is 24 hours (1440 minutes).

5.

Whenyouarefinishedeitherdisablingpollingorspeciallysettingthepollingintervalforthe selecteddevicetype,clicktheOKbutton. Thedevicetypewithitsnewlysetpollingstatus(disabledorspecialinterval)isdisplayedin theSpecificDeviceTypePollingConfigurationblockofthePollingConfigurationdialog.

note ............. If you attempted to apply an illegal interval, the client throws a pop-up error.

foravaluetoosmall:

foravaluetoolarge:

note ............. If you attempted to apply an interval identical to the global polling settings, the client asks for confirmation.

325

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

6.

BackinthePollingConfirmationdialog,youcanuse theRemovebuttontoreturnahighlighteddevicetypetoglobalpollingtreatment theModifybuttontochangethesettings(inadialoglikethatshowninFigure268 above,butwiththedevicetypepreselectedandnotchangeable)thatyoupreviously madebytheprocedure. theResettoDefaultsbuttontorestoreallpollingintervalsforalldevicetypesto thevalueoftheGlobalConfigPollingIntervaltaginthefile .../WM/server/conf/WibbWMSConfiguration.xmlintheWMserverfilesystem.

11.2

Creating and Using Device Configuration Reports

Reportsallowyoutoselectandviewconfigurationparametersofdiscovereddevices.Thesereports areacomplementtotheconfigurationfeaturesofWM(theConfigureDevicecommandandthe configurationtemplatefeatures).Youcanusereportstoverifytheconfigurationofadevice.Since thesereportsareaboutconfigurationparameters,theydifferfromperformancedatareports,which aredescribedelsewhereinthisguide. Someconfigurationparametersarenotconfigurable(arereadonly).Theseparametersarenotvisible whenyouareconfiguringadevice,butareavailableaspartofaconfigurationparameterreport. Theyareconfigurationparametersinthat,duringdiscoveryandrediscovery,WMpollsthemfromthe devicealongwithotherconfigurationparameters.Theyareseparateanddifferentfromperformance dataparameters,whichWMpollsduringthemorefrequentperformancedatapollingcyclesand whichretainhistoricalvalues. Commandoptionsallowyouto runanyofasetofpredefinedreports createacustomreport editaconfigurationreport savethatreportasatemplatetouseforconfiguringothercustomreports runthatreportuponcommand ultimatelyremovereportsthatnolongerservetheiroriginalpurposes.

Thesecommandoptionsareavailablethroughboththedevicespecificmenuandarightclickonthe targetdeviceintheInventoryview.

326

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

11.2.1

Importing Configuration Report Templates

Toimporttheseconfigurationreporttemplates,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 46: To import configuration report templates

1. 2. IntheApplicationsTree,expandtheConfigurationnode. RightclicktheConfigurationReportTemplatessubnode.

3. 4. 5.

SelectTemplateOperationsImportReportTemplate(s). Browsetothetargetpathwheretheconfigurationtemplatesexistwithinreachoftheclient. (Seethepathquotedabove,ifyouarebrowsingintheserverfilesystem.) Use Ctrl+clicktoindividuallyselectasetoftemplates. Shift+clicktoindividuallyselectthefirstandlastofasetoftemplatesthatare sequentiallydisplayedinthebrowser,thenCtrl+clicktosubtractanyfrominbetween. Clicktoselectasingletemplate.

6.

Afteryouhavehighlighted(selected)allofthedesiredtemplatefiles,clicktheOpenbutton.

AlloftheimportedfileswillbeavailabletoanyuserfromtheConfigurationReportTemplatesdialog uponrightclickofanelementandselectionofReportsConfigurationReportsRunReportfrom thedropdownlistofcommandoptions.

11.2.2

Accessing a Predefined Report on Configured Values

Foreachsupporteddevice,WMincludesasetofpredefinedtemplatesthatdisplaythecurrentvalues (ondemand)oftheconfigurableparametersintheselectedelements.TheInventoryviewprovides accessforrunningthesepreconfiguredreports.

Procedure 47: To access a configuration report template

1. 2. RightclicktoselecttheelementfromanInventoryview. SelectReportsConfigurationReportsRunReportfromtheresultingdropdownlistof options.

327

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TheExecuteConfigurationReportTemplatepanelopensintherightframe,listingalloftheimported reportsforthisdevicetype.

Figure 234: Execute Configuration Report Template panel

Imported,inthiscontext,meansallofthosexmltemplatesthatweredeliberatelycopiedintothe userinterfacebytheoperatorintheutilityoftheclientapplication.Sincetheimportrequiresa browseofthefilesystemontheclientdevice,thetemplatesmustbeaccessibletobrowsinginoneof thefollowingways: Theclientdeviceislocaltotheserverdevice.Inthiscase,thetemplatesareavailableat

...Cambium/WM/server/Default Templates/Report Templates/(thepathisinthe

serverfilesystem). Theclientdeviceisremotefromtheserverdevice,buteither anetworkconnection,authenticatedwhererequired,existsbetweentheclientandthe serverfilesystem,andtheoperatorusesthatconnectiontobrowseinit. theoperatorhascopiedthetemplatefilesfromtheremotepathquotedabovetoa pathintheclientfilesystemandbrowsestothislocalpath.

Nosettingexistsforautomaticallyimportingthepredefinedtemplatesthatsupportonlythedevice typespresentinyournetworkorthelargergroupthatsupportallpossibledevicetypes. Toimporttheseconfigurationreporttemplates,seeImportingConfigurationReportTemplateon Page326.

11.2.3

Creating a Configuration Report

Youcancreateacustomreportbyusingatemplatetoincludethevariousdeviceconfiguration parameterswhosevaluesyouwanttobeabletoview.Thereportcreationprocessbeginswith selectingoneormoredevices.Sinceyoucanlaterrunthereportagainstanyotherdevice(s),user defineddevicegroup,oralldevicesofacertaindevicetype 5,theindividualdevicethatyouhave selectedwhenyoulaunchtheconfigurationreportcreationutilityisunimportant.

ThiswouldinvolvesortingtheInventoryviewbytheDeviceTypecolumn,andthenusingShift+Clickonthefirstandlastlisted amongthatparticulardevicegroup,thenrightclickingononeoftheselecteddevicesandselecting ConfigurationReportsRunReport.

328

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Thedevicetypeisimportant,sincethesetofparametersthatyoucanchoosefrominbuildingthe reportislimitedtothosethatthedevicetypeoftheselecteddevicesupports.Forthisreason,a reportcanberunagainstonlydevicesthathavethesamedevicetypethatthereportwascreated against.

Procedure 48: To create a configuration report

1. Invoketheconfigurationreportcreationutilityineitherofthefollowingways. FromtheInventoryasfollows: a) IntheInventory,rightclickonadeviceofthetargettype. b) Fromtheresultingdropdownlistofoptions,select ReportsConfigurationReportsCreateReport. TheCreateConfigurationReportTemplatedialogopens,listingalloftheavailable deviceconfigurationparametersthatWMsupportsforthetargetdevicetype,each selectablewithinanexpandableandcontractiblecategoryorasanindividual parameter.

Figure 235: Create Configuration Report Template dialog launched from Inventory

FromtheApplicationstreeasfollows: a) IntheInventory,clicktohighlightadeviceofthetargettype. b) IntheApplicationstree,clicktoexpandtheConfigurationnode.

329

Issue 4 August 2012 c)

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

RightclicktheConfigurationReportTemplatessubnode. TheConfigurationReportTemplatespanelopens,listingallpreviouslyimportedand allpreviouslycreatedtemplates.Thislistisfilteredonthebasisofagenttype.

d) Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,select TemplateOperationsCreateReportTemplate. TheCreateConfigurationReportTemplatedialogopenswithDeviceTypeinitially settothehighestalphasortdevicetype.Theassociateddownarrowopensalistof allselectableagents(devicetypes).

Figure 236: Create Configuration Report Template dialog launched from Applications tree

e) UsethedownarrowtoselectthetargetDeviceType. Thedialogpopulateswithalloftheavailabledeviceconfigurationparametersthat WMsupportsforthetargetdevicetype,eachselectablewithinanexpandableand contractiblecategoryorasanindividualparameter. 2. Forconvenience,optionallyusetheJumpTodropdownlisttoselectoneconfigurable parameter. Thebranchoftheconfigurableattributehierarchyexpands. Expandadditionalportionsasyouwish.

3.

330

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4. 5. 6.

ComposeaTemplatenamethatwillhelpyoudistinguishthisreporttemplateinthefuture. ComposeaTemplatedescriptionthatsummarizesthepurposeofthereport. IntheIncludecolumn,select(checkthecheckboxof)eachparameterand/orcategoryof parametersthatyouwantincludedinthereport.

note ............. In the example shown in Figure 235 above, all of the parameters in the Maximum Information Rate category are automatically selected because Maximum Information Rate is selected. important ........... Although you can later choose the devices to run the report against and run the report multiple times as you select different sets of devices, you will not be able to change what fields the report includes. To see a different set of fields, you must create a different new report. Thus, it is important to ensure that you have selected all of the desired fields before you click the Create button.

7.

ClicktheCreatebutton. Thesystemconfirmsthatthereporthasbeencreated.

Figure 237: Success for a create report

8.

ClickYes. TheSelectConfigurationReportDatawindowopens.

Figure 238: Select Configuration Report Data window

9.

IfyouwantWMtoquerythevaluesfromthedatabase,leaveDatabaseselectedfor Sourcedatafrom. IfyouwantWMtopollthevaluesfromthedevice(s)againstwhichthereportruns,select Device.

10. ClicktheRunReportbutton.

331

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 239: Configuration Report View window

Somedelaymayoccur,duringwhichWMobtainsthevalues,andthenthesystemopens aConfigurationReportViewwindow,whichincludes theparametersthatyouselectedforthereportandthevaluesofthoseparametersfor thedevice(s)againstwhichyoucreatedthereport. optionstochangethesource(toDatabaseorDeviceforExecutethisreportfrom) and/orcollectthedataforadifferentsetofdevices(AddDevices),incaseyouwantto ReRunReport. optionstoprocessthedataforviewing: anExportutilitytosendthecurrentformatoftheparametersandvaluesfromthe reporttoacommaseparatedvalues(.csv)file.

aPrintutilitytosendonlythedatathroughaprintdriverofyourchoice.

aDetailsview,whichisespeciallyusefulwherethereportincludesmanycolumns, sinceit formatsthedatasuchthatinformationhiddenbytheconstraintsofthetableview isrevealed.

332

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 240: Execute Report window

providesanExportutilitytosendthedetailsformattoaCSVfile.

providesaPrintutilitytosentthedetailsformatthroughaprintdriverofyour choice.

333

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

11.2.4

Running a Configuration Report

Torunanelementconfigurationreportfromthelatestdataavailable,eitherpolledfromthe device(s)atthemomentwhenyourunthereportorqueriedfromthedatabase(updatedinthelast previousdiscovery 6orconfigurationpolling 7),performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 49: To run a configuration report

1. IntheInventoryview,selectalldevicesthatyouwantincludedinthereport.
note ............. Although more devices of more than one specific type are selectable, and selecting them would return a list of reports that together apply to all of them, the report selection window will allow you to select only one report to execute.

TospecifymorethanonedevicebeforeyoulaunchRunReport,useanyofthefollowing means: selectacontiguoussetofrowsbyholdingdowntheShiftkeyandclickingonthefirst andlastrowtobedeleted.

Shift

selectmultipleindividualrowsbyholdingdowntheCtrlkeyandclickingoneachof them.

Ctrl

2. 3. intheApplicationstree,expandDeviceGroupsandrightclickonadevicegroup. Rightclickononeoftheselecteddevices. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectReportsConfigurationReportsRunReport. ThesystemopensanExecuteReportwindow,whichlistsallcurrentlydefinedreports.

6 7

Initialdiscovery(seeConfiguringInitialDiscoveryonPage406)orrediscovery(seeSchedulingRediscoveryonPage408). SeeAdjustingConfigurationPollingIntervalsonPage323.

334

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 241: Execute Configuration Report window

4. 5. 6.

Inthelist,clicktohighlightthedesiredtypeofreport. Optionally,switchthesourceofreportdata(toquerytheDatabaseorpolltheDevice). Tooptionallychangethesetofdevicesforwhichvalueswillberetrieved,performthe followingsteps: a. ClicktheAddDevicesbutton. TheAddDevicesdialogopens.

b.

ToaddthemembersofaDeviceGroup,performthefollowingsteps: 1) ClicktheLoadFromGroupbutton. TheDeviceGroupswindowopensandlistsallofthecurrentlydefinedDevice Groups. 2) Scrollandclick,Ctrl+click,orShift+clicktohighlighttherow(s)oftheoneormore desiredDeviceGroupNames.

335

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

3) ClicktheLoadbutton. TheindividualdevicesthataremembersoftheselectedDeviceGroupsareloaded intotheDevicesSelectedblockoftheAddDevicesdialog. c. TospecifyindividualdevicesbytheirName(ID)s,performthefollowingsteps: 1) ClicktheAddbutton. TheAddDevicewindowopens,listingallofthecurrentlymanageddevices. 2) Scrollandclick,Ctrl+click,orShift+clicktohighlighttherow(s)oftheoneormore desiredindividualdevices. 3) ClicktheAddbutton. TheselecteddevicesareaddedintotheDevicesSelectedblockoftheAddDevices dialog. 7. 8. ClickOK. BackintheExecuteConfigurationReportwindow,clicktheExecutebutton. WMrunsthereportandopenstheConfigurationReportViewwindow.

Forthemeaningandusageoftheoptionsinthiswindow,seeProcedure48:Tocreatea configurationreport,wherethesearealreadydescribedaroundFigure239onPage331.
note ............. If the agent in any device from an Add Devices operation does not support one or more fo the OIDs being polled for the report data, then the client returns the following type of error.

9.

Whenyouarefinished,dismisstheExecuteReportwindow.

11.2.5

Finding a Configuration Report Template

Theclientincludesautilityforquicklyfindingaconfigurationreporttemplatebasedonstringsthat constituteaportionofortheentiretemplatename,templatedescription,orthedevicetypethatthe templatesupports.

336

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 50: To find a configuration report template

1. IntheApplicationstree,clickonConfigurationConfigurationReportTemplates.This opensaConfigurationReportTemplatesviewintherightpanel,listingallthatarecurrently defined. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditSearch. AspecialSearchwindowopenstoconfigureformatchesagainstanyofthetabulardatathat WMisdisplayingintheConfigurationReportTemplateswindow,includingthatwhichis viewableonlybyscrolling.

2.

Figure 242: Search window for configuration report template criteria

TheoperationofthiswindowisconsistentwithhowtheseveralotherSearchwindowsintheclient operate.Foranexample,seeSearchonPage125.Keepinmindthatthescopeofthesearchisthe contentsofthetable,notthecontentsofallconfigurationreporttemplatefiles(notattributes).

11.2.6

Editing a Configuration Report Template

Tochangethesetofparametersforwhichaconfigurationreportwillretrievevalues,performthe followingsteps.

Procedure 51: To edit a configuration report

1. 2. IntheInventory,rightclickonadevice. Fromthelistofdropdownoptions,selectReportsConfigurationReportsEditReport. TheclientopenstheExecuteConfigurationReportwindowtoatableviewoftheavailable reporttemplates.

337

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 243: Edit Configuration Report Template window

3. 4.

Clicktohighlightthereportthatyouwanttoedit. ClickOK. TheclientreopenstheExecuteConfigurationReportwindowtoatableviewofthefulllistof parameterswhosevaluescanberetrievedforadeviceofthetypethatyourightclicked.

note ............. You cannot change the Template name, but you can change the Template description to better reflect the purpose that you intend for the template after editing it. If you want to make changes that together would render the original name confusing or inappropriate, create a new template instead of editing this one.

5.

ChecktheIncludeboxforeachparameteryouwanttoaddtothetemplateanduncheckit foreachthatyouwanttoremove. TheResetbuttonremovesallchecksfromthecheckboxesintheIncludecolumn. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththesetofcheckedparameters,clicktheSavebutton. Theclientconfirmsthatthechangesaresaved.

6.

338

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.

Tooptionallyruntheeditedreport,seeRunningaConfigurationReportbelow.

11.2.7

Exporting a Configuration Report Template

Itispossibletoexportatemplatethatyoucreatedonthissystemtoanotherlocation.Youcanuse thisfunctiontoeitherstoreabackupcopyinasafefolderorsharewithanotherWMsystem.

Procedure 52: To export a single configuration report template

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,clickonConfigurationConfigurationReportTemplates. Thefulllistofallexistingtemplatesopensintheviewpanel. Intheviewpanel,rightclickonthetemplatethatyouwanttoexportandselect Exporttemplate. TheSelectTemplateExportFolderwindowopens. Browsetoanddoubleclickonthedestinationfolder. ClicktheExportToFolderbutton.

3. 4.

11.2.8

Exporting All Configuration Report Templates

Itispossibletoexportalltemplatesthatyoucreatedonthissystemtoanotherlocationinasingle operation.Youcanusethisfunctiontoeitherstorebackupcopiesinasafefolderorsharewith anotherWMsystem.

Procedure 53: To export all configuration report templates

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,rightclickonConfigurationConfigurationReportTemplates. ThisopentheReportsviewintheviewframe,wherealldefinedreportsarelisted. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,select TemplateOperationsExportAllReportTemplate(s). TheSelectTemplateExportFolderwindowopens. Browsetoanddoubleclickonthefolderwhereyouwanttostorethereporttemplates. ClicktheExportToFolderbutton.

3. 4.

339

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

11.2.9

Deleting a Configuration Report

Toremoveareportthatnolongerserversitsoriginalpurpose,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 54: To delete a configuration report

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,clickonadeviceofthetypetowhichthetargetreportapplies. Fromthedropdownlistofcommandoptions,select ReportsConfigurationReportsDeleteReport. TheDeleteConfigurationReportTemplatewindowopens,listingallcurrentlydefined reports.

Figure 244: Delete Report window

3. 4.

Selectthereporttemplatethatyouwanttodelete. Ifyouwanttoreviewthecontentsofthereporttemplatebeforedeletingit,clickView. TheDeleteReportwindowdisplaysaviewofthereportcontents.

340

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 245: Delete Report window, reports contents

5.

Whenyouhaveconfirmedthetargetreportistheonetobedeleted,clickDelete. Thesystemreturnsawarningmessage:

6.

ClickYestoconfirmthedeletion.

341

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

11.3

Using Configuration Summary Reports

WMincludesvariousreportsthatareeachpreconfiguredtodelivercurrentvaluesofimportantsets ofconfigurationattributesinalldevicesofaparticularcategory.Thetypesandscopesofthese reportsareasfollows.

Table 14: Configuration Summary reports

System Report Name APQOSSummary Attribute Values Reported DeviceID,DeviceName UplinkSustainedRate DownlinkSustainedRate,UplinkBurstAllocation, , DownlinkBurstAllocation,DownlinkRate, roadcastDownlinkCIR B DeviceID,DeviceName Enabled LocalSettingEnabled,AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,DynamicLearning,Ageing , Timeout,ManagementVID Index,ServiceClassName,MIR,MinReservedRate,ToleratedJitter,MaxLatency,UL ScheduleType,DataDeliveryType,UnsolicitedGrantInterval,UnsolicitedPollInterval SMMAC,SFIndex,Direction,QoSProfileID,ClassificationRuleID SFID,CID,BCID Type,State, irection,Enabled,Scheduling MaxRate(bps),ARQEnable, D , HARQEnable,Rules DeviceID,DeviceName Enabled,LocalSettingEnabled,AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,DynamicLearning,Ageing Timeout,ManagementVID DeviceID,DeviceName QueueMappingBridge,QueueMappingGARP,QueueMappingTableEntryCount , LocalPacketFiltering DeviceID,DeviceName Enabled ManagementPriority AllowOnlyTaggedFrames, anagementVID , , M DeviceID,DeviceName UplinkSustainedRate DownlinkSustainedRate, plinkBurstAllocation , U , DownlinkBurstAllocation,BroadcastMIR,HighPriorityChannelEnabled HighPriority , UplinkCIR,HighPriorityDownlinkCIR,LowPriorityUplinkCIR,LowPriorityDownlink CIR DeviceID,DeviceName AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,DynamicLearning,AgeingTimeout,ManagementVID,SM ManagementPassthroughVID,UntaggedIngressVID

APVLANConfiguration Summary PMP320APQOS Summary PMP320APServiceFlow Summary PMP320CPEService FlowSummary PMPBackhaulVLAN ConfigurationSummary PTP800Bridge ConfigurationSummary PTPVLANConfiguration Summary

SMQOSSummary

SMVLANConfiguration Summary

Thesereportsareavailableondemandaspreconfigured(asdescribedinthenextsection).The preconfiguredversionsandslimmerversionsofthem(describedunderCustomizingaConfiguration SummaryReportonPage345)arealsoavailablethroughscheduledtasks.SeeSchedulingaOneTime orPeriodicTaskonPage649.

342

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Bydefault,configurationsummaryreportsareaccessibletoeveryuser.Thisaccesscontinuesunless theadministratorremovesthepermissionforaspecificuser.Asshownbelowinaportionofthe Permissionstreehierarchy,permissionsforconfigurationsummaryreportsareindividuallyassignable perreportaswellascategoricallyassignable.

note ............. Access to these reports require that they are imported into a client that is networked to the WM server file system.

343

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

11.3.1

Using a Configuration Summary Report as Preconfigured

Toaccessanyofthesereports,selectSystemReportsfromtheApplicationstree.Thisopensthe SystemReportsviewintheviewpanel(Figure246).

Figure 246: System Reports view

Toopenthedesiredreport,eitherdoubleclickintheroworrightclickinitandselect ExecuteReport.Whenyoudo,thereportopensasHTMLcontent.

344

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 247: SM QOS Summary

YoucanreshapetheHTMLwindow,butnotmanuallyresizeitscolumnsorsortbytheircontent. However,youcanexporttheentirereportasCSVforuseinanotherapplicationorPrinttheentire reportonanynetworkedprinter. RunningadevicesummaryreportisaschedulabletaskintheWMclient.SeeSchedulingaOneTime orPeriodicTaskonPage649. Assoonasyoulaunchaconfigurationsummaryreport,WMautomaticallysavesitintoarepository thatcontainsinlistfromallpreviouslylaunchedreportsthathavenotbeendeletedfromthelist.You canaccessthisrepositorybyselectingSystemReportsReportResultsfromtheApplicationsTree. Thislistissortablebyanyofitscolumns: ResultFileName(intheformatReportName_SequentiallyAssignedReportNumber,sothat withineachalphasortofreportname,theorderischronological) User(wholaunchedthereport) Time(dateandtime) ReportName ReportType

SeeFigure162onPage228.Sincethereportsinthelistarenotsearchable,andsincethelistof storedreportstendstogrowovertime,sortingisuseful.Secondarysortingisachievablebysorting thesecondarysortcolumnfirst,thentheprimarysortcolumn. ToviewanindividualreportintheReportResultsview,rightclickonthetargetreportandselect ViewReport.Thisopensthereportintheexactformatandwindowsizethatthereportopenedin whenyouoriginallylaunchedit.

11.3.2

Customizing a Configuration Summary Report

Aspreconfigured,eachconfigurationsummaryreportrunsonalldevicesofacategory.Youcan customizeaconfigurationsummaryreporttorunonasubsetofthosedevicesifyousetthereportas ascheduledtaskandfilterthattaskfordevicesandoptionallyfortheirconfigurationand performancevalues.SeeTable86:Configurabletaskprerequisites,requirements,andoptionson Page650.

345

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

12 Monitoring Faults
AneventisanoccurrencethatisgeneratedduetoadevicetraporinternalWMoperationsand isloggedinahistoricaldatabase.Eventscanindicateprogressofbackgroundprocessessuchas discoveryorproblemsthatariseinWMorinamanageddevice.Mosteventsareassociatedwith aparticularmanageddevice,whichtheeventreferstoastheFailureObject,butsomearegeneric. EventsareloggedanddocumentedinthehistoricalviewtitledNetworkEvents. AnalarmisgeneratedwhenaneventwithStatus(severity)ofCritical,Major,Minor,orWarning occurs.Analarmhasthesameseverityastheeventthatgeneratedit.Analarmpersistsuntilitis clearedandthensubsequentlyispurgedfromthedatabase.Analarmthatisnotclearedremainsin thedatabaseandcontinuestobelistedinthealarmsviewunlessitisindividuallydeletedbyauser. Analarmsisclearedwhenaneweventoccursthathasboth thesamefailureobjectasthealarm astatusvalueclear.

Analarmscanalsobeclearedmanuallybytheoperator. TheAlarmClearingPolicyautomaticallyclearsaselectgroupofalarmsthathaveanAlarmClearvalue of3afteraconfigurableagingperiod,whosedefaultissevendays.(SeeAdministeringaPolicyon Page605.)Bydefault,clearedalarmsaredeletedafter24hours.Thisisconfigurableintheserverfile system. Eventsaredeletedfromthedatabasebyaneventagingpolicyafteraconfiguredperiod.Thedeletion periodissetusingtheCLEAN_EVENT_INTERVALparameterfortheEventMgrprocess,specifiedin NmsProcessesBE.conffileintheWMserver.Thedefaultissevendays.Eventsaredeleted regardlessoftheirstatusaftertheagingperiod.Onlyalarmsarekept,duetotheirstatusasexplained inthepreviousparagraph. Thestatusofadevicematchestheseverityofitsmostseverealarm.TheAlarmsviewlistsall selectableactive(notyetcleared)alarms.Thus,theAlarmsviewiscurrent,whereastheNetwork Eventsviewishistorical.Bothviewsaredynamicupdatedasnewevents/alarmsaregenerated. Eventsparticulartodiscoveryprocessesareloggedanddocumentedinthehistoricalviewtitled DiscoveryEvents.SeeViewingAllEventsRelatedtoDiscoveryonPage356.

12.1

Working with Events

TheNetworkEventsviewcanpresenteventsineitheroftwoways: onlythoseeventsthatareassociatedwithaspecificdevice. allevents,includingdeviceeventsforalldevices.

347

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

12.1.1

Viewing All Events for a Specific Device

YoucanlaunchtheNetworkEventsviewtoincludeonlyeventsthatareassociatedwithaspecific deviceineitherofthefollowingways: InaInventoryview,rightclickthetargetdeviceandselectGoToEventsfromthedrop downlistofoptions. Inthephysicalmap,clickthetargetdevice,clicktheManagetab,andthenclickthe GotoEventslinkinthattab.

Whileviewingtheeventsofaspecificdevice,toswitchtoviewingalleventsinthesystem,clickthe ShowAllbuttonintheupperrightcorneroftheviewframe.Toviewthedetailsoralarmsthatare associatedwithanindividualevent,seeViewingEventDetailsonPage352.

Figure 248: Network Events view, one device (Source)

348

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

12.1.2

Viewing All Events in the System

Toviewalleventsthathavebeengeneratedinthesystemandnotyetcleared,select FaultManagementNetworkEventsfromtheApplicationstree.TheunfilteredNetworkEvents viewdisplaysintheviewframe.

Figure 249: Network Events view, all Sources

Whileviewingthefullsetofevents,youcanclickonanycolumnheadingtosortorreversesortthe eventsbythedatainthatcolumn.Typicaltableviewoperationsapplytothisview.Toviewthe detailsoralarmsthatareassociatedwithanindividualevent,seeViewingEventDetailsonPage352.

349

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

12.1.3

Interpreting Event Messages

ThefollowingtablelistsvariousdefaultmessagesgeneratedbyWM(withoutanyconfiguration) alongwiththeirseveritiesandtheirsignificance.

Table 15: Preconfigured event messages and their severities

Message Networkaddedtodatabase NodeAddedtoDatabase InterfaceAddedtoDatabase PortObjectAddedtoDatabase PortAddedindisablestate Atleastonenodeinthis networkisinfailurestate Nonodesfailedinthisnetwork Thisprobablymeansoneor moreinterfaceshavefailed StatusPollfailed Nofailuresinthisnode Interfaceclear Signifies NetworkAddition NodeAddition InterfaceAddition PortAddition PortFailure NetworkFailure NetworkClear StatusPollfailed(NodeFailure) Severity Info Info Info Info Major Major Clear Major

StatusPollfailed(InterfaceFailure) Major StatusPollClear(NodeClear) StatusPollClear(InterfaceClear) Clear Clear

Discovery Events
DiscoveryeventmessagesareavailableintheNetworkEventsviewamongtheothernetworkevent messages.TheDiscoverymoduleinWMmaygenerateanyofthefollowingevents.

Table 16: General discovery events

Event Discoverystarted attribute(s)werenotread duetotimeouterror discoveryhasbegunforthedevice. meansthatSNMPGETtimeoutsresultedinsomeconfigurationattributesnot beingreadduringdiscovery.Thiscouldmeanthatcommunicationwiththedevice isnotconsistent,orthedevicesagentisnotrespondingconsistently,someOIDs beingrequestedarenotsupportedbythedevice,etc. indicatesthatafterreadingattributesfailedduetotimeouterror(seeotherevent above),alaterattempttoreadtheattributessucceeded,andallconfiguration datahasbeenreadforthedevice. Meaning

CLEARallattributesthat timedoutwereread successfully

350

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Meaning meansthatanodewasinitiallydiscoveredbutthendiscardedduetothefactthat thenodelimitfortheWMlicenseinusewasalreadyreached.Toremedythe situation,onecanobtainalicensewithahighernodecountandthenrediscover. onlyseenduringrediscoveryofanalreadydiscovereddeviceindicatesthatthe configurationoftherediscovereddevicedoesnotmatchwhatthedatabase showedasbeingtheconfigurationpriortorediscovery.Generallythiswillhappen whentheconfigurationofthedeviceischangedoutsideofWM,e.g.viathe deviceURL. onlyduringinitialdiscovery,indicatesthataconfigurationtemplatewasapplied asaprofileuponcompletionofdiscovery.ThishappensonlywhenWMhasbeen explicitlysetuptoapplyatemplateforaspecificdevicetypeuponinitial discovery. thecheckforanemptysysNameproperty(devicename)duringdiscoveryhas passed. thecheckforasysNameproperty(devicename)that'salreadyinusehaspassed. thecheckforasysNameproperty(devicename)thathasspecialcharactersinit hasfoundnone. thesysNamewaschangedbecauseitisaduplicateofonealreadyinuse. Duplicatesgetasuffixaddedtothemtomakethemunique.TomakethesysName onthedevicematchthealterednameWMhasstored,itisnecessarytouseeither theconfigurationfeatureinWMorthedevice'sownmanagementURLtochange thesysNameonthedevice. ThesysNamemustbeuniqueinWM.Whenitisnotunique,WMassignsa provisionalsysNamethatisstoredinonlyWM,notalsointhedevice.Whenever WMrediscoversorrefreshestheconfigurationforthedevicethathasa provisionalsysName,itwillthrowthiserroragain,sincetheresponsefromthe devicewillnotmatchit.Tosuppressthiserror,theoperatormustusethedirect managementinterfaceofthedevicetowritethisprovisional,oranyotherunique, sysNameintothedevice.

Event notaddedsincethe AdventNetlicenselimitis exceeded Configurationdifferences detectedduring rediscovery

appliedprofile

NoemptysysName NoduplicatesysName Nospecialcharactersin sysName ChangedsysNameof <devicename>from<old sysName>to<new sysName>.Pleaseupdate thedeviceaccordingly.

Removedspecial charactersfromsysName of<macaddress>.Please updatethedevice accordingly. ChangedsysNameof <devicename>to<new sysName>.Pleaseupdate thedeviceaccordingly.

thesysNamewaschangedduetospecialcharacters,whichhavebeenremoved. TomakethesysNameonthedevicematchthealterednameWMhasstored,itis necessarytouseeithertheconfigurationfeatureinWMorthedevice'sown managementURLtochangethesysNameonthedevice. thismeansthatthesysNamepropertywaschangedduetohavingbeennull (empty).TomakethesysNameonthedevicematchthealterednameWMhas stored,itisnecessarytouseeithertheconfigurationfeatureinWMorthe device'sownmanagementURLtochangethesysNameonthedevice.

351

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 17: Multi-agent discovery events

Event Completediscovery ofmultiagent device Incomplete discoveryofmulti agentdevice Meaning allNEshavebeensuccessfullyresolved(linked)intoamultiagentdevice.Indicates successfulcompletionofmultiagentdiscoveryforonemultiagentdeviceandallofits componentNEs. generatedforanNEwhenitisproperlypartofamultiagentdevice,butwasnot successfullyresolvedintoamultiagentdeviceduringdiscovery.Thiseventwillalways begeneratedatleastonceforeachmultiagentdeviceintheordinarycourseofevents, sinceoneagentisalwaysdiscoveredbeforetheothers,andthereforehasnowayto resolveintoacombinedmultiagentdevice.Asaresultofthisevent,whichisaMajor alarm,theNEwillgointoMajorstatus,butthatstatusshouldclearonceother componentsofthemultiagentdevicearediscoveredandtheyareallresolvedintoa multiagentdevice.

Table 18: Single-agent discovery event

Event Discoveryfinished Meaning discoveryhasbeensuccessfullycompletedforasingleagentdevice.

Inadditiontotheseeventmessages,certainmorespecificdiscoveryrelatedeventsarelistedinthe DiscoveryEventsview.SeeViewingAllEventsRelatedtoDiscoveryonPage356.

CSV File Import Events

WMmaygeneratethefollowingeventforanimportofageolocationfile.

Table 19: File import event

Event modifiedthelocationinformation fordevice Meaning generatedduringaCSVlocationfileimport,indicatingthatthelocationof adevicewaschangedbytheimport.

12.1.4

Viewing Event Details

Eventdetailsprovideinformationoneachofthepropertiesofanevent.

Procedure 55: To view event details

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementNetworkEvents. Rightclicktohighlighttherowthatcontainstheeventwhosedetailsyouwanttoview. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectEventDetails. AnEventDetailswindowopens.

352

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 250: Event Details window

ThefieldofthiswindowaredescribedinTable20.

Table 20: Event details

Property Index Severity Message Category Domain Network Node FailureObject Description SpecifiesauniqueIDcreatedforeachoftheeventsthataregenerated. Specifiestheseverityoftheevent,suchasCritical,Major,Minor,Clear,Warning,Info. Specifiesthemessageassociatedwiththeevent. Specifiesthecategorytowhichtheeventbelongs.Example:Topology. Specifiesthedomainspecificinformationwhichisbasedonphysicallocation,functional categorization,orlogicalcategorizationofthesourceoftheevent. Specifiesthenetworktowhichtheeventbelongsto. Specifiesthenodetowhichtheeventbelongsto.Forexample,iftheeventisforaninterface, thenodevalueisspecifiedasinterfaceparentnode. Specifiesthespecificentity(inthesource)thathasfailedandisprimarilyresponsibleforthe event.SeeFailureObjectonPage354.

353

Issue 4 August 2012 Property Source HelpURL Date/Time GroupName AlarmClear SourceIP Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Specifiestheexactsource(network,nodename,interface)oftheevent. SpecifiestheURLforlocatingthehelpdocumentationonclickingtheHelpbuttoninthesame dialogbox. Specifiesthedateandtimewhentheeventwasgenerated. Specifiesthegroupnametowhichtheeventbelongs. Ifthevalueis3,thenthisalarmiseligibletobeclearedbytheAlarmClearingPolicy.Anyother valueisignored. SpecifiestheIPaddressoftheelementthatgeneratedtheevent.

Failure Object
Thefailureobjectofaneventisacorrelationfieldthatindicatesthateventsarerelated.Mostoften, thefailureobjectidentifiesanetworkelementandincludesalabelthatindicatesthekindofevent. Thisprovideslinkagebetweeneventsforthesamenetworkelementandeventsforthesame problem. Afailureobjectcontainsbutisnotlimitedtotheidentifier(WMname)ofthenetworkelementthat wasaffectedbytheevent,exceptinthecaseofaneventthatistriggeredbeforetheelementisfully discovered.Inthiscase,thefailureobjectmaycontainastringfromanotherfield,afieldwhose contentsWMwasabletoreadbeforethediscoveryhalted.Yetanotherstringissometimes prependedorappendedtotheothercontentsofafailureobject.Forexample,iftheeventoccurred duringdiscoveryofanodewhoseIPaddressis10.24.1.1,thenthefailureobjectmaybeDisc 10.24.1.1. Afailureobjectcorrelatesevents,andthisresultsinWMsuppressingeventstoavoidmultiplecopies forthesameeventinthesamenetworkelement.Ifyoucreateafailureobjectforatrapparser, selectavalueunusedbyotherevents,sothattheircleareventsandalarmsdonotaffecthowthe incomingtrapishandled.YoucanviewfailureobjectsineithertheNetworkEventsvieworthe Alarmsview.Youcanalsoseeit,amongotherfields,whenyourightclickonaneventoralarmand selectDetailsfromthedropdownlistofoptions. Beawarethatacleareventwillcleartheassociatedalarmonthenetworkelement,meaningthe alarmthatbearsthesamefailureobject.

354

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

12.1.5

Finding an Event
Thesearchoptionisusefulwhenyouarelookingforeventsassociatedwithaparticularnetwork element.Thissearchoperationisperformedinthedatabaseandisnotrestrictedtoonlytheevents thatarecurrentlylistedintheNetworkEventsview.Searchablecriteriaareseverity,source(Name (IDofthedevice),date,message,andIPaddressofthedevice.

Procedure 56: To find an event

1. 2. OpentheEventViewer. Performanyofthefollowing: 3. FromEditmenu,selectSearch. Fromthetoolbar,click PressCtrl+F. Findbutton.

TheSearchdialogboxisdisplayed.

Figure 251: Search window for event criteria

4.

Ifyouwanttoperformasearchoperationthatsatisfiesanyofthematchingcriteriathatyou specify,uncheckMatchAlloftheAboveCriteria.Ifyouneedallthematchingcriteriatobe satisfied,leaveMatchAlloftheAboveCriteriachecked. Toaddcriteria,clicktheMorebutton. Foreachcriterion,clickthedownarrowassociatedwithSeverityandselectfromamongthe followingproperties: Severity Source Date Message IPAddress

5. 6.

7.

Foreachcriterion,typeasearchexpressionintothetextbox.

355

Issue 4 August 2012 8. 9.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Foreachofthesetextentries,clickthedownarrowassociatedwithstartswith. Whenyouarefinishedsettingthecriteriaforthesearch,clicktheSearchbuttontolaunchit. TheNetworkEventsviewisfilteredtoonlythosethatsatisfythesearchcriteria.

12.1.6

Viewing Related Alarms

SinceFailureObjectisnotoneofthepropertiesthattheSearchutilitysupports,thisprocedureis neededforfindingalleventsthathavethesameFailureObject.Thisisthebestwaytodetermine whatalarmwasclearedbyaclearevent,orwhatcleareventclearedanalarm.

Procedure 57: To view other events that have the same Failure Object
1. 2. 3. OpentheNetworkEventsview. Clickarowwherebyyouselectanevent. Performanyofthefollowingprocedures. 4. 5. 6. 7. FromViewmenu,chooseAlarms. RightclicktherowandchooseAlarms. PressCtrl+L.

TheAlarmsviewopenswithonlythealarmsthathavethesameFailureObjectasthe selectedeventdoes. Rightclickononeofthelistedalarms. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectEvents. TheNetworkEventsviewopenswithalleventsthathavethesameFailureObjectasthe alarmdoes.

12.1.7

Viewing All Events Related to Discovery

TheNetworkEventsnodeoftheApplicationstreeopenaviewofallnetworkevents,onlysomeof whicharerelatedtodiscovery,andtheseeventsaregeneralizedaslistedinthefollowingtables underthesectionInterpretingEventMessagesonPage350.Typically,themessagesassociatedwith theseeventsprovideinformationabouttheresultsofdiscoveryattemptsbutnotaboutthecausesof faileddiscoveryevents: Table16:GeneraldiscoveryeventsonPage350 Table17:MultiagentdiscoveryeventsonPage352 Table18:SingleagentdiscoveryeventonPage352

BeneaththeNetworkEventsnode,WMprovidesthenodeDiscoveryEvents,whichopensaviewof onlyeventsthatarerelatedtodiscoveryattempts.AnexampleofthisviewisshowninFigure252.

356

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 252: Discovery Events view

Throughoutnormaloperations,thisviewincludes eventsthatareregularlythrowntothediscoveryLogs.txtfile(andtotheDiscoveryLog panelintheDiscoveryConfigurator),plusirregulareventssuchas

ICMP Ping failed for device SNMP Ping failed for device No parent node present for Ifc

specificirregulareventssuchasfailuresthatoccur inqueryingadevice. whenanunsupporteddevicetypeisencountered. duringrediscovery foradatabaserelatedreason. becauseofdevicetypechangesmadewhilethisprocessisrunning.

TheprivilegetoviewtheDiscoveryEventstableisnotlimitedtoadministratorlevelusers,butitis subjecttocustomviewscopeconfiguration.SeeUsingCustomViewScopesonPage461. AswiththesetofNetworkEvents,thesetofDiscoveryEventsbecometheinputdataforthe operations ActionsExportEvents.SeeExportingEventstoaCSVFileonPage364. ActionsPrint.SeePrintingEventsonPage365.

357

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

12.1.8

Defining an Events Custom View

Youcanconfigureanunlimitednumberofcustomviewsofevents.Theseviewsarefilters.Theyare notstatic,butratherareupdatedasneweventsaregeneratedinthesystem,evenwhileyouare examiningtheview. IntheApplicationstree,eachcustomviewwillbeeither adirectchildoftheNetworkEventsview.Forexample,bybeginningtheviewcreation processwiththedefaultNetworkEventsviewinfront,youcancreateachildviewthat displayseventsinonlyonespecificnetwork. thechildofachildview.Forexample,bybeginningtheviewcreationprocesswiththat example(onenetwork)viewinfront,youcancreateachildviewthatdisplaysonlycritical eventsinthatnetwork.

AnotherusefulcustomviewwouldbetopopulatetheFailureObjectmatchfieldwiththeexpression Disc*sothattheviewislimitedtoalldiscoveryrelatedevents.Wheneverthefrontviewintheframe isaNetworkEventsview,WMopensaneventfiltercriteriadialoginresponsetoselectionof ViewCustomViewsAddCustomViewfromthemainmenu.

Figure 253: Event filter custom view criteria dialog, Properties tab

358

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Themeaningsofthesefieldsareasfollows.

Table 21: Event filter custom view criteria fields

Field FilterView Name Description Specifynameforthecustomviewyouarecreatingormodifying.Ifnovalueisspecifiedin thisfield,thecustomviewsarecreatedwithdefaultvalues,suchasNetworkEvents0, NetworkEvents1,NetworkEvents2. Choosetheparenttreenodeunderwhichyourcustomviewhastobeplacedinthetree fromthedropdownbox. Thecriteriasetfortheparentcustomviewwillbeautomaticallyusedforchildcustom view.Hence,itisenoughtospecifyonlyadditionalcriteriaforthechildcustomview. Choosetheseverityoftheeventbasedonwhichyouneedtofiltereventsinyourcustom viewfromtheeditabledropdownbox. Formultipleseverities,typetheseverityascommaseparatedvalues.Forexample, Major,Info. Specifyallorpartofamessageassociatedwiththeeventsyouwanttoview. Message Example:IfthemessageisspecifiedasInterfacefailure.Statuspollfailed.,thenonly eventswiththismessagearedisplayedinthecustomview. Specifythecategoryoftheeventsyouwanttoview.Forexample,Topology. Specifythedomainnameoftheeventstobedisplayedinthisview.Thedomainspecific informationisbasedonphysicallocation,orfunctionalcategorization,orlogical categorizationofthesourceoftheevent. Specifythenetworktowhichthesourceoftheeventbelongs. Specifythenameofthenodebasedonwhichtheeventsaretobefiltered. Specifythenameofthefailedentity(thatisprimarilyresponsiblefortheevent)basedon whichtheeventsaretobefiltered. Specifythesourceoftheeventbasedonwhichtheeventsaretobefiltered. Theeventsoccurredafterthetimespecifiedinthisfield[Month,Date,Year,Hour,Min, Sec,AM/PM]aredisplayedinthecustomview. Theeventsoccurreduptothetimespecifiedinthisfield[Month,Date,Year,Hour,Min, Sec,AM/PM]aredisplayedinthecustomview.

ParentName

Severity

Category Domain Network Node FailedObject Source From Date/Time To Date/Time

359

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Specifyageoftheeventbasedonwhichtheeventsaretobefiltered.Ageofanevent denotesthetimelapsedsincethelastmodificationoftheeventintheWebNMSsystem. Bydefault,thevaluespecifiedisAny,wherebyeventsofallageisdisplayed. Otheroptionsare:minutes,hours,days,today,and,yesterday. EventAge Example:Ageinhrs>1displaysalltheeventsthatarelessthananhourold.Afterthis customviewiscreated,theeventsaredynamicallyaddedtotheviewastheysatisfythe criteriaofbeinglessthananhourold.Inthiscase,theoldeventsremainintheview.If yourequiretodeletetheoldeventsandneedtoviewonlythosecurrentlysatisfyingthe criteria,settheminutesinwhichthecustomviewshouldberefreshedinRefreshperiod inminutes(bydefault,itissetas1minute).Onsettingthis,theserversendsdata automaticallyatthetimeintervalspecified.

Thesefieldssupportswildcardcharactersasfollows:

Table 22: Wild card characters for criteria fields

Character Matcheszeroormorecharacters.
*

Description

Examples: Toviewallobjectsthatbeginwithtest,entertest*. Toviewallobjectsthatendwithcom,enter*com. FiltersthesearchthroughtheNOToperator. Examples:

Toviewallobjectsthatdonotbeginwithtest,enter!test*. ToviewallalarmsexceptalarmswithCriticalandMajorseverity,entereither
!war*,!cle*or!warning,!clear.

Separatesmultiplecriteriaforthesameproperty.
,

Example:Toviewobjectsnamedmemsserver1,memsserver2,andmemsserver3, entermems-server1,mems-server2,mems-server3. Returnsobjectswhereasinglevaluematchesmanypatterns.

&&

Example:Tofindallobjectswhosenamesbeginwithabcandendwithxyz,enter
abc*&&*xyz*.

360

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Description

Character

Escapesthespecialmeaningofthecharacterthatfollows.Thecharacterthat followsisthenliteralinthesearchstring. Example:Tofinda,b,entera\,b. Separatesvaluesthatconstitutearange.

<between>

Example:Tofindobjectnameswithapollintervalvalueintherangeof300to305, enter<between> 300 and 305.Enterthesmallernumberfirst.Valuesincluding andbetweenthetwonumbersarereturned.

NOTES: Mostofthepropertieslistedwhileaddingacustomviewarestringbased.Additionally,propertiesto bespecifiedasBooleanaregivenindropdownboxwithvaluesall,true,andfalse.Selectingall removesthepropertyfromconsideration.Selectingtrueorfalseyieldstheexpectedbehavior. Forstringbasedproperties,thestringvalueisabsolutelymatched.Forexample,thestringRouter matchesonlytheexactword.WordslikeStatusandSeverityarealsotreatedasstrings.Forafilterof Alarmswithseveritycritical,entercrit*. InAlarmsandEventsviews,filteringbasedontimecanbedonebyspecifyingthestartingtimeand theendingtime. Leaveblankanyfieldthisispartofthefiltercriteriabutnottobeconsidered. Thetimerequiredforfilteringvariesbecauseitdependsonthenumberofobjects/elements,the complexityofthecriteria,andthemodeofstorage. Customviewscontinuetobeupdatedandnavigableforadditions/deletionsuntilyoucloseyour session.Youcaneithersaveyourviewsorremovethem.

EventandAlarmfiltercriteriadialogsincludeanAdditionalCriteriabutton.Ifyouclickthisbutton, WMopensanadditionalcriteriadialog.SeeFigure254.

Figure 254: Additional custom view criteria dialog, Properties tab

TheMorebuttoninthiswindowaddsasinglePropertyName/MatchCriteriacorrelatedpairoffields eachtimeyouclickit.Toaddthreepairs,forexample,clicktheMorebuttonthreetimes.

361

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 255: Criteria dialog with three properties

TheFewerbuttonremovesapair. Tospecifywhatcolumnsyournewcustomviewshouldinclude,clicktheSelectPropsToView button.

Figure 256: Select Table Columns dialog for event filter view

note ............. These fields are read-write as well as selectable. However, you cannot reorder the columns by overwriting the default contents of their text boxes. Moreover, the system will determine the initial column arrangement regardless of the order that you see here. In the actual view, you will be able to rearrange columns for only the current view session.

Tospecifymorecolumns,clicktheAdditionaltablecolumnsbutton.

362

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 257: User defined table columns window

TheMore,Fewer,andRemovebuttonsinthiswindowworkthesameasintheCriteriaDialog windowabove.Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeconstructionofyourtable,clickOKinthesetable columnswindows.BackintheShowobjectwiththesePropertieswindow,clicktheTreeNode Propertiestab.

Figure 258: Tree Node Properties tab for event filter custom view

363

Issue 4 August 2012 Themeaningsofthesefieldsareasfollows.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 23: Tree node properties for event filter view

Field Description

FrameTitle Specifythenametobedisplayedonthetitlebarofthecustomview. MenuFile Name IconFile Table Popup Menu Specifythepanelspecificmenufilename.Ifthisfieldisleftblank,thedefaultmenuis displayed. Specifytheiconname(inWM_ Home/imagesdirectory)touseforthecustomview.This iconisvisibleinthetreeaswellasinthetitlebarofthecustomview. Specifythefilenameofthemenuusedtodisplayacontextualmenufortheobjects displayedinthetableofthenewcustomview.

TreePopup Specifythefilenameofthemenuusedtodisplayacontextualmenuforthenewcustom Menu viewnodeintheNavigationtree. NodeIndex Specifythepositionofthecustomviewinrelationtopreviouslyaddedviews.Ifthisfieldis leftblank,theviewwillbeappendedtotheendofthecurrentlistofcustomviews.

Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeviewfilterthatyouhaveconstructed,clicktheApplyFilterbutton. Seealsothefollowingothersectionsofthisguide: ModifyingaCustomViewonPage93 RenamingaCustomViewonPage93 ResizingColumnsinaCustomViewonPage93 RemovingaCustomViewonPage94

12.1.9

Exporting Events to a CSV File

TheExportEventsoptioncanbeusedtosavetheEventCustomViewdataasaCSV(comma separatedvalues)fileintheWMserver.Anoptionisprovidedtoexporteither allofthedatathatmarchestheCustomViewcriteria onlythedataofthecurrentscrollableCustomViewpage.

364

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 58: To export events

1. Either fromthemainmenu,selectActionsExportEvents. pressCtrl+Shift+E.

TheExportDatadialogboxisdisplayed.

Figure 259: Export Data dialog

2. 3. 4.

Selectthedesiredoptionfromtheradiobuttons:ExportEntireCustomViewDataorExport DisplayedData. EnterthefilenameinFilenamefield. ClickExport. Astatusmessageisdisplayed. TheexportedcustomviewdatafileissavedintheWM_Home/serverdirectory,asshownin thefollowingexamplefromMSExcel.

12.1.10

Printing Events
IfaprinterisbothconnectedtotheWMserverdeviceandconfiguredinWMforprinting,thenyou cansendthecurrentlyviewedlistofeventstothatprinterfromtheclient.

Procedure 59: To print events to the server printer

1. Performanyofthefollowing: Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsPrint. Inthetoolbar,clickthe PressCtrl+P. Printbutton.

365

Issue 4 August 2012 2.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IfthesystemreturnseitherthefollowingerrororaTimedOutException,informthe administratoroftheWMserverfilesystem:

tip ................ You can customize the Event Viewer by adding or removing columns using the Custom View options, order the events by sorting, or by creating new custom views. See also Resizing Columns in a Custom View no Page 93. After customization, you may want to use the print option to get a printed version of your customized view.

12.2

Handling Alarms
TheAlarmsviewcanpresentalarmsineitheroftwoways: onlythosealarmsthatareassociatedwithaspecificdevice. allalarms,includingdevicealarmsforalldevices.

AlarmsviewsincludeanOwnercolumn.Foranypickedalarm,theownerisshown.Foranyunpicked alarm,thereisnoentryinthiscolumn.So,aglancedown,orasortof,thiscolumnrevealsthealarms thatstillrequireatleastinitialattention(picking).SeePickingUp/UnpickinganAlarmonPage370.

note ............. To limit the number of minor alarms for Authentication failure triggered by rediscovery with multiple default read community strings, see the workarounds described in Table 40: SNMP configuration parameters on Page 414.

12.2.1

Viewing All Alarms for a Specific Device

Toviewonlyalarmsthatareassociatedwiththespecificdevice,youcaneither typeadistinctiveportionoftheIPaddressintotheSearchtextboxabovetheApplications tree.IntheResultstab,clickthenumberlink(2intheexamplebelow)nexttotheAlarms heading:

366

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

rightclickthedeviceandselectGoToAlarms. Ineithercase,anAlarmsviewopenstothealarmsofonlythatdevice.

Figure 260: Alarms view, one device (IPAddress)

Inamorecircuitousflowthatcanbeadvantageous,youcanselectGoToPhysicalMapinstead. Inthemap,whereyoucanseefromiconcolorsthehealthofdevicesthatareinlinkwiththetarget device,rightclickthetargetandselectManageAlarms. Whileviewingthealarmsofaspecificdevice,toswitchtoviewingallalarmsinthesystem,clickthe ShowAllbuttonintheupperrightcorneroftheviewframe.Toviewthedetailsoreventsthatare associatedwithanindividualalarm,seeViewingRelatedEventsonPage370.

12.2.2

Viewing All Alarms in the System

Toviewallalarmsthathavebeengeneratedinthesystem,selectFaultManagementAlarmsfrom theApplicationstree.TheunfilteredAlarmsviewdisplaysintheviewframe.

367

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 261: Alarms view, all devices (all IPAddresses)

Whileviewingthefullsetofalarms,youcanclickonanycolumnheadingtosortorreversesortthe eventsbythedatainthatcolumn.Typicaltableviewoperationsapplytothisview.Toviewthe detailsoreventsthatareassociatedwithanindividualalarm,seeViewingRelatedEventsonPage 370.

12.2.3

Viewing Alarm Details

Alarmdetailsprovideinformationoneachofthepropertiesofanalarm.

Procedure 60: To view alarm details

1. 2. OpentheAlarmsview. Performanyofthefollowing: Clickarowinthetableandfromthemainmenu,selectAlarmDetails. RightclickarowinthetableandselectDetailsfromthedropdownlistofoptions. ClickarowinthetableandpressAlt+D. Doubleclickarowinthetable.

TheAlarmsdetailsforSourcewindowopens,displayingallinformationthatiscurrently availableaboutthealarm.

368

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 262: Alarms details window

Forinformationoneachofthepropertiesexplainedinthisdialogbox,refertoTable24.

Table 24: Alarm details properties

Property Message Failureobject Source Owner Category Created Modified Group Description Specifiesthemessageassociatedwiththealarm. Specifiesthespecificentity(inthesource)thathasfailedandisprimarily responsibleforthealarm. Specifiesthesourceofthealarm. Specifiestheownerassociatedwiththealarm. Specifiesthecategorytowhichthealarmbelongs. Specifiesthedateandtimewhenthealarmwascreated. Specifiesthedateandtimewhenthealarmwaslastmodified. Specifiesthegroupnametowhichthealarmbelongs.

369

Issue 4 August 2012 Property Severity Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Specifiesthecurrentseverityofthealarm,suchasCritical,Major,Minor, Warning. Specifiesthepreviousseverityofthealarm.Forexample,ifthealarmisof Clearseverity,thisvaluemightbeMajor,indicatingthataCleareventwas associatedwithandclearedanearlierMajoralarm. Specifiesotheralarmsbelongingtothesamegroup. Doubleclickalarmsinthisfieldtoviewitsdetails.

Previousseverity

Otheralarmsinthisgroup

tip ................ To instantly update the alarm details, click the Refresh button in this window.

12.2.4

Searching Alarms
TheproceduretosearchalarmsisthesameasexplainedinFindinganEventonPage355.

12.2.5

Viewing Related Events

Procedure 61: To view related events
1. Performanyofthefollowing: Fromthemainmenu,selectViewGoToEvents. RightclicktherowandselectGoToEventsfromthedropdownlist. ClickthetargetalarmandpressCtrl+E.

ANetworkEventsviewopenswithonlyeventsthathavethesameFailureObjectasthe selectedalarm.

12.2.6

Picking Up / Unpicking an Alarm

PickUpisamechanismthathelpsinassigningaparticularalarm/faultofadevicetoaworkgroupor user.Whenanalarmispickedup,butnotcleared,itindicatesthatworkonresolvingthealarmisin progressbutnotyetcompleted. ItisalsopossibletoUnpickanAlarmthathasalreadybeenassignedtoauserorworkgroup. Analarmannotationentryisenteredwiththenameoftheuserwhohaspickeduporunpickedthe alarmandthetimeitwasperformed.

Procedure 62: To pick up an alarm from the Alarms view

1. 2. Clicktherowtoselectthealarm. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditPickUp/UnPick,orpressCtrl+U. ThealarmsortstothebottomoftheAlarmsviewlistandhasyourusernameinitsOwner columnentry.

370

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 63: To pick up an alarm from the Alarms details dialog

1. 2. 3. Clicktherowtoselectthealarm. Fromthemainmenu,selectViewAlarmDetails,orpressAlt+D. TheAlarmsdetailsforSourcedialogopens. ClickthePickUpbutton. TheOwnerboxinthewindowispopulatedwithyourusernameandtheAnnotationsbox includesacommentforPicked up,withtheassociateddateandtimeandyourusername.

Figure 263: Owner and Annotation in Alarm detail

Procedure 64: To unpick an alarm from the Alarms view

important ........... In the first step, ensure that you select the intended alarm and that it has already been picked up.

1. 2.

Clicktherowtoselectthealarm. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditPickUp/UnPick,orpressCtrl+U.

Procedure 65: To unpick an alarm from the Alarm details dialog

1. 2. Clicktherowtoselectthealarm. Fromthemainmenu,selectViewAlarmDetails,orpressAlt+D. TheAlarmdetailsforSourcedialogopens.

371

Issue 4 August 2012 3.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ClicktheUnPickbutton. YourusernameisremovedfromtheOwnerboxinthewindow,andacommentfor UnpickedisaddedtotheAnnotationsbox,withtheassociateddateandtimeandyour username.

12.2.7

Adding Comments to an Alarm

Itisimportanttotrackanyactionyouhavetakentofixanalarmoranynewinformationyouhave gatheredaboutthealarm.YoucanusetheAnnotateoptiontoaddnotestothealarmforfuture reference.Forexample,youcanenterthesolutionforaproblemthatyouresolved,usingthe Annotateoption.Thismayenableotheruserstosolvethesameprobleminthefuturewithless effort,afterhavingreadyourannotation,ormaybeusedtoreviewtheremedyappliedtothealarm.

Procedure 66: To add comments to an alarm

1. 2. Clickarowwherebyyouselectthealarm. Fromthemainmenu,selectViewAlarmDetails,orpressAlt+D. TheAlarmdetailsforSourcewindowopens. ClickAnnotatebutton. TheSMFAddNotesDialogopens.

important ........... Review the alarm to ensure that it is the intended alarm.

3.

4. 5.

Typeyourcommentsintothetextfield. ClicktheUpdatebutton. YoucanviewyourcommentinthereadonlyAnnotationsfieldbackinthe AlarmdetailsforSourcewindow.

372

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

12.2.8

Viewing Alarm History

Thehistoryofanalarmprovidescompleteinformationonitsstatus,forexampleincludingwhenit wasaddedandupdated.Whenanalarmisgenerated,theAlarmsviewdisplaysthecurrentstatusof thealarm.Whentheproblemthatledtothealarmhasbeenfixed,analarmwithclearseverity updatestheonewithgreaterseverity.

Procedure 67: To view the history of an alarm

1. 2. 3. Clicktherowtoselectthealarm. Fromthemainmenu,selectViewAlarmDetails,orpressAlt+D. TheAlarmdetailsforSourcedialogopens. ClicktheViewHistorybutton. TheAnnotationsforthisalarmboxconvertstotheHistoryforthisalarmbox,which displaysthehistoryofthatalarm,fromfirstlastalarm(forexample,thetimeatwhichthe problemoccurred,thefixtime,andseveritychange).Thisisthehistoryofeventsthatledto thecurrentstatusofthealarm.Keepinmindthatacleareventwillclearanalarmonlyifits FailureObjectmatches.

12.2.9

Viewing Both Annotation and History of an Alarm

Procedure 68: To view both annotation and history of an alarm
1. 2. 3. Clicktherowtoselectthealarm. Fromthemainmenu,selectViewAlarmDetails,orpressAlt+D. TheAlarmdetailsforSourcedialogopens. ClicktheMergebutton. ThebottomboxconvertstotheMergedhistoryandannotationsforthisalarmbox.

373

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

12.2.10

Defining an Alarms Custom View

Youcanconfigureanunlimitednumberofcustomviewsofalarms.Theseviewsarefilters.Theyare notstatic,butratherareupdatedasnewalarmsaregeneratedinthesystem,evenwhileyouare examiningtheview.WheneverthefrontviewintheframeisAlarms,WMopensanalarmfilter criteriadialoginresponsetoselectionofViewCustomViewsAddCustomViewfromthemain menu.SeeFigure264.

Figure 264: Alarm filter custom view criteria, Properties tab

374

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Themeaningsofthesefieldsareasfollows.

Table 25: Alarm filter custom view criteria fields

Field FilterViewName Description Specifynameforthecustomviewyouarecreatingormodifying.Ifnovalueis specifiedinthisfield,defaultvalues,suchasAlarms0,Alarms1,Alarms2arecreated. Choosetheparenttreenodeunderwhichyourcustomviewhastobeplacedinthe treefromthedropdownbox. ParentName Thecriteriasetfortheparentcustomviewwillbeautomaticallyusedforchild customview.Hence,itisenoughtospecifyonlyadditionalcriteriaforthechild customview. Choosetheseverityofthealarmbasedonwhichyouneedtofilteralarmsinyour customviewfromtheeditabledropdownbox.
tipFor multiple severities, type the severity as comma separated values. For example, Major,Minor.

Severity

Previousseverity

Inthedropdownlist,choosethepreviousseverityofthealarmsyouwanttoview fromtheeditabledropdownbox.Forexample,ifyouwanttoviewalarmsthat werepreviouslyminorandthenbecamecritical,selectMinoristhisfield.

tipFor multiple severities, type the severity as comma separated values. For example, Major,Minor.

Specifythenameoftheownerwithwhomthealarmisassociated.
tipTo create a custom view for alarms that are un-owned by any user, set the value as null. For multiple owners, specify owner names as comma separated values.

Owner

Example:Ifthevalueissetas"Ed",thenonlythealarmsownedby"Ed"are displayedinthecustomview. Category Specifythecategoryofthealarmsyouwanttoview.Forexample,Topology. Specifythegroupbasedonwhichthealarmsaretobefiltered. Group Example:Ifthegroupisspecifiedasittest,thenonlyalarmsformingapartofthis groupidaredisplayedincustomview. Specifyallorpartofamessageassociatedwiththealarmsyouwanttoviewinthe createdcustomview. Example:IfthemessageisspecifiedasNodeClear.,thenonlyalarmswiththis messagearedisplayedinthecustomview. Specifythenameofthefailedentity(thatisprimarilyresponsibleforthealarm) basedonwhichthealarmsaretobefiltered. Specifythesourceofthealarmbasedonwhichthealarmsaretobefiltered. Thealarmsmodifiedafterthetimespecifiedinthisfield[Month,Date,Year,Hour, Min,Sec,AM/PM]aredisplayedinthecustomview.

Message

FailureObject Source FromDate/Time (modified)

375

Issue 4 August 2012 Field ToDate/Time (modified) FromDate/Time (created) ToDate/Time (created) Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Thealarmsmodifieduptothetimespecifiedinthisfield[Month,Date,Year,Hour, Min,Sec,AM/PM]aredisplayedinthecustomview. Thealarmsgeneratedafterthetimespecifiedinthisfield[Month,Date,Year,Hour, Min,Sec,AM/PM]aredisplayedinthecustomview. Thealarmsgenerateduptothetimespecifiedinthisfield[Month,Date,Year,Hour, Min,Sec,AM/PM]aredisplayedinthecustomview. Choosethemodeinwhichyouneedtogroupthealarmsinacustomviewfromthe dropdownbox.

GroupViewMode

maxthealarmsofmaximumseverityaregroupedanddisplayedatthe beginningofthelist. latestthenewestalarmsaregroupedanddisplayedatthebeginningof thelist. nonethealarmsarenotgrouped.

Specifyageofthealarmbasedonwhichthealarmsaretobefiltered.Ageofan alarmdenotesthetimelapsedsincethelastmodificationofthealarmintheWeb NMSsystem. Bydefault,thevaluespecifiedisAny,wherebyalarmsofallageisdisplayed. Otheroptionsare:minutes,hours,days,today,and,yesterday. Alarmage (modifiedtime) Example:Ageinhrs>1displaysallthealarmsthatarelessthananhourold.After thiscustomviewiscreated,thealarmsaredynamicallyaddedtotheviewasthey satisfythecriteriaofbeinglessthananhourold.Inthiscase,theoldalarmsremain intheview.Ifyourequiretodeletetheoldalarmsandneedtoviewonlythose currentlysatisfyingthecriteria,settheminutesinwhichthecustomviewshouldbe refreshedinRefreshperiodinminutes(bydefault,itissetas1minute).Onsetting this,theserversendsdataautomaticallyatthetimeintervalspecified.

EventandAlarmfiltercriteriadialogsincludeanAdditionalCriteriabutton.Ifyouclickthisbutton, WMopensanadditionalcriteriadialog.SeeFigure254onPage361.TheMorebuttoninthiswindow addsasinglePropertyName/MatchCriteriacorrelatedpairoffieldseachtimeyouclickit.Toadd threepairs,forexample,clicktheMorebuttonthreetimes.TheFewerbuttonremovesapair. Tospecifywhatcolumnsyournewcustomviewshouldinclude,clicktheSelectPropsToView button.

376

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 265: Select Table Columns dialog for alarm filter view

note ............. These fields are read-write as well as selectable. However, you cannot reorder the columns by overwriting the default contents of their text boxes. Moreover, the system will determine the initial column arrangement regardless of the order that you see here. In the actual view, you will be able to rearrange columns for only the current view session.

Tospecifymorecolumns,clicktheAdditionaltablecolumnsbutton.TheMore,Fewer,andRemove buttonsintheresultingUserdefinedtablecolumnswindowworkthesameasintheCriteriaDialog window.Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeconstructionofyourtable,clickOKinthesetablecolumns windows.BackintheShowobjectwiththesePropertieswindow,clicktheTreeNodePropertiestab.

377

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 266: Tree Node Properties tab for alarm filter custom view

ThemeaningofthesefieldsarethesameasthosedescribedinTable23:Treenodepropertiesfor eventfilterviewonPage364. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeviewfilterthatyouhaveconstructed,clicktheApplyFilterbutton. Seealsothefollowingothersectionsofthisguide: ModifyingaCustomViewonPage93 RenamingaCustomViewonPage93 ResizingColumnsinaCustomViewonPage93 RemovingaCustomViewonPage94

12.2.11

Saving Alarms
TheproceduretosavealarmsisthesameasexplainedinExportingEventstoaCSVFileonPage364.

378

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

12.2.12

Exporting Alarms
TheproceduretoexportalarmsisthesameasexplainedinExportingEventsonPage364.

12.2.13

Printing Alarms
TheproceduretoprintalarmsisthesameasexplainedinPrintingEventsonPage365.

12.2.14

Clearing an Alarm
Somealarmsautomaticallyclearwhentheconditionthatcausedthealarmends(forexample,when adevicewastemporarilyofflineduetoapoweroutage,butpowerisnowrestoredandthe unreachableconditionclearswithoutintervention.Otheralarmsrequiremanualclearing.Clearing thesemayindicatethatworkhasbeendone,thatdiagnosticshavebeenperformed,orthatthe conditionthatcausedthealarmisdeemedinconsequential.Forexample,sometimestheagentsends atrapwhenthereisacrisisanddoesnotsendatrapwhenthatcrisisisresolved.Inthisscenario,you maywanttoclearthealarm.

Procedure 69: To clear a triggered alarm

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementAlarms. IntheAlarmsview,clicktohighlightthealarmthatyouwanttoclear. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditClear,orpressCtrl+L.

12.2.15

Deleting an Alarm
SeeDeletinganAlarmonPage536.

379

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

13 Monitoring Performance
WMmonitorstheperformanceofyournetworkbyperiodicallycollectingperformancedatabasedon variousfactors,suchasnumberofbytesofdatareceived/sentoveraperiodbyaparticularinterface ofadeviceandthecurrentbandwidthinbitspersecondfortheinterface.Afterdiscovery,WM beginstocollectdatafromeachofthedevicesinthenetworkandaddittothedatabase.Fromthat pointforward,datacollectionoccursonaconfigured,regularbasis.(Seethenextsection.) WMreferstotheperformancedatacollectedfromadeviceinthenetworkasstatistics.Youcanview performancedatausingnotonlythetableformatintheviewframe,butalsographsandreports.The setofperformancedatastatisticsthatWMcollectsforadeviceisdeterminedduringdiscoverybythe devicedefinitiontemplateforthedevicetype.ThistemplatefileresidesintheWMserverfilesystem. Practicallyallperformancestatisticsavailablefromeachdevicearecollectedbydefault.

13.1

Adjusting the Performance Polling Intervals

Fromthemainmenu,theToolsPollingConfigurationopensthePollingConfigurationdialogtoits PerformancePollingtab.

Figure 267: Polling Configuration dialog, Performance Polling tab

381

Issue 4 August 2012 Toavoidpollingtrafficcongestionthroughoutthenetwork,WM

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

defaultstoa15minuteSNMPstatisticspollingintervaltogetvaluesthatthenetwork elementleveldashboardandthephysicalmaprequire,butdisablesperformancepollingfor allotherattributes(Others). hasaninitialconfiguredintervalof12hoursforOthers,forallandforeachspecificdevice type.

Ifyouwish,youcanleavethisconfigurationinforcebynotusingthistabintheclientinterface. However,thistaballowsyoutosetperformancepollingofsomeoralloftheseotherattributesto occurforalldevicetypes(EnablecheckedforOthersinthistab).Thissettingcancause congestion,especiallyinlargenetworks,soisnotrecommendedasapermanent configuration. notoccurforanydevicetypes(EnablereturnedtouncheckedforOthersinthistab). occuratauserconfiguredintervalforeachspecificdevicetypeswhoseOthersboxis checkedinaConfigureSpecificTypePollingdialog(SeeProcedure70below.)

important ........... If you manage a number of devices that approaches the maximum WM inventory count, do not reduce polling intervals from their default values, and consider increasing the intervals for Dashboard and PhysicalMap polling.

IfyouenableOthers,thenWMwillallowyoutooptionallydisablepollingforPhysicalMaporReports butwillnotallowyoutodisablepollingforDashboard.Ifyouattempttodoso,theclientreturnsthe followingerror:

Tosetsomeoralldevicetypesthatyouspecifytobepolledforvaluesthatthenetworkelementlevel dashboardandthephysicalmapdonotrequire,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 70: To set performance polling of a specific device type for its extraneous values
1. ClicktheAddbuttonassociatedwiththeSpecificTypeBasedPollingConfigurationblockof thePollingConfigurationdialog. TheConfigureSpecificTypePollingdialogopens.

382

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 268: Configure Specific Type Polling dialog for performance polling

2. 3. 4.

IntheSpecificTypefield,usethedropdownlisttoselectthespecificdevicetype. Ifyouwanttodisableanypollinggroup(Dashboard,Reports,PhysicalMap,orOthers)for thedevicetypethatyouselected,unchecktheEnablecheckbox. Ifyouwantpollingofyourselecteddevicetypeforanypollinggrouptooccurataninterval thatdiffersfromthecurrentsetting,checktheEnablecheckboxifitisnotalreadychecked, doubleclicktheIntervalfield,typethenumberofminutesorhoursintotheIntervaltext box,andusetheUnitdropdownlistasneededtoselectMinutesorHours.

The following rules apply to resetting polling intervals:

The smallest accepted polling interval is 1 minute. The largest accepted polling interval is 24 hours (1440 minutes).

5.

Whenyouarefinishedeitherdisablingpollingorspeciallysettingthepollingintervalforthe selecteddevicetype,clicktheOKbutton. Thedevicetypewithitsnewlysetpollingstatus(disabledorspecialinterval)isdisplayedin theSpecificTypeBasedPollingConfigurationblockofthePollingConfigurationdialog.

note ............. If you attempted to apply an illegal interval, the client throws a pop-up error.

foravaluetoosmall:

foravaluetoolarge:

note ............. If you attempted to apply an interval identical to the global polling settings, the client asks for confirmation.

383

Issue 4 August 2012 6. BackinthePollingConfirmationdialog,youcanuse

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

theRemovebuttontoreturnahighlighteddevicetypetoglobalpollingtreatment theModifybuttontochangethesettings(inadialoglikethatshowninFigure268 above,butwiththedevicetypepreselectedandnotchangeable)thatyoupreviously madebytheprocedure. theResettoDefaultsbuttontorestoreallpollingintervalsforalldevicetypestotheir defaults.

13.2

List of Available Performance Statistics (Configured Collection)

WMcollectsdatafromadevicebasedonthestatisticsthataredefinedforeachdeviceinthe network.Thissectionprovidesinformationonviewingthosestatistics.

Procedure 71: To view performance data collection details

1. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. TheConfiguredCollectionviewopensintheviewframe.

Figure 269: Configured Collection panel

384

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

TheHostscolumnofthisviewdisplaysthedevicesavailablefordatacollectioninthe network.ThenamedisplayedintheHostscolumnisthesameasintheDeviceNamecolumn oftheInventoryview. 2. Clickahostforwhichyouwanttoviewdatacollectiondetails(statistics). Thedatafortheselectedhostisdisplayedinthenextcolumnasatable.Eachrowof performancedatarepresentsoneperformancedataStatistic(asshowninFigure269 above).thatiscollectedatregularintervals. Foradefinitioneachcolumn,seeTable26.

Table 26: Configured Collection properties

Property Description Astringtoidentifythestatistic.ThethreecategoriesforstatisticsareNode, Interface,andMultiple(indicatedbythe icon). StatisticName Therowsarehighlightedingreentoindicatethatdataisbeingcollectedfor thosedevices.Ifdatacollectionforadeviceistemporarilydisabled,thenthat specificrowisdepictedinblue. PollId DNSName DataIdentifier Community Interval AuniquenumbergeneratedautomaticallyandassociatedwitheachStatistic. Hostname(devicename)withwhichthisStatisticisassociated. Auniqueidentificationnumberofthedeviceinterfacefromwhichdataabout thedeviceistobecollected.ForSNMPpolling,theSNMPOID. TheSNMPv1/v2CommunityStringtobeusedwhensendingtheSNMPrequest forcollectingtheStatistic. TheintervalatwhichdatashouldbecollectedfortheStatistic.Forexample,the value600indicatesthatafterevery600seconds,datahastobecollected. Specifieswhetherdatacollectionfortheselecteddeviceisactiveornot.The possiblevaluesaretrueorfalse.Ifitisfalse,datacollectionisnotperformedfor thatdevice. Specifiesthetypeusedtopollcolumnarvalueofthetables. Basedonthetypesofstatisticsinthesetupconfiguration,WMcollectsdataautomatically andstoresitinthedatabase.Datacollectedperdayisstoredseparately:thedataforeach dayisstoredinseparatedatabasetables.Thecurrentdateisappendedtothetablename. 3. Toviewtheobjectdetailsofastatistic,doubleclickarow. TheObjectDetailsdialogisdisplayed.Theobjectdetailsofastatisticdescribehowitis collectedfromthedevice.Toseethecollectedvalues,youwillusethePlotfeatureas describedbelow.

Active Multiple

tip ................ Next to the statistic name an icon is displayed indicating the category of the statistic. There are three categories: node (with a single branch and leaf as its icon), multiple (with a triple branch icon), and interface. Nodes have one value, whereas multiple statistics can return more than one value per collection cycle (for example, when the statistic is a column in an SNMP table. When the statistic name is highlighted in green, data is scheduled to be collected for that statistic; if the name is highlighted in blue, then data collection for that statistic has been disabled.

385

Issue 4 August 2012 4.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

RightclickanentryinthetableandselectReportsorPlotfromthedropdownmenu. ThePlotoptionsupportsgraphstodisplayofbothCollectedStatisticsandCurrentStatistics.

13.3

Performance Data Viewing Alternatives

WMprovidesmultiplewaystoviewthevaluesofastatistic: runningvaluesbeginningnow(CurrentStatistic) ahistoryofvaluescollectedoveraspecifiedlengthoftime(CollectedStatistic) anoverviewofhistoricalvalues(Report)

WMhandlescurrentandhistoricalperformancedatadifferentlyinsomerespects.Thedifferences aredescribedinthefollowingtable.

Table 27: Differentiating Current and Historical Data

Current Performance Data (Current Statistic) WMcollectscurrentperformancedataondemand, atveryshortintervals,toprovideaviewofthe valuesofastatisticastheychangeovershorttime periods.WMdisplaystheresultsinacontinuously updatedstripchartorotheroptionaldisplays.The datacollectedforthecurrentstatisticfeatureis notstoredinthedatabase. Currentperformancedatawhenviewedin graph/tablesareupdated(basedonpredefined interval)asyouviewit. Historical Performance Data (Collected Statistic)

WMautomaticallycollectsdatafromdevicesinapredefined intervalandstoresitinthedatabase.Thisdataiscalled historicalperformancedata.Youcanviewthisdatausing graphsaswellasreports.

Collectedperformancedatawhendisplayedin graphs/reportsisnotupdatedortheplottingdoesnotoccur asyouviewit.YouneedtoreopenthegraphorclickPlot Charttimeandagaintoviewupdateddata.

Thefollowingtablesummarizestheformatsthatthesealternativesprovide.

Table 28: Alternatives for viewing the values of a statistic

Data Format Type Command Option Line Current CurrentStatistic Graph Style Options Area Bar Scatter XYstep See Page Table

387 388

Historical CollectedStatistic

386

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

13.3.1

Viewing a Current Performance Statistic

Thecurrentviewofaperformancestatisticisusefulfortroubleshooting,whenyouwanttogather thedataondemandandmonitoritinrealtimeforawhile.Tolaunchthecurrentgraphviewer,right clickonthetargetstatisticintheConfiguredCollectionviewandselectPlotCurrentStatisticfrom thedropdownlistofoptions. WhentheCurrentstatisticswindowopens,thegraphrequiresabout30secondsasthefirstpollgoes outandtheresponseisreceived,andthenbeginstoplotfreshlycollecteddata.Intheupperleft,you areabletodriveupordownthepollinginterval,butyouwilltypicallyfindthedefault15second intervalsufficient.Theintervalthatyousetherehasnoeffectonanyotherintervalinthesystem. Tochangetheinterval,clickthe StopPollericon,usetheupordownarrowtochangethe StartPollericon.

numberofsecondsforthePollingIntervalandthenclickthe

Figure 270: Current statistics window

Attheendofeachinterval,WMplotsanewdatapoint.Thegraphstyleoptionsforthisvieware summarizedinTable28onPage386.Thisviewsupportszooming,autoranging,printing,andsaving asaPNGfile.Theseoptionsareavailablethrougharightclickanywhereinthegrapharea.

387

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

note ............. If the graph displays only a zero value for a count type of statistic, this is because a constant value was received from the agent as a result of the first two observations. The difference is zero, and this is shown. This scenario can happen as the saveAbsolutes property value of a statistic is set to false by default, causing the displayed value to be the difference between successively collected values. If the saveAbsolutes value was set to true, then the absolute value would be plotted and a zero value would not occur often.

ThefollowingmessagesarepossiblewhenyoulaunchtheCurrentstatisticswindow.

Table 29: Possible messages in a current performance data graph

Message FetchingData.... NoResponsefromagent Reason Thedataisbeingcollectedfromthedevice. Thisisnoresponsefromtheagentrunninginthedevice.This couldindicatethattheelementisdown.

Cannotplot[DataisStringtype] Thecollecteddatafromthedeviceisofstringtypeandthe graphcannotbeplotted. Thetableviewofthecollectedstatisticcanberemarkablyuseful,sinceitcallsouteachhistorical valueinatablewhereyoucanreadindividualnumbers.Thetableviewisalsotheonlywaytoview nonnumericvalues. Whenyoudismissthiswindow,WMwilldiscardthevaluesthatitcollectedandwillnotsavethemin thedatabase.

13.3.2

Viewing a Collected Performance Statistic

Thecollectedviewofaperformancestatisticshowshistoricaldatacollectedinthepastandisuseful foridentifyingtrendsorfocusingontimeframes,suchasblocksoftimeduringwhichproblemstend toarise.Tolaunchthecollectedgraphviewer,rightclickonthetargetstatisticintheConfigured CollectionviewandselectPlotCollectedStatisticfromthedropdownlistofoptions. TheCollectedstatisticsgraphopensinaseparatewindow.Thiswindowprovidesnotonlythegraph styleoptionsthataresummarizedinTable28onPage386,butalsodataoptionsintherightpanel, headedDataRangeSettings.Thedefaultrangeisthelastprevious24hours.Ifyouswitchthesetting toanother,clickthePlotChartbuttonatthebottomofthepaneltoeffectthechange.

388

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 271: Collected statistics window, line graph

ThefollowingmessagesarepossiblewhenyoulaunchtheCollectedstatisticswindow.

Table 30: Possible messages for a Collected statistics window

Message Nodataavailable Reason Bydefault,automaticdatacollectionstarts5minutesaftertheWMServerisstarted andanydevicesarediscovered.Inaddition,datacollectionforanewlyaddedstatistic alsostartsafter5minutes.However,thedelayisconfigurableandcanbesetaccording toyournetworkrequirements.
noteFor Counter type OIDs, the initial data collected is not stored. When data is collected for the second time, the difference between the two values is calculated and stored. Depending on the polling interval set, the data will be collected a second time. Therefore, it is possible that there will be more delay in plotting the graph data when working with Counter type OIDs.

Cannotplot[Datais Stringtype] DateRangeSetting incorrect [FromDateisgreater thanToDate]

Thecollecteddatafromthedeviceisofstringtype,thereforeagraphwillnotbe plotted. TheFromdateandTodatethatyousetinCustomDateRangeSettingsareincorrect. Checkforthedate/timevaluessetandclickPlotChartagain.

ThegraphoptionsforthisviewaresummarizedinTable28onPage386.Thisviewsupportszooming, autoranging,printing,andsavingasaPNGfile.Theseoptionsareavailablethrougharightclick anywhereinthegrapharea.

389

Issue 4 August 2012 Thefollowingisanexampleofabargraphinthisviewer.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 272: Collected statistics window, bar graph

Thetableviewofthecollectedstatisticcanberemarkablyuseful,sinceitcallsouteachhistorical valueinatablewhereyoucanreadindividualnumbers.Thetableviewisalsotheonlywaytoview nonnumericvalues.Thedaterangesettingsontherightsideofthedialogallowyoutodisplayvalues fromthelast24hours,thepastweek,oranarbitrarydaterange.

13.4

Using System Reports

WMincludesvariousreportsthatareeachpreconfiguredtodelivercurrentvaluesofimportantsets ofperformancestatisticsinalldevicesofaparticularcategory: AP(seeTable31:APperformancereportsonPage391) PMP320AP(seeTable32:PMP320APperformancereportsonPage391) SM(seeTable33:SMperformancereportsonPage392) PMP320CPE(seeTable34:PMP320CPEperformancereportsonPage393) PMPBackhaul(seeTable35:PMPBackhaulperformancereportsonPage394) PTP(seeTable36:PTPperformancereportsonPage394)

390

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 31: AP performance reports

System Report Name APBridgeTable Summary APEthernetStatistics Statistic Values Reported [perDeviceName(DeviceID)] SMMAC, ocalUID,Age,Extension[timeoutextensionflag],Hash L DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes RxBroadcast RxMulticast,RxDiscards,RxErrors,TxBytes TxBroadcast, x , , , T Multicast,TxDiscards TxErrors , DeviceID,DeviceName Type, iteContact,SiteLocation,SoftwareVersion PlatformVersion,FPGAVersion, S , Uptime,Regulatory, hannelBandwidth,CyclicPrefix, egisteredSMCount,Color C R Code RegionCode,Temperature , DeviceID,DeviceName UplinkSustainedRate,DownlinkSustainedRate,UplinkBurstAllocation,Downlink BurstAllocation,DownlinkRate,BroadcastDownlinkCIR DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes RxBroadcast RxMulticast,RxDiscards RxErrors,TxBytes TxBroadcast, x , , , , T Multicast,TxDiscards TxErrors , [perDeviceName(DeviceID)] MAC,SessionUptime,SessionState,RegCount,ReregCount,AverageJitter, RSSI(dBm),AirDelay(nsec) [25highestwithtotalbytes] RxBandwidth,RxErrors,TxBandwidth,TxErrors,AggregatedBandwidth,Aggregated Errors DeviceID,DeviceName Enabled,LocalSettingEnabled,AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,DynamicLearning,Ageing Timeout,ManagementVID [fornumberofdaysbackspecifiedinInputDatatab,devicesspecifiedinDevicestab] Graphsand/ortables[optionallyspecifiedinInputDatatab]

APGeneralStatus

APQOSSummary

APRadioStatistics

APSessionTable Summary

APTop25Report

APVLANConfiguration Summary PMPAPGraphical SummaryReport

Table 32: PMP 320 AP performance reports

System Report Name PMP320APEthernet Statistics PMP320APGeneral Status PMP320APGraphical SummaryReport Statistic Values Reported DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes,RxDiscards,RxErrors,TxBytes TxDiscards TxErrors , , DeviceID,DeviceName Type,SiteName,SiteContact,SiteLocation,SoftwareVersion DeviceVersion Uptime, , , CenterFrequency,BaseStationID [fornumberofdaysbackspecifiedinInputDatatab,devicesspecifiedinDevicestab] Graphsand/ortables[optionallyspecifiedinInputDatatab]

391

Issue 4 August 2012 System Report Name PMP320APQOS Summary PMP320APRadio Statistics PMP320APService FlowSummary PMP320APTop25 Report Statistic Values Reported

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Index,ServiceClassName MIR,MinReservedRate,MaxLatency,DataDeliveryType,UnsolicitedGrantInterval, UnsolicitedPollInterval DeviceID,DeviceName UplinkCINR(0), plinkRSSI(0), ownlinkCINR(0),DownlinkRSSI(0),UplinkCINR(1), U D UplinkRSSI(1),DownlinkCINR(1), ownlinkRSSI(1) D SMMAC,SFIndex Direction,QoSProfileID,ClassificationRuleID [25highestwithtotalbytes] RxBandwidth,RxErrors,TxBandwidth,TxErrors,AggregatedBandwidth,Aggregated Errors

Table 33: SM performance reports

System Report Name PMPFSKSMGraphical SummaryReport PMPOFDMSM GraphicalSummary Report SMBridgeTable Summary SMEthernetStatistics Statistic Values Reported [fornumberofdaysbackspecifiedinInputDatatab,devicesspecifiedinDevicestab] Graphsand/ortables[optionallyspecifiedinInputDatatab] [fornumberofdaysbackspecifiedinInputDatatab,devicesspecifiedinDevicestab] Graphsand/ortables[optionallyspecifiedinInputDatatab] [perDeviceName(DeviceID)] DeviceMAC, ocalUID,Age,Extension[timeoutextensionflag],Hash L DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes RxBroadcast RxMulticast,RxDiscards,RxErrors,TxBytes TxBroadcast, x , , , T Multicast,TxDiscards TxErrors , DeviceID,DeviceName Type,SiteContact SiteLocation,SoftwareVersion,PlatformVersion,FPGAVersion, , Uptime,ChannelBandwidth,CyclicPrefix,RegisteredTo,ColorCode,Channel Frequency TransmitPowerLevel,RegionCode Temperature,AirDelay, itter , , J DeviceID,DeviceName UplinkSustainedRate,DownlinkSustainedRate,UplinkBurstAllocation,Downlink BurstAllocation,BroadcastMIR,HighPriorityChannelEnabled,HighPriorityUplinkCIR, HighPriorityDownlinkCIR,LowPriorityUplinkCIR,LowPriorityDownlinkCIR DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes RxBroadcast RxMulticast,RxDiscards RxErrors,TxBytes TxBroadcast, x , , , , T Multicast,TxDiscards TxErrors ,

SMGeneralStatus

SMQOSSummary

SMRadioStatistics

392

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Statistic Values Reported [25lowestwithvalue] Receivepower

System Report Name

SMTop25Report

[25highestwithvalue] Jitter [25highestwithtotalbytes] RxBandwidth,RxErrors,TxBandwidth,TxErrors,AggregatedBandwidth,Aggregated Errors

SMVLANConfiguration Summary

DeviceID,DeviceName AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,DynamicLearning,AgeingTimeout,ManagementVID,SM ManagementPassthroughVID,UntaggedIngressVID

Table 34: PMP 320 CPE performance reports

System Report Name PMP320CPEEthernet Statistics PMP320CPEGeneral Status PMP320CPEGraphical SummaryReport PMP320CPERadio Statistics PMP320CPEService FlowSummary Statistic Values Reported DeviceID,DeviceName LANRxBytes,LANTxBytes WANRxBytes,WANTxBytes , DeviceID,DeviceName Type,SiteName,SiteContact,SiteLocation,SoftwareVersion,HardwareModel, CenterFrequency(kHz), eviceBandwidth(kHz), pLinkDataRate(Kbps), D U UpLinkModulationType DownLinkDataRate(Kbps),DownLinkModulationType , [fornumberofdaysbackspecifiedinInputDatatab,devicesspecifiedinDevicestab] Graphsand/ortables[optionallyspecifiedinInputDatatab] DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes RxDiscards RxErrors,TxBytes TxDiscards TxErrors , , , , DeviceID,DeviceName SFID,CID,BCID,Type,State,Direction,Enabled,Scheduling,MaxRate(bps),ARQ Enable,HARQEnable,Rules [25lowestwithvalue] RSSI PMP320CPETop25 Report [25highestwithvalue] CINR [25highestwithtotalbytes] RxBandwidth,RxErrors,TxBandwidth,TxErrors,AggregatedBandwidth,Aggregated Errors

393

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 35: PMP Backhaul performance reports

System Report Name PMPBackhaulBridge TableSummary PMPBackhaulEthernet Statistics Statistic Values Reported [perDeviceName(DeviceID)] SMMAC, ocalUID,Age,Extension[timeoutextensionflag],Hash L DeviceID,DeviceName RxRate(bytes/sec),RxBroadcastRate(packets/sec), xMulticastRate(packets/sec), R RxDiscards, xErrors,TxRate(bytes/sec), xBroadcastRate(packets/sec),TxMulticast R T Rate(packets/sec) TxDiscards,TxErrors , DeviceID,DeviceName Type, iteContact,SiteLocation,SoftwareVersion PlatformVersion,FPGAVersion, S , Uptime,ChannelBandwidth,ColorCode RegionCode,RegisteredSMCount, , Temperature

PMPBackhaulGeneral Status

PMPBackhaulGraphical [fornumberofdaysbackspecifiedinInputDatatab,devicesspecifiedinDevicestab] SummaryReport Graphsand/ortables[optionallyspecifiedinInputDatatab] PMPBackhaulRadio Statistics PMPBackhaulTop25 Report PMPBackhaulVLAN ConfigurationSummary DeviceID,DeviceName RxRate(bytes/sec), xBroadcastRate(packets/sec), xMulticastRate(packets/sec), R R RxDiscards, xErrors,TxRate(bytes/sec),TxBroadcastRate(packets/sec),TxMulticast R Rate(packets/sec) TxDiscards TxErrors , , [25highestwithtotalbytes] RxBandwidth,RxErrors,TxBandwidth,TxErrors,AggregatedErrors DeviceID,DeviceName Enabled,LocalSettingEnabled,AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,DynamicLearning,Ageing Timeout,ManagementVID

Table 36: PTP performance reports

System Report Name PTPVLANConfiguration Summary PTPEthernetStatistics Statistic Values Reported DeviceID,DeviceName Enabled,ManagementPriority,AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,ManagementVID DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes, xNonUnicast RxUnicast,RxDiscards RxErrors, xBytes,TxNonUnicast R , , T , TxUnicast,TxDiscards TxErrors , DeviceID,DeviceName Type, iteContact,SiteLocation,SoftwareVersion PGAVersion,Uptime,Region S ,F Code Bandwidth RFReceiveChannel RFReceiveFrequency,RFReceiveModulation , , , Mode,RFReceivePower,RFTransmitChannel,RFTransmitFrequency RFTransmit , ModulationMode,RFTransmitPower [fornumberofdaysbackspecifiedinInputDatatab,devicesspecifiedinDevicestab] Graphsand/ortables[optionallyspecifiedinInputDatatab] DeviceID,DeviceName RxBytes,RxDiscards,RxErrors,TxBytes,TxDiscards,TxErrors

PTPGeneralStatus

PTPGraphicalSummary Report PTPRadioStatistics

394

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Statistic Values Reported [25highestwithtotalbytes] RxBandwidth,RxErrors,TxBandwidth,TxErrors,AggregatedBandwidth,Aggregated Errors DeviceID,DeviceName Enabled,ManagementPriority,AllowOnlyTaggedFrames,ManagementVID

System Report Name PTPTop25Report PTPVLANConfiguration Summary

WMalsoprovidespreconfiguredreportsof InventorySummary(seeFigure273) DeviceUptime(seeFigure274onPage396)

Figure 273: Inventory Summary report

395

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 274: Device Uptime report

Thesereportsareavailableondemandaspreconfigured(asdescribedinthenextsection).The preconfiguredversionsandslimmerversionsofthem(describedunderCustomizingaSystemReport onPage399)arealsoavailablethroughscheduledtasks.SeeSchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTask onPage649. Bydefault,allsystemreportsareaccessibletotheGroupsAdminandUsers.Thisaccesscontinues unlesstheadministratorremovesthepermissionforaspecificuser.Theyareinitiallyinaccessibleto usergroupsthattheoperatorcreates.AsshownbelowinaportionofthePermissionstreehierarchy, permissionsforsystemreportsareindividuallyassignableperreportaswellascategorically assignable.

396

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Somesystemreports,forexampletheWimaxCpeGraphicalSummaryReport.php,includethe optiontoviewtheirdataingraphicalform. Anydesiredsystemreportmustbeimportedintotheclientapplicationasdescribedinthenext section.

397

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

13.4.1

Importing System Reports

Toimportanyoralloftheavailablesystemreports,performthefollowingsteps:

Procedure 72: To import system reports

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationsTree,rightclicktheSystemReportsnode. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectImportSystemReport(s). Browsetothetargetpathwherethesystemreportsexistwithinreachoftheclient.

note ............. If you are browsing in the server file system, this path is C:\Cambium\WM\server\Default Templates\System Reports\ or /usr/local/cambium/wm/server/Default Reports/System Reports/.

4.

Use Ctrl+clicktoindividuallyselectasetoftemplates. Shift+clicktoindividuallyselectthefirstandlastofasetoftemplatesthatare sequentiallydisplayedinthebrowser,thenCtrl+clicktosubtractanyfrominbetween. Clicktoselectasingletemplate.

5. 6.

Afteryouhavehighlighted(selected)allofthedesiredtemplatefiles,clicktheOpenbutton. Alloftheimportedreportswillbeuseableforuser(whosedefaultpermissionstousethem havenotbeenoptionallyremovedinSecurityAdministration).

13.4.2

Using a System Report As Preconfigured

note ............. Access to these reports require that they are imported into a client that is networked to the WM server file system.

Toaccessanyofthesereports,selectSystemReportsfromtheApplicationstree.Thisopensthe SystemReportsviewintheviewpanel(Figure246onPage344).
note ............. When you execute a report, the system may respond with Error occurred while printing report. This error occurs only rarely and when system resources are being used at a relatively high rate, such as during status polling and rediscovery. If you encounter this error, launch the report execution again. Cambium Networks tracks this issue under Item ID 0015217 and 0010672.

Toopenthedesiredreport,eitherdoubleclickintheroworrightclickinitandselect ExecuteReport.Whenyoudo,thereportopensasHTMLcontent.YoucanreshapetheHTML window,butnotresizeitscolumnsorsortbytheircontent.However,youcanexportmostofthe entirereportsasCSVforuseinanotherapplicationorprintanyofthemonanynetworkedprinter. ForreportsthatWMformatsintomultipleverticalblocks,thereportdialogdoesnotincludean exportoption.However,todumpaportion(suchasthecontentsofablock)oftheHTMLdatathat thereportreturnstoafiletypethatananotherapplicationcanreadorascriptcanuse,youcanmark theportionofinterestandcopyitout. YoucanreshapetheHTMLwindow,butnotmanuallyresizeitscolumnsorsortbytheircontent. However,youcanexporttheentirereportasCSVforuseinanotherapplicationorPrinttheentire reportonanynetworkedprinter. RunningadevicesummaryreportisaschedulabletaskintheWMclient.SeeSchedulingaOneTime orPeriodicTaskonPage649. 398

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Assoonasyoulaunchasystemreport,WMautomaticallysavesitintoarepositorythatcontains,in listform,allpreviouslylaunchedreportsthathavenotbeendeletedfromthelist.Youcanaccessthis repositorybyselectingSystemReportsReportResultsfromtheApplicationsTree.Thislistis sortablebyanyofitscolumns: ResultFileName(intheformatReportName_SequentiallyAssignedReportNumber,sothat withineachalphasortofreportname,theorderischronological) User(wholaunchedthereport) Time(dateandtime) ReportName ReportType

SeeFigure162onPage228.Sincethereportsinthelistarenotsearchable,andsincethelistof storedreportstendstogrowovertime,sortingisuseful.Secondarysortingisachievablebysorting thesecondarysortcolumnfirst,thentheprimarysortcolumn. ToviewanindividualreportintheReportResultsview,rightclickonthetargetreportandselect ViewReport.Thisopensthereportintheexactformatandwindowsizethatthereportopenedin whenyouoriginallylaunchedit.

13.4.3

Customizing a System Report

Forasystemreportthatotherwiserunsonalldevicesofacategory,youcancustomizethereportto runonasubsetofthosedevicesifyousetthereportasascheduledtaskandfilterthattaskfor devicesandoptionallyfortheirconfigurationandperformancevalues.SeeTable86:Configurable taskprerequisites,requirements,andoptionsonPage650.

13.5

Launching an Operator-defined Report

IftheadministratoroftheWMserverfilesystemhasaddedoperatordefinedreportstothesystem (asdescribedintheserveradministrationguide)andiftheyhavebeenimportedintoaclientthathas networkaccesstotheWMfileserver,thentheseareavailablewhenyouselectSystemReportsfrom theApplicationstree,whichopensalistofallofthemintheviewframe.IntheWMclient,you cannotmodifyanyofthesereports,butyoucanexecuteanyofthemeitherondemandorasa scheduledtask,atyouroption.SeeSchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTaskonPage649.

399

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

14 Administering Discovery
ThischapterexplainshowtousetheDiscoveryConfiguratortodiscoveryournetworkandhowto performdiscoveryrelatedadministrativetasks.WirelessManagerdefaultsettingsenableautomatic discoveryofnetworkelementsonthesamelocalnetworkastheserveritself.WMcanbeconfigured todiscoverdevicesonanarbitrarynetworkoratanarbitraryIPaddress,withconfigurableSNMP authentication.Variousparametersaffectthespeedandefficiencyofthediscoveryprocessandare accessedthroughtheDiscoveryConfigurator. AsWMdiscoversdevices,itaddstheirdevicetypenamesintotheapplicationstree:underInventory. Thissectiondisplaysnodevicetypesbeforethefirsteverdiscoveryisperformed.Itshowsonlynon deviceentries.

14.1

Importing Device Discovery Information

WMallowsyoutoimportproperlyformatteddevicediscoveryinformationfromanother managementsystem,suchasPrizm.Ingeneralterms,theproperformatexportedfromtheother systemhasthefollowingpattern.

Table 37: Format for device discovery information import

Column Position 1 Column Data RangeofIPaddress.Entriesinthiscolumncananyeitherofthefollowingformats:
NetworkIPforexample,n.n.n.0 IP-IP;SubnetIPrangethensemicolondelimiterthensubnet

IPindividualaddress 2 Anyofthefollowingsyntaxes:
NetworkifthefirstcolumndataisNetworkIP RangeifthefirstcolumndataisIP-IP;SubnetIP Nodeifthefirstcolumndataisanindividualaddress

3 4 5 6

Thedefaultsubnetmasktobeused.Thedefaultsubnetmasktousefornodediscovery is255.255.255.255. TheSNMPversion.Mustbev1,v2c,orv3. TheSNMPagentport.ThedefaultthatWMwilluseis161foranyrecordwhosefifth columndoesnotcontainavalidportnumber. TheSNMPreadcommunitystring.Nullisnotallowedifthefourthcolumnofthe recordcontainsv2c.

401

Issue 4 August 2012 Column Position 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 TheSNMPwritecommunitystring. Contextname Username PrivProtocol PrivPassword AuthProtocol AuthPassword Column Data

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Thesecolumnsareforcontentsonlywherethefourth columnoftherecordispopulatedbyv3.

Bewareofsavingthefileinaprogram,suchasMSExcel,thatdepositsitsownendoflinecharacters intoit.Thefollowingisanexampleofaparsingerrorthatpointstothefirstlinethatendswithsuch anendoflinecharacter:

Animportfilemustexistwithinfilebrowserrangeoftheclientwhentheimportoperationisinvoked. Toperformtheimportoperation,seeImportingDataFilesIntoWMonPage107.Assoonasthe operationisexecutedintheclient,useraccountmanagementundertheimporteduserconfiguration begins.

14.2

Using the Discovery Configurator

Thediscoveryprocesscanbeconfiguredtocausetheautodiscoveryofremotenodesortoprevent thediscoveryofspecificnodesoralocalnetwork.Atstartupofthewmserverservice,theWMserver readsthevaluesoftheparametersthathavebeensetintheDiscoveryConfigurator.Theserveralso readsthemandimmediatelylaunchesrediscoverywhenachangeismadeintheNodeDiscoverytab oftheDiscoveryConfiguratorbutdoesnot,however,similarlylaunchrediscoverywhenachangeis madeintheNetworkDiscoverytab.Thisdifferenceisbydesign,toconservesystemresources.

402

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

14.2.1

Opening the Discovery Configurator

TheDiscoveryConfiguratorisavailableasaruntimeadministrationtool.

Procedure 73: To invoke the Discovery Configurator

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectToolsDiscoveryConfigurator. TheDiscoveryConfiguratortoolisdisplayed.

Figure 275: Discovery Configurator, General tab

403

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

14.2.2

Discovering Mixed Networks

WhenusingWirelessManagertomanagenetworksthatcontainSNMPv3devicesaswellasPMP and/orPTPdevices,thefollowingprocessshouldbeused. TodiscovertheSNMPv3genericdevices,useNetworkDiscovery.TheSNMPv3credentials mustbeenteredintheNetworkDiscoveryform.Bydefault,WMusesSNMPbroadcaststo discoverdevicesviaNetworkDiscovery,sotheswitchesorroutersthatcontroltrafficinthe specifiednetworkmustbeconfiguredtoallowSNMPBroadcast. TodiscoverPMPand/orPTPdevices,useNodeDiscovery.IfalldevicesusethesameSNMP credentials,thenthecredentialsmustbeenteredonlyonce(createthefirstdevice,then createtherestofdevicesbychangingtheIPaddressofthefirstoneandclickingAdd).

note ............. WM discovers PMP and PTP devices only if they have IP addresses. Assign IP addresses to them before you configure their discovery.

14.2.3

Configuring General Automatic Discovery

ThissectionexplainstheoptionsavailableintheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator.

Enabling/Disabling Auto-discovery
Bydefault,whentheWMserverisstarted,discoveryautomaticallystartsagainstanynetworksor nodesthatareconfiguredfordiscoveryandnotindividuallydisabled.Thisistheautodiscovery feature,whichitselfcanbeenabledordisabled.Sincediscoveryusessystemresources,itcanbe usefulinsomesituationstoturnoffautodiscovery.However,discoveryandrediscoveryaretheonly waysforWMtofindnewdevicesinanyspecifiedsubnetsorIPranges,andtorefreshthedatabase copiesofconfigurationparametersthatwerereadfrompreviouslydiscovereddevices.

Procedure 74: To disable auto-discovery

1. IntheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator,deselecttheAutoDiscoverycheckbox. Bydefault,thisoptionisenabled.Awarningmessageisdisplayed.

Figure 276: Confirmation for deselection of AutoDiscovery

2. 3.

ClickYestodisableautodiscovery. ClicktheApplybutton.

important ........... When this option is disabled, auto-discovery does not occur when the Wireless Manager server restarts. If you disable and then later re-enable the auto discovery option, discovery will be initiated using the node, network, and other parameters previously specified in the other parts of the discovery configurator.

Toreenableautodiscovery,recheckthebox.

404

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Rediscovering Already Discovered Devices

Asisshownbelow,rediscoveryisthereexecutionofdiscoveryusingexistingdiscoveryparameters, usuallyonthebasisofaschedule.Rediscoverydefaultstoa24hourschedule.Onemainpurposeof rediscoveryistofindnewdevicesintheconfiguredIPsubnetsorIPranges,orattheIPaddresses (nodes)previouslyconfiguredfordiscovery.Anotherpurposeofrediscoveryistorefreshthe configurationparametersforeachpreviouslydiscovereddevice,andcomparethemtopreviously polledorpreviouslyconfiguredvalues.
important ........... It is advisable to have the Rediscover Already Discovered option enabled (checked) because WM depends on rediscovery to check for network device configuration changes that have been made outside of the Wireless Manager application (using the web user interface of the device, for example). We refer to this as a Consistency Check. However, in addition or as an alternative, you can the configuration refresh capability in WM to poll (separate from rediscovery) to detect these changes. (See Adjusting Configuration Polling Intervals on Page 323.) By default, this refresh occurs once in each 12-hour period. When WM detects a difference between a network device's setting and the corresponding value in the database, WM updates the database value to match.

Procedure 75: To rediscover previously discovered nodes

1. 2. IntheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator,selecttheRediscoverAlreadyDiscovered checkbox,ifitisnotalreadyselected. ClicktheApplybutton.

Whenthediscoveryprocessreschedulesitself,thisparameterdecidesthefunctionalityofthe discoveryprocess.Whenitisenabled,alldevices(discoveredandundiscovered)arerediscovered.
note ............. The above parameter does not control the behavior for nodes that obtain their IP addresses via DHCP. Those nodes are rediscovered every time the objects in the database are updated with the latest information.

Preventing a Local Network from Being Discovered

Bydefault,thelocalnetworkandallitsnodesarenotdiscovered.Sincediscoverytakesupsystem resourcesandcanslowdownotheroperations,itisimportanttokeeplocalnetworkdiscovery disabledwhentherearenodevicestodiscoveronsomeorallofthelocalnetwork.Itismostefficient todirectlyspecifyeachnetworkyouwanttodiscoverandleavelocaldiscoveryturnedoff.

Procedure 76: To prevent local network discovery

1. 2. IntheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator,deselectDiscoverLocalNet. Bydefault,thisoptionisdisabled. ClicktheApplybutton.

Setting the Discovery Interval

Theintervalbetweentheattempttodiscoveratoneaddressinanetworkandtheattemptto discoveratthenextaddressinanetworkcanbesetintheDiscoveryIntervaloption.Thevalueset forthisparameterdeterminestheperformance(CPUutilizationandnetworktraffic)ofthediscovery process,sinceitdeterminestherateatwhichWMperformsitsdiscoveryworkandthereforetherate atwhichitusessystemresourcesfordiscovery.

405

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Procedure 77: To set the discovery interval

1. IntheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator,entertheintervalvalue(inseconds)inthe DiscoveryIntervalfield. Thevaluecanbegreaterthanorequaltozeroandthedefaultvalueis1second.

note ............. very long intervals can result in a failure to complete discovery within the rediscovery period.

2.

ClicktheApplybutton.

Configuring Initial Discovery

ThefirstdiscoveryprocessisstartedassoonastheWirelessManagerserverisstarted(incoldstart orwarmstartmode).TheavailablesettingsintheInitialParametersdialogdeterminethespeedof theinitialdiscoveryprocess.Itisnotnecessarytosetthevaluesforalltheparameters. InitialdiscoveryisuniquebecauseWMperformsmanyoperationsduringitsinitialstartup,and becauseasignificantamountofinitializationispossiblybeingdoneinothersoftwarepackageson yoursystemduringinitialstartup.So,itmaybeusefultochangethetimingofinitialdiscoveryto somethingdifferentfromthesteadystateparametersofdiscovery. TheInitialParameterssettingsapplytoonlytheinitialdiscovery.Forsubsequentdiscoveries,the configurationvaluesprovidedintheGeneraltabareused.WhennoparametersaresetintheInitial Parameterssection,WirelessManager,bydefault,takesupthevaluessetfortheparametersin Generaltab,whichisapplicablebothtotheinitialdiscoveryprocessandforthesubsequent discoveries.

406

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 78: To set initial discovery parameters

1. IntheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator,selecttheInitialParametersbutton.The InitialParametersdialogboxisdisplayed.

Figure 277: Initial Parameters contents from the Discovery Configurator

2. 3.

EnterthedesiredvaluesandclickOK. ClicktheApplybutton.

TheInitialParametersscreenoptionsarelistedinthefollowingtable.

407

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 38: Initial discovery parameters

Parameter Description Interval(inseconds)betweenthediscoveryofanytwodevicesinthe network. Defaultvalue:1second Interval(inhours)betweentwocompletediscoveriesofanetwork. Defaultvalue:48hours RediscoveryInterval Ifanegativevalueisgiven,itisreplacedby48.
important....For a large network, a rediscovery interval of at least 48 hours and a less-busy rediscovery launch time such as 1:00 a.m. are recommended.

DiscoveryInterval

Thresholdvalue,inseconds,foralltheSNMPrequests. Thisvalueisthemaximumtimethattherequestingprocesswaitsfor thefirstresponse,beforeattemptingaretransmission. SNMPTimeout Itisusefulwhenthediscoveryengineisdiscoveringaremotenetwork wheretheresponsetimecouldbemore. Defaultvalue:2seconds Thisvaluegrowsexponentiallyforeachretries.Thisvalueisdoubled foreachretry.Forexample,ifthetimeoutvalueissetto5secondsand retriessetas2,thefirstretransmissionwillhappenafter5seconds. Thesecondafter15secondsandsoon. NumberofSNMPretriesfordiscovery,statuspolling,anddata collection. SNMPRetries Defaultvalue:0(i.e.,retryisperformedonlyonce) Ifyousetthevalueas1,thenretryisdonetwice.Settingthisvalueat minimumgivesbetterperformance.

Scheduling Rediscovery
Youcanspecifythescheduledinterval(inhours)betweentwocompletenetworkdiscoveries.When thetaskofpingingalloftheIPaddressesinanetworkiscompleted,WirelessManagerwillwaitfor thespecifiedintervalbeforebeginninganetworkrediscovery. WirelessManagerdependsonrediscoverytocheckfornetworkdeviceconfigurationchangesthat mayhavebeenmadeoutsideoftheWirelessManagerapplication(suchaschangesmadeusinga devicewebinterface).WerefertothisfeatureasaConsistencyCheck.Whendiscoverydetectsa differencebetweenthenetworkdevice'ssettingsandthecorrespondingvalueinthedatabase, WirelessManagerupdatesthedatabasevaluestomatch. Youcanscheduletherediscoveryprocessbyspecifyingtherediscoveryintervalinhours.Youcan alternativelyconfiguretherediscoveryprocesstorunataspecifichouronaspecificdayofthemonth oraspecificdayoftheweek.

408

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

YoucansettheRediscoveryIntervalusingoneofthefollowingprocedures: Procedure79:TosettherediscoveryatRegularInterval Procedure80:Tosetrediscoveryonspecificdates Procedure81:Tosetrediscoveryonspecificdays

Procedure 79: To set the rediscovery at Regular Interval

ThetimeintervalbetweentwocompletenetworkdiscoveriescanbeconfiguredusingtheRegular Intervaloption.Whenaregulartimeintervalforrediscoveryisconfigured,theWirelessManager discoveryengine,afterdiscoveringtheIPAddressesinthenetwork,waitsforthespecifiednumberof hoursbeforestartingtorediscoverthenetworkagain. 1. 2. 3. ClickGeneraltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. ClicktheRediscoverybutton. TheRediscoverySchedulerdialogisdisplayed. FromwithintheRediscoverySchedulerdialog,selecttheRegularIntervaloption(top).

Figure 278: Rediscovery Scheduler dialog

4.

SpecifytherediscoveryintervalinHours,Minutes,andSeconds(asrequired). Bydefault,theintervalissetat4hours.Youcansetanyvaluefrom1to24inthehoursfield. Whenyouspecify1,rediscoverywillbebasedontheentriesconfiguredintheUser's Scheduleoption.Whenyouselectanegativevalueotherthan1,therediscoveryinterval willbetakenas24.Foralargenetwork,arediscoveryintervalof48hoursisrecommended. ClickOK.

5.

409

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

note ............. If the Rediscovery Interval is set using Regular Interval option, then the values set for Specific Dates and Days of Week options will not take effect.

Procedure 80: To set rediscovery on specific dates

1. 2. 3. ClickGeneraltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. ClicktheRediscoverybutton. TheRediscoverySchedulerdialogisdisplayed. ClicktheSpecificDatesoption.

Figure 279: Rediscovery Scheduler, Specific Dates

4.

Tochooseaspecificdateonwhichtherediscoveryoccurs,clicktheappropriatedateoption: All:Selectsallthedatesofamonthandindicatesrediscoveryoccurseveryday. Specific:Constitutesarangeofdays.Forexample,ifyouselect5and15,thenthe rediscoverywilltakeplacefromthe5thto15thofeverymonth. Whenaparticularmonthdoesnothavethespecifieddate,therediscoverywilloccur basedonthenumberofdaysdifferencebetweenthecurrentmonthandthenext month.Forexample,ifthespecifieddateis31andthecurrentmonthisOctober.Asper thisconfiguration,therediscoveryshouldoccurafterarangeof31days.Butthenext month,November,doesnothave31.Inthiscase,rediscoverywillbescheduledfor December1st(i.e.,currentmonthdate31+specifieddate[31]).Thisisbecauseall thesecalculationsareintermsofmilliseconds.Similarlyifthedateisspecifiedas31and thecurrentmonthisFebruary(28days),thentherediscoverywillbescheduledfor March3.

410

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

5.

SelectoneoftheHouroptions. Allselectsallthehoursinaday.Specificselectsoneormorespecifichoursoftheday.

note ............. For the least impact on system resources and network traffic, select an hour when WM and the network are least busy (for example, 1:00 a.m.).

6.

ClickOKafteryouselecttheoption.

Procedure 81: To set rediscovery on specific days

1. 2. 3. ClickGeneraltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. ClickRediscovery. TheRediscoverySchedulerdialogboxisdisplayed. ClicktheDaysofWeekoption.

Figure 280: Rediscovery Scheduler, Days of Week

4.

Tochooseaspecificdayonwhichrediscoveryoccurs,clicktheappropriatedayoption. Allselectsallthedaysoftheweek.Specificselectsoneormorespecificdaysoftheweek. Forexample,ifyouselectTueandFri,therediscoveryoccursonlyonthosedays,every week. SelectoneoftheHouroptions. AllHoursselectsallthehoursinaday.SpecificHourssetsaspecifichour. ClickOKafteryouselecttheoption.

5. 6.

411

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

note ............. When both dates and days are configured, the precedence is given to dates and not weekdays. When the dates or days are configured, the rediscovery interval is set as -1 in the User's Schedule. If the Hour field is not specified, 10 will be assigned as the default value. So, if you specify only the days or dates without specifying the hours, rediscovery will happen at the 10th hour of that particular day or date.

Thecombinationsofconfigurationsforrediscoveryintervalarelistedinthetablebelow.

Table 39: Discovery interval parameters

Category Rediscovery Interval 24 1 1 1 1 1 Hour Anyentryherewill nottakeeffect Desiredhour Dates Anyentryherewill nottakeeffect Days Anyentryherewill nottakeeffect

Default ParticularHour(s) ParticularDayfor everyweek ParticularDatefor everymonth ParticularHouron aParticularDay ParticularHouron aParticularDate

Novalueshouldbe Novalueshouldbe configured configured

Novalueshouldbe Novalueshouldbe Desireddays configured configured Novalueshouldbe Desireddates configured Desiredhour Desiredhour Novalueshouldbe configured

Novalueshouldbe Desiredday configured Desireddate Novalueshouldbe configured

Protocol Configuration
Variousdevicetypessupportthevariousprotocols.Thediscoveryprocessidentifiesthedevice,and theprotocolsupportsprocessesbasedontheseparameters. TheProtocoltaboftheDiscoveryConfiguratorhelpsyouconfiguretheSNMPProtocolparameters. TheSNMPauthenticationconfiguredinthistabappliestoinitialSNMPbroadcasts,whenSNMP broadcastisenabledandwhennetworkdiscoveryisused.OnceadevicerespondstotheSNMP broadcastforanetwork(subnetorIPrange),furthercommunicationwiththerespondingdeviceuses theSNMPauthenticationinformationspecifiedforthatnetworkintheNetworkDiscoverytabofthe DiscoveryConfigurator.AlldiscoveredPMPandPTPdevicesusethewritecommunitystringthatis specifiedintheglobalSNMPPropertiesdialog(Figure282onPage413),regardlessoftheirIPaddress orsubnet.Incontrast,somegenericdevicesmaynegotiatetheirownwritecommunitystringwith WMandignorethisstring.

412

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Configuring SNMP Protocol

ThegoalistomatchthesettingstothoseonsomegenericdevicesbeingdiscoveredviaSNMP broadcast,ifanyexist.Theexceptionisthewritecommunitystring,whichshouldmatchthewrite communityofthePTPdevicesbeingdiscovered(broadcastornot),ifanyexist.

Procedure 82: To configure SNMP Properties

1. SelecttheProtocoltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator.

Figure 281: Discovery Configurator, Protocol tab

2. 3.

ClickonthewordSNMPfromtheProtocolslist. SelectthePropertiesbuttontodisplaytheSNMPPropertiesdialog.

Figure 282: SNMP Properties selected from the Protocol tab

413

Issue 4 August 2012 4. Configurethepropertiesthataredescribedinthetablebelow.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 40: SNMP configuration parameters

Option SNMPDiscovery SNMPRetries SNMPTimeout Description SelectthischeckboxtoenableordisableSNMPbaseddiscoveries.By default,SNMPdiscoveryisenabled. Specifythenumberofretriestobemadetoqueryadevice.Default value:0(i.e.,onlyoneattemptismadetoqueryaparticularnode) Specifythetimeout(inseconds)towaitforthefirstresponsebefore attemptingaretransmission.Defaultvalue:2seconds. Specifyalistofcommunities/communitystrings,suchasprivateorpublic canbegiventodiscoverthedeviceswhenanSNMPrequestisgiven. Multiplevaluescanbegivenseparatedbyspace. TolimitthenumberofminoralarmsforAuthenticationfailuretriggered byrediscoverywithmultipledefaultreadcommunitystrings,oneofthe followingworkaroundsisrequired: ReadCommunity

Discovernodesindividually. Movethecommunitystringsofdevicesthatsendwrongstring trapsuptothetopofthelistofstrings. Subdividethediscoverynetworkssuchthateachentryinthe NetworkDiscoverytabhasthecommunitystringthatappliesto thenodeswithinitsrangeofIPaddresses.

Defaultvalue:public Write Community Specifythecommunity,suchasprivateorpublic(forexample)tosetthe writecommunitypropertyforallSNMPenableddevices. Defaultvalue:private SpecifytheportswhiletryingtocommunicatetotheSNMPagentson eachnode.Multipleportscanbespecifiedeitherasspaceseparated valuesorasarangeofvalues.Example:161800180059099.

SNMPPorts

5. ClickOK.

SNMPv3 Discovery
UseoneofthefollowingprocedurestoconfigurediscoveryofSNMPv3devices: Fordevicesthatsupportandareconfiguredtoallowaccessviabothv1andv3,use Procedure83. Fordevicesthatsupportandareconfiguredtoallowaccessviaonlyv3,useProcedure84.

414

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 83: To configure discovery for a network of devices set to allow SNMPv1 and v3 access
1. Askyourserverfilesystemadministratortoenablethebroadcastdiscoveryfeature accordingtotheprocedureprovidedintheserveradministrationguidesectiontitled "EnablingBroadcastDiscovery."

note ............. Ensuring that the feature is enabled is important for efficiency of the discovery process, since devices that are configured for both v1 and v3 respond to the initial v1 broadcast ping before they provide further information to WM based on its ability to authenticate in v3 (as a result of the remaining steps in this procedure).

2.

Afterreceivingconfirmationthatthefeatureisenabled,usetheNetworkDiscoverytab (Figure283onPage417)todefinethenetworkasfollows: a. UseProcedure89:TodiscoverSNMPv3devicesinanetworkonPage420tosetthe SNMPv3propertiesthatwillallowtheWMdiscoveryenginetoauthenticateintothe devices. Optionally,useProcedure90:TosetanetworkspecificSNMPv3configurationfor discoveryonPage422tooverridethecommonUserNameandContextNamespecified inProcedure89.

b.

note ............. The values of these settings are essential for authenticating the WM discovery engine to query the bulk of discovery information from the device.

3. 4. 5. 6.

SelecttheProtocoltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator(Figure281onPage413). IntheProtocolslist,clickonthewordSNMP. SelectthePropertiesbuttontodisplaytheSNMPPropertiesdialog(Figure282onPage413). IntheReadCommunityfield,typeinanSNMPv1/v2creadcommunitystring. CheckthecheckboxforSNMPv3Discovery.

note ............. This string is necessary for the initial ping in v1, which ignores the v3 security settings.

7.

note ............. This check mark is necessary for having the v3 security settings read (for authenticating the WM discovery engine) to query the bulk of discovery information from the device.

Procedure 84: To configure discovery for a network of devices set to allow only SNMPv3 access
1. Askyourserverfilesystemadministratortodisablethebroadcastdiscoveryfeature accordingtotheprocedureprovidedintheserveradministrationguidesectiontitled "DisablingBroadcastDiscovery." Afterreceivingconfirmationthatthefeatureisdisabled,useeither theNetworkDiscoverytab(Figure283onPage417)todefinethenetworkasfollows: a) UseProcedure89:TodiscoverSNMPv3devicesinanetworkonPage420tosetthe SNMPv3propertiesthatwillallowtheWMdiscoveryenginetoauthenticateinto thedevices.

2.

b) Optionally,useProcedure90:TosetanetworkspecificSNMPv3configurationfor discoveryonPage422tooverridethecommonUserNameandContextName specifiedinProcedure89.

415

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

theNodeDiscoverytab(Figure288onPage424)todefinethenetworkasfollows: a) UseProcedure94:TodiscoverspecificSNMPv3devicesonPage426tosetthe SNMPv3propertiesthatwillallowtheWMdiscoveryenginetoauthenticateinto thedevices.

b) Optionally,useProcedure95:TosetadevicespecificSNMPv3configurationfor discoveryonPage426onPage422tooverridethecommonUserNameand ContextNamespecifiedinProcedure94. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. SelecttheProtocoltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator(Figure281onPage413). IntheProtocolslist,clickonthewordSNMP. SelectthePropertiesbuttontodisplaytheSNMPPropertiesdialog(Figure282onPage413). IntheReadCommunityfield,typeinanSNMPv1/v2creadcommunitystring. CheckthecheckboxforSNMPv3Discovery.

Network Specific Discovery

Configuring Discovery of Remote Networks

Bydefault,theDiscoverLocalNetflagintheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator(shownin Figure275onPage403)isnotchecked,andthelocalnetwork(towhichthemanagementstation runningWMserverisconnected)thereforeisnotdiscoveredbydefault.Whenitischecked,WM addstothetopologyanyothernetworkthatitdetectsthroughtherouterandmakesthatnetwork objectunmanaged. Ifyouwanttoaddaremotenetworkandalsoperformdiscoveryonthatnetwork,thiscanbedone usingtheNetworkDiscoveryoptionintheDiscoveryConfigurator.
note ............. Configuring discovery means that WM is set to attempt discovery in a specified network. WM cannot actually be forced to successfully discover a device at a given IP address. Discovery fails under any of the following conditions: if no device with that address exists if the SNMP authentication fails for that device if the authentication is correct but the device is not supported by WM if there is some kind of communications problem due to errors in the data path between WM and the device.

416

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 85: To enable discovery of remote networks

1. SelecttheNetworkDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator.

Figure 283: Discovery Configurator, Network Discovery tab

2. 3. 4. 5.

SelectDiscover. SelectEntireNetwork. EnterthenetworkaddressintheIPAddressfieldandthesubnetmaskofthenetworkinthe NetMaskfield. ClicktheAddbutton. TheIPAddressandNetMaskareaddedtothescreenwiththeDiscovercolumnenabled (checked),andtheirdiscoveryisnowenabled. ClicktheApplybutton.

6.

note ............. This procedure uses the global SNMP authentication properties, but in most cases you will want to enter in the specific SNMP properties of the devices on the specified network. To do so, use Procedure 88: To discover SNMPv1 or v2c devices in a network on Page 419.

417

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Discovering a Range of IP Addresses in a Network

Procedure 86: To discover only a range of addresses in a network
important ........... This procedure involves using the Set of Nodes option. With this option, discovering SNMP v3 devices can slow your system performance where there are more networks to discover. The workaround, wherever feasible, is to specify the range of SNMP v3 device IP addresses using the Entire Network option instead of Set of Nodes.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6.

ClicktheNetworkDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelectDiscover. SelectSetofNodes. TheStartIPandtheEndIPtextboxesbecomeenabled. EnterthenetworkaddressintheIPAddressfieldandthesubnetmaskofthenetworkinthe NetMaskfield. InStartIPandEndIP,enterthestartingIPaddressandtheendingIPaddressintherangeof ipaddressestobediscovered,respectively. ClicktheAddbutton. AmultiplerangeofIPaddressesinasinglenetworkcanalsobeconfigured.

note ............. If any of the node properties are specified in the Disallow Criteria field, the range of IP addresses specified here will not be discovered and added. Because of this, ensure that the properties of the devices specified using Set of Nodes are not specified in the Disallow Criteria field.

7.

ClicktheApplybutton.

Configuring DHCP Support for Discovery

DHCPdiscoveryisthedefaultfortheNetworkDiscoveryandNodeDiscoverytabs.WMsupports DHCPandnonDHCPdiscovery: WithDHCPdiscovery,discovereddeviceshavetheirMACaddressor(failingthat)theDNS namefortheirIPaddressastheirprimaryidentifier(theirName,thefirstcolumninthe Inventoryview).Ifadevice'sIPaddresschanges(forexample,duetoDHCPreassignmentof itsIPaddressbytheswitchthatprovidesDHCP),WMcan usetheDHCPservertoobtainthenewIPaddressofthedevice. maintainitsrecordsmovingforwardunderthenewIPaddress.

WithnonDHCPdiscovery,theNameofthedeviceisitsIPaddress.

Procedure 87: To enable DHCP support

1. 2. PerformProcedure86:Todiscoveronlyarangeofaddressesinanetwork. SelectDHCP. WhentheStartIPandEndIParespecified,andtheDHCPoptionisdisabled,onlytheIP addressesinthespecifiedrangeisattemptedfordiscovery.IftheStartIPandEndIPare specified,buttheDHCPoptionisenabled,theentirenetworkisdiscovered,butthe addresseswithintherangearediscoveredusingDHCPdiscovery,whereastheaddresses outsidetherangeareattemptedusingnonDHCPdiscovery. ClicktheAddbutton. ClicktheApplybutton.

3. 4.

418

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Performing Network Specific Discovery of SNMP Devices

WirelessManagerdiscoverymodulefacilitatesdiscoveringtheSNMP(v1,v2c,andv3)devicesina specificnetworkorarangeofdevicesinanetwork.

Discovering SNMPv1 and v2c Devices in a Network

TheWirelessManagerdiscoveryengine,bydefault,usesthecommunitystringpublicandtheagent Port161whilediscoveringSNMPdevices.Butsomedevicesinthenetworkcoulduseadifferentport andcommunity.

Procedure 88: To discover SNMPv1 or v2c devices in a network

1. 2. 3. 4. ClicktheNetworkDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. ChecktheDiscovercheckbox. ChecktheSNMPcheckbox. TheSNMPPropertiesbuttonbecomesactive. ClicktheSNMPPropertiesbutton. TheSnmpPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed.

Figure 284: Snmp Properties window for network discovery

5.

ClickV1orV2versionasrequired. TheSNMPPropertiestabisenabled.

419

Issue 4 August 2012 6.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

EnterthereadandwritecommunityofthenodesintheRead/WriteCommunityfields.

note ............. You can enter multiple read/write community strings, separated by space(s). However, doing so will slow discovery. Each string entered is sequentially attempted until a match is detected. So, enter them in the order of most common to least common.

7. 8. 9.

EntertheportnumberintheSNMPAgentPortfield. ClickOK. BackintheNetworkDiscoverytab,clicktheAddbutton,orclicktheModifybuttonifyou areupdatinganexistingentry.

10. ClicktheApplybutton. Onperformingthis,thediscoveryenginediscoversthoseSNMPdevicesinthespecifiednetworkwith theconfiguredcommunityandport.

Discovering SNMPv3 Devices in a Network

SNMPv3discoveryforspecificnetworksisusefulunderthefollowingtwosituations: WhenonlyacertainnetworkhasSNMPv3devices,sendingv3queriesforallthenetworkstobe discoveredisredundant.Onlyspecificnetworksshouldbeconfiguredforv3discovery.Thefollowing aretheconfigurationsforthissituation.

Procedure 89: To discover SNMPv3 devices in a network

1. 2. 3. 4. OpentheProtocoltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator. ClicktohighlightSNMP. ClickthePropertiesbutton. DisableSNMPv3DiscoveryoptioninSNMPPropertiesdialogbox(seeFigure282on Page413). ThisturnsofftheglobalSNMPv3parameters. ClicktheNetworkDiscoverytaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelectDiscover. SpecifytheIPAddressandNetMaskofthenetworkthatshouldbediscoveredasv3. SelectSNMP. ClickSNMPProperties. TheSnmpPropertiesdialogwindowisdisplayed.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

10. SelectV3. TheSNMPV3Propertiestabisenabled.

420

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 285: SNMP V3 Properties tab

11. ClicktheAddbutton. TheSNMPV3Propertiesdialogwindowisdisplayed.

Figure 286: Snmp V3 Properties window, General tab

12. IntheGeneraltab,enterthesecurityUserName,ContextName,andAgentPortnumber. 13. ClicktheSecuritytab. 421

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 287: Snmp V3 Properties window, Security tab

14. IntheSecurityLevelcombobox,selectfromamongNoAuthNoPriv,AuthNoPriv,and AuthPriv. 15. EntertheauthenticationprotocolnameandauthenticationpasswordintheAuthProtocol andAuthPasswordfields,respectively. 16. FortheAuthPrivsecuritylevel,entertheprivacyprotocolandprivacypasswordinPriv ProtocolandPrivPasswordfields,respectively. 17. ClickOK. 18. BackintheNetworkDiscoverytab,clicktheApplybutton. Inthissetup,thediscoveryenginesendsSNMPv3queriestoonlythespecificconfigurednetworksor setofnodes.Ifthev3queriessenttothespecificdevicesinthespecificnetworkfail,thenWMsends v2andv1queriestothedevices.Ifanyofthesequeriessucceeds,thenWMaddsthesuccessfully querieddevicetotheappropriateSNMPversionset. IfthecommonUserNameandContextNamespecifiedshouldnotbeused,andyouwanttooverride thecommonconfigurationsspecifiedforthisnetwork,setthefollowingnetworkspecificSNMP configuration.

Procedure 90: To set a network-specific SNMPv3 configuration for discovery

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. PerformProcedure82:ToconfigureSNMPPropertiesonPage413. ClicktheNetworkDiscoverytaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelectDiscover. SpecifytheIPAddressandNetMaskforthenetworkwhosev3configurationsshouldbe overridden. SelectSNMP. ClickSNMPProperties. TheSnmpPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed. SelectV3. TheSNMPV3Propertiestabisenabled.

422

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8. 9.

ClickAdd. TheSNMPV3Propertiesdialogisdisplayed. IntheGeneraltab,overridethecommonconfigurations: Foroverridingusername,usetheUserNameoption. Foroverridingcontextname,usetheContextNameoption. ForoverridingSNMPport,usetheAgentPortoption.

10. ClicktheSecuritytab. 11. SelectthesecuritylevelfromSecurityLevelcombobox. 12. EntertheauthenticationprotocolnameandauthenticationpasswordinAuthProtocoland AuthPasswordfields,respectively. 13. ForAuthPrivsecuritylevel,entertheprivacyprotocolandprivacypasswordinthe PrivProtocolandPrivPasswordfields,respectively. 14. ClickOK. 15. BackintheNetworkDiscoverytab,clicktheApplybutton. Itisenoughtooverridethenecessarypropertiesalone.Thevaluesofthosepropertiesthatarenot specifiedintheNetworkDiscoverytabwillbetakenfromthecommonvalues.
note ............. During discovery, sometimes the SNMPv3 devices are discovered as SNMPv2 devices. This occurs when the timeout or retries value is less. To avoid this scenario, set the SNMP Timeout or the SNMP Retries to more than the default optimal value based on your agent's performance. These values can be configured in the Initial Parameters dialog. See Figure 277 on Page 407.

Setting Up Node-specific Discovery

Thediscoverymechanismenablesyoutoconfigurethediscoveryofspecificdevicesortodiscover deviceswithaspecificportandagent,beforediscoveringanyotherdevicesinthenetwork.
note ............. Configuring discovery means that WM is set to attempt discovery in a specified network. WM cannot actually be forced to successfully discover a device at a given IP address. Discovery fails under any of the following conditions: if no device with that address exists if the SNMP authentication fails for that device if the authentication is correct but the device is not supported by WM if there is some kind of communications problem due to errors in the data path between WM and the device.

423

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Configuring Discovery of IP Addresses in a Network

Followtheprocedurebelowtoconfigurethediscoveryofspecificnodesbeforediscoveringanyother deviceinthenetwork.

Procedure 91: To configure discovery of a specific IP address

1. ClicktheNodeDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator.

Figure 288: Discovery Configurator, Node Discovery tab

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

SelecttheDiscovercheckbox. EntertheIPAddress. SelecttheSNMPVersionfromthedropdownlist. EnterthereadandwritecommunityofthenodesintheRead/WriteCommunityfields. EntertheSNMPAgentPort. ClicktheAddbutton. TheIPAddresswillbeaddedtothetableabovethefieldswiththeDiscovercolumnsetto enabled(checked).Thismeansthatdiscoveryofthosespecificnodeswillbeenabled.Ifthe checkboxisunchecked,thenthenodewillbeignored/undiscovered.MultipleIPaddresses canbeconfigured.

424

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8.

ClicktheApplybutton.

note ............. If the network corresponding to the given address is not available in the topology database, then the discovery engine will first add the network object to the database and will discover the specified IP before adding any other node in the network.

Discovering Nodes from a Local Network Disabled for Discovery

Thereisaprovisiontodiscovernodesfromalocalnetwork,wherethediscoveryoflocalnetwork optionisdisabled(DiscoverLocalNetisdisabledintheGeneraltaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator). Thisisthesameprocedureasisusedtodiscoveranyindividualnode.Tosetupdiscoveryforthese nodes,performthefollowingsteps.IfDiscoverLocalNetisoff,thisprocedureisirrelevant.

Procedure 92: To discover nodes where LocalNet is disabled

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. ClicktheNodeDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. ChecktheDiscoveroption. ConfiguretheIPAddressaccordingtothenodeyouwantWMtodiscover. EntertheCommunity. EntertheSNMPAgentPort. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheSNMPVersion. Configuretheotherdatainthisform. TheUserNameandContextNamefieldsarecontextsensitiveandnotenabledunlessyou selectv3fromthedropdownlistassociatedwithSNMPVersion. ClicktheAddbutton. SeeFigure288:DiscoveryConfigurator,NodeDiscoverytabonPage424. ClicktheApplybutton.

8. 9.

Theaboveconfigurationcanbeperformedtodiscoverandaddthelocalnetworkandthenode 192.168.4.10(ifthelocalnetworkis192.168.4.0andisdisabled).

Discovering SNMP Devices with Specific Community and Agent Port

Bydefault,WirelessManagerdiscoveryusesthecommunitystringnamedpublicandtheagent port161whilediscoveringSNMPdevices.Itispossiblethatsomedevicesinthenetworkmightbe usingadifferentportandcommunity.

Procedure 93: To discover SNMP devices with specific community and port
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ClicktheNodeDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelecttheDiscovercheckbox. EntertheIPaddressofthedevicethatistobediscovered. Selectv1,v2,orv3fromtheSNMPVersionfielddropdownlist. EnterthereadcommunityofthedeviceintotheReadCommunityfield. Thedefaultvalueispublic. EnterthewritecommunityofthedeviceintotheWriteCommunityfield. Thedefaultvalueisprivate.

425

Issue 4 August 2012 7. 8. 9.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

EntertheSNMPagentportofthedeviceinSNMPAgentPortfield. Thedefaultvalueis161. ClicktheAddbutton. ClicktheApplybutton.

Discovering Specific SNMPv3 Devices

SNMPv3discoveryforspecificdevicesisusefulinthefollowingtwosituations. InanetworkwhereonlyselecteddevicesareSNMPv3devices,sendingv3queriesforallthedevices wouldberedundant.Inthiscase,onlyselectivedevicesshouldbeconfiguredforv3discovery.The followingaretheconfigurationstobemadeforthissituation.

Procedure 94: To discover specific SNMPv3 devices

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ClicktheProtocoltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelectSNMPandclickProperties.TheSNMPPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed. DisableSNMPv3Discoveryifalreadyenabled. ClickOK. ClicktheNodeDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelecttheDiscovercheckbox. EntertheIPaddressandsubnetmaskofthedevicethatistobediscovered. Choosev3fromSNMPVersiondropdownbox. Enterthesecurityusername,contextnameandtheportnumberintheUserName, ContextName,andSNMPAgentPortfields,respectively.

10. ClickthePropertiesbutton. TheSNMPv3Propertiesdialogisinvoked. 11. Enterappropriatevaluesinthefields. 12. ClickOK. 13. BackintheNodeDiscoverytab,clicktheAddbutton. 14. ClicktheApplybutton. Inthissetup,thediscoveryenginewillsendSNMPv3queriesonlytothedevicesthatarespecifiedin theIPAddressfieldwiththeSNMPVersionsettov3.Ifthev3queriestothesedevicesfail,thenv2 andv1queriesaresenttothedevices.Ifanyofthesequeriessucceed,thenthesedeviceswillbe addedtotheirappropriateSNMPversions. Alsoforaparticulardevice,ifthecommonUserNameandContextNamespecifiedshouldnotbe usedandyouwanttooverridethecommonconfigurationspecifiedforthisdevice,youcanusethe followingdevicespecificv3configurationexample.

Procedure 95: To set a device-specific SNMPv3 configuration for discovery

1. 2. 3. ClicktheProtocoltabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. ClicktohighlightSNMP. ClickthePropertiesbutton. TheSNMPPropertiesdialogisdisplayed.

426

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Check(enable)SNMPv3Discoveryifitisdisabled. EntertheUserNames,ContextName,andSNMP_Ports. ClickOK. ClicktheNodeDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelecttheDiscovercheckbox. EntertheIPaddresswhosev3configurationsshouldbeoverridden.

10. Choosev3fromSNMPVersiondropdownbox. 11. OverridethecommonconfigurationsbyenteringvaluesforUserName,ContextName,and SNMPAgentPortfields. 12. ClickProperties. TheSNMPv3Propertiesdialogisinvoked. 13. Enterappropriatevaluesinthefieldsavailable. 14. ClickOK. 15. ClicktheAddbutton. 16. ClicktheApplybutton. Itisenoughifyouoverridethenecessarypropertiesalone.Thevaluesofthosepropertiesthatare notspecifiedintheNodeDiscoverytabwillbetakenfromthecommonvalues.
note ............. During discovery, sometimes the SNMPv3 devices are discovered as SNMPv2 devices. This occurs when the timeout or retry value is less than expected. To avoid this from occurring, set the SNMP Timeout or the SNMP Retries to more than the default optimal value based on your agent's performance.

Preventing Discovery

Preventing Network Discovery

Thisprocedureprovidesawaytoexcludeanetworkfromdiscovery,eventhoughitwouldotherwise havebeendiscoveredduetotheenablementoftheDiscoverLocalNetsetting.IfDiscoverLocalNetis off,thisprocedureisirrelevant.

Procedure 96: To prevent the discovery of a specific network

Important ........... When you uncheck the Discover option and click Apply, as this procedure does, WM discards some of the data that was configured in the Discovery Configurator for this particular network. For example, it discards the values for StartIP, EndIP, SNMP Version, Read Community, and SNMP Agent Port. So, before unchecking this option, you may want to note these values to identically populate them at some future time for re-enabling the discovery of this network.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ClicktheNetworkDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. Bydefault,theDiscoveroptionisselected. Disable(uncheck)thisoption. SelectEntireNetwork. ConfiguretheIPAddressandNetMaskofthenetworkthatistobebypassedbyauto discover. ClicktheAddbutton.

427

Issue 4 August 2012 6. ClicktheApplybutton.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

note ............. This tag will not add the specified network, even if the network is reachable from the host in which Wireless Manager is running.

7.

Topreventothernetworksfrombeingdiscoveredandaddedtothetopologydatabase, repeatthisprocedureforeachofthosenetworks.

Preventing Discovery of a Specific Device

Thisprocedureprovidesawaytoexcludeanodefromdiscovery,eventhoughitwouldotherwise havebeendiscoveredduetotheenablementoftheDiscoverLocalNetsetting.IfDiscoverLocalNet isoff,thisprocedureisirrelevant.

Procedure 97: To prevent the discovery of an unlisted device

Important ........... When you uncheck the Discover option and click Apply, as this procedure does, WM discards some of the data that was configured in the Discovery Configurator for this particular network. For example, it discards the values for SNMP Version, Read Community, and SNMPAgentPort. So, before unchecking this option, you may want to note these values to identically populate them at some future time for reenabling the discovery of this network.

1. 2. 3. 4. 5.

ClicktheNodeDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. DeselecttheDiscovercheckbox(notselected). EntertheIPaddressofthedevice. ClicktheAddbutton. ClicktheApplybutton.

Youcanconfigurethediscoveryenginetopreventthediscoveryofanelementthatisalreadyknown toWirelessManager.Todoso,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 98: To prevent the discovery of a listed device

1. ClicktheNodeDiscoverytabintheDiscoveryConfigurator.

Figure 289: Disabling discovery for a listed device

2. 3. 4.

Inthetable,selecttherowthatrepresentsthedevice. TheindividualDiscovercheckboxinthistableisreadonly. ClicktheDeletebutton. ClicktheApplybutton.

Preventing Discovery of Devices with Specific Properties

Thediscoveryenginecanbeconfiguredtopreventthediscoveryofdeviceswithspecificproperties. YoucaneitherdisablethealreadyaddedcriteriaorenternewcriteriawiththeAllowCriteriaoption disabled(unchecked).

428

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Example WhenthevalueofpropertiestypeissettoSUNandnamesettoA,discoveryenginewillpreventthe discoveryofdeviceswhosetypepropertyisSUNanditsnamestartswiththeletterA.Thisexampleis depictedbelow.

Procedure 99: To disallow discovery where type is SUN and name is A (example)
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. ClicktheCriteriatabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. FromthePropertyNamedropdownlist,selecttype. InthePropertyValuetextbox,typeinSUN. AbovePropertyName,uncheckAllowCriteria. ClicktheAddbutton. FromthePropertyNamedropdownlist,selectname. InthePropertyValuetextbox,typeinA. AbovePropertyName,uncheckAllowCriteria. ClicktheAddbutton.

Figure 290: Criteria tab, disallow discovery for type SUN and name A

429

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

10. ClicktheApplybutton. Wheneitherofthepropertiesmatchesinafoundmanagedobject,theobjectwillnotbe discovered.

Deleting Network Entries

IntheNetworkDiscoverytaboftheDiscoveryConfigurator,youcandeleteaspecificnetworkentry byclickingtheDeletebuttonandthentheApplybutton.However,deletinganentryintheDiscovery Configuratordoesnotdeletethatnetworkfromthedatabase.Whenyourestarttheserverwithout reinitializingit,theparticularnetworkwillbediscoveredagain.Similarly,whenthediscoveryengine isscheduledforrediscovery,thatnetworkwillberediscovered(ifrediscoveryisenabled).Changes doneintheDiscoveryConfiguratordonotdeletealreadydiscoverednetworksfromthedatabase. Todeleteanalreadydiscoverednetworkfromthedatabase,findthenetworkintheApplicationstree underInventoryNetworksandrightclickthenetworkname.Fromthedropdownlistofoptions, selectDeleteObjectandTraces.

14.2.4

Configuring Criteria-based Automatic Discovery

ToconfigurediscoverybasedonManagedObject(MO)properties,theCriteriataboftheDiscovery Configuratorcanbeused.Thisconfigurationfacilityisusedtoallowordisallowthediscoveryofonly thoseobjectswhosepropertiesmatchwiththespecifiedmatchcriteria. TheAllowCriteriaoptionistobeenabledwhenonlythoseobjectsthatsatisfythespecifiedcriteria shouldbediscovered.Ifitisunchecked,thenonlythoseobjectsthatdonotsatisfythespecified criteriawillbediscovered.TheAllowCriteriacontentsarereadasiftheANDoperatorshouldapply. WhenmultiplepropertiesareconfiguredintheAllowCriteriafield,theobjectsarediscoveredonlyif allthespecifiedpropertiesmatchwiththoseoftheobjectfound. TheDisallowCriteriacontentsarereadasiftheORoperatorshouldapply.Whenmultipleproperties arespecifiedintheDisallowCriteriafield,evenifonlyoneofthepropertiesmatcheswiththatofthe objectfound,theobjectwillnotbediscovered.
note ............. Only the name, type, ipAddress, sysOID, and the isSNMP attributes of the ManagedObject (and their derivatives) can be used with the Allow Criteria and Disallow Criteria specifications. Although you can enter other attributes in the Property Name field, the system behavior with other attributes is not tested or assured. See Figure 290 on Page 429.

430

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Discovering Devices with Specific Properties Only

Procedure 100: To discover devices with specific properties
1. ClicktheCriteriatabintheDiscoveryConfigurator.

Figure 291: Discovery Configurator, Criteria tab

2. 3.

AbovePropertyName,selecttheAllowCriteriacheckbox. FromPropertyNamedropdownlist,selecttheproperty. Bydefault,fiveoftheManagedObjectProperties(name,type,ipAddress,sysOID,isSNMP) areavailable.TheMOpropertynamecanbeanyofthefieldsintheManagedObjectclassor oneofitsderivedclasses.Multiplevaluescanbeentered,separatedbyspaces. InthePropertyValuefield,enterthevaluefortheselectedproperty. ClicktheAddbutton. Thepropertynameanditsrespectivevalueareaddedinthetableabovethefields. ClicktheApplybutton.

4. 5. 6.

Example: ThefollowingdepictstheAllowCriteriasetforspecificnameandsysOIDproperties.

431

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 292: Criteria tab, allow discovery for specific name and OID

ThiswilladdonlythoseobjectswhosenamesarexandsysOIDpropertyas.1.3.6.1.4.1.311.1.1.3.2. Allotherobjectswillbefilteredoutnotaddedtothedatabase.

Discovering Only SNMP Nodes

Procedure 101: To discover only SNMP nodes
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. ClicktheCriteriatabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelectAllowCriteria. FromthePropertyNamedropdownlist,selectisSNMP. InthePropertyValuefield,entertrue. ClicktheAddbutton.

432

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 293: Criteria tab, allow discovery for only SNMP nodes

6.

ClicktheApplybutton.

Whenthisprocedureisperformed,onlytheSNMPnodesarediscoveredandaddedtothedatabase. EnsurethattheSNMPnodesarepresentandreachablefromthehostthatrunstheWireless Managerserver.

Discovering an Object with a Specific IP Address

Procedure 102: To discover only the object corresponding to a specific IP
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. ClicktheCriteriatabintheDiscoveryConfigurator. SelectAllowCriteria. FromthePropertyNamedropdownlist,selectipAddress. InthePropertyValuetextbox,entertheIPaddress. ClicktheAddbutton. ClicktheApplybutton.

Discovering Objects with Multiple Properties

Whenmultiplepropertiesarespecifiedascriteria,theobjectsarediscoveredonlyifallofthe specifiedpropertiesmatchwiththatoftheincomingmanagedobject.

433

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

14.2.5

Closing the Discovery Configurator

WhenyouleavetheDiscoveryConfigurator,WMopensaconfirmationwindow:

Theleadingstatementisindicatingthat,aftermakingsomechange,youdidnotclicktheApply button.Themessageaboutapplyingtotheserverisaskingwhetheryouwantthediscovery configurationchangesthatyoumade(duringthisconfiguratorsession)tobeusedforanydiscovery thatcomesduebetweennowandthenextrestartofthewmserverserviceontheserverdevice: IfyouselectNo,thenthenextrestartoftheserviceiswhenWMreadthosechanges. IfyouselectYes,thenWMwillreadthosechangesnowandapplythemattheverynext autodiscoveryinterval. IfyouselectCancel,theDiscoveryConfiguratorremainsopen,andyouhavetheopportunity toreviewchangesandapplythem.

14.3

Configuring Manual Discovery

NetworkelementsarediscoveredautomaticallybyWirelessManagerandthediscoveryprocessis carriedoutinapredeterminedway.Manualrediscoverywouldlikelybeusefulforyouonlywhenyou wanttofreeupthenodecountforimmediatelicensingofadevice.Ifyouneedtodiscoveranode manuallyinsteadofwaitingforWMtodiscoveritautomatically,seeRefreshingDeviceDataon Page250.

14.4

Stages of Discovery
Duringbasicdiscovery,WMauthenticatesitselftothedeviceviaSNMPandobtainsarelativelysmall numberofvaluesfromthedevice.Immediatelyfollowingthatbasicdiscovery,WMlaunchesdeep discovery,duringwhichitsetsupsuchoperationsasperformancedatapollingandtraphandling. Whenyoumanuallystartorstopdiscovery,thistypicallycausesWMtorediscoveralreadydiscovered devices.Duringthisrediscovery,WMperformsdeepdiscovery.However,deepdiscoveryaspartof rediscoveryomitscertainredundantaspects,suchassettingupperformancedatapolling.Itdoes obtainfreshvaluesfortheconfigurationparameters.

434

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

14.5

Viewing the Discovery Log

TheDiscoveryConfiguratorincludesaDiscoveryLogtab,whereimportanteventsinthediscovery processarecapturedwiththeirresults.

Figure 294: Discovery Log

Thesearesuccessexamples.Thefollowingareexamplesofdiscoveryfailureeventsthatthelog callsout.

Figure 295: Failure events in the Discovery Log

[02 Aug 2010 13:25:43:774] DISCOVERY(10.60.2.43:254): Unable to write to device while testing Write Community. Device is currently not writeable. Device's Write Community must be set manually. [02 Aug 2010 13:27:55:562] PING: [THREAD:: Thread-138] SNMP Ping failed for device 10.60.2.15.Snmp Properties:: ,RemotePort=161,SnmpRetries=0,TimeOut=1 [07 Aug 2010 24:22:45:483] PING: [THREAD:: statuspoll-2] SnmpPing failed for device 10.50.7.253.SnmpPing Properties:: Community=public,RemotePort=0,SnmpRetries=3,TimeOut=1 Version=v2 [06 Aug 2010 20:04:56:015] PING: [THREAD:: pool-5-thread-3] ICMP Ping failed for device 192.168.101.1

435

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

15 Administering Wireless Manager Security

Thischapterdescribesthevariouselementsassociatedwithsecurity,suchaspermissionsassignedto groups,users,andoperations.AWMadministratorcanmanagethefollowingfunctions: providegroupbasedauthorizationwhereuserscanbeassignedtogroupsthathave configuredlevelsofauthorizationandofferspecificuserauthorizations. providefinegrainedaccesscontrolforspecificgroups,views,andoperations. limittheaccessforsomeuserstospecificsubsetsofobjectsorinstances(forexample,user accesscanbelimitedtoaspecifickindofdevice).

important ........... The order in which user permissions are set determine which permissions are allowed and which are disallowed. When users are added to a group and the later certain permissions are removed for that group, those users retain the permissions that were previously configured for them and those permissions cannot be removed from them. Similarly, when users are added to a group and then later certain permissions are added for that group, those users do not have the new permissions and cannot be granted them. Further, users who are configured for membership in more than one group whose sets of permissions differ from each other, the system should warn the administrator that a conflict exists, but the system does not.

Youcanrestrictauserfromaccessingspecificdata,aswellasfromviewingandworkingonspecific networktopologyinformation.TheSecurityAdministrationtoolprovidessecurityrelatedoperations thatcanbeconfigured.Youcanspecifypermissionforusersforonlycertainsecurityoperationsand restricttheusersfromothers.Forexample,youcanallowausertocreateanewgroupbutdenythat usertheoptiontodeletethatgroup.

Procedure 103: To launch the Security Administration tool

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens.

437

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 296: Initial Security Administration Tool Screen

Intheleftpanel,theSecurityAdministrationwindowdisplaysaSecuritytreethathasGroupsand Usersnodes.Associatedwiththegroupsanduserswhobelongtothesenodesareiconsthatprovide immediateinformationaboutthestatusoftheparticulargrouporuser. Thefollowingdefinestherangeoficonsthatthesystemmaydisplay.

Table 41: User icons

Icon Description

Useraccountisenabled. Userisdisabledandcannotloginuntilhe/sheisre enabled. Useraccounthasexpired. Userpasswordhasexpired. Userhasbeenforcedoutandcannotlogintotheserver. Thisissimilartothedisableduserstatus. Userloginisdeniedduetocontinuousunsuccessfullogin attempts.

438

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

15.1

Importing User Account Information

WMallowsyoutoimportproperlyformatteduseraccountdatafromanothermanagementsystem, suchasPrizmoraparentinstanceofWM.TheformatiscommadelimitedCSV,withspecifically allowedescape(TextQualifier)characters.SeeImportingDataFilesIntoWMonPage107.

Table 42: Format for user account information import

Column Position 1 2 LoginID Mandatory. GroupName Optional,butthecolumn(position)mustbepresent.Separatemultiple groupnameswithsemicolons. Password Thethirdcolumn(position)maybenullorpopulated. Status Mandatory.Allowedcontentisenabled,disabled,orpasswordExpired. PasswordAge Thefifthcolumnentryofeachrow(record)shouldbethenumberofdays inwhichWMshouldallow/prompttheusertoenterapassword.Forsecurity reasons,exportingsystemsmaysetthisfieldto0forallexportedrecords. Wherethisisthecase,edittheseentriestoapracticalnumberofdays. Column Data

3 4 5

Bewareofsavingthefileinaprogram,suchasMSExcel,thatdepositsitsownendoflinecharacters intoit.BothofthefollowingexamplefilesareasdisplayedinMSNotepad.Thefollowingisan exampleofaparsingerrorthatpointstothefirstlinethatendswithsuchanendoflinecharacter:

ThenextexampleisofafilethatwillencounternoparsingerrorandofthesuccessfulResultswindow fromthesystemresponse:
Version: 1.0 Create Date: 08/17/2010 # User Account Information LoginID,Group Name,Password,Status,Password Age Mutt,test;Users,,enabled,0 Jeff,Users,,enabled,0 Batman,Admin;Users,,enabled,0 Robin,Users,,enabled,0

439

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Afilewithouttheproblematicendoflinecharactersmaygenerateothererrors,suchasthatauser ofthesamenameasinoneoftherecordsisalreadyaconfigureduser,butthiskindoferrorwouldbe statedinthenormalResultswindow. Animportfilemustexistwithinfilebrowserrangeoftheclientwhentheimportoperationisinvoked. Toperformtheimportoperation,seeImportingDataFilesIntoWMonPage107.Assoonasthe operationisexecutedintheclient,useraccountmanagementundertheimporteduserconfiguration begins.

note ............. For any entries in the Group Name (second column) that did not exist in WM before the import, WM creates a new group name, but initially assigns no privileges to it. Every user who was imported with a null password will be allowed a first login, in which they will be prompted for a new password.

15.2

Managing Users
AuserisanindividualentitythatlogsintotheWMandisconfiguredtoperformonlyasetofWM functions.BeforeanyonehasaccesstoWM,heorshemustbeaddedasausertothedatabase.After youhavecreatedusers,youcanaddthemtogroups,and/orgivethemspecificpermissionsunrelated tothegroup.

15.2.1

Limiting a User to Read Only

Thefollowingsectionsdescribeboth howtoprovisionWMusersasindividualaccounts,whosepermissionswillbelimitedby uncheckedboxesinthepermissionstreehierarchy(alternativelycalledtheOperationTree). howtoassociatethemwiththenamesofusergroups,whosepermissionstoseethingscan belimitedbycustomviewscopesthatyoudefine.

440

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Byuncheckingthefollowingitemsinthepermissionstreehierarchy(showninFigure300on Page446),youeffectivelykeepauserfrombeingabletowritetothesystemoranyofthedevices thatthesystemmanages: Policy PollFilters PollingObject UserAdministration PollingUnits AlertsAlertFilters AlertsAlertUserOperationsClearAlerts AlertsAlertUserOperationsAlertPickup AlertsDeleteAlerts ThresholdObject TopologyModifyObject TopologyDeleteObject TrapParsersandFilters Configuration AdministrativeOperation

15.2.2

Adding a User
YoucanaddauserwheneveryouneedtoprovidesomeoneacertainlevelofaccesstoWM.By default,thenewuserhasonlyloginpermission.Youprovideaccesstovariousmodulesbymakingthe useramemberofpreconfiguredgroupsorbydirectlyassigningpermissionstotheuser.

Procedure 104: To add a new user

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecurityAdministrationwindow,doanyofthefollowing: SelectFileNewAddUser. PressCtrl+Shift+U. ClicktohighlightthemainbranchUsersintheSecuritytree,thenrightclickitandselect AddUser.

tip ................ Do not click on the Users node that belongs to groups by mistake. Click on the Users node that is highlighted in this example:

441

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TheUserAdministrationwizardopenstoitsUserDescriptionpanel.

Figure 297: User Administration wizard, User Description panel

3. 4.

Typetheusernameandpasswordinappropriatefields. ClicktheNextbutton. Thewizardswitchestoitsaccountpanel.

note ............. If no password is specified, the user name is set as the password.

442

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 298: User Administration wizard, account and password expiry

5.

IntheUseraccountexpirysection,doeitherofthefollowing: (Bydefault,theuseraccountneverexpires.) Ifyouareprovidingaccessforalimitednumberofdays,typethenumberofdaysin whichtheaccountexpiresintotheDay(s)field. Iftheaccountshouldnotexpire,leavetheAccountneverexpirescheckboxchecked.

6.

InthePasswordexpirysection,doeitherofthefollowing: (Bydefault,thepasswordneverexpires.) Ifthepasswordshouldexpire,typethenumberofdaysinwhichthepasswordexpires intotheDay(s)field. Ifthepasswordshouldnotexpire,leavethePasswordneverexpirescheckboxchecked.

note ............. User account expiry and password expiry are two different entities. This is why you can separately specify a user name and a password expiry. Password expiry is examined only when the user tries to log in. The user account expiry is examined at a regular time interval.

7.

ClicktheNextbutton. Thewizardswitchestoitspermissionspanel.

443

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 299: User Administration wizard, permissions

8.

Ifyouareassociatingtheuserwithanexistinggroup,completethefollowingsteps: a. b. ChecktheGroupbasedpermissionscheckbox. IntheAssigngroupsfortheuserblock,selectthecheckboxesnexttothegroupsto whichyouwanttoassigntheuser.

444

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. Click the arrow in the dialog to display a pop-up window that lists the corresponding permissions for the group. Based on the permissions you can assign groups to the user.

..................... This pop-up is read only. This wizard provides no opportunity to broaden or narrow the permissions of an existing group.

9.

Ifyouwanttocreateanewgrouptowhichyouwanttoassociatetheuser,completethe followingsteps: a. b. IntheEnterthenewgroupnamefield,typeanameforthenewgroup. ClicktheAddGroupbutton. ThenameofthenewgroupisaddedtotheGroupnames(s)listinthe Assigngroupsfortheuserblock. IntheGroupname(s)list,checkthecheckboxofthenewgroup. Todirectlyassignpermissionstotheuser,completethefollowingsteps: 1) SelecttheDirectassignmentcheckbox. 2) ClickthePermissionsbutton. TheAssignPermissionsdialogopens.

c. d.

note ............. The operations assigned to the user are specific to only that particular user.

445

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 300: Assign Permissions dialog

continued

446

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

a.

Assignpermissionsbycheckingappropriatecheckboxes.
button in the upper button at any time.

tip ................ To select or deselect all permissions under a given node, check or uncheck the check box of that node. To initially collapse all of the main nodes, click the right corner of the window. To re-expand them, you can click the

b.

Whenyouhavefinishedassigningpermissions(checkingcheckboxes),clickthe Donebutton.

10. Backinthewizard,clicktheFinishbutton. ThenewuserisdisplayedundertheUsersnodeintheSecuritytree.

15.2.3

Changing a User Profile

Youcanchangeausersprofilewhennecessary.Youmightwanttochangeaprofiletochangethe expirationofanaccountorpassword.

Procedure 105: To change a user profile

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowisdisplayed. UnderUsersintheSecuritytree,clicktohighlighttheuserwhoseprofileyouwantto change. Thesecurityadministrationtabsaredisplayedontherightside.

447

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 301: Security administration tabs

3.

ClicktheUserProfiletab.

Figure 302: User Profile tab

4.

ClicktheSettingProfilebutton. TheUserProfiledialogopens.

448

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 303: User Profile dialog

5.

Toenableordisabletheuser,uncheckNochangeinstatuscheckboxandfromthedrop downbox,selectenableordisable. Toreenableanexpireduser,performthefollowingsteps: a. b. c. IntheStatusfortheuserblock,unchecktheNochangeinstatuscheckbox. ForSelectthestatustobesetforthisuser,selectenablefromthedropdownlist. Proceedwiththefollowingsteps.

6. 7.

Tomakechangestoexpirationoftheaccountortheassociatedpassword,usethoseareasof thisform. Whenyouarefinishedchangingtheuserprofile,clickOk.

15.2.4

Assigning Groups to a User

Youcanassigntheusersthatyouhavecreatedtoalreadyexistinggroups.

Procedure 106: To assign groups to a user

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens.

449

Issue 4 August 2012 2.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IntheSecurityAdministrationwindow,clicktohighlighttheuserwhomyouwanttoassign toagroup. Thesecurityadministrationtabsaredisplayedontherightside. ClicktheMemberOftab. SeeFigure301onPage448. ClicktheSettingGroupsbutton. TheSelectGroupswindowopens.

note ............. It is not possible to select (highlight) multiple users for this operation.

3. 4.

Figure 304: Select Groups window

5.

IntheAllGroupslist,clicktohighlightthegroupname(orCtrl+ClickorShift+Click tohighlightmultiplegroupnames)towhichyouwanttoassigntheuser. button. Clickthe Thegroupname(s)areaddedtotheSelectedGroupslist,andtheuserisassignedtothose group(s)inthesystem.

Selected Groups list and click the button.

6.

tip ................ To unassign one or more of the other groups, select (highlight) the group(s) in the

7.

ClickOk. ThegroupsthatarenowassignedtotheuserarelistedintheGroupsforlistofthe MemberOftab.

15.2.5

Changing a User Password

Procedure 107: To change a user password
1. Doeitherofthefollowing: SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens.

450

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

2.

InUsersnodeoftheSecuritytree,clicktohighlighttheuserwhosepasswordyouwantto change. Thesecurityadministrationtabsaredisplayed. Performanyofthefollowingsteps: SelectEditChangePassword. PressCtrl+Shift+C. UndertheUsersnodeoftheSecuritytree,rightclicktheusernameselect ChangePasswordfromthedropdownlist.

3.

caution............... If you right-click on a user name when another user name is highlighted, the highlight does not move. However, the Change Password pop-up does not refer to the user by name. If you use the right-click access to the Change Password option, use it on only a highlighted user name.

TheChangePassworddialogopens.

Figure 305: Change Password dialog

4. 5.

Typethenewpasswordintobothfields. ClickOk. ThenewpasswordissavedtotheWMserver.

15.2.6

Deleting a User
Youcandeleteausertodenyaccess.
caution............... Do not delete the root user, or restrict its permissions or (most important) its permissions that govern the administration of other users, unless you have first created another user who has the same capabilities. If the root user is deleted, ask the WM server administrator to perform the steps under the section titled "Restoring a Deleted superuser Account" in the server administration guide. Then use Changing a User Password on Page 450 in this user guide to make any change in any account (new password, for example) so that the Security manager in WM is properly updated and the restored supersuser account reappears in the Security tree of the user interface. If the root user and all others who are allowed to edit user permissions are deleted or lose those permissions, you will not be able to create another user who has those permissions, except with the assistance of Cambium customer support staff.

451

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Procedure 108: To delete a user

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. UndertheUsersnodeintheSecuritytree,clicktohighlighttheuseryouwanttodelete. Doanyofthefollowing: SelectEditDelete. PressAlt+D. RightclickusernodeonthetreeandclickDelete.

important ........... If you right-click on a user name when another user name is highlighted, the highlight does not move. If you then select the Delete option, the confirmation pop-up does not identify the user. To ensure that you view the delete the intended user, right-click on only a highlighted user name.

Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

Figure 306: Warning for user deletion

4.

ClickYes.

15.2.7

Using Audit Trails

IfyouhaveadministrativepermissionintheSecurityareaofWM,thenaudittrailsenableyoutoview theoperationsthathavebeenperformedbyauser.Theaudittrailidentifiesalloperationsthathave beenperformed,thetime,whetheritwassuccessful,category,andauditedobject.Themost commonuseofaudittrailsistoexaminethehistoryofdeviceconfigurationchanges.Youshould periodicallyclearthetrailsafterhavingreviewedthem. Youcan viewtheaudittraildetailsofalltheusersorasingleuser. sortthedetailsbyuser,operation,time,status,category,andauditedobjectbyclickingthe appropriatecolumnheading. searchforauditdetailsbasedontheproperties. cleartheaudittrailswhenyounolongerneedtomanagethem.

452

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Viewing Audit Trails

Procedure 109: To view audit trails of all users
1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. InSecurityAdministrationwindow,performanyofthefollowingsteps: SelectViewAuditTrails. PressCtrl+Shift+A. Clickthe AuditTrailsbuttoninthetoolbar.

TheAuthAuditScreenisdisplayed.

453

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 307: Auth Audit screen

Variousoperationsperformedbytheusersalongwiththestatusofwhethertheoperation wasasuccessorfailurearedisplayed.TheoperationcategorysuchasFault,Topo, Provisioning,Configuration,Authentication,orDEFAULTisalsodisplayed. Inthecaseofanoperationthatinvolvesanyobjects,theobjectdetailisdisplayed. 3. Viewtheaudittrails.Asneeded,refertothefollowingsections: 4. InterpretingAuditEntriesonPage455 SearchingAuditTrailsonPage456 ViewingAuditDetailsonPage457

Tosortorreversesortthelistbythedatainaparticularcolumn,clicktheheadingofthat column.

454

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

5. 6.

Toclearanaudittrail,clicktohighlighttherowandclicktheClearAuditbutton. Toresumeviewing,clicktheShowAllbutton.

tip ................ To select a single audit trail, click it. For contiguous audit trails, press and hold Shift key while clicking the rows, and to select non-contiguous audit trails, press and hold the Ctrl key while clicking the rows.

Procedure 110: To view audit trails of a single user

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. UndertheUsersnodeintheSecuritytree,clicktohighlighttheuserwhoseaudittrailyou wanttoview. RightclickthatusernameandselectAuditTrailsfromthedropdownlistofoptions.

important ........... If you right-click on a user name when another user name is highlighted, the highlight does not move. If you then select the Audit Trail option, the system opens displays the audit trail of the user you right-clicked on, not of the highlighted user. To ensure that you view the intended audit trail, either pay special attention to the User Name column when the Auth Audit Screen opens or right-click on only a highlighted user name.

7.

ViewtheaudittrailsintheAuthAuditScreen. SeeFigure307onPage454.Asneeded,refertothefollowingsections: InterpretingAuditEntries(thenextsection) SearchingAuditTrailsonPage456 ViewingAuditDetailsonPage457

4. 5. 6.

Tosortorreversesortthelistbythedatainaparticularcolumn,clicktheheadingofthat column. Toclearanaudittrailfromthelist,clicktohighlighttherowandclicktheClearTrails. Toresumeviewing,clicktheShowAllbutton.

Interpreting Audit Entries

TheEventLoggingExtensionfeatureinWMprovidesadistinctiveauditentryeverytimethatauser opensasessioninthemanagementwebinterfaceofanetworkelement. configuresthedevice.

TheauditentriesfortheseeventsarelistedinTable43.

Table 43: Audit entries for user activity events

Event Launchingmanagementinterface Addingaconfigurationtemplate Audit Entry
Invoked the web page URL Created template TemplateName

455

Issue 4 August 2012 Event Editingaconfigurationtemplate Deletingaconfigurationtemplate Applyingaconfigurationtemplate Audit Entry

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Updated template TemplateName Deleted template TemplateName UserName executed TemplateName

Searching Audit Trails

1. PressCtrl+S.

Figure 308: Search dialog for audit trails

2.

Intheleftdropdownmenu,selectfromthefollowingpropertiestheoneonwhichyouwant thesearchperformed:

3.

Intherightdropdownmenu,selectfromthefollowingconditionstheonewithwhichyou wantthesearchperformed:

4. 5. 6. 7.

Inthetextbox,typeinthevalue. Toslimthesearchbyaddinganotherproperty,clicktheMorebutton. RepeatSteps2through4forthenewproperty. Toinitiatethesearch,clicktheSearchbutton.

456

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. After viewing the audit details based on the Search results, you can view all the details again in the same page by clicking the Show All button in the top right corner of the Auth Audit Screen.

Viewing Audit Details

Someaudittrailshaveauditdetailsavailable.Youcanaccesstheseby 1. 2. clickingtohighlighttherowoftheaudittrailwhosedetailsyouwanttoview. selectingViewAuditDetailsfromthemenu.

Whendetailsareavailable,theAlertAuditwindowopenstothereadonlyvaluesofthepropertiesof theselectedaudittrail.

Figure 309: AlertAudit window, with properties of an audit trail

15.3

Managing Groups
Agroupisalogicalcollectionofusersgroupedtogethertoaccesscommoninformationorperform similartasks.Thus,anyadministrationdoneforthegroupisreflectedintheindividualmembers(or users)ofthegroup. WMenablesyoutoorganizedifferenttypesofusersintogroupssotheycanbeclassifiedbyasetof commonoperations.Byprovidingspecificpermissionstovariousgroups,youcansavetimewhen creatingnewusers.Also,theuseofgroupsensuresconsistentenforcementofaccesscontrolpolicies thatgovernvariousclassesofusers.

457

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

caution............... This group provides the permissions to the default "root" user. Do not delete the default "Admin" group or remove user permission editing from the permitted operations for this group unless you have created another group and user with these permissions.

Otherwise, you will not be able to create any new users or edit existing users.

15.3.1

Adding Groups
Youcanaddnewgroupswhenyouwanttoprovideasetofpermissionsthataredifferentfromthose providedtoanexistinggroup.

Procedure 111: To add a group

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. 2. InSecurityAdministrationwindow,performanyofthefollowing: SelectFileNewAddGroup. PressCtrl+Shift+G. RightclicktheGroupsnodeontheSecuritytree(locatedattheleftsideofSecurity Administrationwindow)andclickAddGroup.

TheGroupsWizardopens.

458

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 310: Groups Wizard, Group Description panel

3.

TypethegroupnameandclickNext. TheOperationTreeisdisplayed.

Figure 311: Groups Wizard, Operations Tree

459

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ThistreeprovidestheexpandedlistofallfunctionalareasinWM,eachofwhichcanbe assignedordisallowedforthegroup. 4. 5. Tocollapseaparentnodeinthetreeandhideitschildnodes,clickthecircletotheleftofits checkbox. Checkthecheckboxofallnodesforwhichyouwantthegrouptohavepermissions. Selectingaparentnodeautomaticallyselectsallofitschildnodes.Fordetailedinformation aboutthenodes,seeManagingOperationsonPage469. ClickFinish.

6.

note ............. After a delay as WM updates its Security module, the new group is added under the Groups node of the Security tree.

15.3.2

Assigning Users to Groups

Byassigninguserstogroups,youcanlimitaccesstospecificsubsetsoftheWMclients.Forexample, useraccesscanbelimitedtospecifictypesofdevices.Toprovidegroupbasedpermissions,usersare assignedtospecificgroups.Thesegroupsprovidespecificpermissionsandlevelsofpermissionsto theassignedusers.

Procedure 112: To assign a user to a group

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. 4. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecuritytree,clickthegrouptowhichyouneedtoassignusers. ClicktheMemberstab. ClicktheSettingUsersbutton. TheSelectUserswindowisdisplayed.

Figure 312: Select Users window

460

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 button.

5. 6.

IntheAllUserslist,clicktheuserinAllUsersandclickthe ClickOk.

TheusersassignedtothegrouparedisplayedintheMembersforlistontheMemberstab.

15.3.3

Deleting Users from Groups

caution............... Do not delete the root user from the Admin group, unless you have first created another user who has the same capabilities.

Procedure 113: To delete a user from a group

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. 4. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecuritytree,clickthegroupfromwhichyouwanttoremoveusers. ClicktheMemberstab. ClickSettingUsers. TheSelectUserswindowisdisplayed. ClicktheusertobedeletedinSelectedUsersandclickthe ClickOk. button.

5. 6.

15.3.4

Using Custom View Scopes

Settingacustomviewscopeforagroupenablesyoutofiltertheobjectsthataretobedisplayedand onwhichauserispermittedtodotherespectiveauthorizedoperations.Byspecifyingthecustom viewscopecriteria,youcanensurethatuserscanviewonlythedataforwhichtheyhave authorizationtoperformoperations.Acustomviewscopeisasanadditionallayerofaccesscontrol, imposedonashortlistofmajorWMfeaturesthat,withoutacustomviewscope,wouldshowlistsor mapsofallnetworkelements,events,oralarms(forexample)thatareknowntoWM. Acustomviewscopeistobeappliedinadditiontoanyother,perhapsmorespecific,user permissions.Thefollowingarethesupportedcustomviewscopes: Events NetworkDatabase Alerts StatsAdmin

WMcheckscustomviewscopeofauserbeforeexecutingthefollowingkindsofreports: createdwithuserspecifieddeviceselection,suchasadevicesummaryreportonaselected deviceorasystemreportthatfiltersdevicesandrunsasascheduledtask. createdwithsystemselecteddevices,suchasaconfigurationsummaryreportorother systemreportthatrunsondemand.

461

Issue 4 August 2012 Thesereportsaredescribedunder ViewingaDeviceSummaryReportonPage225 UsingConfigurationSummaryReportsonPage341 UsingSystemReportsonPage390 SchedulingaOneTimeorPeriodicTaskonPage649

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Adding a Custom View Scope

Youcanaddanauthorizedcustomviewscopetoagrouptoensurethemembersofthegroupcan viewonlythecertaindata.

Procedure 114: To add a custom view scope

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. 4. 5. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecuritytree,clicktohighlightthegrouptowhomyouwanttoassignacustomview scope. ClicktheCustomViewScopeforGrouptab. FromtheCustomViewScopeNamedropdownmenu,selectthescope. ClicktheAddAuthorizedScopebutton. TheScopeSettingsdialogopens.

462

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 313: Scope Settings dialog

6. 7.

IntheupperNamefield,typeinauniqueAuthorizedScopeName. FortheNamefieldassociatedwithValue,selectapropertynamefromamongthefollowing dropdownmenuchoices:

note ............. These are specific to each of the Custom View Scope. For instance, selecting the Events Custom View Scope and clicking Scope Settings, provides you with the property names of Event Objects. note ............. The recommended way to limit the scope to a subnet is to select network in the Name field and type in a Value that is identical to what was entered in the Network Discovery tab of the Discovery Configurator. See Figure 283: Discovery Configurator, Network Discovery tab on Page 417. note ............. To set a network for a Network Database scope, do not select parentNetwork as the property name and set the associated value to x.x.x.0. Instead, select ipAddress as the property name and set the associated value x.x.x.*.

8.

IntheValuefield,enterthevaluefortheproperty. Toidentifymorethanonepropertyvalue,separateeachvalueaccordingtotheappropriate operatorinthefollowingvalueoperatorstable.

463

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 44: Authorized Custom View Scopes value operators

Value Operator Description Useanasterisktofilteronamatchofzeroormorecharacters. *(Asterisks) Example:Toviewallobjectsstartingwiththenametest,setthepropertykeyasnameand thevalueastest*. UseanexclamationmarktofilterthesearchusingtheNOToperator. Example:Toviewallobjectswhosenamesdonotstartwithtest,setthepropertykeyas nameandvalueas!test*. Useacommatofilterobjectswhereasinglepropertykeyhasdifferentvalues. ,(Comma) Example:Toviewallobjectswithnamesstartingwithabcorxyz,setthepropertykeyas nameandthevalueasabc*,xyz*. Useanampersandtofilterobjectswhereasinglevalueshouldbematchedwithmany patterns. Example:Toviewallobjectswithnamesstartingwithabcandendingwithxyz,setthe propertykeyasnameandvalueasabc*&&*xyz. Useabackslashtofilterobjectswhenthenameoftheobjectitselfcontainsacomma.This characteriscalledanescapesequencebecauseitavoidssearchingforobjects,asifthey hadtwodifferentnames. Example:Toviewanobjectwithnamea,b,setthepropertykeyasnameandthevalueas a\,b. Useagreaterthanandlessthansignstofilterobjectswithnumericvalueswithinaspecific range. <between>value1 andvalue2 Example:Ifobjectnameswithapollintervalvaluerangingbetweenorincluding300and 305arerequired,setthepropertykeyaspollintervalandthevalueas<300and305>. Notethatthefirstnumberissmallerthanthesecondnumber.Onlythevaluesinbetween thegivenvalues,includingthelimits,arematched.

!(Exclamation Mark)

&&(Ampersand)

\(BackSlash)

9.

ClicktheAddbutton. ThisaddstheAuthorizedScopefortheselectedCustomViewScopeofthegroup.Youcan addmorethanonepropertycriteriabasedonyourrequirements.

10. ClickOktostorethecustomviewscopeforfutureuse.

464

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Assigning an Authorized Scope for CV

AfteryouhavecreatedanauthorizedCustomViewScopeforagroup,youcanassignanauthorized scopeinittoothergroupsasnecessary.

Procedure 115: To assign an authorized custom view scope

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecuritytree,clicktohighlightthegrouptowhichyouwanttoassignthecustomview scope. ClicktheCustomViewScopeforGrouptab.

note ............. The group must have permissions in the operations area in which the custom view scope was created. You can check whether it does by clicking on the Permitted Operations for Group tab. For example, if you want to assign an authorized scope for groupname2 for which the custom view scope was created in the Alerts operation area, then Alerts should be listed in that tab:

4.

ClicktheAssignAuthorizedScopebutton. TheSelectAuthorizedScopeswindowisdisplayed.

465

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 314: Select AuthorizedScopes window

5. 6.

IntheAllAuthorizedScopeslist,clicktohighlightthescopethatyouwanttoassign. Clickthe button. ThescopeislistedinboththeAllAuthorizedScopeslistandtheSelectedAuthorizedScopes list.

important ........... If this group has not been assigned permissions in the specific operations area of the target authorized scope, then the scope is not copied to the Selected AuthorizedScopes list, and the custom view scope is not applied to the group. When this is the case, use Procedure 120 on Page 484 to assign the operation to the group, then repeat this present procedure.

7.

ClickOk.

Removing a Custom View Scope from a Group

YoucanremoveanauthorizedCustomViewScopefromagroupwhenitisnolongervalidforthat group.ByremovingtheCustomViewScope,thepropertiesarenotchangedandtheCustomView Scopeisnotdeletedfromthedatabase.

Procedure 116: To remove an authorized custom view scope

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecuritytree,clickthegroupforwhomyouwanttoremovethecustomviewscope. ClickCustomViewScopeforGrouptab. ClicktheAssignAuthorizedScopebutton. TheSelectAuthorizedScopeswindowopens.SeeFigure314onPage466. IntheSelectedAuthorizedScopeslist,clicktohighlightthescopethatyouwanttoremove. Clickthe button. NowthescopeislistedinonlytheAllAuthorizedScopeslist. ClickOk.

466

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Changing Custom View Scope Properties

AfteryouhaveaddedpropertiestoanauthorizedCustomViewScope,youcanmakechangesas appropriate.
note ............. If you have assigned the authorized Custom View Scope to other groups, any changes to the Custom View Scope will affect those groups as well.

Procedure 117: To change the properties of an authorized scope

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. 4. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecuritytree,clicktohighlightanygrouptowhomthetargetauthorizedscopeis currentlyassigned. ClicktheCustomViewScopeforGrouptab. IntheAuthorizedScopesforCVlist,clicktohighlighttheAuthorizedScopetobemodified.

Figure 315: AuthorizedScopes for CV panel

5.

ClicktheSetScopePropertiesbutton. TheScopeSettingsdialogopens.

note ............. You can add a new property/value combination, remove a property, or click to highlight a property and then click the Edit button to modify its value. In this last case, the value disappears from the Value text box when you click the Edit button. If you want to restore the value but you do not remember its exact syntax, you can read it from table above the Name/Value configuration section of the dialog window.

6.

ClickOk.

Deleting a Custom View Scope

Whenanauthorizedcustomviewscopeisnolongervalid,youcandeleteitfromthedatabase.After thisaction,youmustrecreateitifyoueverneeditagain.

Procedure 118: To delete an authorized custom view scope

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecuritytree,clicktohighlightanygrouptowhomthetargetauthorizedscopeis currentlyassigned. ClicktheCustomViewScopeforGrouptab.

467

Issue 4 August 2012 4. 5. Clicktohighlighttheauthorizedscopethatyouwanttodelete.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

RightclicktheAuthorizedScopetobedeletedfromAuthorizedScopesforCVlistandclick DeleteAuthorizedView.

Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

Figure 316: Warning for authorized scope deletion

6.

Toconfirmthatyouwanttodeleteit,clickYes. Theauthorizedscopeisdeletedfromthedatabaseandfromanygrouptowhichitwas assigned.

15.3.5

Deleting a Group
Procedure 119: To delete a group
1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. FromtheSecuritytree,clicktohighlightthegroupthatyouwanttodelete. Doanyofthefollowing: SelectEditDelete. PressAlt+D. RightclickthegrouponthetreeandclickDelete.

Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

Figure 317: Warning for group deletion

468

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

caution............... If you right-click on a group when another group is highlighted, the highlight does not move and the Delete option pops up. However, neither the Delete popup nor the Warning pop-up refer to the group by name. If you use the right-click access to the Delete option, use it on only a highlighted group.

4.

Toconfirmthedeletion,clickYes. Thegroupisremovedfromthedatabase.

15.4

Managing Operations
TheOperationTreecontainsalistofoperations(alsoreferredtoaspermissions)thatWMprovides bydefault.Theoperationsarelogicallyarrangedinatreestructurewithparentandchildoperations. Youcanaddnewoperationswhenyouneedthemanddeleteobsoleteoperations. Permissiontouseoperationscanbegranted,denied,orunspecified.Atypicaluseofunspecified permissionsistoallowinheritedpermissionstotakeprecedence.Anothertypicaluseofunspecified permissionsistosetupanarrangementofgroups,eachofwhichspecifiespermissionsfora particularsubsystembutleavesthepermissionsforothersubsystemstobespecifiedbyother groups,whereeachuserispartofmultiplegroups.

469

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

15.4.1

Default Operations
Assigningdifferentoperationstodifferentusersisanadministrativefunction.Thefollowingnodes arepresentintheOperationTree.Thistreeispresentedinthewizardwhenagroupisbeing configured.

Figure 318: Operation Tree nodes showing default user permissions

InthePermissionstreehierarchy,eachmajornodehasanassociated circle.Aclickonthecircle collapsesallofthecontentsofthenode.AcheckmarkspecifiesAllowed.AnXspecifiesNotallowed. Acheckinthecheckboxofanyparentnodeautomaticallychecksthecheckboxesofallofthechild nodesofthatparentnode.However,thechecksofthechildnodesareindividuallyundoable.

470

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Thisisforefficiency.Forexample,ifyouwanttogiveagroupallpermissionsunderAlertUser OperationsexceptClearAlerts,youcan 1.checkthecheckboxof AlertUserOperations. 2.clickinthecheckboxfor ClearAlertstodisallowit.

ThefollowingsectionsprovidedetailsaboutthenodesoftheOperationTree.

15.4.2

Configuration

Table 45: Configuration options

Operation UploadAAACertificate ExecuteTask CreateTask Audit InstallSoftwareUpgrades Description DisablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromuploadingaAAA certificateforaPMP320CPEdevice. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromexecutingtasks. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromcreatingnewtasks. DisablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromusingtheAudit nodeoftheApplicationstree. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe softwareupgradetoolinterface.

471

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

15.4.3

Events

Table 46: Events options

Operation PrintEventView EventUser Operations SaveEventsToFile GetEventParsers SetEventFilters EventFilters andParsers GetEventFilters SetEventParsers Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromprintingthelistof events. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsavingtheevents infile. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingthe existingeventparsersinWirelessManagerserver. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrommodifyingor addinganeweventfilter. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingthe existingeventfiltersinWirelessManagerserver. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrommodifyingor addinganeweventparser.

15.4.4

Policy

Table 47: Policy options

Operation UpdatePolicy AddPolicy DeletePolicy Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromupdatinganexisting policy. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddinganewpolicy. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromdeletinganexistingpolicy.

472

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromexecutinganypolicy. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrommodifyingthescheduleof aanypolicy.

Operation ExecutePolicy SchedulePolicy

15.4.5

Poll Filters

Table 48: Poll Filters options

Operation GetPollFilters UpdatePollFilters ReloadPollFilters Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingtheexistingpollfiltersin RuntimeAdministrationinterface. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromupdatingexistingpollfiltersusing RuntimeAdministrationinterface. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromreloadingthepollfiltersusing RuntimeAdministrationinterface.

15.4.6

Polling Object

Table 49: Polling Object options

Operation GetPollingObjects ChangePollingObject Status DeletePollingObject ModifyPollingObject Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingtheexistingpolling objects. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromchangingthestatusofa pollingobject. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromdeletingpollingobjects. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrommodifyingexistingpolling objects.

473

Issue 4 August 2012 Operation AddPollingObject Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddingnewpollingobjects.

15.4.7

Polling Units

Table 50: Polling Units options

Operation AddPollingUnits RemovePollingUnits GetPollingUnit ModifyPollingUnits Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddingpollingunitsor statistics. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromremovinganexistingpolling unitorstatistic. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingthedetailsofthe pollingunitorstatistic. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrommodifyinganexistingpolling unitorstatistic.

15.4.8

Provisioning

Table 51: Provisioning options

Operation ViewTemplateResult Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingtheresultsofa provisioningoperationintheActivityListview.

474

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

15.4.9

Administrative Operation
Services

Table 52: Administrative Operation, Services options

Operation ResumeNMS Description ThisoperationisperformedtoresumeallWirelessManagerschedulersif thebackupprocesshassomeerrors. ThisoperationistostarttheWirelessManagerbackupprocess.This operationsuspendsalltheWirelessManagerschedulers. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromstartingthebackup process. Thediscoveryprocessmaybestoppedduetosomeunforeseenproblems. TheClearDiscoveryoperationisusedtoresumethediscoveryprocess. Disablingthisoptionpreventstheuserfromresumingthediscovery processfromtheWebClient.

StartBackup

ClearDiscovery

475

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Security Administration
SecurityAdministrationprovidesthefollowingsecurityrelatedoperationsthatcanbeconfigured. Youcanprovidepermissionforusersonlyforcertainsecurityoperationsandrestricttheothers. Forinstance,youcanprovidepermissionforausertocreateanewgroupbuthemightnothavethe optiontodeletethesame.
caution............... it is important to always have at least one user, either direct or through groups, who has all security administration permissions. Otherwise, no one can change the permissions of another user, and the permissions structure will be frozen as it exists.

476

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 53: Administrative Operation, Security options

Operation ClearAuditTrails SetUserProfile SetUserPermission Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromclearing audittrailsintheclient. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsetting profilesforexistingusers. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsetting operationsorpermissionsforexistingusers. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewing thelistofusersadded.Thisappliestoonlytheweb client(thelinktoaccessthelistifdisabled). Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom changingthepasswordofauser. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom removingauserfromagroup. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom removingauser. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom assigningausertoagroup. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromadding newusers. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom accessingUserConfigurationlinkinWebClient. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom assigningascopetoagroupintheCustomViewScope forGroupUI. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddinga newscopeorsettingthepropertiesofascope. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddinga newgroup. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom removingagroup. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsetting permissionsoroperationstogroups.

GetListOfUsers

ChangePassword User Administration RemoveUserFromGroup RemoveUsers AssignUserToGroup AddUsers UserConfiguration

ModifyGroupScopeRelation Scope Settings CreateScopeForGroup AddGroup Group Operations RemoveGroup SetGroupPermission

477

Issue 4 August 2012 Operation RemoveOperation Operation Settings AddOperation Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrom removingexistingoperationsfromtheOperationstree. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromcreating newoperationsintheOperationsUI.

Other Administrative Operations

Table 54: Other Administrative Operations options

Operation TemplateConfiguration AddRelationship PollingConfiguration LogSettings ConfigureandReceive LicenseNotification RuntimeAdministration ConfigureLogLevels ShutdownWebNMSServer BroadcastMessage Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromexecutinganyofthe ConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesoptionsforanydevice. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe AddRelationshiputilityforanydevice. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe ToolsPollingConfigurationinterface. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe HelpLogSettingsinterface. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe ToolsLicenseNotificationsinterface. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromworkinginthe DiscoveryConfigurator. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromconfiguringthelog levels(appliestoonlythewebclient). Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromshuttingdownthe WirelessManagerserver. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe FileBroadcastMessageinterface.

478

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

15.4.10

Reports
Configuration Reports

Table 55: Configuration Reports options

Operation ExecuteConfigurationReport CreateorModifyConfiguration ReportTemplate DeleteConfigurationReport Template Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserrunningadefined configurationreport. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddinganynew configurationreporttemplateandfromchanginganythatalreadyexists. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromremovingadefined configurationreporttemplate.

System Reports

Youcanonlycategoricallyauthorizeordenythepermissiontoexecutereportsofthesecategories.

15.4.11

Threshold Object

Table 56: Threshold Object options

Operation Description DisablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrominvokingtheThresholdsand Associationsdialogintheclient,hencedisablesalloftheaboveoperations fortheuser. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromremovingthresholdobjects.

GetThresholdObject DeleteThresholdObject

479

Issue 4 August 2012 Operation ModifyThresholdObject AddThresholdObject Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrommodifyingexistingthreshold objects. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddingnewthreshold objects.

15.4.12

Topology

Table 57: Topology options

Operation ManageAndUnmanage Modify Objects Object StartAndStopDiscovery ExportTopologyData ViewNEDashboard RefreshNode DeleteObject AddNode AddNetwork Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrommanagingorunmanaging anobjectoranetworkelement. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromstartingorstoppingthe discoveryprocessofWirelessManagerserver. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromexecutingthe ActionsExportTopologyDatacommandoptionfromthemainmenu. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthedashboard foranymanageddevice. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromrefreshinganode. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromdeletinganobjectora networkelement. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddinganewnodeinthe networkmanually. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromaddinganewnetwork manually.

480

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

15.4.13

Trap Parsers and Filters

Table 58: Trap Parsers and Filters options

Operation GetTrapFilters SetTrapFilters ReloadTrapFilters SetTrapParsers GetTrapParsers Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingtheexistingtrapfilters. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsettingnewtrapfilters. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromreloadingthetrapfilters. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsettingnewtrapparsers. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingtheexistingtrapparsers.

15.4.14

Alerts

481

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 59: Alerts options

Operation AlertPickup GetAlertDetails SetAlertAnnotation SaveAlertsToFile AlertUser Operations GetAlertHistory GetAlertAnnotation ClearAlerts PrintAlertView SetAlertFilters AlertFilters GetAlertFilters DeleteAlerts Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewing existingalertfilters. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromdeletingan alarm. Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfrompickingupan alarm. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingthe detailsofanalarm. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromannotatingan alarm. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsavingthelist ofalarmsinafile. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingthe historyofanalarm. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingthe annotationofanalarm. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromclearingthe alarms. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromprintingthe alarms. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromsettingnew alertfilters.

482

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

15.4.15

Task Scheduler Operation

Table 60: Task Scheduler Operation options

Operation CreateScheduleTask Viewtasksofothers CreateUserScriptTask Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromcreatingany taskinthetaskschedulerutility. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromviewingtasks otherthantheirown. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromcreatingauser scripttaskinthetaskschedulerutility.

15.4.16

Device Tools

Table 61: Device Tools options

Operation Description Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromthecapabilityof settingtheSNMPreadandwritecommunitystringsorthe telnet/FTPIDsandpasswordsofselecteddevices. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe SpectrumAnalyzertoolforPMP320APorPMPSMorBHS devices. Disablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromlaunchingthe LinkCapacityTesttoolforPMPAP,SM,BHM,orBHSdevices.

CredentialManager

SpectrumAnalyzer

LinkCapacityTest

15.4.17

Ultralight Client Support

DisablingthisoperationpreventstheuserfromauthenticatingintoWirelessManagerUltralightvia theirWMlogin/passwordcombination.

483

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

15.5

Assigning Operations
Youcanassignoperations(includeorexcludepermissions)foragrouporforaparticularuser. Assigningoperationsforagroupautomaticallysetsthesamepermissionsfortheusersinthatgroup.

15.5.1

Assigning Permitted Operations for a Group

Typically,youwouldassignthepermittedoperationsforagroupatthetimewhenyoucreatethe group,butthefollowingprocedureishelpfulformodifyingthepermissionsofanexistinggroup.

Procedure 120: To assign operations for a group

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. UndertheGroupsnodeintheSecuritytree,clicktohighlightthegrouptowhichyouwant toassignoperations. ClickthePermittedOperationsforGrouptab. AlloperationsincludedorexcludedforthatgrouparedisplayedintheOperationsForGroup list.

Figure 319: Operations For Group panel

484

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4.

ClicktheSetPermissionsbutton. TheAssignPermissionswindowopensandshowsthecurrentconfigurationofassigned permissionsforthegroup.

Figure 320: AssignPermissionsdialog

5.

Tograntthedesiredpermissions,completethefollowingsteps: Checkthecheckboxofanypermissionthatyouwanttoincludeforthegroup. Leavethecheckboxuncheckedforanypermissionforwhichyouwantthe include/excludetobeinheritedfromitsparentnode. Checkthecheckboxtwiceforanypermissionthatyouwantexpresslyexcludedforthe group.Thisresultsin .

6. 7.

Tocancelthechangesbeforeclosingthewindow,clickReset. Toapplythechanges,clickDone.

485

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

15.5.2

Assigning Permitted Operations for a User

Typically,youwouldassignausertobeamemberofagroupthathasdefinedpermissions.However, youcanusethefollowingproceduretoprovideauniquesetofpermissionstoanindividualuser.

Procedure 121: To assign permitted operations for a user

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. 3. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowisdisplayed. UndertheUsersnodeintheSecuritytree,clicktheuserforwhomyouwanttoassign operations. ClickthePermittedOperationsforUsertab. AlloperationsincludedorexcludedforthatuseraredisplayedinthePermissionsForUser list. ClicktheSetPermissionsbutton. TheAssignPermissionswindowisdisplayedandshowsthecurrentconfigurationof permissionsfortheuser. Tograntthedesiredpermissions,completethefollowingsteps: 6. 7. Checkthecheckboxofanypermissionthatyouwanttoincludeforthegroup. Leavethecheckboxuncheckedforanypermissionforwhichyouwantthe include/excludetobeinheritedfromitsparentnode. Checkthecheckboxtwiceforanypermissionthatyouwantexpresslyexcludedforthe group.Thisresultsin .

4.

5.

Tocancelthechangesbeforeclosingthewindow,clickReset. Toapplythechanges,clickDone.

15.6

Adding Operations
Youcanaddnewoperations.Forexample,asnewsubapplicationsareadded,youmightfindthat thecurrentoperationsarenotadequateforyourneeds.Inthiscase,youcanaddoperationsthat applytothenewsubapplication. Typically,itisnotusefulforuserstoaddnewoperations.Thisisbecause,foranoperationandits permissionstohaveanyeffect,somefeatureimplementedinthesystemmustcheckthose permissions.Creatinganewoperationandassigningpermissionsforitdoesnotimplementany associatedfeatureinthesystem.Onlythepreexistingoperationsareconnectedtoexisting implementations. Foranoperatoraddedoperationtobeuseful,theoperatorwouldneedtofirst extendWMtouseanoperatordevelopedfeature. includeacheckforanewoperationintheimplementationofthatfeature. addanewoperationtothesecurityadministrationsubsystem.

486

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 122: To add an operation

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowisdisplayed. IntheSecurityAdministrationwindow,performoneofthefollowingsteps: SelectFileNewAddOperations. PressCtrl+Shift+O. Clickthe AddOperationbutton.

TheOperationsdialogisdisplayed.

Figure 321: Operations dialog

3.

Clicktohighlighttheparentoperationunderwhichyouwanttoaddthenewoperation. Forexample,Events:

487

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

4. 5.

Inthetextboxbelowthetree,typeanamefortheoperation. Forexample,EventScripts. ClicktheAddbutton. Theoperationisaddedtothetreeundertheselectedparentnode.

6. 7.

RepeatSteps3through5toaddmoreoperations. ClickOk.

15.7

Deleting Operations
DonotdeleteanyofthedefaultoperationsthatareinstalledwithWM.Ifyoudo,itwillbeimpossible tograntpermissionstothoseoperations,andthecorrespondingWMfeatureswillbeunusable.

Procedure 123: To delete an operation

1. Doeitherofthefollowing: 2. SelectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. PressAlt+S.

TheSecurityAdministrationwindowopens. IntheSecurityAdministrationwindow,performoneofthefollowingsteps: 3. 4. 5. SelectFileNewAddOperations. PressCtrl+Shift+O. Clickthe AddOperationbutton.

TheOperationswindowopens. Clicktohighlighttheoperationyouwanttodelete. ClicktheRemovebutton. Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

488

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 322: Warning for operation deletion

6.

Toconfirmthedeletion,clickYes.

489

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

16 Administering Fault Management

FaultManagementinvolvesthedetectionandrepresentationoferrorconditionsthatcauselossof functionalityofnetworkresourcesanditalsoprovideseventmanagement,including alertgeneration automatedactions eventcorrelation filteringfortraps,events,andalerts parsingfortrapsandevents

Thesefeaturesenablenetworkoperatorstodetect,isolate,andrepairmalfunctionsinthenetwork andinitscontrolsubsystem.
note ............. WM is also capable of interfacing with other management systems, and faults can exchanged between another management system and WM, so that individual faults detected by one system can be viewed in the other.

16.1

Administering Trap Parsers

TrapsarecrypticmessagessentbySNMPdevicestothemanagementsystem.Atrapmustbe representedinahumanreadableadministrativemessagethatcompletelyexplainstheproblemthat triggeredthetrap.Sinceeverypieceofinformationavailableinthefaultreportcanbeaccessed,itis possibletocreatethemessagesthatarerequiredforinformedmanagement. Whenatrapisreceived,trapparsersgenerateusefulandappropriateeventinformation.Inthe overalleventflow,areceivedtrapispassedthroughaleveloftrapparsersonlyifeither thetraphasnotbeenconvertedintoaneventobjectbyatrapfilter. thereceivedtraphasnotbeendroppedduringtrapfiltering.

Theoutputofatrapparserisaneventobject.WMispreconfiguredwithtrapparsersforall significanttrapssentbyallsupporteddevices.Undernormalcircumstances,itisunnecessaryfora usertoconfigure,add,delete,ormodifyatrapparser. TrapParsersautomaticallyloadwhentheserverisrestartedandarelistedintheConfiguredTrap Parserlist.TheincomingtrapsareprocessedthroughthelistofconfiguredTrapParsers.Theorderof thislistcanbechangedasneeded. ThematchcriteriaintheparserdeterminewhetheraspecifictrapmatchestheTrapParser.The searchformatchingTrapParsersisdonebasedonhowtheTrapParsersareorderedinthelist.Once amatchingTrapParserisfound,aneventisgeneratedbyapplyingthecorrespondingTrapParser. OnlyoneTrapParserisappliedtoagiventrapandnootherTrapParsersareappliedtothattrap.

491

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.1.1

Opening the Trap Parser Configuration Tool

TrapParserscanbecreatedormodifiedusingtheTrapParserConfigurationtool.

Procedure 124: To open the Trap Parser Configuration tool

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementNetworkEvents. SelectActionsTrapParsers(orpressCtrl+Shift+R).TheTrapParserConfigurationdialog opens.

Figure 323: Trap Parser Configuration tool

492

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

16.1.2

Adding a Trap Parser

Procedure 125: To add a Trap Parser
1. IntheTrapParserConfigurationwindow(Figure323onPage492),clicktheAddTrapParser button. Allthefieldsinthedialogboxareenabled.

note.............. Unless you have deleted all of the many trap parsers that are automatically installed with WM (which is strongly discouraged), there will be trap parsers visible in the list.

Figure 324: Trap Parser Configuration window, Add Trap Parser operation

note ............. The first block of fields is SNMP version specific.

493

Issue 4 August 2012 2.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IfthedevicetypeyouarecomposingthistrapparserforsupportsSNMPv1,clicktheClick heretoconfigureforV1button. Theblockoffieldschangestothefollowing:

3. 4.

EnteranewnameforyournewparserintheNamefield. EntervaluesfortheTrapInputParameters. Thisinvolvesnamingtheparser,givingitfieldstomatchagainstincomingtraps,andthen settingupaneventtogeneratewhenamatchoccurs.

ThefollowingtableexplainseachofthefieldsintheTrapParserConfigurationtool.

Table 62: Trap Parser Configuration fields

Field Description Identifiestheportnumbertowhichtolistenfortraps. ThetrapportistheportatwhichtheWirelessManagerserverlistensforSNMPnotifications. ThespecifiedPort(s)isnotassociatedwithaparticularTrapParser,butageneralconfiguration. Whennoporthasbeenspecified,trapswillnotbereceivedatall. TrapPort Multipleportscanbespecifiedusingacommaseparator,forexample8001,8002 ThedefaultconfigurationforTrapPort(listedintheTrapPortfield)willbetheport(s)specifiedin thetrapport.conffileunderthe/usr/local/cambium/wm/server/confdirectoryinLinux (ortheC:\Cambium\WM\server\conffolderinWindows). Ensurethatthespecifiedportsarefree. Name Match Criteria Nametoidentifytheparser. DeterminesthetrapsthatareparsedbytheTrapParsertogenerateanevent. Matchcriteriabasedonthesourceofthereceivedtrapmatchingoneofthespecifiednodeslisted inthefield. Thisisanoptionalmatchcriterion. Nodes ForanSNMPv1trap,theagentaddressreturnedbythetrapisusedwhenmatchingtheproperty value.ForSNMPv2c,thesourceaddressreturnedbythetrapisusedwhenmatchingtheproperty value. Usethecommaseparatortospecifymorethanonenode.Example:printer2,printer4 YoucanuseWildcard(*)andNegation(!)charactersinthisfield.

494

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Description

Field

Matchcriteriabasedonthesourceofthereceivedtrapthatbelongstooneofthegroups specified.(WirelessManagerprovidesawaytogroupasetofMOsbasedonsomeoftheir characteristics.) Groups Thisisanoptionalmatchcriterion. Usethecommaseparatortospecifymorethanonegroup.Example:groupX,groupY DonotuseNegation(!)orWildcard(*)charactersinthisfield AssociatedwiththeSNMPV1buttononly. SpecifytheenterpriseobjectID(OID)oftheSNMPv1trap.Whenspecified,theparserisapplied onlyiftheincomingtrap'senterpriseOIDstartswithwhatisspecifiedinthisfield. Enterprise IftheenterpriseOIDisspecifiedas.1.3.6.1.2.1.11,alltheOIDsunderthistreearematchedfor traps.Toavoidthiskindofmatching,entertheenterpriseOIDvalueinangularbrackets,suchas <.1.3.6.1.2.1.11> Ifthevalueisgivenas*,thenalltheOIDsarematched. AssociatedwiththeSNMPV1buttononly. Generic Type EachSNMPv1traphasagenerictypenumberwhichcanbespecifiedasamatchcriterion.When specified,theTrapParserisappliedonlyiftheincomingtrapsmatchthespecifiedgenerictype number. AssociatedwiththeSNMPV1buttononly. Specific Type EachSNMPv1traphasaspecifictypenumberwhichcanbespecifiedasamatchcriterion.When specified,theTrapParserisappliedonlyiftheincomingtrapsmatchthespecifictypenumber.
note this specific type is a trap attribute, and is not related to the specific type of a managed object (device).

ThisfieldisavailableonlywhenyouclicktheClickheretoconfigureforV2C&V3button. AnSNMPV2CorSNMPV3trapisuniquelyidentifiedbyTrapOIDthatisassociatedwiththeTrap ProtocolDataUnit(PDU).ThistrapOIDcanbespecifiedasamatchcriterion. TrapOID TheTrapParserisappliedonlyiftheincomingtraphasavaluethatstartswiththeOIDspecifiedin thisfield. WhenatrapOIDisspecified,alltrapsthatstartthisOIDarematchedandtheTrapParseris applied.IfyouwanttomatchtheexactOID,specifythetrapOIDwithinangularbrackets<>. WildcardAsterisk(*)charactercanbeused. IndicatesthestateoftheeventthatdeterminestheseverityshownintheEventViewer. Severity Thisseveritydetermineshowanalarmisaffectedbythisevent.Foragivenfailureobject,the severityspecifiedfortheeventcorrelateswiththeseverityofthecorrespondingalarm. Correspondstothetextfieldoftheeventobject.Thevaluespecifiedhereisenteredinthetext fieldoftheeventobjectcreatedbythisTrapparser. AppropriateprocessingbytheTrapparserensuresthatthefailureobjectreflectstheexact problem.Thisisusedtoquicklytrackproblemsandidentifytheobjectsinsteadofsimplyreporting rawevents. Usetospecifythedomainnameofanevent.Thisfieldisoptional. Usetocategorizeeventsandalarms. Identifiesthenetworknamefromwhichtheeventhasoccurred.Thisfieldisoptional.

Message Failure Object Domain Category Network

495

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Node Description Thenodevalueoftheevent.Thisfieldisoptional.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Source

Identifiesthesourcenameofanevent.IfthestatusoftheMOisupdatedwiththeseverityofthe event,thenthesourceshouldmatchthenameoftheMO,whichshouldbeupdated.Identification ofthesourceistheonlywayinwhichthestatusoftheMOcanbeupdatedintheWireless Managerserver. Enablesyoutogroupmeaningfulevents. TheURL,absoluteorrelativetothe/usr/local/cambium/wm/serverdirectoryinLinux (ortheC:\Cambium\WM\serverfolderinWindows)thatcanbeconfiguredtoprovidedetailed helpforagivenevent. 5. Whilespecifyingtheoutputvaluesfortheeventobjectthatisgeneratedinthefields,you canuseinformationintheincomingtrapProtocolDataUnit(PDU)information.Thisallows youtoeffectivelycopyinformationfromthetrapintoaneventgeneratedinresponsetothe trap.YoucanaccesstheinformationinthetrapPDUbyusingthespecialtokensthateach representthevalueofafieldinthetrap.

Group Name HelpURL

important ........... To specify Trap PDU information for Trap Parser fields, use the dollar ($) notation. For Event Parsers and Event Filters, use percentage (%) notation instead of dollar ($). The @ notation remains the same for all the three configurations.

Table 63: Trap Protocol Data Unit fields

Field SNMPV1Traps Ifthedevicecorrespondingtotheagentaddressreturnedbythetraphasbeen discoveredbyWirelessManager,thistokenfetchesthenameoftheparentmanaged object(MO)correspondingtotheinterfaceobjectmatchingtheagentaddressofthetrap received. Ifthedevicecorrespondingtotheagentaddressofthetraphasnotbeendiscovered,this tokenreturnsthecorrespondingIPaddressoftheagentaddressfromwhichthetraphas beenreceived. $Agent Forexample,atrapisreceivedfromanagentandthecorrespondingdevicehasbeen discoveredbyWirelessManagerwiththeinterfaceobjectof'IFwebserver'andthename oftheparentmanagedobjectis'webserver'.Inthisscenario,%Agentreturnswebserver. Ifthedeviceisnotyetdiscovered,%AgentreturnstheIPaddress,suchas192.168.1.30. SNMPV2C&V3Traps Ifthedevicecorrespondingtothesourceaddresscontainedbythereceivedtraphas alreadybeendiscoveredbyWirelessManager,thistokenfetchesthenameoftheparent MOthatcorrespondstotheinterfaceobjectmatchingthesourceaddressofthereceived trap.Ifthedevicecorrespondingtothesourceaddressofthetraphasnotbeen discovered,thistokenreturnstheIPaddressofthesourceofthetrap. $Community Thistokenisreplacedbythecommunitystringofthereceivedtrap. Description

496

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Description

Field $Enterprise $GenericType

ThistokenisreplacedbytheenterpriseIDofthereceivedtrap.Thistokenisapplicableto SNMPtrapsonly,fornonSNMPtrapsitisreplacedwith. Thistokenisreplacedbythegenerictypeofthereceivedtrap.Thistokenisapplicableto SNMPV1trapsonly.FornonSNMPtraps,itisreplacedwith. Ifthedevicecorrespondingtothesourceaddresscontainedbythereceivedtraphas beendiscoveredbyWirelessManager,thistokenfetchesthenameoftheparentMOthat correspondstotheinterfaceobjectmatchingthesourceaddressofthereceivedtrap.If thedevicecorrespondingtothesourceaddressofthereceivedtraphasnotbeen discovered,thecorrespondingIPaddressofthesourceaddressisreturned. ThistokenisreplacedbythespecifictypeofthereceivedtrapandisapplicabletoSNMP v1trapsonly.FornonSNMPtraps,itisreplacedwith. Thistokenisreplacedbytheuptimevalueinthereceivedtrap. ThistokenisreplacedbythetrapOIDofthereceivedtrap.Thistokenisapplicableto SNMPV2Ctrapsonly.FornonSNMPtraps,itisreplacedwith. Thistokenisreplacedbyallthevariablebindings(bothOIDandvariablevalues)ofthe receivedtrap. Example:Forthefollowingvarbinds,2.2.1.1.221INTEGER30.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1STRINGabc 2.2.1.1.1INTEGER10TheresultisifIndex:30,sysDescr:abc,ifIndex:10 Thistokenisreplacedbyallthevariablebindingvalues(onlyvariablevaluesandnot OIDs)ofthereceivedtrap.

$Source

$SpecificType $Uptime $TrapOID

$*

$#

Example:Forthefollowingvarbinds,2.2.1.1.221INTEGER30.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1STRINGabc 2.2.1.1.1INTEGER10 Theresultis30,abc,10 Forthistoken,Nisanonnegativeinteger.Thistokenisreplacedbythe(N+1)thSNMP variablevalueinthevariablebindingsofthereceivedtrap.TheIndexNstartsfrom0.

$N

Example:Forthefollowingvarbinds,2.2.1.1.221INTEGER30.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1STRINGabc 2.2.1.1.1INTEGER10 For%1,theresultisabc ThistokenisreplacedbyalltheOIDlabelsinthevariablebindingsofthereceivedtrap.

@*

Example:Forthefollowingvarbinds,2.2.1.1.221INTEGER30.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1STRINGabc 2.2.1.1.1INTEGER10 TheresultisifIndex:sysDescr:ifIndex Thistokenisreplacedbythe(N+1)thOIDvalueinthevariablebindingsofthereceived trap.Theindexcountstartsfrom0.Thistokenisreplacedbythe(N+1)thOIDlabelinthe variablebindingsofthereceivedtrap.Theindexstartsfrom0. Example:Forthefollowingvarbinds,2.2.1.1.221INTEGER30.1.3.6.1.2.1.1.1STRINGabc 2.2.1.1.1INTEGER10 For@1,theresultissysDescr

@N

497

Issue 4 August 2012 Field $IPSource $IPAgent Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ThistokenisreplacedbytheIPaddresscorrespondingtothesourceaddressofthe receivedtrap. ThistokenisreplacedbytheIPaddresscorrespondingtotheagentaddressofthe receivedtrap.

TheassociatedManagedobjectshouldhavebeendiscoveredalreadybyWMforusing SpecialPurpose thefollowingspecialpurposetags(ortokens).Thisisapplicabletoallspecialpurposetags Tokens (ortokens)enumeratedinthissection. Thistokenenablesaccesstomanagedobjectproperties.Thetagcanbeusedtoaccess anypropertiesoftheparentmanagedobjectfortheinterfaceobjectcorrespondingto theagentaddressofthereceivedtrap.(FetchingtheMOissimilartothe$Agenttag mechanism).Forexample,ifyouwanttoaccessthepollIntervalpropertyoftheparent MOthatcorrespondstotheagentaddressofthereceivedtrapandassignittosome propertyofthegeneratedEventobject,youmustspecifythetagas $AgentMO(pollInterval)againstthespecificpropertyoftheevent. Usage:$AgentMO(PropertyName) Thistokenissimilarto$AgentMO,exceptthatthepropertiesoftheinterfaceMOthat correspondstotheagentaddressofthereceivedtrapcanbeaccessedusingthistag.In thecaseofSNMPV2Ctraps,itisexactlythesameas$IFSourceMO. Usage:$IFAgentMO(PropertyName) Thistokenissimilarto$Agent,exceptthatitresultsintheinterfaceMOnamethat correspondstotheagentaddressofthetrapreceived.InthecaseofSNMPV2Ctraps,itis exactlythesameas$IFSource. Usage:$IFAgent ThistokencanbeusedtoaccessanypropertiesoftheparentMOfortheinterfaceobject thatcorrespondstothesourceaddressofthereceivedtrap.(FetchingtheMOissimilar tothe$Sourcetag).Forexample,ifyouwanttoaccessthepollIntervalpropertyofthe parentmanagedobjectcorrespondingtothesourceaddressofthereceivedtrapand assignittosomepropertyoftheevent,youmustspecifythetagas $SourceMO(pollInterval)againstthespecificpropertyoftheevent. Usage:$SourceMO(PropertyName) Thistokenissimilarto$SourceMO,exceptthatthepropertiesoftheinterfaceMOthat correspondstothesourceaddressofthereceivedtrapcanbeaccessedusingthistag. Usage:$IFSourceMO(PropertyName) Thistokenissimilarto$Source,exceptthatitresultsintheinterfaceobjectnamethat correspondstothesourceaddressofthereceivedtrap. Usage:$IFSource

$AgentMO

$IFAgentMO

$IFAgent

$SourceMO

$IFSourceMO

$IFSource

6.

TospecifyyourownpropertiestotheeventobjectgeneratedbytheTrapParser,clickthe Morebutton. TheTrapParserConfigurationdialogopens.

498

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 325: Trap Parser Configuration dialog, Event User Properties

7. 8. 9.

EnterthenameandthevalueofthepropertyinPropertyNameandMatchCriteriafields, respectively. Toentermoreproperties,clicktheMorebutton. Whenyouarefinishedaddingvaluesandproperties,clicktheOKbutton.

10. IntheTrapParserConfigurationwindow,clicktheUpdatebutton. ThenewlyconfiguredTrapParserisaddedtotheConfiguredTrapParserList. 11. Toapplythisconfigurationtotheserver,clicktheApplyToServerbutton.

16.1.3

Reordering the Configured Trap Parser List

WMprocessesincomingtrapsthroughthelistofconfiguredTrapParsersandappliesonlyoneto atrap,basedontheorderoftheConfiguredTrapParserList.
important ........... Changes to the default trap parser order may result in undesirable system behavior.

Procedure 126: To reorder the Configured Trap Parser List

1. 2. IntheTrapParserConfigurationwindow(Figure323onPage492),clickanddragtheparser fromtheConfiguredTrapParserListtoanewlocationinthelist. Tosavethisconfigurationintheserver,clickApplyToServer.

16.1.4

Viewing Trap Parser Details

Procedure 127: To view details of a Trap Parser
1. IntheConfiguredTrapParserListoftheTrapParserConfigurationwindow(seeFigure323 onPage492),clickonthetrapparseryouwanttoview. TheTrapParserdetailsarelistedinthefields. 2. Whenyouarefinishedviewingtheparserdetails,clicktheClosebutton.

499

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.1.5

Modifying Trap Parsers

important ........... Changes to the default trap parsers may result in undesirable system behavior.

Procedure 128: To modify a Trap Parser

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IntheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementNetworkEvents. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsTrapParsers. TheParserConfigurationdialogopens. IntheConfiguredTrapParserList,clickontheTrapParseryouwanttomodify. ClicktheModifyTrapParserbutton. Thefieldsbecomeeditable. WhilereferringtoProcedure125:ToaddaTrapParseronPage493withitstableoffield descriptions,editthefieldcontents.

note ............. While specifying the output values for the event object that is generated in the fields, you can use information in the incoming trap Protocol Data Unit (PDU) information. You can access the information in the trap PDU by using the special tokens that each represent the value of a field in the trap.

6.

TospecifyyourownpropertiestotheeventobjectgeneratedbytheTrapParser,clickthe Morebutton. TheEventUserPropertiesdialogopens.

Figure 326: Event User Properties dialog

important ........... These fields support the matching of traps against multiple varbinds. Each Property Name entry is the value of the name attribute and the corresponding Match Criteria entry is the contents of the associated value in the constraint definition from the TrapSnmp tag in the trap.parser file in the WM server. The tag supports multiple constraint definitions within it. In the Property Name field, do not specify a name that is already used in an existing trap definition because doing so will result in overwriting that definition. In the Match Criteria field, do not leave the field null. If you want to specify no value, then you must populate this field with *. Also, do not end the value string with $ because doing so will result in failure of the substitution operation.

500

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7. 8. 9.

EnterthenameandthevalueofthepropertyinPropertyNameandMatchCriteriafields, respectively. Toaddfurtherproperties,clicktheMorebutton. Whenyouarefinishedaddingvaluesandproperties,clicktheOKbutton.

10. IntheTrapParserConfigurationwindow,clicktheUpdatebutton.
note ............. If you try to update a trap parser with the same set of values that an existing trap parser has, the system prompts you to confirm your intention.

11. Toapplythisconfigurationtotheserver,clicktheApplyToServerbutton.

16.1.6

Deleting a Trap Parser

important ........... Changes to the default trap parsers may result in undesirable system behavior.

Procedure 129: To delete a Trap Parser

1. 2. IntheConfiguredTrapParserListoftheTrapParserConfigurationwindow(seeFigure323 onPage492),clickonthetrapparseryouwanttoremove. ClicktheDeleteTrapParserbutton. Alternatively,youcandeleteatrapparserbypressingtheDeletekeyonyourkeyboard.To deletetwoormore,pressandholdtheCtrlkey,selecttheparsers,andthenpressyour Deletekey. Aconfirmationpopupopens.

3. 4.

Todeletethetrapparser,clicktheYesbutton. Tosavethisconfigurationtointheserver,clickApplyToServer.

16.2

Using Event Parsers

Eventparsersprovideanotherlayerofprocessingoneventscreatedbytrapparsers,andalsooperate oninternallygeneratedeventsthatdonotoriginatewithtraps.Thetrapparsermakesthe notificationsreadabletotheuser.Eventparsersrefinethemessageconveyedbytheevents.Traps andeventparsersaresimilar,buttheeventparserconvertsothertypesofevents,suchasthreshold eventsandstatuspollingeventsintoareadableformatbeforetheeventsarefiltered. WhenaneventreachestheWMserver,theeventparserlistischeckedtoseewhethertheincoming eventsatisfiesthematchcriteriaoftheeventparser.Ifmatched,theeventispassedthroughthe correspondingeventparser.Theoutgoingeventfromtheparseristhenmatchedwiththeremaining setofparsers(ifanyandinsequence).Ifthereareanymatches,theeventispassedthroughthose parsers,also.Thisprocesscontinuesuntilalltheparsersarescanned.Theseparsersaredisplayedin theEventParserConfigurationdialog.

501

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Bydefault,WMhasnopredefinedeventparsers.Itperformsalltrapandeventmanipulationsby usingthepredefinedtrapparsersandtheeventfilter(describedunderUsingEventFiltersonPage 511).

important ........... Exercise caution when you create event parsers. It is possible to spoil the design of the predefined trap parsers and event filters. Cambium Networks Technical Support staff can help users design new event parsers. See Contacting Support Representatives on Page 760.

16.2.1

Opening the Event Parser Configuration Tool

EventParserscanbecreatedormodifiedusingtheEventParserConfigurationtool.

Procedure 130: To open the Event Parser Configuration tool

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementNetworkEvents. Inthemainmenu,selectActionsEventParsers(orpressCtrl+E).

16.2.2

Adding an Event Parser

Procedure 131: To add an Event Parser
1. 2. OpentheEventParserConfigurationtool. IntheEventParserConfigurationwindow,clicktheAddEventParserbutton. Allfieldsinthewindowareenabled.

Figure 327: Event Parser Configuration tool

3.

IntheNamefield,typeinauniquenamefortheneweventparser.

502

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4.

Specifyvaluesaccordingtothoseshowninthetablebelow. Asyoudo,designateeachvalueasaMatchString,aTokenizerString,oranOutputString bytypingthemintotheappropriatecolumn.

note ............. The output event of an event parser has the same fields as the input event, but with potentially different values. The match strings are strings to search for within specified fields in the original input event, possibly including the use of wildcards. If the fields of an event match all the specified match strings for an event parser, then WM applies that parser to the event. The output of the parser consists of copied, transformed, or overwritten fields as specified in the output strings of the parser. To copy specific portions (referred to as tokens) from the original strings in the event, the tokenizer strings of the parser provide a mechanism for associating numbered tokens with designated sections of an input string.

Table 64: Event Parser fields

Field Message Category Domain Network Node Description Correspondstothetextfieldoftheeventobject. Categorizeseventsandalarms. Domainnameofanevent. Identifiesthenetworknamefromwhichtheeventhasoriginated. Identifiesthenodevalueofanevent.

FailureObject Tracksproblemsandidentifiesobjects. Source Severity Identifiesthesourcenameofanevent. Indicatesthestateofanevent.

Match String
ThematchcriteriaintheEventParserConfigurationdialogboxdeterminewhethertheeventwillbe parsedbythegiveneventparser.Ifafieldisleftblank,itisautomaticallymatched;otherwise,all fields(ANDconditionapplied)mustmatchtheinputevent.Tospecifythematchcriteria,the followingspecialcharactersmaybeusedinexpressions: WildCardCharacterAsterisk(*):Signifiesmatch0ormorecharactersofanyvalue.For example,*Failed*matchesanystringcontainingFailed. NegationExclamation(!):Usedatthestartofafieldtospecifyexclusionofevents matchingthesucceedingexpression.Forexample,!FailedexcludesstringscontainingFailed.

note ............. Expressions, such as *Failed, Fai*d, and * have the expected meanings in the match criteria.

Tokenizer String
Enablesyoutoseparatetheinputfieldintoaseriesoftokensthatcanbeusedintheoutputevent object.Thetokenizerdefinitionisastringwithtokensrepresentedby$1,$2,etc.Onlypositive integersareallowedfollowingthedollarsign($).

503

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Example Match String and Tokenizer String

Considerthecasewhereyouexpectaneventmessagetextstring,suchas:
Line Card 31 failed on Shelf 54: No Response Match String

UsingtheLineCardNumber(31),theShelfNumbermayberequiredwhendefiningotherproperties oftheevent.Youneedtotagthesepropertiesastokenswithatokennumber:
Line Card $1 failed on Shelf $2: No Response Tokenizer String

Aftersuchtokenization,youcanusethetokennumberintheoutputeventdefinition. Specifying$text$1foranyfieldintheoutputeventdefinition,replacesthestringwiththevalue31; similarlyspecifying$text$2,replacesthestringwith54.

note ............. To identify the replaceable parameter of a specific field, the token number should be preceded by the field. For example, $text$1 indicates the first tokenized string of the field Message. The tokens of any field can be used in any other field provided that paragraph (1) is followed. Tokens will get applied for space-separated words only.

Output String
Theoutputstringoftheeventparserisaneventobjectthatbecomesthemodifiedinstanceofthe incomingevent.Theattributesoftheeventobjectaredefinedbythespecificationsintheevent parser.

Value
Itisnecessarytoselectcorrectvalues,particularlyforimportantattributes,namelyfailureobject (affectedentity),severity,andmessagetext. Thepropertiesthatshouldremainunchangedmustbespecificallynotedbyplacingadollarsign followedbythepropertyname.Forexample,ifthetextfieldshouldnotbemodified,thenthevalue $textshouldbeenteredintheoutputstring. Tousethevaluesoftheincomingeventpropertieswhilespecifyingtheoutputvaluesinthe definitioncolumn,specifytheexactpropertyname(casesensitive)withaprefixed$.Forexample,to usetheeventpropertySource,thedefinitionshouldbe$source.Iftheparticularpropertyhasbeen tokenizedandifyouintendtousethevalueofthetoken,thentheformatshouldbe $propertyname$N,whereNisthecountofthetokenstartingwith1.

504

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 65: Event properties

Name Replaceable Parameter (Property Token) Description Thepresentseverityvalue(e.g.,1,2,etc.)oftheevent. severity $severity SeverityvaluessetforanEventareprovidedin SeverityInfo.confpresentinthe /usr/local/cambium/wm/server/confdirectoryin Linux(ortheC:\Cambium\WM\server\conffolderin Windows). Holdsthedescriptionofthefault. text $text Example:Iftheeventisforafaultindicatinghigh processorloadthenthetextcanbesetasProcessorload high. Representsthefailureobject. Valueofentityiscloselycoupledwiththewayyoumodel yournetworkelement. entity $entity Example:Consideranetworkelementasauser'sPC.You modelUser'sPCasaManagedObject.Itcanhavefailure objects,suchasCPU,Keyboard,Monitor,etc. Aspertheabovemodeling,eventwhichisgeneratedfrom user'sPC,canhaveentity,suchasCPU,Keyboard,or Monitor. Representsthesourceoffailure. ThesourcefieldoftheEvent/Alertobjectshouldbesame asthatofthenamefieldofManagedObjectinordertoget theManagedObject'sstatusupdatedwhenAlertsare generated. source $source Example:Assumeyouhave10userPCsinyournetwork. YoumodeleachPCasaManagedObject.EachPCcanhave failureobjects(entities),suchasCPU,Monitor,etc. WhenCPUfromUser1fails,youwillgenerateEventwith properties,entity=User1_CPU,source=User1. Similarly,whenCPUfromUser2fails,youwillgenerate Eventwithproperties,entity=User2_CPU,source= User2. domain $domain RepresentsthedomainnamefortheEvent.Thisfieldmay ormaynotbeuseddependingontheapplication.

505

Issue 4 August 2012 Replaceable Parameter (Property Token)

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Name

Description Therecanbeanytypeoffaultsreportedforanentity.This fieldcanbeusedtocategorizesuchfaultsfromthesame entity.

category

$category

Example:Faultsreportedduetopowerfluctuationina devicecanbeinacategorycalledpowerfluctuationand faultsrelatedtoCPUusagecanbeinacategorycalled CPUusage. Tosetthenetworknamefromwhichtheeventhastobe raised.Thismayormaynotbeuseddependingonthe application. Thenodevaluefortheevent.Thismayormaynotbe useddependingontheapplication. Usedforgroupingpurpose.

network

$network

node

$node

groupName

$groupName

BydefaultWirelessManagerframeworkdoesnotprovide anyfunctionalitybasedongroupNameofEventobject. ButvaluesetforgroupNameofEventobjectwillbe transferredtotheAlertobject.

helpURL

$helpURL

HoldstheURLofthedocumentthatcontainsthedetails ontheevent.Thisisusefulintrackingthehistoryofthe eventsgeneratedduetoatrap.

Example Output
Field Match String Tokenizer String Output String Value Failureoccurredon SwitchAShelf54 LineCard31

LineCard31failed Message onShelf54:No Response Source SwitchA

Failureoccurredon LineCard$1failed $source$1Shelf onShelf$2:No $text$2LineCard Response $text$1 $1

Whenitisnecessarytodeliberatelyhaveanullvalueforaspecificpropertyoftheoutputevent,the outputstringforthatpropertyshouldbeleftblank. Whilespecifyingtheoutputvaluesfortheeventobjectthatisgeneratedinthefields,youcanuse informationintheincomingtrapProtocolDataUnit(PDU)information.Thisisbecauseeventsthat originatewithtrapsstillretainthetrapPDUforreference.TheinformationinthetrapPDUcanbe accessedusingthespecificallydesignedtokensthatrepresentthevaluesofthevariousfieldspresent inthetrap.

506

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

important ........... To access the values of the SNMP OID in the SNMP Variable bindings, the notation should start with % and not with $ as in trap parser. All the special purpose tags should start with % instead of $ as in trap parser. To access the SNMP OID in the SNMP Variable bindings, the notation should start with @ which is same as in Trap Parser. The values of the trap PDU can be used in any of the columns, except in Tokenizer, in the Parser defined.

5.

TospecifyyourownpropertiestotheeventobjectgeneratedbytheEventparser,clickthe Morebutton.

Figure 328: Specify User properties and Trap based Criterias dialog

6. 7. 8.

SpecifythenameandthevalueofthepropertyinPropertyNameandMatchCriteriafields, respectively. Toentermoreproperties,clicktheMorebutton. Whenyouarefinishedaddingvaluesandproperties,clicktheOKbutton.

note ............. If a criterion is configured based on the Event user property and if no definition is given against that property, then the user property is dropped in the resulting Event. The event properties id and time are not configurable using the event parsers. These fields will be copied to the values as that of the incoming event object.

9.

ClicktheUpdatebutton. ThenewlyconfiguredEventParserisaddedtotheConfiguredEventParserList.

10. Toapplythisconfigurationtotheserver,clicktheApplybutton.

16.2.3

Reordering the Configured Event Parser List

Thisfeatureisusefulbecause eventparsersthatmatchaneventtypicallyalterit. alleventparsershaveanopportunitytomatchanevent,intheorderinwhichtheyappear inthelist.

So,theresultingoutputeventmaybedifferentiftheorderinwhichtheparsersareappliedis different.Theimportantcasetobeconsiderediswhenmultipleparserscouldmatchthesameevent.

Procedure 132: To reorder the Configured Event Parser List

1. 2. IntheEventParserConfigurationwindow(Figure327onPage502),clickanddragtheEvent ParserfromtheConfiguredEventParserListtoanewlocationinthelist.
3

Tosavethisconfigurationintheserver,clickApplyToServer.

507

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.2.4

Loading an Event Parser from a Parser File

YoucanloadpreviouslysavedEventParsersintotheEventParserConfigurationtoolasfollows.

Procedure 133: To load an Event Parser file

1. IntheEventParserConfigurationwindow(Figure327onPage502),clicktheLoadFromFile button.
3

Figure 329: Load Event Parsers From File dialog

2.

Clickthe

Browsebuttonandselecttheeventparserfile.

note ............. The Browse button open a Java browser to the .../cambium/wm/server directory on the WM server device.

3.

ClicktheLoadbutton. TheEventParsersfromthespecifiedfileareloaded.Anyparserwiththesamecriteriaasone inthecurrentConfiguredEventParserListisreplacedbytheEventParserintheloadedfile.

16.2.5

Modifying an Event Parser

Beyondtheeventparsersthatyoumayadd,parserssuchasDevice Will Not Be Managedare availabletomodifyhowWMhandlestheircodegeneratedevents.Forexample,bydefaultthis parsergeneratesaneventofseverityMajorthatappliestostringsforbothmatchesandoutputs.

508

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

However,WMallowsyoutooptionallymodifyeitherorbothstringsforyourlocalnetwork.Aswith yourownandothercodegeneratedeventparsers,thisispossiblethroughthefollowingprocedure. Theseveritylevelsconfigurableinthedropdownlistsofoptionsforthesestringsareasfollows:

All Critical Major

Minor Warning Discovering

Degraded Clear Info

Procedure 134: To modify an Event Parser

1. 2. 3. 4. FromtheConfiguredEventParsersListoftheEventParserConfigurationwindow(see Figure327onPage502),selecttheEventParsertobemodified. ClicktheModifyEventParserbutton. Allfieldsinthewindowareenabled. WhilereferringtoProcedure131:ToaddanEventParseronPage502withitstableoffield descriptions,editthefieldcontents. TospecifyyourownpropertiestotheeventobjectgeneratedbytheEventParser,clickthe Morebutton. TheSpecifyUserpropertiesandTrapbasedCriteriasdialogopens. InthePropertyNameandMatchCriteriafields,specifythenameandthevalueofthe property. Toaddfurtherproperties,clicktheMorebutton. Whenyouarefinishedaddingvaluesandproperties,clicktheOKbutton. ClicktheUpdatebutton. Toapplythisconfigurationtotheserver,clicktheApplybutton.

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

509

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.2.6

Saving an Event Parser

ToreuseortoretainaconfiguredEventParser,youmustsavetheeventparserfile.Thissave operationrequiresuserpermissionatEventsEventFiltersAndParsersSetEventParsers inthePermissionstree.Bydefault,alltheeventparsersandtheirconfigurationsaresavedinthe event.parsersfileundertheC:\Cambium\WM\server\conffolderinWindowsorthe /usr/local/cambium/wm/server/confdirectoryinLinux.

Procedure 135: To save an Event Parser file

1. 2. 3. Add(accordingtoProcedure131onPage502)orreconfigure(accordingtoProcedure134 onPage509)thedesiredeventparser. Afterconfiguring/changingthepropertiesintheEventParserConfigurationdialog,clickthe Updatebutton. ClicktheSaveToFilebutton.

Figure 330: Save Event Parser To File dialog

4.

IntheSaveEventParsersToFilewindow,either provideauniquefilenameintheFilenamedialog. Thispreservesyourcurrentparserwithoutaddingittothedefaulteventparserfilein WM. clicktheSavebuttonwhentheevent.parsersfileoftheconfdirectoryisdisplayed intheFilenamedialog. ThisaddsyourcurrentparsertothedefaulteventparserfileinWM.

16.2.7

Deleting an Event Parser

Procedure 136: To delete an Event Parser
1. 2. IntheConfiguredEventParserListoftheEventParserConfigurationwindow(Figure327on Page502),clickontheEventParseryouwanttoremove. ClicktheDeleteEventParserbutton. Alternatively,youcandeleteaEventParserbypressingtheDeletekeyonyourkeyboard.To deletetwoormore,pressandholdtheCtrlkey,andselectparsers,andthenpressthe Deletekey. Aconfirmationpopupappears. 3. 4. TodeletetheEventParser,clicktheYesbutton. Tosavethisconfigurationtointheserver,clickApplyToServer.

510

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

16.3

Using Event Filters

Wheneventsaregeneratedfromdevicesinanetwork,youcanconfigureWMtosendsome notificationsorperformotheractions.UseEventFilterstoconfigureWMtoautomaticallyinitiate actionsforselectedEvents. WMsupportsthefollowingtypesofbuiltinfilternotifications: Suppressingmultipleeventsinagiveninterval Runningsystemcommandsontheserver Sendingemails Sendingtraps Runningcustomcodetofilterevents(customcodemightbeneededincaseswhere additionaldataneedstoberetrieved,orwherespecificrulesaretobeappliedwhen processinganevent.)

Aswithallevents,eventsthattriggeraneventfilterarestoredinthedatabaseandyoucanview themintheEventsviewer.TheEventsviewerisasynchronouslynotifiedassoonasaneventis processed. YouconfigureanEventFilterusingtheEventFilterConfigurationtool.Youcanusethepropertiesof theeventobjectoroftheassociatedtrap(iftheeventhasbeengeneratedbyatrap)insomeofthe fields,suchastheSuppressEventnotification,RunCommandnotification,SendTrapnotification, andSendEmailnotification.

important ........... By default, WM has a default event filter that performs key operations and that is very dangerous to delete or even edit. For example, an operator should never modify its Match Criteria (its Source or its Severity). The name of this filter is EventFilter.

The actions that this default event filter performs include: correct the source of threshold events to be the name (unique identifier), instead of the device name. ignore failure in adding this node or interfaces messages (in favor of other related discovery messages). convert node failure events to did not respond to status poll events. mirror multi-agent child device events to the multi-agent parent object. assign the correct source IP address if it was not already specified in the event. note ............. In cases where the event has been generated by a trap, the PDU information of the associated trap that generated the event can be used as tokens.

511

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.3.1

Opening the Event Filter Configuration Tool

Toconfigurecustomizedtreatmentforincomingevents,youcancreateandlaterchangeyourown EventFiltersviatheEventFilterConfigurationtool.

Procedure 137: To open the Event Filters dialog

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementNetworkEvents. Inthemainmenu,selectActionsEventFilters(orpressCtrl+Shift+E). TheEventFiltersdialogopens.

Figure 331: Event Filters dialog

16.3.2

Adding an Event Filter

Procedure 138: To add an Event FilterCriteria Phase
1. 2. 3. IntheEventFiltersdialog(Figure331above),clicktheAddFilter IntheFilterNamefield,specifyanamefortheEventFilter. SpecifytherequiredcriteriaintheMatchCriteriasection. TheSourceandSeverityfieldswillbeavailableinthemainscreenitself.Refertothe followingtablesforinformationontheMatchCriteriafields. icon.

512

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 66: Match Criteria fields

Field Source Description Matchcriteriabasedontheinformationaboutthesourceoftheevent sothattheeventsmatchingasourcecanbefilteredout. Matchcriteriabasedontheseverityoftheevent,suchasCritical, Major,andsoon.Youcanalsochoosetheseveritiesfromthedrop Severitiesbutton. downmenubyclickingthe

Severity

OtherpropertiescanbeconfiguredbyclickingtheAdvancedbutton.

Figure 332: Match criteria Properties dialog

Table 67: Match Criteria fields, Advanced dialog fields

Field Message Category Description Matchcriteriabasedonamessageoftheincomingevent,suchas Interfacefailure,StatusPollfailed,andsoon. Matchcriteriabasedonaneventobjectpropertywithacategoryname towhichtheeventbelongs.Thisisusedtoorganizeevents. Matchcriteriabasedonaneventobjectpropertywithanydomain specificinformation.Theinformationmightbebaseduponthephysical location,orthefunctionalorlogicalcategorizationofthesourceofthe event.Thedomainnameoftheeventdisplayseventsofaparticular domain.

Domain

513

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Network

Matchcriteriabasedontheinformationaboutthenetworktowhich thesourceoftheeventbelongs.Usingthiscriteria,eventsbelongingto aparticularnetworkaredisplayed. Matchcriteriabasedonanyadditionalinformation(nameofthenode) aboutthesourceoftheevent. Matchcriteriabasedontheinformationaboutanexactdeviceinwhich aproblemhasoccurred.

Node Entity

ThevaluesthatyouspecifyintheMatchCriteriadeterminewhethertheincomingeventshouldbe filteredornot.Ifafieldisleftblank,itisautomaticallymatched.FortheEventFiltertobeapplied,all thematchcriteriaspecifiedmustbesatisfied.Ifevenonecriterionfails,thefilterwillnotbeapplied. Thefollowingexpressionscanbeusedwhilespecifyingthematchcriteria: WildcardAsterisk(*)Usetosignifyamatchof0ormorecharactersofanyvalue.Example: Failed*matchesanystringstartingwithFailed.Expressions,suchas*,*Failed,Fai*led*,can beused. NegationExclamation(!)Usedatthestartofthefieldtospecifyexclusionofevents matchingthisexpression.Example:!FailedexcludesstringsstartingwithFailed. SeparatorComma(,)Usedtospecifymultiplevaluesforasinglematchcriterionby separatingthemwithcommas.Example:Critical,Majorwillmatchastringwhichiseither CriticalorMajor.

Thefollowingcombinationscanbeusedwhilespecifyingmatchcriteria. *AND,:Thiscombinationcanbeusedtoobtainthecombinedresultoftwomatching criteriathatsignifiesamatchof0ormorecharactersforthegivencriteria.Example:(*x,*y) istokenizedinto*xand*yandonlydataendingwithxandyismatched. !AND,:Thiscombinationcanbeusedtoobtaintheexclusionofeventsmatchingtwo criteria.Example:(!x,!y)isconsideredanANDoperation.Inthiscase,alldatastartingwith (x,y)willnotbematched. a,b:Thiscombinationistokenizedintotwostrings('a'and'b').Thereforethiscriterion matches'a,b'andalsothedata'a'and'b'.

Procedure 139: To add an Event FilterAdditional Criteria Phase

1. 2. TospecifyadditionalmatchcriteriafortheEventFilter,clickMorePropertiesandcomplete thefollowingsteps. SpecifythepropertynameinthePropertyNamefieldandmatchcriteriaintheProperty Valuefield.Thematchcriteriaspecifiedmustbebasedonthepropertiesofthe com.adventnet.nms.eventdb.Eventobjectincludinguserproperties.Whilespecifying additionalcriteria,specifyonlythosepropertiesthatareintheeventobject.Thename shouldexactlymatchthecaseoftheeventobject.Youcanalsoaddeventbasepropertiesas matchcriteria,suchasgroupname,helpURL,ID,andtime. Whenyouarefinishedaddingpropertiesandvalues,closetheMorePropertiesdialogand thenclickOKintheMatchCriteriaPropertiesdialog.

3.

note ............. An Event Filter must have at least one notification associated with it.

514

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Thenextstageisspecifyingthefilternotificationtobetriggeredwhentheneweventsatisfiesthe matchcriteria.Thestepsinvolvedareasfollows.

Procedure 140: To add an Event FilterNotification Phase

1. IntheActionsListpanel,clicktheAddAction icon. TheAddActionsdialogopenstoNotifications.

Theselectableactions(notificationtypes)areasfollows: 2. 3. Suppress,describedonPage516 RunCommand,describedonPage517 SendTrap,describedonPage518 SendEmail,describedonPage521 CustomFilterNotification,describedonPage523

Selectthetreenodecorrespondingtothenotificationyouwishtoconfigure. ClicktheNewbutton.

note ............. you can re-use an existing notification by selecting it and clicking the Add button (for example, to send email to the same recipient for a different event filter).

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Afterconfiguringthenotificationvalues,clickOKinthespecificActiondialog. BackintheAddActiondialog,selecttheaddednotificationandclicktheAddbutton. ThisaddsthenotificationtotheActionsListintheEventFiltersdialog. Toaddmorenotifications,repeatSteps2through6. WhenyouarefinishedaddingFiltersandActions,clickApplyandthenOK.

ThefollowingsectionsdescribethevariousnotificationtypesthatyoucanconfigureforanEvent Filter.

515

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Suppress Action
Thisnotificationtypeallowsyoutosuppress(drop)eventsthatmatchthefiltercriteria,either altogetherormultipleeventsofthesametypewithinagiveninterval.

Figure 333: Suppress Action dialog

ThefollowingarethefieldsareontheSuppressActionDetailsdialog.

Table 68: Suppress Action Details dialog fields

Field Notification Specifyanameforthenotification Name Thisradiobuttonindicateshowtosuppressincomingevents. SuppressAll Yes:Suppressesallsubsequentevents No:Allowsthefirsteventandsuppressessubsequenteventsduringthespecifiedinterval. Specifyanumericvalue(inseconds)tosuppressmultipleeventsforagiveninterval.The firsteventthatmatchestheconfiguredcriteriaisallowedandallthesubsequentevents aresuppressedforthegiveninterval.Afterthesuppressintervalhaselapsed,another eventmatchingthecriteriaisallowedandthesubsequenteventsareagainsuppressed, andsoon. Theinputforthisfieldcanbeextractedfromtheeventpropertiesbyusingthe replaceableparameter$<EventProperty>orfromthePDUinformationcontainedinthe eventwhentheeventhasbeengeneratedfromatrap.Butineithercase,itisimperative toensurethatthevaluereturnsanumericvalue. Purpose

Suppress Interval

516

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Run Command Action

Thisnotificationtypeallowsyoutorunacommandontheserverforeventsmatchingthefilter criteria.Itcanbeusedtoinvokeareminderapplication,oranyothersystemcommand.

Figure 334: Run Command Action dialog

ThefollowingarethefieldspresentintheRunCommandNotificationdialog.

Table 69: Run Command Notification dialog fields

Field Notification Name Purpose SpecifyanamefortheRuncommandnotification Specifythecommandtobeexecuted. Thecommandstringshouldbeamachineexecutableprogramontheserverthatdoes notrequireashell(itcannotbeabatchorashellfile). Example:dirExecutingthiscommandlistsinthemessagefieldoftheEventallthe directoriesundertheC:\Cambium\WM\server\conffolderinWindowsorthe /usr/local/cambium/wm/server/confdirectoryinLinux. System Command WMsupportshavinganaudiofilethroughthespeakersoftheserverdevicewhena clientsessiononthatdeviceisopenatthetimethattheassociatednotificationis triggered.Toconfigurethis,useasyntaxlikeoneofthefollowingastheentryinthe SystemCommandfield:

sndrec32 /play/close C:\Windows\Media\Notify.wavinWindows play /path/sound.wavinLinux

Beawarethataclientsessionfromotherthantheserverdevicewillnotreceivethis audiblenotification.

517

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Purpose

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Checkboxes forcommand Checkingeitherorboththecheckboxesresultsinthecommandbeingrun synchronouslyinthemaineventprocessingthread.Thisdelaysalleventsthatfollow results theeventbeingprocesseduntilthecommandexecutioniscompletedorterminatedby timeout Specifythetime(inseconds)afterwhichthecommandexecutionistobeterminated (thetimeoutvalueofthespecifiedcommand).Thisvalueplaysanimportantroleif evenoneoftheabovecheckboxesischecked,sincetheentireeventprocessingisheld upbythecommandexecution.

Toappendoutputorerrorsfromthecommandtotheeventmessage,checkoneor bothofthecheckboxesappendoutputtomessageand/orappenderrortomessage

AbortAfter

Touseshellscriptsorcommands,youmustinvoketheshellasapartofthecommandstring.The commandstringmustcontainthefullpathoftheshellwheretheEventserverhasstarted. Thefieldsforwhichthetokenscanbeusedarethecommandargumentfieldsandthetimeout (AbortAfter)fieldofthenotification.Ifthetokensareusedforthetimeoutfield,ensurethatthe dynamicallygeneratedvalueisnumeric.

Send Trap Action

ThisnotificationtypeallowsyoutosendSNMPv1/v2ctrapswhentheincomingeventmatchesthese filtercriteria.Thetrapscanbeconfiguredtohaveeventinformationifspecified.Thenotificationcan beconfiguredtobesenttoanydesiredhost.FordevicesthatsendtrapsinmultipleSNMPversions, WMallowsyoutocapturethoseversionsintoasingletrapwiththeircorrelatedvarbinds.Themost commonapplicationoftheSendTrapActionisfortrapforwarding:sendingtrapstoother managementsystemswhenWMreceivesrelevanttraps.

518

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 335: Send Trap Action dialog

ThefollowingfieldsarepresentintheSendTrapActiondialog.

Table 70: Send Trap Action dialog fields

Field Description

NotificationName SpecifyanamefortheSendTrapnotification TrapDestination DestinationPort TrapCommunity SysUpTime(secs) v1/v2C Enterprise GenericType SpecificType Specifythehosttowhichthetrapistobesent Specifytheporttowhichthetrapistobesent Specifythestringtobesetforthegeneratedtrap Specifythesysuptimevaluetobeusedinthetrap RadioboxtoselectthetypeofSNMPtraptobesent SpecifytheenterpriseOIDofthetrap.ApplicableonlytoSNMPv1. SpecifytheGTnumberofthetrap.ApplicableonlytoSNMPv1. SpecifytheSTnumberofthetrap.ApplicableonlytoSNMPv1.

519

Issue 4 August 2012 Field TrapOID* Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

SpecifytheOIDofthetrapthatisbeingsent.ApplicableonlytoSNMPv2c. ClickAddtoaddvariablebindingstothetrap. OIDValue:SpecifythevalueoftheObjectID. SNMPType:ChoosetheappropriateSNMPstringfromthedropdownlist. SetValue:SpecifythesetvalueassociatedwiththeselectedSNMPtype. ClicktheUpdatebutton. Toaddmorevariablebindings,clicktheAddbuttonandrepeatthesesteps.

Listbutton

Toaddvariablebindingstothetrap,clicktheListbuttonintheSendTrapActiondialog.TheVariable BindingListdialogwillbeshown.
note ............. In the same way as unknown traps are, trap varbinds are dumped to the event.

Figure 336: Variable Binding List dialog

Procedure 141: To add a varbind

1. 2. 3. 4. ClicktheAddbutton. FromtheSNMPTypedropdownlist,selectthesyntax. IntheSetValuefield,specifythevalueforthevarbind. ClicktheUpdatebutton.

Repeattheaboveprocedureforaddingmultiplevarbinds.Theaddedvarbindswillbeavailableinthe readonlyVariableBindingListDetailssectionoftheVariableBindingListwindow.

Procedure 142: To modify a varbind

1. 2. 3. SelectthevarbindfromtheVariableBindingListDetails. ModifytheOIDValue,SNMPType,and/ortheSetValue. ClicktheUpdatebutton. ThechangeswillbereflectedinthelistareaoftheVariableBindingListdialog.

520

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Send Email Action

Thisnotificationtypeallowsyoutosendemailswhentheincomingeventmatchesthesefilter criteria.

Figure 337: Send Email Action dialog

ThefollowingfieldsarepresentintheSendEmailActiondialog.ForalltheSendEmailActionfields (exceptToEmailIDandFromEmailIDfields),youcanspecifythevaluewiththeeventobject attributes(andassociatedtrap,ifany)usingtokens.

Table 71: Send Email Action Details dialog fields

Field Purpose

Notificationname Specifyauniquenameforthenotification. AccountName Password Specifytheusernameusingwhichthemailserverwillauthenticate youtosendtheemail. Specifythepasswordusingwhichthemailserverwillauthenticate youtosendtheemail. SpecifytheSMTPserveraddress. Example:example.comor192.168.1.139 Specifythedestinationaddresstowhichtheemailshouldbesent. Example:fault@example.com Specifythesender'saddressfromwhichtheemailisbeingsent. Example:john@example.com

SMTPServer

ToEmailID

FromEmailID

521

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Subject Message FileAttachment NOTES: Purpose Specifythesubjectoftheemail.1 Specifythebodycontentoftheemail.2

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Filessuchaslogfiles,canbeattachedwiththemail,whichwillhelp theadministratorindebuggingthefault.

iconnexttothetextboxto 1.Asyoucomposethesubjectline,youcanclickonthe selectakeywordfromthedropdownlisttohavethesysteminsertthecorresponding tokenizerstring(seealsoTokenizerStringonPage503).Thismakesthecontentsofyour subjectlinevariable.Theavailablekeywordsare

Example:

iconnexttothetextboxto 2.Asyoucomposethemessage,youcanclickonthe selectakeywordfromthedropdownlisttohavethesysteminsertthecorresponding tokenizerstring.Thismakesthecontentsofyourmessagevariable.Theavailablekey wordsforthemessagecontentsare

Example:

Foraneventthatoriginatesfromatrap,informationfromthetrapPDUisalsoavailableforinclusion intheemailmessage.Whenaneventisgeneratedbyatrap,theassociatedTrapPDUreferenceis maintainedintheincomingeventobject,iftheparameterTRANSIENT_TRAP_PDU_IN_EVENTunder theEventMgrmoduleinNmsProcessesBE.conffilelocatedintheC:\Cambium\WM\server\conf folderinWindowsorthe/usr/local/cambium/wm/server/confdirectoryinLinuxissettrue.If theincomingeventobjecthasmaintainedthetrapPDUreference,thenyoucanusethepropertiesof thetrap,withintheconfiguredeventfilter.Thepropertiesofthetrapcouldbeusedatthelevelof specifyingmatchcriteria(usingMoreoption)andalsoforspecifyingvaluesofthevariousaction fields.

522

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Themethodologyofusingthepropertiesofthetrap,usingsymbolicnotationsissimilartothatof TrapParsers,exceptforthefollowingdifferencesisasfollows: ToaccessthevaluesoftheSNMPOIDintheSNMPVariablebindings,thenotationshould startwith%andnotwith$asintrapparser. Allthespecialpurposetagsshouldstartwith%insteadandnotwith$asintrapparser. ToaccesstheSNMPOIDintheSNMPVariablebindings,thenotationshouldstartwiththe same@asintrapparser.

Toauthenticateyourselfasthesender,clicktheAuthenticationbutton.

Figure 338: Authentication Information dialog

ConfiguretheAccountNameandPassword. Field AccountName Password Purpose Specifytheusernamewithwhichthemailserverwillauthenticate youtosendtheemail. Specifythepasswordwithwhichthemailserverwillauthenticateyou tosendtheemail.

Custom Filter Notification

YoucanalsowriteyourownJavaclasstoperformsomeactionsaccordingtoyourrequirement.This classcanbeinvokedwhentheincomingeventssatisfythefiltercriteria.Thisismoreofanoptionfor adeveloperthananadministrator.

523

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.3.3

Reordering the Event Filter Configuration List

ReorderingtheEventFilterConfigurationlistcanbe importantsinceeventfilterscanalterorevensuppress anevent,beforeothereventfiltersareevaluatedonthat eventinsuccession.
noteThe default event filter named EventFilter that WM provides should be first in the evaluation list. Otherwise, undesirable system behavior may result.

Procedure 143: To reorder the Event Filter list

IntheleftpaneloftheEventFiltersdialog(Figure331onPage512),clickanddragtheEventFilter youwanttoreordertoanewlocationinthelist.

16.3.4

Loading an Event Filter

Procedure 144: To load an Event Filter file
1. IntheEventFiltersdialog(Figure331onPage512),clicktheLoad/Savebutton.

Figure 339: Filter Details dialog

2.

Eitherclickthe Browsebuttontobeginbrowsingfromthe.../cambium/wm/server directoryintheWMserverfilesystemorverifytheprepopulatedpathandfilenameisthe filtersfilethatyouwanttoload. ClicktheLoadbutton.

3.

note ............. Any filters with the same match criteria as that of the existing ones currently listed in the Event Filters dialog are replaced with the event filters from the file that you load.

524

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

16.3.5

Modifying an Event Filter

important ........... By default, WM has a default event filter that performs key operations and that is very dangerous to delete or even edit. For example, an operator should never modify its name or its Match Criteria (its Source or Severity). The name of this filter is EventFilter.

Procedure 145: To modify the match criteria of an Event Filter

1. WiththeNetworkEventsviewinfrontintheviewpanel,fromthemainmenu,select EditConfigureEventFilters(orpressCtrl+Shift+E). TheEventFiltersdialogopens.SeeFigure331onPage512. IntheleftpaneloftheEventFiltersdialog,clicktohighlighttheEventFiltertomodify. Usingthefollowingproceduresforreference,addormodifythecriteriaasneeded: 4. 5. 6. Procedure138onPage512 Procedure139onPage514

2. 3.

ClicktheLoad/Savebutton. TheFilterDetailsdialogopens.SeeFigure344above. ClicktheSavebuttontosavethenotificationtothealert.filtersfile. ClickOKtoquitthedialog.

Procedure 146: To modify the notifications in an Event Filter

1. WiththeNetworkEventsviewinfrontintheviewpanel,fromthemainmenu,select EditConfigureEventFilters(orpressCtrl+Shift+E). TheEventFiltersdialogopens.SeeFigure331onPage512. IntheleftpaneloftheEventFiltersdialog,selecttheEventFilterwhosenotificationistobe modified. ClicktheAddActioniconoftheActionsListpanel. IntheAddActiondialog,selectthetreenodecorrespondingtothenotificationthatneedsto bemodified. Usingthefollowingproceduresforreference,clickEditandmaketheappropriatechanges: 6. 7. 8. 9. Procedure140onPage515 Procedure141onPage520 Procedure142onPage520

2. 3. 4. 5.

ClicktheAddbuttonintheAddActiondialog. ClicktheLoad/Savebutton. TheFilterDetailsdialogopens.SeeFigure344above. ClicktheSavebuttontosavethenotificationtothealert.filtersfile. ClickOKtoquitthedialog.

525

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.3.6

Deleting an Event Filter

important ........... Do not delete the default event filter named EventFilter, which was installed with the WM server software.

Procedure 147: To delete an event filter

1. IntheleftpaneloftheleftpaneloftheEventFiltersdialog(Figure331onPage512),clickto highlightthefiltertodelete. DeleteFilterbuttoninleftpanel. Clickthe Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

2.

3.

ClicktheYesbuttontodeletetheEventFilter.

Procedure 148: To delete a filter notification

1. 2. 3. 4. IntheleftpaneloftheleftpaneloftheEventFiltersdialog(Figure331onPage512),clickto highlighttheEventFilterinwhichthenotificationistobedeleted. ClicktohighlightthenotificationintheActionsListpanel. DeleteActionicon. Clickthe Aconfirmationisasked. ClicktheYesbuttontodeletethenotification.

16.4

Using Alarm Filters

Eventsarecorrelatedintoalarms.Theyrepresentthecurrentstatusofthevariousproblemsinthe network.AnAlarmFilterexecutescertaincorrectiveactionswheneveralarmsarereceivedwith configurablematchingcriteria,suchassuppressingmultiplealertsinagiveninterval,runningshell commandsontheserversystem,sendingemails,sendingtraps,andexecutingcustomcodetofilter alerts.ThemostcommonuseofalarmfiltersistheSendEmailAction,whichsendsemailtoa designatedrecipient,informingthemoftheoccurrenceofahighseverityalarm. Customcodemaybeneededincaseswhereanyadditionaldatahastoberetrieved,orspecificrules aretobeappliedinprocessingthealarm.Customcodeisalsotheappropriatemechanismto configurealarmgrouping,becauseitusuallyrequiresuserordomainspecificrules. Afterfiltering,thealarmsarestoredinthedatabaseandmadeavailableintheAlarmsViewer.The AlarmViewerisasynchronouslynotified,assoonastheprocessingofanalertisfinished. YoucanconfigureanAlarmFilterusingtheAlertFilterConfigurationtool.Youcanusetheproperties ofthealertobjectinsomeofthefields,suchasSuppressAction,RunCommandAction, SendTrapAction,andSendEmailAction.

526

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

AcustomAlarmFiltercanbeconfiguredtoenablemoreeffectiveeventcorrelationandfault managementbyaddingapplicationspecificruleswhenprocessingeventsandalarms.However,this shouldbedonebyadeveloperandnotbyanadministrator.

important ........... WM is installed with a single default alarm filter named AlertFilter. Except under extraordinary circumstances, you should not modify or delete this filter, because this would result in undesirable behavior of the system.

16.4.1

Opening the Alarm Filter Configuration Tool

TheAlarmFilterscanbecreatedormodifiedusingtheAlarmFilterConfigurationtool.

Procedure 149: To open the Alarm Filter Configuration Tool

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementAlarms. Inthemainmenu,selectActionsAlarmFilters(orpressCtrl+Shift+A). TheAlertFiltersdialogopens.

Figure 340: Alert Filters dialog

527

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.4.2

Adding an Alarm Filter

Thefollowingisanexampletokeepinmindasyouworkthroughtheproceduresinthissection.This examplepresumesthatyouwantanemailmessagesenttothemanager,withthemessageinthe bodyreading
An Alert of Category CATEGORY and severity SEVERITY has been generated from SOURCE. It has been picked up by OPERATOR.

AnAlarmisgeneratedwiththefollowingproperties.(Thealarmhasmanyotherproperties,whichare notexaminedinthisexample.)

Table 72: Email alert message properties

Property Name Category Severity Source Who Property Value General Critical Printer1 James

Procedure 150: To add an Alarm Filter, example steps

1. 2. IntheAlertFiltersdialog,clicktheAddNewFilterbutton. AddanAlertfilterwiththefollowingproperties: Filter Name : Example Source : Printer1 Severity : Critical 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. IntheAlertFiltersdialog,clicktheApplybutton. ClicktheAdvancedbutton. IntheCategoryfield,typeinGeneral. ClicktheMorePropertiesbutton. InthePropertyNamefield,typeinWho. IntheassociatedPropertyValuefield,typeinJames.

528

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

9.

ClicktheAddbutton.

10. ClicktheViewAllbutton.

11. Reviewtheattributessofar. 12. ConfigureaSendemailactionfilternotificationwiththefollowingproperties: NotificationName:examplemail Message:AnAlertofCategory$categoryandseverity$severityhasbeengeneratedfrom $sourceandhasbeenpickedupby$who 13. Specifyappropriatevaluesfortheremainingfields. 14. ClicktheApplybutton. 15. ClicktheLoad/Savebutton.

529

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Onexecutingthisexample,anemailmessageissentforthistypeofalarmandithasthefollowing messageinthebodyoftheemail:
An Alert of Category General and Severity Critical has been generated from printer1 and has been picked up by James

Procedure 151: To add an Alarm Filter, criteria phase

1. IntheAlertFiltersdialog(Figure340onPage527),clickthe TheAlertFiltersdialogopens. AddNewFiltericon.

Figure 341: Alert Filters dialog, example added

2.

SpecifyanamefortheAlarmFilterintheFilterNamefield.

3.

SpecifytherequiredcriteriaintheMatchCriteriasection. TheSourceandSeverityfieldsareavailableinthisdialog.Refertothefollowingtablesfor informationontheMatchCriteriafields.

530

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 73: Alarm Match Criteria fields

Field Representsthesourceoffailure. ThesourcefieldoftheEvent/Alertobjectshouldbesameasthatofthenamefieldof ManagedObjectinordertogettheManagedObject'sstatusupdatedwhenAlertsare generated. Source Example:Assumeyouhave10userPCsinyournetwork.YoumodeleachPCasa ManagedObject.EachPCcanhavefailureobjects(entities),suchasCPU,Monitor,etc. WhenCPUfromUser1fails,youwillgenerateEventwithproperties,entity=User1_CPU, source=User1. Similarly,whenCPUfromUser2fails,youwillgenerateEventwithproperties,entity= User2_CPU,source=User2. Severity Matchcriteriabasedontheseverityofthealarm,suchasCriticalorMajor. OtherpropertiescanbeconfiguredbyclickingtheAdvancedbutton. Description

Figure 342: Match criteria Properties dialog

Table 74: Match criteria Properties fields

Field Message Category Description Matchcriteriabasedonamessageoftheincomingalarm,suchas InterfacefailureorStatuspollfailed. Matchcriteriabasedonanalarmobjectpropertywithacategoryname towhichthealarmbelongs.Thisisusedtoorganizealarms.

531

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Domain Network Node Entity Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Representsthedomainnameforthealarm.Thisfieldmayormaynot beuseddependingontheapplication. Tosetthenetworknamefromwhichthealarmhastoberaised.This mayormaynotbeuseddependingontheapplication. Thenodevalueforthealarm.Thismayormaynotbeuseddepending ontheapplication. Matchcriteriabasedontheinformationaboutanexactdeviceinwhich aproblemhasoccurred.

ThevaluesthatyouspecifyintheMatchCriteriadeterminewhethertheincomingalarm shouldbefiltered.Ifthisfieldisleftblank,itisautomaticallymatched.FortheAlarmFilterto beapplied,allthematchcriteriaspecifiedmustbesatisfied.Ifevenonecriterionfails,the Filterwillnotbeapplied.

Procedure 152: To add an Alarm Filter, additional criteria phase

1. TospecifyadditionalmatchcriteriafortheAlarmFilter,clickMoreProperties.

Figure 343: More Properties dialog

2. 3.

InthePropertyNamefield,typeinthenamefortheadditionalproperty. ThePropertyNameshouldexactlymatchthecaseofthealertobject. SpecifythematchcriteriainthePropertyValuefield. ThematchcriteriaspecifiedshouldbebasedonthepropertiesoftheAlertobjectandcan alsoincludeuserproperties. Optionally,addalarmbasepropertiesasmatchcriteria,suchasgroupname,helpURL,ID, andtime. Whenyouarefinishedaddingpropertiesandvalues,clicktheAddbutton. DismisstheMorePropertiesdialog. IntheMatchCriteriaPropertiesdialog,clickOK.

4. 5. 6. 7.

532

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 153: To add an Alarm Filter, notifications phase

1. 2. IntheActionsListpanel,clicktheAddAction button. Selectthetreenodecorrespondingtothenotificationyouwishtoconfigure(thisisthefilter notificationtobetriggeredwhentheincomingalertsatisfiesthematchcriteria).Theaction typesthatcanbeconfiguredforanAlarmFilterare: 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. SuppressAction(seeSuppressActiononPage516) RunCommandAction(seeRunCommandActiononPage517) SendTrapAction(seeSendTrapActiononPage518) SendEmailAction(seeSendEmailActiononPage521) CustomFilter(seeCustomFilterNotificationonPage523)

ClicktheNewbutton. Configurethenotification. Afterconfiguringthenotificationvalues,clickOKinthenotificationconfigurationdialog. IntheNotificationstreeoftheAddActiondialog,clicktohighlightthenewlyadded notification. ClicktheAddbutton. ThisaddsthenotificationtotheActionsListoftheAlertFiltersdialog. Toaddmorenotifications,clicktheAddAction aboveforthenextnotification. buttonandrepeatthestepsdescribed

AfteraddingeachFilterorNotification,clicktheApplybutton.

10. ClickOK.

16.4.3

Reordering the Alarm Filter Configuration List

Alarmfiltersareevaluatedintheordershownin thelist,andallalarmfiltersareevaluated.Since alarmfilterscanedit(orsuppress)alarms,the orderofevaluationisimportant.Thedefault AlertFilteralarmshouldalwaysbefirstinthe list.

Procedure 154: To reorder the Alert Filters

IntheleftpaneloftheAlertFiltersdialog(Figure 340onPage527),clickanddragtheAlertFilter toanewlocationinthelist.

533

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

16.4.4

Loading an Alarm Filter

Procedure 155: To load an Alert Filter file
1. IntheAlertFiltersdialog(Figure340onPage527),clicktheLoad/Savebutton. TheFilterDetailsdialogopens.

Figure 344: Filter Details dialog

2.

Eitherclickthe Browsebuttontobeginbrowsingfromthe.../cambium/wm/server directoryintheWMserverfilesystemorverifytheprepopulatedpathandfilenameisthe filtersfilethatyouwanttoload.. ClickLoad.

3.

note ............. Any filters with the same match criteria as that of the existing ones currently listed in the Alert Filters dialog are replaced with the Alert Filters from the file that you load.

16.4.5

Modifying an Alarm Filter

important ........... Do not modify the default alarm filter named AlertFilter, which was installed with WM software.

Procedure 156: To modify the match criteria for an Alarm Filter

1. WiththeAlarmsviewinfrontintheviewpanel,fromthemainmenu,select EditConfigureAlarmFilters(orpressCtrl+Shift+E). TheAlertFiltersdialogopens.SeeFigure340onPage527. IntheleftpaneloftheAlertFiltersdialog,clicktohighlightthealarmfiltertomodify. Usingthefollowingproceduresforreference,addormodifythecriteriaasneeded: 4. 5. 6. 7. Procedure151onPage530 Procedure152onPage532

2. 3.

ClicktheApplybutton. ClicktheLoad/Savebutton. TheFilterDetailsdialogopens.SeeFigure344above. ClicktheSavebuttontosavethefiltertothealert.filtersfile. ClickOKtoapplythenewcriteriaandquitthedialog.

534

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 157: To modify the notifications for an Alarm Filter

1. WiththeAlarmsviewinfrontintheviewpanel,fromthemainmenu,select EditConfigureAlarmFilters(orpressCtrl+Shift+E). TheAlertFiltersdialogopens.SeeFigure340onPage527. IntheleftpaneloftheAlertFiltersdialog,clicktohighlightthealarmfiltertomodify. ClicktheAddActioniconoftheActionsListpanel. IntheAddActiondialog,selectthetreenodecorrespondingtothenotificationthatneedsto bemodified. UsingProcedure153onPage533forreference,clickEditandmaketheappropriate changes. ClickOKintheAddActiondialog. ClicktheApplybutton. ClicktheLoad/Savebutton. TheFilterDetailsdialogopens.SeeFigure344above.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 8. 9.

10. ClicktheSavebuttontosavethenotificationtothealert.filtersfile. 11. ClickOKtoquitthedialog.

16.4.6

Deleting an Alarm Filter

important ........... Do not delete the default alarm filter named AlertFilter, which was installed with WM software.

Procedure 158: To delete an alarm filter

1. 2. IntheleftpaneloftheAlertFiltersdialog(Figure340onPage527),selectthefiltertodelete. DeleteFilterbuttoninleftpanel. Clickthe Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

3.

ClickYestodeletethealarmfilter.

Procedure 159: To delete a filter notification

1. 2. 3. FromtheleftpaneloftheAlertFiltersdialog(Figure340onPage527),clicktohighlightthe alarmfilterwhosenotificationyouwanttodelete. IntheActionsListpanel,clicktohighlightthenotification. DeleteActionbutton. Clickthe Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

535

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

4.

ClickYestodeletethenotification.

16.5
16.5.1

Performing Alarm Operations

Deleting an Alarm
Youhaveanoptiontodeleteanalarmwhenyoufeelthatthealarmisnotsignificantorthatthe alarmhasbeencleared.Bydefault,thealarmsthathaveaClearstatusformorethan24hoursare deleted.Thisdeletionwillhappenevery60minutesautomatically.Butifyouwanttomanually deletetheclearedalarms,usethisoption.
CAUTION ........... Deleting an alarm entirely removes the alarm from the database, including its history. Typically, alarms are deleted by only the execution of policies that were designed for this purpose.

Procedure 160: To delete a triggered alarm

1. 2. 3. OpentheApplicationstree,selectFaultManagementAlarms. IntheAlarmsview,clicktohighlightthealarmthealarmthatyouwanttodelete. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditDelete,orpressCtrl+R. Thesystempromptsforconfirmation.

4.

RespondtotheconfirmationrequestbyselectingOK.

536

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

16.5.2

Grouping Triggered Alarms

Foreaseofadministration,youcangroupalarmsbasedonsomecriteria.Forexample,youcangroup allthealarmspertainingtoasingledeviceandrepresentthemasasingleunit. Thegroupedalarmsaredepictedasasinglerepresentativeintheclient.Thisrepresentativeisbased onthevaluespecifiedforthegroupNamefieldpresentintheEventsandAlarmsviews.Tomakethis groupingpossible,performthefollowingsteps: 1. IntheTrapParserConfigurationtool,setavaluetotheGroupNamefield. ThiswillsettheGroupNameasspecifiedhereforalltheEventsthataregeneratedbythis TrapParser.UseProcedure128:TomodifyaTrapParseronPage500forreference. IntheEventParserConfigurationtool,clicktheMorebutton.UseProcedure134:Tomodify anEventParseronPage509forreference. IntheSpecifyUserpropertiesandTrapbasedCriteriasblockoftheEventParser Configurationdialog a. b. c. settheFieldNameasgroupName. settheOutputStringwiththe<name of the group>. leavetheMatchStringandtheTokenizerStringcolumnsempty.

2. 3.

warning.............. When you specify the value for the GroupViewMode in the Alarms Custom View, the server will fetch data from the database for every received alarm. The server does not maintain the details of all the alarms in a group and, as a result, must fetch the data from the database. This constant fetching can degrade the performance of the server.

16.6

Assigning Fault Management Privileges

Youcanrestrictauserfromaccessingcertaindataandalsoconfinetheusertoviewingandworking ononlyselectednetworkeventsandalarms.ThisisachievedusingtheCustomViewScope mechanismofSecurityManagement. Thissectionprovidesanexample,basedonwhichyoucancreateyourownCustomViewScopes. Thisexamplecovers creatingausernamedFaultMgr. associatingthisuserwithanewgroupnamedfaultgroup. providingtofaultgroupthepermissiontoviewandperformoperationsonalarmsfroma specificnetworkelementnamedrouter1andwithanalarmseverityofMajor.

Procedure 161: To assign fault management privileges (example case)

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectToolsAdministrationSecurityAdministration. TheSecurityAdministrationtoolisdisplayed. Eitherclickthe AddUserbuttonorselectFileNewAddUserfromthemainmenu.

2. 3.

AddanewusernamedFaultMgr.

537

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

538

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4. 5.

Addanewgroupnamedfaultgroup. Assignrequiredpermissionstothefaultgroup.

539

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

6.

AssignthenewuserFaultMgrtothefaultgroup.

540

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. Some delay may be encountered as WM updates its Security module.

7.

SettheScopeCriteriaasfollows: a. SelectfaultgroupontheSecuritytree.

b.

ClicktheCustomViewScopeforGrouptab.

541

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

c.

FromCustomViewScopeforGroupdropdownmenu,selectAlerts.

d.

ClickAddAuthorizedScope. TheScopeSettingsdialogisdisplayed.

542

WM Release 4.0 User Guide EntertheNameasRouter1_Major. FromtheNamedropdownmenu,selectthepropertyseverity. EntertheValueas2. ClickAdd. FromtheNamedropdownmenu,selectthepropertysource. EntertheValueasrouter1.

Issue 4 August 2012

e. f. g. h. i. j.

k. l.

ClickAdd. ClickOK.

note ............. Some delay may be encountered as WM updates its Security module.

543

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Result
TheauthorizedscopeisaddedtotheAuthorizedScopeslistintheCustomViewScopeforGrouptab. WhenyouloginwithusernameFaultMgr,youwillbeabletoviewonlythealarmsofthenetwork elementrouter1withMajorseverity.

544

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

17 Administering Performance Management

Bydefault,WMissetuptogatherallsignificantperformancedatastatisticsfromalldiscovered devices.Theperformancedatasetupforeachdeviceisdefinedinitsdeviceconfigurationfileonthe WMserver,andincludesalistofSNMPOIDsalongwithdisplaynamesforeach,andotherfields. Whenadeviceisdiscovered,WMdistinguishesitsspecifictypeasanormalpartofdiscovery.Then WMappliesthecorrespondingdeviceconfigurationfile,includingthesetupofcorresponding performancedatastatisticpolling.Inthisway,astandardandpracticallyexhaustivedevicetype specificperformancedatastatisticpollingsetupisappliedtoeachdeviceupondiscovery,afterwhich theonlymodificationthatmostusersmustmakeistooccasionallymodifythepollingintervalfora statisticthatisalreadybeingpolled. Forthisreason,itisextremelyrareforaWMusertohaveanyneedtosetupperformancedata collectionindependentofthedeviceconfigurationfiles(toaddanentirelynewstatistictobepolled). However,itispossiblethatinexceptionalcasestherewillbearequirementtodoso.Forthese exceptionalcases,theinstructionsinthissectionpresenttheworkflow forcreatingaperformancedatastatisticpollingconfigurationforadevicethatWMhas discovered. foraddinganewstatistictobepolled(onethatisnotspecifiedbythedeviceconfiguration file).

17.1

Data Collection
Networkperformanceisevaluatedbasedonhoweachnetworkelementisperforming.Readonly performancedatastatisticsmustbecollectedfromthoseelements.Eachdevicedealswithvaried data,someofthembeing howmanyoctets(bytes)itreceives howmanyoctets(bytes)itsends thespeedofthedeviceinresponding.

Youmustknowfromwhichdevicetocollectdataandwhatdatatocollect. Oncedatacollectionstarts,thecollecteddataisstoredinthedatabaseforfuturereference. Tomonitornetworkperformance,youneedtocheckwhetherthecollecteddataisoptimal.For example,theoptimalspeedofanRk5switchshouldbe100000,tobeconsideredefficient. Forsomecriticalperformancedatastatistics,itisusefultodefinethresholds.Athresholdobject containsavalueforWMtocompareagainstthevaluethatitcollectsviapolling.Ifthecollectedvalue fromthedevicecrossesthethreshold,theperformanceofthedevicemayhavebecomedegraded. InadditiontoawarenessofWMdatacollectionanditsmonitoringagainstthresholdvalues,youneed somewaytoviewtheresultsofdatacollectionandthresholdapplication.Forthispurpose,the Performancemoduleprovidesanotificationandreportingmechanism.(SeePerformanceData ViewingAlternativesonPage386.) Datacollectionistheprocessofcollectingusefulreadonlyinformationfromnetworkelements.The collecteddataisusedinformulasthatcalculatenetworkperformance.Theperformanceofyour networkdependsonthedatayouselect.

545

Issue 4 August 2012 Thissectiondescribeshow,byconfiguringdatacollection,youcan specifyfromwhichdevicesthedataistobecollected. selectparticulardatatocollectornotcollect. temporarilystopdatacollectionandresumewheneveryouwish. choosetheprotocolfordatacollection.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

setstorageoptions,suchasspecifyingwhenandwheretostorecollecteddata.

17.1.1

Elements Involved in Data Collection

ToconfiguredatacollectioninWM,youneedanunderstandingofthedatacollectionprocessand theelementsthatareinvolved.

Managed Object (MO)

TheManagedObject(MO)iscreatedbyWMduringdiscovery.AnMOrepresentsanentitythatcan beadevice(asawhole)orapartofthedevice(suchasaport,card,slot,orinterface.AnMO containsthepropertiesoftheentity,suchasnameandtype.

Polling Object
ThePollingObjectiscreatedbythePerformancemodule.Thisobjectcontainsthefollowingtwo properties: MatchCriteriaspecifiestheconditionstobesatisfiedbytheMO.Onlywhenthese conditionsaresatisfiedwilltheMObeconsideredfordatacollection.Forexample,isSNMP= truespecifiesthattheMOshouldbeanSNMPnodeinordertomatch. DataCollectionCriteriaspecifiesthelistofdatatobecollectedfromtheMO.

PolledDataistheunitofdatacollectionwhenyouspecifywhatdataistobecollectedinthePolling Objectandstoredinthedatabase.Forexample,ifthedatanumberofoctetsreceivedbytheinterface ofadevicehastoberetrievedthenaPolledDatawiththenameofInterface_if_inoctetcanbe created.TheWMuserinterfaceandmenuoptionsrefertoPolledDataobjectsasStatistics. PolledDatacanbecreatedeitherviaaPollingobjectdefinitionordirectlyforaManagedObject. WithaPolledDatadefinition thevaluesetforthestatuspropertyofaPollingObjectreflectsonthePolledData. thesetofPolledDataistreatedasasinglegroup,anddeletionofPollingObjectautomatically deletestheassociatedPolledData. thedefinitionmethodisusefulwhenyouwanttocreatemanyPolledDataobjectsfor individualManagedObjects,whereinthematchcriteriaofthePollingObjectsatisfiesthe ManagedObjectproperties.

546

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

WithdirectPolledData onlyonePolledDatacanbeaddedatatimeforaManagedObject,andeachmustbe individuallymodifiedanddeleted. thedirectmethodcanbepreferablewhenfewerPolledDataaretobecreated. PolledDataaddedforthesameManagedObjectistreatedseparately.Anychangeinthe PollingObjectassociatedwiththeManagedObjectdoesnotaffectthePolledData.

Poll Filter
WhenPolledDataiscreatedforanMOasspecifiedinthedatacollectioncriteria,itcanundergoa changeinproperties,orsomemorePolledDatacanbeadded,oranexistingsetmayneedtobe deleted.ThisisachievedbycreatingaPollFilterobjectinwhichtheactiontobeperformedis defined.

17.1.2

Data Collection Process

Thefollowingstepsareinvolvedinconfiguringdatacollection: 1. UponWMserverstartup,PollingObjectsarecreatedbasedonadefinitionpresentinthe WMserver.EachPollingobjectinitselfcontainstwodefinitions:MatchCriteriaandData CollectionCriteria.

note ............. Default polling objects encompassing practically all useful performance data for all supported device types are installed with WM.

2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.

WheneveraManagedObjectisdiscovered,itisgivenasinputtothePollingObject. TheMatchCriteriaofthePollingobjectarecomparedwiththepropertiesoftheManaged Object. IftheMatchCriteriaaremet,thenPolledDataiscreatedforeveryentryspecifiedinData CollectionCriteriaandassociatedwiththeMO. IfPollFiltersexist,thenthecreatedPolledDataispassedthroughthePollFilteronebyone toundergoappropriatemodifications.ThenthefilteredPolledDataisaddedtothedatabase. IfPollFiltersdonotexist,thenPolledDataisaddedtothedatabasewithoutmodifications. EveniftheMatchCriteriaarenotsatisfied,theManagedObjectispassedthroughPoll Filters.IfyouwanttoaddasinglePolledDataforaparticularManagedObject,youdonot needtocreateaPollingObject.

Thedefinitionofwhatdatatocollectandfromwhichdeviceisrecordedinthedatabase,andthe Performancemoduleusesthisinformationfordatacollection.

547

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

17.1.3

Creating a Polling Object

Byprovidinganexample,thissectionexplainshowtocreatePollingObjects.
note ............. Default Polling Objects are installed with WM software and should be sufficient for all but the most extraordinary situations.

AssumethatyouwanttocreateaPollingObjecttoidentifyManagedObjects(MOs)thatsupport SNMPandareoftypeNode.TypeoftheMOspecifieswhetheritisanode,network,router,or switch,forexample.

Procedure 162: To create a Polling Object

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsPollingObjectsAddPollingObjects. ThePollDetailswizardisdisplayed,includingalistontheleftofthedefaultpollingobjects installedwithWMandanythathavebeencreatedbyusers.Onlydefaultpollingobjectsfor devicetypesthathavebeendiscoveredappearinthelist.Asdescribedearlier,thedefault pollingobjectsarebuiltusingthespecificationsinthedeviceconfigurationfilesfor discovereddevices.Thefieldsontheinitialscreenofthewizardareatfirstdisabled,since thefirstpollingobjectinthelistisselectedwhenthewizardstartsyoucannoteditthe nameofanexistingpollingobject.
caution............... If you edit or change one of the default polling objects that is installed with WM, undesirable system behavior may result.

3.

ClicktheAddbutton. Thefieldsbecomereadwrite.

548

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 345: Poll Details dialog, General Properties frame

4.

Specifyappropriatevaluesinthefollowingfields(eachfieldisapropertyofthePolling Object): PollingObjectName:AstringtoidentifythePollingobject. Example:NodePollObj.Thisisamandatoryfield.

note ............. The default polling objects have names consisting of the specific type of device and the SNMP agent name for the device that will be polled. In some cases, the type and the agent name are the same.

Status:Availableascheckbox,checkedbydefault. Whenthisischecked,thePollingObjectisactive,anddatacollectionforits associatedPolledDatacanbedone. Whenthisisunchecked,datacollectionfortheassociatedPolledDataisstopped. Whenthisischecked,thedefinitionofthePollingObjectisappliedoverexisting ManagedObjects,andtheywillbeupdatedwithinformationgiveninPolling Objects. Whenthisisunchecked,itisnotappliedoverexistingMOs.

UpdateManagedObjects:Availableascheckbox,uncheckedbydefault.

549

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Example:AssumeyouhavetwentyMOsandforeachyouhavetwoPolledDataadded.If youwanttoaddtwomorePolledDataforaparticularsetofManagedObjects,youcan specifythematchcriteriainthePollingObjectandtheinformationaboutthenew PolledData.Nowifthisfieldisselected Ifthisboxischecked,assoonasaPollingObjectisaddedfortheexistingMOsthat satisfythematchcriteria,thetwoPolledDataisadded. Ifthisboxisnotchecked,thePollingObjectisusedforonlynewlycreatedMOs. 5. ClicktheNextbutton. ThenextscreenofthewizardistosettheMatchCriteriathataManagedObjectshould satisfyfordatatobecollectedfromit.

Figure 346: Poll Details, Managed Object match criteria

YoucanspecifytheMatchcriteriaintwoways: usingManagedObjectCriteria usingUserClass

Using Managed Object Properties to Specify Match Criteria

EachMOhasasetofproperties.YoucanusethosepropertiesintheMatchcriteria.Youmustspecify atleastoneproperty. Example:OneofthepropertiesofanMOisisSNMP.ThisstoresthevaluetrueiftheMOdenotesan SNMPobject(onethatusesSNMPforcommunication).Youcanspecifyoneofthematchcriteriaas isSNMP=true. Youcanspecifyanynumberofmatchcriteria.TheonlylimitationisthatthePerformancemodule currentlysupportscomparingonlyStringandlong(Numeric)values.

550

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 163: To specify a match criteria via Managed Object properties

1. 2. 3. 4. SelectthetypeofPropertytobecompared:StringorNumeric. SpecifytheMOproperty. Choosethecomparisonoperatorthathastobedisplayed,basedonthetypeyouhave chosen. Specifythevaluetobecompared. Forthisexample,setthefollowingvalues: StringisSNMPequalstrue StringisNodeequalstrue 5. ThedefaultsetofMOpropertiesarelistedbelow.Youcanusethesetosetthematch criteria.

note ............. Your environment can have more properties added to MO, in which case, you must be aware of those new properties: status, type, managed, isGroup, isContainer, isSNMP, isDHCP, isRouter, isNode, isNetwork, isInterface, sysName, sysOID, ifSpeed, ifDescr, ifIndex.

6. 7. 8.

ThereisacheckboxbesideeveryMatchCriteriarow. Checkthecheckboxofeachrowthatyouhaveadded. Toremoveanymatchcriteriarow,selectitandclickRemove.

Using User Class to Specify Match Criteria

WhenyouspecifyalistofMatchCriteriabasedonMOproperties,animplicitANDoperationis performedamongtheresults.(Ifyouspecifytwoconditions,bothofthemmustbesatisfiedforthe ManagedObjecttobeconsideredfordatacollection).Ifyouwanttochangethisdefaultpattern, youcanwriteyourownclassandrefertoitintheUserClassproperty. Forexample,youmaywanttospecifythatonlyifeitherofthetwoconditionsissatisfied,theMOfor datacollectionshouldbeconsidered.Thenextstepistodefinewhatistobecollectedfromthe device.
note ............. Writing your own Java user classes is not a supported WM feature. The existing managed object classes for supported devices are available from Technical Support. See Contacting Support Representatives on Page 760.

Defining Data to Be Collected via SNMP

AfteryouhavedecidedforwhichManagedObjects(MOs)tocollectdata,youmustchoosethetype ofdatatobecollectedandthelocation.DatafromtheMOcanbeaccessedfromitsagent.Anagent isaprogramrunningonadevicethatawaitsadatacollectionrequest.Whenarequestismadetothe agentforaparticulardata,thecorrespondingOID(ObjectIdentifierauniqueidentificationnumber) mustbespecified.AnOIDuniquelyidentifiesaspecificcharacteristicoftheManagedMO.Inorderto collectthedata,youmustspecifytheOIDforthatcharacteristic.ThetermOIDisgenericallyusedas dataidentifier.OIDisSNMPspecificterm. ThelistofOIDscanberetrievedfromtheMIBdefinitionofthedevice.AMIBisalogicaldatabase madeupoftheconfiguration,status,andstatisticalinformationstoredinadevice.UsetheMIB BrowsertoolbundledwithWMproduct.LoadtheMIBofthedevicefromwhichyouwanttocollect data,thenfindtheOIDsinitforwhichyouwanttocollectdata.

551

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Bydefault,thePerformancemoduleusesSNMPfordatacollectionandRFC1213MIBStandardsfor OIDs.Alternatively,youcanuseyourownprotocolandselectOIDsfromvariousMIBs.Inparticular, thedevicessupportedbyWMhavetheirownMIBsinadditiontosupportinglargeportionsofthe RFC1213MIBforbasicfields.

note ............. The WM interface refers to an OID as a Data Identifier.

Selecting the Data Identifier for Data Collection

InthePollingObjectcreationprocess,proceedtothethirdscreen(clicktheNextbutton)ofthePoll Detailsdialog.

Figure 347: Poll Details, Data Configuration parameters

ThefollowingtablesdescribeeachofthefieldsavailableinthePollDetailsdialog.Allthe DataIdentifierparametershavesomecommonpropertiesthatcanbespecifiedinthissection.

552

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

note ............. The Performance Client allows you to specify only two common properties, Prefix and Polling period. You can set other properties common to all polled data for a given polling object by editing the configuration file that governs polling objects: polling.conf in the server/conf directory in the server.

Table 75: Common parameters

Property Description DataIdentifiersaregenerallylengthy.Fortheidentifiersthathaveincommonthestartingn digits,youcanspecifythatasprefix. Prefix Example:AssumetwoStatistics,IfSpeedandIfinOctect.ThecorrespondingDataidentifiersare .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.5.1and.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1.Youcanspecifythecommonprefixas .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1. InthecaseofRFC1213MIB,eveniftheprefixisnotspecified,thePerformancemodulewill internallyaddaprefixtotheidentifier. Thetimeintervalforperiodicdatacollection. PollingPeriod Example:Ifsetto5,itindicatesthatforalltheDataIdentifiers,datawillbecollectedoncein every5seconds. Defaultvalue:300seconds

553

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 76: Common Data Identifier properties

Property Description

AuniqueObjectIdentifierstringthatrepresentsaMIBentry.Dataiscollectedforthis DataIdentifier identifier.AnSNMPspecificDataidentifieriscalledOID.Thisinputismandatory. Example:2.2.1.16.1referstoIfOutOctectsinterfaceofinstance1. Thiscanbesettointerface,node,multiple,ornone. Node:IfyouknowthefullyqualifiedOIDtocollectdatathenyoucansetthetypeas Node.Example:IfyouwanttocollectdataforifInOctets,instance1thenchoosethis typeandspecifythedataidentifieras.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 Interface:ThistypehasbeenexclusivelymadeavailableonlyforIFtableentriesofRFC 1213MIB.Thisisusedwhentheobjecthasmanyinstances.Whenyouwanttocollect dataforalltheinstancesofanobject,youcanchoosethetypetobeInterface.Enter theDataIdentifieras.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.Foreveryinstanceoftheobject,a PolledDataisbecreated. Type Multiple:IfyoudonotknowhowmanyinstancesexistfortheOIDthenthistypecan beusedtocollectdataforalltheinstances.AsInterfacetypeisspecifictoIFtable entries,forotherOIDsthathavemultipleinstance,youcanchoosethetypeas Multiple.OnlyonePolledDatawillbecreatedforthespecifiedOIDbutdatacollection willbedoneforalltheinstances.
caution.. Do not terminate the OID with a dot. If you do so, it will be treated as an invalid OID and data will not be collected for it. note...This is used when other protocols are used for data collection apart from SNMP.

Defaultvalue:None Name Protocol AnymeaningfulstringfortheDataIdentifier.Itismandatory. SpecifytheprotocolusedSNMP,etc.Ifnovalueisspecified,defaultprotocolSNMPis set. Theintervalforperiodicdatacollection.Example:Ifsetto2,itindicatesthatforallthe DataIdentifiers,datawillbecollectedonceinevery2seconds.Defaultvalue:300 seconds. Interval Case 1: If polling period (common property) and interval are specified then interval value will take precedence. Case 2: If polling period is specified but no interval, then polling period will be taken as interval. Case 3: If neither polling period nor interval is specified, then default value (300 seconds) will be taken. Threshold ToapplyThresholdontheDataIdentifier,select(check)thisoption.Defaultvalue: False

554

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Description

Property

StoreData

Sometimes,youmaywishnottostorethedatacollectedfortheDataIdentifier.Ifthis isthecase,youcanviewthedataonlybyRealTimemonitoringusingCurrentStatistic Graph.Tospecifythatyoudonotwanttostorethecollecteddata,clear(uncheck)this checkbox.Defaultvalue:True(Checked) IftheCollecteddataisofdatatypeLongthenitwillbestoredinSTATSDATAtable.The tablewillhavethenameandcurrentdateappendedtoit.Example:Iftoday'sdateis August10,2003thenthetablenamewillbeSTATSDATA8_10_2003.Ifyoudonot specifyanyinputforthisproperty,thiswillbethedefaultbehavior. ButifyouwanttostoredatainsomeothertableandnotindefaultSTATSDATAthen youcanspecifyitinthisfield.Example:MyTable.

StatsData TableName

caution.. The table name you specify here must be already available with its structure defined.

Youhavetoappendapercentagesymbol(%)tothetablename,suchas%MyTable%. Thisenablesonetablecreationperdaywiththecurrentdateappendedtothetable name.Ifyoudonotspecifythe%symbol,nonewtablewillbecreatedeachdayand datacollectedeverydaywillbeappendedtothesametableMyTable.Thisresultsina voluminoustableaftersomedays.Thedefaulttablesusedbythedefaultpolling objectsprovidedwithWMuseaseparatetableforeachday. IftheCollecteddataisofdatatypeStringthenitwillbestoredinSTRINGDATAtable. Thetablewillhavethenameandcurrentdateappendedtoit.Example:Iftoday'sdate isAugust10,2003thenthetablenamewillbeSTRINGDATA8_10_2003.Ifyoudonot specifyanyinputforthisproperty,thenthiswillbethedefaultbehavior. StringData TableName ButifyouwanttostoredatainsomeothertableandnotindefaultSTRINGDATAthen youcanspecifyitinthisfield.Example:StringMyTable.
caution.. The table name you specify here must be already available with its structure defined.

Theconceptofappending%symbolholdsgoodforSTRINGDATAtablealso.Formore information,refertotheexplanationforthefieldStatsDataTableName. Failure Threshold Property

ThisoptionisapplicableonlyforCountertypeOIDs.Bydefault,datacollectedfor CountertypeOIDsisnotstoredasitis.Thedifferencebetweenthepreviousdataand latestdataiscollectedandstored.Iftheexactvalue(absolutevalue)ofcollecteddata SaveAbsolutes hastobestoredforCountertypeOIDsthenthischeckboxshouldbechecked. DatacollectedforOIDsofotherdatatypesaresavedasabsolutevalues. Defaultvalue:False

555

Issue 4 August 2012 Property Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TimeAverage

Ifthisoptionisselected(check),thetimeaverageiscalculatedas(Latestcollected value+Previousvalue)/DifferenceinDatacollectionTimevalue.Thisismostly calculatedforCountertypeandGaugetypeDataidentifierswherethedatacollected willbeanincrementalvalueandatonepointwillreachthefinalvalueandresetto Zero.Asthisresetmayhappensoonandveryoften,itispreferredthataDeltavalueis derivedfromtwoconsecutivepolls. Defaultvalue:false Ifthisoptionisnotselected(uncheck),datacollectionwillbetemporarilystoppedfor thisDataIdentifier.Toresumedatacollectionyouwillhavetoselectthisfield. Defaultvalue:True(checked)

Active

Specifyanumber(n)whichindicatesacounti.e.,onlyafternnumberofpolls,datawill SavePollcount bestoredinthedatabase.Thisisusedwhenyoufeeltheinitialsetofdatacollectedfor theDataIdentifierisunstableandmaynotbeacorrectmeasureofperformance. OID Defaultvalue:1 SaveOn Threshold Ifthisoptionisselected(check),itindicatesthatthecollecteddatashouldbesaved onlywhenitexceedsthreshold. Defaultvalue:false(uncheck) ThisprovidesalistofThresholds.Chooseoneatatimeandacommaseparatedlist displayed. Limitation:YoucannotassociatethresholdsspecifictoaninstanceofmultiplePolled Datacreatedusingthisuserinterface.Therefore,aftercreatingthePolledData,setthe thresholdstotheinstancesviaModifyStatisticsUI.

Available Thresholds

note ............. The SNMP version and the authentication information used for polling is taken from the individual device (MO) for which polling is performed..

ForeveryDataIdentifieryouadd,clickApply.ItisaddedtothelistintheleftpanelofthePollDetails window.TomodifyordeleteanyDataIdentifier,selectitfromthelistandclickModifyorDelete respectively. AfteryouhaveaddedalltheDataIdentifiers,clickApplyinthePollingObjectsdialog.Thisaddsthe PollingObjectdefinitiontothedatabase. YoucanseetheDataIdentifierandStatisticNameintheConfiguredCollectionpanelforthosehosts forwhichthematchcriteriaaresatisfied.AnexampleoftheConfiguredCollectionviewisshownin Figure140onPage205.

Specifying Expressions Using OIDs

UsingarithmeticoperatorsandexistingDataIdentifiervalues,youcanbuildanexpression;for example
.1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.10.1 + .1.3.6.1.2.1.2.2.1.16.1 ) / 2.

556

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

ThisexampleexpressionmeansanaverageofdatacollectedfortheinstancesofIfInOctetsand IfOutOctets.Whenyoudoso,dataiscollectedforeachDataIdentifierinvolvedintheexpressionand theresultantvalueiscalculatedbasedontheexpression. Thefollowingarespecificrequirementsforparameters: YoucancreateexpressionsusingonlyDataIdentifiervaluesforwhichLong(Numeric)type dataiscollected.StringOIDscannotbeused. OnlytheaddedvalueisstoredinSTATSDATAtable,andnottheindividualOIDvalues. WhenyouspecifyanexpressionOID,specifytheentireDataIdentifieralongwiththeprefix. Donotseparatelyspecifytheprefix. Operatorssuchas+(addition),(subtraction),*(multiplication),/(division), %(remainder),&gt;(rightshift),&lt;(leftshift),:(bitwiseAND),|(bitwiseOR), ^(exclusiveOR),min(a,b)andmax(x,y)canbeused. min(oid1,oid2),min(value1,value2)andmax(oid1,min(oid2,oid3))arevalidexpressions. Specifying$DELTA_TIMEissupportedasareplaceableparameter;forexample,ifyoucreate aPolledDatawithanexpressionOID,suchas (2.2.1.4.1*$DELTA_TIME),thenthevaluecollectedforthisexpressionisthevalueretrieved fortheOID2.2.1.4.1multipliedbythedifferenceofthetimebetweenthecurrentpolland previouspollofthispolldata.

17.1.4

Modifying a Polling Object

WMallowsyouto disableordeactivatethePollingObject.Doingthiswillstopdatacollectionforallthe associatedPolledData. modifyanexistingDataIdentifierassociatedwiththePollingObject,ifyouneedtomodify somepropertieslikeperiodofdatacollection,activestate,orthresholdlist. addanewDataIdentifiertothePollingobject.

caution............... If you edit or change one of the default polling objects that is installed with WM, undesirable system behavior may result. Please contact Cambium Technical Support before editing/deleting polling objects in WM. See Contacting Support Representatives on Page 760.

Procedure 164: To modify a Polling Object

1. 2. 3. 4. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsPollingObjectsModifyPollingObject. ThePollDetailswizardisdisplayed. Intheleftpanel,selectthePollingObjectthatyouwanttomodify. ClickModify. TheGeneralPropertiesframeincludesthePollingObject(asreadonly)andhaschangedthe StatusandUpdateManagedObjectscheckboxestoreadwrite.

557

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 348: Polled Details dialog, General Properties frame, active fields

5. 6.

Intherightpanel,modifytheStatus,ifrequired. UpdateManagedObjectsisavailableascheckbox. Whenthisischecked,itspecifiesthatthePollingObject'sdefinitionwillbeappliedover existingManagedObjects,andtheywillbeupdatedwithinformationgiveninPolling Objects.Essentially,thischeckboxmakesyourchangeretroactive,toaffectalldevices previouslydiscoveredthatusethepollingobjectthatisbeingmodified.Formore information,refertoCreatingaPollingObjectonPage548.

7.

ClicktheNextbutton.

note ............. You cannot edit the match criteria set for a Polling Object. This includes both Managed Object Criteria and User Class settings.

8.

ClicktheNextbuttonagain. TheDataConfigurationpanelopensintherightframe.

558

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 349: Poll Details dialog, Data Configuration panel

9.

FromtheDataIdentifierssection,selecttheDataIdentifiertobemodified.

tip ................ This will make the selection easier. Laterally scroll the Data Identifiers block view all the way to the right. If you are at all uncertain of the OID, find it in the Data Identifier column of the Configured Collection view. Then click the OID in the Data Identifiers block of this Poll Details window and observe the read-only Name field contents to the right. Ensure that you have selected the intended statistic. note ............. At the bottom of the window, two rows of buttons, some of which are active, are provided. The upper row applies to the current frame, and the lower row persists through all frames of this window.

10. Intheupperrowofbuttons,clickModify. Manyofthefieldsintherightpanelbecomeeditable. 11. Makeappropriatechangesasrequired. Forinformationoneachofthefields,refertoDefiningDatatoBeCollectedviaSNMPon Page551. 12. Whenthemodificationsaredone,clickApplyintheupperrowofbuttonstoapplythe changestothedatabase. 13. Inthelowerrowofbuttons,clickApply. 14. DismissthePollDetailswindow.

559

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

17.1.5

Deleting a Polling Object

YoucandeleteaPollingObjectpermanentlyfromthesystemifyouhavedecidednottoperformdata collectionforcertaindevicesanylonger.
caution............... This procedure will remove the Polling Object and the Data Identifiers and statistics from the hosts whose device type you specify as the Polling Object. Ensure that this is intended. If you delete one of the default polling objects that is installed with WM, undesirable system behavior may result. Contact Cambium Technical Support before you edit or delete a polling object. See Contacting Support Representatives on Page 760.

Procedure 165: To delete a Polling Object

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsPollingObjectsDeletePollingObjects.ThePoll Detailswizardisdisplayed.

Figure 350: Poll Details dialog for Delete Polling Object operation

3. 4.

Intheleftpanel,clicktohighlightthePollingObjectthatyouwanttodelete. ClicktheDeletebutton. Aconfirmationisasked.

560

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 351: Confirm Deletion pop-up

5.

ClickYestodeletethePollingObject.

Onperformingthisprocedure,thePollingObjectandtheDataIdentifiersandstatisticsthatwere addedviathePollingObjectareremovedfromthehoststhathavethetargeteddevicetype.

17.2

Administering Individual Statistics

IfyouwanttomonitorextradatathatisnotaccountedforintheConfiguredCollectionfora particulardevicetype,youcanaddanewStatistictothesystembyeitherofthefollowingtwo methods: modifyinganexistingPollingObject(seeModifyingaPollingObjectonPage557). usingtheAddStatisticsoption(seeAddingaStatisticbelow).Thismethodispreferred.

17.2.1

Adding a Statistic
WhenyouneedtoaddaStatisticforafewnodes,thebestwayistousetheAddStatisticsoption.
note ............. For most devices, all possible performance data statistics are already polled by default. Either look for the desired statistic in the Configured Collection view before you try to add it as a new statistic or consult Cambium Technical Support to get help with your performance data configuration. See Contacting Support Representatives on Page 760.

Procedure 166: To add statistics at runtime

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditAddStatistic(orpressCtrl+N). TheObjectDetailsdialogisdisplayed.

561

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 352: DataCollection Detailed Properties dialog, first form

3.

Configuretheappropriatefieldsofthefirstoftwoforms. Thefollowingtabledescribeseachofthefields.

Table 77: DataCollection Detailed Properties fields, first form

Property Name Description AnymeaningfulstringfortheDataIdentifier.Itisamandatoryfield.Ordinarilythis isthedisplaynameofanSNMPMIBattribute. OneofthethreeSNMPversionsVI,V2orV3. IfyouchooseV3,twomorefieldslabeledUserNameandContextNameare available.TheyarerequiredforauthorizingSNMPv3datacollection.Forinformation onconfiguringsecurityparameters,refertoSNMPV3SecurityConfigurationtopic. IftheSNMPagentresidesinaproxyimplementationenvironment,itcanbe accessedviaaproxyagent.TheSNMPagent,then,hastobeidentifiedbyaunique valuecalledcontextEngineID.Thisvaluehastobesetasauserpropertyforthe Statistic. Defaultvalue:v1 AllSNMPinformation(suchasversion,community,andport)mustmatchthe device'ssettings;otherwise,thestatisticisnotsuccessfullypolled.Ordinarily, discoverysetsuptheSNMPauthenticationforeachstatisticthatWMis preconfiguredtoautomaticallyprovide.

SnmpVersion

562

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Description

Property

Community

Specifythestringusingwhichthedevicesareidentifiedinanetwork.Mostofthe equipmentvendorssettheCommunityvalueaspublicfortheirdevices.Insuch case,specifythisfieldaspublic.Otherwise,youneedtocheckthestringusedfor theparticulardevice.

WriteCommunity SpecifytheSNMPstringthatwillauthenticateWMtomanagethedevice. Normally,adevicewillhaveoneagentinittocollectdevicedata,wheredevice nameandagentnamewillbesame.Becauseofthesamenamingsituation,youcan specifythedevicenameasagentname.Thedevicenameisthenamethatis displayedintheHostscolumnofthePerformanceConfiguredCollectionview.

noteIf you are adding Statistic via UI, ensure that agent name and DNS name are set.

Agent

Port

SpecifytheportnumbertowhichWirelessManagercansendtherequestfordata collection.DefaultSNMPagentportis161.Ifnovalueisspecified,thedefaultport 161issetwhenPolledDataiscreated. Ifmultipleagentsarerunninginthesamedevice,theyhavetobedifferentiatedby differentportnumbers. AuniqueObjectIdentifierstringthatrepresentsaMIBentry.Dataiscollectedfor thisidentifier.AnSNMPspecificDataidentifieriscalledOID.Forexample, 2.2.1.16.1referstoIfInOctectsinterfaceinstance1.Youcanalsospecifyan expressionOID.Thisinputismandatory. Ifyoudonotselect(uncheck)thisoption,datacollectionwillnotstartforthisOID. Defaultvalue:True(checked) Thetimeintervalforperiodicdatacollection.Example:Ifsetto2,itindicatesthat foralltheDataIdentifiers,datawillbecollectedonceinevery2seconds. Defaultvalue:900seconds Youcanconfiguretheminimumperiodsothattheperiodcannotbesetfora Statisticlessthantheminimumperiod.Thiscanbedonebysettingtheproperty MINPERIODinTree.xmllocatedinthe /usr/local/cambium/wm/server/users/rootdirectoryinLinux (ortheC:\Cambium\WM\server\users\rootfolderinWindows)fortheentry MODULENAME="StatsAdmin". Example:MINPERIOD="200".
noteIf you enter the period less than the minimum period set, an error message will be displayed.

OID

Active

Period

ToapplythresholdonthisStatistics,select(check)thisfield Threshold Defaultvalue:False(unchecked) ThelistofThresholdscanbespecifiedinthetextboxlabeledThresholdList.

563

Issue 4 August 2012 Property Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

DNSName

SpecifytheDNSnameofthedevicefromwhichthedatamustbecollected. Typically,thisistheIPaddress.TheDNSnameisdisplayedintheIPAddresscolumn oftheInventoryview.YoucanalsofindthecorrectDNSnametousebylookingat otherstatisticsforthedevicetowhichyouareaddingnewstatistics. Ifthisoptionisnotselected,datawillbecollectedbutwillnotbestoredinthe database. Defaultvalue:True(Checked) ThisoptionisapplicableonlyforCountertypeOIDs.Bydefault,datacollectedfor CountertypeOIDsisnotstoredasitis.Thedifferencebetweenthepreviousdata andlatestdataiscollectedandstored.Iftheexactvalue(absolutevalue)of collecteddatahastobestoredforCountertypeOIDsthenthisoptionshouldbe selected(checked). DatacollectedforOIDsofotherdatatypesissavedasabsolutevalues. Defaultvalue:False Tostorethecollecteddatainflatfilesratherthanstoringthemindatabase,select thisoption.

Save

SaveAbsolutes

LogDirectly

Defaultvalue:false(unchecked) YoucansetthelogfilenameinthetextboxlabeledLogfile.

4.

Whenyouarefinishedwiththefirstform,clicktheNextbutton. Thesecondformisdisplayed.

564

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 353: DataCollection Detailed Properties dialog, second form

5.

Configuretheappropriatefieldsonthesecondform. Thefollowingtabledescribesthesefields.

Table 78: DataCollection Detailed Properties fields, second form

Property Logfile Description Specifythelogfilenamewithfullpath(locationonharddiskwherethelogfilehas tobestored). SpecifythenameoftheManagedObjectwhichactsastheparentforthisStatistic. ThisistheName(ID),orfirst,columnentryintheInventoryview.Youcanalsofind thecorrectnametousebylookingatotherstatisticsforthedevicetowhichyouare addingnewstatistics.

ParentObj

565

Issue 4 August 2012 Property Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

SpecifythenameoftheThresholdsascommaseparatedvaluesthusassociating themwiththisStatisticformonitoringdatacollection.
notePerformance data thresholds must be defined before you add them to this list. See Associating Thresholds With Statistics and Network Elements on Page 571.

ThresholdList

IncaseofmultiplePolledData,ifyouneedtoassociateThresholdsspecifictothe instancesthenspecifytheassociationasfollows: <instancenumber>=thresholdname1,thresholdname2,....:<instance number>=thresholdname1,thresholdname2,.... Example: .1=th1,th2:.2=th1,th3 ThespecifiedlistofThresholdswillbeappliedontheStatisticonlywhenThreshold propertyistrue.

Currentsave count Protocol

Thisisusedforinternalpurpose. SpecifytheprotocolusedfordatacollectionSNMP,etc.Whennovalueisset, defaultprotocolSNMPisassumedfordatacollection. Specifyastringvaluewhichismatchedwithagent'slistofuserswhoareauthorized tocollectdatafromit.ThisfieldisdisplayedonlywhenSnmpVersionisselectedas V3. IftheCollecteddataisofdatatypeLong,itwillbestoredinSTATSDATAtable.The tablewillhavethenameandcurrentdateappendedtoit.Example:Iftoday'sdateis Aug10,2003thenthetablenamewillbeSTATSDATA8_10_2003.Ifyoudonot specifyanyinputforthisproperty,thiswillbethedefaultbehavior. IfyouwanttostoredatainsomeothertableotherthanthedefaultSTATSDATA, specifyitinthisfield.Example:MyTable.

PollerName

StatsdataTable Name

Appendapercentagesymbol(%)tothetablename,suchasMyTable%.Thisenables onetablecreationperdaywiththecurrentdateappendedtothetablename.Ifyou donotspecifythe%symbol,newtableisnotcreatedanddatacollectedeveryday willbeappendedtothesametableMyTable.Thisresultsinavoluminoustableafter somedays.Itisrecommendedtohaveseparatetablesforeachday.

caution.The table name which you specify here must be already available in the database.

SavePollCount

Specifyaninteger(n).DuringeverynthPoll,thecollecteddatawillbestored. Example:Ifyouspecify2,itindicatesthatforeveryalternatepollingthecollected dataisstored,i.e.,2ndpoll,4thpoll,andsoon. Defaultvalue:1

566

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Description

Property

Thisindicatesthenumberofconsecutivefailuresafterwhichthethresholdevent shouldbegenerated.Forsomethresholds,asingleviolationisinsufficientto generateanevent. Example:AssumetheOIDhasathresholdassociatedanditispredictedthatthe datacollectedcanbecrosschecked3times.Ifthecollectedvaluestillexceedsthe FailureThreshold ThresholdvaluethencorrespondingThresholdeventwillbegenerated. Defaultvalue:0 IftherearemorethanoneThresholdassociatedwiththeDataidentifier,thenthe collecteddatahastoexceedthesamethresholdconsecutivelyntimesasspecified inthisfield.OnlythentheThresholdEventwillbegenerated. Ismultiple PolledData SaveOn Threshold Ownername SelectthisoptionifDataIdentifierisoftypemultiple. Possiblevaluesaretrueandfalse.Ifsettrue,thecollecteddataissavedonlywhenit exceedsthreshold. Defaultvalue:false SpecifyastringtodenotetheowneroftheStatistic. Ifthisoptionisselected(checked)theTimeAverageiscalculatedas (LatestcollectedvaluePreviousvalue)/DifferenceinDatacollectionTimevalue. TimeAvg ThisismostlycalculatedforCountertypeOIDswherethecollecteddatawillbean incrementalvalueandatonepointwillreachthefinalvalueandresettoZero.As thisresetmayhappensoonandveryoften,itispreferredthataDeltavalueis derivedfromtwoconsecutivePolls. Defaultvalue:false

6.

Whenyouhavefinishedconfiguringtheproperties,clicktheAddbutton.

IntheConfiguredCollectionpanel,youcanviewtheaddedStatisticthatyouhavejustcreatedforthe devicetype.

17.2.2

Finding a Statistic
Theclientincludesautilityforquicklyfindingastatisticbasedonstringsthatconstituteaportionof anyofthefollowingdatathatthesystemisstoringforagivenstatistic:

567

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Procedure 167: To find a statistic

1. IntheApplicationstree,clickonPerformanceConfiguredCollection. ThisopensaConfigurationTemplatesviewintherightpanel,listingallthatarecurrently defined. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditSearch. AspecialSearchwindowopenstoconfigureformatchesagainstanyofthetabulardatathat WMisdisplayingintheConfiguredCollectionwindow,includingthatwhichisviewableonly byscrolling.

2.

Figure 354: Search window for statistic criteria

TheoperationofthiswindowisconsistentwithhowtheseveralotherSearchwindowsintheclient operate.Foranexample,seeSearchonPage125.Keepinmindthatthescopeofthesearchisthe contentsofthetable,notthecontentsofallconfigurationtemplatefiles(notattributes,theirvalue ranges,ortheirdefaultvalues).

17.2.3

Modifying a Statistic
WMispreconfiguredtocollectpracticallyallperformancedatastatisticsthatallsupporteddevices provide.Inrarecases,itcanbedesirabletochangethepollingintervalofapredefinedstatistic,orto disableit.Editingotherfieldsmayproduceundesirableresults.

Procedure 168: To modify an existing Statistic

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. IntheHostslistintheleftpaneloftheConfiguredCollectionview,selectthedevicefor whichyouwanttomodifyastatistic. SelecttheStatisticintheConfiguredCollectionpanel.

568

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

4.

Dooneofthefollowing: Fromthemainmenu,selectEditModifyStatistic. PressCtrl+Shift+M. Doubleclickonthedesiredstatistic.

TheObjectDetailsdialogisdisplayed.

Figure 355: DataCollection Detailed Properties dialog for Modify Statistic operation

5.

Makeappropriatechanges. Keepinmindthatthisdialogconsistsoftwoforms,connectedbyNextandPrevious buttons.Ifnecessaryasyoureconfigurevariousfields,refertothefielddocumentation providedinTable77onPage562andTable78onPage565.

note ............. Some properties are not editable because Wireless Manager uses them to internally identify the Statistic.

6.

Whenyouarefinished,clicktheModifybutton.

ThemodificationstotheStatisticsareimmediatelyappliedandarereflectedintheConfigured Collectionview.

17.2.4

Deleting a Statistic
caution............... If you want to temporarily stop the data collection for a Statistic, it is not advisable to delete the Statistic. Instead, disable (uncheck) the Active property of the Statistic. Till you enable (check) it again, the data collection will not occur for the Statistic.

569

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Procedure 169: To delete a Statistic

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. SelecttheStatisticintheConfiguredCollectionpanel. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditDeleteStatistic(orpressCtrl+Shift+R). Aconfirmationisasked.

4.

ClickYestodeletetheStatistic. UserpropertiesassociatedwiththeStatisticsareautomaticallydeleted.

17.3

Administering Extended PolledData

WMfacilitatescreationofExtendedPolledData,whichcontainsthebasicpropertiesofaPolledData plussomeextrapropertiesthataredefinedspecifictooperatorrequirements.ExtendedPolledData creationishandledbythedeveloperwhocustomizesWMforoperatorspecificusage.Asan Administrator,youcanmodifythevaluesofthoseextrapropertiesoftheExtendedPolledData object.

17.3.1

Modifying Extended PolledData

important ........... WM is preconfigured to collect practically all performance data statistics that all supported devices provide. In rare cases it can be desirable to change the polling interval of a predefined statistic or to disable it. Editing other fields may produce undesirable results.

Procedure 170: To modify the properties of Extended PolledData

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. SelecttheStatisticintheConfiguredCollectionpanel. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditModifyStatistic(orpressCtrl+Shift+M). TheDataCollectionDetailedPropertiesdialogboxisdisplayed. ClicktheNextbuttontwicetoaccessthethirdframeofthisdialog. ClicktheAdditionalPropsbutton. ThePolledDataAdditionalPropertiesdialogdisplaystheextrapropertiesoftheExtended PolledDataobject.

caution............... You can modify the only value of these properties. Do not change the name of a property or delete it. If you change the name, then it is treated as a new user property. The old property of Extended PolledData is still retained. Any extra property you add via this dialog is added as a user property. When an Extended PolledData is deleted, its associated user properties are also deleted.

570

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

6.

Toconfiguretheadditionalproperties,performthefollowingsteps: a. b. c. d. e. ClicktheAdditionalPropsbutton. ThePolledDataAdditionalPropertiesdialogisdisplayed. SpecifythepropertynameanditsvalueintheNameandValuefield,respectively. Example:Name=DescriptionandValue=Example stat Toaddmoreuserproperties,clickMore. Toremoveauserpropertyinthisdialog,selectthepropertyandclickRemove. Forfewerrowsofproperties,clickFewer.

7. 8.

Whenyouhavefinishedconfiguringadditionalproperties,clickOK. Backintheoriginaldialog,clicktheModifybutton.

17.3.2

Factors for Whether a Statistic is Polled

Severalfactorsdeterminewhetheraparticularperformancedatastatisticispolledforaparticular device,andsomeofthesefactorstakeprecedenceoverothers.Inorderofdecreasingprecedence, thefactorsare Devicestatus(managed/unmanaged): Ifadeviceisunmanaged,appearinggreyintheInventoryview,thennoperformancedata statisticsofanykindaregatheredforthatdevice. Pollingobjectstatus(active/inactive): Ifpolleddata(performancedatastatisticsthatWMhasbeenconfiguredtocollect)fora deviceisassociatedwithapollingobjectthathasbeenmodifiedtobeinactive,thenthat statisticisnotpolled. Agentstatus: Agentsofdevicesarenotordinarilyinactivated,butiftheyareduetoasystemcall,thenthe performancedatastatisticsoftheassociateddeviceisnotpolled. PolledDatastatus(active/inactive): Iftheindividualpolleddataelementforadevicehasbeeninactivated,thenthat performancedatastatisticforthatdeviceisnotpolled. thegeneralandspecificperformancepollingconfigurationsthataredescribedunder AdjustingthePerformancePollingIntervalonPage381.

17.4

Associating Thresholds With Statistics and Network Elements

TheSystemAdministrationlevelofpermissionsisrequiredforadding,mapping,editing,ordeletinga thresholdorfordeletingthemappingofathreshold.Athresholdisavaluethatyouassociatewitha statisticforanyofthefollowing: asingledevice alldevicesofaspecifictype alldevicesofadevicetype

Athresholdassociationwithadevice,specifictype,ordevicetypeapplieswhenyouclicktheApply orOKbuttonintheThresholdsandAssociationsdialog(seeFigure360onPage580)andiseffective foreverysubsequentperformancepollunlesstheassociationisremoved.

571

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Athresholdspecifiesavalue,type(max,minorequal),whatmessageshouldbegeneratedwhenthe thresholdisexceeded,andatwhatvalueshouldthisthresholdbereset.Athresholdisdefined independentofanyparticularstatisticandthenputintoactionbybecomingassociatedwith (applyingthemto)oneormorestatistics.Thenumberandtypesofthresholdstosetupisprovidedin Table79.

Table 79: How many and what type of threshold to add

To establish firstdefinethisnumberofthresholdsvia ActionsManageThreshold,thenselect AddThreshold (Procedure171onPage573) one:equalto

abadflashpoint

anacceptablemiddlerange two:amaxandamin tiersofdegradation multiple:oneforeachseverity

Adefinedstatisticcanbeassociatedwiththresholds.Asinglestatisticcanhavemanythresholds indicatingvariousseveritysuchasCritical,Major,Minor.Wheneverdataiscollectedforthestatistic, itiscrosscheckedwiththeassociatedthresholds.Ifthecollectedvaluecrossesthethresholds,thena thresholdmessageisgenerated.Ifmultiplethresholdsareassociatedwithastatistic,thenthe collectedvalueischeckedwitheverythresholdvalue.Foreverythresholdvaluecrossed,aseparate messageisgenerated.ThewaytoassociateastatisticwithathresholdisshowninTable80,along withcrossreferencestotheappropriateproceduresthatfollow.

Table 80: Ways to associate statistics with thresholds

To threshold a statistic for asinglenetworkelement allnewlydiscoverednetworkelements (inthefuture)ofagivenspecifictypeor devicetype associate the threshold(s) to the network element(s) via EditModifyStatistic
(Procedure174onPage582)

EditPollingObjectsModifyPollingObjects (Procedure177onPage586)

ThemessagesthatariseoutofthresholdsaresentasnotificationsandcanbeviewedintheNetwork Eventsview.Also,theAlarmCountPaneldisplaysarowofdetailsforalarmsgeneratedbecauseof statisticscrossingtheirthresholds. Example:AssumeyouhaveastatisticInterface_in_octetforaswitchswitchrj5.Forefficient performanceoftheswitch,thevalueofthisstatisticmustbebetween1300and1370.Thismeans youshouldhavesomenotificationmechanismtoinformyouwhenthestatisticvalueisnotwithin thislimit.Letusassumethatthethresholdsaredefinedasgivenbelow. value=1320 type=max thresholdmessage=Hasenteredviolationstage

572

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

resetvalue=1319 message=Hasenteredviolationstate

Whenthestatisticvalueis1320orgreater,themessageHasenteredviolationstateisgeneratedas anevent.Untilthecollectedvaluereachestheresetvalue(1319),theeventretainsthesameseverity state.Assoonasitreachestheresetvalue,thethresholdisresetandwaitsforthecollecteddatato crossitslimitagain.

noteIf another threshold exists of lower severity and if the collected data falls within its limits, then that threshold will generate the message (event). If another threshold exists with higher severity, then the higher severity threshold takes precedence, and its message (event) is displayed. The threshold with lower severity loses its importance and no message is generated until the threshold with higher severity reaches its reset state.

YoucanexpressaThresholdintermsofamaximumvalue,aminimumvalue,andanequalvalue.

Table 81: Data collection Threshold indicators

Value is max min equal Description CollecteddatagreaterthanthisvaluegenerateseventofSeverity. CollecteddatalessthanthisvaluegenerateseventofSeverity. CollecteddataequaltothisvaluegenerateseventofSeverity.

TheMIBthatappliestothedevicetypedistinguishesthesyntaxtypeofthestatistic.TheWM Performancemodulesupportsthresholdsfor longvaluesthethresholdisassociatedwithaDataIdentifierforwhichthecollecteddatais oftypelong;forexample,IfAdminStatorIfOperStatintheRFC1213MIB.Thevalue youprovideforthisthresholdiscomparedtothedatacollectedfortheidentifier. stringvaluesthethresholdisassociatedwithaDataIdentifierforwhichthecollecteddata isoftypestring,suchasSysDescr.Polledstringvaluesarematchedagainstlistsof allowed/disallowedvalues. percentagevaluesthethresholdisidentifiedwithaDataIdentifier,typicallyforwhichthe collecteddataisoftypelong,andwithasecondthatisspecifiedastheObjectIDandwhose datatypeisalsolong.Formonitoring,WMdividesthevalueofthefirstOIDbythevalueof thesecond,thenevaluatestheresult,whichisaratioofthetwostatistics,againstthe thresholdvalue.

17.4.1

Adding a Threshold
Procedure 171: To add a threshold
1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsManageThreshold. TheThresholdsandAssociationsdialogopens.

573

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 356: Thresholds and Associations dialog

3.

ClicktheAddThresholdbutton. TheThresholdsPropertiesdialogopenstoitslongtab.

574

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 357: Thresholds Properties dialog, long tab

4. 5.

IntheNamefield,typeinanameforthethreshold. Selectthetypeofthresholdyouwanttoadd(clickonthelong,string,orpercentagetab).

important ........... This step requires you to know the SNMP syntax of the statistic: whether it is a long, string, or percentage. Most numerical values are considered long. Most nonnumerical values are considered strings. In case of doubt, right-click on the statistic and select PlotCollected Statistic from the drop-down list. If the system returns only a table, then the syntax is string. note ............. The long tab is shown above. The string and percentage tabs are shown below.

575

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 358: Threshold Properties dialog, string tab

576

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 359: Threshold Properties dialog, percentage tab

6.

Specifythedesiredvaluesforspecificthresholdparameters. RefertoTable82foradescriptionofeachfield.
3

Table 82: Threshold Properties fields

Tab Property long string Severity (trigger severity) Category Threshold Type percentage Astringtoestablishtheimportanceoftheeventgeneratedwhen thresholdvalueiscrossed.Bydefault,followingseveritystrings havebeendefined: Critical,Major,Minor,Warning,Clear,Info,andUnknown. Description

UseThresholdunlessyouhaveaspecialpurposeforthisfield. Whetherthethresholdisamaximumlimitvalue,aminimumlimit value,oraparticularvaluethatthestatistichastoequalexactlyto generatethethreshold. Thevalueofthethreshold.Forexample,thevaluethatthe gatheredstatisticiscomparedtoformax/min/equal. Thevalueofthethreshold,butherethevalueisapercentage,soit willrangefromonlyzeroto100.

Threshold Value

577

Issue 4 August 2012 Tab Property long string percentage Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Rearm Value

Oncethethresholdhasbeencrossed,andanalarmgenerated,you havetheoptionofprovidingarearmvaluesuchthatwhenvalues gatheredlatercrossthisrearmvalue,acleareventisgenerated automatically.Forexampleifthethresholdis90andtherearmis 80,whenastatisticisgatheredthatisover90,analarmis generated,butwhenlaterpollsgetvaluesbelow80,aclearevent isgeneratedandthealarmstatusofthedeviceisautomatically cleared. sameasforlongthresholds,butherethevalueisapercentage,so itwillonlyrangefromzeroto100. Ifthestatistichasavalueintheallowedlistandanalarmwas previouslytriggeredduetoadisallowedvalue,thisisthe severityofthereseteventthatsgeneratedusuallythiswillbe Clearinordertogetridofthealarm. Thesevaluesgeneratearesetifanalarmwastriggered.An asteriskcanbeusedasawildcard.Commaseparatedvaluesare allowed. Thesevaluestriggeranalarm.Anasteriskcanbeusedasa wildcard.Commaseparatedvaluesareallowed. EXAMPLE

Reset Severity

Allowed Values

triggerSeverity:Major ResetSeverity:Clear Message:thereisaproblem ClearMessage:nomoreproblem AllowedValues:dog,cat,bird* DisallowedValues:snake,spider

Disallowed Values

EXAMPLERESULTS statisticgathereddogmatchesallowedstringsnothing happens statisticgatheredbirdmanmatchesallowedstringsvia wildcardnothinghappens statisticgatheredsnakematchesdisallowedstringsalarm generatedwithseverityMajorandmessagethereisaproblem statisticgatheredcatmatchesallowedstringsevent generatedwithseverityClearandmessagenomoreproblem clearstheprioralarmandreturnsdevicetoClearstatus

578

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Tab

Property long string percentage

Description

ObjectID

ThisisanOIDintheMIBofthesamedevice/host,thatthe selectedOIDwillbecomparedto.Thestatisticyouoriginally selectedtocreatethethreshold,willbecomparedto(dividedby) thestatisticfetchedviathisOID,andtheresultwillbeexpressed asapercentage,forcomparisontothespecifiedthresholdvalue andrearmvalue.Consequently,thepercentagethresholdactually referencestwoOIDs,theoriginallyselectedOIDandthe denominatorvaluesOIDasspecifiedinthisObjectIDfield. ThisistheMIBOIDtypetypicallyitwillbenodeforanordinary SNMPMIBOIDthatreturnsalongvalue.

ObjectID Type

important..The type of identifier you choose here should be the same as the identifier on which this Threshold is going to be applied. Otherwise, when division of the two values takes place, an invalid resultant value will be generated.

Message

Thisisthetextmessageprovidedanddisplayedintheevent/alarm createdwhenthethresholdiscrossed. Thisisthemessageinthetriggeredalarmcreatedwhenthe statisticvaluematchesoneoftheDisallowedValues. Ifarearmvalueisspecifiedandacleareventisgenerated,thiswill bethemessageinthatevent. Thisisthemessageintheeventgeneratedbyareset. Iftrue,acleareventwillbegeneratedwhentherearm value/thresholdiscrossed.

Clear Message

SendClear

7.

ClickAdd. Theconfiguredthresholdiscreated.

17.4.2

Preparing to Map a Threshold

Procedure 172: To prepare to map a threshold
1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsManageThreshold. TheThresholdsandAssociationsdialogopens.(SeeFigure356onPage574.) ClicktheAddMappingbutton. TheinterfaceaddsablankrowtothebottomoftheAssociationstable.

579

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 360: New association row added to Thresholds and Associations interface

4.

ClickintheScopecolumnofthenewrow.

17.4.3

Mapping a Threshold for an Individual Device

Procedure 173: To map a threshold for an individual device
1. 2. 3. PerformProcedure172:TopreparetomapathresholdonPage579. FromthedropdownlistintheScopecell,selectIndividual. DoubleclicktheName/Typecellinthesamerow. TheSearchDevicesdialogopens.

Figure 361: Search Devices dialog

4.

Inthetextboxatthetopofthisdialog,keyinastringthatmatchesaportionofthe DeviceName,Name(ID),IPAddress,orLocationofthedesireddevice. Thesystemreturnsmatchesinthedisplaypanel.

580

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

Clicktohighlightthenameofthedesireddevice. ClickOK. ClickthecellintheAgentscolumnatthesamerow. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheSNMPagenttype. ClickthecellintheStatisticNamecolumnatthesamerow.

10. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheStatisticName. Onlyasingleselectionissupported.

11. ClickthecellintheThresholdNamecolumnatthesamerow. 12. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheThresholdName. Onlyasingleselectionissupported. 13. ClicktheApplybutton. 14. ClickOK.

581

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

17.4.4

Associating a Threshold with a Statistic for an Individual Device

Procedure 174: To add thresholds to a statistic
1. 2. 3. 4. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. IntheHostscolumn,clicktoselectthenetworkelementtowhichtoapplythethreshold. IntheStatisticNamecolumn,clicktoselectaStatistic. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditModifyStatistic.

Figure 362: DataCollection Detailed Properties dialog, first set of properties

5. 6.

Checkthecheckboxofthethresholdfield. Thisenablesthresholdstobeactivelyappliedtothestatistic. ClicktheNextbutton.

582

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 363: DataCollection Detailed Properties, second set of properties

7.

InthethresholdListfield,specifythethresholdname. Thisfieldspecifiesoneormorethresholds,separatedbycommas,allofwhichwillbeapplied tothestatistic. ClicktheNextbutton.

8.

583

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 364: Data Collection Detailed Properties, third set of values

9.

ClickModify.

Onceyouassociatethethresholdwiththestatistic,monitoringwillbecarriedoutforanydata collectedforthatstatistic.
tip ................ After adding a list of thresholds to a statistic, if you do not want to monitor the collected data for a while, clear (uncheck) the Threshold field. This temporarily stops applying thresholds on the statistic.

17.4.5

Mapping a Threshold for a Specific Type Device

Procedure 175: To map a threshold for a specific type device
1. 2. 3. 4. PerformProcedure172:TopreparetomapathresholdonPage579. FromthedropdownlistintheScopecell,selectSpecificType. DoubleclicktheName/Typecellinthesamerow. TheSearchspecifictypedialogopens. Inthetextboxatthetopofthisdialog,keyinastringthatmatchesaportionofthe specifictypename. Thesystemreturnsmatchesinthedisplaypanel. Clicktohighlightthenameofthespecifictype.

5.

584

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 365:Search specific type dialog, specific type selected

6. 7. 8. 9.

ClickOK. ClickthecellintheAgentscolumnatthesamerow. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheSNMPagenttype. ClickthecellintheStatisticNamecolumnatthesamerow.

10. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheStatisticName. Onlyasingleselectionissupported. 11. ClickthecellintheThresholdNamecolumnatthesamerow. 12. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheThresholdName. Onlyasingleselectionissupported. 13. ClicktheApplybutton. 14. ClickOK.

17.4.6

Mapping a Threshold for a Device Type

Procedure 176: To map a threshold for a device type
1. 2. 3. 4. PerformProcedure172:TopreparetomapathresholdonPage579. FromthedropdownlistintheScopecell,selectDeviceType. DoubleclicktheName/Typecellinthesamerow. TheSearchspecifictypedialogopens. Inthetextboxatthetopofthisdialog,keyinastringthatmatchesaportionofthe devicetypename. Thesystemreturnsmatchesinthedisplaypanel. Clicktohighlightthenameofthedevicetype.

5.

585

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 366: Search specific type dialog, device type selected

6. 7. 8. 9.

ClickOK. ClickthecellintheAgentscolumnatthesamerow. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheSNMPagenttype. ClickthecellintheStatisticNamecolumnatthesamerow.

10. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheStatisticName. Onlyasingleselectionissupported. 11. ClickthecellintheThresholdNamecolumnatthesamerow. 12. Fromthedropdownlist,selecttheThresholdName. Onlyasingleselectionissupported. 13. ClicktheApplybutton. 14. ClickOK.

17.4.7

Associating One or More Thresholds with a Polling Object for a Device Type
important ........... This procedure will set up monitoring for only elements that are yet to be discovered. It does not set up monitoring for those that will be rediscovered before any new discovery on them occurs. This is because new discovery is the operation in which performance data collection is defined for a network element. The only way to trigger new discovery is to delete the device entirely (see Deleting an Object and Traces on Page 263) and then discover it. This is different from rediscovery of a device that is already in the Inventory view.

Procedure 177: To associate thresholds with a Polling Object for a device type
1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsPollingObjectsModifyPollingObjects. ThePollDetailsdialogisdisplayed.

586

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 367: Poll Details dialog

3. 4.

Intheleftpanel,clicktohighlightthedesireddevicetypeandagent. (Eachpollingobjectisnamedafteritsspecifictypeandagent,separatedbyhyphen). Atthebottomofthiswindow,clicktheModifybutton. ThePollingObjectNamereadonlyfieldpopulateswiththeselecteddevicetype,andthe Modifybuttongraysout. ClicktheNextbuttontwicetoadvancetotheDataConfigurationpanel.

5.

587

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 368: Poll Details dialog, Data Configuration panel with read-only fields

6.

IntheblockofDataIdentifiers,whichcontainsalloftheOIDsthatthedevicetypesupports, scrolltoselectthestatisticwhosethresholdyouwanttomonitor.

tip ................ This will make the selection easier. Laterally scroll the Data Identifiers block view all the way to the right. If you are at all uncertain of the OID, find it in the Data Identifier column of the Configured Collection view. Then click the OID in the Data Identifiers block of this Poll Details window and observe the read-only Name field contents to the right. Ensure that you have selected the intended statistic. note ............. At the bottom of the window, two rows of buttons, some of which are active, are provided. The upper row applies to the current frame, and the lower row persists through all frames of this window.

588

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.

Intheupperrowofbuttons,clickModify. Manyfieldsintherightpanelbecomeeditable,andfirstfourfieldsareprepopulatedbased onyourselection.Thefirstthreearereadonly.

589

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 369: Poll Details dialog, Data Configuration panel with read-write fields

8. 9.

CheckthecheckboxfortheThresholdfield. Atthelastfieldinthelist,AvailableThresholds,clicktheellipsis( ). Thisexposesthenamesoftheavailablethresholdsinadropdownlist.

10. ClickanddragtheleftedgeofthewindowtoenlargetheAvailableThresholdsboxsothat youcanreadthefullnamesofthethresholds. 11. FromtheAvailableThresholdsdropdownbox,selectthedesiredthreshold. MultipleThresholdscanbeconfiguredbyselectingthemonebyone,usingCtrl+Click:

12. Toapplyyourchangestotheselectedpolleddataelement(correspondingtoone performancedatastatistic),intheupperrowofbuttons,clickApply.

590

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

13. Toapplyyourchangestothepollingobject(includingallchangestoanypolleddata elementswithinthatpollingobject),inthelowerrowofbuttons,clickApply. TheGeneralPropertiesframereopensinthePolledDetailswindow. Thethreshold(s)willbeappliedtoallnewlydiscoveredelementsofthespecifieddevice type.

Figure 370: Poll Details dialog, General Properties panel

14. DismissthePollDetailswindow.

17.4.8

Modifying a Threshold
Procedure 178: To modify a threshold
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. SelecttheStatisticontherightsideConfiguredCollectionpanel. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsManageThreshold. ClicktheEditathresholdbutton. TheThresholdPropertiesdialogopens,ifathresholdexistsfortheselectedstatistic. Intheleftpanel,clickthenameofthetemplatethatyouwanttomodify.

591

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 371: Threshold Properties dialog for Modify operation

6. 7.

Intherightpanel,makeappropriatechanges. Forinformationonanyofthefields,refertoTable82onPage577. Whenyouarefinishedreconfiguringthethreshold,clicktheModifybutton.

17.4.9

Deleting a Threshold
Procedure 179: To delete a threshold
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. IntheApplicationstree,selectPerformanceConfiguredCollection. SelecttheStatisticontherightsideConfiguredCollectionpanel. Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsManageThreshold. ClicktheDeleteathresholdbutton. Intheleftpanel,clicktohighlightthethresholdthatyouwanttodelete.

592

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 372: Threshold Properties dialog for Delete operation

6. 7.

Intherightpanel,reviewthecontentstoensurethatthisisthethresholdthatyouintendto delete. Ifitis,clicktheDeletebutton.

17.4.10

Example Strategy for Choosing and Applying Thresholds

Procedure 180: To create a threshold for a device
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Identifythestatistic. Establishbaselinevalues,basedonpollingviatheMIBBrowser. Afteraweek,reviewthepolleddatatodeterminewhatvaluesarenormalforyourrouter. Usethenormalvaluestodeterminewhatthehighestacceptablevaluesorthresholdsare. Setyourthresholds1020percentlargerthanthemaximumvalues. EitheruniformlyapplytheThresholdvaluesacrossalldevicesofthesamespecifictypeor customizethemforgroupsofdevicesthathavesimilarcharacteristicssuchascore, distribution,andaccess. Logallthresholdvaluesandreviewingthemdaily. Investigaterepeatedthresholdviolationstodistinguishwhethertheproblemcanbe correctedortheThresholdvalueistoolow. Decideonappropriatenotificationsforthresholdviolations. Sinceviolationsarenotconsideredharderrors,immediatenotificationisunnecessary.

7. 8. 9.

593

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

17.4.11

Interpreting Messages on Multiple Thresholds for a Single Statistic

Multiplethresholdsmaybeassociatedwithasinglestatistic.Thisallowsforagradedresponseto unacceptablevariationsinstatistics.ThePerformancemodulehandlesmultiplethresholdsfora singleStatisticasfollows: Untilathresholdreachesitsresetvalue,itremainsinitsseveritystate.Assoonasitreaches theresetvalue,thethresholdisresetandwaitsforthecollecteddatatocrossitslimitagain. Ifanotherthresholdexistsoflowerseverity,andifthecollecteddatafallswithinitslimits, thenthatthresholdgeneratesthemessage. Ifathresholdexistswithhigherseverity,thenthehigherseveritythresholdtakes precedence,anditsmessageisdisplayed.Thethresholdwithlowerseveritylosesits importance,andaneventisnotgenerateduntilthethresholdwithhigherseverityreaches itsresetstate.

17.5

Defining a Performance Custom View

Youcanconfigureanunlimitednumberofcustomviewsofperformanceconfiguredcollectiondata. Theseviewsarefilters,whichdisplayasubsetoftheentriesintheunfiltered(default)view.Their primaryuseistoavoidsearchingforentriesthatarerelatedinsomeway.Theyarenotstatic,but ratherareupdatedasnewdatabecomesavailableinthesystem,evenwhileyouareexaminingthe view.WheneverthefrontviewintheframeisConfiguredCollection,WMopensaperformance criteriadialoginresponsetoselectionofViewCustomViewsAddCustomViewfromthemain menu.ThisdialoghasthreeformsinthePropertiestab.SeeFigure373.

594

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 373: Performance custom view criteria, Properties tab, first form

Themeaningsofthesefieldsareasfollows.
note ............. All fields, except the filter view name and parent name, are optional. Select the fields you want to match and type in the desired values.

Table 83: Performance custom view criteria fields, first form

Field Description Specifyanyofthefollowingvaluestoviewonlythosestatisticsforwhichdata collectionistakingplace. active trueDisplaysthosestatisticsforwhichdatacollectionisenabled. falseDisplaysthosestatisticsforwhichdatacollectionisdisabled. AllDisplaysallstatisticsirrespectiveoftheiractivestatewhetherenabledor disabled. Specifytheagent'sname. agent Example:Ifagentnameisspecifiedas'Node1agent',thenonlystatisticsforwhich dataiscollectedfromthatagentisdisplayed. Specifythecommunitystringofthecorrespondingagentassociatedwiththetype ofmanageddevices.

community

595

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

currentSaveCount

Thiskeepstrackofthenumberofpollsthatoccurredafterthelastsave.For example,ifsavePollCountissetto3,thecollecteddataissavedonlyafterthe thirdpoll(thecollecteddatafromthefirst2pollsisignored). Specifythehost(node)basedonwhichyouneedthestatisticstobedisplayed. ThisistheentryintheIPAddresscolumnoftheInventoryview. Example:IfthednsNameisspecifiedas'testmachine',thenallstatistics pertainingto'testmachine'aredisplayed. Specifythefailurecount(numericvalue)

dnsName

failureCount

Example:Iffailurecountissetas2,allstatisticswhoseFailurecounthavebeen setas2aredisplayed. Specifysavefailurethresholdvalue(numericvalue).Allstatisticswiththe specifiedfailurethresholdvalueisdisplayed. Specifynameforthecustomviewyouarecreatingormodifying.Ifnovalueis specifiedinthisfield,defaultvalues,suchasConfiguredCollection0,Configured Collection1,ConfiguredCollection2arecreated.Thisnamewillappearinthe Applicationstree,underthePerformanceConfiguredCollectionnode. Thisattributeisunused.Formerly,itspecifiedthegroupbasedonwhichthe statisticsaretobefiltered. SpecifythePollID. Specifythetypeusedtopollcolumnarvalueofthetables.

failureThreshold

FilterViewName

groupName id

isMultiplePolledData

trueDisplaysonlythosestatisticswhichareoftypemultiplePolledData. falseDisplaysstatisticsotherthanmultiplePolledData. AllDisplaysallstatisticsirrespectiveoftheirtype(node,interface,multiple).

lastCounterValue

Specifyanumericvalue.Thosestatistics(countertypeOIDsonly.)whoselast collectedvalueequalsthevaluespecifiedisdisplayed. Possiblevaluesare:

logDirectly

AllDisplaysallstatisticsirrespectiveofthevalueinthispropertyi.e.LogDirectly. trueDisplaysthosestatisticsforwhichcollecteddataisstoredinflatfiles. falseDisplaysthosestatisticsforwhichcollecteddataisnotstoredinflatfiles.

logFile

Specifyalogfilename(string),basedonwhichthestatisticsistobedisplayed. Choosetheparenttreenodeunderwhichyourcustomviewhastobeplacedin thetreefromthedropdownbox.

ParentName

Thecriteriasetfortheparentcustomviewwillautomaticallybeusedforchild customview.Hence,itisenoughtospecifyonlyadditionalcriteriaforthechild customview.

596

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 374: Performance custom view criteria, Properties tab, second form

Themeaningsofthesefieldsareasfollows.

Table 84: Performance custom view criteria fields, second form

Field Specifythenameofthestatistic. name Example:Ifthestatisticnameisspecifiedas'Interface_in_octets',thenonlydevices withthethatstatisticaredisplayedinthecustomview. Tip:Specifymultiplestatisticnamesascommaseparatedvalues.Example: Interface_in_octets,Interface_out_octets numericType oid ownerName parentObj Specifythetypeofcollecteddata(whetheritisoftypelongorstring).Possiblevalues are1RetrievesStatisticofLongtypeand2RetrievesStatisticofStringtype. SpecifytheobjectidentifierasreportedbytheSNMPagent. Astringtodenotetheownerofthestatistic. SpecifythenameoftheManagedObjectwhosestatisticsyouwanttodisplay. Description

597

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Specifythepollinginterval. period Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Example:Ifperiodisspecifiedas'2',thenthestatisticsthathavebeenscheduledfor datacollectionwith2secondsasintervalaredisplayed. SpecifythenameofthePollingObjectthatcontrolsthisPolledData. Bydefaultthisfieldwillcontainanemptystring.Youmayspecifythenameofa remotepollerresponsibleforcollectingdataviathispoller,butforuseonlywhen distributedpollersareused. Specifytheportnumbertowhichtheagentislisteningfordatacollectionrequests. DefaultSNMPagentportis161.

policyName pollerName

port

Specifythelastseveritylevel(innumerical)thattheStatistichadreachedwhen thresholdwasappliedonit.Possiblevaluesare,1forCritical,2forMajor,3for previousSeverity Minor,4forWarning,5forClear,6forInfo,0forUnknown. Example:If2isspecified,thosestatisticswhoselastseveritylevelwasMajorwhen thresholdwasappliedonitaredisplayed. protocol Specifythenameofaprotocol. Example:SNMP,TL1 Possiblevaluesare: save AllDisplaysallthestatisticsirrespectiveoftheirsavedstate. trueDisplaysonlythosestatisticswhosecollecteddataissavedinthedatabase. falseDisplaysonlythosestatisticswhosecollecteddataisnotsavedinthedatabase. Possiblevaluesare: trueDisplaysthoseCountertypestatisticsforwhichtheabsolutevalueofthe collecteddataisstoredinthedatabase. falseDisplaysthoseCountertypestatisticsforwhichthedifferentialvaluebetween thelatestandpreviouscollecteddataisstoredinthedatabase. Note:ThesaveAbsolutescanbesetonlyforCountertypeOIDs. saveOnThreshold savePollCount Possiblevaluesaretrueorfalse.trueindicatesthatthecollecteddataissavedonly whenitexceedsthreshold.Thedefaultvalueisfalse. Specifysavepollcount(numericvalue).Allstatisticswiththespecifiedsavepollcount aredisplayed.

saveAbsolutes

598

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 375: Performance custom view criteria, Properties tab, third form

Themeaningsofthesefieldsareasfollows.

Table 85: Performance custom view criteria fields, third form

Field snmpVersion Description SpecifySNMPagent'sversion,suchasv1,v2,v3fromwhichdataiscollected.

Ifyouhavecustomizedtables(definedyourowntables)forstoringcollecteddata, statsDataTableName specifythetablenameinthisfield.Allstatisticsassociatedwiththistablename aredisplayed. SpecifythesuffixappendedtotheDataidentifierfor"interface"types. suffix Forexample,iftheIDis'2.2.1.10',thecorrespondingPolledDatawillhavethe Dataidentifieras"2.2.1.10.x"wherexisthesuffixpart.Forexample,1(or) 16777219for2.2.1.10.

599

Issue 4 August 2012 Field Description

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Specifywhetheryouneedtodisplaydatabasedonthresholdsset. threshold AllDisplaysthosestatisticswhichhavethresholdsandalsothosewhichdonot havethresholdsassociated. trueDisplaysonlythosestatisticswhichhavethresholdsassociated. falseDisplaysonlythosestatisticswhichdonothavethresholdsassociated. thresholdList Specifythenameofthethresholdsincommaseparatedformat. Possiblevaluesaretrueorfalse.Thedefaultvalueisfalse. timeAvg ThisiscalculatedforCountertypeOIDswherethecollecteddatawillbean incrementalvalueandatonepointwillreachthefinalvalueandresettozero.As thisresethappenssoonandveryoften,itispreferredthatadeltavalueisderived fromtwoconsecutivepolls. SpecifytheserverthatownsthisPolledData.

webNMS

PerformancefiltercriteriadialogsincludeanAdditionalCriteriabutton.Ifyouclickthisbutton,WM opensanadditionalcriteriadialog.SeeFigure375onPage599.TheMorebuttoninthiswindowadds asinglePropertyName/MatchCriteriacorrelatedpairoffieldseachtimeyouclickit.Toaddthree pairs,forexample,clicktheMorebuttonthreetimes.TheFewerbuttonremovesapair. Tospecifywhatcolumnsyournewcustomviewshouldinclude,clicktheSelectPropsToView button.

600

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 376: Select Table Columns dialog for performance filter view

note ............. These fields are read-write as well as selectable. However, you cannot reorder the columns by overwriting the default contents of their text boxes. Moreover, the system will determine the initial column arrangement regardless of the order that you see here. In the actual view, you will be able to rearrange columns for only the current view session.

Tospecifymorecolumns,clicktheAdditionaltablecolumnsbutton.TheMore,Fewer,andRemove buttonsintheresultingUserdefinedtablecolumnswindowworkthesameasintheCriteriaDialog windowabove.Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeconstructionofyourtable,clickOKinthesetable columnswindows.BackintheShowobjectwiththesePropertieswindow,clicktheTreeNode Propertiestab.

601

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 377: Tree Node Properties tab for performance filter custom view

ThemeaningofthesefieldsarethesameasthosedescribedinTable23:Treenodepropertiesfor eventfilterviewonPage364.Thedefaultsarethesameastheviewyouwereusingwhenyou createdthecustomview. Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththeviewfilterthatyouhaveconstructed,clicktheApplyFilterbutton. Seealsothefollowingothersectionsofthisguide: ModifyingaCustomViewonPage93 RenamingaCustomViewonPage93 ResizingColumnsinaCustomViewonPage93 RemovingaCustomViewonPage94

17.6

Optimizing Performance Data Storage

DatacollectedfromdevicesisstoredineitherthedefaultSTATSDATAtableoruserdefinedtables. Thesetablesarecreateddaily.Iftheyarenotrequiredforlongtermrecords,tablescanberemoved fromthedatabasetooptimizerequiredstoragespace. Itisrecommendedtoperformaperiodiccleanupoftables.Beforeremovingtables,generatereports todocumenttheircontentssothatyoudonotloseanydata.Thisdatacanalsobeusedtoanalyze trendsinnetworkperformance.

602

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Fordocumentationoftheembeddedstatsdatatablecleanuppolicy(configuredtask),see AdministeringaPolicyonPage605.

603

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

18 Administering a Policy
WMsupportsthecreationandmanagementofnetworkpolicies.Apolicyisapredefinedtasktobe executedeitherperiodicallyorondemand,usuallytoperformamaintenanceorcleanupoperation. However,sinceitisnotaconfigurationtask,apolicydoesnotappearintheScheduledTasksview. WMisinstalledwithafixedsetofpoliciesthatareexecutedonadefaultschedule.Eachpolicymay ormaynothaveconfigurableparameters,whichyoucanviewbyrightclickingthepolicyand selectingUpdate: TheAlarmClearingPolicyrunsevery30minutestoclearallalarmsthatareolderthana configurablenumberofdays.Theunitsfortheperiodfieldareseconds.

Figure 378: AlarmClearingPolicy

TheEscalationPolicy,whichisnotaddedtotheexecutablepolicylistbydefault,allows actiontoautomaticallybetakenconcerningneglectedalarmsandevents;forexample,to escalatethoseeventstoahigherseverityortosendingofemailalertsaboutthem.

605

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 379: EscalationPolicy

TheSupportInfoCleanupPolicyremovesfilesthatwerecreatedbytheGenerateCustomer SupportInfotaskmore60daysago.

606

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

TheExpiredScheduleTaskCleanupPolicyremovesanytaskthatexpired30daysago.

TheCustomStatsCleanUpPolicyremovescustomstatisticsthataremorethan30daysold.

Inthiscontext,customstatisticsarethosestoredinfilesthatweregeneratedonceperday tostorepolleddataperOIDthattheoperatorspecifiedinthePollDetailsdialogofthe client.(SeeSelectingtheDataIdentifierforDataCollectiononPage552.)Untilthesefilesare removedbypolicy,theirdataisavailable intheCurrentStatisticGraphviewerandtheCollectedStatisticsGraphviewers. (SeeViewingaCurrentPerformanceStatisticonPage387andViewingaCollected PerformanceStatisticonPage388.) forHTMLreportsofeithercurrentoraverage/minimum/maximumvalues.

TheperformancedatatoeitherremovebythispolicyorcontinuestoringisoftheSNMP typesFloat,Long,andString. TheReportResultsCleanUpPolicyremovesfromtheSystemReportsReportResultsbranch oftheApplicationstreeanyreportthatwasgenerated30daysago.

607

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TheUserScriptResultsCleanUpPolicyremovesfromtheAdministrationScheduledTasksnode oftheApplicationstreetheprogressrecordsofanyuserscriptthatwasexecuted30days ago.

TodisplaythetableofPoliciesintheviewframe,clickonthePoliciesnodeunderAdministration ToolsintheApplicationstree.

Figure 380: Policies panel

18.1

Adding a Policy
TheAddPolicyfeatureallowsyoutoselectadefinedpolicythatisnotcurrentlyaddedandaddthat policytothelistforexecutionandmodification.Fromthemainmenu,selectActionsAddPolicy andselectthepolicythatyouwanttoadd. TheAddPolicyDetailswindowopens.

Figure 381: AddPolicy Details window

Selectthepolicyfromthedropdownlist.Whenyouclickadd,thesystemopensthepolicy configurationwindowspecifictothatpolicy(seeFigure378throughFigure379above).

608

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

18.2

Scheduling a Policy
Tochangeanalreadyscheduledpolicy,seeUpdatingaPolicyonPage610.Toscheduleapolicythat hasnoschedule(forexample,apolicythatyouhavejustadded),performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 181: To schedule a policy

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,clickAdministrationPolicies. Rightclickthepolicythatyouwanttoschedule. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectSchedulePolicy(orpressCtrl+H). WMopensthePolicySchedulerwindow.

Figure 382: Policy Scheduler window

4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9.

InthePolicySchedulerwindow,selectwhethertochangethepolicytobebasedonDatesor Days. IfyouselectedDays,selectwhethertoapplythepolicyeachday(SelectAllDays)orononly Specificdaysoftheweek. IfyouselectedSpecific,clickontheday(s)oftheweekonwhichtoapplythepolicy. Toapplythepolicyeachhourontheselectedday(s)ordate(s),checktheSelectAllHours checkbox. Toapplythepolicyatonlycertainhoursoftheselectedday(s)ordate(s),checktheSpecific checkbox. Whenyouarefinishedsettingtheschedule,clickOK.

609

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

18.3

Updating a Policy
Withanycurrentlylistedpolicyselected(highlighted),youcaneditthatpolicy.

Procedure 182: To update a policy

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,clickAdministrationPolicies. Rightclickthepolicythatyouwanttoupdate. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectUpdatePolicy(orpressCtrl+U). AnObjectDetailswindowopenstothecurrentpolicyconfiguration.

Figure 383: Object Details window for policy update

4. 5. 6. 7. 8.

Tochangethestatus,selectEnabledorDisabled. Tochangethename,highlightandoverwritetheexistingname. Toreschedulethepolicyexecution,clicktheSchedulebutton. WMopensthePolicySchedulerwindow.SeeFigure382onPage609. Changetheschedulingschemeasyouwish. Whenyouarefinishedchangingtheschedule,clickOK.

18.4

Refreshing the Policies

Fromthemainmenu,theViewRefreshcommandoptionupdatesthelistofpoliciestoreflectany changesthatotherusersmadeinthesystemwhileyouwereviewingthelist,whichwouldeventually beautomaticallyrefreshed.So,ifanotheruserjustfinishedaddingapolicythatyouwantto immediatelyviewitand/orupdate,forexample,therefreshfeatureishelpful.

18.5

Executing a Policy
Atanytime,youcanexecuteapolicywithoutwaitingforascheduledexecutiontooccur.Todoso, rightclicktohighlightitinthepolicylistandselectExecutePolicyfromthedropdownlistofoptions (orpressCtrl+X).WMconfirmsthepolicyexecutionrequest.

610

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 384: Execute policy confirmation pop-up

18.6

Stopping a Policy
WhileWMisexecutingapolicy,itdisplaysthenameofthepolicyagainstagreenbackground.

Figure 385: List background for policies under execution

Atanytimeduringthescheduledormanuallytriggeredexecutionofapolicy,youcanstopitfrom furtherexecution.Todoso,rightclicktohighlightitinthepolicylistandselectStopPolicyfromthe dropdownlistofoptions(orpressCtrl+T).WMpromptsyoutoconfirmthestoprequest.

Figure 386: Stop Policy confirmation pop-up

Thesystemconfirmsthestop.

611

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

18.7

Deleting a Policy
important ........... There is an exception to the following paragraph about deleted policies. If you ever delete the AlarmClearingPolicy, WM will remove that policy from its file system, and you will never be able to access it for future use.

Inthetimeduringwhichapolicyisdeleted itwillnotbescheduledforfutureexecution. itwillnotbeavailableinthelistformanuallytriggeredexecution. itwillstillbedefinedandaccessibletotheAddPolicycommandforlateruse.

Toremoveapolicy,rightclicktohighlightitinthepolicylistandselectDeletePolicyfromthedrop downlistofoptions(orpressCtrl+C).

612

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

19 Configuring Network Elements

19.1 Using the Configure Device Command
TheConfigureDevicecommandoptionallowsyoutomakequickchangestothedeviceconfiguration whichcanbeappliedimmediately.Youcanalsoquicklyviewthecurrentvaluesstoredinthe databasefortheselecteddevice.
warning.............. The Configure Device command should primarily be used by only advanced users who have a thorough understanding of the relationships and dependencies between configuration parameters for network devices. New users should use configuration templates, created by administrators or specialists, that configure additional parameters that depend on and support the individual parameters you may select.

Inadditiontorequiringamoredetailedunderstandingoftheconfigurationparametersandtheir interdependencies,theConfigureDevicecommanddoesnotsupportthefollowingotherfunctions thattheuseoftemplatesdoessupport: configuringmultipledevices schedulingaconfigurationforalaterdateortime reapplyingapreviousconfigurationtootherdevices.

note ............. This feature supports the inherent interdependencies among configurable attributes. For example, if you set Network NTP Enable to Enabled, then Get NTP Server From DHCP is automatically set to Disabled; if you set Network IP Access Filter to Disabled, then Network Allowed IP Access 1 to 3 become not configurable.

Procedure 183: To configure a device

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickonthedesireddevice. Fromthedropdownlist,selectConfigurationConfigureDevice. TheConfigurationGroupdialogisdisplayed,showingatreethatliststheconfigurable parametersfortheselecteddeviceintheleftpanelandadialogintherightpanelforthe branchthatyouselectintheleft.

613

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 387: Configuration Group, PMP SM device

614

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 388: Configuration Group, PMP BHM device

615

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 389: Configuration Group, PMP 320 CPE

616

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 390: Configuration Group, PTP 800 Slave

617

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 391: Configuration groups for a child WM

continued

618

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Parameterlistingsinthetreecanbeexpandedtodisplayallgroups.Configurable parametersforeachdeviceconfigurationgroupcanthenbechangedbyusingthedrop downlistsandtextboxesintherightpanel. 3. Displayandmodifytheattributesyouwanttoconfigure.

Figure 392: Configuration Group attributes IP

WMwillsendconfigurationchangestothedeviceforonlyparametersthathavebeen modifiedintheconfigurationform.Theinitialvaluesdisplayedforparametersarefromthe WMdatabase,notfromthedevice.IfyouknowthattheWMdatabasevaluedoesnotmatch thedevicevalue,andyouaretryingtochangethedevicevaluetothesamevaluethatthe WMdatabasedisplayedbydefault,thenyoushoulduseaconfigurationtemplatetomake thechange. 4. ClickConfigure. Thechangestothedeviceconfigurationareappliedimmediately.Apopupopensto indicatetheresultoftheoperation.

619

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

WMchecksthedevicetypeconfigurationfileinitsserverfilesystemtodistinguishwhetheranyof theparametersthatyouaresettingrequirearebootofthedeviceinordertotakeeffect.Ifitfinds thatanyofthemdo,thenit poststhemessage

Device will be rebooted after applying configuration.

showsanestimateofhowmuchtimetherebootwilltake. providestheoptiontoproceedorcanceltheconfiguration. configurestheparametersandrebootsthedevice,ifyouoptedtoproceed.

Ifitfindsthatnoneoftheparametersrequireareboot,thenWMimmediatelylaunchesintothe configurationanddoesnotrebootthedevicewhentheconfigurationisfinished.

19.2

Using Configuration Templates

Configurationtemplatesconstitutetheprimarytooltoconfigurenetworkdevices.Theuseof configurationtemplatesisthepreferredmethodforconfiguringdevicesfornoviceusers.This methodissaferthantheConfigureDevicecommandbecauseit preventsaccidentalchangestoparametersthatwerenotintendedtobeconfigured,when suchparametershavebeendeliberatelyomittedfromthetemplate. providesusefuldefaultvaluestobesetforeachparameter. representsameaningful,useful,andappropriateselectionofparameterstobeconfiguredas aunit,whenthetemplatehasbeenproperlyconstructedbyanadministratororspecialist.

TheWMdistributionincludesasetofprestructuredtemplatesforeachsupporteddevicetype. However,youcancreateandmodifyadditionalsetsofcustomtemplatesthatarebettersuitedfor configuring,managing,andupdatingyournetwork.

note ............. For a list and description of the configuration parameters available for templates, see the user guide that is dedicated to the device.

AuthorizedusersintheWMclientcancreate,modify,apply,orremoveothertemplates,whichare capableofconfiguringparameterstonondefaultvaluestoconfigure,manage,andupdateyour elementsaccordingtoyourpreferences. IftherearetemplatescurrentlyavailableintheInventoryorMapsview,thenyoucanusethe ApplyTemplatecommandtoconfigureselecteddeviceswiththeparametersfromanexisting templateasdescribedunderApplyingaConfigurationTemplateonPage628.

19.2.1

Importing a Configuration Template

Whenatleastoneconfigurationtemplateexistsinyoursystem,itispossibletoimportatemplate fromanexportedtemplatefileondisk(forexample,onethatwascreatedonanotherWMsystem). Theexportedtemplatefilemusteitherexistonyourclientdeviceorbewithinnetworkreachofyour clientdevice. AlltemplatesthathavebeencreatedonthesameWMsystem,exceptthosemarkedprivateduring theircreation,arevisibleandusablebyallusersofthatsystem,providedthattheyhavetherelevant permissions.Theonlyinstance,apartfromtroubleshooting,inwhichauserwouldneedtousethe import/exporttemplatefeatureistoexchangetemplateswithusersofanotherWMinstallation.

620

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Procedure 184: To import a configuration template

1. IntheApplicationstree,rightclickonConfigurationConfigurationTemplates.

2.

Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectTemplateOperationsImportTemplate(s). Afilesystembrowseropens,presettolookfortemplatefiles.

note ............. The import operation involves pointing the client application to one or more files that are either in the client device file system or within networked reach of the client. If you want to import a template from a remote WM server, to which you lack a network connection or in which you lack file permissions, then you may need to ask the remote server administrator to transmit the file(s) for copying into the client file system before you perform the Import operation.

3.

Browsetoanddoubleclickonthetemplatethatyouwanttoimport. ThesystemaddsthetemplatetothelistintheConfigurationTemplatesview.

19.2.2

Pushing Values from a Prestructured Configuration Template

Foreachsupporteddevice,WMincludesasetoftemplatesprestructuredwiththeparametersthat areconfigurableindevicetypesoftheselectedelements.TheInventoryviewprovidesaccessfor applyingthesetemplates.Intheseviews,thelistofdropdownoptionsfromarightclickonan elementincludestheselectionConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesApplyTemplate.The resultingApplyTemplatedialoglistsalloftheimportedtemplatesofthiskind.Anexamplefora5.4 GHzPMP400APdevicetypeisshowninFigure393.

Figure 393: Apply Template dialog, 5.4-GHz OFDM BHM device

621

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Imported,inthiscontext,meansallofthosexmltemplatesthatweredeliberatelycopiedintothe userinterfacebytheoperatorintheutilityoftheclientapplication.Sincetheimportrequiresa browseofthefilesystemontheclientdevice,thetemplatesmustbeaccessibletobrowsinginoneof thefollowingways: Theclientdeviceislocaltotheserverdevice.Inthiscase,thetemplatesareavailableat .../cambium/wm/server/Default Templates/Configuration Templates (thepathisintheserverfilesystem). Theclientdeviceisremotefromtheserverdevice,buteither anetworkconnection,authenticatedwhererequired,existsbetweentheclientandthe serverfilesystem,andtheoperatorusesthatconnectiontobrowseinit. theoperatorhascopiedthetemplatefilesfromtheremotepathquotedabovetoa pathintheclientfilesystemandbrowsestothislocalpath.

Nosettingexistsforautomaticallyimportingthepredefinedtemplatesthatsupportonlythedevice typespresentinyournetworkorthelargergroupthatsupportallpossibledevicetypes. Toimporttheseconfigurationtemplates,performthefollowingsteps:

Procedure 185: To import configuration templates

1. 2. IntheApplicationsTree,expandtheConfigurationnode. RightclicktheConfigurationTemplatessubnode.

3. 4. 5.

SelectTemplateOperationsImporttemplate(s). Browsetothetargetpathwheretheconfigurationtemplatesexistwithinreachoftheclient. (Seethepathquotedaboveforlocationintheserverfilesystem.) Use Ctrl+clicktoindividuallyselectasetoftemplates. Shift+clicktoindividuallyselectthefirstandlastofasetoftemplatesthatare sequentiallydisplayedinthebrowser,thenCtrl+clicktosubtractanyfrominbetween. Clicktoselectasingletemplate.

622

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 394: Select Import Files browser for configuration templates

note ............. The example case depicted above is the logical total of template selections for a network that consists of (or will consist of) CMM4s and all PMP element types, except OSU and ULAP.

6.

Afteryouhavehighlighted(selected)allofthedesiredtemplatefiles,clicktheOpenbutton.

AlloftheimportedfileswillbeavailabletoanyuserfromtheApplyTemplatedialoguponarightclick ofanelementandselectionofConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesApplyTemplatefromthe dropdownlistofcommandoptions.

19.2.3

Creating a Configuration Template

Inanalternativetousingaprestructuredconfigurationtemplatetopushvaluestoelementsofa certaindevicetype,theWMclientinterfaceallowsyoutobuildatemplatethatwillcontainonlythe valuesfortheparametersthatyouchoosetoinclude,andthenpushthosevaluesbyapplyingthe templatethatyoucreated.

Procedure 186: To create a configuration template

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclickonadeviceofthedesireddevicetype. Fromthedropdownmenu,select ConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesCreatetemplate. WMreadsthedevicetypeoftheselecteddevice,opensaCreateTemplatedialog,and makesavailableinitthemanageableparametersforthatdevicetype.

623

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 395: Create Configuration Template example, PMP OFDM SM with RF tooltip

note ............. The mouse-over tooltip in this case describes the radio feature that the attribute enables. Where the default and valid range values are available to WM, the tooltip states them, as in the following example.

3. 4.

TypeinaTemplatenamebywhichyouwilldistinguishthistemplatefromothersinthe future. TypeinaTemplatedescriptionthatwillfurtherhelpyourecognizethistemplateinthe future.

624

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

important ........... Before you select checkboxes in the Include column, consider whether you want the values for the associated parameters (in the Name column) to be their defaults or to be drawn from the WM database. The defaults are useful for returning a device to the initial values of its device type. The database values cause this template to inherit the current settings that are in the selected device(s) and, so, are useful for making other elements mirror the selected device(s), as in cloning or in selective parametercopying operations.

5.

Toinheritthelastvaluesthatwerepreviouslyappliedtotheselecteddevice(s),checkthe checkboxforLoadvaluesfromdatabaseatthetopofthescreen. Toapplythedefaultvalues(asspecifiedinthedevicetypeconfigurationfileintheWM serverfilesystem),ensurethattheLoadvaluesfromdatabasecheckboxisunchecked.

note ............. Many parameters do not have a default value specified for the OID in the device configuration file. So, if Load values from database is not selected, the values of these parameters will be blank and will require manual editing before the template is applied.

6.

Forconvenience,optionallyusetheJumpTodropdownlisttoselectoneconfigurable parameter. Alternatively,scrollintheleftpaneltoaparameterforwhichyouwanttosetavalue. Ineithercase,therightpaneldisplaystheselectedparameterinthecontextoftheother parametersfromthesamebranchofthetemplate.

625

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 396: Create Configuration Template dialog, parameter selected via Jump To, but Include not checked

7.

IntheIncludecolumn,checkthecheckboxoftheselectedparameter(orofthebranchto whichitbelongs,ifyouwanttheotherparametersinthebranchtobecomeconfigurable). Intherightpanel,theparameternameandassociatedtextboxorselectionlistareactive (arenolongergrayedout)noteveryparameterwhoseIncludeboxischecked.

626

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 397: Create Configuration Template dialog, parameter selected and Include checked

Checkingabranchautomaticallychecksallparametersthatbelongtothebranch. 8. 9. SetthevaluethatyouwantWMtoapplyviathistemplate. Foreachdesiredparameter,repeatSteps6through8.

10. Toterminatetheoperationanddismissthedialogwithoutsavingthenewtemplate,click theNobuttonintheInformationMessagewindowandtheCancelbuttonintheCreate ConfigurationTemplatewindow. ToputtheIncludecolumnandallvaluesbacktothedefaultstate(howtheyweresetwhen youopenedthedialog),clicktheResetbutton. Tomakethisnewtemplateavailabletoeditandapplytootherdevices,clickthe Createbutton. IfWMdetectsanerror,itopensamessagewithspecificinformationabouttheerror. Ifthisoperationsucceeds,WMopensanInformationMessage:

627

Issue 4 August 2012 11. Toacknowledge,clickOK.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

19.2.4

Applying a Configuration Template

Procedure 187: To apply an existing configuration template
1. IntheInventoryview,either 2. rightclicktoselectthesingledevicetowhichyouwanttoapplythetemplate. holddowntheCtrlkeyandleftclicktoselectmultipledevices,thenrightclickononeof theselecteddevices. holddowntheShiftkeyandleftclicktothefirstandlastofacontiguoussetofdevices, thenrightclickononeoftheselecteddevices.

Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,select ConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesApplyTemplate. TheApplyConfigurationTemplatewindowopens,listingallexistingconfigurationtemplates thatexistintheserverfortheselecteddevicetype(s).

Figure 398: Apply Template window

3. 4.

Clicktohighlight(select)thetemplatethatyouwanttoapplytotheselecteddevice(s). YoucanselectonlyonetemplateperApplyoperation. Tocheckorchangethevaluesthatthetemplatewillpush,performthefollowingsteps: a. ClicktheModifyValuesbutton.

628

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 399: Modify Values dialog

important ........... Neither the Name nor the Description of the template is editable as part of the Apply template operation. If any of the changes that you want to make in a configurable parameter would alter the template such that its description would become misleading, click the Cancel button and consider using Procedure 189: To edit a configuration template on Page 631 to alter the description or creating a new template with the values you want to push in this case. If the name would become misleading, click the Cancel button, consider simply creating a new template. The Delete button is available in case the original template is no longer useful. If you realize that you selected the wrong template, click the Back button.

b.

Changethevaluesasappropriateforthetargetdevice(s).

note ............. This feature supports the inherent interdependencies among configurable attributes. For example, if you set Network NTP Enable to Enabled, then Get NTP Server From DHCP is automatically set to Disabled; if you set Network IP Access Filter to Disabled, then Network Allowed IP Access 1 to 3 become not configurable.

c. d.

Tokeepthechangesforfutureapplicationofthistemplate,clicktheSavebutton. Either clicktheApplyNowbuttontopushthevaluesimmediately. clicktheApplyLaterbuttontoentertheTaskSchedulerutility.Forinstructionson howtoschedulethetask,seeDefiningtheTasktoPerformonPage655.

note ............. If the value of any attribute in the template is null, WM throws a Confirm Application message.

629

Issue 4 August 2012 7.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IfyouwanttochangethesetofdevicestowhichWMwillpushthetemplatevalues,perform thefollowingsteps: a. clicktheAddDevicesbuttonintheApplyTemplatedialog.

Figure 400: Devices tab

b. 8.

UsingProcedure189:ToeditaconfigurationtemplateonPage631asaguide,selector filteradditionaldevicesintotheDevicesSelectedblockofthisdialog.

Whenyouaresatisfiedthatthetemplateisappropriatelydefinedorrevised,clickthe ApplyNowbutton.

19.2.5

Finding a Configuration Template

Theclientincludesautilityforquicklyfindingaconfigurationtemplatebasedonstringsthat constituteaportionofortheentiretemplatenameortemplatedescription,thedevicetypethatthe templatesupports,orwhetherthetemplaterequiresarebootofthedeviceforasuccessfulpush.

Procedure 188: To find a configuration template

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,clickonConfigurationConfigurationTemplates.Thisopensa ConfigurationTemplatesviewintherightpanel,listingallthatarecurrentlydefined. Fromthemainmenu,selectEditSearch. AspecialSearchwindowopenstoconfigureformatchesagainstanyofthetabulardatathat

630

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

WMisdisplayingintheConfigurationTemplateswindow,includingthatwhichisviewable onlybyscrolling.

Figure 401: Search window for configuration template criteria

TheoperationofthiswindowisconsistentwithhowtheseveralotherSearchwindowsintheclient operate.Foranexample,seeSearchonPage125.Keepinmindthatthescopeofthesearchisthe contentsofthetable,notthecontentsofallconfigurationtemplatefiles(notattributes,theirvalue ranges,ortheirdefaultvalues).

19.2.6

Editing a Configuration Template

Procedure 189: To edit a configuration template
1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationstree,clickonConfigurationConfigurationTemplates.Thisopensa ConfigurationTemplatesviewintherightpanel,listingallthatarecurrentlydefined. Inthislist,rightclickonthetemplatethatyouwanttoedit. Inthedropdownlistofoptions,selectEditTemplate. TheEditTemplatedialogopens.

note ............. Alternatively, you can select a template to edit by right-clicking a device in the Inventory view and selecting Configuration TemplatesEdit Template from the drop-down list of command options, and then selecting a template from the resulting dialog.

631

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 402: Edit Template dialog for editing

note ............. If the device type configuration file stored on the WM server specifies that a reboot is required in order for settings of a particular parameter to take effect, and you select that parameter in your template, then WM automatically checks the Reboot required check box, and each device to which the template is applied will be rebooted after the template application. In this case, you cannot uncheck the check box. If the check box is not automatically checked, then you can select that option in case you want to.

4.

ConfigurewhatWMshoulddowhenanattempttoapplythetemplatetoadevicefails: Toreverttotheprevioussettings,selecttheRollbackConfigurationtoPreviousValues checkbox.

note ............. This option is beneficial when WM successfully applied some parameters from the template but failed in attempting to apply one. For that case, this option puts original settings into effect (for example, when the settings are related such that a partial update would result in an invalid device configuration).

Toattempttoapplythetemplatetothenextdeviceinthesequence,select ContinuewithNextDevice. Toattempttoapplythenextattributevalueinthetemplate,select ContinuewithNextAttribute.

note ............. If this is not checked, all configurations will stop.

5.

Edittheparametervaluesthatyouwanttochange.

632

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

6.

Toeffectyourchangesinthetemplate,clickUpdate. ToputtheIncludecolumnandallvaluesbacktothedefaultstate(howtheyweresetwhen youopenedthedialog),clicktheResetbutton. Toterminatetheeditsessionwithoutsavingtheresults,clickCancel.

19.2.7

Pushing Configuration Values Upon Discovery

Youcancreateanassociationforanysingleimportedprestructuredconfigurationtemplate(see PushingValuesfromaPrestructuredConfigurationTemplateonPage621)andoperatorcreated configurationtemplates(seeCreatingaConfigurationTemplateonPage623),forWMto automaticallypushthevaluesinthetemplatetoeverydeviceofaspecifieddevicetypeatthetimeof initialdiscovery. 8Tousethisfeature,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 190: To set up automatic configuration upon discovery

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectToolsDefaultConfigTemplateMapping. TheDefaultConfigurationTemplateMappingdialogopens,asshowninFigure403.

note ............. Regardless of whether you have imported prestructured configuration templates to the client device and whether one or more devices are selected (highlighted) at the time that you select this menu option, the mapping dialog does not presume that you intend a particular a mapping scheme and so it is not pre-populated by those template associations.

Figure 403: Default Configuration Template Mapping dialog

2. 3.

ClicktheAddbuttontoaddanassociationforaspecificdevicetype. UsetheDeviceTypedropdownlisttoscrolltothedesireddevicetype.

ThispushdoesnotoccurduringrediscoveryorduringtheconfigurationrefreshoperationthatissetintheConfiguration PollingtabofthePollingIntervaldialog.

633

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifnotemplateshavebeenimportedorcreatedforthisdevicetype,thenthesystem returnsthefollowingmessage:No configuration template exists for selected device type. 4. Ifanytemplateshavebeenimportedorcreatedforthisdevicetype,usetheTemplateName dropdownlisttoscrolltoandselectthedesiredtemplatetoapplyupondiscoverytoeach deviceoftheselectedtype.

5.

ChecktheTemplateDescriptiontoensurethattheselectedtemplateisthedesired template.

note ............. In the example case shown above, checking the Template Description in the Mapping dialog may give the impression that the associated template will enforce authentication. However, this example description does not state (as the full Template Name does) that the associated template disables authentication. Since resizing the Template Name column in the Mapping dialog may not expose sufficient length in the names to distinguish between similarly named templates, you may need to select InventoryConfiguration Templates from the Applications Tree and then resize the columns of the Configuration Templates panel to see associated names and descriptions.

6.

WhenyouaresatisfiedthattheTemplateNameyouselectedisthetemplatewhosevalues youwillsometimeswantimposedupondiscovery,clicktheSavebutton.

634

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

7.

RepeatthestepsofthisprocedureforeachdevicetypeontowhichyouwantWMtoimpose aconfigurationupondiscovery.

8. 9.

SortthetablebyclickingontheDeviceTypecolumnhead. Scanthelist,lookingforinstancesofmultipletemplatesperdevicetype. WMwillpushthesemultipletemplatesinthesequence,toptobottom(lowestS.No.to highest). Inthecaseoftheanyattributethatappearsinandhavedifferentvaluesinmultiple templates,theresultwillbethevaluefromthelasttemplate(highestS.No.)that pushedit.

10. Foreachcaseofthese,understandthat

11. Changethesequenceforanydevicetype,asdesired. 12. ClicktheSavebutton. Atanytime,youcanrecheckanytemplatemappingsbyselectingToolsDefaultConfigTemplate Mappingfromthemainmenu.ThetableintheMappingdialogaccumulatesandpreservesallcurrent mappingsfordisplaysothatyoucanrecheckthelistatanytime.Foranymappingthatyouwantto remove,clicktohighlighttherowofthemappingandthenclicktheDeletebutton.Wheneveryou makeachangethatyouwantpreservedinthisfeaturedialog,clicktheSavebuttonbeforeyoucancel thewindow.Ifyouforgetto,thenthisdialogwillopenwiththecontentsithadinthelastpreviously savedinstance.

19.2.8

Exporting a Configuration Template

Itissimilarlypossibletoexportatemplatethatyoucreatedonthissystemtoanotherlocation.You canusethisfunctiontoeitherstoreabackupcopyinasafefolderorsharewithanotherWMsystem.

Procedure 191: To export a configuration template

1. IntheApplicationstree,selectConfigurationConfigurationTemplates. ThisopenstheConfigurationTemplatesviewintheviewframe,wherealldefinedtemplates arelisted. Inthislist,rightclickonadevicethattheconfigurationtemplateyouwanttoexport supports. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectExporttemplate. AfilesystembrowsertitledSelectTemplateExportFolderopensinthelocalclientdevice. Browsetoanddoubleclickonthefolderwhereyouwanttostoretheconfiguration template.

2. 3. 4.

635

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

19.2.9

Exporting All Configuration Templates

WMsupportstheexportofallconfigurationtemplatesbyasingleoperationasfollows.

Procedure 192: To export all configuration templates

1. 2. 3. IntheApplicationsTree,rightclickonConfigurationConfigurationTemplates. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectTemplateOperationsExportAllTemplate(s). AfilesystembrowsertitledSelectTemplateExportFolderopensinthelocalclientdevice. Browsetoanddoubleclickonthefolderwhereyouwantalloftheconfigurationtemplates fromthesystemdeposited.

19.2.10

Deleting a Configuration Template

Procedure 193: To delete a configuration template
1. 2. IntheInventoryview,rightclicktohighlightanydeviceforwhichthetemplatethatyou wanttodeleteiscouldapply. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,select ConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesDeleteTemplate. TheDeleteConfigurationTemplatewindowopens,listingallthatcouldapply.

Figure 404: Delete Template window

3. 4. 5.

Clicktohighlight(select)thetemplatethatyouwanttodelete. Ifyouwanttoreviewthetemplatebeforedeletingit,clicktheViewbutton. Whenyouwanttodeletethetemplate,clicktheDeletebutton. Thesystemopensawarningwindowthatasksforconfirmation.

Figure 405: Warning pop-up for Delete template operation

6. Toconfirmthedeleteoperation,clickYes. Toterminatethedeleteoperation,clickNo.

636

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

19.3

Cloning a Device Configuration

WMprovidesauserinterfaceforcloningdeviceconfigurationswithvalues,fromeitheraselected deviceorthedatabase,eitherpushedtodestinationdevicesofthesamedevicetypeorsavedtoa templateyouwilllaterpushtothem,withouttouchingattributesthatshouldbeexcludedfrom cloning;forexample,without thosethatarenotreadablefromthesource,suchaskeysandpasswords. othersthatcouldfailtheoperation,suchasDeviceRegionCodeandDeviceDefaultReset. optionally,thosethatshouldinmostcasesremainunique,suchasIP,DHCP,NAT,andbridge modeattributes.

ThisispreferredtotheCreateTemplateoperationwithallattributesselected,becauseofuniqueand nullvaluesfrequentlycausingtheConfigurationTemplatepushtofail.Tolaunchthecloning interface,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 194: To clone a device configuration

1. RightclickonthetargetsourcedeviceandselectCloneDevicefromitsdropdownlistof options.

Figure 406: Clone Device dialog

2. 3.

ForDataSource,selecteitherDatabase(thedefault)orDevice(thedropdownoption). IfyouwanttoincludetheattributeName(ID),checkthecheckboxforIncludeUnique Properties.

note ............. Attributes such as IP, DHCP, NAT, and bridge mode are device specific and should not be copied from one device to another, so cloning operations always exclude them.

4.

IfyouselectedIncludeUniquePropertiesintheprecedingstep,makeanotetoyourselfthat eachcloneddeviceultimatelywillneedauniqueName(ID)inorderforWMtoproperly manageit. ForDestination,clickaradiobuttontoselecteitherSaveToTemplateorDevice(s).

5.

637

Issue 4 August 2012 6. IfyouselectedSaveToTemplate,performthefollowingsteps: a. b.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ForTemplateName,typeinauniquenamethatwillhelpyoudistinguishthistemplate fromothers. ForTemplateDescription,typeinsometextthatwillmakeextrainformationavailable toyouataglanceinthefuturewhenyouseeitlistedamongothertemplates.

IfyouselectedDevice(s)astheDestination,clicktohighlighteachdeviceinthelistof managedelementsofthesamedevicetype.

7.

RegardlessofwhethertheDestinationistemplateordevice(s),clickOKwhenyouare satisfiedwithhowtheCloneDevicedialogisconfigured. WMopensanInformationwindowthatadvisesyoutoreviewtheattributes.

8.

ClickOKintheInformationwindow. WMopensatabularCloneDevicedialog,whichallowsyoutoreviewallattributes,except thoseomittedbyfeaturedesign(thosenotreadableandthosethatcouldcausethe operationtofail)anduniqueattributesifyoudidnotselectIncludeUniqueProperties. IfyouhadSaveToTemplateselected,thenWMalsoopensamessagewindowthat indicateswhetherthetemplatewascreated.

Thenewtabulardialogisnotactiveuntilyoudismissthemessagewindow. 638

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 407: Clone Device dialog, table of attributes and values

639

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Verticalscrollingisrequiredtoseealloftheattributes,andeachofthecolumnheadingsis activeforsortingandreversesortingthetablebythecontentsofthecolumn. 9. Foranyattributethatyoudonotwanttopush,clicktohighlighttherowandclickthe DeleteRowsbuttonatthebottomofthewindow. WMwillaskyoutoconfirmbeforeitremovestherow(s).

10. IntheValuecolumn,makeanychangesthatareappropriatefortheremainingattributes. 11. IntheOnFailureblock,selectfromamongRollbackConfigurationtoPreviousValues, ContinuewithNextDevice,orContinuewithNextAttribute.

note ............. Observe that, if you selected Device(s) for Destination in the initial window, the top of the tabular window provides a default template name and description, each constructed as CONF_SourceDeviceName(ID). These templates will not be saved in the Device(s) case. If you selected Save To Template for Destination, then the Template Name and Template Description that you configured are shown there.

12. Whenyouaresatisfiedwithallofthecontentsofthistableandthefailurealternatives,click ApplyNow,ApplyLater,orSave. Theseselectionshavethesameaffectsthattheydoforconfigurationtemplates.(See Procedure187:ToapplyanexistingconfigurationtemplateonPage628.) Ifavalueexistsintheconfigurationthatwouldcausetheentirecloningoperationtofail, thenWMopensaspecificerrormessageaboutwhatisneededtomaketheoperation succeed,asinthefollowingexample:

IfyouselectedSave,andthesystemsawnovaluesthatwouldcausetheentirecloning operationtofail,thenWMaddsthenewtemplatetothelistavailablefromtheApplications treeatConfigurationConfigurationTemplates,amonganyconfigurationtemplates thatyoubroughtintotheclientusingthe ConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesTemplateOperationsImportTemplate(s) operation. thatyoucreatedusingthe ConfigurationConfigurationTemplatesTemplateOperationsCreateTemplate operation.

InthecaseofApplyNow,WMconvertsthewindowtoadisplayoftheresults.

640

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

ResultswhoseIdentifierisshownasTASK...indicatethatthesystemmadenoattemptto implementavalueafterapreviousattemptdidnotsucceed.

13. Toviewinformationassociatedwiththeresults,clicktohighlighttherow(s)forwhichyou wanttheinformation,thenclicktheDetailsbutton. NowthewindowconvertsanothertablethatassociatestheOID,attributename,andresult foreachattributethatremainedwhenyouappliedtheconfiguration.

641

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Verticalscrollingisrequiredtoseealloftheattributes,andeachofthecolumnheadingsis activeforsortingandreversesortingthetablebythecontentsofthecolumn.

19.4

Launching BAM
Atanytime,youcanopenaBAMsessionfromwithinWM.

Procedure 195: Launching a BAM session

1. 2. IntheInventoryview,thenetworktreeview,orthephysicalmap,rightclickonanyPMP device. Fromthedropdownlistofcommandoptions,selectLaunchBAM. AfterfindinganappropriateJavaversiononyourWMclientdevice,theBAMsubsystemof Prizmopenstoitslogininterface.

ForinformationonusingBAM,withitsproprietaryprotocol,toconfigureelements,seeUsingthe BandwidthandAuthenticationManager(BAM)SubsystemonPage264.

642

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

19.5
19.5.1

Using Certain Device Type-specific Configuration Dialogs

Configuring an EtherWAN Switch
Thissectionprovidesanexampleofhowtheconfigurationinterfacepresentsdatafieldsand respondstouserattemptstomodifydevicesettings.ForthemanagementofEtherWANSwitches (8portand14port)forCMM4Devices,WMprovidesthefollowingcapabilities: enhancedportsecuritythroughperportMACaddresslocking. enhancedswitchingthrough bridgeaging. Layer2forwarding. portmirroring.

MACaddressbasedtrunkingwithlinkfailover. supportforIGMP(InternetGroupManagementProtocol)snooping.Thisfeaturecorrelates linkswiththeIPmulticaststreamsintendedforthem,sothattheydonothandleunneeded packets. supportforthefollowingprotocols,whichtheseswitchessupport: 802.1d,SpanningTree 802.1w,RapidSpanningTree 802.1q,GARP(GenericAttributeRegistrationProtocol)VLANRegistrationProtocol (GVRP)andTagbasedVLANConfiguration 802.1p,QoSwithfourconfigurablepriorityqueues

Aswithanyotherconfigurabledevice,theconfigurationdialogisaccessiblethrougharightclickon thedeviceandthenselectionofConfigurationConfigureDevice. InseveralfieldsoftheEditBostEtherwan14PortSwdialog,anellipsis()indicatesthatasingleclick opensaseparatedialogforconfiguringtheattributesofthecategoryforthatfield.

643

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Forexample,ifyouclicktohighlightPortintheleftpanel,andthenclicktheellipsisassociatedwith PortConfigurationintherightpanel,thePortConfigurationdialogopens.

Shadingmarksthefieldsthatarereadonlyinthisfurtherdialog.Theseprovideinformationthatis helpfulfordecisionsontheconfigurablefieldsinthesamedialog,whichareperport

AdminSetting SpeedConfiguration DuplexityConfiguration FlowControl SwitchBroadcastratelimittype

SwitchDLFandMulticastratelimittype Switchratelimitlevel Defaultpriority PortVLANID Portaliasname

Aswithanyotherconfigurableattributesinthisandotherdevicetypes,consultitsuserguidefor informationaboutwhether,why,andhowtoconfigurethemtothebestadvantageofyournetwork. Othersecondarydialogsfollowsuit.Forexample,ifyouclicktohighlightSwitchingintheleftpanel, andthenclicktheellipsisassociatedwithMirrorfromportmapintheleftpanel,themirrorfrom postmapdialogopens.

Whensuchasecondarydialogisnotconfigurable,thelabelfortheellipsisfieldisgray.Forexample,if youclicktohighlightSwitchingintheleftpanel,youmayseethatthePortMirrormaplabelisgray.

644

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Ifyouclicktheellipsisinthiscase,thePortMirrormapdialogopens,butitsfieldsaregray,and nothinginitisselectable.

Someofthesecondarydialogsmaycomprisemultipletabs.ThisisthecasefortheQoSdialogthat openswhenyouclicktohighlightQOSintheleftpanelandthenclicktheellipsisassociatedwithQOS intherightpanel.

645

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Inthesetabs,thecellsareconfigurablewheneverQOSstatusisenabledontheswitch.

646

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

647

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

20 Scheduling a One-Time or Periodic Task

Subjecttopermissions,anyuserintheWMclientinterfacehasaccesstothefollowingtask managementcapabilitiesofthesystem: scheduleaonetimeorperiodicallyrepeatingtask slimorexpandthelistofalreadyconfiguredtasksthatyouarecurrentlyviewingtoinclude onlythosethatthesessionuserowns onlythosethatwereautomaticallycreatedbyWM(owner:SYSTEM) onlythosethatauserwithlesserpermissionsowns agreaterlistthatalsoincludesalltasksdefinedbyallusers.

20.1

Schedulable Tasks
WMsupportsthefollowingtypesofschedulabletasks: PMP/PTPUpgrade Reports UserScript PhysicalMapDataRefresh Configuration GenerateCustomerSupportInformation GeolocationImport(CSV)

Eachofthesetasksarealternativelysupportedbytheclientinterfaceforexecutionondemand,some inasingleoperationandothersinmultipleoperations.SomeadvantagesofusingtheTaskScheduler utilityofWM(insteadofondemandexecutionselsewhereintheclient)are laborsavingsfromhavingtheoperationsrunautomaticallyandrepeatedly. systemresourcesavingsfromhavingtheoperationsrunattimeswhenlesstrafficexists acrossthesystem. accuracyfromhavingtheentiresetofassociatedoperationsbundled,reviewable,and editableuntilthesetofthemmatchesyourexactneeds. qualityfromhavingsuccessfultaskspreservedandidenticallyrepeateduntileithertheyare deliberatelydeletedortheirconfiguredexecutabletimespanhasexpired.

Theprerequisites,specificationsrequired,anduseroptionsthatareassociatedwitheachtypeof supportedtaskaredescribedinTable86.
note ............. This table describes task definition and does not attempt to include what is involved in task scheduling, which is universal to all task types and is described under Table 87: Options for scheduling of tasks on Page 669.

649

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Table 86: Configurable task prerequisites, requirements, and options

Task Type Task Definition Prerequisites or Requirements PopulatedCSVfilethatalreadyexists withinbrowserreachoftheclient andcontainsonlyproperly formattedgeolocations.Usedto updatecoordinatesofdevicesthat WMalreadymanages. Deviceconfigurationtemplate alreadyimportedintotheclient. Either

Optional Criteria

Geolocation Import(CSV)

CSVfilename

Templatetopush

StaticSelection

theName(ID)sofoneor moredevices thenamesofoneormore alreadydefinedDevice Groups

Eitherorbothof

DynamicSelection, Specific[device]Type(including Basic firmwareversion)

zeroorone Configuration Attributevalue4 zeroorone Performance Attributevalue4

Configuration (ofdevicesthat meetselection criteria)

OneormoreofthefollowingDevice Properties

DeviceType1(regardlessof firmwareversion) IPAddress2 Managed Name(ID)2 SNMP ReadCommunity V3ContextName2 V3UserName2 Version Specific[device]Type1 (includingfirmwareversion) Status3 SysOID2

Applyingtoallmatchesof specifiedDeviceTypesor SpecificType,eitherorbothof

DynamicSelection, Advanced

zeroormorevaluesof Configuration Attributes4 zeroormorevaluesof Performance Attributes4

DeviceGroup Selection

Atleastoneexistingdevicegroup

650

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Prerequisites or Requirements Optional Criteria UniqueTicketID(overwriting 00000000)forthesubjectline, localrecordkeeping,and referencebytechnicalsupport staff.

Task Type

Task Definition

MailOptions

SMTPservermustbeconfigured. SMTPportmustbeopen.

FileOptions

WhethertoSplitFile (recommendedforfileslarger Reportfilemustexistwithinbrowser than1.5MB). reach. WhethertoEncryptthefilesby associatingthemwitha Password. HighorLowlevelofdetail.

Support InformationLevel Generate Customer SupportInfo

Scriptselection

Scriptfile(s)mustexistwithin Recommendedfiletypes browserreachoftheclient,andcan includeVisualBasic,batch, beofVisualBasic,batch,shell,orPerl shell,andPerl. type. Extrafile(s)mustexistwithin browserreachoftheclient. Thesupporttooldoesnot constrainthefiletype. Composedcomments. Eitherorbothof

Filestoattach Commentsto include

Deviceselection

someorallmembers ofoneormore selecteddevicegroup devicesindividually selected

PhysicalMap DataRefresh UserScript

Scripttoexecute

Ascriptalreadycomposedasafile whosemodeissettoexecutable.

Arguments

651

Issue 4 August 2012 Task Type Task Definition Prerequisites or Requirements

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Optional Criteria Either

SelectReportType

Configuration System

Either Sourceofreport data

Database(stored) Device(current)

Either

StaticSelection

theName(ID)sofoneor moredevices thenamesofoneormore alreadydefinedDevice Groups

Eitherorbothof

DynamicSelection, Specific[device]Type(including Basic firmwareversion)

zeroorone Configuration Attributevalue4 zeroorone Performance Attributevalue4

Reports5 OneormoreofthefollowingDevice Properties

DeviceType1(regardlessof firmwareversion) IPAddress2 Managed Name(ID)2 SNMP ReadCommunity2 V3ContextName2 V3UserName2 Version Specific[device]Type1 (includingfirmwareversion) Status3 SysOID2

Applyingtoallmatchesof specifiedDeviceTypesor SpecificType,eitherorbothof

DynamicSelection, Advanced

zeroormorevaluesof Configuration Attributes4 zeroormorevaluesof Performance Attributes4

DeviceGroup Selection

Atleastoneexistingdevicegroup

652

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Prerequisites or Requirements Both

Task Type

Task Definition

Optional Criteria

General Configuration

whethertouse passiveFTP whethertoenableSM Autoupdatewhen upgradingAPs.

SMAutoupdate Configuration

Whattouseasfileserverto pushupgradepackagestoSMs. HPAPChannelBandwidth configuration. SequenceinwhichWMwill examineselectedpackagesfor appropriateness. Anyofthefollowing:

SelectPackages PMP/PTP Upgrade

Packagesmustbedownloaded. IDandpasswordforaccesstothe filesofdevicesbeingupgraded.

DeviceSettings

useoftheAdd operationtoselect oneormorefromthe DeviceList useoftheRemove buttontodeleteone ormorefromthe DevicesSelectedlist useoftheLoadFrom Groupoperationto addanentiregroupby itsDeviceGroup Name

Addorremove device(s)

1.

ForDeviceTypeorSpecificType,selectalltypesinasingleAddorModifyoperation.Afterthisoperation, neithertypeisanylongeravailableamongselectableDeviceProperties.ThroughasubsequentModify operation,youcanspecifyadditionaltypesbuttheConditionsblockwillcontainonlyasinglelineforall selectedtypes. InthetextboxassociatedwitheachoftheseDeviceProperties,youenterastringandspecifywhethera propermatchcontains,startswith,endswith,orequalsthatstring. IfyouselectStatusfromamongtheDeviceProperties,thenyoumustselectonlyonestatuslevelfromamong thefollowing:However,thisselectionestablishesonlyonecondition.ThroughanotherAddoperationinthe sametaskdefinition,youcanselectanotherindividualStatuslevelforaseparatecondition,andsoforth. Themethodforspecifyingavalueforoneoftheseattributesisspecifictoandappropriatefortheattribute youhaveselected.Itmayinvolvetypingintoatextboxandthenselectinganassociatedoperatorfromthe dropdownlist.Itmayinvolveselectinganattributevalueoptionfromadropdownlistandthenselectingan associatedoperator. Somereportsdonotinvolvedeviceselection(forexample,PhysicalMapDataRefresh).Forthosethatdo,the outputofthereportdependsonthepermissionsandcustomviewscopeoftheuserwhoschedulesthetask.

2. 3.

4.

5.

653

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

20.2

Launching the Task Scheduler

TolaunchtheTaskSchedulerutility,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 196: To launch Task Scheduler

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,clicktoexpandtheAdministrationbranch. RightclickitschildnodeScheduledTasksandselectScheduleATask(orclicktheScheduled TasksnodeandselectActionsScheduleATaskfromthemainmenu). WMopenstheSelectTaskTypedialog,showninFigure408.

Figure 408: Select Task Type dialog

3.

Fromthedropdownlist,selectthetasktype. WMopensaCreateScheduleTaskdialogwhosetabsarespecifictothetasktype,shownin Figure409.

654

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 409: Create Schedule Task dialog for all tasks except Configuration and Reports

ForinformationonpopulatingtheDetailstaborDevicestab(presentforonlyaReportsor Configurationtask)contents,seeTable86:ConfigurabletaskonPage650andDefiningtheTaskto PerformonPage655.Forinformationonsettingthescheduleforyourdesiredtask,seeTable87: OptionsforschedulingoftasksonPage669.

20.3

Defining the Task to Perform

Thissectionprovidesanexamplefordefiningthedevicelistordevicecriteriaandthedetails (configurationtemplateselection)foraConfigurationtask.

Procedure 197: To define a Configuration task

1. 2. 3. 4. IntheApplicationstree,expandtheConfigurationnode. ClickitschildnodeConfigurationTemplates. TheConfigurationTemplatestableopensintheviewpaneltotheright. Ifthetemplatethatyouwantthisnewtasktoapplyisnotlistedinthepanel,perform Procedure184:ToimportaconfigurationtemplateonPage621. PerformProcedure196:TolaunchTaskScheduleronPage654,selectingConfigurationas thetasktype.

655

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 410: Create Schedule Task dialog for a Configuration or Reports task, Schedule tab

5.

ClicktheDevicestab.

656

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 411: Create Schedule Task dialog for a Configuration or Reports task, Devices tab

6.

ApplyingtheguidanceofCreatingandUsingDeviceGroupsonPage301,decidewhether youwantthistasktobeexecutedagainst (1)astaticgroupofdevices adynamicgroupofdevicesthatisbasedon (2)Basicfiltering (3)Advancedfiltering

(4)anexistingdevicegroup

7.

UsethefollowingcolorcodetofindtheappropriatesubstepstoperformbeforeStep8: and filter those devices by certain attribute values no yesorno yesorno no use substeps of this color athroughd athroughe athroughg athroughe

To configure the task to affect devices that you identify by (1)astaticgroupofdevices (2)adynamicgroupofdevicesfrom Basicfiltering (3)adynamicgroupofdevicesfrom Advancedfiltering (4)oneormoreexistingdevice groups

657

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifyouwantthisnewtasktoapplyadeviceconfigurationtemplatetooneormoredevice Name(ID)sanddonotwanttofilterthosedevicesbyanyexistingconfigurationor performanceattributevalues,performthefollowingsteps: a. b. UnderDeviceSelection,clicktheradiobuttonforStaticSelection. ClicktheAddbuttonintheDevicesSelectedpanel.

Figure 412: Add Device window

c. d. e.

Ctrl+clicktohighlightedthedevicesagainstwhichyouwantthistasktobeexecuted. ClicktheAddbuttonintheAddDevicewindow. Ifyouwanttoincludealldevicesthataremembersofeachofoneormoredevice groups,clicktheFromGroupbutton.

658

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 413: Device Groups window

f. g. h. i.

Clicktohighlighttherowofadevicegrouptobeincluded. ClicktheLoadbutton. Foreachotherdevicegrouptobeincluded,repeatStepsethroughg. ToremoveanyduplicateorundesireddevicesfromtheDevicesSelectedlist,Ctrl+click tohighlightthemandthenclicktheRemovebutton.

659

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 414: Individual devices selected for removal

j.

AdvancetoStep8.

Ifyouinsteadwantthisnewtasktoapplyadeviceconfigurationtemplatetooneormore devicetypesspecifictofirmwareversionandyoudoordonotwanttofilterthematching devicesbythevaluesofoneconfigurationattributeand/oroneperformanceattributevalue, performthefollowingsteps: a. b. c. IntheDeviceSelectionpanel,clicktheradiobuttonforDynamicSelection. FromthedropdownlistassociatedwithDynamicSelection,selectBasic. Specifyoneormoredevicespecifictypesbyperformingthefollowingsteps: ClickthedownarrowassociatedwithSpecificType.

note ............. Since the configuration and performance attribute scroll lists (presuming that you want to specify any) are specific to device type, you must make a Specific Type selection before the interface will make those options available.

660

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 415: Specific Type drop-down list for Basic Dynamic Selection

d.

SelectanindividualSpecificType.

Ifyouwanttooptionallyfilterthematchingdevicesbythevalueofoneconfiguration attribute,performthefollowingsteps: ClickthedownarrowassociatedwithConfigurationAttribute.

661

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 416: Configuration Attribute drop-down list for Basic Dynamic Selection

Scrollandclicktohighlighttherow(s)ofthesingleattributewhosevalueyouwant tospecify.

note ............. Depending on what attribute you selected, the interface may provide either a drop-down list or a text box for value specification.

e.

SpecifythevaluefortheselectedConfigurationAttribute. Fromtheoperatordropdownlist,selecttheoperatorthatrelatestothevalueyou selectedorentered.

Ifyouwanttooptionallyfilterthematchingdevicesbythevalueofoneperformance attribute,performthefollowingsteps: ClickthedownarrowassociatedwithPerformanceAttribute.

662

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 417: Performance Attribute drop-down list for Basic Dynamic Selection

Scrollandclicktohighlighttherow(s)ofthesingleattributewhosevalueyouwant tospecify. EnterthevaluefortheselectedPerformanceAttribute. Fromtheoperatordropdownlist,selecttheoperatorthatrelatestothevalueyou entered.

note ............. The operators for each performance attribute values must be equals (=), does not equal (!=), is less than (<), is less than or equal to (<=), is greater than (>), or is greater than or equal to (>=).

f.

AdvancetoStep8.

Ifyouinsteadwantthisnewtasktoapplyadeviceconfigurationtemplatetoasetofdevicesthat matchoneormoreDeviceProperties(seetheDynamicSelection,AdvancedrowofTable86 onPage650)andyoudoordonotwantthissetfurtherfilteredbyanynumberofcurrent configurationorperformanceattributevalues,performthefollowingsteps: a. b. c. IntheDeviceSelectionpanel,clicktheradiobuttonforDynamicSelection. FromthedropdownlistassociatedwithDynamicSelection,selectAdvanced. ClicktheAddbutton. TheAddAdvancedCriteriawindowopens,showninFigure418.

663

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 418: Add Advanced Criteria window, ready for Device Properties selections

important ........... Refer to the Dynamic Selection, Advanced row of Table 86 on Page 650 and the notes associated with it at the end of the table for the rules involved in this type of task definition. Only one condition is created for all Device Types or Specific Types You must select all types (that you want to apply) in a single Add or Modify operation. After this operation, neither type is any longer available in the list of selectable Device Properties. Through a subsequent Modify operation, you can specify additional types, but the Conditions block will contain only a single line for all selected types. The sets of Configuration Attributes and Performance Attributes that you can optionally choose from are only those that are supported for the device types or specific [device] types that you have selected (that are listed in that one condition). By contrast, any of the Device Properties that you optionally specify a value and operator for can have the effect of expanding the set of target devices, but this property will be shown in a separate row of the Conditions block, and the specific devices that the task includes because of this property will not be shown in the task definition (WM will not apply the property condition until it executes the task).

d. e.

ClickthedownarrowassociatedwithName. Scrollandselecteither DeviceType(toallowyoutoselecttypesregardlessoftheirfirmwareversions) SpecificType(toallowyoutoselecttypesspecifictotheirfirmwareversions).

f. g.

ClickOK. Tooptionallyintroduceanotherconditionforeitherfilteringthesetofdevicestobe affectedbythetaskoradding(atexecutiontime)devicesthatmeetthenewcondition, performthefollowingsteps: ClicktheAddbutton. Fromthedropdownlistatthetopofthewindow,either selectDevicePropertiestoaddnonattributeconditionsthatcouldinclude moredevicesatexecutiontime.

664

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 419: Add Advanced Criteria window, selectable Device Properties

selectConfigurationAttributeorPerformanceAttributetoaddaqualification thatmustbemetbyanydevicethatisofaselectedDeviceTypeorSpecific Type.

665

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 420: Add Advanced Criteria window, Configuration Attributes for a subset of Specific Types

Foreachnewcondition(Name) settheValue. settheassociatedOperator. ClickOK.

BackintheupdatedCreateScheduleTaskwindow clicktohighlightthenewcondition. selecttheoperatorANDorOR.

ReviewtheConditionsblocktoensurethat thevalueanditsoperatorarecorrectinthenewcondition. theAND/ORswitchisproperlysetforthenewcondition.

h. i.

RepeatStepgasmanytimesasrequiredtointroducealldesiredfilteringconditions. AdvancetoStep8.

Ifyouinsteadwantthisnewtasktoapplyadeviceconfigurationtemplatetoallmembersofoneor moredevicegroupsanddonotwanttofilterthosedevicesbyanyexistingconfigurationor performanceattributevalues,performthefollowingsteps: a. b. c. ClicktoselecttheradiobuttonforDeviceGroupSelection. IntheDeviceGroupsblock,clicktohighlightthedesireddevicegroup(s). ClickthePreviewbutton.

666

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 ExaminetheDeviceListtoensurethatthesearethedevicesagainstwhichthetask shouldbeexecuted. ClickOKtodismisstheDevicesPreviewwindow.

d. e. 8. 9.

ClicktheDetailstab. Clicktohighlighttherowofasingleconfigurationtemplateforthetasktoapply.

Figure 421: Create Schedule Task window, Details tab listing configuration templates

note ............. Each template that you want Task Scheduler to apply requires the definition of a separate task.

10. ClickOK. Theselectedtemplateopenstoallowyoutosetneworothervaluesintothetemplate.

note ............. This feature supports the inherent interdependencies among configurable attributes. For example, if you set Network NTP Enable to Enabled, then Get NTP Server From DHCP is automatically set to Disabled; if you set Network IP Access Filter to Disabled, then Network Allowed IP Access 1 to 3 become not configurable.

667

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 422: Create Schedule Task window, Details tab open to a configuration template

note ............. The initial contents of the Details tab are specific to the type of task being defined (Configuration, Generate Customer Support Info, or Geo-location Import). See Table 86: Configurable task prerequisites, requirements, and options on Page 650.

8.

ClicktheScheduletab.

note ............. Regardless of the task type, the interface for defining the schedule always has the same settable parameters. These are listed in Table 87.

668

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 87: Options for scheduling of tasks

Schedule Type Frequency Requirements for Specification of Launch Time(s) SelectionofMinutes,Hourly,Daily,Weekly,orMonthly. Startdate. Starttime. Selectionofenddateorperpetualtask. Selectionofwhethertokeepthedefinedtaskinadormantbut definedstateordeleteitafterthescheduleexpires. SelectionofMinutes. Selectionofeverynnumberofminutes. Selectionofeithereveryhouroreverynnumberofhours. Selectionofhowmanyminutesafterthetopofthehour. Selectionofeithereverydayoreverynnumberofdays. Selectionofeithereverydayoftheweek(allseven). Weekly OR Selectionofonetosevenindividualdaysofthelaunchweeksand numberofweeksbetweenlaunches. Selectionofonetotwelveindividualmonthsanddateofthemonth. Monthly OR Selectionofonetotwelveindividualmonthsandfirst,second,third, fourth,orlastselectedindividualweekdayduringthemonth. Non recurring Immediate Startdate. Starttime. Selectionofwhethertokeepthedefinedtaskinadormantstateor deleteitafterthetaskexpires. ClickoftheRunNowbutton.

all

numberof minutes Hourly Periodic Daily

Once

once

9.

Ifyouwantthetasktorunonlyonceandthenexpire,setthescheduleparametersthatare listedintheNonrecurringrowunderthecolumnRequirementsinTable87above.

669

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 423: Create Schedule Task dialog, Schedule tab for non-recurring task

10. Ifyouwantthetasktorunmorethanonce,setthescheduleparametersthatarelistedin theappropriatePeriodicrows(allandnumberofminutes,hourly,allanddaily,alland weekly,orallandmonthly)underthecolumnRequirementsinTable87above.

670

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 424: Create Schedule Task dialog, Schedule tab for a minute-based task

671

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 425: Create Schedule Task dialog, Schedule tab for an hourly task

672

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 426: Create Schedule Task dialog, Schedule tab for a daily task

673

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 427: Create Schedule Task dialog, Schedule tab for a weekly task

674

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 428: Create Schedule Task dialog, Schedule tab for a monthly task

important ........... Although WM does not prompt for confirmation if you close a Create Schedule Task window, it will not retain any of the task definition that you have specified before, and that work will be irretrievable if you close the window before performing the next (Save or Run Now) step.

11. ClicktheSavebuttontostorethetaskdefinitionandtosetupitsexecutionorclickthe RunNowbuttontoimmediatelyexecutethetask.

20.4

Viewing Configured Tasks

Dependingonyouruserpermissions,youcanviewthefullsetofallcurrentlyconfiguredtasksor asubsetasfollows: onlythosethatyouown(thatyoucreated) onlythosethatwereautomaticallycreatedbyWM(owner:SYSTEM) onlythosethatauserwithlesserpermissionsowns

Foreachtask,thetableviewpresents attributesofthetask TaskName [Task]Type Owner(creator)

675

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Status(whetherthetaskisInactive[hasexpired]orActive[hasnotexpired]) Frequency(configured) LastExecuted[timeanddate] NextExecution[timeanddate] Progress[information]

attributesoftheexecutions(s)

Toviewthetableoftasks,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 198: To view configured tasks

1. 2. IntheApplicationstree,clicktohighlighttheScheduledTasksbranch. FromtheUserdropdownlist,selectAll,SYSTEM(foralistofWMgeneratedtasks),or thenameoftheuserwhoseownedtasksyouwanttoview. Anexampleofatableviewof SYSTEMtasksisshowninFigure429. userownedtasksisshowninFigure430.

Figure 429: Scheduled Tasks view for SYSTEM-owned tasks

676

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 430: Scheduled Tasks view for user-owned tasks

Inadditiontothecolumnardata,theappearanceoftherowforanytaskinthetableviewprovides taskstatusasfollows.Ataskthatisshown ona grey background hasexpired. ona white background hasnotexpired. ona green background iscurrentlyrunning. ona red background hasbeenpausedandnotyetresumed.

Toviewtheresultsfromthelastcompletedexecutionofatask,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 199: To view results of last execution of a task

1. 2. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectEditScheduledTask. WMopenstheEditScheduledTaskdialog,showninFigure431.

Figure 431: Edit Scheduled Task dialog

677

Issue 4 August 2012 3.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ClicktheResultstab. Anydatathatthetasktypesupportsreportingonisdisplayedintableform,asshownin Figure432.

Figure 432: Results tab for a scheduled task

4. 5.

Clicktohighlightthetask. ClicktheViewbutton. Foraconfigurationtask,theConfigurationResultcolumnprovidestheresultforeach configurableparameterthatthetemplateattemptedtopushwhenthetaskwaslast executed. Forareporttask,aReportResultwindowopenstothedatathatthereportgathered,as showninFigure433.KeepinmindthatyourselectionofExecutethisreportfromwhenyou definedthetaskdeterminedwhetherthedatayouareviewingnowwasstored(Database) orcurrent(Device)atthetimethatthereporttaskexecuted.

Figure 433: Report Result window for report task execution

678

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

20.5

Editing the Definition of a Configured Task

Toeditthedefinitionofataskthatyouownorhavepermissionsthatallowyoutomodify,perform thefollowingsteps.

Procedure 200: To edit a task definition

1. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask.

Figure 434: Options for an Active task

2. 3.

Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectEditScheduledTask. WMopenstheEditScheduledTaskdialog,showninFigure431onPage677. Edittheattributesofthetask. ForguidanceonthefieldsoftheDetailstab(andtheDevicestab,foraConfigurationor Reporttask),see Table86:Configurabletaskprerequisites,requirements,andoptionsonPage650 Procedure197:TodefineaConfigurationtaskonPage655.

note ............. For Device Type or Specific Type, you must select all types (that you want to apply) in a single Add or Modify operation. After this operation, neither type is any longer available among selectable Device Properties. Through a subsequent Modify operation, you can specify additional types but the Conditions block will contain only a single line for all selected types.

4.

ClicktheSavebutton.

20.6

Auditing Configuration Tasks

Toviewallconfigurationtaskssincethelastpolicycleanup,clicktheAuditlinkunderConfigurationin theApplicationstree.Intheviewframe,anAuditwindowopenstodisplaythefollowingdatafor eachofthesetasks:

TaskName DeviceName UserName

StartTime FinishTime Status

TheinitialsortofthisdataisbyStartTime,butthedataissortablebythecontentsofanycolumn whoseheadingyouclick.

679

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

20.7

Rescheduling or Triggering a Scheduled Task

Foranypreviouslyconfiguredtask,youcanmodifythescheduledlaunch(es)ortriggerthetasktorun ondemand.Torunthetasknow,rightclickonthetaskandselectRunScheduledTaskfromthe dropdownlistofoptions. Tochangetheschedule,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 201: To reschedule a task execution

1. 2. 3. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectEditScheduledTask. WMopenstheEditScheduledTaskdialog,showninFigure431onPage677. Toresettheschedule,seeTable87:OptionsforschedulingoftasksonPage669.

20.8

Pausing or Resuming a Scheduled Task

Tothrowahiatusforanactivetask,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 202: To pause a task

1. 2. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectPauseScheduledTask. Thetaskremainsdefinedbutdormant,andtherowintheScheduledTasksviewshowsthe taskonaredbackground,untileitheryouselectthetaskoritisdeliberatelyresumed.

Figure 435: Paused task in Scheduled Task table view

Toresumeapausedtask,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 203: To resume a task

1. 2. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectResumeScheduledTask. Thetaskbecomesactiveagain,andtherowintheScheduledTasksviewshowsthetask againstawhitebackground.

680

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

20.9

Retaining or Removing a Scheduled Task

TheExpiredScheduleTaskCleanupPolicyregularlyexecutesaccordingtoitsconfigurationinthePolicy SchedulerdialogandremovesanytaskthatbothisInactiveandhasitsMarkforCleanupoption checked.

Figure 436: Mark for Clean Up option in Schedule tab for tasks

Whenyouinitiallydefineatask,thisoptionischecked.Ifyouuncheckthisoptionduringtheinitial setupofthetaskoralatereditofit,thenWMretainsthetaskdefinitionafteritexpiresbutwillnot runitagainuntilafteryouedititsscheduletoeffectivelymakeitActiveagain. Tosaveataskfromautomaticdeletionafteritsexpirywillarrive,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 204: To cancel automatic deletion of a task

1. 2. 3. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectEditScheduledTask. IntheCleanUpOptionblockoftheScheduletabintheEditScheduledTaskwindow, uncheckthecheckboxforMarkforCleanUp. Whentheexpiryarrives,thetaskwillentertheinactivestatus,butitsdefinitionwillbe retained,anditwillcontinuetobelistediontheScheduledTasksview.

Toremoveataskanditsdefinition,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 205: To delete a task

1. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask. OptionsvarydependingonwhetherthetaskisActiveorInactive.SeeFigure434:Optionsfor anActivetaskonPage679andFigure437.

Figure 437: Options for an Inactive task

681

Issue 4 August 2012 2.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectDeleteScheduledTask. Thetaskisimmediatelydeletedandcanneverberetrieved.Toreplaceaninadvertently removedtaskthatwasindispensable,defineanew,identicaltask.

20.10 Stopping a Running Task

Tostopataskwhileitisrunning,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 206: To stop a task

1. 2. IntheScheduledTaskstableview(seeProcedure198:Toviewconfiguredtaskson Page676),rightclickonthedesiredtask. Fromthedropdownlistofoptions,selectStopScheduledTask. IfthetaskhadbeenlaunchedviaRunScheduledTaskearlierthanitwasscheduledtobe, thenthetaskisstoppedbutwillrunwhenitwasscheduledbythetaskdefinitiontorun.If thetaskwasrunningonschedule,itwillbestoppedandwillnotrunagainuntilitsnext scheduledexecution.

682

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

21 Broadcasting a Message
TheBroadcastMessagecommandcanbeusedtosendmessagestoalltheclientsconnectedtothe WMServer.

Procedure 207: To Broadcast a message

1. Fromthemainmenu,selectFileBroadcastMessage,orpressCtrl+G. TheBroadcastMessagedialogboxisdisplayed.

Figure 438: Broadcast Message dialog

2.

IntheMessagefield,typethemessagethatyouwanttobroadcast.

note ............. The option that is associated with this message (Send to my FE client only or Sent to all clients) has no effect.

3.

ClicktheBroadCastbutton. ThemessageisdeliveredtoallintendedclientsthatareconnectedtotheWMServerandis displayedonthestatusbar.

683

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

22 Administering Wireless Manager

22.1 Terminating a Client Session
WMprovidesameanstoterminatearogueorrunawayclientsessionwhileotherconcurrent sessionscontinue.Toaccessthisfeature,selectToolsAdministrationClients'Details.Thesystem respondsbyopeningaClients'Detailswindow.

Figure 439: Clients' Details window

Toterminateoneofthesessionslistedinthisview,checktheassociatedcheckboxintheTerminate column,thenclicktheTerminatebutton.WMasksforconfirmation.

Toabortthetermination,clicktheNobutton.Toterminatetheselectedclientsession,clicktheYes button.Tomonitorthisview,occasionallyclicktheRefreshbutton.

22.2

Using the WM Administrator Tool

TolaunchthistoolfromthemainmenuintheWMclient,select ToolsAdministrationServerAdministration. ThedefaultsforthevariouspanelsoftheWMAdministratorToolareasshowninthissection.The fieldsthatrequireattentioninatypicalsetuparenotedinothersectionsofthisguide. Ifyouperformanyactioninoneofthesepanelsandthenattempttoleavethetooloraccessanother panelwithoutapplyingyourchanges,theGUIpromptsyouforwhetheryouwanttoapplythem:

685

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

22.2.1

Using the WM Server Panel

TolaunchthispanelfromthemainmenuintheWMclient,select ToolsAdministrationServerAdministration;intheleftpaneloftheresultingWMAdministrator Tooldialog,selectWMServer.TheclientversionoftheWMServerpanelisusefultoonlyensurethat theWMandApacheservicesarerunning.Knowingwhethertheyareissometimeshelpfulintrouble scenarios.

Figure 440: WM Server panel of WM Administrator Tool

ThefunctioninvokedbytheNEReSyncandNEReSyncafterbackupbuttonsistoremovethe eventsandalarmsofallthemanagedelementsaswellastheirtrapsthatWMiscurrentlyprocessing, andtorefreshtheirstatus,buttoallowtheirstatisticstocontinuetobestored.Ifyouselecteitherof these,WMthrowsawarning.

Thisamountofstatuspollingconsumesasignificantamountofresources.Considerthisadvisory carefullybeforeyouconsiderconfirmingbyclickingtheYesbutton.

686

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

22.2.2

Configuring the BAM Panel

TolaunchthispanelfromthemainmenuintheWMclient,select ToolsAdministrationServerAdministration;intheleftpaneloftheresultingWMAdministrator Tooldialog,selectBAM.

Figure 441: BAM panel of WM Administrator Tool

TheBAMConfigurationblockdefaultstothefollowingattributevalues.

Tomakeanychangesfromthedefaults,clickintheValuecell.Thistransformsthecellfromreadonly dataintoatextbox.Typeinthesubstitutevalue.Then,toreturnthecelltoreadonly,clickelsewhere inthetable(intheAttributecolumnoroneofthecolumnheadings,forexample). BAMprivilegesareessentialtoitsmanagementfunctionalities,andeachmappedprivilegemustbeat theSystemAdministration(A)level.

687

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

22.2.3

Configuring the Database Panel

note ............. The Database panel contains no options to backup and/or restore the database.

TolaunchtheDatabasepanelfromthemainmenuintheWMclient,select ToolsAdministrationServerAdministration;intheleftpaneloftheresultingWMAdministrator Tooldialog,selectDatabase.

Figure 442: Database panel of WM Administrator Tool

WMencryptsthedatabasePasswordsuchthatitisneverreadableineithertheWMserverfile systemortheWMclient.However,anychangethatyoumakeinthePasswordfieldofthispanel mustreflectthepasswordthatisconfiguredinMySQL. TheResetbuttonreturnsallofthevaluestotheirdefaults.Sincetheseareallconnectionrelated attributes,theResetoperationdoesnotreturntheoriginaldatabaseschemaaswell.Ifyouchanged thetablestructureordeliberatelyalteredanyotherSQLsettingsandnowneedtoreverttothe

688

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

configurationthattheWMinstallationtoolhadinstalled,performtheserveradministrationguide proceduretitled"TorestoretheinstalledWMdatabaseconfiguration." TheTestbuttonlaunchesatestoftheconnectionbetweenWMandthedatabase,usingthecurrent settingsinthispanel.Whenthevaluesareproperlyset,theexpectedresultoftheconnectiontestis thefollowingpopupmessage:

22.2.4

Using the Licensing Panel

OnesingleorthreeredundantLicenseManagerserversaresupported.Oneofthesemaybelocalto theWMserver. ThispanelconfigureshowWMcommunicateswiththelicensingserver(s)andalsoprovidesoptions tostart,stop,andrestartLicenseManager,andtouploadlicensefilesintoLicenseManager.To launchthispanelfromthemainmenuintheWMclient,select ToolsAdministrationServerAdministration;intheleftpaneloftheresultingWMAdministrator Tooldialog,selectLicensing.

Figure 443: Licensing panel of WM Administrator Tool

note ............. Start differs from restart as follows: Start commands start the service; in a two-step automatic operation, Restart commands stop the running service and then restart it.

689

Issue 4 August 2012 Changesthatyousaveandlicensesthatyouuploadarereflectedinthefile

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

.../server/conf/licensing.xml.RestartLMisnotnecessitatedbylicenseuploads.

TheUploadLicenseoptionopensabrowsertothelocalfilesystem.

Figure 444: Upload License File dialog

AnexampleofLicenseStatusinformationisasfollows.

690

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 445: License Manager Status display window

...

691

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

22.2.5

Configuring the NBI Panel

TheNorthboundInterface(NBI)providesanSNMPbasedJavaManagementExtension(JMX)agent forothermanagementsystemstopollWMforinformationaboutitsmanagedobjects,events, alarms,andperformancedata. TheNBIpanelconfigurestheagentofWM.TolaunchthispanelfromthemainmenuintheWM client,selectToolsAdministrationServerAdministration;intheleftpaneloftheresultingWM AdministratorTooldialog,selectNBI.

Figure 446: NBI panel of WM Administrator Tool, active SNMP V3 settings

TheNBIpanelallowsyoutochangetheNBIpasswordsforSNMPv3basedsecurity. TheAuthPasswordfieldistheSNMPv3Authenticationpassword. ThePrivPasswordfieldistheSNMPv3Privacypassword.

TousetheV3agent,youmustprovideboth.ThedefaultpasswordsareauthPasswordand
privPassword,respectively.

ThetwoSNMPsettingsblocksofthisdialogareactiveonlyiftheyhavecontextintheselected SNMPVersion.

692

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 447: NBI panel of WM Administrator Tool, active SNMP V1/V2 settings

TomakeanychangeintheTrapForwardingConfigurationtable,youmustfirstchecktheEnableTrap Forwardingcheckbox.Afterthisisdone tochangeanexistingconfiguration,doubleclickthecellwhosecontentsyouwanttochange andtypethenewcontentintotheresultingtextboxthere.

note ............. The Host and Port values are not editable by this means. If you need to make a change in either or both of these, you must remove the configuration and then add a new one that has the changed host or port value(s).

toremoveanexistingconfiguration,clickthehighlighttheconfigurationyouwanttodelete; thenclicktheRemoveTrapForwardingbutton. toaddaconfiguration,clicktheAddTrapForwardingbutton;thenforeachcolumn,double clickintheblankcellandtypethecontentsintotheresultingtextbox.

Toenforceallofthechangesyouhavemadeinthisdialog,clicktheApplybutton.Todismissthe dialog,clicktheOKbutton.
important ........... To ensure WM security, these passwords should be changed soon after installing WM.

22.2.6

Using the Offline Physical Map Panel

Theuseofthistoolinterfacepresumesthatyourserveradministratorhasconfiguredofflinemap layersinGeoServer.ThistoolmakesthoselayersavailabletotheWMclientapplicationbyspecifying theimagelayers,pointingtheWMservertotheproperconnectionparametersforcommunication withGeoServer,andswitchingontheoptionalofflinephysicalmapfeaturefortheclient.Instructions andbackgroundinformationfortheGeoServersetupareprovidedintheWMserveradministration guide.

693

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TolaunchthispanelfromthemainmenuintheWMclient,select ToolsAdministrationServerAdministration;intheleftpaneloftheresultingWMAdministrator Tooldialog,selectOfflinePhysicalMap.

Figure 448: Offline Physical Map panel of WM Administrator Tool

note ............. The following operations require both a click of the Apply button and a new client session in order to be reflected in the client: Enable offline physical map, Add Layer, and Delete Layer.

InstructionsforsettingupWMtousetheimagelayersthatyourWMserveradministratorhas configuredinGeoServerareprovidedintheWMserveradministrationguide. Tolatermakechangesintheconfigurationofalayer,performthefollowingsteps.

Procedure 208: To reconfigure offline physical map images in WM

1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Clickthecellthatyouwanttoedit. Overwriteitstextualcontents. ClicktheApplybutton. WhenfinishedintheOfflinePhysicalMapConfigurationpanel,clicktheOKbuttonto dismisstheWMAdministratorToolinterface. Dropthecurrentclientsessionandopenanewonetoviewtheresultsofthechanges.

694

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

22.2.7

Configuring the Email Configuration Panel

Forseveralvariouspurposes,theWMclientallowsyoutocomposeemailtoconfigurablerecipient addressesforimmediate,delayed,orconditionalsending.Theseinstancesincludeemail triggeredby aneventfilter.SeeSendEmailActiononPage521. analarmfilter.SeeAddinganAlarmFilteronPage528. anescalationpolicy.SeeAdministeringaPolicyonPage605.

tocommunicateanoticetooneormorecustomersofyournetworkservices.SeeSendingan EmailNotificationtoaCustomeronPage249. toaccompanydatagatheredtoinformtechnicalsupportefforts.SeeRunningtheToolfrom theClientApplicationonPage752.

Inasinglepanel,theWMadministratortoolallowsyoutospecifyorreconfigurethesettingsthat determinehowtheseemailswillbeprocessed.TolaunchthispanelfromthemainmenuintheWM client,selectToolsAdministrationServerAdministration;intheleftpaneloftheresultingWM AdministratorTooldialog,selectEmailConfiguration.

Figure 449: Email Configuration panel of WM Administrator Tool

Toconfigurethesesettings,performthefollowingsteps.

695

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Procedure 209: To configure server and admin email settings

1. 2. 3. ForSMTPServerHost,replaceSMTP_SERVER_HOSTwiththehostnameofyourlocalSMTP server. Ifitsportisotherthan25,highlightandoverwrite25withthenumberoftheportthatis locallyreservedfortheSMTPhost. IfyouwantWMtorequireuserstoauthenticatethemselvesbeforetheyareallowedtosend emailorconfigureemailforlatersending,performthefollowingsteps: a. b. c. d. 4. ForLogin,specifytheSMTPusernameforWMtoauthenticateitselftotheSMTPserver. ForPassword,specifytheSMTPpasswordforWMtoauthenticateitselftotheSMTP server. TypethesamestringintotheConfirmPasswordtextbox. ClicktocheckthecheckboxassociatedwithAuthenticationrequired.

ForFromMailID,highlightwm_server@company.comandoverwritethisplaceholder addresswiththeFROMaddressthattheSMTPshouldmarktheoutboundemailthatis triggeredbyanescalationpolicyoraneventoralarmfilter. ForToMailID,highlightwm_admin@company.comandoverwritethisplaceholderaddress withtheFROMaddressthattheSMTPshouldmarktheoutboundemailthatisaddressedto eithercustomersortechnicalsupportstaff(possiblyinadditiontoothersaddedtothe supporttoolbecausetheyaretobecopiedonsupportemails). ClicktheTestbuttontoensurethattheSMTPserveranditsportareproperlyconfigured inthispanel. Ifthetestissuccessful,clicktheOKbuttontoapplyitssettings.

5.

6. 7.

22.3

Configuring Log Settings

TheLoggingServiceisusefulforvariouspurposes,suchaspinpointingbugs,configurationerrors, performanceblockades,creatingauditlogs,andtrackingvariousactionsontheserver.

22.3.1

Opening the Log File Configuration Tool

Procedure 210: To open the Log File Configuration tool
Fromthemainmenu,selectHelpLogSettingsorpressAlt+L. TheLogSettingswindowopens.Thetableliststheexistinglogfilenames.Thesefilesarelocatedon theWMserverdeviceinthe/usr/local/cambium/wm/server/logsdirectoryinLinux (ortheC:\Cambium\WM\server\logsfolderinWindows).

696

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 450: Logging Configuration panel

Thesectionsthatimmediatelyfollowthisonecoverthefunctionsthatthebuttonsatthebottomof thispanelmakeavailable: AddingLogFilesonPage698 ViewingDetailsofLogFilesonPage698 ModifyingLogFileSettingsonPage699

697

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Youcanspecifyanyarbitrarynumberoffilestoretainandanynumberoflinestoretainperfile.The FileCountlimitsthenumberofretiredlogfilesthatareretainedaftertheyreachtheMaximumLines value.TheMaximumLinesvaluedetermineswhenafileisretiredandanewfileiscreated(possibly causingthedeletionoftheoldestretiredfile,ifthenumberoffilesincludingthecurrentexceedsthe FileCount).

22.3.2

Adding Log Files

AlthoughWMprovidesawayforyoutoaddoperatordefinedlogs,anythatyouaddwouldhaveno useorvalue.Thisisbecausetheserversoftwarecontainsnocodethatwoulduseyournewlog.So, thelogwouldneverhaveanycontent.Ignorethisfeature.

22.3.3

Viewing Details of Log Files

Thedetailsthatthissectiondescribesarethesamedetails,exceptfortheAdvancedProperties shownhere,thatareavailableforeditingwhenyouclicktheModifybuttonintheLogging Configurationpanel(seeFigure450).

Procedure 211: To view log file details

1. 2. Fromthemainmenu,selectHelpLogSettingsorpressAlt+L. IntheLogSettingswindow,clicktohighlightthetargetlogfileinthetable.

698

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

3.

ClicktheViewDetailsbutton TheLogDetailsdialogisdisplayed.

Figure 451: Viewing the Log Details dialog

22.3.4

Modifying Log File Settings

Procedure 212: To modify log file details
1. Fromthemainmenu,selectHelpLogSettingsorpressAlt+L. 2. IntheLogSettingswindow,clicktohighlightthetargetlogfileinthetable. 3. ClicktheModifybutton.

699

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TheLoggingconfigurationdialogisdisplayed.

Figure 452: Logging configuration window, Log Settings, first frame

4.

Makenecessarychangesinthefirstscreen.

700

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 88: Log Settings panel fields, first frame

Field LogFileName Description Thefilenametobeusedforstoringthecurrentlog.Onlythe filenamesthatarecompatiblewiththeoperatingsystemon yourWMserverdevicearesupported.Specifythefile extensionas.txtandavoidnumbers. Thedirectoryinwhichthelogfileistobestored.Bydefault, thelogfilesarestoredinthe /usr/local/cambium/wm/server/logsdirectoryinLinux (ortheC:\Cambium\WM\server\logsfolderinWindows).If youneedtospecifyadirectorywithinthisdefaultlocation, specifylogs/directory_name. Themaximumnumberoflinesperfilebeforeanewfileis createdtoholdsubsequentlogentries.Ifyouremovetheentry andleavethisfieldblank,thedefaultof10000linesisimposed. Whenthelogfileexceedsthemaximumnumberoflines specified,itiscarriedforwardtoanothernewfilethatis createdwithsimilarname,andtheold(retired)fileisretained forfuturereference.Forexample,whensomelogfile.txt reaches10000lines,thenanewfilesomelogfile1.txtis createdandtheloggingcontinues.Thenumberoffilesthatcan becreatedatsuchcasescanbespecifiedinthe MaximumNumberofFilesfield. MaximumNumberOfFiles Thenumberofoldlogfilestoretain.Extrasaredeletedtosave diskspace.Ifyouremovetheentryandleavethisfieldblank, thedefaultvalueof10isimposed. Configurethemaximumnumberoflinestobekeptinmemory beforewritingthemtoalogfile.Forexample,ifyousetthis parameterto50,thefirst50linesarekeptinmemory.After the50thline,allthe50linesarewrittentothelogfile.Then, thesecondroundofwritingwouldoccuraftercaching50more lines,andsoon.

LoggingDirectory

MaximumNumberofLinesPerFile

MaximumLinesCached

0meansentriesarewrittenimmediately. Ahighnumberismoreefficient.Thisisbecauseof fewerinstancesoflargeblocksbeingwrittentothe file.However,ahighsettingriskslosingimportant cachedmessageswhenacrashoccurs. Thedefaultis0.

UseTimeStamp?

Whethertoincludeatimestamp.Timestampsareextremely usefulandtypicallyshouldbeincludedinthelog.However, theyconsumepaceinthefile.

5.

ClicktheNextbutton.

701

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 453: Logging configuration window, Log Settings, second frame

6.

Makenecessarychangesinthesecondscreen.

Table 89: Log Settings panel fields, second frame

Field KeyName DisplayName LogLevel Description Thisnameisprimarilyforinternaluse.Changingthisnameisdiscouraged. Thisnameisprimarilyforinternaluse.Changingthisnameisdiscouraged. Debugcausesthemostlogging.Summarycausestheleast.

Summary:importantmessages IntermediateMessages:frequentlygeneratedlogmessages Verbose:detailed/errormessages Debug:compositeofabovelevelsplusmoreinformationfor debugging

EnableLogging

Loggingisalowoverheadfeature.Thus,keepingitenabledforalllogsis recommended. 7. clicktheModifybutton.

702

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8.

Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththesettings,clicktheFinishbutton.

9.

Toeffectthechangesontheserversidelogging_parameters.conffile,clickthe Applybuttonbackintheoriginalwindow.

ThisfileislocatedontheWMserverinthe/usr/local/cambium/wm/server/conf directoryinLinux(ortheC:\Cambium\WM\server\conffolderinWindows).

22.3.5

Using Debug Mode

IntheHelpoftheWMclient,theToolsmenuincludesthecommandoptionDebugMode.Thisisa modeofoperationthatcollectsinformationthathaspotentialvaluetotroubleshootingefforts.Since thisisnotconsideredanormalmodeofoperation,theoptionisdeselectedbydefault. Iftechnicalsupportpersonnelaskyoutoenableit,simplyselectHelpDebugMode.Ifyoueverfeel itiswisetocheckwhetherthismodeisenabled,clickonHelpandobservethecheckboxassociated withDebugModeinthedropdownlist.Checkedisenabled:

703

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

22.3.6

Logging JVM Monitoring Details

TheJVMMonitoringfeatureallowsyoutoseetheextentofsystemresourcesthattheWMbackend serverisusingontheserverdevice.InthemainmenuoftheWMclient,theHelpmenuincludesthe DiagnosticsJVMMonitoringDetailscommandoption.Ifyouselectthisoption,thesystem launchestheCollectedstatisticswindow,whichplotsJavaVirtualMachineactivityfromtheclient acrossatimeframethatyouspecify.

Figure 454: Collected statistics window with JVM monitoring history plotted

Thistoolprovidesoptionstovieweithermemory(MonitorMemory)orindependentexecution threads(MonitorThread)acrossthetimeframethatyouselect.However,thememorymonitor functiondoesnotoperateproperly,andyoushouldignoreit.

704

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

23 Monitoring WM and Its Networks Through Wireless Manager Ultralight

TheWMserversupportssecurereadonlywebaccessasWirelessManagerUltralighttoprovidea quickandsummaryviewofthehealthoftheserverandthenetworksitmanages.Theviewsinthis clientarepracticalfordisplayonmobiledevicesaswellasonstationarydevicesthathaveatleastas muchdisplayareaasphonesdoforwebpages.WirelessManagerUltralightdoesnotmimictheJava clientthatisdescribedinalloftheforegoingchaptersofthisguide.

23.1

Accessing Wireless Manager Ultralight

Inyourbrowser,launchtheURLhttp://WMServerIPAddress:9090/opwm/.TheWireless ManagerUltralightinterfaceopenstoitsloginpage.

Figure 455: Login web page of Wireless Manager Ultralight

Proceedtologinasfollows.

Procedure 213: To log in to the Wireless Manager Ultralight

1. 2. 3. ForUsername,typeinthesameusernamethatyouuseforauthenticatingintothefull client. ForPassword,typeintheassociatedpassword. ForDatabaseIPorHostname iftheMySQLdatabaseisremotetotheserver,typeintheIPaddressofthedatabase. ifitislocaltotheserver,leavelocalhostinthetextbox.

note ............. In the context of this field, localhost is relative to the server, not to the device on which your browser exists. The initial contents of this and the two following fields are read from a file where valid configuration information is stored in the server.

4. 5. 6.

ForDatabasePort,leave3306(thedefaultportforMySQLdatabases),unlessyour implementationusesacustomizedportnumber. ForDatabaseName,leaveWMSDB. ClicktheSubmitbutton. 705

Issue 4 August 2012 WirelessManagerUltralightopenstoitsWhat'sUpwebpage.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

23.2

Using the What's Up Web Page

TheviewthatopensuponasuccessfulloginistheWhat'sUpwebpage.

Figure 456: What's Up web page

Inthisview,eachmanagedelementislistedbyitsIPaddressandsurroundedbythebackground colorthatcorrespondstoitsmostseverealarm.ThecolorschemeforalarmsinWirelessManager Ultralightisthesameasthatintheclient. EachdeviceIPaddressinthelistisalinktoapageoffurtherinformationaboutthedevice.Thisweb pagedeliversdataineachofthefollowingverticalcategories: Alarms Events KeyInformation,whichmayinclude(dependingondevicetype)thefollowingattributeand statisticblocks: Device DeviceGroup(forEtherWANswitches) GPS(forCMMdevices) Radio Authentication Link(forPTPdevices)

706

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012 Status KeyStatistics

ActiveStatistics Configuration

Thatpagealsoprovidesalinktothelaunchofthemanagementwebinterfaceofthedevice (Goto Device Webpage).

707

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Figure 457: SM Device-specific web page, top

708

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 458: Device-specific web page, middle

ThedevicespecificwebpageincludesonlythestatisticsthatareenabledinthePollingConfiguration dialog(fromtheToolsmenu).See AdjustingtheStatusPollingIntervalsonPage197 AdjustingConfigurationPollingIntervalsonPage323 AdjustingthePerformancePollingIntervalsonPage381.

709

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

23.3

Using the Summary View

TheSummaryviewprovidescountsofalarmsofeachseverity,eventsofeachseverity,andmanaged devicesofeachdevicetype.

Figure 459: Summary View in Wireless Manager Ultralight

Eachitemintheleftcolumnofallthreetablesisalinktoawebpagethatpertainsentirelytothe item.Forexample,MjrintheAlarmstablelinkstoapagethatdisplaysdetailsononlythealarmsof Majorseverityandcontainslinkstosimilarpages(eachforanotherseverity)andtoapageofall alarms.

710

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Figure 460: Alarms (Major) web page in Wireless Manager Ultralight

TheeventsinthesystemareavailablefromtheSummaryviewinapageschemesimilartothatofthe alarms.

Figure 461: Events (Critical) web page in Wireless Manager Ultralight

IntheSummaryview,thelinkstodevicestypeseachopenapagethatreiteratesthelinkedcountsof allmanageddevicetypesand,beneaththecounts,containsaseparateblockofinformationabout eachelementthatisofthetargetdevicetype.

Figure 462: Individual device block in Wireless Manager Ultralight

711

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Thecolorofthetitlebarofeachblockcorrelatestothestatusofthedevice,andthe IPaddress(DeviceName)inthetitlebarisalinktothedevicespecificwebpage. See Figure457onPage708 Figure458onPage709.

712

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

23.4

Using the Inventory View in Wireless Manager Ultralight

TheInventoryviewinWirelessManagerUltralightisidenticaltotheindividualdevicetypeview describedimmediatelyabove,exceptthatanelementblockisprovidedforeveryelementinthe system.

Figure 463: Inventory view in Wireless Manager Ultralight

BeawarethatthesortedorderoftheelementblocksisbyIPaddress(decimal),soisnotbystatus ofthedevices.Scrollingrevealsthedeviceswhosestatusmaywarrantindividualattention.

713

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

23.5

Using the Alarms View in Wireless Manager Ultralight

TheAlarms(All)viewinWirelessManagerUltralightisidenticaltotheAlarms(Major)webpage showninFigure460onPage711,exceptthatthisviewliststhealarmsofallseveritiesinthesystem.

Figure 464: Alarms (All) view in Wireless Manager Ultralight

Thebaratthetopofthisviewcontainsalinkforeachseverityandalink(All)thatrefreshesthisview. MjrinthisbarlinkstoapagethatdisplaysdetailsononlythealarmsofMajorseverityandcontains linkstosimilarpages(eachforanotherseverity)andtothispageofallalarms.

714

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

InthetitlebarofeachalarmblockintheAlarms(All)view,theIPaddress(DeviceName)isalinkto thedevicespecificwebpage.See Figure457onPage708 Figure458onPage709.

Beawarethatthesortedorderofthealarmblocksisbythefulltimestamponthealarm,soisnotby severityofthealarms.Scrollingrevealsthealarmswhosestatusmaywarrantindividualattention.

23.6

Using the Events View in Wireless Manager Ultralight

TheEvents(All)viewinWirelessManagerUltralightprovidesatopbarthatcontainsalinkforeach severityandalink(All)thatrefreshesthisview.Crtinthisbarlinkstoapagethatdisplaysdetailson onlytheeventsofCriticalseverityandcontainslinkstosimilarpages(eachforanotherseverity)and tothispageofallevents.

Figure 465: Events (All) view in Wireless Manager Ultralight

InthetitlebarofeacheventblockintheAlarms(All)view,theIPaddress(DeviceName)isalinkto thedevicespecificwebpage.See Figure457onPage708 Figure458onPage709.

715

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Beawarethatthesortedorderoftheeventblocksisbythefulltimestampontheevent,soisnotby severityoftheevents.Scrollingrevealstheeventswhosestatusmaywarrantindividualattention.

23.7

Using the Customer Info View in Wireless Manager Ultralight

TheEvents(All)viewinWirelessManagerUltralightprovidesalistviewofcustomerswhohavebeen configuredasassociatedwithmanagedelements.

23.8

Using the Logs View in Wireless Manager Ultralight

WirelessManagerUltralightprovideslinkedaccesstoeachplaintextlogthatWMmaintains,ina tablethatalsoindicatesthelasttimewheneachwaswritten.Theorderisalphabetical.Theavailable logsareasfollows.

Figure 466: Logs available from Wireless Manager Ultralight

agent AggregatedDiscoveryLog alert_audit customMapErr customMapOut DecryptionTool deviceupgrade discoveryLogs mapexporter mesherr meshout migration_manager_err mserr msout nmserr nmsout oakleaferr oakleafout php_error ServerAdminLog spotlight_err spotlight_out starleafqueueerr starleafqueueout stderr stdout SUMLog system_dash_err system_dash_out test transactionLogs updatemanagerlog wmsout

23.9

Terminating the Wireless Manager Ultralight Session

Attheconclusionofthemonitoringsession,clicktheLogoutlinkinthemainmenu.Thewebinterface returnstotheloginpage.

716

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Legal Notices and License Agreements

CAMBIUM NETWORKS, LTD END USER LICENSE AGREEMENT

CAMBIUMNETWORKS,LTD(Cambium)iswillingtolicenseitsWirelessManagersoftwareandthe accompanyingdocumentation(collectively,theSoftware,asfurtherdefinedbelow)toyouonlyonthecondition thatyouacceptallthetermsinthisEndUserLicenseAgreement(thisAgreement). IMPORTANT:READTHEFOLLOWINGTERMSANDCONDITIONSBEFOREUSINGTHESOFTWAREANDANY EQUIPMENTAND/ORPRODUCTSTHATACCOMPANYTHESOFTWARE. BYCLICKINGONTHEACCEPTBUTTONDURINGINSTALLATION,YOUACKNOWLEDGETHATYOUHAVEREAD THISAGREEMENT,UNDERSTANDITANDAGREETOBEBOUNDBYTHETERMSOFTHISAGREEMENT. IFYOUDONOTAGREETOTHETERMSOFTHISAGREEMENT,CAMBIUMISNOTWILLINGTOLICENSETHE SOFTWARETOYOUANDYOUSHOULDCLICKONTHEDONOTACCEPTBUTTONTODISCONTINUETHE INSTALLATIONPROCESS.IFYOUDONOTAGREETOTHESETERMSANDCONDITIONS,YOUMAY,FORAFULL REFUND:(I)RETURNTHESOFTWARETOTHEENTITYFROMWHOMYOUPURCHASEDIT;OR,(II)FOR DOWNLOADEDSOFTWARE,PROVIDETOTHEENTITYFROMWHOMYOUPURCHASEDTHESOFTWAREYOUR WRITTENVERIFICATIONOFDELETIONOFALLCOPIESOFTHESOFTWARE. 1.Definitions.InthisAgreement,thewordSoftwarereferstothesetofinstructionsforcomputingdevices,in executableformandinanymedia(whichmayincludediskette(s),CDROM(s),downloadableInternetfile(s), hardware,firmware,etc.),andincludeswithoutlimitationinterfaces,content,fonts,images,photographs, animations,video,audio,musictext,appletsandincludeddata,aswellastheaccompanyingdocumentation, suchasmanualsandinstructionalaids,whetherinprintedorelectronicform,forthesoftwareproductidentified above. 2.General.TheSoftwareislicensed,andnotsold,toyoubyCambiumforuseonlyunderthetermsofthis Agreement.Cambiumand/orCambiumslicensor(s)retainallright,titleandinterestinandtotheSoftware,and thecopyrightsandotherintellectualpropertyrightsthereinandthereto,andreserveallrightsnotexpressly grantedtoyouinthisAgreement.ThetermsofthisAgreementwillgovernanyupdate(s)and/orupgrade(s)tothe SoftwareprovidedbyCambiumthatreplaceand/orsupplementtheoriginalSoftware,unlesssuchupdate(s) and/orupgrade(s)areaccompaniedbyaseparatelicenseinwhichcasethetermsofthatlicensewillgovern. 3.GrantofLicense.Cambiumgrantsyou(Licenseeoryou)alimited,personal,nonexclusiveandnon transferable(exceptasotherwiseprovidedherein)licensetousetheSoftwaresubjecttotheConditionsofUseset forthinSection4andtheremainingtermsandconditionsofthisAgreement.Anytermsorconditionsappearingon thefaceorreversesideofanypurchaseorder,purchaseorderacknowledgmentorotherorderdocumentthatare differentfrom,orinadditionto,thetermsofthisAgreementwillnotbebindingontheparties,evenifpaymentis accepted. 4.ConditionsofUse;RestrictionsonUse.TheSoftwareisprotectedbyinternationalintellectualpropertylawsand treaties,andotherapplicablelaws.AnyuseoftheSoftwareinviolationofthetermsandconditionssetforthin thisAgreementisstrictlyprohibitedandwillbedeemedabreachofthisAgreement.Inadditiontotheotherterms andconditionsofthisAgreement,youagreetothefollowingspecificconditionsandrestrictions: 4.1. YouwillusetheSoftwareincompliancewithallapplicablelaws,includinglocallawsofthecountryor regioninwhichyouresideorinwhichyouusetheSoftware. 4.2. Onlyyou,youremployeesoragentsmayusetheSoftware.Youwilltakeallnecessarystepstoinsure thatyouremployeesandagentsabidebythetermsofthisAgreement. 4.3. YouwillusetheSoftware:(i)onlyforyourinternalbusinesspurposes;(ii)onlyasdescribedinthe Software;and,(iii)instrictaccordancewiththisAgreement.

717

Issue 4 August 2012 4.4. 4.5. YouwillinstallandusetheSoftwareonasinglecomputingdevice.

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TotheextenttheSoftwareincludesfeaturesinvolvingmaps,youwilltakeallreasonableeffortsnot exceed20,000mappageviewsperyear.Cambiumreservestherighttodisabletheusageoffeatures involvingmapsifyourannualusageofmappageviewsexceeds20,000mappageviews.4.6.Youwill not,andyouwillnotenableothersto,copy(exceptforbackuppurposesasexpresslypermittedby thisAgreement),decompile,bootleg,reverseengineer,disassemble,attempttoderivethesource codeof,decrypt,modify,translate,orcreatederivativeworksfromtheSoftware,oranypartthereof (exceptas,andonlytotheextent,anyforegoingrestrictionisprohibitedbyapplicablelaw).Any attempttodosoisaviolationoftherightsofCambiumand/oritslicensor(s)intheSoftware. YouwillnotattempttodefeatanycopyprotectiondeviceincludedwiththeSoftware.

4.7.

4.8. IftheSoftwareisprovidedonmultipletypesofmedia,youwilluseonlythemediathatbestmeets yourspecificneeds,andyouwillnotloan,rent,leaseortransfertheothermediacontainedinthe packagewithoutCambiumswrittenconsent. 4.9. Youwillnotremoveanyproprietarynotices,marks,labels,orlogosfromtheSoftware. 4.10 Unlessotherwiseprovidedherein,youwillnotrent,lease,sublicenseortransfertheSoftware,orany partthereof,toanyotherpartywithoutCambiumspriorwrittenconsent. 4.11. YouwillnotusetheSoftwareforanypurposesprohibitedbyapplicablelaw,includingwithout limitationthedevelopment,design,manufactureorproductionofnuclear,missiles,orchemicalor biologicalweapons. USEOFTHESOFTWAREINANYMANNEROTHERTHANASPROVIDEDHEREINISSTRICTLYPROHIBITED ANDMAYINFRINGEONTHEINTELLECTUALPROPERTYRIGHTSOFCAMBIUMAND/ORITSLICENSOR(S), SUBJECTINGYOUTOCIVILANDCRIMINALPENALTIES,INCLUDINGWITHOUTLIMITATIONMONETARY DAMAGESANDIMPRISONMENTFORCOPYRIGHTINFRINGEMENT.

5.BackUps.NotwithstandinganythingtothecontraryinthisAgreement,youmaymakeone(1)copyofthe Softwareinmachinereadableformforbackuppurposesonly.IfthedocumentationfortheSoftwareisinprinted form,itmaynotbecopied.WithregardtoallcopiesoftheSoftwarepermittedherein,youagreetoreproduceon suchcopiesallCambiumcopyrightnotices,andotherproprietarynoticesappearingonandintheoriginal Software. 6.Export.Youmaynotexport,reexportortransfer,directlyorindirectly,theSoftwareexceptasauthorizedby UnitedStateslaworbythelawsofthejurisdiction(s)inwhichtheSoftwarewasobtained.Bywayofexample,but withoutlimitationoftheforegoing,ifyourSoftwarewasobtainedintheUnitedStates,theSoftwaremaynotbe exported,reexportedortransferred:(a)intoanyU.S.embargoedcountries;or,(b)toanyoneontheU.S.Treasury Department'slistofSpeciallyDesignatedNationalsortheU.S.DepartmentofCommerceDeniedPersonsListor EntityList.ByusingtheSoftware,yourepresentandwarrantthatyouarenotlocatedinanysuchcountryoron anysuchlist. 7.Confidentiality.YouacknowledgethattheSoftwarecontainsvaluableproprietaryinformationandtradesecrets andthatunauthorizedorimproperuseoftheSoftwarewillresultinirreparableharmtoCambiumforwhich monetarydamageswouldbeinadequateandforwhichCambiumwillbeentitledtoimmediateinjunctiverelief. Accordingly,youwilllimitaccesstotheSoftwaretothoseofyouremployeesandagentswhoneedtousethe Softwareforyourinternalbusinesspurposes,andyouwilltakeappropriateactionwiththoseemployeesand agentstopreservetheconfidentialityoftheSoftware,usingthesamedegreeofcaretoavoidunauthorizedor improperdisclosureasyouusefortheprotectionofyourownproprietarysoftware,butinnoeventlessthan reasonablecare.Youhavenoobligationtopreservetheconfidentialityofanyinformationthat:(i)wasinthe publicdomainatthetimeofdisclosure;(ii)enteredthepublicdomainthroughnofaultofyours;(iii)wasgivento youfreeofanyobligationtokeepitconfidential;(iv)isindependentlydevelopedbyyou;or,(v)isdisclosedas requiredbylawprovidedthatyounotifyCambiumpriortosuchdisclosureandprovideCambiumwitha reasonableopportunitytorespond.

718

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

8.RighttoUseCambiumsName.ExceptasrequiredinSection5above,youwillnot,duringthetermofthis Agreementorthereafter,useanytrademarkofCambium,oranywordand/orsymbollikelytobeconfusedwith anyCambiumtrademark,eitheraloneorinanycombinationwithotherwordsand/orsymbols. 9.Transfer.InthecaseofSoftwaredesignedtooperateonCambiumequipment,youmaynottransferthe Softwaretoanotherpartyexcept:(i)ifyouareanenduser,whenyouaretransferringtheSoftwaretogetherwith theCambiumequipmentonwhichitoperates;or,(ii)ifyouareaCambiumauthorizeddistributor,whenyouare transferringtheSoftwareeithertogetherwithsuchCambiumequipmentoraretransferringtheSoftwareasa licenseddulypaidforupgrade,update,patch,newrelease,enhancementorreplacementofapriorversionofthe Software.IfyouareaCambiumauthorizeddistributor,whenyouaretransferringtheSoftwareaspermittedinthis Agreement,youagreetotransfertheSoftwarewithalicenseagreementhavingtermsandconditionsnoless restrictivethanthosecontainedinthisAgreement.AlltransfersoftheSoftwareunderthisSection9arestrictly subjecttotheconditionsprecedentthat:(iii)theotherpartyagreestoacceptthetermsandconditionsofthis Agreement;and,(ii)youdestroyanycopyoftheSoftwareyoudonottransfertothatparty.Unlessotherwise providedherein,theSoftwaremaynotbetransferred,andthisAgreementmaynotbeassigned,byyouwithout Cambiumspriorwrittenconsent. 10.UpgradesandUpdates.IftheSoftwareislicensedtoyouasanupgradeorupdatetosoftwarepreviously licensedtoyou,youmustdestroythesoftwarepreviouslylicensedtoyou,includinganycopies,within30daysof yourreceiptoftheSoftware. 11.MaintenanceandSupport.CambiumisnotresponsibleformaintenanceorsupportoftheSoftware,orthe equipmentonwhichtheSoftwareresidesorisused,underthisAgreement.Byacceptingthelicensegrantedunder thisAgreement,youagreethatCambiumwillbeundernoobligationtoprovideanysupport,maintenanceor serviceinconnectionwiththeSoftwareorsuchequipment.MaintenanceandsupportoftheSoftwareand/orsuch equipmentbyCambiummaybeavailableunderthetermsofaseparateagreement. 12.LimitedWarranty.Allphysicalmedia,suchasdiskettesorCDROMS,onwhichtheSoftwareisfurnishedby Cambium(theMedia)arewarrantedtobefreefrommanufacturingandmaterialdefectsforninety(90)days aftertheshipmentdateoftheMediatoyou.Mediathatbecomesdefectiveduringsuchperiodwillberepairedor, atCambiumsoption,replaced.ThislimitedwarrantyiscontingentuponproperuseoftheMediaanddoesnot coverMediathathasbeentamperedwith,modifiedorsubjectedtounusualphysicalorelectricalstress. TamperingwithorremovinganyfactorysealorlabelonanyMediavoidsthiswarrantyandreleasesCambium fromanyandallliability.TheentireliabilityofCambium,andyourexclusiveremedyunderthewarrantyprovided inthisSection12willbe,atCambiumsoption,torepairorreplaceanyMediafoundtobedefectivewithinthe warrantyperiod,ortorefundthepurchasepriceandterminatethisAgreement.Toseeksucharemedy,youmust returntheSoftwaretoCambium,withacopyoftheoriginalpurchasereceipt,withinthewarrantyperiod. 13.Disclaimer.EXCEPTFORTHEABOVEEXPRESSLIMITEDWARRANTYFORTHEMEDIA,ANDTOTHEMAXIMUM EXTENTPERMITTEDBYAPPLICABLELAW,THESOFTWAREISPROVIDED"ASIS"ANDASAVAILABLE,WITHOUT WARRANTYOFANYKIND,ANDCAMBIUMONBEHALFOFITSELFANDITSLICENSOR(S)HEREBYDISCLAIMSALL WARRANTIESANDCONDITIONSWITHRESPECTTOTHESOFTWARE,EXPRESS,IMPLIEDORSTATUTORY,INCLUDING WITHOUTLIMITATIONTHEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESAND/ORCONDITIONSOFMERCHANTABILITY,OFSATISFACTORY QUALITY,OFFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE,OFACCURACY,OFQUIETENJOYMENT,ANDOFNON INFRINGEMENTOFTHIRDPARTYRIGHTS.CAMBIUMALSODOESNOTWARRANTTHATTHEFUNCTIONS CONTAINEDIN,PERFORMEDAND/ORPROVIDEDBYTHESOFTWAREWILLMEETYOURREQUIREMENTS,THATTHE OPERATIONOFTHESOFTWAREWILLBEUNINTERRUPTEDORERRORFREE,THATTHESOFTWAREWILLBE COMPATIBLEORWORKWITHANYTHIRDPARTYSOFTWARE,APPLICATIONSORDEVICES,ORTHATDEFECTSINTHE SOFTWAREWILLBECORRECTED.CAMBIUMMAKESNOWARRANTYWITHRESPECTTOTHECORRECTNESS, ACCURACY,ORRELIABILITYOFTHESOFTWARE,ANDYOUEXPRESSLYACKNOWLEDGEANDAGREETHAT,TOTHE EXTENTPERMITTEDBYAPPLICABLELAW,YOURUSEOFTHESOFTWAREISATYOURSOLERISKANDTHATTHE ENTIRERISKASTOSATISFACTORYQUALITY,PERFORMANCE,ACCURACYANDEFFORTISWITHYOU.YOUFURTHER ACKNOWLEDGEANDAGREETHATTHESOFTWAREISNOTINTENDEDORSUITABLEFORUSEINSITUATIONSOR ENVIRONMENTSWHERETHEFAILUREORTIMEDELAYSOF,ORERRORSORINACCURACIESINTHECONTENT,DATA ORINFORMATIONPROVIDEDBYTHESOFTWARECOULDLEADTODEATH,PERSONALINJURY,ORSEVEREPHYSICAL

719

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ORENVIRONMENTALDAMAGE.NOORALORWRITTENINFORMATIONORADVICEGIVENBYCAMBIUMORAN AUTHORIZEDCAMBIUMREPRESENTATIVESHALLCREATEAWARRANTY. SOMEJURISDICTIONSDONOTALLOWTHEEXCLUSIONOFIMPLIEDWARRANTIESORLIMITATIONSONAPPLICABLE STATUTORYRIGHTSOFACONSUMER,SOTHEABOVEEXCLUSIONANDLIMITATIONSMAYNOTAPPLYTOYOU. 14.LimitationofLiability.THETOTALLIABILITYOFCAMBIUMFORANYDAMAGESUNDERTHISAGREEMENTWILL NOTEXCEEDTHETOTALAMOUNTPAIDBYYOUFORTHESOFTWARELICENSEDUNDERTHISAGREEMENT.TOTHE EXTENTNOTPROHIBITEDBYAPPLICABLELAW,INNOEVENTSHALLCAMBIUMBELIABLEFORPERSONALINJURY, ORANYINCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,INDIRECTORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGESWHATSOEVER,INCLUDINGWITHOUT LIMITATIONDAMAGESFORLOSSOFPROFITS,LOSSOFDATA,BUSINESSINTERRUPTIONORANYOTHER COMMERCIALDAMAGESORLOSSES,ARISINGOUTOFORRELATEDTOYOURUSEORINABILITYTOUSETHE SOFTWARE,ORANYTHIRDPARTYSOFTWARE,APPLICATIONSAND/ORDEVICESINCONJUNCTIONWITHTHE SOFTWARE,HOWEVERCAUSED,REGARDLESSOFTHETHEORYOFLIABILITY(CONTRACT,TORTOROTHERWISE) ANDEVENIFCAMBIUMHASBEENADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGES.SOMEJURISDICTIONSDO NOTALLOWTHELIMITATIONOFLIABILITYFORPERSONALINJURY,OROFINCIDENTALORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES,SOTHISLIMITATIONMAYNOTAPPLYTOYOU. 15.U.S.GovernmentEndUsers.TheSoftwareisaCommercialItem,asthattermisdefinedat48C.F.R.2.101, consistingofCommercialComputerSoftwareandCommercialComputerSoftwareDocumentation,assuch termsareusedin48C.F.R.12.212or48C.F.R.227.7202,asapplicable.Consistentwith48C.F.R.12.212or48 C.F.R.227.72021through227.72024,asapplicable,theCommercialComputerSoftwareandCommercial ComputerSoftwareDocumentationarebeinglicensedtoU.S.Governmentendusers:(i)onlyasCommercial Items;and,(ii)withonlythoserightsasaregrantedtoallotherenduserspursuanttothetermsandconditions herein,notwithstandinganyotherFARorothercontractualclausetothecontraryinanyagreementintowhichthis AgreementmaybeincorporatedorwhichCambiummayprovidetoGovernmentenduser.UseoftheSoftware constitutesagreementbytheU.S.GovernmentthattheSoftwareisCommercialComputerSoftwareand CommercialComputerSoftwareDocumentation,andconstitutesacceptanceoftherightsandrestrictionsherein. UnpublishedrightsAREreservedunderthecopyrightlawsoftheUnitedStates.Thenameandaddressofthe contractorforUnitedStatesGovernmentendusersis:CambiumNetworks,Ltd,acompanyregisteredinEngland andWalesundercompanynumber07752773,withanaddressat1299E.AlgonquinRoad,Schaumburg,IL60196. 16.TermandTermination.ThisAgreement,andyourrighttousetheSoftware,willbeginwhenyouclickthe ACCEPTbutton,whichconstitutesacceptanceofthetermsandconditionsinthisAgreement,andwillcontinuein perpetuityunlessterminatedasfollows.ThisAgreementwillterminateimmediatelyandautomaticallywithout noticeuponabreachofthisAgreementbyyou.Youmayalsoterminatethisagreementbyceasinguseofthe Software.UpontheterminationofthisAgreementforanyreason,youmustceasealluseoftheSoftwareand destroyallcopiesoftheSoftwareinyourpossessionorcontrol. 17.GoverningLawandSeverability.ThisAgreementisgovernedbythelawsoftheUnitedStatesofAmerica,to theextentthattheyapply,andotherwisebythelawsoftheStateofIllinois,excludingitsconflictsoflaws principles.ThisAgreementshallnotbegovernedbytheUnitedNationsConventiononContractsforthe InternationalSaleofGoods,theapplicationofwhichisexpresslyexcluded.Ifforanyreasonacourtofcompetent jurisdictionfindsanyprovisionofthisAgreement,orportionthereof,tobeunenforceable,theremainderofthis Agreementshallcontinueinfullforceandeffect. 18.Survival.Thepartiesagreethatwherethecontextofanyprovisionindicatesanintentthatitsurvivestheterm ofthisAgreement,thenitwillsurvive. 19.EntireAgreement.ThisAgreementconstitutestheentireagreementbetweenyouandCambiumrelatingto theSoftwarelicensedhereunderandsupersedesallpriororcontemporaneousunderstandingsregardingsuch subjectmatter.NoamendmenttoormodificationofthisAgreementwillbebindingunlessinwritingandsignedby Cambium,exceptthatCambiummaymodifyand/ortranslatethisAgreementasnecessarytocomplywith applicablelaws.IntheeventofadisputebetweentheEnglishversionandanynonEnglishversions,theEnglish versionofthisAgreementshallgovern,totheextentnotprohibitedbythelocallawinyourjurisdiction. 20.ThirdPartySoftware.TheSoftwaremaycontainoneormoreitemsofthirdpartysoftwaresuppliedbythird partysuppliers(collectively,ThirdPartySoftware).ThetermsofthisAgreementgovernyouruseofanyThird

720

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

PartySoftwareUNLESSASEPARATETHIRDPARTYSOFTWARELICENSEISINCLUDED,INWHICHCASEYOURUSEOF THETHIRDPARTYSOFTWAREWILLTHENBEGOVERNEDBYTHESEPARATETHIRDPARTYLICENSE.Useofthe GoogleMapsserviceissubjecttothefollowingadditionalterms:GoogleMapsTermsofServiceavailableat http://maps.google.com/help/terms_maps.htmlandGoogleMapsLegalNoticesat http://maps.google.com/help/legalnotices_maps.html.ByusingtheSoftwareyouareagreeingbeboundbythe termsofuseforallThirdPartySoftware.IftheSoftwarelicensedunderthisAgreementcontainspubliclyavailable (opensource)ThirdPartySoftware,thetermsandconditionsgoverningtheuseofsuchpubliclyavailableThird PartySoftwareareinthesoftwarelicensesofthecopyrightowner(s)ofsuchsoftwareandnotthisAgreement.If thereisaconflictbetweenthetermsandconditionsofthisAgreementandthetermsandconditionsofthe publiclyavailableThirdPartySoftwarelicense(s)governingyouruseofthepubliclyavailableThirdPartySoftware, thetermsandconditionsofthelicenseoftheapplicablepubliclyavailableThirdPartySoftwarelicense(s)willtake precedenceoverthelicensegrantedinthisAgreement.ThelicenseagreementsforpubliclyavailableThirdParty SoftwareincludedbyCambiumareavailableinthefileCambiumPubliclyAvailableSoftwareLegalNotices.htm installedintheserverfilesystemduringinstallationoftheSoftware.Thesoftwarelicenseagreementsforpublicly availableThirdPartySoftwareincludedbythirdpartiesareavailableinthefileThirdPartyPubliclyAvailable SoftwareLegalNotices.htminstalledintheserverfilesystemduringinstallationoftheSoftware. 21.Privacy.YouruseoftheSoftwareissubjecttoCambiumsPrivacyPolicyavailableat: http://cambiumnetworks.com/legal/terms_of_use.phpaswellastheGoogleMapsprivacypolicydescribedat http://www.google.com/privacy.html,thetermsofwhichareincorporatedhereinbyreference. IFTHEFOREGOINGTERMSANDCONDITIONSAREACCEPTABLETOYOU,PLEASEINDICATEYOURAGREEMENT ANDACCEPTANCEBYCLICKINGONTHEBUTTONLABELEDACCEPT.IFTHEFOREGOINGTERMSAND CONDITIONSARENOTACCEPTABLETOYOU,PLEASECLICKONTHEDONOTACCEPTBUTTON. WIRELESSMANAGER,CAMBIUM,CAMBIUMNETWORKS,andtheCambiumNetworksLogoaretrademarksof CambiumNetworks,Ltd. Copyright2012CambiumNetworks,LtdAllrightsreserved.

721

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

CAMBIUM PUBLICLY AVAILABLE SOFTWARE LEGAL NOTICES AND END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTS FOR PUBLICLY AVAILABLE SOFTWARE

TheWirelessManagersoftwaremayincludeCambiumsoftware,commercialthirdpartysoftware,and/or publiclyavailable(opensource)software. TheCambiumsoftwareincludedintheWirelessManagersoftwareiscopyright(c)byCambiumNetworks,LTD (Cambium),anditsuseissubjecttothelicenses,termsandconditionsoftheagreementinforcebetweenthe purchaseroftheWirelessManagersoftwareandCambium.Thecommercialthirdpartysoftwarethatmaybe includedinorwiththeWirelessManagersoftwareissubjecttothelicenses,termsandconditionsofthe agreementinforcebetweenyouandCambium,unlessaseparatecommercialthirdpartysoftwarelicenseis included,inwhichcase,youruseofthecommercialthirdpartysoftwarewillthenbegovernedbytheseparate commercialthirdpartylicense.ThepubliclyavailablesoftwarethatmaybeincludedinorwiththeWireless Managersoftwareislistedbelow.Theuseofthelistedpubliclyavailablesoftwareissubjecttothelicenses, termsandconditionsoftheagreementinforcebetweenyouandCambium,aswellasthetermsandconditionsof thelicenseofeachpubliclyavailablesoftwarepackage.Copiesofthelicensesforthelistedpubliclyavailable software,aswellas,allattributions,acknowledgements,andsoftwareinformationdetails,areincludedbelow. Cambiumisrequiredtoreproducethesoftwarelicenses,acknowledgmentsandcopyrightnoticesasprovidedby theauthorsandowners,thus,allsuchinformationisprovidedinitsnativelanguageform,withoutmodificationor translation. ThepubliclyavailablesoftwareinthelistbelowincludesthepubliclyavailablesoftwareincludedbyCambium.The publiclyavailablesoftwareincludedbycommercialthirdpartysoftwarethatisusedintheWirelessManager softwareisdisclosedintheThirdPartyPubliclyAvailableSoftwareLegalNoticesaccompanyingtheWireless Managersoftware. ForinstructionsonhowtoobtainacopyofanysourcecodebeingmadepubliclyavailablebyCambiumrelatedto softwareusedintheWirelessManagersoftwareyoumaysendyourrequestinwritingto: CambiumNetworks,LTD Attention:OpenSourceSoftwareManager 1299E.AlgonquinRoad Schaumburg,IL60196 Inyourrequest,pleaseincludetheversionoftheWirelessManagersoftware,alongwiththepubliclyavailable softwarespecifics,suchasthepubliclyavailablesoftwarenameandversion. Note:thesourcecodeforthepubliclyavailablesoftwaremayberesidentontheCambiumproductinstallation media,oronsupplementalCambiumproductmediaand/orCambiumwebsites.Pleasereferenceandreviewthese entireCambiumPubliclyAvailableSoftwareLegalNoticesandEndUserLicenseAgreementsforPubliclyAvailable Softwareforthedetailsonlocationandmethodsofobtainingthesourcecode. Note:dependentonthelicensetermsofthepubliclyavailablesoftware,sourcecodemaynotbeprovided.Please referenceandreviewtheseentireCambiumPubliclyAvailableSoftwareLegalNoticesandEndUserLicense AgreementsforPubliclyAvailableSoftwareforthedetailsonlocationandmethodsofobtainingthesourcecode. Toviewadditionalinformationregardinglicenses,acknowledgmentsandrequiredcopyrightnoticesforpublicly availablesoftwareusedintheWirelessManagersoftware,pleaseselectLegalNoticesdisplayfromtheGUI(if applicable),orreviewthelegalnoticesandenduserlicenseagreementsintheREADMEfilesorotherfilescreated duringinstallation,inthedocumentation,ontheinstallationmedia,orresidentintheWirelessManager software. WIRELESSMANAGER,CAMBIUM,CAMBIUMNETWORKS,andtheCambiumNetworksLogoaretrademarksof CambiumNetworks,LTD.Allothertrademarks,logos,andservicemarksarethepropertyoftherespectivethird partyowners.YouarenotpermittedtouseanymarkswithoutthepriorwrittenconsentofCambiumorsuchthird partywhichmayownthemarks.

722

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Software Included by Cambium

Issue 4 August 2012

ThefollowingaretheenduserlicenseagreementsforpubliclyavailablesoftwarethatCambiumhasincluded. AntContrib Version:1.0b3 Description:TheAntContribprojectisacollectionoftasks(andatonepointmaybetypesandothertools)for ApacheAnt.Usedtofacilitateautomationofbuildscripts. Softwaresite:http://sourceforge.net/projects/antcontrib SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforAntContrib1.0b3areavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthepreambleofthisdocument. License:TheApacheSoftwareLicense,Version1.1 Copyright(c)20012003AntContribproject.Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet: 1.Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowing disclaimer. 2.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthe followingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution. 3.Theenduserdocumentationincludedwiththeredistribution,ifany,mustincludethefollowing acknowledgment: "ThisproductincludessoftwaredevelopedbytheAntContribproject (http://sourceforge.net/projects/antcontrib)." Alternately,thisacknowledgmentmayappearinthesoftwareitself,ifandwhereversuchthirdparty acknowledgmentsnormallyappear. 4.ThenameAntContribmustnotbeusedtoendorseorpromoteproductsderivedfromthissoftwarewithout priorwrittenpermission.Forwrittenpermission,pleasecontactantcontribdevelopers@lists.sourceforge.net. 5.Productsderivedfromthissoftwaremaynotbecalled"AntContrib"normay"AntContrib"appearintheir nameswithoutpriorwrittenpermissionoftheAntContribproject. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDED``ASIS''ANDANYEXPRESSEDORIMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOT LIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHEANTCONTRIBPROJECTORITSCONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE,DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY,WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY, ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANYWAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE, EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. GeoAPI Version:2.1 Description:JavalibraryforGeospatialdatamanipulation Softwaresite:http://geoapi.sourceforge.net/ SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforGeoAPIareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thepreambleofthisdocument. License:OGC(OpenGeospatialConsortium)

723

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ThisOGCwork(includingsoftware,documents,orotherrelateditems)isbeingprovidedbythecopyrightholders underthefollowinglicense.Byobtaining,using,and/orcopyingthiswork,you(thelicensee)agreethatyouhave read,understood,andwillcomplywiththefollowingtermsandconditions:Permissiontouse,copy,andmodify thissoftwareanditsdocumentation,withorwithoutmodification,foranypurposeandwithoutfeeorroyaltyis herebygranted,providedthatyouincludethefollowingonALLcopiesofthesoftwareanddocumentationor portionsthereof,includingmodifications,thatyoumake: 1.ThefulltextofthisNOTICEinalocationviewabletousersoftheredistributedorderivativework. 2.Anypreexistingintellectualpropertydisclaimers,notices,ortermsandconditions.Ifnoneexist,ashortnotice ofthefollowingform(hypertextispreferred,textispermitted)shouldbeusedwithinthebodyofany redistributedorderivativecode:"Copyright[$dateofdocument]OpenGeospatialConsortium,Inc.AllRights Reserved.http://www.opengeospatial.org/Legal/(Hypertextispreferred,butatextualrepresentationis permitted.) 3.NoticeofanychangesormodificationstotheOGCfiles,includingthedatechangesweremade.(We recommendyouprovideURLstothelocationfromwhichthecodeisderived.) THISSOFTWAREANDDOCUMENTATIONISPROVIDED"ASIS,"ANDCOPYRIGHTHOLDERSMAKENO REPRESENTATIONSORWARRANTIES,EXPRESSORIMPLIED,INCLUDINGBUTNOTLIMITEDTO,WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITYORFITNESSFORANYPARTICULARPURPOSEORTHATTHEUSEOFTHESOFTWAREOR DOCUMENTATIONWILLNOTINFRINGEANYTHIRDPARTYPATENTS,COPYRIGHTS,TRADEMARKSOROTHER RIGHTS.COPYRIGHTHOLDERSWILLNOTBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,SPECIALORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISINGOUTOFANYUSEOFTHESOFTWAREORDOCUMENTATION. ThenameandtrademarksofcopyrightholdersmayNOTbeusedinadvertisingorpublicitypertainingtothe softwarewithoutspecific,writtenpriorpermission.Titletocopyrightinthissoftwareandanyassociated documentationwillatalltimesremainwithcopyrightholders. Javolution Version:5.2.5 Description:JavalibraryforGeospatialdatamanipulation Softwaresite:http://javolution.org/ SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforJavolutionareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thepreambleofthisdocument. License:JavolutionJava(tm)SolutionforRealTimeandEmbeddedSystems Copyright(c)20052007Javolution(http://javolution.org/).Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet: 1.Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowing disclaimer. 2.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthe followingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYTHECOPYRIGHTHOLDERSANDCONTRIBUTORS"ASIS"ANDANYEXPRESSOR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHECOPYRIGHTOWNEROR CONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE, DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY, WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANY WAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE.

724

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

JScience Version:4.3.1 Description:JavalibraryforGeospatialdatamanipulation Softwaresite:http://jscience.org SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforJScienceareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thepreambleofthisdocument. License:JScienceJava(TM)ToolsandLibrariesfortheAdvancementofSciences Copyright(C)2006JScience(http://jscience.org/).Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet: *Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnoticeandincludethislicenseagreement. *Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthe followingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYTHECOPYRIGHTHOLDERSANDCONTRIBUTORS"ASIS"ANDANYEXPRESSOR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHECOPYRIGHTOWNEROR CONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE, DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY, WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANY WAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. XStream Version:4.2.6 Description:Java,JSONandXMLserializationlibrary Softwaresite:http://xstream.codehaus.org/ SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforXStreamareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thepreambleofthisdocument. License:XStreamisopensourcesoftware,madeavailableunderaBSDlicense. Copyright(c)20032006,JoeWalnes Copyright(c)20062007,XStreamCommitters Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet:Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistof conditionsandthefollowingdisclaimer.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice, thislistofconditionsandthefollowingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththe distribution.NeitherthenameofXStreamnorthenamesofitscontributorsmaybeusedtoendorseorpromote productsderivedfromthissoftwarewithoutspecificpriorwrittenpermission. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYTHECOPYRIGHTHOLDERSANDCONTRIBUTORS"ASIS"ANDANYEXPRESSOR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHECOPYRIGHTOWNEROR CONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE, DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY, WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANY WAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCH.

725

Issue 4 August 2012 NetCDF Version:2.2.22 Description:Usedtocalculatelatitude/longitudepoints Softwaresite:http://www.unidata.ucar.edu/software/netcdfjava/

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforNetCDFareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thepreambleofthisdocument. License:Copyright19932008UniversityCorporationforAtmosphericResearch/Unidata PortionsofthissoftwareweredevelopedbytheUnidataProgramattheUniversityCorporationforAtmospheric Research.Accessanduseofthissoftwareshallimposethefollowingobligationsandunderstandingsontheuser. Theuserisgrantedtheright,withoutanyfeeorcost,touse,copy,modify,alter,enhanceanddistributethis software,andanyderivativeworksthereof,anditssupportingdocumentationforanypurposewhatsoever, providedthatthisentirenoticeappearsinallcopiesofthesoftware,derivativeworksandsupporting documentation.Further,UCARrequeststhattheusercreditUCAR/Unidatainanypublicationsthatresultfromthe useofthissoftwareorinanyproductthatincludesthissoftware,althoughthisisnotanobligation.Thenames UCARand/orUnidata,however,maynotbeusedinanyadvertisingorpublicitytoendorseorpromoteany productsorcommercialentityunlessspecificwrittenpermissionisobtainedfromUCAR/Unidata.Theuseralso understandsthatUCAR/Unidataisnotobligatedtoprovidetheuserwithanysupport,consulting,trainingor assistanceofanykindwithregardtotheuse,operationandperformanceofthissoftwarenortoprovidetheuser withanyupdates,revisions,newversionsor"bugfixes." THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYUCAR/UNIDATA"ASIS"ANDANYEXPRESSORIMPLIEDWARRANTIES, INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORA PARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLUCAR/UNIDATABELIABLEFORANYSPECIAL, INDIRECTORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGESORANYDAMAGESWHATSOEVERRESULTINGFROMLOSSOFUSE,DATA ORPROFITS,WHETHERINANACTIONOFCONTRACT,NEGLIGENCEOROTHERTORTIOUSACTION,ARISINGOUTOF ORINCONNECTIONWITHTHEACCESS,USEORPERFORMANCEOFTHISSOFTWARE. YahooYuiwidgets Version:2.5.2 Description:Javascriptbasedclientmappinglogwidget Softwaresite:http://developer.yahoo.com/yui/ SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforYahooYuiWidgetsareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthepreambleofthisdocument. License:SoftwareLicenseAgreement(BSDLicense) Copyright(c)2009,Yahoo!Inc.Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseofthissoftwareinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermitted providedthatthefollowingconditionsaremet:Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyright notice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowingdisclaimer.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabove copyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterials providedwiththedistribution.NeitherthenameofYahoo!Inc.northenamesofitscontributorsmaybeusedto endorseorpromoteproductsderivedfromthissoftwarewithoutspecificpriorwrittenpermissionofYahoo!Inc. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYTHECOPYRIGHTHOLDERSANDCONTRIBUTORS"ASIS"ANDANYEXPRESSOR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHECOPYRIGHTOWNEROR CONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE, DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY,

726

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANY WAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. dnsjava Version:2.0.6 Description:dnsjavaisanimplementationofDNSinJava.Itsupportsalldefinedrecordtypes(includingthe DNSSECtypes),andunknowntypes.Itcanbeusedforqueries,zonetransfers,anddynamicupdates. Softwaresite:http://www.dnsjava.org/ SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesfordnsjavaareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thepreambleofthisdocument. License:dnsjavaisplacedundertheBSDlicense.Severalfilesarealsounderadditionallicenses;seetheindividual filesfordetails. Copyright(c)19992005,BrianWellington.Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet:Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistof conditionsandthefollowingdisclaimer.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice, thislistofconditionsandthefollowingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththe distribution.Neitherthenameofthednsjavaprojectnorthenamesofitscontributorsmaybeusedtoendorseor promoteproductsderivedfromthissoftwarewithoutspecificpriorwrittenpermission. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYTHECOPYRIGHTHOLDERSANDCONTRIBUTORS"ASIS"ANDANYEXPRESSOR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHECOPYRIGHTOWNEROR CONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE, DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY, WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANY WAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. Finalnotes: ThankstoNetworkAssociates,Inc.forsponsoringsomeoftheoriginaldnsjavaworkin19992000. ThankstoNominum,Inc.forsponsoringsomeworkondnsjavafrom2000tothepresent.
Packages That Use Apache License Version 2.0

ThefollowingsixpackagesusetheApacheLicense,Version2.0,January2004,whosefulltextisprovidedunder ApacheLicenseVersion2.0,January2004. Axis.jar Version:1.4 Description:UsedtoaccessPrizmAPIsexposedthroughWebServicesfromWM Softwaresite:http://ws.apache.org/axis/ SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforAxisareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquiredfrom Cambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedinthe preambleofthisdocument. JAXRPC1.1 Version:1.1 Description:UsedtoaccessPrizmAPIsexposedthroughWebServicesfromWM Softwaresite:http://ws.apache.org/axis/

727

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforJAXRPC1.1areavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthepreambleofthisdocument. log4j1.2.12.jar Version:1.2.12 Description:UsedtoaccessPrizmAPIsexposedthroughWebServicesfromWM Softwaresite:http://sourceforge.net/projects/log4j SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforlog4j1.5.12.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthepreambleofthisdocument. wsdl4j1.5.1.jar Version:1.5.1 Description:UsedtoaccessPrizmAPIsexposedthroughWebServicesfromWM Softwaresite:http://sourceforge.net/projects/wsdl4j SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforwsdl4j1.5.1.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthepreambleofthisdocument. commonslogging1.0.4.jar Version:1.0.4 Description:UsedtoaccessPrizmAPIsexposedthroughWebServicesfromWM Softwaresite:http://commons.apache.org/logging/ SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforcommonslogging1.0.4.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,or maybeacquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthe methodsdescribedinthepreambleofthisdocument. commonsdiscovery0.2.jar Version:0.2 Description:UsedtoaccessPrizmAPIsexposedthroughWebServicesfromWM Softwaresite:http://commons.apache.org/discovery/ SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforcommonsdiscovery0.2.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,or maybeacquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthe methodsdescribedinthepreambleofthisdocument. ApacheLicense Version2.0,January2004 http://www.apache.org/licenses/ TERMSANDCONDITIONSFORUSE,REPRODUCTION,ANDDISTRIBUTION 1.Definitions."License"shallmeanthetermsandconditionsforuse,reproduction,anddistributionasdefinedby Sections1through9ofthisdocument."Licensor"shallmeanthecopyrightownerorentityauthorizedbythe copyrightownerthatisgrantingtheLicense."LegalEntity"shallmeantheunionoftheactingentityandallother entitiesthatcontrol,arecontrolledby,orareundercommoncontrolwiththatentity.Forthepurposesofthis definition,"control"means(i)thepower,directorindirect,tocausethedirectionormanagementofsuchentity, whetherbycontractorotherwise,or(ii)ownershipoffiftypercent(50%)ormoreoftheoutstandingshares,or(iii) beneficialownershipofsuchentity."You"(or"Your")shallmeananindividualorLegalEntityexercising permissionsgrantedbythisLicense."Source"formshallmeanthepreferredformformakingmodifications, includingbutnotlimitedtosoftwaresourcecode,documentationsource,andconfigurationfiles."Object"form shallmeananyformresultingfrommechanicaltransformationortranslationofaSourceform,includingbutnot limitedtocompiledobjectcode,generateddocumentation,andconversionstoothermediatypes."Work"shall

728

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

meantheworkofauthorship,whetherinSourceorObjectform,madeavailableundertheLicense,asindicatedby acopyrightnoticethatisincludedinorattachedtothework(anexampleisprovidedintheAppendixbelow). "DerivativeWorks"shallmeananywork,whetherinSourceorObjectform,thatisbasedon(orderivedfrom)the Workandforwhichtheeditorialrevisions,annotations,elaborations,orothermodificationsrepresent,asawhole, anoriginalworkofauthorship.ForthepurposesofthisLicense,DerivativeWorksshallnotincludeworksthat remainseparablefrom,ormerelylink(orbindbyname)totheinterfacesof,theWorkandDerivativeWorks thereof."Contribution"shallmeananyworkofauthorship,includingtheoriginalversionoftheWorkandany modificationsoradditionstothatWorkorDerivativeWorksthereof,thatisintentionallysubmittedtoLicensorfor inclusionintheWorkbythecopyrightownerorbyanindividualorLegalEntityauthorizedtosubmitonbehalfof thecopyrightowner.Forthepurposesofthisdefinition,"submitted"meansanyformofelectronic,verbal,or writtencommunicationsenttotheLicensororitsrepresentatives,includingbutnotlimitedtocommunicationon electronicmailinglists,sourcecodecontrolsystems,andissuetrackingsystemsthataremanagedby,oronbehalf of,theLicensorforthepurposeofdiscussingandimprovingtheWork,butexcludingcommunicationthatis conspicuouslymarkedorotherwisedesignatedinwritingbythecopyrightowneras"NotaContribution." "Contributor"shallmeanLicensorandanyindividualorLegalEntityonbehalfofwhomaContributionhasbeen receivedbyLicensorandsubsequentlyincorporatedwithintheWork. 2.GrantofCopyrightLicense.SubjecttothetermsandconditionsofthisLicense,eachContributorherebygrants toYouaperpetual,worldwide,nonexclusive,nocharge,royaltyfree,irrevocablecopyrightlicensetoreproduce, prepareDerivativeWorksof,publiclydisplay,publiclyperform,sublicense,anddistributetheWorkandsuch DerivativeWorksinSourceorObjectform. 3.GrantofPatentLicense.SubjecttothetermsandconditionsofthisLicense,eachContributorherebygrantsto Youaperpetual,worldwide,nonexclusive,nocharge,royaltyfree,irrevocable(exceptasstatedinthissection) patentlicensetomake,havemade,use,offertosell,sell,import,andotherwisetransfertheWork,wheresuch licenseappliesonlytothosepatentclaimslicensablebysuchContributorthatarenecessarilyinfringedbytheir Contribution(s)aloneorbycombinationoftheirContribution(s)withtheWorktowhichsuchContribution(s)was submitted.IfYouinstitutepatentlitigationagainstanyentity(includingacrossclaimorcounterclaiminalawsuit) allegingthattheWorkoraContributionincorporatedwithintheWorkconstitutesdirectorcontributorypatent infringement,thenanypatentlicensesgrantedtoYouunderthisLicenseforthatWorkshallterminateasofthe datesuchlitigationisfiled. 4.Redistribution.YoumayreproduceanddistributecopiesoftheWorkorDerivativeWorksthereofinany medium,withorwithoutmodifications,andinSourceorObjectform,providedthatYoumeetthefollowing conditions: (a) (b) (c) YoumustgiveanyotherrecipientsoftheWorkorDerivativeWorksacopyofthisLicense;and YoumustcauseanymodifiedfilestocarryprominentnoticesstatingthatYouchangedthefiles;and Youmustretain,intheSourceformofanyDerivativeWorksthatYoudistribute,allcopyright,patent, trademark,andattributionnoticesfromtheSourceformoftheWork,excludingthosenoticesthatdo notpertaintoanypartoftheDerivativeWorks;and IftheWorkincludesa"NOTICE"textfileaspartofitsdistribution,thenanyDerivativeWorksthatYou distributemustincludeareadablecopyoftheattributionnoticescontainedwithinsuchNOTICEfile, excludingthosenoticesthatdonotpertaintoanypartoftheDerivativeWorks,inatleastoneofthe followingplaces:withinaNOTICEtextfiledistributedaspartoftheDerivativeWorks;withinthe Sourceformordocumentation,ifprovidedalongwiththeDerivativeWorks;or,withinadisplay generatedbytheDerivativeWorks,ifandwhereversuchthirdpartynoticesnormallyappear.The contentsoftheNOTICEfileareforinformationalpurposesonlyanddonotmodifytheLicense.You mayaddYourownattributionnoticeswithinDerivativeWorksthatYoudistribute,alongsideorasan addendumtotheNOTICEtextfromtheWork,providedthatsuchadditionalattributionnoticescannot beconstruedasmodifyingtheLicense.

(d)

YoumayaddYourowncopyrightstatementtoYourmodificationsandmayprovideadditionalordifferentlicense termsandconditionsforuse,reproduction,ordistributionofYourmodifications,orforanysuchDerivativeWorks

729

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

asawhole,providedYouruse,reproduction,anddistributionoftheWorkotherwisecomplieswiththeconditions statedinthisLicense. 5.SubmissionofContributions.UnlessYouexplicitlystateotherwise,anyContributionintentionallysubmittedfor inclusionintheWorkbyYoutotheLicensorshallbeunderthetermsandconditionsofthisLicense,withoutany additionaltermsorconditions.Notwithstandingtheabove,nothinghereinshallsupersedeormodifythetermsof anyseparatelicenseagreementyoumayhaveexecutedwithLicensorregardingsuchContributions. 6.Trademarks.ThisLicensedoesnotgrantpermissiontousethetradenames,trademarks,servicemarks,or productnamesoftheLicensor,exceptasrequiredforreasonableandcustomaryuseindescribingtheoriginofthe WorkandreproducingthecontentoftheNOTICEfile. 7.DisclaimerofWarranty.Unlessrequiredbyapplicablelaworagreedtoinwriting,LicensorprovidestheWork (andeachContributorprovidesitsContributions)onan"ASIS"BASIS,WITHOUTWARRANTIESORCONDITIONSOF ANYKIND,eitherexpressorimplied,including,withoutlimitation,anywarrantiesorconditionsofTITLE,NON INFRINGEMENT,MERCHANTABILITY,orFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE.Youaresolelyresponsiblefor determiningtheappropriatenessofusingorredistributingtheWorkandassumeanyrisksassociatedwithYour exerciseofpermissionsunderthisLicense. 8.LimitationofLiability.Innoeventandundernolegaltheory,whetherintort(includingnegligence),contract, orotherwise,unlessrequiredbyapplicablelaw(suchasdeliberateandgrosslynegligentacts)oragreedtoin writing,shallanyContributorbeliabletoYoufordamages,includinganydirect,indirect,special,incidental,or consequentialdamagesofanycharacterarisingasaresultofthisLicenseoroutoftheuseorinabilitytousethe Work(includingbutnotlimitedtodamagesforlossofgoodwill,workstoppage,computerfailureormalfunction, oranyandallothercommercialdamagesorlosses),evenifsuchContributorhasbeenadvisedofthepossibilityof suchdamages. 9.AcceptingWarrantyorAdditionalLiability.WhileredistributingtheWorkorDerivativeWorksthereof,You maychoosetooffer,andchargeafeefor,acceptanceofsupport,warranty,indemnity,orotherliabilityobligations and/orrightsconsistentwiththisLicense.However,inacceptingsuchobligations,YoumayactonlyonYourown behalfandonYoursoleresponsibility,notonbehalfofanyotherContributor,andonlyifYouagreetoindemnify, defend,andholdeachContributorharmlessforanyliabilityincurredby,orclaimsassertedagainst,such Contributorbyreasonofyouracceptinganysuchwarrantyoradditionalliability. ENDOFTERMSANDCONDITIONS APPENDIX:HowtoapplytheApacheLicensetoyourwork. ToapplytheApacheLicensetoyourwork,attachthefollowingboilerplatenotice,withthefieldsenclosedby brackets"[]"replacedwithyourownidentifyinginformation.(Don'tincludethebrackets!)Thetextshouldbe enclosedintheappropriatecommentsyntaxforthefileformat.Wealsorecommendthatafileorclassnameand descriptionofpurposebeincludedonthesame"printedpage"asthecopyrightnoticeforeasieridentification withinthirdpartyarchives.Copyright[yyyy][nameofcopyrightowner]LicensedundertheApacheLicense, Version2.0(the"License");youmaynotusethisfileexceptincompliancewiththeLicense. YoumayobtainacopyoftheLicenseathttp://www.apache.org/licenses/LICENSE2.0. Unlessrequiredbyapplicablelaworagreedtoinwriting,softwaredistributedundertheLicenseisdistributedon an"ASIS"BASIS,WITHOUTWARRANTIESORCONDITIONSOFANYKIND,eitherexpressorimplied.SeetheLicense forthespecificlanguagegoverningpermissionsandlimitationsundertheLicense.

730

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

THIRD PARTY PUBLICLY AVAILABLE SOFTWARE LEGAL NOTICES AND END USER LICENSE AGREEMENTS FOR PUBLICLY AVAILABLE SOFTWARE

TheWirelessManagersoftwaremayincludeCambiumsoftware,commercialthirdpartysoftware,and/or publiclyavailable(opensource)software. TheCambiumsoftwareincludedintheWirelessManagersoftwareiscopyright(c)byCambiumNetworks,LTD (Cambium),anditsuseissubjecttothelicenses,termsandconditionsoftheagreementinforcebetweenthe purchaseroftheWirelessManagersoftwareandCambium.Thecommercialthirdpartysoftwarethatmaybe includedinorwiththeWirelessManagersoftwareissubjecttothelicenses,termsandconditionsofthe agreementinforcebetweenyouandCambium,unlessaseparatecommercialthirdpartysoftwarelicenseis included,inwhichcase,youruseofthecommercialthirdpartysoftwarewillthenbegovernedbytheseparate commercialthirdpartylicense.ThepubliclyavailablesoftwarethatmaybeincludedinorwiththeWireless Managersoftwareislistedbelow.Theuseofthelistedpubliclyavailablesoftwareissubjecttothelicenses, termsandconditionsoftheagreementinforcebetweenyouandCambium,aswellasthetermsandconditionsof thelicenseofeachpubliclyavailablesoftwarepackage.Copiesofthelicensesforthelistedpubliclyavailable software,aswellas,allattributions,acknowledgements,andsoftwareinformationdetails,areincludedbelow. Cambiumisrequiredtoreproducethesoftwarelicenses,acknowledgmentsandcopyrightnoticesasprovidedby theauthorsandowners,thus,allsuchinformationisprovidedinitsnativelanguageform,withoutmodificationor translation. Thepubliclyavailablesoftwareinthelistbelowincludesthepubliclyavailablesoftwareincludedbycommercial thirdpartysoftwarethatisusedintheWirelessManagersoftware.Thepubliclyavailablesoftwareincludedby CambiumthatisusedintheWirelessManagersoftwareisdisclosedintheCambiumPubliclyAvailableSoftware LegalNoticesandEndUserLicenseAgreementsforPubliclyAvailableSoftwareaccompanyingtheWireless Managersoftware. ForinstructionsonhowtoobtainacopyofanysourcecodebeingmadepubliclyavailablebyCambiumrelatedto softwareusedintheWirelessManagersoftwareyoumaysendyourrequestinwritingto: CambiumNetworks,LTD Attention:OpenSourceSoftwareManager 1299E.AlgonquinRoad Schaumburg,IL60196 Inyourrequest,pleaseincludetheversionoftheWirelessManagersoftware,alongwiththepubliclyavailable softwarespecifics,suchasthepubliclyavailablesoftwarenameandversion. Note:thesourcecodeforthepubliclyavailablesoftwaremayberesidentontheCambiumproductinstallation media,oronsupplementalCambiumproductmediaand/orCambiumwebsites.Pleasereferenceandreviewthese entireThirdPartyPubliclyAvailableSoftwareLegalNoticesandEndUserLicenseAgreementsforPubliclyAvailable Softwareforthedetailsonlocationandmethodsofobtainingthesourcecode. Note:dependentonthelicensetermsofthepubliclyavailablesoftware,sourcecodemaynotbeprovided.Please referenceandreviewtheseentireThirdPartyPubliclyAvailableSoftwareLegalNoticesandEndUserLicense AgreementsforPubliclyAvailableSoftwareforthedetailsonlocationandmethodsofobtainingthesourcecode. Toviewadditionalinformationregardinglicenses,acknowledgmentsandrequiredcopyrightnoticesforpublicly availablesoftwareusedintheWirelessManagersoftware,pleaseselectLegalNoticesdisplayfromtheGUI(if applicable),orreviewthelegalnoticesandenduserlicenseagreementsintheREADMEfilesorotherfilescreated duringinstallation,inthedocumentation,ontheinstallationmedia,orresidentintheWirelessManager software. WIRELESSMANAGER,CAMBIUM,CAMBIUMNETWORKS,andtheCambiumNetworksLogoaretrademarksof CambiumNetworks,LTD.Allothertrademarks,logos,andservicemarksarethepropertyoftherespectivethird partyowners.YouarenotpermittedtouseanymarkswithoutthepriorwrittenconsentofCambiumorsuchthird partywhichmayownthemarks.

731

Issue 4 August 2012

Software Included by Commercial Third Party Software

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Thefollowingaretheenduserlicenseagreementsforpubliclyavailablesoftwarethatcommercialthirdparty softwarehasincluded. openorb_tools1.2.0.jar Version:1.2 Description:CORBA SoftwareSite:http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=43608&package_id=36153 SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforopenorb_toolsareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthisdocument. License: TheOpenORBCommunitySoftwareLicense,Version1.0 Copyright(C)2002TheOpenORBProject.Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet: 1.Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowing disclaimer. 2.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthe followingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution. 3.Theenduserdocumentationincludedwiththeredistribution,ifany,mustincludethefollowing acknowledgment:"ThisproductincludessoftwaredevelopedbytheOpenORBCommunityProject (http://sourceforge.net/projects/openorb/)."togetherwiththeduecreditstatementslistedbelow.Alternately, thisacknowledgmentandduecreditsmayappearinthesoftwareitself,ifandwhereversuchthirdparty acknowledgmentsnormallyappear. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDED``ASIS''ANDANYEXPRESSEDORIMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOT LIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHEMEMBERSOFTHEOPENORBCOMMUNITYPROJECTORITSCONTRIBUTORS BELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE,DATA,OR PROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY,WHETHERIN CONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANYWAYOUTOF THEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. ThissoftwareconsistsofvoluntarycontributionsmadebymanyindividualstotheOpenORBCommunityProject. FormoreinformationontheOpenORBCommunityProject,pleasereferto http://sourceforge.net/projects/openorb/. DueCredits ThisproductincludessoftwaredevelopedbytheApacheSoftwareFoundation(http://www.apache.org/), includingtheAvalonFramework,AvalonLogkit,andrelatedExcaliburutilities.DuecredittotheApacheSoftware Foundationisherebyacknowledged. ThisproductisderivedfrominitialworkspublishedundertheExolabGroup,(http://www.exolab.org</a>).Due credittotheExolabGroupisherebyacknowledged.Partsofthissoftwarearederivedfromandsubjecttothe termsoftheExolablicense.AcopyoftheExolablicenseiscontainedinrespectivedistributions. ExolabGroupLicense Copyright(C)19992001Intalio,Inc.AllRightsReserved.

732

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Redistributionanduseofthissoftwareandassociateddocumentation("Software"),withorwithoutmodification, arepermittedprovidedthatthefollowingconditionsaremet: 1.Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaincopyrightstatementsandnotices.Redistributionsmustalsocontaina copyofthisdocument. 2.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthe followingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution. 3.Thename"ExoLab"mustnotbeusedtoendorseorpromoteproductsderivedfromthisSoftwarewithoutprior writtenpermissionofExoLabGroup.Forwrittenpermission,pleasecontactinfo@exolab.org. 4.ProductsderivedfromthisSoftwaremaynotbecalled"ExoLab"normay"ExoLab"appearintheirnames withoutpriorwrittenpermissionofExoLabGroup.ExolabisaregisteredtrademarkofExoLabGroup. 5.DuecreditshouldbegiventotheExoLabGroup(http://www.exolab.org). THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYINTALIO,INC.ANDCONTRIBUTORS''ASIS''ANDANYEXPRESSEDORIMPLIED WARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESS FORAPARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED. INNOEVENTSHALLINTALIO,INC.ORITSCONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOF SUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE,DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVER CAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY,WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDING NEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANYWAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHE POSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. jython.jar Version:2.1 Description:Jythonisanimplementationofthehighlevel,dynamic,objectorientedlanguagePythonwrittenin 100%PureJava,andseamlesslyintegratedwiththeJavaplatform.ItthusallowsyoutorunPythononanyJava platform. SoftwareSite:http://www.jython.org SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforJythonareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thisdocument. License: A.TERMSANDCONDITIONSFORACCESSINGOROTHERWISEUSINGJYTHONPYTHONSOFTWAREFOUNDATION LICENSEVERSION2 1.ThisLICENSEAGREEMENTisbetweenthePythonSoftwareFoundation("PSF"),andtheIndividualor Organization("Licensee")accessingandotherwiseusingthissoftware("Jython")insourceorbinaryformandits associateddocumentation. 2.SubjecttothetermsandconditionsofthisLicenseAgreement,PSFherebygrantsLicenseeanonexclusive, royaltyfree,worldwidelicensetoreproduce,analyze,test,performand/ordisplaypublicly,preparederivative works,distribute,andotherwiseuseJythonaloneorinanyderivativeversion,provided,however,thatPSF's LicenseAgreementandPSF'snoticeofcopyright,i.e.,"Copyright(c)2007PythonSoftwareFoundation;AllRights Reserved"areretainedinJythonaloneorinanyderivativeversionpreparedbyLicensee. 3.IntheeventLicenseepreparesaderivativeworkthatisbasedonorincorporatesJythonoranypartthereof,and wantstomakethederivativeworkavailabletoothersasprovidedherein,thenLicenseeherebyagreestoinclude inanysuchworkabriefsummaryofthechangesmadetoJython. 4.PSFismakingJythonavailabletoLicenseeonan"ASIS"basis.PSFMAKESNOREPRESENTATIONSOR WARRANTIES,EXPRESSORIMPLIED.BYWAYOFEXAMPLE,BUTNOTLIMITATION,PSFMAKESNOANDDISCLAIMS

733

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

ANYREPRESENTATIONORWARRANTYOFMERCHANTABILITYORFITNESSFORANYPARTICULARPURPOSEOR THATTHEUSEOFJYTHONWILLNOTINFRINGEANYTHIRDPARTYRIGHTS. 5.PSFSHALLNOTBELIABLETOLICENSEEORANYOTHERUSERSOFJYTHONFORANYINCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,OR CONSEQUENTIALDAMAGESORLOSSASARESULTOFMODIFYING,DISTRIBUTING,OROTHERWISEUSINGJYTHON, ORANYDERIVATIVETHEREOF,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYTHEREOF. 6.ThisLicenseAgreementwillautomaticallyterminateuponamaterialbreachofitstermsandconditions. 7.NothinginthisLicenseAgreementshallbedeemedtocreateanyrelationshipofagency,partnership,orjoint venturebetweenPSFandLicensee.ThisLicenseAgreementdoesnotgrantpermissiontousePSFtrademarksor tradenameinatrademarksensetoendorseorpromoteproductsorservicesofLicensee,oranythirdparty. 8.Bycopying,installingorotherwiseusingJython,Licenseeagreestobeboundbythetermsandconditionsofthis LicenseAgreement. Jython2.0,2.1License Copyright(c)2000,2001,2002,2003,2004,2005,2006,2007JythonDevelopers.Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet: Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowing disclaimer. Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowing disclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution. NeitherthenameoftheJythonDevelopersnorthenamesofitscontributorsmaybeusedtoendorseorpromote productsderivedfromthissoftwarewithoutspecificpriorwrittenpermission. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDEDBYTHECOPYRIGHTHOLDERSANDCONTRIBUTORS"ASIS''ANDANYEXPRESSOR IMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEAREDISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHEREGENTSORCONTRIBUTORSBE LIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES (INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE,DATA,OR PROFITS;ORBUSINESSINTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY,WHETHERIN CONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY,ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANYWAYOUTOF THEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE,EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. p6spy.jar Version:1.3 Description:DebugTool SoftwareSite:http://www.p6spy.com/ SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforp6spy.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thisdocument. License: TheP6SpySoftwareLicense,Version1.2 ThislicenseisderivedandfullycompatiblewiththeApacheSoftwarelicense,see http://www.apache.org/LICENSE.txt.Copyright(c)20012003AndyMartin,Ph.D.andJeffGokeAllrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet: 1.Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowing disclaimer. 2.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthe followingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution.

734

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

3.Theenduserdocumentationincludedwiththeredistribution,ifany,mustincludethefollowing acknowledgment: TheoriginalconceptandcodebaseforP6SpywasconceivedanddevelopedbyAndyMartin,Ph.D.who generouslycontributedthefirstcompletereleasetothepublicunderthislicense.Thisproductwasdueto thepioneeringworkofAndythatbeganinDecemberof1995developingapplicationsthatcouldseamlessly bedeployedwithminimaleffortbutwithdramaticresults.ThiscodeismaintainedandextendedbyJeffGoke andwiththeideasandcontributionsofotherP6Spycontributors.(http://www.p6spy.com)Alternately,this acknowledgmentmayappearinthesoftwareitself,ifandwhereversuchthirdpartyacknowledgments normallyappear. 4.Thenames"P6Spy","JeffGoke",and"AndyMartin"mustnotbeusedtoendorseorpromoteproductsderived fromthissoftwarewithoutpriorwrittenpermission.Forwrittenpermission,pleasecontactlicense@p6spy.com. 5.Productsderivedfromthissoftwaremaynotbecalled"P6Spy"normay"P6Spy"appearintheirnameswithout priorwrittenpermissionofJeffGokeandAndyMartin. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDED``ASIS''ANDANYEXPRESSEDORIMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOT LIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHEAPACHESOFTWAREFOUNDATIONORITSCONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFOR ANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOT LIMITEDTO,PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE,DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY,WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY, ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANYWAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE, EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE. TrademarkNotices Sun,theSunlogo,SunMicrosystems,JavaSoft,JavaBeans,JDK,Java,HotJava,HotJavaViews,VisualJava,Solaris, NEO,Joe,Netra,NFS,ONC,ONC+,OpenWindows,PCNFS,SNM,SunNetManager,Solarissunburstdesign, Solstice,SunCore,SolarNet,SunWeb,SunWorkstation,TheNetworkIsTheComputer,ToolTalk,Ultra, Ultracomputing,Ultraserver,WhereTheNetworkIsGoing,SunWorkShop,XView,JavaWorkShop,theJavaCoffee Cuplogo,andVisualJavaaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofSunMicrosystems,Inc.intheUnitedStates andothercountries. Windows,WindowsNT,andWin32areregisteredtrademarksofMicrosoftCorp. JBossandJBossGrouparetrademarksofMarcFleuryunderoperationbyJBossGroup,LLC. Sybase,SQLAnywhere,andAdaptiveServerAnywherearetrademarksofSybase,Inc. MicrosoftSQLServerisatrademarkoftheMicrosoftCorporation. BEA,WebLogic,Tuxedo,andJoltareregisteredtrademarks,andHowBusinessBecomesEBusiness,BEAWebLogic EBusinessPlatform,BEABuilder,BEAeLink,BEAWebLogicEnterprise,BEAWebLogicExpress,BEAWebLogic Integration,BEAWebLogicPersonalizationServer,BEAWebLogicPortal,andBEAWebLogicServeraretrademarks ofBEASystems,Inc. Oracleisaregisteredtrademark,andConText,OracleAllianceandOracle8aretrademarksorregistered trademarksofOracleCorporation. DB2,DB2OLAPServer,WebSphere,andIBMaretrademarksorregisteredtrademarksofInternational. BusinessMachinesCorporationintheUnitedStates,othercountriesorboth. MySQLisatrademarkofMySQLABintheUnitedStatesandothercountries. Otherproductnamesmentionedhereinandthroughoutthethiswebsitearethetrademarksoftheirrespective owners. Zlib Version:1.1.14 Description:Compressionlibraryusedbylibpng

735

Issue 4 August 2012 SoftwareSite:http://www.zlib.net

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforZLibareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thisdocument. License: Licensezlib.hinterfaceofthe'zlib'generalpurposecompressionlibrary version1.2.2,October3rd,2004 Copyright(C)19952004JeanloupGaillyandMarkAdler Thissoftwareisprovided'asis',withoutanyexpressorimpliedwarranty.Innoeventwilltheauthorsbeheld liableforanydamagesarisingfromtheuseofthissoftware. Permissionisgrantedtoanyonetousethissoftwareforanypurpose,includingcommercialapplications,andto alteritandredistributeitfreely,subjecttothefollowingrestrictions: 1.Theoriginofthissoftwaremustnotbemisrepresented;youmustnotclaimthatyouwrotetheoriginal software.Ifyouusethissoftwareinaproduct,anacknowledgmentintheproductdocumentationwouldbe appreciatedbutisnotrequired. 2.Alteredsourceversionsmustbeplainlymarkedassuch,andmustnotbemisrepresentedasbeingtheoriginal software. 3.Thisnoticemaynotberemovedoralteredfromanysourcedistribution. JeanloupGaillyjloup@gzip.org MarkAdlermadler@alumni.caltech.edu Org.w3c.dom Version:1 Description:DocumentObjectModel SoftwareSite:http://www.w3.org/DOM SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforOrg.w3c.domareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthisdocument. License:http://www.w3.org/Consortium/Legal/2002/copyrightsoftware20021231 Thiswork(andincludedsoftware,documentationsuchasREADMEs,orotherrelateditems)isbeingprovidedby thecopyrightholdersunderthefollowinglicense.Byobtaining,usingand/orcopyingthiswork,you(thelicensee) agreethatyouhaveread,understood,andwillcomplywiththefollowingtermsandconditions. Permissiontocopy,modify,anddistributethissoftwareanditsdocumentation,withorwithoutmodification,for anypurposeandwithoutfeeorroyaltyisherebygranted,providedthatyouincludethefollowingonALLcopiesof thesoftwareanddocumentationorportionsthereof,includingmodifications: ThefulltextofthisNOTICEinalocationviewabletousersoftheredistributedorderivativework.Anypreexisting intellectualpropertydisclaimers,notices,ortermsandconditions.Ifnoneexist,theW3CSoftwareShortNotice shouldbeincluded(hypertextispreferred,textispermitted)withinthebodyofanyredistributedorderivative code. Noticeofanychangesormodificationstothefiles,includingthedatechangesweremade. (WerecommendyouprovideURLstothelocationfromwhichthecodeisderived.) THISSOFTWAREANDDOCUMENTATIONISPROVIDED"ASIS,"ANDCOPYRIGHTHOLDERSMAKENO REPRESENTATIONSORWARRANTIES,EXPRESSORIMPLIED,INCLUDINGBUTNOTLIMITEDTO,WARRANTIESOF MERCHANTABILITYORFITNESSFORANYPARTICULARPURPOSEORTHATTHEUSEOFTHESOFTWAREOR DOCUMENTATIONWILLNOTINFRINGEANYTHIRDPARTYPATENTS,COPYRIGHTS,TRADEMARKSOROTHER

736

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

RIGHTS.COPYRIGHTHOLDERSWILLNOTBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT,INDIRECT,SPECIALORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISINGOUTOFANYUSEOFTHESOFTWAREORDOCUMENTATION. ThenameandtrademarksofcopyrightholdersmayNOTbeusedinadvertisingorpublicitypertainingtothe softwarewithoutspecific,writtenpriorpermission.Titletocopyrightinthissoftwareandanyassociated documentationwillatalltimesremainwithcopyrightholders. LibPNG Version:1.2.5 Description:PNGencoding/decoding SoftwareSite:http://www.libpng.org/pub/png/libpng.html SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforPNGareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquiredfrom Cambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedinthis document. License: Thiscopyofthelibpngnoticesisprovidedforyourconvenience.Incaseofanydiscrepancybetweenthiscopyand thenoticesinthefilepng.hthatisincludedinthelibpngdistribution,thelattershallprevail. COPYRIGHTNOTICE,DISCLAIMER,andLICENSE: Ifyoumodifylibpngyoumayinsertadditionalnoticesimmediatelyfollowingthissentence. libpngversions1.2.6,August15,2004,through1.2.35,February14,2009,areCopyright(c)2004,20062008Glenn RandersPehrson,andaredistributedaccordingtothesamedisclaimerandlicenseaslibpng1.2.5withthe followingindividualaddedtothelistofContributingAuthors: CosminTruta libpngversions1.0.7,July1,2000,through1.2.5October3,2002,areCopyright(c)20002002GlennRanders Pehrson,andaredistributedaccordingtothesamedisclaimerandlicenseaslibpng1.0.6withthefollowing individualsaddedtothelistofContributingAuthors: SimonPierreCadieux EricS.Raymond GillesVollant andwiththefollowingadditionstothedisclaimer: Thereisnowarrantyagainstinterferencewithyourenjoymentofthelibraryoragainstinfringement.Thereis nowarrantythatoureffortsorthelibrarywillfulfillanyofyourparticularpurposesorneeds.Thislibraryis providedwithallfaults,andtheentireriskofsatisfactoryquality,performance,accuracy,andeffortiswith theuser. libpngversions0.97,January1998,through1.0.6,March20,2000,areCopyright(c)1998,1999GlennRanders Pehrson,andaredistributedaccordingtothesamedisclaimerandlicenseaslibpng0.96,withthefollowing individualsaddedtothelistofContributingAuthors: TomLane GlennRandersPehrson WillemvanSchaik libpngversions0.89,June1996,through0.96,May1997,areCopyright(c)1996,1997AndreasDilgerDistributed accordingtothesamedisclaimerandlicenseaslibpng0.88,withthefollowingindividualsaddedtothelistof ContributingAuthors: JohnBowler KevinBracey SamBushell MagnusHolmgren

737

Issue 4 August 2012 GregRoelofs TomTanner

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

libpngversions0.5,May1995,through0.88,January1996,areCopyright(c)1995,1996GuyEricSchalnat,Group 42,Inc.Forthepurposesofthiscopyrightandlicense,"ContributingAuthors"isdefinedasthefollowingsetof individuals: AndreasDilger DaveMartindale GuyEricSchalnat PaulSchmidt TimWegner ThePNGReferenceLibraryissupplied"ASIS".TheContributingAuthorsandGroup42,Inc.disclaimallwarranties, expressedorimplied,including,withoutlimitation,thewarrantiesofmerchantabilityandoffitnessforany purpose.TheContributingAuthorsandGroup42,Inc.assumenoliabilityfordirect,indirect,incidental,special, exemplary,orconsequentialdamages,whichmayresultfromtheuseofthePNGReferenceLibrary,evenif advisedofthepossibilityofsuchdamage. Permissionisherebygrantedtouse,copy,modify,anddistributethissourcecode,orportionshereof,forany purpose,withoutfee,subjecttothefollowingrestrictions: 1.Theoriginofthissourcecodemustnotbemisrepresented. 2.Alteredversionsmustbeplainlymarkedassuchandmustnotbemisrepresentedasbeingtheoriginalsource. 3.ThisCopyrightnoticemaynotberemovedoralteredfromanysourceoralteredsourcedistribution. TheContributingAuthorsandGroup42,Inc.specificallypermit,withoutfee,andencouragetheuseofthissource codeasacomponenttosupportingthePNGfileformatincommercialproducts.Ifyouusethissourcecodeina product,acknowledgmentisnotrequiredbutwouldbeappreciated. A"png_get_copyright"functionisavailable,forconvenientusein"about"boxesandthelike: printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); Also,thePNGlogo(inPNGformat,ofcourse)issuppliedinthefiles"pngbar.png"and"pngbar.jpg(88x31)and "pngnow.png"(98x31). LibpngisOSICertifiedOpenSourceSoftware.OSICertifiedOpenSourceisacertificationmarkoftheOpenSource Initiative. GlennRandersPehrson glennrp@users.sourceforge.net February14,2009
Packages That Use GNU Lesser General Public License Version 2.1

ThefollowingninepackagesusetheGNULESSERGENERALPUBLICLICENSE,Version2.1,February1999,whosefull textisprovidedunderGNULesserGeneralPublicLicenseVersion2.1,February1999. jasperreports.jar Version:1.0 Description:JasperReports SoftwareSite:http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=36382&package_id=28579 SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforjasperreports.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthisdocument.

738

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Jfreechart.jar Version:0.9.15 Description:Chartingtool SoftwareSite:http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=15494&package_id=12428 SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforJfreechart.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthisdocument. bsh1.2b3.jar Version:1.2 Description:Scriptingfiles SoftwareSite:SourcecodenotavailablefromAdventNet SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforbsh1.2b3.jarareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthisdocument. jvcs.jar Version:2.1 Description:Scriptingtool SoftwareSite:http://www.jcvs.org/download/jcvs/jcvs522.tgz SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforJvcsareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquiredfrom Cambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedinthis document. ftp.jar Version:2.1 Description:FTPpackage SoftwareSite:http://www.enterprisedt.com/downloads/ftp/ftp1.1.tar.gz SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforFTPareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquiredfrom Cambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedinthis document. jcommon Version:1.0.0 Description:GeneralpurposeclassesusedbyJfreechart SoftwareSite:http://www.jfree.org/jcommon/download/ SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforjcommonareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thisdocument. MySQLConnector Version: LinuxMM.MySQL3.0.8 SolarisMM.MySQL3.0.8 WindowsMM.MySQL3.0.8 Description:JDBCDriver SoftwareSite:http://Mysql.com SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforMySQLConnectorareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybe acquiredfromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethods describedinthisdocument.

739

Issue 4 August 2012 itext1.02b.jar Version:1.0.2 Description:TextParser SoftwareSite:http://www.lowagie.com/iText/

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

SourceCode:Thesourcepackagesforitextareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquiredfrom Cambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedinthis document. j2sshcommon.jar,j2sshcore.jar(SSHTools) Version:j2ssh0.2.7 Description:SSHTools SoftwareSite:http://sourceforge.net/project/showfiles.php?group_id=60894&package_id=57233 SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforSSHToolsareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thisdocument. GNULesserGeneralPublicLicense Version2.1,February1999 Copyright(C)1991,1999FreeSoftwareFoundation,Inc. 51FranklinStreet,FifthFloor,Boston,MA021101301USA Everyoneispermittedtocopyanddistributeverbatimcopiesofthislicensedocument,butchangingitisnot allowed. [ThisisthefirstreleasedversionoftheLesserGPL.ItalsocountsasthesuccessoroftheGNULibraryPublic License,version2,hencetheversionnumber2.1.] Preamble Thelicensesformostsoftwarearedesignedtotakeawayyourfreedomtoshareandchangeit.Bycontrast,the GNUGeneralPublicLicensesareintendedtoguaranteeyourfreedomtoshareandchangefreesoftwaretomake surethesoftwareisfreeforallitsusers. Thislicense,theLesserGeneralPublicLicense,appliestosomespeciallydesignatedsoftwarepackagestypically librariesoftheFreeSoftwareFoundationandotherauthorswhodecidetouseit.Youcanuseittoo,butwe suggestyoufirstthinkcarefullyaboutwhetherthislicenseortheordinaryGeneralPublicLicenseisthebetter strategytouseinanyparticularcase,basedontheexplanationsbelow. Whenwespeakoffreesoftware,wearereferringtofreedomofuse,notprice.OurGeneralPublicLicensesare designedtomakesurethatyouhavethefreedomtodistributecopiesoffreesoftware(andchargeforthisservice ifyouwish);thatyoureceivesourcecodeorcangetitifyouwantit;thatyoucanchangethesoftwareanduse piecesofitinnewfreeprograms;andthatyouareinformedthatyoucandothesethings. Toprotectyourrights,weneedtomakerestrictionsthatforbiddistributorstodenyyoutheserightsortoaskyou tosurrendertheserights.Theserestrictionstranslatetocertainresponsibilitiesforyouifyoudistributecopiesof thelibraryorifyoumodifyit. Forexample,ifyoudistributecopiesofthelibrary,whethergratisorforafee,youmustgivetherecipientsallthe rightsthatwegaveyou.Youmustmakesurethatthey,too,receiveorcangetthesourcecode.Ifyoulinkother codewiththelibrary,youmustprovidecompleteobjectfilestotherecipients,sothattheycanrelinkthemwith thelibraryaftermakingchangestothelibraryandrecompilingit.Andyoumustshowthemthesetermssothey knowtheirrights. Weprotectyourrightswithatwostepmethod:(1)wecopyrightthelibrary,and(2)weofferyouthislicense, whichgivesyoulegalpermissiontocopy,distributeand/ormodifythelibrary. Toprotecteachdistributor,wewanttomakeitveryclearthatthereisnowarrantyforthefreelibrary.Also,ifthe libraryismodifiedbysomeoneelseandpassedon,therecipientsshouldknowthatwhattheyhaveisnotthe

740

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

originalversion,sothattheoriginalauthor'sreputationwillnotbeaffectedbyproblemsthatmightbeintroduced byothers. Finally,softwarepatentsposeaconstantthreattotheexistenceofanyfreeprogram.Wewishtomakesurethata companycannoteffectivelyrestricttheusersofafreeprogrambyobtainingarestrictivelicensefromapatent holder.Therefore,weinsistthatanypatentlicenseobtainedforaversionofthelibrarymustbeconsistentwith thefullfreedomofusespecifiedinthislicense. MostGNUsoftware,includingsomelibraries,iscoveredbytheordinaryGNUGeneralPublicLicense.Thislicense, theGNULesserGeneralPublicLicense,appliestocertaindesignatedlibraries,andisquitedifferentfromthe ordinaryGeneralPublicLicense.Weusethislicenseforcertainlibrariesinordertopermitlinkingthoselibraries intononfreeprograms. Whenaprogramislinkedwithalibrary,whetherstaticallyorusingasharedlibrary,thecombinationofthetwois legallyspeakingacombinedwork,aderivativeoftheoriginallibrary.TheordinaryGeneralPublicLicensetherefore permitssuchlinkingonlyiftheentirecombinationfitsitscriteriaoffreedom.TheLesserGeneralPublicLicense permitsmorelaxcriteriaforlinkingothercodewiththelibrary. Wecallthislicensethe"Lesser"GeneralPublicLicensebecauseitdoesLesstoprotecttheuser'sfreedomthanthe ordinaryGeneralPublicLicense.ItalsoprovidesotherfreesoftwaredevelopersLessofanadvantageover competingnonfreeprograms.ThesedisadvantagesarethereasonweusetheordinaryGeneralPublicLicensefor manylibraries.However,theLesserlicenseprovidesadvantagesincertainspecialcircumstances. Forexample,onrareoccasions,theremaybeaspecialneedtoencouragethewidestpossibleuseofacertain library,sothatitbecomesadefactostandard.Toachievethis,nonfreeprogramsmustbeallowedtousethe library.Amorefrequentcaseisthatafreelibrarydoesthesamejobaswidelyusednonfreelibraries.Inthiscase, thereislittletogainbylimitingthefreelibrarytofreesoftwareonly,soweusetheLesserGeneralPublicLicense. Inothercases,permissiontouseaparticularlibraryinnonfreeprogramsenablesagreaternumberofpeopleto usealargebodyoffreesoftware.Forexample,permissiontousetheGNUCLibraryinnonfreeprogramsenables manymorepeopletousethewholeGNUoperatingsystem,aswellasitsvariant,theGNU/Linuxoperatingsystem. AlthoughtheLesserGeneralPublicLicenseisLessprotectiveoftheusers'freedom,itdoesensurethattheuserof aprogramthatislinkedwiththeLibraryhasthefreedomandthewherewithaltorunthatprogramusinga modifiedversionoftheLibrary. Theprecisetermsandconditionsforcopying,distributionandmodificationfollow.Paycloseattentiontothe differencebetweena"workbasedonthelibrary"anda"workthatusesthelibrary".Theformercontainscode derivedfromthelibrary,whereasthelattermustbecombinedwiththelibraryinordertorun. TERMSANDCONDITIONSFORCOPYING,DISTRIBUTIONANDMODIFICATION 0.ThisLicenseAgreementappliestoanysoftwarelibraryorotherprogramwhichcontainsanoticeplacedbythe copyrightholderorotherauthorizedpartysayingitmaybedistributedunderthetermsofthisLesserGeneral PublicLicense(alsocalled"thisLicense").Eachlicenseeisaddressedas"you". A"library"meansacollectionofsoftwarefunctionsand/ordatapreparedsoastobeconvenientlylinkedwith applicationprograms(whichusesomeofthosefunctionsanddata)toformexecutables. The"Library",below,referstoanysuchsoftwarelibraryorworkwhichhasbeendistributedundertheseterms.A "workbasedontheLibrary"meanseithertheLibraryoranyderivativeworkundercopyrightlaw:thatistosay,a workcontainingtheLibraryoraportionofit,eitherverbatimorwithmodificationsand/ortranslated straightforwardlyintoanotherlanguage.(Hereinafter,translationisincludedwithoutlimitationintheterm "modification".) "Sourcecode"foraworkmeansthepreferredformoftheworkformakingmodificationstoit.Foralibrary, completesourcecodemeansallthesourcecodeforallmodulesitcontains,plusanyassociatedinterface definitionfiles,plusthescriptsusedtocontrolcompilationandinstallationofthelibrary. Activitiesotherthancopying,distributionandmodificationarenotcoveredbythisLicense;theyareoutsideits scope.TheactofrunningaprogramusingtheLibraryisnotrestricted,andoutputfromsuchaprogramiscovered

741

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

onlyifitscontentsconstituteaworkbasedontheLibrary(independentoftheuseoftheLibraryinatoolfor writingit).WhetherthatistruedependsonwhattheLibrarydoesandwhattheprogramthatusestheLibrary does. 1.YoumaycopyanddistributeverbatimcopiesoftheLibrary'scompletesourcecodeasyoureceiveit,inany medium,providedthatyouconspicuouslyandappropriatelypublishoneachcopyanappropriatecopyrightnotice anddisclaimerofwarranty;keepintactallthenoticesthatrefertothisLicenseandtotheabsenceofany warranty;anddistributeacopyofthisLicensealongwiththeLibrary. Youmaychargeafeeforthephysicalactoftransferringacopy,andyoumayatyouroptionofferwarranty protectioninexchangeforafee. 2.YoumaymodifyyourcopyorcopiesoftheLibraryoranyportionofit,thusformingaworkbasedontheLibrary, andcopyanddistributesuchmodificationsorworkunderthetermsofSection1above,providedthatyoualso meetalloftheseconditions: *a)Themodifiedworkmustitselfbeasoftwarelibrary. *b)Youmustcausethefilesmodifiedtocarryprominentnoticesstatingthatyouchangedthefilesandthe dateofanychange. *c)Youmustcausethewholeoftheworktobelicensedatnochargetoallthirdpartiesunderthetermsof thisLicense. *d)IfafacilityinthemodifiedLibraryreferstoafunctionoratableofdatatobesuppliedbyanapplication programthatusesthefacility,otherthanasanargumentpassedwhenthefacilityisinvoked,thenyoumust makeagoodfaithefforttoensurethat,intheeventanapplicationdoesnotsupplysuchfunctionortable, thefacilitystilloperates,andperformswhateverpartofitspurposeremainsmeaningful. (Forexample,afunctioninalibrarytocomputesquarerootshasapurposethatisentirelywelldefined independentoftheapplication.Therefore,Subsection2drequiresthatanyapplicationsuppliedfunctionortable usedbythisfunctionmustbeoptional:iftheapplicationdoesnotsupplyit,thesquarerootfunctionmuststill computesquareroots.) Theserequirementsapplytothemodifiedworkasawhole.Ifidentifiablesectionsofthatworkarenotderived fromtheLibrary,andcanbereasonablyconsideredindependentandseparateworksinthemselves,thenthis License,anditsterms,donotapplytothosesectionswhenyoudistributethemasseparateworks.Butwhenyou distributethesamesectionsaspartofawholewhichisaworkbasedontheLibrary,thedistributionofthewhole mustbeonthetermsofthisLicense,whosepermissionsforotherlicenseesextendtotheentirewhole,andthus toeachandeverypartregardlessofwhowroteit. Thus,itisnottheintentofthissectiontoclaimrightsorcontestyourrightstoworkwrittenentirelybyyou;rather, theintentistoexercisetherighttocontrolthedistributionofderivativeorcollectiveworksbasedontheLibrary. Inaddition,mereaggregationofanotherworknotbasedontheLibrarywiththeLibrary(orwithaworkbasedon theLibrary)onavolumeofastorageordistributionmediumdoesnotbringtheotherworkunderthescopeofthis License. 3.YoumayopttoapplythetermsoftheordinaryGNUGeneralPublicLicenseinsteadofthisLicensetoagiven copyoftheLibrary.Todothis,youmustalterallthenoticesthatrefertothisLicense,sothattheyrefertothe ordinaryGNUGeneralPublicLicense,version2,insteadoftothisLicense.(Ifanewerversionthanversion2ofthe ordinaryGNUGeneralPublicLicensehasappeared,thenyoucanspecifythatversioninsteadifyouwish.)Donot makeanyotherchangeinthesenotices. Oncethischangeismadeinagivencopy,itisirreversibleforthatcopy,sotheordinaryGNUGeneralPublic Licenseappliestoallsubsequentcopiesandderivativeworksmadefromthatcopy. ThisoptionisusefulwhenyouwishtocopypartofthecodeoftheLibraryintoaprogramthatisnotalibrary. 4.YoumaycopyanddistributetheLibrary(oraportionorderivativeofit,underSection2)inobjectcodeor executableformunderthetermsofSections1and2aboveprovidedthatyouaccompanyitwiththecomplete correspondingmachinereadablesourcecode,whichmustbedistributedunderthetermsofSections1and2 aboveonamediumcustomarilyusedforsoftwareinterchange.

742

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Ifdistributionofobjectcodeismadebyofferingaccesstocopyfromadesignatedplace,thenofferingequivalent accesstocopythesourcecodefromthesameplacesatisfiestherequirementtodistributethesourcecode,even thoughthirdpartiesarenotcompelledtocopythesourcealongwiththeobjectcode. 5.AprogramthatcontainsnoderivativeofanyportionoftheLibrary,butisdesignedtoworkwiththeLibraryby beingcompiledorlinkedwithit,iscalleda"workthatusestheLibrary".Suchawork,inisolation,isnota derivativeworkoftheLibrary,andthereforefallsoutsidethescopeofthisLicense. However,linkinga"workthatusestheLibrary"withtheLibrarycreatesanexecutablethatisaderivativeofthe Library(becauseitcontainsportionsoftheLibrary),ratherthana"workthatusesthelibrary".Theexecutableis thereforecoveredbythisLicense.Section6statestermsfordistributionofsuchexecutables. Whena"workthatusestheLibrary"usesmaterialfromaheaderfilethatispartoftheLibrary,theobjectcodefor theworkmaybeaderivativeworkoftheLibraryeventhoughthesourcecodeisnot.Whetherthisistrueis especiallysignificantiftheworkcanbelinkedwithouttheLibrary,oriftheworkisitselfalibrary.Thethresholdfor thistobetrueisnotpreciselydefinedbylaw. Ifsuchanobjectfileusesonlynumericalparameters,datastructurelayoutsandaccessors,andsmallmacrosand smallinlinefunctions(tenlinesorlessinlength),thentheuseoftheobjectfileisunrestricted,regardlessof whetheritislegallyaderivativework.(ExecutablescontainingthisobjectcodeplusportionsoftheLibrarywillstill fallunderSection6.) Otherwise,iftheworkisaderivativeoftheLibrary,youmaydistributetheobjectcodefortheworkunderthe termsofSection6.AnyexecutablescontainingthatworkalsofallunderSection6,whetherornottheyarelinked directlywiththeLibraryitself. 6.AsanexceptiontotheSectionsabove,youmayalsocombineorlinka"workthatusestheLibrary"withthe LibrarytoproduceaworkcontainingportionsoftheLibrary,anddistributethatworkundertermsofyourchoice, providedthatthetermspermitmodificationoftheworkforthecustomer'sownuseandreverseengineeringfor debuggingsuchmodifications. YoumustgiveprominentnoticewitheachcopyoftheworkthattheLibraryisusedinitandthattheLibraryandits usearecoveredbythisLicense.YoumustsupplyacopyofthisLicense.Iftheworkduringexecutiondisplays copyrightnotices,youmustincludethecopyrightnoticefortheLibraryamongthem,aswellasareference directingtheusertothecopyofthisLicense.Also,youmustdooneofthesethings: *a)AccompanytheworkwiththecompletecorrespondingmachinereadablesourcecodefortheLibrary includingwhateverchangeswereusedinthework(whichmustbedistributedunderSections1and2above); and,iftheworkisanexecutablelinkedwiththeLibrary,withthecompletemachinereadable"workthatuses theLibrary",asobjectcodeand/orsourcecode,sothattheusercanmodifytheLibraryandthenrelinkto produceamodifiedexecutablecontainingthemodifiedLibrary.(Itisunderstoodthattheuserwhochanges thecontentsofdefinitionsfilesintheLibrarywillnotnecessarilybeabletorecompiletheapplicationtouse themodifieddefinitions.) *b)UseasuitablesharedlibrarymechanismforlinkingwiththeLibrary.Asuitablemechanismisonethat(1) usesatruntimeacopyofthelibraryalreadypresentontheuser'scomputersystem,ratherthancopying libraryfunctionsintotheexecutable,and(2)willoperateproperlywithamodifiedversionofthelibrary,if theuserinstallsone,aslongasthemodifiedversionisinterfacecompatiblewiththeversionthatthework wasmadewith. *c)Accompanytheworkwithawrittenoffer,validforatleastthreeyears,togivethesameuserthe materialsspecifiedinSubsection6a,above,forachargenomorethanthecostofperformingthis distribution. *d)Ifdistributionoftheworkismadebyofferingaccesstocopyfromadesignatedplace,offerequivalent accesstocopytheabovespecifiedmaterialsfromthesameplace. *e)Verifythattheuserhasalreadyreceivedacopyofthesematerialsorthatyouhavealreadysentthisuser acopy.

743

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Foranexecutable,therequiredformofthe"workthatusestheLibrary"mustincludeanydataandutility programsneededforreproducingtheexecutablefromit.However,asaspecialexception,thematerialstobe distributedneednotincludeanythingthatisnormallydistributed(ineithersourceorbinaryform)withthemajor components(compiler,kernel,andsoon)oftheoperatingsystemonwhichtheexecutableruns,unlessthat componentitselfaccompaniestheexecutable. Itmayhappenthatthisrequirementcontradictsthelicenserestrictionsofotherproprietarylibrariesthatdonot normallyaccompanytheoperatingsystem.SuchacontradictionmeansyoucannotuseboththemandtheLibrary togetherinanexecutablethatyoudistribute. 7.YoumayplacelibraryfacilitiesthatareaworkbasedontheLibrarysidebysideinasinglelibrarytogetherwith otherlibraryfacilitiesnotcoveredbythisLicense,anddistributesuchacombinedlibrary,providedthatthe separatedistributionoftheworkbasedontheLibraryandoftheotherlibraryfacilitiesisotherwisepermitted,and providedthatyoudothesetwothings: *a)AccompanythecombinedlibrarywithacopyofthesameworkbasedontheLibrary,uncombinedwith anyotherlibraryfacilities.ThismustbedistributedunderthetermsoftheSectionsabove. *b)GiveprominentnoticewiththecombinedlibraryofthefactthatpartofitisaworkbasedontheLibrary, andexplainingwheretofindtheaccompanyinguncombinedformofthesamework. 8.Youmaynotcopy,modify,sublicense,linkwith,ordistributetheLibraryexceptasexpresslyprovidedunderthis License.Anyattemptotherwisetocopy,modify,sublicense,linkwith,ordistributetheLibraryisvoid,andwill automaticallyterminateyourrightsunderthisLicense.However,partieswhohavereceivedcopies,orrights,from youunderthisLicensewillnothavetheirlicensesterminatedsolongassuchpartiesremaininfullcompliance. 9.YouarenotrequiredtoacceptthisLicense,sinceyouhavenotsignedit.However,nothingelsegrantsyou permissiontomodifyordistributetheLibraryoritsderivativeworks.Theseactionsareprohibitedbylawifyoudo notacceptthisLicense.Therefore,bymodifyingordistributingtheLibrary(oranyworkbasedontheLibrary),you indicateyouracceptanceofthisLicensetodoso,andallitstermsandconditionsforcopying,distributingor modifyingtheLibraryorworksbasedonit. 10.EachtimeyouredistributetheLibrary(oranyworkbasedontheLibrary),therecipientautomaticallyreceivesa licensefromtheoriginallicensortocopy,distribute,linkwithormodifytheLibrarysubjecttothesetermsand conditions.Youmaynotimposeanyfurtherrestrictionsontherecipients'exerciseoftherightsgrantedherein. YouarenotresponsibleforenforcingcompliancebythirdpartieswiththisLicense. 11.If,asaconsequenceofacourtjudgmentorallegationofpatentinfringementorforanyotherreason(not limitedtopatentissues),conditionsareimposedonyou(whetherbycourtorder,agreementorotherwise)that contradicttheconditionsofthisLicense,theydonotexcuseyoufromtheconditionsofthisLicense.Ifyoucannot distributesoastosatisfysimultaneouslyyourobligationsunderthisLicenseandanyotherpertinentobligations, thenasaconsequenceyoumaynotdistributetheLibraryatall.Forexample,ifapatentlicensewouldnotpermit royaltyfreeredistributionoftheLibrarybyallthosewhoreceivecopiesdirectlyorindirectlythroughyou,thenthe onlywayyoucouldsatisfybothitandthisLicensewouldbetorefrainentirelyfromdistributionoftheLibrary. Ifanyportionofthissectionisheldinvalidorunenforceableunderanyparticularcircumstance,thebalanceofthe sectionisintendedtoapply,andthesectionasawholeisintendedtoapplyinothercircumstances. Itisnotthepurposeofthissectiontoinduceyoutoinfringeanypatentsorotherpropertyrightclaimsorto contestvalidityofanysuchclaims;thissectionhasthesolepurposeofprotectingtheintegrityofthefreesoftware distributionsystemwhichisimplementedbypubliclicensepractices.Manypeoplehavemadegenerous contributionstothewiderangeofsoftwaredistributedthroughthatsysteminrelianceonconsistentapplication ofthatsystem;itisuptotheauthor/donortodecideifheorsheiswillingtodistributesoftwarethroughanyother systemandalicenseecannotimposethatchoice. ThissectionisintendedtomakethoroughlyclearwhatisbelievedtobeaconsequenceoftherestofthisLicense. 12.Ifthedistributionand/oruseoftheLibraryisrestrictedincertaincountrieseitherbypatentsorbycopyrighted interfaces,theoriginalcopyrightholderwhoplacestheLibraryunderthisLicensemayaddanexplicitgeographical distributionlimitationexcludingthosecountries,sothatdistributionispermittedonlyinoramongcountriesnot thusexcluded.Insuchcase,thisLicenseincorporatesthelimitationasifwritteninthebodyofthisLicense.

744

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

13.TheFreeSoftwareFoundationmaypublishrevisedand/ornewversionsoftheLesserGeneralPublicLicense fromtimetotime.Suchnewversionswillbesimilarinspirittothepresentversion,butmaydifferindetailto addressnewproblemsorconcerns. Eachversionisgivenadistinguishingversionnumber.IftheLibraryspecifiesaversionnumberofthisLicense whichappliestoitand"anylaterversion",youhavetheoptionoffollowingthetermsandconditionseitherofthat versionorofanylaterversionpublishedbytheFreeSoftwareFoundation.IftheLibrarydoesnotspecifyalicense versionnumber,youmaychooseanyversioneverpublishedbytheFreeSoftwareFoundation. 14.IfyouwishtoincorporatepartsoftheLibraryintootherfreeprogramswhosedistributionconditionsare incompatiblewiththese,writetotheauthortoaskforpermission.ForsoftwarewhichiscopyrightedbytheFree SoftwareFoundation,writetotheFreeSoftwareFoundation;wesometimesmakeexceptionsforthis.Our decisionwillbeguidedbythetwogoalsofpreservingthefreestatusofallderivativesofourfreesoftwareandof promotingthesharingandreuseofsoftwaregenerally. NOWARRANTY 15.BECAUSETHELIBRARYISLICENSEDFREEOFCHARGE,THEREISNOWARRANTYFORTHELIBRARY,TOTHE EXTENTPERMITTEDBYAPPLICABLELAW.EXCEPTWHENOTHERWISESTATEDINWRITINGTHECOPYRIGHT HOLDERSAND/OROTHERPARTIESPROVIDETHELIBRARY"ASIS"WITHOUTWARRANTYOFANYKIND,EITHER EXPRESSEDORIMPLIED,INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYAND FITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE.THEENTIRERISKASTOTHEQUALITYANDPERFORMANCEOFTHELIBRARY ISWITHYOU.SHOULDTHELIBRARYPROVEDEFECTIVE,YOUASSUMETHECOSTOFALLNECESSARYSERVICING, REPAIRORCORRECTION. 16.INNOEVENTUNLESSREQUIREDBYAPPLICABLELAWORAGREEDTOINWRITINGWILLANYCOPYRIGHT HOLDER,ORANYOTHERPARTYWHOMAYMODIFYAND/ORREDISTRIBUTETHELIBRARYASPERMITTEDABOVE, BELIABLETOYOUFORDAMAGES,INCLUDINGANYGENERAL,SPECIAL,INCIDENTALORCONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGESARISINGOUTOFTHEUSEORINABILITYTOUSETHELIBRARY(INCLUDINGBUTNOTLIMITEDTOLOSSOF DATAORDATABEINGRENDEREDINACCURATEORLOSSESSUSTAINEDBYYOUORTHIRDPARTIESORAFAILUREOF THELIBRARYTOOPERATEWITHANYOTHERSOFTWARE),EVENIFSUCHHOLDEROROTHERPARTYHASBEEN ADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGES. ENDOFTERMSANDCONDITIONS HowtoApplyTheseTermstoYourNewLibraries Ifyoudevelopanewlibrary,andyouwantittobeofthegreatestpossibleusetothepublic,werecommend makingitfreesoftwarethateveryonecanredistributeandchange.Youcandosobypermittingredistribution undertheseterms(or,alternatively,underthetermsoftheordinaryGeneralPublicLicense). Toapplytheseterms,attachthefollowingnoticestothelibrary.Itissafesttoattachthemtothestartofeach sourcefiletomosteffectivelyconveytheexclusionofwarranty;andeachfileshouldhaveatleastthe"copyright" lineandapointertowherethefullnoticeisfound. onelinetogivethelibrary'snameandanideaofwhatitdoes. Copyright(C)yearnameofauthor Thislibraryisfreesoftware;youcanredistributeitand/ormodifyitunderthetermsoftheGNULesserGeneral PublicLicenseaspublishedbytheFreeSoftwareFoundation;eitherversion2.1oftheLicense,or(atyouroption) anylaterversion. Thislibraryisdistributedinthehopethatitwillbeuseful,butWITHOUTANYWARRANTY;withouteventhe impliedwarrantyofMERCHANTABILITYorFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSE.SeetheGNULesserGeneral PublicLicenseformoredetails. YoushouldhavereceivedacopyoftheGNULesserGeneralPublicLicensealongwiththislibrary;ifnot,writeto theFreeSoftwareFoundation,Inc.,51FranklinStreet,FifthFloor,Boston,MA021101301USA Alsoaddinformationonhowtocontactyoubyelectronicandpapermail.

745

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Youshouldalsogetyouremployer(ifyouworkasaprogrammer)oryourschool,ifany,tosigna"copyright disclaimer"forthelibrary,ifnecessary.Hereisasample;alterthenames: Yoyodyne,Inc.,herebydisclaimsallcopyrightinterestin thelibrary`Frob'(alibraryfortweakingknobs)writtenbyJamesRandomHacker. signatureofTyCoon,1April1990 TyCoon,PresidentofVice That'sallthereistoit!

Packages That Use Apache Software License Version 1.1

ThefollowingfourpackagesusetheApacheSoftwareLicense,Version1.1,20012003,whosefulltextis providedunderApacheSoftwareLicenseVersion1.1. Log4j Version:1.2.12 Description:LogFramework SoftwareSite:http://logging.apache.org/log4j/1.2/index.html SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforLog4jareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquiredfrom Cambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedinthis document. Struts Version:1.1 Description:WebFramework SoftwareSite:http://www.apache.org/dist/jakarta/struts/binaries/jakartastruts1.1.zip http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/packages/infosystems/WWW/servers/apache/jakarta/struts/binaries/jakartastruts 1.1rc1.zip SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforStrutsareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquiredfrom Cambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedinthis document. Apache Version:2.0.47 Description:TheApacheHTTPServerprovidesasecure,efficientandextensibleserverthatprovidesHTTP servicesinsyncwiththecurrentHTTPstandards. SoftwareSite:http://www.apache.org/dist/httpd/ SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforApacheareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thisdocument. TomCat Version:4.1.27 Description:ApacheTomcatisanimplementationoftheJavaServletandJavaServerPagestechnologies.TheJava ServletandJavaServerPagesspecificationsaredevelopedundertheJavaCommunityProcess. SoftwareSite:http://tomcat.apache.org/download41.cgi SourceCode:ThesourcepackagesforTomCatareavailablefromtheoriginalsoftwaresite,ormaybeacquired fromCambium.ToobtainthesoftwarefromCambium,pleasecontactCambiumusingthemethodsdescribedin thisdocument.

746

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

ApacheSoftwareLicense Version1.1 Copyright(c)20012003AntContribproject.Allrightsreserved. Redistributionanduseinsourceandbinaryforms,withorwithoutmodification,arepermittedprovidedthatthe followingconditionsaremet: 1.Redistributionsofsourcecodemustretaintheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthefollowing disclaimer. 2.Redistributionsinbinaryformmustreproducetheabovecopyrightnotice,thislistofconditionsandthe followingdisclaimerinthedocumentationand/orothermaterialsprovidedwiththedistribution. 3.Theenduserdocumentationincludedwiththeredistribution,ifany,mustincludethefollowing acknowledgment: "ThisproductincludessoftwaredevelopedbytheAntContribproject (http://sourceforge.net/projects/antcontrib)."Alternately,thisacknowledgmentmayappearinthesoftware itself,ifandwhereversuchthirdpartyacknowledgmentsnormallyappear. 4.ThenameAntContribmustnotbeusedtoendorseorpromoteproductsderivedfromthissoftwarewithout priorwrittenpermission.Forwrittenpermission,pleasecontactantcontribdevelopers@lists.sourceforge.net. 5.Productsderivedfromthissoftwaremaynotbecalled"AntContrib"normay"AntContrib"appearintheir nameswithoutpriorwrittenpermissionoftheAntContribproject. THISSOFTWAREISPROVIDED``ASIS''ANDANYEXPRESSEDORIMPLIEDWARRANTIES,INCLUDING,BUTNOT LIMITEDTO,THEIMPLIEDWARRANTIESOFMERCHANTABILITYANDFITNESSFORAPARTICULARPURPOSEARE DISCLAIMED.INNOEVENTSHALLTHEANTCONTRIBPROJECTORITSCONTRIBUTORSBELIABLEFORANYDIRECT, INDIRECT,INCIDENTAL,SPECIAL,EXEMPLARY,ORCONSEQUENTIALDAMAGES(INCLUDING,BUTNOTLIMITEDTO, PROCUREMENTOFSUBSTITUTEGOODSORSERVICES;LOSSOFUSE,DATA,ORPROFITS;ORBUSINESS INTERRUPTION)HOWEVERCAUSEDANDONANYTHEORYOFLIABILITY,WHETHERINCONTRACT,STRICTLIABILITY, ORTORT(INCLUDINGNEGLIGENCEOROTHERWISE)ARISINGINANYWAYOUTOFTHEUSEOFTHISSOFTWARE, EVENIFADVISEDOFTHEPOSSIBILITYOFSUCHDAMAGE.

747

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Glossary

Alarm DeviceGroup EMS Link

Alarmsresultfromtrapsorotherevents,whicharedeterminedtorepresentaproblem withanetworkelement.Alarmsrequireattentionfromauser. Alistofdevicesthatcanbejointlyconfiguredorreportedupon. elementmanagementsystem Aconnectionbetweentwodevicesorsymbols.

LogicallinksareabstractparentchildrelationshipsthatWMcangraphically displayandthatgenerallyindicateadatapathbetweentwonetworkelements. Wirelesslinksarerealworldcommunicationslinksbetweendevices. Physicalmaplinksarelinesdrawnbetweentheiconsoftwodevicesinthe physicalmap.Thesearecolorcodedaccordingtothepresenceoflogicallinks betweenthedevicesandaccordingtoperformancedatathatWMhasgathered aboutthewirelesslinkbetweenthetwodevices.

ManagedObject

Thenetworkentity;usuallyaPMPaccesspointorsubscribermodule,oraPTPseries masterorslavedevice,butcanbeanIPsubnet,anSNMPagentwithinadevice,orany othernetworkabstractionorsubdivision. Thebasicunitofmanagementinformationthatiscompleteinitselfandrelatestoan occurrence,suchasdiscoveryofanelement,statusupdateofanelementorfailureinan element.Eventsformarepositoryofinformationforalltheoccurrencesinthesystem. RefertoManagedObject. Thebasicobjectusedforperformancedatacollection.Itcontainsthedetailssuchas whatdevicemustbecontacted,whatdatamustbecollected,andinwhattimeinterval. Thisdoesnotstorethecollecteddata.ThepollenginereadsthePolledDatadefinition andcollectsdatafromthenetworkdeviceaccordingtothatdefinition.Thisis alternativelyreferredtoasastatistic. TheprocessofcontactingtheSNMPagentofadeviceandcollectingdatafromthat device(forexample,foraspecificSNMPOID).

NetworkEvent

Object PolledData

Polling

Statuspollingsimplylistensforaresponsetodistinguishwhetherthedeviceis responsiveanddiscardstheresult. Performancedatapollinggathersinformationabouttheperformanceand behaviorofthedevice. Configurationdatapollinggathersinformationaboutthesettingsonthedevice.

Statistics

Performancedata,alsotermedPolledDatabecausetheobjectsthatstorethe configurationofhowperformancedatastatisticsarepolledarecalledPolledData objects.

749

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

StatusPolling

Processofpingingthedeviceanddeterminingitsstatesuchasup/downatregular intervals.IfStatusPollingyieldsnegativeresults(forexample,ifthedeviceisnot responding),provisionsaremadetoreporttheconditionthatrequiresattention. Minimumandmaximumlimitsforcollectedperformancedatastatistics.Ifacollected statisticvalueviolatesoneofitsdefinedthresholds,thenanevent(andperhapsasevere alarm)isgenerated.

Threshold

750

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Technical Support
ThemainmenuselectionHelpDiagnosticsprovidesalinktotheCustomerSupportToolbyopening theSupportToolOptionswindow.BeforeyoucontacttheCambiumsupportrepresentatives,itis typicallyadvisabletoruntheSupportToolandavoiddeletinganyofthefilesthatitgenerates.After yourunthetoolandattempttosolvetheproblembyusingthedocumentationandthe troubleshootingmethodsthatitsproceduresanddescriptionsimply,youcancontactyourdesignated representativeasindicatedinContactingSupportRepresentativesonPage760.

Running the Customer Support Tool

WMprovidesatoolforusersontheclientapplicationortheadministratorontheservertolaunch whentroubleexceedslocaldiagnosticefforts.Thistoolassemblesintooneormoreencryptablefiles mostoftheinformationthatSupportrepresentativesrequiretodiagnosetypicalproblems encounteredinWMoperations.Thetoolalsoallowstheoperatortosplitthefileto enabletransmittaloffilesthatthetooloutputsaslargerthan1.5MB. speeduptransmittaloffilesthatarebetween1and1.5MBinsize.

Options for Running the Support Tool

DependingonwhetherthetoolislaunchedfromtheclientapplicationortheWMserver,thedata mayinclude variousWMlogfiles. licensefilecontentsandusage,ifWMandLicenseManagerrunonthesamemachine. theplatformandenvironmentonwhichtheWMserveroperates. devicetemplates,includinganythatwerelocallycreatedormodified. WMconfiguration(allxml)files. installationlogs. theidentificationofallrunningprocesses. individualdevicedataforselecteddevices. additionalinformationthatyouvoluntarilyenterintheinterfacetothetool.

Ifthetoolislaunchedfromboththeclientandtheserver,thenthecompositeofthedatafilesthat thetoolproducescanincludealloftheabovelistedinformation.Bydefault,thetoolstoresthe outputinthefilesystemoftheserverdevice.

751

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Running the Tool from the Server

Whenrunfromtheserver(byexecutingC:\Cambium\WM\server\bin\SupportTool.bator /usr/local/cambium/WM/server/bin/SupportTool.sh),thetooldoesnotcollectinformation fromthedatabase.Typically,thisisrecommendedonlywhentheserverprocessisnotrunning.The resultingdataislimitedtoinformationabouttheenvironment,WMconfigurationfiles,andextra logs.However,theserveradministratorcanattachadditional,locallywrittenscriptsinVisualBasic, Perl,shell,andorSQLbyaddingtheirfilenamestoanexternalscriptslistintheserver.Thisis especiallyusefulunderthedirectionofaCambiumSupportrepresentative.

Running the Tool from the Client Application

Whenrunfromtheserver,thetoolcollectsinformationabouttheenvironmentandWM configurationfiles(thesameasifitwererunfromtheserver),butalsocollectsvariousWMlogfiles andrelevantinformationfromthedatabase,includingalarms.Typically,thisisrecommendedwhen theserverprocessisrunning. FrommainmenuoftheWMclientapplication,youcanlaunchthetoolineitheroftwoways, dependingontheresultsyouwant.Ifyouwanttobeabletonameandmanagetherunningofthe toolasataskandspecifyitsscopeandowner,thenyoushouldenterthetoolfromtheTask Scheduler. WhenyoulaunchtheSupportToolviatheHelpDiagnosticsselectionfromthemainmenuinthe WMclientapplication,thetoolassemblesavarietyofusefulinformationandformatsitinto individualfilesthatyoucan viewthelistoffilesandsavethemtothelocalclientdevice. usethetooltosendasemaileitherinstantaneouslyoratascheduledtimeanddate.

IfyouselectHelpDiagnosticsLaunchSupportToolfromthemainmenu,WMopenstheSupport ToolOptionswindow,whichpromptsyoutoindicatewhetheryouwanttolaunchthetoolorselect byuser(andpossiblymanageaswell)anygeneratedsupportfilesthathavebeenstoredontheWM serverforsharingwiththeTechnicalSupportstaff.AnexampleofthiswindowisshowninFigure467.

Figure 467: Support Tool Options window

Theradiobuttonsallowyoutoselectwhetherto launchthetool(seePopulatingtheFieldsoftheCustomerSupportToolWindowon Page753). view,slimthelistof,andlocallystoreordeletethefilesthattheSupportToolhasalready createdwhenitran(seeViewingandSavingFilesThatareUsefulforSupportonPage759).

752

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

IfyouselectRuntheSupportToolandclickOK,WMopensaTaskAttributeswindow.Examplesof thiswindowareshowninFigure468andinFigure470:CustomerSupportTooldialog,Devicestab withAddselectedonPage758.

Populating the Fields of the Customer Support Tool Window

General Information Tab
Figure 468: Customer Support Tool dialog, General Information tab

753

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

TheGeneralOptionssectionsallowsyoutoconfigurehowandwhenthetoolshouldsendemailthat transmitsresults.IntheEmailfield,typeinanappropriateaddressand/oraddotherrecipientsby firstcheckingtheSendMailoptioninthissection.Ifyouspecifymultiplerecipients,separatethe addressesbysemicolons.Whenyouaresatisfiedwiththestringoftherecipient(s),thenyoucan either moveontotheFileOptionssection,andthetoolwillautomaticallysendtheinformation thattechnicalsupportrequires,presumingthatSendMailischecked,whenevertheRun Nowbuttonisclicked. firstrecheckSaveforlater,andthetoolwillassemblethatinformationandstoreitinthe localfolderfromwhichyoucanlatersendit.Inthiscase,thetoolwillnotsenditforyou.

TheFileOptionssectionallowsyoutoconfigurehowthetoolshouldformattheresults.Ifa ReportFilealreadyexistsinthelocalfolder,andyouselectitusingthebrowsefunction(clickthe ellipsisbutton),thissetsupthetooltogatherthelatestdataintothatfilewheneveryou selectRunNow.So,thecontentsofthereportfilearedynamic.Ifyouwanttokeepasnapshotthat thetoolcannotoverwrite,movethefiletoadistinctivefilenameelsewhereinyourfilesystem Thissectionalsoallowsyoutooptionally selectSplitFiletobreakthedirectoryorfileintoseparatepieces,eachnotlargerthanthe numberofmegabytesthatyouthenenterintheMax.FileSize(inMB)dialogbox,to facilitatetransmittalofthefile.

important ........... It is recommended to split the report file if it is larger than 1.5 MB (or the server logs are larger than 5 MB). If the resulting file is larger than 1.5 MB and the Split File option is selected, then more than one file is created, each of which is smaller than 1.5 MB. If the report file that is generated is larger than 5 MB, then the tool throws an error and does not send the file via email.

selectEncrypttosecurethefilesuchthatitcanbeaccessedonlywiththepasswordthatyou thenentertwiceintothedialogboxesprovidedforthatpurpose.Ifyouselectthisoption, thenyoumustalsoseparatelysendthepasswordtotechnicalsupport.Withoutit,theywill beunabletoopenthereportfile.

TheSupportInformationLevelsectionallowsyoutoselectthetypeanddepthofinformationthatthe toolgathers.SelectionofLoworHighresultsinoneofthefollowinglevelsofdetailcollection:

754

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Table 90: Support Detail levels

Detail Level Low Detail Level High

Allofthecontentsthatthetoolassemblesfor DetailLevelLow,butalsoincludesallofthe contentsofthefollowingotherfilesinthe WMserverfilesystem.

allfilesthatareinthefollowing directories:
conf logs apache/logs apache/tomcat/logs conf/devices conf/devices/templates

thesubdirectoriesofthemib directory(forbroaddevice types) MIBsinthemibdirectory(for example,RFC,SNMP,HOST RESOURCES,BRIDGE,ATM,and PrinterMIBs) logsoftheWMserver installation theresultsofqueriesexecutedin predefinedscriptsontheWM server

allfilesofthefollowingtypes

Whentheinformationcollectionandassemblysucceeds,thesystemthrowssuccessmessagessimilar tothefollowing:

755

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Ifitfails,thesystemthrowsthefollowingtypesoferrors:
Error in saving file. null Some file(s) were unable to be saved successfully, some exceptions occurred.

Iftheseerrorsoccur,itistypicallybecausethereportfilethatwasgeneratedislargerthan5MBor becauseanerroroccurredintheWMserverasitgeneratedthereportfile. TheAdditionalInformationsectionprovidestheopportunitytobrowsetootherfiles (AdditionalFiles)thatthetoolshouldattachwhenitsendsemailtoCustomerSupportaswellastype anyexplanatoryremarksintotheCommentsdialogboxand,ifappropriatetodoso,modifythe TicketID.MakenoteofthisID.Thisisthenumberbywhichbothyouandtechnicalsupport personnelwillrefertothisinformationanddistinguishitfrompastandfuturesetsofinformation thataregeneratedfortechnicalsupport. ThenumberoffilesthatresultsfromtheSplitFilefunctionisthenumberofseparateemailsthatthe toolwillsend,eachwiththeTicketIDonthesubjectlineandyourCommentsinthemessagebody. Whenyouclickthe ellipsisbuttonassociatedwithAdditionalFiles,WMopensaChoosea Filewindow.AnexampleisshowninFigure469.

Figure 469: Choose a File window for additional files to send to Customer Support

756

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Thiswindow,withitsAddFilesbutton,allowsyoutoincludeanyfilefromtheclientdeviceinthe datatransmittaltotechnicalsupport.Unliketheotherfilesthatthetoolassembles,thesearenot overwrittenbylaterversionswhenRunNowisselected.Theseadditionalfilescanbeofanytype.For example,youmaysendamixofscreencaptures,performancecharts,andnotesofyourown observations.Afteryouhaveaddedfiles,youcanmarkonefileatatimeinthelistandclickthe RemoveFilesbuttontokeepthetoolfromincludingitinthetransmittal. TheReportFileisanencrypted.encfileoranunencrypted.zipfile(oranumberedsetofthesefile types,iftheSplitFileoptionwasselected).Thefile(s)containsthefollowingdirectoriesandfiles, mostofwhicharefromtheWMserver.Theadditional_filesdirectory(highlightedbelow)that theReportFileincludestheAdditionalFilesthatyouselectfromtheclientdevice.Theindex.html filecontainslinkstoallofthefiles,includingtheAdditionalFilesfromtheclient. Report file contents where WM server operates on Linux
/additional_files /Boot Information /config /Configuration Data /Devices /devicetemplate0 /Disk Filesystem Information /Environment Information /htmlresources /InstallationLog0 /JDBC Information /Kernel Information /License Status /LicenseFiles0 /logs /Mail Information /mibfiles0 /Miscellaneous Data /Network Configuration /Network Service Information /ODBC Configuration /OS Log Data /Process Information /RPM Information /Services Information /Tool Run Log bottomleftnav.html configuration.html devicetemplate.html index.html InstallationLog.html jdbc_drivers.html LicenseFiles.html log.html main.html mibfiles.html topleftnav.html

Windows

757

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

WhenyouarefinishedpopulatingthefieldsoftheGeneralInformationtab,clicktheDevicestab.

Devices Tab
Figure 470: Customer Support Tool dialog, Devices tab with Add selected

ToselectdevicegroupsfromwhosemembershiptoloaddevicesintotheAdd/RemoveDevicespanel ofthistab 1. 2. 3. 4. clicktheLoadFromGroupbutton. clicktohighlighttherowofanindividualdevicegroupintheDeviceGroupswindow. clicktheLoadbutton. repeatSteps1through3toloaddevicesfromanotherdevicegroup.

758

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Foranyloadeddevicewhosedatayoudonotwantincludedinthesupportfiles 1. 2. clicktohighlighttheindividualdevice(s). clicktheRemovebutton.

Toadddevicesbyindividualselection 1. 2. 3. clicktheAddbutton. clicktohighlighttheindividualdevicesintheAddDevicewindow. clicktheAddbuttontoloadthedevicesandtodismisstheAddDevicewindow.

Fortheremainingdevices,youmayneedtoprovidetheradiologinIDandpasswordsothatWMcan obtainthedataasHTMLpages.Forthesedevices 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. click,Ctrl+click,orShift+clicktohighlightdeviceswhoseloginIDandpasswordarein commonamongeachother. clicktheLoginID/Passwordbutton. completetheUpdateDeviceLoginID/Passwordform. clickOK. repeatSteps1through4foranyothers.

Execution
Whenyouarefinishedpopulatingthefieldsofbothtabs,selecteither RunNow,toinstantaneouslylaunchthedatacollectionandformatting. RunLater,toschedulethetaskofrunningthetool.

Viewing and Saving Files That are Useful for Support

note ............. It is generally advisable to run the Support Tool and avoid deleting any of the files that it generates.

IfyouselectHelpDiagnosticsLaunchSupportToolfromthemainmenu,WMopenstheSupport ToolOptionswindow,anexampleofwhichisshowninFigure467onPage752.Theradiobuttons allowyoutoselectwhetherto launchthetool(seeRunningtheCustomerSupportToolonPage751). view,slimthelistof,andlocallystoreordeletethefilesthattheSupportToolhasalready createdwhenitran.

759

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

IfyouthenselectGetsavedsupporttoolfilesandclickOK,WMopensaSavedSupportFileswindow. AnexampleofthiswindowisshowninFigure471.

Figure 471: Saved Support Files window

Inthiswindow,youcanchangetheuserfieldtoviewadifferentsetoffiles,deleteanyoldor unwantedfiles,andsaveanytoadirectoryontheclientdevice.

Contacting Support Representatives

YoucanobtainsupportforWirelessManagerfromanyorallofthefollowingsources: WirelessManagersetupguide,administrationguide,andreleasenotes. CambiumNetworkssupportwebpage:http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support. Thispageprovideslinkstoinformationonallproductsandtools,aswellasaccessto customersupportmaterialsandinteractivesupportforums.Someoftheseresourcesare restrictedtoregisteredusersandchannelpartners.

theCommunityForum.Visithttp://www.cambiumnetworks.com/forum/.

760

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

directcontactwithCambiumNetworksTechnicalSupport.Thiscontactisavailable7days aweek,24hoursaday.Tofindtheappropriatephonenumberbasedonyourcountryor region,visithttp://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/technical.php. atechnicalsupportcase,whichyoucanopenat http://www.cambiumnetworks.com/support/support_case.php.Thecasecapturesbasic informationaboutanswersyouareseekingortheproblemthatyournetworkis experiencingandprovidesthistothesupportteam,whoareavailable7daysaweek, 24hoursaday,andwillrespond.Theywillalsoprovideacasenumberbywhichyouand theycancontinuetotrackprogressonissuesthatrequiredeeperinvestigation.

761

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

Issue 4 August 2012

Index

A
Alarm .....................................................................749 AlarmCountPanel.................................................366 AlarmDetails .........................................................366 AlarmFilters ..........................................................527 AlarmHistory.........................................................366 AlarmViewer .........................................................366 Alarms....................................................................366 AlertAssignDialog...................................................366 Alerts .............................................482,505,531,542 Annotation.............................................................366 AnnotationandHistory .........................................366 AreaChart..............................................................386 AssignTo................................................................366 AssigningOperations .....................................484,486 AssigningUsers ......................................................460 AuditTrails.....................................452,455,456,477

DeletingUsers................................................451,461 Details ....................................................................104 DeviceDiscoveryOptions ......................................434 DeviceSpecificDiscovery ......................................423 DiscoveryConfigurator . 401,402,403,404,405,406, 407,409,410,411,412,413,416,417,418,419, 420,422,424,425,426,427,428,430,431,432, 433 DocumentConventions ...........................................45

E
EventDetails..........................................................347 EventFilters ...........................472,496,511,512,524 EventParsers ................. 472,496,501,502,509,512 EventViewer..........................................................347 Events ....................................................................347

F
Fewer .....................................................................347 Find ........................................................................347 FirstPage ...............................................................104

B
BarChart................................................................386 BroadcastMessage................................................683

C
Cannotplot[DataisStringtype] ...........................386 ClearAlarms...........................................................366 ClearGraph............................................................386 Clientsidesorting..................................................104 CollectedStatistics(P) ............................................386 CollectedGraphViewer...........................................386 ConfiguredCollection ............................................384 ConfiguringTrapParsers .......................................491 Container ...............................................................749 ContextSensitiveHelp ............................................45 CriticalAlarms........................................................366 CustomViewScopes..... 461,462,464,465,466,467, 537

G
Gateway.................................................................749 Graphs ...................................................................386

H
Help .........................................................................45 HistoricalPerformanceData..................................386 History ...................................................................366

I
InstallationGuide ....................................................45

L
LastPage................................................................104 LineChart...............................................................386 Link ........................................................................749 LogSettings............................................................696 LoggingConfiguration....................................696,700

D
DataCollection ..............................................546,573 DataCollectionDetails ..........................................384 DateRangeSettingincorrect.................................386 DeletingGroups.....................................................468 DeletingOperations...............................................488

763

Issue 4 August 2012

WM Release 4.0 User Guide

M
MajorAlarms .........................................................366 ManagedObject ....................................................749 ManagingOperations ............................................469 ManagingUsers .....................................................440 MapSymbol...........................................................749 Matchallofthefollowing......................................347 Matchanyofthefollowing....................................347 Merge ....................................................................366 MinorAlarms .........................................................366 More ......................................................................347

RuntimeAdministration ........................473,696,699

S
SaveToFile ............................................................347 SavingEvents .........................................................347 ScatterChart..........................................................386 SearchingAlarms ...................................................366 SearchingEvents....................................................347 SecurityManagement ...................................437,537 Sendtoallclient ....................................................683 SendtomyFEclientonly.......................................683 Serversidesorting.................................................104 severity ..................................................................366 SortingTableDetails..............................................104 Statistics.................................................................749 StatusPolling .........................................................749

N
NavigatingThroughtheTable ...............................104 NetworkEvents .............................................347,749 NextPage...............................................................104 Nodataavailable ...................................................386 Node ......................................................................749

T
Table ......................................................................104 TableViewOperations ..........................................104 Threshold...............................................................749 Thresholds .... 545,556,563,566,573,582,584,586, 590 Thresholds .............................................................384 TrapParsers .. 481,491,492,499,500,501,508,510, 523,527

O
Object ....................................................................749

P
PageLength ...........................................................104 PickUp ...................................................................366 PlotChart...............................................................386 PolledData ............................................................749 PollingProperties ..................................................749 PreviousPage ........................................................104 Print .......................................................................347 PrintingEvents.......................................................347 ProductSupport ......................................................45 ProtocolConfiguration ..........................................412

U
UnPick....................................................................366 Update ...................................................................366 UserPassword .......................................................450 UserProfile ....................................447,448,449,477

V
Viewhistory...........................................................366 ViewingAlarms ......................................................366

R
RangeofTableDetails ...........................................104 RearrangingandResizingColumns .....................104 Refresh...................................................................104 RelatedAlarms.......................................................347 RelatedEvents .......................................................366 Reports ..................................................................386 RowDetails ............................................................104

W
WarningAlarms .....................................................366

X
XYChart ................................................................386

764